§rom f$e JLtfirarg of
(profceeor $)enrg (Breen
Q$equeaf0efc fig 0tm fo
ffie fctfirarg of
(prtncefon £0eofogtcaf ^etrttnarg
TK& G(o
.W 14-
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2016
https://archive.org/details/introductiontogr00wils_1
A uev (r.
AN
INTRODUCTION TO THE GRAMMAR
OF THE
SANSKRIT LANGUAGE,
FOR THE USE OF
EARLY STUDENTS.
BY
II. H. WILSON, M. A. F.R.S. &c. &c.
BODEN PROFESSOR OF SANSKRIT IN TIIE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD.
' SECOND EDITION.
LONDON,
PUBLISHED BY J. MADDEN AND CO.,
LEADENHALL STREET.
1847.
ft
- •
Oxford, Prnited by T. Combe, Print?r to the University.
PREFACE.
The design of the present Grammar of the Sanskrit
Language has been suggested by the experience which
I have now had in teaching the language, and by the
want which I have repeatedly felt of some such ele-
mentary work as that which I have here attempted to
compile.
Of the Sanskrit Grammars published in Calcutta, the
works ’of Mr. Colebrooke, Dr. Carey, and Mr. Forster
are^too voluminous and difficult for beginners. The
Grammar of Mr. Yates is better adapted to such a class
of students, but it is not readily procurable in this
country. The Grammar of Professor Bopp, being com-
posed in German and in Latin, is not universally accept-
able to English students : and the only Grammar within
their reach, therefore, has been that of Sir C. Wilkins.
This work, however admirable in many respects, is
exceptionable in some parts of its arrangement, and is
inconvenient in use from its extent; it is also growing
scarce. A new Grammar, therefore, on a somewhat
different plan, had become necessary ; and as I found no
one disposed to engage in its preparation, I have thought
it incumbent upon me to undertake the task.
The structure of a highly elaborated form of speech,
such as is Sanskrit, abounding with grammatical inflex-
ions, cannot be explained with that brevity of which more
simply constituted languages permit : much cannot be
described in a very few phrases. The present work has
exceeded the limits which I originally contemplated ; but
a 2
IV
PREFACE.
I found it impossible to be more concise, without being
obscure, or without omitting something that was essen-
tial. As the extent of the book, however, is in great
part attributable to the multiplication of examples, rather
than of rules, it will be useful for occasional reference,
without being cumbrous to the memory of the student.
I have endeavoured to make reference easy, by the head-
ings of the pages and other supplementary means.
The first topic of all Sanskrit Grammars is necessarily
the euphonic combination of concurrent letters, the ana-
lysis of which must be performed before the words can
be separated and read. In the chapter upon the com-
bination of letters, or Sandhi, as it is termed, I have
rather added to, than diminished, the number of the
rules which are to be found in the Grammar 'of Sir
C. Wilkins : but, on the other hand, I have not imitated
Professor Bopp in the copiousness with which he has
explained the changes, as, however serviceable the rules
which he has assembled with singular industry and
correctness, they are not in all cases confined to modi-
fications of a euphonic character : they comprise many
that occur as the consequence of verbal or nominal
inflexion : and although a knowledge of them will no
doubt facilitate the student’s subsequent acquirement of
the principles of declension and conjugation, I have not
found him content to be detained so long upon what
appears to him to be but the threshold of the edifice,
into the interior of which he is eager to enter.
The general outline of the chapter on Declension is in
all essential respects the same as that followed in the
Grammars of Wilkins and Bopp ; but I have thought it
advisable to put more prominently forward than they
have done the scheme of technical terminations, devised
by native grammarians for the construction of the cases
of a noun ; as, notwithstanding the substitutions which
PREFACE.
v
they partially undergo, they are applicable in all nouns
to a considerable portion of the cases, and in some nouns
to all. They are easily acquired, and so are their sub-
stitutes ; and familiarity with them once attained, the
subject of Declension, however complicated it may ap-
pear, becomes exceedingly simple, and is mastered with
facility.
It is in the chapter on Conjugation that I have
departed most widely from the course pursued by my
European predecessors. Professor Bopp has followed
in the main the example set by Sir C. Wilkins, of exem-
plifying, under the head of each class or conjugation,
only those tenses of the verb to which the conjugational
characteristics are confined ; and of illustrating the
remaining tenses of verbs in general in one collective
division, under the head of each several tense. I have
found this arrangement peculiarly embarrassing to be-
ginners. An entire verb is nowhere presented to them ;
and although the whole of the inflexions of most of
those of which the conjugational tenses are exhibited
are to be found in the Grammar, yet they call only be
collected by a diligent and protracted search. It rarely
happens that the young student is not disheartened by
the labour thus imposed upon him, and a competent
knowledge of the conjugation of Sanskrit verbs is in
consequence comparatively seldom acquired. In the
hope of removing some of the difficulties inherent in
the subject, I have brought the several tenses of the verb
together, and explained their formation in consecutive
order. I have then detailed an entire verb in its differ-
ent voices and derivative forms : and finally, under the
head of each conjugation, I have given complete para-
digms of a number of the most useful verbs, arranged
in alphabetical succession, in the several conjugations to
which they respectively belong. An example of this
VI
PREFACE.
classification of the verbs was set by Mr. Colebrooke.
In the first volume of bis Grammar, the only one pub-
lished, be lias assembled all the verbs of the first conjuga-
tion, with paradigms more or less complete. The limits
of the present work rendered it impossible to represent
all the verbs of each conjugation, but I have endeavoured
to make such a selection as comprehends those which
are of most frequent occurrence, or anomalous construc-
tion. The forms are chiefly taken from the native
Grammar, the Siddhanta Kaumudi, and from a MS.
collection of verbs I bad compiled in India. The first
part only of Mr. Westergaard’s very valuable work,
‘ Radices Lingual Sanscritse,’ bad reached me before my
collection was completed, or it would have saved me
some labour. The usefulness of the series will have been
materially enhanced by the alphabetical Index to all the
verbs specified, which will be found at the end of the
volume, and for the preparation of which I am indebted
to the promptly tendered assistance of Professor Johnson,
whom I have also to thank for the careful revision of
the proof sheets, with exception of those of the last
hundred pages, and for the correction of many errors,
ascribable to typographic inaccuracy, or to my own
inadvertencies.
The chapter on Derivation does not attempt to follow
the detail with which the subject is illustrated in the
Grammar of Sir C. Wilkins. The same copiousness was
no longer necessary, as my Dictionary, however incom-
plete, offers many of the same examples, and sufficiently
exhibits the principles of etymological developcment.
By the alphabetical arrangement, however, of the tech-
nical affixes employed in eliminating derivative from
primitive words, a plan adopted from the example of
Professor Bopp, reference to any particular form of
derivatives will have been facilitated, and the process
PREFACE.
vii
of their developement, perhaps, have been rendered more
intelligible.
The formation of compound words is described much
in the same manner, but with some slight difference of
arrangement, as by Sir C. Wilkins. In the succeeding
chapter on Syntax, also, I have followed much the same
course, being guided, as he Mas, by the authority of
native grammarians, although appealing to different
Morks, and endeavouring to illustrate the rules by more
diversified examples. The subject, hoMrever, is yet but
imperfectly investigated. The native authorities restrict
their remarks to the application of the cases of the
nouns, and the tenses of the verbs ; and to have supplied
their deficiencies M ould have demanded a longer period,
and ampler space, than were compatible with the plan
and purposes of the present publication. My guides
have been principally the Siddhanta Kaumudi and the
poem of BhaVti, but I have drawn examples also from
other printed Sanskrit books.
The Prosody of Sanskrit has been much more suc-
cessfully illustrated than its Syntax ; and in the Dis-
sertation of Mr. Colebrooke, in the tenth volume of the
Asiatic Researches, and in the remarks and annotations
of various continental scholars and critics upon the me-
tres prevailing in the Sanskrit Morks which they have
edited, abundant materials exist for a comprehensive
treatise upon the laM S of Sanskrit metre. In the chapter
upon the subject which I have added to the Grammar,
nothing more has been intended than a brief explanation
of the fundamental principles by which poetical metre
is regulated, and an exemplification of a feM’ of its most
frequently recurring and popular varieties.
As the especial object of the present work is the
introduction of the juvenile student to an elementary
knoM ledge of the Sanskrit language, I have but rarely
PREFACE.
viii
adverted to the affinities which connect it with other
languages ; and in the few allusions which I have ad-
mitted, I have purposed rather to intimate that such
affinities exist, than to explain their nature, or inquire
into their origin or extent. The more advanced student,
who ma)T take an interest in the investigation, will find
in the writings of different continental scholars and
grammarians, and especially in the Comparative Gram-
mar of Professor Bopp, numerous and undeniable proofs
of the close connexion which subsists between the sacred
language of the Hindus and the languages of ancient
Greece and Rome, as well as those of the Celtic, Teutonic,
and Sclavonic nations.
It were superfluous in the present day to offer any
observations upon the value and interest of Sanskrit
literature. The study constitutes an era in the branch
of intellectual inquiry just referred to, and has given
an entirely new character to philology. The principles
of etymological affinity have been placed upon secure
grounds, and the history of languages, and through them
the history of man, has received novel and important
elucidation. Nor is this the only service which it has
rendered to general literature. The history of philosophy
and science is also largely indebted to it ; and in the
civil and religious codes which it has laid open to our
knowledge, and in the mythological and legendary tradi-
tions, and the dramatic and heroic poems, which it offers
to our curiosity, it presents a scries of new, interesting,
and instructive pictures of society, in which the features
of a highly artificial, but original civilization arc singu-
larly blended with the characteristics of primitive man-
ners and archaic institutions. The history of mankind
can be but imperfectly appreciated without some ac-
quaintance with the literature of the Hindus.
It is, however, to the educated youth whose manhood
PREFACE.
IX
is to be spent in India, and who is there destined to
discharge high duties, and sustain heavy responsibilities
— who is to execute the offices of civilized government
over millions of subject Hindus, and to make that
government a blessing, not a curse, to India — a glory,
not a shame, to Britain ; — it is to him that the study of
Sanskrit commends itself, by considerations of peculiar
utility and importance.
A careful examination of the different dialects which
are spoken in various parts of India is yet to be effected ;
but enough is known to admit of their being distin-
guished as belonging to two great families, that of India
proper, and that of the Dakhin. Of the former, the
members are, as far as we are familiar with them, recog-
nised as Sanskrit. They have undergone great changes ;
have simplified their grammatical structure; have suffered
in a greater or lesser degree admixture and adulteration
from foreign words. They probably also comprehend
a small portion of a primitive, unpolished, and scanty
speech, the relics of a period prior to civilization : but
in the names of things of the most ordinary observation,
in terms for the functions of life, as well as the relations
of society, as much as in those words which are the
offspring of civilization, and which spring from science,
philosophy, law, and religion, they are almost wholly
dependent upon Sanskrit ; a knowledge of which con-
sequently places the members of this family, Bengali,
Hindi, Panjabi, Guzerati, Marhatha, and others, almost
without effort within the power of any one to whom it
may become a duty to acquire either or all of them.
In the south of India the case is somewhat different.
Cultivated languages of local origin are there inet with,
largely supplied with words which are not of Sanskrit
origin. There, however, as in the north, the introduction
of Sanskrit was the precursor of civilization, and deeply
b
X
PREFACE.
impressed it with its own peculiarities. The spoken
languages were cultivated in imitation and rivalry, and
but partially aspired to an independent literature. The
principal compositions in Tamil, Telugu, Canara, and
Malayalam, are translations or paraphrases from Sanskrit
works, and largely borrow the phraseology of their ori-
ginals : and hence so large a proportion of the language
of education and of society is Sanskrit, that a knowledge
of it is absolutely essential to a correct understanding of
the spoken dialects of the peninsula.
There is, however, a higher point of view from which
the advantages to the servants of the East India Com-
pany in India of a knowledge of Sanskrit are to be
contemplated, than the aid which it is calculated to
afford them in their executive functions. It will not
only enable them to understand the uttered words of
those with whom they hold official intercourse ; it will
not only teach them to interpret the language of repre-
sentation or complaint, or to express the decrees of
justice, or the commands of power ; — it will enable
them to understand the people, and to be understood
by them. The popular prejudices of the Hindus, their
daily observances, their occupations, their amusements,
their domestic and social relations, their local legends,
their national traditions, their mythological fables, their
metaphysical abstractions, their religious worship, all
spring from, and are perpetuated by, the Sanskrit lan-
guage. To know a people, these things must be known.
Without such knowledge, revenue may be raised, justice
may be administered, the outward shows and forms of
orderly government may be maintained ; but no influ-
ence with the people will be enjoyed, no claim to their
confidence or attachment will be established, no affection
will be either felt or inspired, and neither the disposition
nor the ability to work any great or permanent improve-
PREFACE.
xi
meat in the feelings, opinions, or practices of the country
■will be attained. It fortunately happens, it is true, that
much of this indispensable information may now be ac-
quired through the English language, in consequence of
the valuable translations and dissertations of various of
the Company’s most distinguished servants ; but know-
ledge from the fountain head is more precise and effective
than when gleaned from subordinate, and not always
pure or profound, rivulets : and in proportion as it is
effective and precise, will be the respect and trust of
the native population, the influence and power of their
English masters.
ADVERTISEMENT TO THE SECOND EDITION.
In preparing the present Edition, the only material
alterations which I have thought it advisable to make,
are the condensation of the general rules regarding the
inflexions of the verbs, or the principles of conjugation,
and their insertion among the preliminary rules of all
the conjugations, instead of the place which they for-
merly occupied among the introductory rules of the
second conjugation. They will now, it is hoped, be
more commodiously referred to. I have also made some
additions of minor importance to the paradigms of the
verbs. In this, as well as in the correction of the errors
of the text, I have again to acknowledge the kind assist-
ance of Professor Johnson.
The growing attention which has been lately paid, on
the continent especially, to the literature of the Vedas,
has induced me to think that a specification of some of
the principal peculiarities of construction which are met
with in those works might be of service. The illustra-
tions are those which are given by the original Gram-
b 2
ADVERTISEMENT.
xii
marians. The examples are cited by them without any
references, and their signification could scarcely be ren-
dered with any confidence without verifying them in the
passages where they occur, and without adverting to the
interpretation of a commentary ; a task of no ordinary
trouble in the absence of every thing like an index. I
have been enabled, however, by my own researches, and
by the valuable help of Dr. Max Muller, to verify a
considerable number of the passages, and to supply the
recognised sense. The rest are open to correction. In
a few more years we may expect to read the texts of
the Vedas with as much certainty as those of any other
Sanskrit compositions.
May 5, 1847.
CONTENTS.
Chap. I. Letters P. 1
Pronunciation 4
Classification 6
Chap. II. Sandhi — Combination of letters .... 8
Sect. 1. Conjunction of vowels 8
Sect. 2. Conjunction of consonants 16
Sect. 3. Changes of Yisarga 23
Chap. III. Declension 28
General rules 28
Sect. 1. Nouns in vowels 30
Cl. 1. Nouns ending in and ^STT .... 30
Cl. 2. Nouns ending in ^ and 7 .... 34
Cl. 3. Nouns ending in f and ^ .... 38
Cl. 4. Nouns ending in of, . . . 44
Cl. 5. Nouns ending in *7 46
Cl. 6. Nouns ending in ^ 47
Cl. 7. Nouns ending in 48
Cl. 8. Nouns ending in ^ 48
Sect. 2. Nouns ending in consonants .... 49
Cl. 1. Nouns ending in cs, *?r, *T, xi . . . 50
Cl. 2. Nouns ending in % • . . 50
Cl. 3. Nouns ending in z, 7, 'S, <? . . . . 55
Cl. 4. Nouns ending in w, V . • . 55
Cl. 5. Nouns ending in tj, ■g, v? . . . 60
Cl. 6. Nouns ending in if, »T, '5T, H . • 60
Nouns in 61
\
Nouns in 64
Cl. 7. Nouns ending in ^ . . . 66
Cl. 8. Nouns ending in ^t, ■g, . . . . 66
Cl. 9. Nouns ending in f 72
Sect. 3. Adjectives 75
Sect. 4. Pronouns and pronominal nouns ... 79
Sect. 5. Numerals 86
Ordinals 90
XIV
CONTENTS.
Chap. IV. Indeclinables 92
Adverbs 93
Prepositions 98
Conjunctions 103
Interjections 103
Expletives 104
Particles 104
Chap. V. Conjugation 105
Sect. 1. Roots and indicatory letters . . . . 105
Sect. 2. Classes of verbs 109
Sect. 3. Moods and tenses 112
Sect. 4. Voices 115
Sect. 5. Numbers and persons 116
General principles of conjugation . . 1x7
, Of the augment ^ 135
Sect. 6. Formation of the verb 14 1
Passive voice 143
Sect. 7. Derivative verbs 145
Causals 146
Desideratives 149
Frequentatives 151
Ditto inserting 152
Ditto rejecting 153
Impersonals 161
Nominals 161
Sect. 8. Conjugations.
First conjugation 163
Second 204
Third 221
Fourth 227
Fifth 240
Sixth 245
Seventh 252
Eighth 237
Ninth 260
Tenth 267
Changes of voices 276
Chap. VI. Derivation 283
Sect. 1. Verbal derivatives 283
Infinitive 286
Participles 287
CONTENTS.
xv
Present participles 287
Past participles 289
Participles of the second praeterite . . 289
Indefinite past participles 290
Future participles active 296
Ditto passive or neuter 297
Indeclinable participles 303
Adverbial participles 307
Sect. 2. Verbal nouns 308
Sect. 3. Nominal derivatives 328
Cl. 1. Miscellaneous affixes 330
Cl. 2. Possessives 343
Cl. 3. Degrees of comparison; pronominals ;
numerals 347
Cl. 4. Indeclinables 349
Chap. VII. Compound words 353
Sect. 1. Dwandwa compounds 355
Sect. 2. Tatpurusha compounds 356
Karmmadharaya Tatpurusha compounds . 360
Dwigu Tatpurusha compounds . . . 362
Tatpurusha comp, with particles and prep. 363
Sect. 3. Bahuvrfhi compounds 365
Sect. 4. Avyayi-bhava or indeclinable compounds 371
Sect. 5. General rules 375
Chap. VIII. Syntax 377
Sect. 1. Nouns 379
Sect. 2. Adjectives 403
Sect. 3. Pronouns 405
Sect. 4. Indeclinables 407
Sect. 5. Verbs 410
Sect. 6. Derivative verbs 424
Sect. 7. Participles 426
Chap. IX. Prosody 432
Sect. 1. General rules 432
Sect. 2. Varna-vritta class of metres .... 435
Sect. 3. Gana-vritta class of metres .... 444
Sect. 4. Matrachhandas class of metres . . . 446
Supplementary Chapter. On the grammar of the
' Vedas 449
SANSKRIT ALPHABET.
Initial. Medial. Equivalent and power.
a,
a5 in America.
^TT T
&
— casa (Italian).
^ f
i
— chi —
I t
/
l
— cosi —
^ o
u
— furore —
^ CS
/
u
— fui —
c
ri
— ricco —
^ *
ri
— riso —
lri
-
lri
e
— che —
ai
— mai —
•N
^ST T
0
— cosa —
T
au
— paura —
an
— (ang)
W- :
ah
k, as
in king.
kh -
- khan.
*T
g -
- gun-
gh -
- afghan.
t
n —
- sing.
ch —
- church.
It
chh
j -
- jet.
jh
Varieties
: ^ a
, ^ ri, r\ 1, tl e, n
z
z
z
rT
*
V
*
xi
T{
XI
T
x|
&
Equivalent and power.
n, as in singe.
't — true.
'th
d — dim.
ah
n — none,
t — tongue,
th
d — den.
dh
n — not.
p — point,
ph
b — bind,
bh — abhor,
m — man.
y — young,
r — rain.
1 — lion.
— voice.
— session
— shun.
v
s
sh
s
h
lr
— son.
— house.
Numerals: ^ ^ $ 8 M
1 2 3 4 5
jh, nr n, ^ ru, f or s, ru.
^ S t Q.
6 7 8 9 10
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
CHAPTER I.
LETTERS.
The Sanskrit language is written in different parts of India
in the characters which are in use for the spoken dialects ;
but the alphabet which is regarded as most appropriate to it,
and from which the local alphabets are derived, is that which
is termed Nagari or Devanagari, the alphabet of * the city,’
or of ‘ the city of the gods,’ being a derivative from Nagara,
‘ a city,’ compounded in the second form with Deva, ‘ deus,’
* a god.’ It appears to have undergone various modifications
from a period of remote antiquity down to the seventh or
eighth century, when the letters assumed the form in which
they now occur.
As usually enumerated, the Nagari alphabet comprises forty-
seven letters, the long vowels being considered distinct from
the short ; the vowels are thus fourteen : the consonants,
among which the aspirated are distinguished from the corre-
sponding unaspirated letters, are thirty-three. The consonants
are classified according to the organ chiefly concerned in their
articulation ; and in order to effect their utterance, the short
vowel ‘ a’ is attached to their respective sounds.
B
0
LETTERS.
Vowels.
’SI a, ^TT a, ^ i, f 1, ? u, 'Si u, ^ ri, ^ ri, <? lri, c£ In,
t? e, ^ ai, 'sft o, ^ au.
Gutturals,
Palatals,
Cerebrals,
Dentals,
Labials.
na.
\
Consonants.
ofi ka, Tjf kha, 7T ga, gha, T n;
^ cha, "5 cbha, IT ja, *R.jha, v na
Z (a, Z ih.a, g da, z dha, TU xia.
W ta, tha, z. da, V dha,
W v\n W v\hn r» n \T Kh n 1
j j ^ 7 * 7
Labials, 17 pa, tfi pha, ^ ba, vr bha,
Semivowels, ya, t. ra, H la, ^ va.
Sibilants and asnirate. ttt sa. w sha. W s
na.
t, ma.
To these are to be added two signs, which are occasionally
attached to vowels, termed Anuswara and Yisarga. The first
is a dot over and after a letter ; the second consists of two
dots after it. The first denotes a slight nasal ; the second, a
soft aspirate ; as, ^an (ang), ’STC ah. Another additional
character is 3E>, with a sound partaking of *1’ and cr/ but it is
peculiar to the Vedas. Some lists add 'Sf ksha and $r jna, but
these are compounds ; the first of oR ka and ^ sha, and the
second of *T ja and >T na. The first is sometimes expressed
in English by ‘ x.’
In designating a letter, the word cfiR kara is added to it ;
as, a-kara, the letter ‘a;’ ka-kara, the letter
‘ k,’ &c.
When a vowel is the initial of a word, it retains the form
above given. When it follows a consonant, or occurs as a
medial or final, it assumes a different form, which is written
before or after, above or below, the consonant with which it
is associated ; with exception of ‘ a,’ which, as a medial or
final, is always left unwritten, being understood to be combined
with the consonant, and articulated with it, as in the above
alphabet, unless the consonant be final, which is denoted by a
COMPOUND LETTERS.
3
mark at its foot, a Virama or 4 rest,’ as SR k ; or unless it be
conjoined with another consonant, as below. The forms of
the vowels as medials and finals are,
T a, f i, T f, 0 u, ^u, c ri, ^ ri, ^ lri, ^ In,
*N «CS • "V
e, ai, to, t au :
or in combination, ak, ?T3fi aka, ^TToRT aka, ^f3R iki, iki,
uku, '3T5i uku, ^f3i rikri, rikri, lriklri, 7%*, lriklri,
eke, iHfi aikai, oko, aukau, ^T3R akan, ^Tor: akah.
When two or more consonants come together, without any
intermediate vowel, they are combined into one compound
consonant — in which in general the component members may
be recognised without much difficulty — one consonant being
subjoined to the other, as in akka, 'sre achcha, where the
transverse line of the lower is omitted ; or one consonant
following the other, as agga, ’JTtjT ajja, where the per-
pendicular line of the first of the two is rejected. In some
cases the elements of the combination are not so obvious.
The letters most frequently recurring in conjunction with pre-
ceding consonants are ji va and T ra. The first is easily
discernible in
kya, vn chya, w tya, TS dya, xg pya, mya, &c. :
the second is usually designated by a short transverse stroke
at the foot of the letter or letters ; as,
■g; or ^ kra, tj gra, g1 or ■g tra, ^ dra, u pra, cjq1 krya.
■t
When t precedes a consonant, it is placed at the top of it in
the shape of a crescent ; as, # rka in wfi arka, ‘ the sun or
th rmma in vrrt dharmma, 4 duty.’
The difficulties from this source soon disappear with prac-
tice. Some of the most useful combinations are subjoined.
It may be also here observed, that some of the single letters
may be written in a different manner, of which examples are
given at the foot of the Table at the head of this chapter.
B 2
4
LETTERS.
Compound
consonants.
3 kka
^ikta
sRkna
gg kma
3 kwa
3 ktwa
ktrya
Ef ksha
’R kshya
FT kshwa
RT khva
Ugra
ST grya
U ghna
tir ghma
U nka
7? nga
If ngha
f nghra
■R chcha
chchha
■^JT chma
chhra
^ jja
Wjya
R jra
Tf jwa
jjha
R ncha
W nja
? ffa
3g {hya
clhra
7R n{a
7J3 nfha
73 ncla
R3 ndha
TOT hna
gg hya
UT nwa
Tgi tka
g tta
"91 ttya
R ttra
^tna
ut tma
?g tmva
R trya
R twa
iRT tsa
TrS tsna
WJ tsya
S dga
1 dgha
j? dda
H ddha
jg ddhya
^ dna
s dba
^ dbha
■g dbhya
R dma
si dya
dra
IT dwa
HI dwya
U dhna
WT dhma
tg dhwa
FT nta
Fg ntya
R ntra
nda
•rT ndra
Rj ndha
vy ndhra
■g nna
g pta
R pna
tR ppa
R7 pma
3? pla
xg pwa
RT psa
bja
■3J? bbha
vg bhva
R bhwa
g mna
jr mpa
tft mma
R? msa
lpa
FR lma
xg vya
Fj scha
schya
sna
*7 sra
xg swa
/ !
ssa
? sh{a
FT shfya
£ shfra
li?g shfrya
gn shna
ur shma
Ri ska
7FT skha
FT sta
stra
Fg stha
R sna
JR spa
FRi spha
h? sma
RI smya
Fg sya
JT sra
R swa
g hna
FT hma
hya
1 hra
£ hla
gr hwa.
PRONUNCIATION.
Few observations are required regarding the pronunciation
of the letters of the Sanskrit alphabet. As a general rule, the
vowels are to be sounded like those of the Italian alphabet,
except the first, the short * a,' which has the obscure sound
of that letter in such English verbs as ‘ adorn,’ ‘ adore,’ or in
the word ‘ America V The vowels ri and lri differ not in
* This is the only cause of embarrassment in the system here followed of
expressing Sanskrit words in English characters. It is difficult to our
practice to pronounce ‘ban’ as if it was written ‘bun;’ as in Sanskrit,
Bandhana, ‘ binding,’ is to be pronounced Bundhunu ; but ‘ u’ is necessarily
restricted to its proper office, as in Italian, ‘fui,’ ‘furore;’ or in English,
‘ full,’ ‘ bull,’ and the like.
PRONUNCIATION.
5
sound from the syllables so compounded. They take their
place among vowels as subject to euphonic changes, of which
as syllables they would not be susceptible. The consonants
are in general pronounced as in English, and we have, it may
be suspected, several of the sounds for which the Sanskrit
alphabet has provided distinct signs, but of which signs are
wanting with us. This seems to be the case with the nasals
and the cerebrals. We write but one 4 n,’ but we vary its
articulation, according to the consonants it precedes, as a gut-
tural, palatal, cerebral, and dental, in such words as 4 conquer,’
‘ singe,’ 4 none,’ and 4 content.’ So we write but one 4 t’ and
one ‘ d,’ but their sounds differ in such words as ‘ trumpet’
and ‘ tongue,’ £ drain’ and 4 den in the first of which they are
cerebrals, in the second dentals. The term 4 cerebral' has been
adopted to express the Sanskrit Murddhanya, from Murddhan
the head,’ as these letters are articulated by touching
the palate with the tongue farther back in the mouth than is
practised in other articulations. The v when corqpounded
with another consonant is pronounced and written 4 w,’ as in
dwi, 4 two.’ Of the three sibilants, the first 4 s’ is less
decidedly 4 sh’ than the second, as in our 4 ss’ in 4 session;’ it is
a palatal letter : t? sha is a cerebral, as in 4 shore :’ and is a
dental sibilant, as in 4 sun.’ Anuswara is a slight nasal, rather
stronger than the 4 n’ of the French 4 bon.’ The term Anuswara
signifies 4 post- vocal,’ and accordingly the sign always follows a
vowel, and closes a syllable, whether in the middle or at the end
of a word. In this situation it may be substituted for any of the
other nasals, and then retains the sound of the original, being
influenced by the letter that follows ; as, ^rtfsnT. for
ahankara, 4 pride ;’ for anga, 4 body for aham,
4 1.’ It is especially appropriate as the substitute of 4 m’ before
the semivowels, retaining its own nasal sound, except before w,
which by its analogy to the labial causes the retention of
the labial nasal sound 4 m :’ thus 4 sam’ compounded with
TTO 4 yama’ &c. makes sanyama, 4 restraint ;’ sanrava.
6
LETTERS.
‘clamour;’ tthttj sanlapa, ‘conversation:5 but sam-
vatsara, ‘ a year.’ Anuswara is the nasal sign exclusively
employed before the sibilants and the aspirate ; as, #51 ansa,
‘ a part ;’ f^rr hinsa, ‘ injury fifjJ'rTl sanhita, ‘ combination
discharging to this class the office of the other nasals to their
respective classes of consonants. The soft aspirate denoted
by Yisarga is seldom audibly articulated : in practice there is
no perceptible difference between tnr: Ramah and tT*T Rama.
CLASSIFICATION.
Besides the classification of the letters of the alphabet spe-
cified above, there is another which it may be sometimes useful
to refer to. In this system the letters are thus arranged :
| nr w n ^ | h *rr |
*T *T T T!T * | ** * | ^ ^ V | »T W ST | ^ Tfi ^
| -3ITITT | -^T tT TT TL 1
The object of this arrangement is to provide a convenient
mode of designating any particular set of letters to the exclu-
sion of all others, which is done by combining any prior letter
with the consonant at the end of a series, so as to form a
Pratyahara or syllable, denoting all the letters that intervene :
thus, means the whole alphabet ; the vowels only ;
*r?5 the consonants only ; ^rtrr means ^ ^ t, inclusive of their
corresponding long vowels ; denotes the simple vowels ;
the diphthongs ; W the semivowels ; and all the
consonants, exclusive of the nasals and semivowels. Other
combinations may be formed on the same principle, with a
like purport.
There are some distinctions also affecting the vowels and
consonants generally, which it is advisable to particularise.
1 . Vowels have three times or quantities : they are, HTr
Laghu, ‘ light’ or ‘ short;5 jpj Guru, ‘ heavy5 or ‘ long;5 and
3pT Pluta, ‘ prolated.5 They have also three accents, and are,
■gr^TW Udatta, ‘ grave ;’ Anudatta, ‘ acute ;’ and
Swarita, ‘ compounded5 or ‘ circumflex.’ The long and short
CLASSIFICATION.
vowels are separately represented, as a, a : the prolated
is the long a with three lines underneath it, or a figure of three
behind it, as or ^tt 3. The accents are thus severally marked ;
^T, ?r, Ir. They are rarely used, except in MSS. of the Vedas.
In combination and in inflexion the vowels are subject to
two changes, or rather substitutions, in which other vowel or
diphthongal forms take their places. These are called irm
Guna and Vriddhi, rendered by Dr. Wilkins ‘ conversion’
and ‘ augmentation.’
The vowels (the long being com- ^
prised in the short) are . . )
The Guna substitutes severally .
The Vriddhi substitutes
* ^ ^ ^
^rr ^ wr. ,srr<^.
Thus the verb bhu, ‘ to be,’ in its inflexions is subject to
Guna ; that is, it becomes bho, ‘ o’ being substituted for
‘ u.’ In some of its secondary derivatives the ‘ u’ is subject to
Vriddhi : thus hit bhuta, ‘ a being,’ ‘ an element,’ furnishes
the adjective wfrTcfi bhautika, ‘ elementary.’ This will be more
intelligible as we proceed. It is only at present essential to
recollect the purport of the terms Guna and Vriddhi. It may
be added that, according to the native Grammars, the Guna
substitutes are only ?r and the Vriddhi *rr it wr ; the ^
and ^TT, in connexion with the semivowels n and <5, being the
Guna and Vriddhi representatives of ^ <5.
2. Consonants. It is at present more important to notice
a distinction of the consonants into two classes. Some of them
are hard, some soft. Wilkins calls the former surds ; the
latter, sonants ; in which he is followed by Professor Bopp.
The hard or surd consonants are the two first letters of the
five first classes of the alphabet and the sibilants ; the soft or
sonant consonants are the three last letters of each class, the
semivowels, and the aspirate.
Hard or surd letters,
Soft or sonant,
8
COMBINATION OF LETTERS,
CHAPTER TT.
SANDHI COMBINATION OF LETTERS,
Contrivances for avoiding the concurrence of harsh or
incongruous sounds, or the unpleasing hiatus which arises
from keeping sounds apart that are disposed to coalesce, are
not wanting in all languages. They are in general, however,
rather poetical or prosodial than grammatical ; such as the
elision of a final ‘ e before an initial *e’ in such a concurrence
as “ the etherial height of heaven,” which it was formerly the
fashion to write, as the measure demanded, “ th’ etherial to
say nothing of the synalepha and ecthlipsis of Latin verse,
“ Monstr5 horrend’ inform’ ingens,” &c. Other instances of
a regard for euphony, however, do occur, independent of
prosody, and especially in Greek, in which many of the
euphonic changes are analogous to those pro-sided for in San-
skrit. In no language has the subject, however, been so
systematically investigated as in Sanskrit : and the changes to
which letters are subject for the sake of euphony are nume-
rous, and carefully defined ; forming that part of Sanskrit
grammar which is termed Sandhi, ‘ a holding together,’
‘ a junction or tffVin Sanhita, ‘ an association,’ ‘ a conjunc-
tion ; either being derived from a verb compounded of the
preposition sam, ‘ cum,’ and dha, ‘ to have,’ ‘ to hold.’
SECTION I.
Conjunction of vowels.
1 . When a vowel terminating a word is followed by a similar
vowel beginning another word, whether they both be short or
both long, or one be short and one long, they combine into
one long homogeneous vowel : thus
a with a makes a ; as, Daitya + wft ari ="|cirrft Daityari,
‘ a foe of the demons,’ a name of Vishnu.
CONJUNCTION OF VOWELS.
9
a with a makes a ; as, 7TT sa + agachhat = 7TTIT3TT sa-
gachhat, £ she went.’
i with i makes ij as, ^f?T iti + iva = ^tftq itiva, ‘ so indeed.’
1 with 1 makes l ; as, Sri + isa = Srisa, ‘ the lord
of S'ri.’
u with u makes u ; as, bhanu 4- T^q udaya =; *TP|<fq
bhanudaya, ‘ sun-rise.’
ri with ri makes ri ; as, ^ nri + qjfq rishi = nrishi, ‘ a
man- (a mortal) sage.’
The concurrence of a final and initial <5 never perhaps takes
place. may however follow qj, and as they are considered
as homogeneous, a long ^ ri may be the result; as, *TT7f
hotri + pfSRR lrikara makes jftipiTT: £ the letter Iri (a sort of
incantation) of the Hotri,’ or officiating priest. The concur-
rence of qj, however, either with another qj or with <5, is not
liable to any very strict rule, and the substitute may be either
a short or long ^ ; as, with either qjqrR or q£qiTT. may be
either or frfircRTT: .
t ^
2. If a word which ends in either qr a or qn a be followed by
a word beginning with a different vowel, then a Guna element
is substituted for both ; that is, if qi or qiT precedes ^ or the
substitute is q ; if q or q, it is qft ; if qj or q£, it is qrc: ; if
<5 or c^, qr?5 ; as,
qq upa + ^qj' Indra = qqqj Upendra, a name of Krishna.
Jana -f i^qr: fswara = *PrqK Janeswara, £ a lord of men,’
‘ a king.’
W yatha + ffi'qw ipsitam = qqf'qfr yathepsitam, ‘ as desired.’
7t^t Ganga + q<pOT udakam = Garigodakam, £ Ganges
water.’
maha + qjfq rishi = rnrfq maharshi, £ a great sage.’
qq tava + TSqR lrikara = qq^SR tavalkara, £ thy letter <£.’
3. If a word ends, as in the last case, with q? or q?T, and
is followed by one beginning with a diphthong, a Vriddhi
c
10 •
COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
letter is substituted for both ; that is, if be followed by U
or I?, the substitute is I*; if by or it is as,
Krishna + tr^r# ekatwam = Krishnaikatwam,
‘ oneness with Krishna.’
fV?rr vidya + in' eva = vidyaiva, ‘ knowledge, verily.’
deva + aiswaryam = devaiswaryam, ‘ the
divinity of a god.’
alpa -+ ^frsriT ojas = ^reqnpT alpaujas, ‘ of little radiance.’
WTP5T bala + WRT^T autsukyam = ■^T'FMTW'^i balautsukyam,
‘ the maiden’s sorrow.’
There are some exceptions to these two last rules, which it
may be convenient here to insert. With regard to these and
to other anomalies and exceptions, however, it may be advis-
able once for all to recommend to the student, in an early
stage of his studies, to content himself with a passing notice
of them, and not to allow them to divert his attention from the
general rules. Familiar with the rules, he will find no diffi-
culty in the occasional deviations from them which occur.
a. aksha before jaf^lifl uhini makes fibril akshauhini,
‘ a large army,’ instead of ’STEfriinrit, as it should do by rule 2.
b. When fr ir, a radical signifying * go,’ or any of its
derivatives, follows the ‘a’ of ^ swa, the substitute is not
‘ e,’ but ‘ ai ;’ as, ‘ self-going,’ ‘ independence ‘ an
independent female servant,’ i. e. not a slave.
c. Verbal derivatives from the roots ^irr in, ‘ go,’ and ini
edh, ‘ increase,’ regularly take the Vriddhi substitute after the
vowel ^ of a preposition; as, "^tr + ^fjr = '3Tff?T 4 he approaches;’
Tq + irvjff = ‘ it increases :’ but, in general, verbs begin-
ning with U or ^fr retain their own vowel, and cause the
elision of the final of a preposition ; as, u before tnrff makes
ir*riT ‘ he trembles ;’ n before ^rrsrfTT makes ifr^fTT * he sprinkles.’
The '3i which is substituted for the of vah, 4 who bears,’
takes Vriddhi after the short 4 a,’ as 4 all-sustaining,’
beomes first r=TW|t, and then in the acc. plur.
CONJUNCTION OF VOWELS.
11
d. The causal of ish, ‘ to go,’ ‘ to send,' requires the
rejection of the of the inseparable preposition n, as n +
umifri makes ippifw, not Hnnfrf. In nouns derived from it the
compound may be regular, as ifni or fNi preshya or praishya,
‘ a messenger.’ "gr?, ‘ to reason,’ after takes Vriddhi, as
IT? prauclha, ‘ proud,’ ‘ arrogant.5 ‘ glean,’ with n is
regular, admitting the Guna substitute only, as ini presha, ‘ a
gleaner.5
e. Roots beginning with ^ after a preposition ending in
‘ a,’ substitute the Vriddhi form ar, as T*! + makes
uparchchhati, ‘ approaches ;’ by rule 2. it should have
been uparchchhati. The Yriddhi w is also substituted
for an initial ^ when the word it commences is compounded
with a preceding word ending in ‘ a,’ and having the sense of the
instrumental case : thus sukha and rita may be joined
together, as ttw# sukhartta, ‘ affected by joy ;’ gfhr sita and
^TT rita, as sfftrr# s'itartta, ‘ affected by cold.’ If the first
member have not the sense of the instrumental case, the
words combine agreeably to rule 2 ; as, ttitt parama and
rita make U m -N paramartta, ‘ last-gone :5 the same if the
first word retains the sign of the instrumental case, the words
coalescing in virtue of their juxta-position, but not forming a
compound: thus Tr^T+^fiT make WFR# sukhenartta.
f. The word rina doubled or preceded by n,
TfR. or IJ'ST, substitutes the Vriddhi syllable WIT, not the
Guna as, rinarna, ‘debt of a debt;’ HRf prarna,
‘ principal debt ;’ TrUTTTTiif vatsatararna, ‘ debt of a mule ;’
W*rn!f vasanarna, ‘ debt of a cloth ;’ <i Dl |i[f Dasarna, name of a
country; r^n<!lT Dasarna, name of a river, the Dosaron of
Ptolemy.
g. Verbs foi'med from nouns beginning with ^ take either
the Guna or Vriddhi substitute after the w of a preposition :
^pnrhlfTT rishabhiyati, ‘ he resembles or acts like a rishabha,’
i. e. a bull, with H pra makes either jntHHrfil or xrre^fhlfiT.
So with an initial 75, as or When the
c 2
12
COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
initial is the long vowel either no coalescence takes place,
or the change is to the Guna syllable ; as, 'Str and '^oRrOirfTT
make either or Tq^nfhrflT.
h. When ■aj as the initial of a noun follows an inflected
noun ending in a short vowel, it may remain unaltered, or fol-
low rule 2 : thus ir? and may make either or
i. Verbs formed from nouns beginning with t* or fol-
lowing a preposition ending in ^r, either cause its elision, or
substitute the Vriddhi letter ; as, Tg and tTTSfcfarfrT edakiyati
make either or ‘ he is sheepish.’
k. When the particle ‘ verily,’ ‘ indeed,’ is used to
intimate ‘ uncertainty,’ it causes the elision of a preceding ;
as, kwa and ug eva make itg kweva in such a sentence as
ifgglwgxt * Where indeed will you dine ?’ When ‘ certainty’
is affirmed, the combination follows rule 3 ; as, Trig Tgrn Ttfrg
vftgg ‘ I shall certainly dine with you, my friend.’
/. The words ^ffTT otu, 4 a cat,’ and 'srtg oshfha, 4 the lip,’
when compounded with a preceding word ending in ^1, either
follow rule 3, or cause the elision of the preceding vowel ;
as, WF5 sthula + gfftT = or ‘ a fat cat ;’ fgg vimba
+ iSTg is either fgi=jTg or fgrffg 4 cherry-lipped.’ If the words
coalesce without forming a new compound, the rule is adhered
to : TP? + make ITgTg ‘ the lip of thee.’
4. When a word ends with any simple vowel, except g? or
gTT, and is followed by a word that begins with a dissimilar
vowel, or with a diphthong, the latter is unaltered, but the
former is changed to its analogous semivowel : thus ^ and ^
are changed to g y, g and gi to g v, gj g£ to t: r, and 75 to
7* 1 ; as,
?fH + ’H 1 4, I'M - ?Rn'4iiR( ityakarnya, 4 thus having heard.’
I g rf rijwayata, ‘ simple-minded.’
+ = bhratrahsa, ‘a brother’s portion.’
75 + g -vi lanubandha, ‘ the adjunct (anubandha)
In.’
CONJUNCTION OF VOWELS.
13
a. There are various rules for the correct orthography of
words coalescing in this form, but they are amongst the
inconveniences of Sanskrit grammar, and are little observed
in practice : it is enough here to remark, that under them the
first word may be also spelled I , ^raj-pETR, or
doubling the first conjunct consonant, the second, or both.
In general, however, the simplest form is used, unless the first
of the conjunct consonants be T, when the second should be
doubled ; as, ifncl ‘ Gauri’ (the goddess) + ‘ here,’ is most
correctly written Gauryyatra. So also in uncompounded
words the letter t: doubles the consonant conjoined with it,
as oR#r kartta, of,wf karmma, vwf dharmma, although it is not
uncommon to omit the duplication in writing.
b. In some instances, when the words are not compounded,
and not inflected, a final simple vowel followed by a dis-
similar vowel may either conform to the rule, may remain
unaltered, or, if long, may be changed to its short vowel : thus
chakri -j- atra, £ The discus-armed (Vishnu), here !’
may make either Rgjjg' or Rfai or R-# If a new
compound be formed, the rule must be followed, and the
semivowel substituted; as, Hari + ^nt artha makes
Haryyartha, ‘ for the sake of Hari and so it must if an inflec-
tive termination be added to the word to form a case, as jMt:
Gauryyah, ‘ of the goddess Gauri.’
5. When a diphthong ending a word is followed by any
vowel or diphthong — even though the latter be the same —
beginning a word, the following syllables are severally substi-
tuted for the antecedent diphthong :
For it — ■spr ay, as R + makes ^PPT chayana, £ gathering.’
— t? — ay, as If + makes vmrofi nay aka, ‘ a leader.’
— av, as fwf + = fgtOPT Vishnave, ‘ to Vishnu.’
— *TT — *TTR av, as gwt + putravimau, ‘ these
two children.’
14
COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
a. These syllables may be substituted for diphthongs before
the semivowel F when it is the initial of the affix Fit, form-
ing pai'ticipial nouns in certain senses.
% from f% + Fri = irar jayya, ‘ what may be conquered.’
vft from + FW = bhavya, ‘ what may be’ or ‘ is to be.’
FT + FF = navya, ‘ relating to a ship,’ ‘ naval.’
b. 7ft before ff substitutes ^ for the final, f^F gavya,
‘ relating to a cow also before the affix ttPf, as eUf?T * a
measure ;’ but this is peculiar to the Vedas. In ordinary use,
the words are rft FfF ‘ a measure of two kos.’
C\
6. Concurrent heterogeneous letters in some cases do not
follow any of the preceding rules, or they follow them option-
ally ; or one of the two vowels becomes quiescent, or is ejected.
These are termed FFFTT pragrihya, literally ‘ what must be
taken out,’ ‘ excipienda.’
a. The finals ^ "35 and F, when they are the terminations of
nouns in the dual number, are unchanged before other vowels
or diphthongs : ft! Fin 4 these two Haris ;’ vttf ^ * these two
suns ;’ * these two women.’ The duals FFfl,
V'Uirft, and FWTrft form compounds with as wfa, &c.
b. the nom. plur. masc. of the pronoun ‘ that,’
does not coalesce with a following vowel : ^nrl fr^n: ‘ those
lords.’
c. The F of fapr may be unchanged, or may substitute the
semivowel ‘ v’ before a vowel, as foF.F FS or fsfiF# ‘ What is
O O
said ?’
d. ^ or Fi substituted, as they sometimes irregularly are,
for the proper ending of the locative case, are unchanged, as
FTFT frrtf HH fa fa Ft ‘ Soma relying on Gauri :’ FTI? for FTFiTF .
e. Prolated vowels, pluta, are incapable of combination :
FfF 1 Come, Krishna (as if in calling), here.’
f. f and ^fr being the terminations of an inflected word,
CONJUNCTION OF VOWELS.
15
cause a following to be ejected ; its elision is however
usually denoted by a peculiar character; as, ’!rr%sg' ‘ O fire !
here f=l alii sg' ‘ O Vishnu ! here.’
g. The ’Tt of iff is subject to various modifications before
; both may be unchanged, "ST may be elided, or wt may be
changed to ava : thus rft and make iff jftsjj, or
TRTjj. is changed to ava before and making by
rules 1. and 2. JT3TET ‘ a lattice,’ and JR'?* a name of Krishna;
also before ^T, making ; or it may be changed before this
word to ’SR av, by rule 5, regularly making 71^31 ‘ lord of kine.’
h. When the short vowel is followed by the sacred mono-
syllable Om, it is rejected; as, fjRPT makes fjRrqR
(^t:) ‘ Om ! namas, or adoration, to S'iva.’ It is also rejected
before a verbal inflection compounded with the preposition ’HT ;
as, f^R + UR (from ’ST -f ^r) makes RRR ‘ O Siva, come !’
i. Particles, when single vowels, are not changed before
other vowels ; as, ^ ^ ‘ O Indra! O lord of Uma !’
■^rr is an exception, if it implies ‘ diminution :’ ’STT + 'juft makes
’TpstTT oshnam, ‘ a little warm.’ As an interjection it is un-
changed: *tt 7R ‘Ah, indeed!’ The final of a particle is
unchanged : ‘ Ho, deities !’
k. The final of a vocative case takes various forms before
the particle ^f?r ; as, R inn ^fw, fRan ^far, or ROTiRfrf.
l. In a particular class of compound words the initial of
the second word is preserved, and the last vowel of the pre-
ceding word is rejected ; in one case, along with the consonant
by which it is followed : thus
3TR + = 'ST’Sfi'W s'akandhu, ‘a sort of potherb.’
sfill + = RTiiRJ karkandhu, ‘ the jujube.’
= cM'fj-filiMI langalis'a, ‘ the handle of a plough.’
TTT# + = marttanda, * the sun.’
JPHT + Irt = UrNt manisha, ‘ intellect.’
16
COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
SECTION II.
Conjunction of consonants.
We must now recollect the distinction which has been
pointed out (p. 7) with regard to the two classes of consonants,
as hard or surd, and soft or sonant ; as, in addition to such
rules as affect peculiar letters, there are one or two general
rules which it will be of great use to bear in mind.
7. When two consonants come together, and are affected
by no special rule, there will be no change, if they are both
hard or both soft ; but if they are of different enunciation,
and one is hard, and the other is soft, then the first of the
two must be changed to a letter of the same quality as the
second, which will be the hard or soft letter of the class to
which it belongs ; as, cp to it, or tt to 'Si ; ^ to "3T, or ^ to ^ ;
7 to or 1 to ?; W to <f, or to w ; tf to "S', or ^ to tr. The
further exemplification of this rule may thus be stated : —
a. If the consonants be both hard, there is no change :
thus, before the termination w su, the nouns ‘ sarvasak, harit,
ap,’ retain their finals, as TTSi before trfir
is TTSjsffl Vakpati, ‘ lord of speech.’
b. If both are soft, there is no change : before fttw is
^rfk*T adbhis, ‘ by M aters.’
c. A hard before a soft consonant must be changed to the
soft consonant of its own class : thus ifhrr, ‘ the song of
the lord,’ becomes bhagavad-gita, ‘ t’ being changed to
‘ d :’ ap, before it changes its final to and becomes ,?T^r,
abja, ‘ M ater-born,’ ‘ a lotus.’
d. A soft consonant before a hard consonant must be
changed to the hard consonant of its own class : ^ ad, ‘ to
eat,’ before ftr, changes ^ to 7T, ‘ eats so it does before
w, as 'arsTR' kravyad, ‘ a cannibal,’ is in the 7th case plural
kravyatsu, ‘ in or on cannibals.’
8. If the antecedent consonant be an aspirated letter, it is
not only modified by the preceding rule, but Mhatever form it
CONJUNCTION OF CONSONANTS.
17
takes it is the unaspirated letter ; an aspirate cannot precede
any unaspirated letter except a nasal or a semivowel, nor can
two aspirated consonants come together. Thus in the com-
bination dadhi-atra, where by rule 4. it makes
dadhyatra, and by the following remark a. the V dh may be
doubled, the duplication requires that the first member shall be
unaspirated, and the word must be written, not dadhdhya-
tra, but daddhyatra : so and vi become ^ and V,
7^31 ; cficpr and fWrT, and and «rR, ;
the 7?T, which is a hard letter, being first changed to the soft
aspirate v, and ti being changed to *t before the aspirate >T.
9. A hard consonant, when final, is changed to a soft con-
sonant ; and a final aspirated consonant to an unaspirated :
thus TPfi becomes WT*T ; and
When however it occurs before a pause, that is, when it is
not followed immediately by any letter, the change to a soft
consonant is optional : thus the nom. sing, of TT3i is either
or ; of Naicrs or --fen.
10. Final hard consonants, followed by words beginning
with vowels, are changed to soft (the vowels being soft or
sonant letters) ; as, '^rrofi + becomes Vagis'a, ‘ god of
speech,’ a name of Vrihaspati ; not ‘ the god of wine,’ as Sir
Wm. Jones conjectured, from the accidental resemblance of
Vagisa and Bacchus.
When hard and aspirated consonants are followed by the
terminations of the cases of nouns or persons of verbs which
open with vowels, they are no longer regarded as final, for then
they do not terminate a syllable, but begin another, and they are
therefore not subject to change : makes 31 =fi, *rf^T=&T ;
fawfow , *T^n, ‘ to cook,’ before ^rfw makes x^fri.
11. A final palatal is changeable to a guttural, which will
be hard or soft according to the consonant that follows ; as,
vach, ‘speech,’ becomes or ^r*T, Trfanr; asrij,
blood, . m 1 ^ pran, left fiom 4 1 east, becomes
After certain verbs, ^ »T and *5. may be changed, when final,
D
18
COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
to it, which again becomes z or ; as, 'foTPpT, ‘ the creator
of the universe,’ makes fiRpiti, and then -it?.
12. A consonant of the dental class, TT xi ^ v it, preceding
a consonant of the palatal class, ^ tJ »T m *T 3T, or of the cerebral
class, z Z Z ^ HT, exclusive of the sibilant (11), is changed to the
corresponding letter of that class ; that is, ff ^1 are changed
to ^ or Z ; ^ V to *T or ^ ; and it to or UT.
THT + f^TT = vHdff ‘ pure reason.’
7T7 + ITta = ‘ that life.’
+ 'JR = a name of Vishnu.
7171 + TfaRT = rt]fteST * a comment on that.’
^T5iiT + <Tl ch« = <*« ‘ O discus-armed ! thou goest.’
Before the cerebral sibilant, the dentals are unchanged, as
TUT in? ‘ being the sixth.’
13. Dentals are also changed to cerebrals, when following
cerebrals, if they are part of adjunct syllables, as the personal
affix fw with fipi dwish, ‘ to hate,’ makes irfe dweshfi, ‘ who
hates.’ They are not so changed when they are radical letters,
as i?? w ‘ they six.’
14. Dental consonants before the letter cZ are changed to
7Z ; as, ‘HIT + forerfir = ‘ he writes that ;’
makes kRlfsT^fd ; as avv and \eyw make c rvWeyet. A pecu-
liar mark is sometimes inserted to denote the change of the
nasal, as
15. A nasal of the same class may be substituted for any
final consonant before a word beginning with a nasal ; as,
TRj + irufrf = iRTTT van nayati, ‘ speech guides.’
+ HTfiT = inn^fTT shannavati, 4 ninety-six.’
iI7 + HR = timmi shanmasa, 4 six months.’
^THT + Jjirfx = inr^rrfT etan-Murari, ‘ that Vishfiu.’
a. This nile does not preclude the operation of the general
rule, by which concurrent consonants must be assimilated; it
only makes it optional : thus for TRj iRfif we may also write
TTn *prfir ; and for htttt Huff, ; the nasals being
sonants.
CONJUNCTION OF CONSONANTS.
19
b. The rule is absolute in one case, when the following
word is a technical affix ; such as *nr, implying, when con-
joined with nouns, ‘ consisting of and JTTc?, implying * so
much,’ ‘ merely as, Tra with rnt makes only vanmaya,
‘ made of speech,’ ‘ eloquent and TTrT with jtt^ is tan-
matra, ‘ merely that,’ ‘ a primary element.’
16. ^ is changed to *rr in the genitive case of ‘ six also
in the words and '«prfl after ire ; as, inrrf shannam, *TOTfiT
shannavati, mun'O shannagari ; the Z of being changed to
ttt by rule 15.
17. Before a sibilant, t and *rr may insert respectively the
letters and z ; as, TTT^ before ire makes TO or ttt^ 'ST?
‘ sixth anterior,5 and ttttci + TO = tttot z TO ‘ sixth numerator :’
o \ \ \
and z or s or ^T, before the dental sibilant, may insert the
dental it; as, TOff or ipjfc57 rTT^ * the bee endures
and tt: or tt?t tt tt: ‘ he being.’
18. The nasals T, TU, TT, terminating a word, when preceded
by a short vowel, and followed by any vowel as the initial of
a subsequent word, must be doubled ; as,
H dj 3-' + *rref = TOT|;T^f ‘ he sits facing the west.’
ttttttt + ^t = TTTOfl^I ‘ the lord of an excellent class.’
TTtPT + ^fir = TT^rF^fw 4 O king ! thus.’
19. *T following t, or ti, either immediately or separated
by an intervening guttural or labial consonant, a vowel, if, =T,
■?, Visarga, or Anuswara deduced from or it, is changed to
HT; as, becomes ‘debt;’ + vrrffr = ir^rfir ; irft.+
TfiT = ijfWfT ‘bowed;’ vfTT+ = fTTCITOT Narayana, a name
of Vishnu ; urn + = TjrrTTOT Ramayana, a poem so named.
If final it is unchanged, as JTTrij .
20. A final H terminating an inflected word may be
changed to Anuswara before a consonant ; as, Tfof ^iR ‘ he
made a sacrifice ;’ if ‘ he asked him :’ especially before
semivowels, sibilants, and ^ ; as, for ?ftiT read ‘ I
salute Hari ;’ for to read if *rrrfiT ‘he laughs at him.’ Be-
fore UHT the final of tt*t is unalterable ; as, TT>3T5T ‘ a universal
\ \ \
D 2
20
COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
monarch.’ It is unchanged before a vowel ; as, ^TRWtT: ‘ I
(am) come.’
21. is optionally changed to Anuswara before ? in con-
junction with H, as faw or aMUfff ; but Anuswara derived
from n may become IT, <*, or % before ^ combined with these
semivowels severally ; as, or fafRT 7?j, f^l or UI^Th, ^
or f^T It may become tj before f combined with rj,
as or r=t,H ? ri.
\ r» .
22. Anuswara followed by any consonant, except the semi-
vowels, sibilants, and fr, is changed, if in the middle of a
word, to the nasal of that class to which the consonant follow-
ing it belongs : *T + few = ^tfew ‘ marked ;’ ^ + few = *rfew
‘ worshipped.’
a. If it be the final of an inflected word, the change is
optional; as, + WiR = or ‘egoism;’ rf or
R^vfrfe ‘ thou doest ;’ R or ‘ thou givest.’
b. If the following consonant be a semivowel, the Anuswara
may be optionally changed to the nasal form of the semivowel,
which is denoted by a peculiar mark above it ; as, or
‘ restraint ;’ wwjfe or ‘ to what world ;’ or
Kim ‘ a year.’
23. Anuswara may be substituted for a medial w or it,
when followed by a sibilant ; as, vwfe ‘ bows ;’ * reputa-
tions ;’ a proper name.
24. A final w or w preceded by or may be dropped
before any letter except a hard consonant or a sibilant ; as,
becoming ww by rule 5, before ’stptwt: makes w ^ptwt: ‘ they
are come ;’ WW changed to WWR before becomes WWT
; and in changed to WTW before ^wt becomes in
‘ those two.’
25. When follows any consonant, except a semivowel, a
nasal, or a sibilant, it is changed to ; as, w^ + few S'iva =
wfie3R tach chhiva, * that, S'iva ;’ w^ + wtrt = TT^FiT ‘ having
heard that.’
a. For by rule 12. has been changed, before the palatal 'ST,
CONJUNCTION OF CONSONANTS.
21
to the analogous palatal sT; but the soft consonant TT, again,
has been changed to the hard consonant ^ before the hard
consonant t?.
b. Although, according to the present rule, may not
be changed to after a nasal, yet seeming exceptions occur
in regard to a final ^ ; as, ‘ overwhelming with
arrows ;’ n>rgw: for TPT stw: * the existent Sambhu or S'iva.’
\ \» \ ^ V>
In these cases a tt has been interposed, making 7T
TT^ 7^ and is changed to after TT ; but by rule 12. TT
is changed to ^ before the palatal, and to >r before making
The middle of the three consonants is
rejected by a rule to be subsequently quoted (r. 34. a) ; leaving
therefore N &c. The insertion of W between a nasal and
a sibilant is very common in the Vedas, as >Sf!TR 4- it is read
^TWRiTT.
26. The augment TT may be inserted after a word ending in
a short vowel, before one beginning with sj, as fjfT^ TT tSTUT ;
but as ft must be changed to ^ in such a position, the form is
fSMTsiNl ‘ the shadow of S'iva/
a. The same augment w is optionally inserted after a long
vowel, whether medial or final ; as, or
‘ the shadow of Lakshmi irsc or ‘ a barbarian.’
b. It is also inserted optionally after the particles and
JTT3F (leaving 1ST and ttt) prefixed to verbal inflexions or deriva-
tives beginning with t* (TT is in like manner changed to ;
as, or ‘ he covers or ‘ let
him not divide.’
27- *T is changed to =s before it, as <yti for ‘ see,’ makes
with RrffT, ‘ will see :5 (for it after a guttural (rule 29.)
becomes it, and and it form the compound gi.) A final it is
usually changed to 7, becoming g before a soft consonant ; as,
fcnr, ‘ light,’ becomes or fr9T, fr^fTTT. It is sometimes
changed to ; as, TpJiT becomes ‘ proud.’
28. Before a palatal consonant, including 31, the dental TT
is changed to ; and before a cerebral, including it, it is
22
COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
changed to R ; as, TTRR + fiRvfrfR = T.lRf'^vrrfR * Rama gathers
TTHft + %R = UHWrf * Rama sleeps TTRR + = TTRRtRiR
‘ Rama goes TTRR' + RR = TPPRR ‘ Rama, sixth.’
29. R, not being final, is changed to R after any vowel
except rt or m, and after a guttural consonant, a semivowel,
and though the augment R, Visarga, or a sibilant intervene ;
thus R«pr becomes in the plural RrjfR ‘ bows and %R and
r make f^TRR ‘ in’ or ‘ on Sivas.’ It is not so changed after
'3-, or Rj, if radical ; as, RfRR ‘ who goes well ;’ RfqRT, &c.
30. When R in the verbs wr ‘ to stay,’ and RPR ‘ to stop,’
and their derivatives, is preceded by the preposition RR, it is
rejected ; and as the final R becomes the hard consonant TT
before a hard consonant, then + RTPT = RrRTR ‘ uprising/
and RR + RPHR = R1PRR ‘ upholding.’
31. When ^ follows any consonant, except a nasal, semi-
vowel, or sibilant, the aspirate of the preceding letter may be
substituted for it, that letter, if a hard consonant, being first
changed to its corresponding soft letter ; as, R7R> -f be-
comes first rpt + and then RWRvfrT e speech seizes :’ so
7PT RTRR makes fl^fRR.
32. R when final, or before any consonant except a nasal
or a semivowel, is changed to R, as tffttn? ushnih, a sort of
metre, becomes RfxrnR ; or to r, as Rvf?5? ‘ a bee,’ RvfoR.
The aspirates are changed to the unaspirated letters (rule 9),
and the words are therefore RfwR> or Rfarm, or R\rf^.
The final R evolved from R is also changeable to R before R,
before which R becomes Ri, and with it (rules 27. 29) Rj; hence
R| ‘ to bear,’ with Rrfff makes RWPT ; ‘ to burn,’ R^qfR.
33. Any consonant may be optionally doubled after or R
preceded by a vowel ; as, WRi or ‘ the sun Rfjr or Rfj" ‘ fire.’
34. Any consonant, except R, followed by a consonant,
may be doubled ; as, rr + 1: may be RR ‘ a son ;’ fair -+ T. may
be faRT ‘ a friend.’
a. But when three or more consonants are joined together,
by virtue of a grammatical rule, one or more of the intermediate
CHANGES OF VISARGA.
ones, if similar, may be rejected ; therefore and fart are
more usually written Uc? and facT-
b. A semivowel following any consonant, except a semi-
vowel, a sibilant, >r, or may be doubled; as, 'STTf^m or
4 the sun.’
c. But when two semivowels are preceded by a different
consonant, one of them may be rejected ; so becomes
'errf^'W, as before.
35. When a conjunct consonant is final, whether terminat-
ing a syllable or a word, the second member is rejected, as
, 4 a lame man,’ becomes ; and , 4 what injures,’
So after nouns ending in consonants, the sign of the
nominative case, *T, is rejected, as tnr^, 4 going,’ not tnr*fr.
If the first letter be T, the final is retained, as 3"^ 4 strong
but not if the second member be a sibilant, as if , 4 who
wishes to do,’ becomes
36. When a word ending with ^ is followed by one begin-
ning with *, one is rejected, and the preceding vowel, it
short, is made long ; as, "ipR + tttw = 4 he again sports ;’
+ 4 unimpassioned.
There are other rules affecting the mode of combining
consonants, and the changes to which the combinations are
subject ; but their validity is matter of dispute : accordingly,
as different rules are followed, the derivatives of the compound
of 4 cum,’ and ^ 4 to make,’ may be written in a variety of
manners: *TW?tT, for instance, may be wrritten in a hundred
and eight ways. These are, however, matters merely of ortho-
epical conceit, and in practice the simplest spelling, consistent
with the essential elements of a word, is to be preferred.
SECTION III.
Changes of Visarga.
As preliminary to the rules for those changes to which the
soft aspirate termed Visarga is subject, it may be useful to
premise, that they contemplate the reciprocal equivalency of
24
COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
(;) Visarga, *T, and these signs being, according to circum-
stances, mutually interchangeable. There are, as is well
known, indications of similar reciprocity in the classical lan-
guages. The Greek e£, b rra, a\s, become in Latin ‘ sex,
septem, sal.’ In the older Latin writers a final ‘ s’ was com-
monly elided, at least for prosodial purposes ; and Pott sug-
gests that its place may have been supplied by something like
Visarga. Lucilius, according to Quintilian, wrote “ Serenu’
fuit et dignu’ loco and Cicero observes, “ Plures antiquo-
rum sic locutos.” The substitution of {r’ for ‘s’ was also
common in Latin, and ‘ arbor, labor, clamor,’ were originally
written ‘ arbos, labos, clamos.’ The ‘ s’ was also sometimes
preserved in the nominative, but changed in other inflexions,
as ‘ flos, floris,’ and the like.
The meaning of Visarga fqqff is literally ‘ abandoning,’
‘ ejecting ;’ and that of its synonyme f^TW^Tfa Visarjjaniya is
‘ that which may’ or ‘ is to be ejected or abandoned.’ It has
been a question, therefore, whether the symbol to which it is
applied (:) be a simple mark of elision, a kind of apostrophe,
or whether it designates a sound. It would be out of place to
discuss the question at present. It is usually considered to
denote a very soft and almost imperceptible breathing, and it
is sufficient for our purpose so to regard it.
37. A final is changed to Visarga : HTJnr Ramas becomes
Uni Ramah ; and Ramais, Ramaih.
38. Before a hard consonant Visarga again becomes q ;
fqnn: + ^TtTT = fTGnj^TTTT ‘ Vishnu the preserver.’
a. It is not so changed before a hard letter followed by a
sibilant, as 'RHj ‘ Which (is) the sword-hilt ?’
b. Before a sibilant the change is optional, as or
tw#. (The dental sibilant is changed to the sibilant of the
class of the consonant by which it is followed : see rule 28.)
c. Before the hard consonants of the guttural and labial
classes Visarga may be unchanged : q: TOffT £ who does ;’ qr.
* Who cooks ?’
CHANGES OF VISARGA.
25
d. Before these letters a different sign X called Arddha-
visarga, * a half Visarga,’ is sometimes used, as 3ix ofiTlnr, =FX xr^rfTT.
The sign before a guttural is described as ‘ proceed-
ing from the root of the tongue and before a labial,
* to be gently blown or aspirated.’ Modifications of aspiration
are no doubt intended, which might have been of consequence
when the language was spoken, but are now of no importance.
e. The permanence of Visarga before cfi is liable to excep-
tion, and it is changed to before, i. the pronoun ofi, as
‘ quisquis 2. the affix ^i, as TTSTRfi ‘ famous ;’ and the parti-
cles ofi-tr and 3iTHT, as * of little fame ‘ desir-
ous of fame.’ It is also changed before as TTSfinn^I ‘ of
slight renown.’
f. But it is not changed before if that follows an
indeclinable word ; as, UTrT. ^r=tr * nigh to morning nor
before '<*!»;, if it be derived from a radical final ; thus fht.
makes iff: ‘ speech,’ whence rft: ^rn=q ‘ desirous of speech.’
g. It is changed before verbs and verbal derivatives com-
mencing with cfi when compounded with tjr:, tji::, virrfVt , and
; as, RRijjfiTT ‘ salutation ; ’ V^Clfrt ‘ he places before ; ’
■snf^TT ‘ manifested tp.’sf'f ‘ evil-doing.’
h. The numerals f^1:, and '^w:, change Visarga to before
3i, as f^t^TfTT, ‘ he makes two, three, four.’
But if repetition is implied, the change is optional, as fw.ofiClfff
or fg"MiCl Ph c he does (any thing) twice.’
i. fiTT:: optionally changes its final, as fro=fiR or frCC^R
‘ abuse.’
j. fWt. becoming also optionally changes Visarga to
before «fi, as Rf: ^Tfart or frp:*rfRW ‘ expelled.’
k. Visarga is changed to after compounded with the
particles and ttt$T, as Rffcqcfi-g, RfvqftqnjT, ‘ a little butter.’
l. It is changed after and f^R: compounded with ;
as, ‘ foot below ‘ foot on the top.’ If the words
are uncompounded, the change does not take place, as ^pt:
f3TT*.
E
26
COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
39- A final radical is changed to Yisarga ; as, frrr:, ‘ speech,
becomes xfi: ; ptttt, ‘dawn,’ unr:.
40. The letter t (in technical grammar called ^ ru, to
distinguish it from the mere alphabetical sign) is substituted
for Yisarga after any vowel except or wr, and before a vowel
or a soft consonant ; as, JJW: ‘3‘tTrr becomes TOrr^rnT ‘ endowed
with qualities ssOvr. ‘ fire burns ^rnhftT
4 the boat goes ‘ Sambhu takes.’
41. If the Yisarga be preceded by ^T, and the initial of the
word following be % or a soft consonant, T is substituted
in place of n, and T with the penultimate forms the final
diphthong as, makes ^rts^ 4 Who here?’ cR: ttih
makes ^nr: 4 Who (is) gone ?’
a. An initial following so formed is rejected, but its
place is marked by the sign s. See rule 6.f
b. changed by rule 37. to becomes by this rule
JTvft in such compounds as 4 mind-born ;’ RrfrxH
4 mind-delighting.’
42. After the short vowel and before any vowel except
tr, Yisarga may be changed to tt, which by rule 24. may be
rejected ; as, and become or ^ 4 a god
sits 7*^: and become or 7^ 4 the god Indra ;’
■?TF5: TTr^r, 4 Nalah spoke,’ makes or more commonly
43. After the long vowel ^n, and before any vowel or soft
consonant, 11 is substituted for Yisarga ; it is optionally rejected
before the vowels, absolutely before the consonants ; as, TjWK
make or 7»WT 4 the gods (are) here and
^TW|i: make ttwtt*. 4 the gods are to be reverenced
4 said of Devi,’ makes ^srnrfirf^rT or ; f^r^rr:
*TTF5T, 4 the garland of Sri,’ makes RTF5T.
a. After the interjections *ft7T, HiflTT, ^T^ftTT, the Visarga, to
which the final is changed, is said to be again changed to tt,
which is ejected before a vowel or soft consonant ; as,
4 O Indra !’ *rfl ^ 4 O god !’
CHANGES OF V1SARGA.
27
44. Visarga substituted for a radical final x may become X
again before a vowel or a soft consonant ; as, TTT7T: for iffiTjt
+ ^ becomes HT7TXW ‘ the dawn (is) here/
a. Such a Visarga may also optionally become x again
before a hard consonant ; as, 7ft: for frix: before xrfrf may make
ifrcqfff ‘ lord of speech,’ or, by rule 38, JTfaxfir, Visarga being
changed to XT.
b. Visarga substituted for the final of for *Tfxr ‘ a day,’
becomes x again before any consonant except x and *T; as,
‘ lord of day ^rjJ7ftT!T ‘ a number of days.’ Before X
and >T, ^ is substituted for it ; as, ^T*ftXTeT ‘ day and night
'xsr^tfvr: ‘ by days.’
45. Visarga is substituted for a final xr, except in the word
TT^rrxf, before a hard consonant of the palatal, cerebral, and
dental classes, if followed by a vowel, a semivowel, or a nasal.
Anuswara is prefixed to the sibilant to which by rule 38.
Visarga is changed ; as, ^TTfjl'TT + becomes TTrffffj-grMt
{ O bow-armed, cut !’ XHT^f + 7TX= XT3TTFTX ‘ O king, cross !’ but
H5TT*T ‘ let the quiet man collect/
a. Before tj the substitution is optional, and the Visarga
does not become a sibilant, as by rule 38 c, but may or may
not substitute the Arddha-visarga : xnff , ‘ cherish men/ is
therefore written xrxqif^, xt; Tnf^r, or xt X xtttV, also with a mark
denoting the Visarga to be nasal, as rjf: xjTfir or ^ XTXTfV.
b. XTR in combination with xfi and its derivatives, the word
srt*T repeated, and xpr derived from xjxr prefixed to a word
beginning with a hard consonant, insert the augment XT ; in
which case Visarga is said to be substituted for their proper
finals, preceded by Anuswara, and changed before XT to XT.
XPT before xfirx therefore becomes xfxr WX ; =BT'T before ofiTT^,
xfi’fXT ; and RR before TjxT wfacR. By clause a. of
rule 34, however, one of the sibilants is rejected, leaving XT^RTX
* initiation ;’ ofiTWR ‘ whom ! whom !’ and ‘ a male
ko'il (Indian cuckoo).’
46. The Visarga w'hich is the sign of the masculine nomi -
E 2
28
DECLENSION.
native of the pronouns THf and tHT?, or *r: * he,’ ITR*. ‘ that per-
son,’ is commonly dropped before a consonant ; as,
‘ he goes <^rf?T ‘ he gives ITT IVsjt: ‘ that Vishnu but
not if the negative is prefixed, as ^Tir: ‘ not that Siva.’
a. In verse, for the convenience of the metre, *T not only
rejects the Visarga, but allows the final ^ to be conjoined
with a following vowel, by the rules of vowel-Sandhi ; as,
tun aPtfrf, 4 that Indra the king conquers,’ for ; so fN
W., ‘ that very Rama, the son of Das'aratha,’ for
^ tnr:.
CHAPTER III.
DECLENSION.
SECTION I.
General Rules.
47. Most nouns in the Sanskrit language are declinable
in one or more of three genders. They admit, with very few
exceptions, of three numbers, singular, dual, and plural ; and
of seven cases in each number; 1. the nominative, 2. accusa-
tive, 3. instrumental, 4. dative, 5. ablative, 6. genitive, 7. loca-
tive : of these it may be remarked, that the third or instrumental
has the sense of ‘ by’ or ‘ with the ablative, ‘ from ;’ and the
locative, ‘ in’ or £ on :’ the rest have the usual powers.
48. Inflexion, whether of declension or conjugation, is
contrived by the Sanskrit grammarians on the same principle.
It consists of two parts ; 1. the Anga, ‘ body,’ or inflective
base, that is, the word itself ; and, 2. of certain particles,
which, being attached to the base, complete the inflected
word. The inflectional terminations of conjugation will be
hereafter specified. We are concerned at present with those
of declension only.
49- The inflectional terminations of nouns are twenty-one ; .
GENERAL RULES.
29
some of them are repetitions : they are attached to the inflec-
tive base in each of the seven cases of the three numbers, and
are as follows :
nom. fir
acc. 3PT
\
’HT
instr. z\
«rr
fiPT
\
dat. 'i?
«tt
wpr
abl.
vqf
vqp
gen.
SPT
\
\
wr
loc.
\ O \
The vocative has no separate termination, being considered as
a modification only of the nominative.
50. Now of these inflectional terminations it is to be
remarked, that some of the letters serve only to form syllables,
and facilitate enunciation : they are rejected, therefore, when
those letters which are essential are applied to the base. These
auxiliary letters are the ^ of fir ; the tT of spr ; the ST of snr ;
the z of ZJ the 1? of the terminations T, ^fi^FT (in which also ^
is subordinate), 3PT, and fs?; and the tt of *r<t. It is also to
be recollected, that by rule 37. a final is changed to Yisarga.
The actual terminations therefore will be,
nom. :
acc. ’IT
*t:
instr. ’ST
«TT
fir.
dat. 1?
«TT
abl. ’5T:
«TT
«t:
gen. 3?:
*ft:
3TT^
loc. ^
3ft:
0
51. In applying these terminations to the final letter of the
inflective base, recollection must be preserved of the modifi-
cations which that final letter must undergo, whether it be a
vowel or a consonant, before the initial letters of the termina-
tions ; as in the following example :
30
DECLENSION.
navis,’ ‘ a
ship.’
nom.
»TR7
TTT.
acc.
»TR
?TRT
tr:
instr.
HNi
■^TRi
dat.
«TR
■^tr:
abl.
^tr:
Trr«n
■rtr:
gen.
^tr:
trt:
TRT
loc.
TTR
■JTTTt:
It will be observed, that before the consonants the word ^ is
unchanged ; before the vowels, becomes by rule 5.
The of is changed after to by rule 29.
It is worth while to pause for a moment upon this scheme of
inflectional terminations, and to understand it fully, as it fur-
nishes a useful clue to all the varieties of nominal inflexion which
follow. If it were rigidly applied, nothing would be so simple
as Sanskrit declension ; and even as it is, we are authorised
to affirm that there is but one general declension in Sanskrit
grammar. There are however various modifications, both of
the bases and of the terminations, in the individual nouns,
which render it convenient to divide them into classes : and
no arrangement admits of more ready reference than that
which classes them according to their final letters ; first, as
they are vowels or consonants ; and secondly, according to the
letter or class of letters in each of those divisions.
SECTION II.
Nouns ending in vowels.
Class I. Nouns ending in and ^rr.
52. Nouns ending in form by far the most numerous class
of nouns, and commonly admit of three genders, forming the
feminine by adding ^TT; as, masc. f^R Siva, the god; fem.
f^RT the goddess Siva.
NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
31
53. In forming the inflexions of all nouns, such changes as
may occur are of two descriptions; i. those affecting the base,
2. those affecting the termination.
54. Nouns ending in substitute in the base, vTTfor the final
before it substituted for u in the dat. sing. ; before the dual termi-
nation «ri ; and before the augment R, in the genitive case plural,
and in the nominative and accusative plural neuter. They sub-
stitute I* for their final before ’'rR in the dual, and «nr and
tt in the [dural. They insert R before the signs of the genitive
case plural, and the nominative and accusative plural neuter.
The feminine noun changes ’srr to R before the ^it of the
instrumental case singular, the of the dual, and in the
vocative case sing. ; and inserts xtt before the four last cases of
the singular, and R before ^TR in the gen. plural.
55. After nouns in other terminations are substituted for
those of the scheme, in some of the cases : thus,
Singular. Plural,
acc. J? for acc. R for
instr. ^R — 7T instr. RR — fvnj
dat. it — T
abl. WTTT — ^fR
gen. vj —
a. After the feminine noun fR is rejected, and ^ is substi-
tuted for ?rf in the nom. and acc. dual, and ^tr for fsF in
the locative case sing.
b. The neuter substitutes in the three numbers of the nom.
and accus. severally R § ?, the latter with R prefixed, as fR,
in place of the terminations of the masculine : in all the other
cases it adopts the terminations of the masculine.
56. We are now prepared to understand the construction
of the following forms of f$iR, bearing in mind the alterations
dependent upon the laws of combination, in joining the
inflectional terminations to the inflective base.
32 DECLENSION.
Masc. f$R S'iva the deity.
nom.
f3R:
f$RT
%Tr:
S'iva, &c.
acc.
RR
fw
ftnTPT
S'iva, &c.
instr.
RRVf
ftn^TRT
f3R:
By or with S'iva, &c
dat.
RiTR
fjRTRT
rrr:
To S'iva, &c.
abl.
fijRnr
flJRTRT
ftjRR:
From S'iva, &c.
gen.
fijiRRT:
fjiTPTT Of S'iva, &c.
loc.
fS[R
f^iwr:
In or on S'iva, &c.
voc.
f$R
f^iRr
rttf:
O S'iva ! &c.
Fem. RT7T thi
e goddess S'iva.
nom. fgiRT
f^R
f^RT.
acc. fijRT
f?R
f^Rr.
instr. f^RUT
f^RTwri
f^TRrfvr:
dat. fsRR
f$RTRT
ftJRTR*.
abl. f^RRT:
fSRTRT
f^iTT«r.
gen. f^RnTr.
nsOTi:
fijRTRT
loc. fsiTRT
rrsTt:
voc. f$R
fijR
fi*RT:
Neuter f$R ‘ auspicious.’
nora. and accus. fgR f^R ftJRTlR
voc. f^R f$R f?RTfrT
The rest as the masculine.
a. Other nouns declinable on the above models are the
following : they are given with the inflection of the nominative
case.
Masculine.
RR: a horse
SHRT^i: the sky
T?: a camel
«RRi: a crow
TTTrr: a quality
the moon
Feminine.
a woman
RRTT hope
^537 wish
ofiRT a girl
?jtTt the neck
Rf^'cRT moonlight
Neuter,
an egg
^rnr»T a seat
an organ of sense
^75 a family
n*r a house
Ref an umbrella
NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
S3
rJTt fever
iTtT decay
water
TT#: reasoning
WTTT a star
ifit a shore
a god
<ft?rr a swing
pain
virtue
UTTT an edge
wealth
a nail
TTTHI the nose
dancing
Tj'fK: a mountain
■qiTT worship
TJeT a leaf
a fish
a wife
JTc? a root
tTst: sacrifice
*rr?JT a garland
tnTff youth
flavour
preserving
blood
73T?: iron
pTSTT modesty
salt
a crane
^rfalT a lute
cpf a wood
TfpnH*. a jackall
3TMT beauty
a scripture
the ocean
*DTT an assembly
a rule
the hand
fV^TT injury
frost.
b. Many adjectives and participles declinable in the three
genders belong to this class.
c. The feminine nouns ^T^T, ^r^T, signifying chiefly
in poetic language ‘ mother,’ make their vocatives ^TW,
If the penultimate be not a conjunct consonant, other
synonymes follow the usual form, as % ^rf*pF,
‘ O mother V
57. Besides those nouns which are formed from masculine
nouns in ^r, by adding, as it is said, the feminine ending rPT,
that is, ^tt, there are nouns derived immediately from verbs
ending in ?it, as TT, *TTj WT, and the like, in which the final ’ST
is an essential, not an accidental letter. Such nouns admit of a
variety of gender. The declension of the masculine and femi-
nine noun is the same. In the neuter the final is made short,
and the word is declined like f$r?.
58. Nouns in then, in which the final is a radical letter,
combine with the terminations of the nominative case, and
with those of the singular and dual accusative, agreeably to
the laws of Sandhi. In the accusative plural and the follow-
ing cases the final ^rr is cut off before the vowel terminations,
F
34
DECLENSION.
and they are affixed at once to the word, as if it ended in a
consonant : before the consonantal terminations there is no
change ; as.
Masc. and fem. fVsgTrr ‘ all-preserving.’
—
fwq: —
fwftr —
fw*n &c.
nom. f^tgTTT*.
acc. TT^TT
instr.
dat.
abl.
gen.
loc.
voc.
fw»n:
frwfW:
ffrw
ftigxi'ra
So TTfiRT ‘ who drinks the Soma juice ^T^orr ‘ a shell-blower.’
59- The word *rn-T, the name of an inferior divinity, a
Gandharba, is considered as a primitive, and is inflected there-
fore throughout without any elision of the final, which com-
bines with the vowel terminations agreeably to the mles of
Sandhi, and is consequently in every way regularly declined.
nom.
?t?t: TTZl
acc.
—
*rnrn or ^ 1 ^ h
instr.
s?TFT ?T|rT«Ti
?T^rrfW:
dat.
^rrr«r:
abl.
FT^r. —
—
gen.
— ?t?t:
?T?T
loc.
—
voc.
FT?T &c.
Class II. Nouns ending in ^ and '3'.
60. Nouns ending in these two vowels may be conveni-
ently classed together, as they are analogously inflected ; recol-
lecting only that the semivowels to which they are changeable
before other vowels are respectively it and
61. In the masculine gender the changes of the base are,
the substitution of the long vowel for the final in the dual nom.
NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
35
and accus., and in the accus. and gen. plural ; the Guna letter
IT or is substituted for the final before »pr, and "3TT,
and in the vocative singular ; and the final is dropped before
the termination of the locative case singular : it is inserted
before the terminations of the instrumental case singular and
the gen. plural.
62. In the same gender the dual termination '3TT is rejected ;
*T is substituted for and for the lira of snt; the vowel
of in the ablative and genitive is dropped ; and w is
substituted for fr ; as follows :
‘ fire.’
vrriT ‘ the
sun.’
nom.
'srnft
w?rxt;
htfr:
acc.
—
HT*T
instr.
^fr^TTT
VTPpTT HT^«fT
dat.
—
vrriTT —
m^«t:
abl.
H:
—
—
HT?fr: —
—
gen.
—
■SG
— «T^ft:
>TT?rTT
loc.
—
HUTT
voc.
&c.
VTRT &C.
63. There are some
anomalies among nouns in
Thus
‘ a friend,’
substitutes ^tr for
the final in the
first five
inflexions, and inserts it before their vowel terminations. In
the other cases of the singular, and in the gen. and loc. dual,
it is more regular than the final ^ becoming if before a
vowel. In the nom. singular ft? is rejected, and in the abl.
and gen. TTT is substituted for Tftt and TfT.
*rft<T e a friend.’
nom.
*rar inrritT
acc.
wru —
WflT
instr.
*narr trfe«rf
wmfW:
dat.
TO — .
Trftrwt:
abl.
TTt^t: —
—
gen.
— tot:
loc.
voc.
&c.
F 2
36
DECLENSION.
a. In composition this word may be inflected regularly in
all the cases, or in all except the two first ; or mmm ‘ a
good friend or ‘ to a good friend,’ &c.
b. xrfrr, e a master,’ is declined like Tift? in the five last cases
singular ; as, mm, ''TO, mm, mj:, mm. In the rest like ^rfm.
mfinTT and miT sometimes occur.
xiffT in composition is declined like ^rfaTf ; as, mjfjr e a king/
(lord of the earth,) ^mr., mmft, mmrm, mpHT, &c.
64. Feminine nouns in ^ and T differ from the masculine
in the accus. plural, and in the third and following cases sin-
gular. They do not substitute 7^ for the Yisarga of nor
insert tt before tt. In the dative and following cases singular
they have two forms, one like the masculine : in the other
they insert mr before the affixes of the dative, ablative, and
genitive cases ; and, like feminine nouns in m, substitute
for the sign of the locative ; as,
Va milch cow.’
mm
mr? or V77
mfhormm:
*3
mrm
—
Fem. mfcT ‘ Mind.’
nom. *TfVr: mft mrm
acc. JTPrf — mft:
instr. nun nfiT«n nfrffn:
dat. nun or nn — nffnn:
abl. nn: or mm: — —
gen. mm: mffm
loc. mnormm — nfnn
o
VOC. nw &c.
65. Neuter nouns in ^ and n reject the terminations of the
nom. and accus. singular, substitute ^ and ^ for the dual and
plural terminations, and insert 7f before them and all other
terminations beginning with a vowel. They lengthen the final
before 7^ in the plural.
mn or mm —
mft &c.
V7T»TT
*35
mft ‘ water.’
mt * honey.’
nom. )
mix
acc. )
mfxxft
mxfftiT
mmFf
©V
instr. mfWT
mfrmf
mfxfm
mwm
*rmm
nvfW:
O
dat. mfxd
—
mrfxwi:
o
NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
37
abl.
mr«n
gen. —
Trfwt:
TRhTTT
*r^r.
JTViTT
loc. XTfrfrr
Hvf?T
voc. Xtft or
XTT &c.
o
O
*T*r or
o
& c.
66. There are a few neuter nouns in ^ which before the
vowel terminations of all the cases except the two first, and
optionally before f?, drop the final vowel ; as,
*rfezr ‘
a bone.’
nom.
|
■*rfw
acc.
1
instr.
^rferfW:
dat.
—
abl.
-hwh:
—
—
gen.
—
-HWJHI
loc.
or ^wjPh
—
voc.
fwi &c.
a. ‘ an eye,’ ‘ ghee,’ and ‘ a thigh,’ are simi-
larly declined : the fact being, in all probability, that as nouns
in ^ they are defective, and their deficiencies are supplied
before the vowrel terminations by analogous but obsolete nouns
ending in as ^TW^T,
b. Other nouns in
models, are,
^ and declinable
on the above
Masc. in
Fem. in
Masc. in
'arffc: a sword
agriculture
life
V9
"^fa: a sage
'C^Tf^rT: patience
sugar cane
ofifx: a poet
Tlfw: going
a season
fnlx: a mountain
wrfTf: caste, sort
a teacher
»rf%: a jewel
rftrfr: light
a relation
tfx: the sun
vfrT: firmness
the sun
a heap
TTXfrT. nature
srn; death
C v»
■fafv: an ordinance
understanding
fxxpi: Vishnu
a charioteer
xfo rain
XTfTt a bambu
O
a name of Vishnu
wfw: remembrance
^Tcj: an enemy.
38
DECLENSION.
c. There are not many feminine substantive nouns in it, and
but few neuter either in ^ or "3. Adjectives of course, or
substantives used attributively, may, with few exceptions, be
declined in three genders.
d. When a noun in ? or T, whether substantive or attri-
butive, is used in the neuter gender in the same sense in
which it is employed in the masculine, it is optionally declinable
in all the cases of which the terminations begin with vowels,
except the two first, either after the masculine or neuter form ;
as ’Hvnfii ‘ eternal neuter nom. and acc. ^RTT?, tSH i fij *fl,
^nTPitfJT ; instr. ---N^lfafTT ; dat. or 'JHlfi: if ; abl. and gen.
M : or ^rffTf^T: ; loc. ^rJTT^r or lf<{f«T; gen. and loc. dual
'5'rrraT: or ^rrfinfr:. If tile sense differs, the neuter fonn only
is admissible : masc. ‘ a kind of tree neut. ‘ the fruit of
the Pfiu tree dat. abl. and gen. i/i'Fpr., loc. &c.
e. Other neuter nouns in ^ and are derived from nouns
terminating in the long vowels ^ and "5i.
Class III. Nouns ending in ^ and "Si.
6 7. The chief peculiarity affecting the inflective base, or
the word itself, in nouns terminating in f and '3i, regards the
substitution in some cases of the syllables and for the
finals S and ^ before those inflective terminations which begin
with vowels. When these syllables are substituted, the nouns
are inflected before the vowel terminations as if they ended
with the semivowels <1 and W. When those syllables are not
substituted, the final vowels combine with the vowels of the
terminations, agreeably to the laws of Sandhi, with very few
exceptions.
68. After the syllables and ^ the inflective termina-
tions undergo no changes ; after the finals ^ and they
undergo a few, chiefly after feminine nouns, analogous to those
already observable in feminine nouns of the pi’eceding classes,
and depending on the same conditions.
69. and are severally substituted for the final ^ and
NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
39
*5 of masculine nouns, when they are monosyllabic verbal
derivatives, or when the finals are preceded by a conjunct con-
sonant ; as, vl (for tfl) ‘ to think,' 75 ‘ to cut,’ ‘ to serve.’
Masc. vt ‘
who understands.’
Masc.
75 ‘ w
O'
ho cuts.’
nom. vk
fw
fw.
75:
Cn
7*r.
acc. fvrtf
—
—
tsv
—
instr. ftr*TT
vhvf
vTfW:
dat. fw
—
vt*r.
—
75«i:
O'
abl. fv^r:
—
—
w-
—
gen. —
fwk
fw
75ft:
0
75^i
loc. fvnr
voc. vk &c.
—
vfrr
O
Tsfv
7J: &c.
7SV
a. Nouns of this description are not considered as ceasing
to be monosyllabic by having particles prefixed to them, which
merely qualify their application ; therefore Tjvk ‘ a man of good
understanding,’ TTTRVk 4 a man of excellent understanding,’ and
the like, substitute TH for the final ; *nfk, imnn, So
‘self-existent,’ from ‘self,’ and i* ‘being,’ a name of
Brahma, makes .
b. They are considered as polysyllabic if derived from a com-
pound verb, as svT * a man of superior understanding,’ which
is a derivative, not from the simple verb vf, but the compound
verb uvl, and therefore is declined uvk, 3T«rr, TT^TC, &c., the final
becoming xr before a vowel, by rule 4 : and they are also con-
sidered as polysyllabic if the first member of the compound is
a subordinate term, or one not in opposition, as ‘ born
in the rains,’ ‘ a frog.’ There are also certain compounds of
which are by special rule excepted from substituting w ;
as, T*i‘ born again,’ jp^‘a snake,’ ofiTTT^4 born in a prison,’
‘ produced from the hand :’ these are all declined, as,
w., ^rr*fi, w*n, &c.
70. Masculine nouns ending in ^ or "3i, when consisting of
more than one syllable in consequence of being compounded
with another noun as a subordinate term, or being derived
40
DECLENSION.
from a modification of the verb, merely follow the rules of
combination ; that is, ^ becomes it, and 3i, 3, before a vowel
affix.
‘ a general' (from itTfT ‘ an
army,’ and ‘ who leads’).
nom. Tbrrqfl: innsfi
acc. —
instr. ^TTSH «vfrWl«rf
dat. —
abl. it^rra: —
gen . — Tr^rr^n:
loc. TWiaji —
voc. ^VTTvfi: &c.
TRnflm:
TTTTffl^T:
THTT^rr
C\
a sweeper,
’ (^Tc5 ‘ a
place,
’ & it ‘who cleans’).
Cv /
W&TZT.
—
WoSvt
—
C\
—
—
Cn
&C.
^15
a. '?ft, * to lead,’ and its compounds substitute ^TT*T for in
the locative.
b. W ‘ who drinks (moisture),’ i. e. the sun, derived from
TjT ‘ to drink ;’ infr ‘ a road,’ from HT ‘ to go ‘ an
antelope,’ from TTTT ‘ the wind’ and wl ‘ w7ho outstrips and
^|r a demigod so named ; differ from in three cases :
acc. sing, tjttfV acc. plur. xjxffrf loc. sing, tpft
— xnff — — tnft
Wmfi ^TrnrflTjf 'M I ri uni
‘ ^ ^ S' fcS
CvCN C C- \ Cn ^
They may, however, be also regularly declined in these cases,
as truT, tnq:, Tjfut, &c.
c. <3 in composition, as ‘ who cuts barley,’ makes
either or ^TPTnT in the gen. plur., and i in the loc.
singular.
71. Feminine nouns in ^ and 35, like masculine nouns, are
declined in two ways : if they are monosyllables, or contain a
conjunct consonant, they substitute ■jpr and "3"^ for their finals ;
if polysyllabic, they change the finals, agreeably to the laws
of Sandhi, to ^ and ^ before the affixes commencing with
vowels.
NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
41
72. Feminine nouns of the first description optionally prefix
??T to the affixes marked by a mute T, like feminine nouns in
the short ^ and 7.
73. They optionally prefix ^ to ^TR in the gen. plural, and
substitute ^TR for in the loc. singular; as.
''iff ‘ prosperity.’
nom. Tjft: feref fzrm
acc. f*jR — —
instr.f^Tin
dat. or
abl. rpt: or f^nrr: — —
I
H ‘ the earth.’
Cv
W vn:
C\ Cv
|H^or*rt — W.
| o V> C\
; w?: or w: — —
gen. f%nft: f^ntfor 'efltrii >pft: or vnrr
loc. or fw — ',sfN *rfaor>R7 — w
o o vi cso
voc. ^ff: &c. ' ij: &c.
74 Feminine nouns of the second description, having more
than one syllable, and being derivative nouns from masculine
nouns by the substitution of the terminations ^ and "3i for the
masculine final, insert ^?T before the terminations having a
mute T, make the vowel short in the voc. singular, and prefix
R to the termination of the gen. plural.
The R of the nominative is rejected after such nouns in
but not after '3i. After both, is substituted for R for
the of 'snr, and ’RR for fe; as,
«T^t ‘ a river.’
a wife.’
nom.
wr
Rar.
rrt
rr:
acc.
RfV —
R^fc
—
instr.
Ran
r<(Kr:
RRT
dat.
Rar —
Ri|
abl.
Ran: —
—
rjrt:
—
—
gen.
— Raft:
RtftRT
—
Raft:
loc.
Ran —
RRT
—
voc.
rIr &c.
& C.
O
a. The rejection of R after a feminine noun ending in ^
depends upon that $ being the feminine termination, or sign
G
DECLENSION.
12
of the feminine gender. If it is part of the word itself, the
sibilant becomes Visarga, as usual ; as, ‘ the goddess
Lakshmi,5 TP?(h ‘ a lute,’ irck ‘ a boat.’
b. ‘ a woman,’ is inflected in the nom. and voc. like vpfl,
and optionally so in the accus. singular and plural : in the
other cases like But the insertion of ^ before the gen.
plural, and of ^rr before the terminations with a mute T, and
the substitution of wr for f? are absolute, not optional as
in
nom.
acc.
or
—
or
instr.
WT
dat.
—
abl.
f*5Pn:
—
—
gen.
—
%*n:
loc.
—
voc.
% &c.
c. Feminine nouns in ^ and '3i, when compounded so as to
form attributes, are to be declined like nouns masculine, when
used in the sense of a masculine noun, as Trsft, ‘ a prosperous
man,5 takes, in the dative, ablative, genitive, and locative cases,
only one form, viz. wfsre, * *rf^PTC, and If the compound
is only a qualification of the substantive, the feminine form
may be followed, as ‘ good fortune,5 makes or
&c. If the noun is a word invariably feminine, it retains its
feminine terminations, although used as an attribute of a male,
as ‘ a man of many good qualities,5 makes
d. Feminine nouns formed from verbal roots, and com-
pounded with subordinate terms, however, when used in a
sense analogous to that of the masculine, take exactly the
same form, as ‘ a female head of a village,5 ‘ a
female sweeper,’ make, accus. sing, and plur. JjTRtnj, UTOWb
* Wilkins has or %RT, but the Kaumudi expressly excepts W*
from the alternative.
NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
43
; dat. ; abl. and gen. gmTnr:, ;
gen. plur. JflHWi. 7373T37 ; loc. TjlHTRi (see rule 70. «.), JjmPm ;
voc. TJTiTTD't:, •
«• So ‘ twice-being,’ if it be applied to man or woman
indifferently, is declined in the same manner ; mf. TpT«f,
; but if it mean ‘ a woman twice married,’ it is declined
like Tpfvt, Tpr>#T.
f. The object of these rules, and of others affecting nouns
ending in ^ and '35, is to intimate that a word which may be
applied to an object either male or female is declined in a
form common to both ; that is, with the masculine termina-
tions : when it is limited to a distinct female object, it is
declinable only with the feminine terminations, as in the
instance of n«T>t. So also ^T>T for instance, being 4 a male’ or
‘ female frog,’ is declined alike, -fo, ->?: ; but the
same word being the name of a plant, in which sense there
is no male, is declined only, ^r§T«rf:, T*b«tT, ^nb>J.
7 5. Nouns in ^ and ^ which are susceptible of the neuter
gender, substitute the short vowels ^ and '3‘ for their finals.
If the word is an attributive, and the sense of the neuter is
analogous to that of the other genders, the word is declined in
all the cases of which the affixes begin with vowels, except the
two first, optionally, as if it were a noun ending in ^ or '35 long ;
that is, the final becomes or ^ before the vowel : otherwise
•T is inserted, as after ^rfr. Thus ‘ who leads or is
chief over a village ;’ JjTinnf: 4 a head-man Brahman
ii 1 u Jid: ’wrenrff 4 a Brahman woman, head of a village
4 a family, chief over a village.’ The inflexion of the latter is,
acc” ' ] ?JTWlm
instr. TTPTtTirr or Jjmfiirwn jpcjRrrfa:
dat. or jjth filler —
abl. JJTFnni: or JjmflTR: — —
gen. iTRTnft: or ?rmfinTr: JTTmn'bn
loc. JjriTwr UT^rfirru
G 2
44
DECLENSION.
a. Nouns ending in ^ and '35 as dei’ived from simple verbal
roots are not numerous, the roots not being in any number ;
but they admit of being multiplied as compounded with other
words. Feminine nouns formed by the affixes ^ and '3i, and
especially the former, are more frequent,
unft: m. a leader, a guide. qfrW m- a surety.
^Hlfl f. a damsel. ■qir: f. an army.
qfqqt f. the earth. >f: f. the eyebrow.
Hfrpft f. a sister. qnj*. f. a mother-in-law.
fqqTrft f. a shop. W: f. a woman with good eyebrows.
Class IV. Nouns in qj and <5 and
76. Masculine nouns in qj substitute for the final, and,
according to the analogy of nouns in form the nominative
in wr ; as, fqff ‘ a father,’ nom. fqrrr.
77. In one class of nouns in qj, the Guna form *TT, in
another the Yriddhi qnr, is substituted for the final before the
vowel terminations of the nominative dual and plural, and of
the accusative sing, and dual. Before the accus. and gen.
plur. the vowel is made long. ^ is inserted before Wf.
Before the vowel terminations of the instr. and dat. singular,
and gen. and loc. dual, qj is changed by Sandhi to the
semivowel I ; it is changed to m in the locative and vocative
cases sing.
78. The only changes in the affixes are, the rejection of IT
in the nominative sing. ; the substitution of for 7[TT in the
accus. plural, and of 'S'TT for ^ttt in the abl. and gen. singular ;
tt is rejected ; and the ^ of TTT is prefixed to the semivowel
T., which as a final is changed to Visarga.
fxnj ‘ a father.’
qr# ‘ a doer.’
nom. ftnn ftTO
ftnrn:
qrtro
acc. fltrlf —
fqTtq
t \
—
instr. fq^T fq-ff«ri
fq^m:
qrffiT:
dat. fq^ —
•sc
^3
—
qrf*T.
NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
45
abl.
fqw: fw*n
cs#:
o
gen.
— fTefr.
fq-iprT
^eft:
^r|inT
loc.
fwfx —
—
voc.
fqir: &c.
&c.
a. Most masculine nouns implying affinity are declined like
fgw ; as, >mT ‘ a brother,’ »n*rnj ‘ a son-in-law,’ ^ ‘ a husband’s
brother but its , ‘ a grandson,’ makes ttsjt, HNlCl, ^TVTCb TSTT,
in the first five inflexions.
b. Feminine nouns of affinity are declined also like fcnj, except
in the accus. plural ; as ‘ a mother,’ makes Jim, JTTrRT, Jffin::,
mut, HTtRT, imr: ; so <rf?TT £ a daughter :’ but ‘ a sister,’ is
declined like fTJTT ; WHT, &c. ; acc. plural, .
c. ^T, ‘a man,’ is declined like ffcrff, except in the gen.
plural, where the vowel is optionally short, as ^tttt or ^TT-
d. Nouns formed from roots by the addition of the particles
or Tpr (in which the finals are used merely to distinguish
them from each other) are nouns of agency, and are declined
like 3i#. They are also declinable in three genders.
e. The feminine is formed with the affix before which
the semivowel t. is substituted for ^ : thus becomes
in the feminine, and is declined like
f. The neuter is formed analogously to neuter nouns in ^
and ’3‘; and as there are no substantive neuter nouns in
the neuter of attributives being mostly usable in the same
sense as the masculine, then by a similar analogy the neuter
nouns in admit also of two forms before the vowel termina-
tions of all the cases except the two first ; either inserting
before them, or taking the same form as the masculine : thus,
nom. and accus. «jv#, ^rtrrff, sing, instr. or ^i#T;
dat. cfi'ltif or ; abl. and gen. oft#?!!: or ofi#: ; loc. ^#Ti!T or
; gen. and loc. dual, cjHhrft: or . Before the other
terminations the forms are the same as in the masculine.
g. * a jackal,’ has lost some of its cases, and they are
in part supplied by the inflexions of ^in?, which are those of
nouns in '3'. Some of the cases belong to both nouns.
46
DECLENSION'.
nom.
^TFRT
Wa y it:
acc. TfiTFlt
—
instr. or
dat. or
abl. or W!Tf:
—
—
gen.
or
■=hlg«li
Cv
loc. -+iyR or
voc. or &c.
To the preceding examples of nouns in
FJ may be added
‘ a man of the military caste ^ m. '
! a conqueror,’ or
‘ victorious m. ‘ a
donor,’ or mfn.
‘liberal;’ >rnr m.
C
* a creator mfn. ‘ cherishing ; ‘ a warrior,’ mfn. ‘ warlike
and ^ m. e a priest.’
79- There are a few roots ending in from which verbal
nouns may be formed ; as, from c|, * scatter,’ comes ‘ who
or what scatters.’ These are usually inflected by substituting
for the radical ; agreeably to which, becomes fsR, and is
then declined like nouns ending in ; as fgx., nom. oft:, ficRT,
fofit:, &c. If this change does not take place, the noun is
regularly declined, substituting the semivowel i. before the
vowel terminations ; as "s ‘ who injures nom. "5:, w, "3i:, &c.
These forms are of rare occurrence.
80. The same may be said, with still greater truth, of
nouns ending in 7? and 7£ ; but grammarians admit the possi-
bility of their occurrence : thus , the root 7tf ‘ to go,’ with
the affix 75, may be declined analogously to nouns ending in
as, rpn, 7RF51, *1*^: . In the ablative and genitive 7 is
substituted for the of *nr, and prefixed to the final semi-
vowel ; TT is rejected, as being the last member of a conjunct
consonant : the form is therefore TTF75. This is of little
O \
practical value.
Class V. Nouns in 7?.
81. There are no simple nouns ending in F, but compounds
are exhibited to illustrate the declension of nouns so terminat-
NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
47
ing ; as XT, which is compounded of it, * with,’ and ‘ love
‘ one who loves.’ The declension is regular, except in the
abl. and gen. singular, where the initial of is rejected ; as,
sing. nom. w:, acc. inf, instr. TRT, dat. tr, abl. and gen. it:,
loc. Trfxr ; dual nom. and acc. instr. dat. and abl. ir«rf, gen.
and loc. Tnft: ; plural nom. and acc. TR:, instr. itfW:, dat. and
abl. ttr:, gen. irt, loc. wj.
Class VI. Nouns in i».
82. Nouns ending in it are declined regularly, the termi-
nations are unchanged ; the inflective base substitutes ^rr for
its final before the consonantal terminations, and is changed
to ^TR, agreeably to the laws of Sandhi, before the vowels ;
as t mf., ‘ wealth,’ makes
nom.
XT.
turf
tm:
acc.
tR
—
—
instr.
trm
tT«n
trfW:
dat.
UR
—
ur:
abl.
tr:
—
—
gen.
—
tnft:
tnrf
loc.
Tjf?
—
*1
83. The neuter of nouns in it is formed by changing the
final before the vowel terminations to and inflecting it like
neuters in Before the consonants, ’5TT is substituted for the
final; as ‘ wealthy ;’ n. lift; sing. nom. and acc. Tift, instr.
pfoni, dat. nfttr, abl. 'and gen. Trfw., loc. TrftftT; dual nom.
and acc. nfttft, instr. dat. and abl. TORT, gen. and loc. nfwt: ;
plural nom. and acc. nfVfa, instr. TOfir:, dat. and abl. TOR:,
gen. Trthni, loc. Turn.
a. Some grammarians affirm, that when it is used attri-
butively, a neuter noun ending in like those ending in ^ or
7 &c. (see rule 75), may take also the masculine form before
the vowel terminations 7T &c., as Tlfwr or TORT ; but this is
denied by the best authorities.
48
DECLENSION.
Class VII. Nouns in ^fi.
84. Nouns in both masculine and feminine, substitute
the Vriddhi letter ^ for the final before the three terminations
of the nominative case and that of the accusative dual. They
substitute ’'rr for the final before the terminations of the accu-
sative singular and plural. Before the other vowel termina-
tions *rt becomes by rule of Sandhi 5, except before ^fn
and inr, which reject the initial ^ of 'sm, and consecjuently
the final of the base is unchanged.
nt ‘ a cow.’
nom. ft!:
nrrr
nm:
acc. nT
—
nr.
instr. tht
nr«rr
ntfn:
dat. nn
—
nhn:
abl. nh
—
—
gen. —
nnt:
nni
loc. nfn
—
nf^
85. In the neuter the final is changed to '3‘, as TS7} Tjrrr
‘ pasture near the cow which is declined like neuters in '3’.
a. Here also authorities differ as to the alternative of inflect-
ing the neuter optionally as the masculine in the instrumental
and other cases singular, ^tpjnT or TnnTT &c. : the former is
to be preferred.
Class VIII. Nouns in
86. Nouns in ^f, masculine and feminine, are strictly
regular, as in the example already given of nr ‘ navis,’ ‘ a
boat.’ In the neuter the final becomes ^ ; as *r<5 * the
water beyond the boat ^rfrrg, wfirfpft, ’Jrfrrnfn. &c.
a. The nouns that end in diphthongs are not numerous.
To the preceding may be added mf. ‘ heaven,’ and nFTT m.
‘ the moon.’
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
49
SECTION II.
Nouns ending in consonants.
87. Nouns ending in consonants may also be conveniently
arranged according to the classification of the letters by analogy
of articulation ; distinguishing further those ending ■w ith the
nasals, semivowels, sibilants, and with as constituting
separate classes.
88. Nouns ending in consonants modify their finals before
the inflectional terminations, agreeably to the rules of Sandhi :
thus a hard consonant is optionally changed to a soft when
it is final, that is, in the nominative singular : absolutely,
before the terminations of the dual and plural beginning with
A soft consonant must be changed to a hard consonant
before w. Before the terminations beginning with vowels they
are unchanged, as they are then no longer considered final
letters.
89- Whatever other special modifications the inflective base
may undergo, they are, with a few exceptions, confined to the
first five inflections ; that is, to the nominative in the three
numbers, and the accusative in the singular and the dual.
Whatever form the word assume before the termination of the
accusative plural, is preserved before all subsequent termina-
tions beginning with vowels.
90. The inflectional terminations are attached unchanged to
the final consonant of the base : the only seeming irregularity
is the rejection of as the termination of the nominative
singular ; but this is the result of the rule, that of a final
conjunct consonant the last member shall be rejected. (See
rule 35.
91. As the inflectional terminations are unchanged, there is
of course but one form for both masculine and feminine nouns.
In the neuter gender the terminations of the two first cases
dual and plural are changed, as after nouns ending in vowels, to
^ and and ^ is prefixed to the last consonant of the base.
H
50
DECLENSION.
Class I. Nouns ending in the gutturals 7?, it, tt.
92. There is no peculiarity in the declension of these nouns :
their inflexion is conformable to the rules of Sandhi. The final
of the nominative may be either of the unaspirated, letters, ^ or
7T ; thus ‘ omnipotent,’ makes or ; and
4 a painter,’ makes also or Before
the vowels the termination of the base is unchanged, as
Before >T the final must be the unaspirated soft
consonant, TiisF^n, f^fTFwri. Before the ^ of tt the unaspi-
rated hard consonant must be placed, fig# Pfi '<*u ; or
the sibilant being changeable after a guttural to it, the form
may be or in the compound letter, ^rf^TST.
In the neuter, the nominative and accusative forms are,
or n *rt5T*t
or n r^r^i fi##fVsf#
Class II. Nouns ending in the palatals ^r, "gf, 'W,
93. Nouns ending in a palatal commonly substitute «fi for the
final before the inflectional terminations beginning with conso-
nants ; which again is subject to the usual euphonic changes.
TFT
‘ speech.’
o \
who eats.5
nom. ^TcSorTT7!
grgr grg:
»nr.
acc.
— —
&
—
—
instr.TFTT
^F«n Trfar:
ipn
HT«IT
dat. ■gr^r
— ^pr«i:
—
abl. Tr^r:
— —
>pr.
—
—
gen. —
^ imV. i
»pfk
loc. grfig
— gi oii« or gng
yfz
—
•i o
VOC. TTcfi &c.
^ &c.
n. gT3i or r-l!W) 4 1 I*
^ or yr
94. There are several anomalies in this class, as regarding,
not the inflectional terminations, but the inflective base.
a. Derivatives from the roots erg * cut,5 * fry,5 ^
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
51
‘ create/ ‘ rub/ ‘ worship/ ‘ shine/ >jtj^ ‘ shine/ g>^
‘go/ substitute for their final in the nom. sing., and before
the terminations beginning with vr and g ; that is, they are
declined like nouns ending in tt, which in those cases substi-
tute z before a hard, and ^ before a soft consonant.
b. is further changed to vpr, ‘ who fries/ and g^sr to
TV who cuts/ before the terminations beginning with con-
sonants ; they are changed to and before those
beginning with vowels.
nom. nz or gg
e\ t \
gwt
acc. ggr
—
—
instr. ggrr
gTWTT
t \
Tf**
dat. gg^
—
TO:
abl. ggr:
—
gen. —
gsft:
TO
loc. gfisr
—
TO
c. So pP5T, * who cuts/ makes ^ or T^’»
Y?«rr, g?g. , ‘ creator of the universe/ makes, nom.
sing. or -g?, nom. dual nom. acc. plur. frsggg:,
instr. dual loc. plur. fgvsjg^g ; but gg, ‘ a garland/
derived from the same root, makes, nom. g«R or g*T, gg: ;
instr. dual grvqT, loc. plur. ggg ; and ggg, ‘blood/ is differently
inflected, as will be noticed below. gfiTjg, ‘ who cleanses/ makes,
nom. sing, or nom. dual -ggr, instr. dual -ijirwri, &c.
being substituted for gg,) ‘ a worshipper of the gods,’
makes gg? or nom. dual instr. dual &c. ;
but gjfrgg, ‘ a ministering priest/ which is also derived from
^g for * to worship/ is regular ; nom. sing, gjfrgcfi or gjfigg,
nom. dual gffiggt, instr. dual gjfigTttri, &c. , ‘ a ruler/
makes, nom. sing. TCTC or tt?, nom. dual rnp1, instr. dual TT?«rf ;
but fg HUM , ‘ a universal ruler/ has this peculiarity, that when
the final of trg is changed, the short final vowel of fgg[ is
made long ; as, nom. sing. fcnSTTO? or -TT?, nom. dual f=|3<Kigt,
acc. sing. fgsgrrg, instr. dual fgwu^^rf, &c. fggTrj, ‘ who
shines much,’ makes, nom. sing, fwr^ or -gig, nom. dual
H 2
52
DECLENSION.
fwnrt, instr. dual fwT3«rf ; but this is a derivative from the
root, which is marked in the lists of radicals, as £->n"3T. There
is another root, ‘ to shine,’ without the prefix <r, and its
derivatives are regular; as, nom. sing, fwra or fwrn, nom.
dual fwrar, instr. dual fwrrvqt, &c. gf'raT'JT, ‘ a mendicant,’
‘ an errant,’ makes, nom. sing. xrfT3T7 or -■?, nom. dual i| fbri |jfl,
instr. dual &c.
\
95. Derivatives from roots ending in ^ or formed by
adding the affix technically termed insert a nasal before
the final in the first five inflexions ; as, ^ *r, ‘ who joins,’ from
Tpr, ‘join,’ makes, nom. xjT, xtw, ; acc. XT#, xr# ; in the
rest it is regular, acc. plur. xpr:, instr. sing. ^rTT, instr. dual
xpgf, loc. plur. xm. It is regular throughout in composition ;
as vr^xrg, a constellation so named, makes, nom. w»jggi or-JT,
»T: . gsr also, if derived from gfgr, is regular ;
as xr>T ‘one who meditates ;’ nom. gg or xm, &c.
O \ 7 O \ O V
a. ‘ a curlew,’ retains the nasal throughout : as, nom.
; instr. ^t, ; loc. plur. or
ffl-
96. Derivations of ’SPi in the sense of ‘going,’ compounded
with prepositions and with certain other words, are very irre-
gular. They are,
JTra eastern. moving all round.
western.
moving equally.
northern.
moving with.
’-S 'A 1 -3
southern.
fffxg^ moving crookedly.
Which are thus inflected
TTra ‘ eastern.’
:
‘western.’
nom. HT^
tit^:
acc. gT^T
—
hh:
—
gTfrg:
instr. Ttr^T
tnfrvr.
TTrft^T TTrgxvgf
ggfri?:
dat. UT%
—
tttxwt:
gffhr —
irgxwi;
abl. trrg:
—
—
tnffig: —
—
gen. —
urgr.
irrgrf
— trrfNri:
Hrflgi
loc. trrfg
—
TTT^
TJrftfg —
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
53
a. They form the feminines by dropping the nasal, and
adding the termination as TTR% HTthn, and are declined like
The neuters are regular ; as, nom. and acc jrr«R,
Hlf=€ ; XTr*r=K, JnfNt, TTiirf% ; the rest like the masculine.
is declined like ITT^. "3^^ substitutes ^ for the antepenulti-
mate before the accus. plur. and following vowel terminations ;
as, T^TT, ‘3^3, 37fNT, &c. Those derivatives also
in which the semivowel occurs, change it to analogously
to the similar change in hkj^ • fn*iNr is changed to frTTSJ
before the vowel terminations beginning with the accus. plur.
nom.
fTT^Nff
fiTaNr:
acc. f?TW#
—
instr. frTr^T
ffTGEbvqi
dat. firrg
—
abl. frrr??:
—
—
gen. —
fffwt:
frtWT
loc. farfra
—
b. When the derivatives are from a similar root, but which
has a different meaning, namely, c to worship,’ they follow
the rules of Sandhi only ; that is, ^ is rejected when final, and
before a consonant, when also the palatal nasal becomes the
guttural; as, irra ‘who worships:’ sing. nom. TTTT, acc. TTT^r,
instr. TTP3T, dat. trr%, abl. and gen. ur5?:, loc. urf%; dual. nom.
and acc. TTUirl, instr. dat. and abl. tit?«IT, gen. and loc. ;
plur. nom. and acc. tmi:, instr. dat. and abl. TTT^«i:, gen.
HT^rf, loc. ITT^ST. Fem. sing. nom. TTT^fl, TTT^TT, ; neut.
nom. and acc. ^raj, trrf%.
97. There are not many nouns ending in «£, but they
follow the model of cP3 &c. before the consonants, and option-
ally change to $T before the vowels : thus * who asks
all,’ makes,
nom. or -3 ?r^TTTW or -JTT$TT TTfUTST. or
acc. ^rfsrrei or mui
54
DECLENSION.
^ g[ u i d : fa:
instr. ^rfirrsT or -irrsn
dat. iritrra or -irrtr —
abl. ^#rrr$: or -irrjTt —
gen. « § H I «Tt: or -TTT^ft: or -HTJTf
loc. Tr|irrra or -nrf^T
98, « to sacrifice,’ when compounded with the preposi-
tion ^r=r, lengthens its penultimate vowel before the vowel
inflectional terminations, and is declined like a noun ending
in TT before the consonants, as if it was an imperfect noun
supplied in part by the obsolete noun Thus
‘ an inferior worshipper/ makes,
nom.
^tnrnrt
acc.
—
—
instr.
gnrqrsTi
sjn ni fa:
dat.
—
abl.
—
—
gen.
—
rsfh
wimri
loc.
voc.
wtrrftr —
or &c.
O
99. *3^, ‘ a lame man/ drops, agreeably to the rules of
combination, the last member of its conjunct, when final, or
when followed by a consonant : hence, sing. nom. W?T, instr.
dual ; plur. T^frvn, loc. plur. ttsft . Before the vowels
there is no change ; &c.
100. "3!^, ‘ strong,’ may reject one »T before a pause or a
consonant, but is in other respects regular : sing. nom. '3i'3i or
■gin, acc. '35'^T, instr. ■3rrtT ; dual instr. ; plur. instr. ■grfVj^:,
loc. ■gret, &c. The neuter plural may be ■gfifijif or ■gif-sf ; but
in composition with wz, ‘ much/ the nasal, if inserted, must
precede the final consonant ; as, plur. nom. and acc. ^fgfi or
very strong.’
101. ^npT. ‘blood/ a neuter noun, optionally borrows its
inflexions in the accus. plur. and following cases from an obso-
lete noun, which is inflected like other nouns in «5[.
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
OO
nora. ^raaft
acc. — —
instr. ?nprr or or
dat. or
abl. ^jT: or
gen. xMWifi: or ’snak
loc. or
— or ’liTIlfJT
or
or
^TRiTT or
or
to o
Class II. Nouns ending in cerebrals, or 7, Z, S, 7.
102. Nouns terminating in these letters do not, as far as is
yet known, occur ; but 7 and s are used as the substitutes of
nouns ending in The first, as a hard consonant, is changed
optionally when final, and absolutely before the inflexions
beginning with «, to s.
Class IV. Nouns terminating in the dentals, ft, vj, 7, v.
103. Nouns terminating in consonants of the dental class
are for the most part regular, being subject to no other changes
than those which the laws of Sandhi require. The final in
the nominative is either the unaspirated hard or soft letter w
or 7 ; before it is the soft 7 ; and before w the hard con-
sonant w ; as in the following paradigmas of ?fierf ‘ green,’
q ‘ one who kindles fire,’ ‘ a bull’s hump,’ *rf*TV
‘ fuel.’
mfn.
s. nom. TfiCfT or
^ \ \
— acc. ^ fen
— inst. ?fbn
d.inst.&c. §f«|f
pi. inst. ^ fiefs*.
— loc.
mfn.
or
^fTTprq
^Tfirvrmn
?(D HU'jyf
^frvprfs*.
-nfiviUrM
f.
Trfrrv f.
or
Trfifr?^ or -?
TrflTVT &C.
^rfirgrr &c.
*rfafs:
The neuter form of the two first is in the nom. and acc. ;
TfiCrT or sfirf^T ; ^fii^Uff or -<*, ^OvfHvfl, ;
but ‘ who cuts much,’ and similar derivatives, do not
insert the nasal in the plural ; as, ■iffir?^ or
56
DECLENSION.
a. ‘ a tooth/ and xpr, ‘ an army/ are considered as
optionally substituted for and UrT^TT ; as, sing. nom. or
^ or ^nTt, acc. or instr. ^TTT or ; dual instr. &c.
^5IT or &c.
b. So tr?, ‘ a foot/ is the optional substitute for xp^ in all
cases, and absolutely for xp? in composition, but only in the
accus. plur. and subsequent cases beginning with vowels ; as,
sing. nom. xpr or xpr or xp^:, acc. xj^ or xpxf, instr. xpp or xpTpT ;
dual instr. &c. xt^jt, xp^Twp, &c. : but ^PTHTT?, ‘ tiger-foot/ a
plant so named, makes, nom. xqrtrxp^ or -xp?, ^TTSHTTifr, xtprpp^: ;
acc. xmxpTT?, ^rraxnrr, ^tnrtr^: ; instr. ^mrq<?T, ^mTxrrsgt, xap*
mfk:, &c. In like manner, ‘ the heart/ is a substitute for
f^xj ; nom. or &c.
104. xr^rff, ‘ the spleen/ and ‘ ordure/ neuter nouns,
are declined analogously to ; that is, they optionally
substitute in the accusative plural and subsequent cases the
inflexions of obsolete nouns ending in as xprx^ and '^PF^.
nom.
acc. —
instr. xj^in or xr^r
dat. xiWa' or xj^j
abl. xr3T?r: or W.
xrsift
xr^sST or xprwtt
xt^kt: or xj^f:
xpsfXrT
— or xpfiTfxr
xr^f^: or xpfifir.
xr^3i: or xpR«i:
XT«*ri i or XT^iT
XpRcXT or XpfiXT
t o o
gen.
loc. xr^ffr or xpsfp
So or '^T^iTfxT, ^i^rHT or ^oii, &c.
a. wu, ‘ who knows/ changes its initial to p whenever it
changes its final to the unaspirated letter, that is, in the nomi-
native singular, and before the inflectional terminations begin-
ning with a consonant.
nom. vnr or vr?
instr. ■gVT
loc. plur. VTrXT &c.
105. Besides nouns of a general character ending in den-
tals, there are certain declinable participles ending in ^r?T and
fv:
*fk: &c.
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
57
and certain possessive nouns ending in ^ and HIT, which
undergo some modification of the inflective base before the
terminations of the nominative, and before the accusative
singular and dual. In all the other cases they are regularly
declined like other nouns ending in ; that is, the vowel
affixes are attached to the final ; w is unaltered before *t, and
becomes <*■ before H.
106. These participial and possessive nouns prefix an to
their final w before the terminations of the five first inflexions :
thus ‘ cooking,’ becomes . Those ending in or
also make the penultimate long in the nominative, and ac-
cordingly becomes ‘ having done but by the rule
that the second member of a final conjunct consonant is to be
rejected, the final TT is thrown out, and the words remain in
the nominative singular imh , Before the vowels the
compound is unchanged, TT^nTT, ^Tr^nTT, &c. : thus,
4 going.’
nom. J|t*3 »i 1 1 i <i-oa.
\
acc. — JTSjt:
instr. iraTfTT Jl-adjyr rrafk: &c.
TTSTTiT 4 having gone.’
urr^'fli uri'l'fit
rnT^T’ff rt ^ ri t
nnTrn nTrrsrf *nnrfs: &c.
So v|7r^ ‘ having wealth, wealthy ; masc.
nom. UWffT V^TFfT.
acc. v»TW'5T — wnr:
instr. V^TrTT &c.
and ^fbnr * having prosperity, prosperous ;’ masc.
nom. ■sffrrPT
acc. — ■'sfhTiT: &c.
a. To form the feminine gender of these nouns, ^ is added
to the termination, and the noun is declined like 'qifl ; as,
JTJTTrft, VHdrfl, The neuter is regular ; as, JTlTTr^, •n'flWl,
JlrNfnU
b. Participles of the present tense formed with some-
times retain the nasal augment in the feminine noun through-
out, and in the nominative and accusative dual of the neuter ;
i
58
DECLENSION.
as makes Wnft, JlVrintfi, &c. in the feminine ;
and in the neuter, J|«S'B ,
c. This insertion of the nasal is imperative in the present
participles of all verbs of the first, fourth, and tenth conjuga-
tions, and optional in those of the sixth. It is optionally
inserted after verbs of other conjugations, which either in their
simple form or in their conjugational bases end with or ^n.
It is not inserted after any others.
2d
3d
J Cv
_ J"?
I VTT t
Verb,
ist conj. to be
to eat
to shine
f ■? to sacrifice ; ^
| repeated,
4th — to play
f to bear ; with )
^ ( increment TO
6th — TTg to torment
7th — to obstruct
[ 7PT to stretch :
increment
Part. pres. masc.
vrra
TO
mg;
^ \
j 7PT to stretch ; with )
( increment 7PJ j
9th — -j^ t0 buy; withl
TO
^Nnr
TO
TO
riTO
increment gHinT j
10th — to steal -Tkn H
So in the nominative and accusative dual of
Fem.
mpal
viral or viFrft
^ ni
aNpai
TO*
or
^ral
ri rfl
■abrralor akiifl
the neuter, ;
^rft, mill or maft, & c.
d. The participles of the present tense of verbs which take a
reduplicate form, even though the crude verb originally termi-
nates in ^i or ’'it, do not insert an if before their final 7^, but
are declined like nouns in general ending in that consonant; as
gT ‘ to give part. pres, ggTT ; masc. nom. ggTT or gga, ggT^,
ggJTC ; acc. gga, ggTTT, ggn: ; instr. ggTTT, gg'SIT, &c. : fem. sing,
nom. Tpraf ; neut. nom. acc. dual ipfal ; plur. ggfar or ggfia.
e. There are certain other verbs which are analogously
inflected in their present participles ; as, ‘ to eat
&c. : ^mi ‘govern grnrax, ^twi, gumt:, &c.
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
59
f. Wff, when a term of address, as ‘ Sir,’ ‘ Your worship,’
is declined amongst the pronouns.
g. ^ ‘ a deer,’ »PTiT ‘ the world,’ and ‘ great,’ are
declined like participles in the three numbers of the nomina-
tive and in the accusative singular and dual; in the rest they
are regular.
(T^
nom. <
(W*
^wr
Y^nr.
acc.
instr. Win
&c.
107. HfTT ‘ great,’ makes its penultimate long before the
first five inflexions of the masculine, and that of the two first
cases plural of the neuter ; as,
nom. M £ I 'T u ? 1 *ril
acc.
instr. &c.
Fern, ; neut. nom. and acc. *T^TT,
a. Nouns of every description ending in dentals are nume-
rous ; of which the following are a few.
Substantives.
Tqfa'EK f. a sacred treatise
Y
31? n- a lotus
mf. a cannibal
\'
HT? f. a stone
TTf?PR f. 1 st day of lunar fortnight
m. wind
fcT?Trr f. lightning
f. autumn
«4-MTT f. wealth
rifw f. agreement
Attributives.
^ who or what cuts
fiW who or what gathers
TTT^ who or what falls
y?r who or what is or abides
ofivj who speaks
who or what churns
\
what torments
3? who sends or drives
fir* who or what breaks
who or what knows.
60
DECLENSION.
Possessives.
Participles.
siivgtq^ long-lived
ffq doing
abounding in lotuses
going
vhr?T sensible
going
qiqrf dependant
"JTqrf conquering
gyqH having children
qRrf knowing
having form
crossing
qqq-iT majestic, divine
T*Tft taming
q 3T^7T famous
VTCfT holding
r-i V4+fl ^Tr prosperous
sounding
qi^ff having elegance
mnr flowing.
Class V. Nouns ending in labials, tj, tfi, qr, vr.
108. These, which are few in number, are for the most
part regular. The nominative ends in tj or ?. The final
remains before the vowel terminations, and is q' before *T, and
q before q ; as tttt * who preserves nom. mi or mq, mrt,
mi: ; acc. ini, m^, mi: ; instr. mp, maqi, wfar. ; loc. plur.
m*T. So oRoRT ‘ a quarter of the horizon nom. efiqrq or qrasq,
cfi=SHt, ; acc. : instr. qrqim, qi=*i®*qT ; loc.
plur. ofi3.«*T.
109. There is one irregular noun in this class, ‘ water/
declinable only in the plural number: plur. nom. wjq:, acc.
mi:, instr. *rfk:, dat. and abl. msi:, gen. miT, loc. mq.
In composition it may he declined like any other noun in
T? as, from q ‘good/ and ‘water/ ‘having good
water/ makes, nom. sing, qp^ or qjq, nom. dual iqrq, nom.
plur. qpr., instr. dual qraqi, loc. plur. qpq, &c.
Class VI. Nouns ending in nasals, t, q, qr, q, q.
110. Of words terminating in nasals of the two first classes
no instances are known, and but few are met with ending in
qr . They are quite regular, but may optionally insert ^ before
q; as ‘0f a good class:’ nom. qqqi, qipfr, qqqr: ; instr.
&c. dual mrcr«if ; loc. plur. mnrnj or See r. 17.
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
61
111. Nouns ending in rT are numerous, and present many
peculiarities. They may be divided into two orders ; one
ending in the other in
Nouns ending in ^R.
112. When regularly inflected, nouns in drop the final
in the nominative singular, and before the terminations begin-
ning with consonants ; and in the masculine and feminine
genders they make the penultimate letter long before all the
terminations of the nominative, and those of the accusative
singular and dual : the vocative singular is unchanged. Thus
‘ soul,’ is declined as follows:
nom. ’'TRTT t'TRTRT' WI
acc. ^TlrHR
instr. 'strrtt ^RTfir.
dat. &c. loc. :5TTTIR
voc. ^trt^
In the neuter form the vowel is made long only, agreeably to
general rule, in the plural ; where however a nasal is not
inserted before a nasal ; ‘Brahma,’ ‘the Supreme;’ nom.
acc. wsr, "ZWWf, ^rrftrr ; nor is the vowel made long before a
double consonant, as ^ ‘ the heart,’ plur.
113. In these two examples, and '331"^, the final
^R is preceded by a conjunct consonant, of which the final
letter is it. If the last of such conjunct be the noun is
similarly inflected; as £a sacrificer:5 nom. xn^T, xjigTql,
XHTR: ; acc. WR, xnfRf, XHR:, &c. : but if no compound of
wdiich it or ^ is the final member precede, then in the accusa-
tive plural and following cases, of which the terminations
begin w-ith vowels, the penultimate ^ is rejected, and the
antepenultimate and final coalesce; as trit ‘a king:’ nom.
TT*TT, Cl ^1 1 *i T , TRR . , acc. TRR, tHTT^TT, tl ; instr. il Si T ,
TRWTT, TJSTfW; ; voc. &C. In the locative sing, the
rejection is optional, as uffr or u*rfJT.
a. The same takes place before the feminine affix as
62
DECLENSION.
‘ a queen and optionally before the neuter dual ; as
‘ the sky :’ nom. acc. ^fhT, or ^tfbRl, Wt*uf?T.
b. When a noun ending in is derived from a root
ending in 7; or preceded by 7, or the vowel is made
long before the conjunct consonant of the accusative plural, &c. ;
as ‘ who sports nom. Trftfij'qT, TTftf^rRT, ;
acc. Trfrft'^nf. wt^rt, ; instr. tifert^T, Trftf^^wif,
&c.
c. JRTJT, a name of Indra, may substitute ir for its final,
and be declined like a noun in TiT; as, nom. sraTR,
; acc. HU'qv, *rq'qin, &c. : but it is also declin-
able as a noun in ^ when it changes its semivowel 7 to ?
before the vowel terminations of the accusative plural and
following cases, and is substituted for '3‘ and the ^ of *nt;
in the other cases it is declined like ’.HlriR ; as,
ttirr:
jrr:
loc. IR?7T
nom. iR^T iHRRT
acc. JTiRR —
instr. HVRT *TW*rf
dat. *rR
voc. iTW^T
d. ‘a dog,’ and gq'TT, ‘ a youth,’ are declined so far
analogously to that they change ? to I befoi’e the
accusative plural and the following cases, of which the termi-
nations begin with vowels. In 'sr the '3' is of course merely
subjoined to the '51 ; in u=R it is preceded by the T of and
consequently the two short vowels combine into one long one ;
they then follow' the analogy of ^TSR, as by rule 113, and
reject the penultimate in consequence of which, "3 or 35
immediately precedes the final rf. kvwv, ‘ canis,’ ‘a dog:’
nom. V3T, V5TRT, "^TR: ; acc. '3JR, 1sgRT, tfTVn ; instr. T5RT, ^«rr,
TgfW: ; dat. vgwif, &c. TpR, ‘juvenis,’ ‘a youth:’ nom.
^T5TT, ^TR: ; acc. 33R, ^?RT, ; instr. iRT,
■jRfir: ; dat. tr, &c.
e. ’SiijiR, 4 the sun,’ is irregular in not making the penul-
timate long before the terminations of the nominative dual and
NOUNS ENDINfi IN CONSONANTS.
63
plural, and accusative singular and dual ; in the rest it follows
TTiT* ; its ^ is changed to w by virtue of the ^ in *rnf.
nom. ^uzjmrr:
acc. — ^rnprir:
instr. ^p^rrfH:
loc. ^pzjfctrr or ^pfoftrr — ^pzmtr
O
voc. ^n^rnr
\
f. Compounds with ‘ to kill,’ follow the analogy of
-•HajtlfT, i. e. they do not make the vowel long in the nom.
dual, &c. They also change ? to ti before the vowel termina-
tions of the accusative plural, and following cases, in which
also the penultimate vowel is rejected, and accordingly the
antepenultimate and final consonants combine.
■g^T^vr, ‘ the murderer of a Brahman.’
nom. ■asi^ur:
acc. — ^arrr:
instr. 'warpT tjanrm:
dat. warp &c.
g. W?T, ‘the sun,’ is inflected after the model of *f ;
but in the accusative plural, and analogous cases, an imperfect
noun, "qTt , is optionally substituted.
nom. W
Cv
trwf
Cv
acc. tpp!T
Cv
—
■^raTT: or
instr. xrwr or tnn
tPWT
tnrfW:
Cv Cv
dat. watt or wy &c.
Cv
Cv
h. ■sripT, ‘a horse,’ belongs to nouns in ’SPT in one case
only, the nom. sing. : in all the rest it is declined like a noun
in 7T , or ; as,
nom.
acc.
WiT
—
instr.
dat.
&c.
If compounded with a negative, and used attributively, it is
declined regularly as a noun ending in ^PT preceded by a
64
DECLENSION.
conjunct consonant, of which the last member is ^ ; as Ss(r|Jj«^
‘one who has not a horse:’ nom. 'WilT, 'N H a I «it, ;
acc. «H§M, '•■MHai'il, j instr. ’Nrigjrp, niif^IT, &c.
114. WH neut., ‘ a day,’ is very irregular, substituting ^
for the final in the nominative singular and locative plural, and
-3- convertible to ’•'ft with the short vowrel of
the other cases it conforms to ^rfH7| ; as,
W before vr.
nom. |
acc. J
or
WT^T
instr.
^TT WRIT
dat.
—
w't«t:
abl.
—
—
gen.
—
loc.
or wr^fifT —
’W* or 'wr
a. Compounded with numerals, with fa, or with *rnt, ^TjT is
substituted before all the terminations, and is declined like a
noun ending in ^ ; as TTPITjjr ‘ the afternoon TTHTT^:, ^TRTjrt,
Knrrjjrr:, &C. : but in the locative case singular these com-
pounds take different forms ; as *rprrj[r, Trnrrfjr or *TRT?fifT.
b. Compounded with other words, is declined in the
masculine and feminine like other nouns in wr, except before
the terminations of the dual and plural that begin with H, where
it substitutes 7 for rT ; as ‘ a long day nom. ^1*1 l^T,
^NffisR: ; acc. ; instr.
dat. &c. ; loc. sing. or
plur. or rfHblRT, voc. &c.
Nouns in
115. Many possessive nouns are formed with the affixes
^ , and fir^ ; as, vf?P| ‘ having wealth,’ * opulent
‘ having a staff,’ ‘ an ascetic ;’ wxrfe"^ ‘ having devotion,’ ‘ a
devotee ^TfinqrT ‘ having speech,’ ‘ eloquent :’ all of which are
declined on one model. They reject the it before the conso-
nants ; retain it before the vowels ; and make the penultimate
of the base long in the nom. singular : in all the other cases
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
G5
the inflectional terminations are added, without any change,
to the final of the base : as vfT'T mfn. ‘ rich/
masc. nom.
ace. vrPT^r — —
instr. vfTrr vf^«TT vfafk:
dat. vftrir &c. loc.
voc.
The feminine affixes as and is declined like
The neuter is regular ; nom. ace. vfiiT. vrfrpff, vR'tfff.
116. There are three irregular nouns of this class;
‘ a road,’ irftr'JT ‘ a churning stick,’ and a name of
Indra. These substitute for the final syllable before the
affix of the nominative singular, and for ^ before the other
affixes of the nominative, and those of the accusative singular
and dual. Before the vowel terminations of the accusative
plural and other cases they reject the final syllable altogether :
before the consonants they reject the They retain the fit
of the nom. sing.
The two first also prefix a nasal to the consonant before
the first five inflexions ; viz. those of the nominative, and the
singular and dual accusative ; as tjfsivr ‘ a path/ * a road/
nom. tfxtt:
ace.
instr. xrsn
dat. tjxi &c.
voc. TT'ftpT
tjfttfw:
loc. irf^nr
So makes rpeTRT, JTOT, iTPWf, &c.
Compounded with other words, these are declined in the
masculine in the same manner as the uncompounded word :
in the feminine the final syllable is rejected, and the affix ^
is added to the antepenultimate consonant : in the neuter
is rejected in the singular and dual, and prefixed to xr
before the plural : as wqfiFr , ‘ having a good road/ makes,
masc. Trq^rr:, &c. ; fern, srqxft, &c. ; neut. nom. and
ace. Tftjfxi, Trwl, TTtp-nf^T.
K
66
DECLENSION.
■^njffepT makes, nom. ; acc. ^JREJRU,
; instr. &c.
117. Nouns ending in J? are few : before the consonantal
terminations it is changed to ^ ; as TTSTT^ ‘ mild,’ ‘ quiet, ’makes,
nom. TT^TTTT, THTmT, TTHTU: ; instr. TTUTRL IT5TT^rf, TTSTTf^T: ; loc.
plur. TTSflTW or (r. 17.) tT^IRTR.
Class VII. Nouns ending in semivowels, v,
118. Nouns ending in tt and are of rare occurrence: if
they occur, they are regular.
119. Nouns derived from verbal roots ending in r. or ^
make a preceding vowel long before the inflectional termina-
tions which begin with consonants, t is changed to Yisarga
in the nominative singular; but not before the locative plural,
if it be a radical letter. tt followed by a vowel, as in «T, is not
doubled after Thus fr|7L fem. ‘ speech nom. 7ft:, fiRT, ;
acc. fTR, fiRT, fur: ; instr. fuu, 7ftf& ; loc. plur. rftf.
Nouns ending in semivowels do not insert a nasal before
the neuter plural. TR n., ‘ water,’ makes, nom. and acc. TTC,
Trft: ; instr. =tttt, Tr4f, &c.
«. fipr, ‘ sky,’ changes ^ to w in the nominative, and to ?
before the consonantal terminations. The ^ of fjf becomes
by the rules of Sandhi, f. ‘ sky nom. st:, ft'Hrr, ;
acc. fl;'?, fH=r: ; instr. f^Tr, ?*wrr, sfW: ; loc. plur. ?nr.
b. Used attributively, as in ‘having a clear sky (a
day),’ the neuter form is, nom. and acc. w, wnjfe; the
rest like the masculine.
Class VIII. Nouns ending in sibilants, 'ST, V, JJ.
ST.
120. Nouns formed from verbal roots ending in $T, with
the affix technically termed substitute for the final the
guttural letter before all the terminations beginning with
consonants ; as f. ‘ space.’
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
67
nom.
f^cB or Aft
acc.
f^T
—
—
instr.
f?J5TT
&c.
loc.
firfsr
f?ET
When formed with any other affix, it is said that tr is sub-
stituted for the final ; and for it the cerebral z is substituted
in the same cases.
fVsr ( ) ‘ who enters.’
nom. frz or fT?
\ \
f^TT
fw-
acc. f^r
—
—
instr. f^TT
fwffit: &c.
loc. fM^r
f^rt:
neuter nom. and acc. or f?nr, fw%.
a. '^JT, ‘who or what destroys/ takes either form.
nom. 7ps--^7T or TJ "Rim ^T3T:
acc. rTjf — —
instr. xnrr or vf-fr*: or frrfW:
loc. TET or
b. ?7T ‘ who sees/ with its compounds f?3T, fTTUT, XHTST,
‘ such-like,’ ‘ similar/ take the guttural substitute : so do the
derivatives of ‘to touch;’ or rm^T, Trr^fr, ET^TT,
rTTSTwri, &c. : so ‘ who touches Ghee ;’ or _71»
^Hfusn, yH«nu, Yff^T^T, &c.
c. fifr^T may be substituted for fVr^TT ‘ night/ and is then
declined like ; according to some, a palatal may be sub-
stituted for the cerebral before the consonants, except in the
nominative singular ; as fifTEwri or frTrwri, or fVrstf.
*T.
121. Nouns ending in ^ are inflected in one of three
ways; i. by substituting Z for the final before the consonantal
inflexions ; 2. by substituting =B in the similar cases ; and
3. by substituting before the same inflexions ‘ ru’ or x:.
k 2
68
DECLENSION.
The substitution of z is considered the regular form of
inflecting verbal derivative forms in ^ ; as fR1^ f., ‘ light,’ from
frEnr ‘ to shine.’
nom. fR7 Or fRS fRiVT fRit:
acc. TRR — —
instr. frejEii fR"?«rr fRrfW:
dat. &c. loc. fR?^or fR7rg (r.17.)
122. As in the case of nouns ending in '51, those in ^
formed from verbs by the affix fifiR take the guttural substw
tute ; as ‘ arrogant,’ from ‘ to be proud.’
nom. or -WT
acc. — —
instr. ?r»JWT &c.
123. In the case of ‘ a friend,’ and some other words,
particularly those in which the final is properly *t, but has
become it in consequence of being preceded by some other
vowel than or ^TT (see rule 29), t. is substituted for the final
before the consonantal inflexions, and the nouns are declined
like nouns ending in t:.
‘ a friend.’
O \
nom.
acc. — —
instr. HiTUt TTjTRT
O Cv Cv
dat. *nnr Sec. loc. ^nr:n or *nn>it
Cs o Cv O
a. ’Sttfsiit for HHifsm f. ‘ a benediction,’ is similarly inflected.
nom. W5Th ^rrf^TitT I Pspi:
acc. ^TTfjTif — —
instr. ^nfinUT ^TT7ff«rf 'STTsflf^:
dat. wiVs &c. loc. or
b. for ‘ the arm,’ besides being declined in this
manner, admits before the vowel terminations of the accusative
plural and following cases the optional use of tffaR, declined
like nouns in
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
69
nora. <fhrt <fra:
acc. ?fm — — or ^toit:
instr. Tfrqr or ffrarrr ^rv§f rfrfih
dat. or ^TXCT — ^f*t:
abl. <frrn or ctun: — —
gen. (ffrfr: or ^TWTT: ttrt or Trwi
loc. rftfq or Trfom ^r;-g or
It is also neuter : nom and acc. <ft:, <frqf, <rffa.
c. Neuter nouns with a penultimate ^ or short, make
the vowel long only before the nasal augment of the nomi-
native and accusative plural ; as, ‘ a bow,’ ‘ the
eye,’ ‘ light,’ ‘ Ghee,’ severally for , ’srem, Sic. ;
as, nom. and acc. ^TT^ff'fq' ; instr. ufisnrr, €tf%«fT,
&c. : so, nom. and acc. ^sr:, ’srafq : instr.
V» O 7 Cs 7 O
^rw«Ti, ^rerf$:.
v* 7 O
d. Nouns derived from the desiderative form of the verb
are declined after this manner; as ‘one who wishes to
read,’ makes, mf. ftnr^l:, fxmslv^f, &c. ; neuter nom.
and acc. fiTtrfc:, ftrTTiTtft, fqufifR. It does not insert the nasal
in the neuter plural. faofiHf , ‘ one who wishes to do,’ rejects
the sibilant before a consonantal inflexion (see rule 35) ; as,
fqstftfi:, &c.
124. Nouns formed from verbs ending in the compound
letter Tff reject before the consonantal inflexions either the
first member of the compound or eR, and are then declined
like nouns in or they reject the second member and are
declined as if ending in =r.
The same words, accordingly as they are said to be formed
with different affixes, may take both modifications ; as 1THT mf.
‘ who or what pares’ or ‘ makes thin :’ nom. sing. or 7T?,
Tfcfi or ITT ; instr. dual &c. lT?«rr or rpwrf ; loc. plur. or
■?TCT ; so xfllltf , ‘ a cow-keeper,’ makes, nom. sing, or ifte,
7fni=fi or -T7T ; instr. dual &c. or jfhTWTT ; loc. plur.
or iftT^T. Before the vowels the final is of course
\ O Vi
unchanged ; as TTBff, jfiosfl.
TO
DECLENSION.
a. Nouns in 'ht formed from desideratives reject the sibilant
only ; as fr^Tt , ‘ who desires to cook,’ makes, fqTT or -n ,
fqtr^j. fTTxrr«ii, fqiRT, & c. fTTST £ who wishes to speak,’ fifirar
‘ what desires to burn,’ are similarly inflected.
n.
125. Nouns masculine and feminine ending in n, when
preceded by make the penultimate long in the nominative
singular, and substitute "S’ for the sibilant before the inflexions
beginning with n, which with a preceding makes ^fr (r. 41). .
Tim ‘ Brahma.’ :
\
nom.
tmt:
Timr
Tim:
acc.
Tim
—
—
instr.
Timr
Tifbrr
Tvrm:
dat.
Tim
—
Tvtwr.
abl.
Tim:
—
—
gen.
—
Timr.
Timf
loc.
Tirftt
—
Turn or Timr
voc.
tv: &c.
vowel
is not
made long
in the nominative, if the
noun retain the form of the radical whence it is derived ; as,
T*r * to clothe nrrr ‘ who dresses well / nom. sing. nr:. So
filTPipr ‘ who takes a funeral cake/ from fint? and ?JTT ‘ to
take nom. sing. finjjJj: .
b. Three masculine nouns in ^m are irregular, ‘ time/
4 SIH'fl ‘ the regent of the planet Venus/ and T?j?'5m a name of
Indra. They are declined in the nominative singular as if
ending in ^sm ; TSPTT. $11. In the vocative the first
and last are regular, T^rj^n ; the second has three forms,
Tjm*., T3TT, T^FPT.
126. Neuter nouns in '^m do not make the penultimate
long in the nominative and accusative singular, but make it
long in the plural ; as TTn ‘ water nom. and acc. TTI, TTtft,
qqifa ; TqTT, TTt*ri, qiftfit:, &c. ; TT.n or t^.
127. Nouns ending in n in conjunction with a consonant
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
71
drop the final (by rule 36) before the consonantal inflexions ;
so mf., * who or what injures,’ becomes, norm ffrg, fjp?TT,
fV^i: acc. f?^, fipw: ; instr. fV^T, f?^*rr, &c.
a. Derivatives from nn and Scfar, ‘ to fall,’ with the affix
substitute "Z for the final (which becomes ^ and before
the consonants, and reject the nasal throughout. sgg ‘ who
falls nom. or ujRf, jsm: ; acc. £3N, ssnu, ; instr.
5^-ut, sqrfW:, &c.
128. gg, ‘ a man,’ drops the final sibilant before the con-
sonantal inflexions ; and it is otherwise peculiar in the nomi-
native, and in the singular and dual of the accusative ; as,
nom. WPT
» \
VS
acc. wn
VS
—
g*:
instr. gNT
Trftr:
dat. gN
—
g«r.
abl. gs:
—
—
gen. —
g*>.
g*i
loc. gftr
voc. g»RT &c.
1
t}tt or to
O sS 4 vS
It may be declined in three genders as an epithet ; as ggg
‘ of a good man :’ mf. ggHTg &c. ; neut. nom. and acc. ggg,
WTTfN.
129- fem., ‘ decay,’ is an imperfect noun, and its
place is supplied before the consonantal terminations by »?TT ;
as, nom. sing, ^rt ; dual instr. &c. »RTwri ; plur. instr. &c.
tHtIn:, irt«T., '5TTTH. Before the vowel terminations it keeps
its own final, irrI, irw:, »RN, IRNT, &c.
130. There are some participial nouns formed with
which before the inflexions of the nominative, and of the singular
and dual accusative masculine, prefix a nasal to the sibilant, and
make the preceding vowel long. In the nominative singular
the N is rejected, as the final of a conjunct consonant. Before
the accusative plural, and following vowel inflexions, ^ is
changed to T, as also before a feminine formed with and
72
DECLENSION.
the dual neuter. The sibilant, when final (as in the neuter
singular), and before the consonantal inflexions, is changed
to 7^, becoming ^ before a soft consonant.
‘who is knowing, wise.’
masc. nom.
fkWTjl
friwr
fTrnr:
acc.
—
instr.
iTHTT
fTi"3JT
frsfk:
dat.
fTJT &C.
loc. fTiTW
voc.
fem. nom.
neut. n. acc.
fri"rT
frrtm
a. If the termination Tar be preceded by that vowel is
rejected when the T is changed to as ‘ who was sit-
ting nom. wfiiTTT, TrfiTTiiTt, TfijTTTTt ; acc. ^f^TTTT, TTf^TTOT,
irer: ; instr. &c. ; fem. nom. sing. VTql ; neut.
nom. and acc. Trf^TFT, anrtft,
131. Superlatives formed with the termination Itt are
declined in the three numbers of the nominative, and in the
singular and dual accusative, analogously to participles in Ttf ;
in the other cases they follow the analogy of nouns in as
ilfixHT ‘ most heavy.’
masc. nom. TRfarPT
irefrrhiT JRhri^:
acc. rp^TTm
— nihriT:
instr.
TTthfrwri irOinfa:
dat. rnfhTT &c.
loc. rrcftr.T or ttHtw
voc. TtltPT
fem. nom. iRttrifi
neut. n. acc. TTTfar:
rnfhrfft Trfhtfm
Class IX.
Nouns ending in T-
132. Nouns ending in substitute for it, agreeably to
rule 32 : undergoes the changes to which the rules of Sandhi
subject it. ‘ a bee,’ from ‘ honey,’ and f^r ‘ who
or what sips,’ is thus declined :
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
73
nom. *njfF57 or
wfk?:
acc. Jrufe?
—
—
instr.
qvfeTwrr
*TVf?5TfH:
dat. qqfo?
—
abl. qvf?r?:
—
—
gen. —
loc,
—
or -fWZrH
voc.
The feminine is the same as the masculine, in the neuter
makes, nom. and acc.
7 \
or “Tj
a. 'Jtrnrr^, a name of Indra, is inflected like but
has the peculiarity of changing q to
q when the final is
changed ; as TJTT*n7 or -■?, jcrcrnfr, jnrqnrwri, &c.
133. Words formed with the affix fjJrT substitute "q for a
final ^r, which becomes i or n, agreeably to the rules of
Sandhi, before the consonantal inflexions ; as Tfonf , a metre
of the Vedas.
nom. Tftnp* or -n Tfwjfr
acc. gfan? — —
instr. ?fun^l TftHF«n ^faiTfhr.
dat. &C. loc.
a. Some other verbal nouns formed with the same affix
substitute either a guttural or a cerebral for the final ; as
mf. ‘ one who is perplexed.’
nom. or
acc. — — •
instr. iprr g'pqi or grfar: or
dat. &c. loc. or to
O v v^\ O O O
So 4 one who vomits 4 one who is kind ;5 * one
S3 V V v
who hates.’
b. But, monosyllabic verbal derivatives, ending in an
aspirated soft consonant, change their initial, if it be any
unaspirated soft consonant, except »r, to its corresponding
aspirate, whenever the final is changed, as in the case of qq
jj
74
DECLENSION.
already specified (r. 103. a.) : by the same rule <pi for ^
becomes, nom. sing. TjBi or ijn , B^ or ; instr. dat. and abl.
dual btvbt or ; instr. plur. IjfHr. ; dat. and abl. plur. bbb: or
•g'pq; ; loc. plur. ijbt or B7B ; in the other cases, <*irr,
&c. So ^ ‘what burns:’ BBi or BB, BZ or BZ; Brwrf or
BT*BT, &c. z^r, ‘ who or what milks,’ takes the guttural
substitute only, but, like the others, changes its initial.
nom. BBi or BB
\ 'as
5^:
acc. <T?
O v
—
—
instr. Z?T
dat. &c.
VTWri
Bfhr:
O
loc. BET
c. BT?, ‘ what bears or carries,’ substitutes Bi for the first
two letters in several compound nouns before the accusative
plural and subsequent vowel inflexions in the masc., and before
the feminine termination ^ ; this Bi (by rule 3. c .) makes, with
a pi'eceding BT, not BTt; as fBBIBT? m. ‘all-sustaining.’
nom. fB*BBTZ or -BTZ fBwfr
acc. fWTTTr —
instr. fWNrT fB^BTZ«rr
dat. &c.
fem. nom. sing. fBBThft
fBBTBT?:
loc. fwBTZB
\ O
If the preceding vowel be not bt or BTT, the Bi to which BT is
changed combines with it, according to rule : thus BBT? ‘ earth-
sustaining ;’ nom. BBTZ, BBT^t, BBT?: 5 acc. plur. B?: ; instr.
sing. B?T, &c.
d. BIBBT?, ‘ Indra,’ (he who is borne on a white horse,)
presents several anomalies. In the nominative and vocative
singular, and before the consonantal inflexions, it is declined
as if ending in BTB ; as BTHBB. In the accusative plural and
following cases with vowel inflexions it retains its final, but
substitutes Bi for BT optionally ; as,
nom. WBTI WBT?:
acc. BIBBT? — wf?: or BJiTBT?:
instr. wNb or BTfTBT?T BTTnft«lf BTTTBtfB:
ADJECTIVES.
75
dat. Tfcfrt or HJFRlj!
^nnftvn:
abl. or wrrr.
gen.
WTfrt: or wi?f or tot?i
loc. wrfV or W^Tf^
WT.* or VJH'^W
e. "3*1 Ri* f., ‘ a slipper,’ substitutes v for the final before
the consonantal inflexions ; making JUlH'H or '3^'R?, ■3TTPT3IT,
Txrr-^f^:, ^■^■nrsr:, Tcr^ng ; before the vowels, &c.
f ‘ an ox,’ is very anomalous. In the nominative
and vocative singular if is substituted for the final ; and in
all the numbers of the nominative, and in the accusative
singular and dual, ^rr is prefixed to the final ; before which,
■S’ regularly becomes Before the consonantal inflexions
1? is changed to
Compounded so as to form an epithet, this word may become
feminine and neuter ; as ^T||r, ‘ having good cattle,’ makes,
fem.' nom. neut. nom. and acc. ^"qTiT, ^vryil?.
134. Adjective or attributive nouns are inflected in the
same manner as substantive nouns ; admitting the three
genders, and varying as to their inflectional terminations
according to their proper finals, agreeably to the rules already
given for the inflexions of nouns.
135. Adjectives admit the variations of degree common
in other languages, as comparatives and superlatives. When
regular, they are formed by adding to the crude noun the
nom.
acc. ’KVfTr? —
instr. ’SHTTarf
dat. &c.
voc.
loc.
SECTION III.
Adjectives.
n 2
76
DECLENSION.
terminations TR and 7m (technically called TTT^ and TTtrq) : in
the former of which we have the Greek repos, and in the
latter an approximation to raros and the ‘ timus’ of the Latin.
Thus,
Winj holy UTRTTT more holy most holy,
eloquent more eloquent most eloquent.
a. Before these affixes a final 7^ is rejected, and the final
7t of the participial affix ^77 is changed to 77 ; as,
young T3THT younger 7p ri<H youngest.
frg-x wise fR5^5R wiser wisest.
b. The same affixes, with a like import, are added to some
particles ; as 'RTTT, ‘ more than/ may make ^fTTTR and ’Tfrnm
‘ still more’ or ‘ most and although different etymologies are
assigned to and which, besides other meanings,
denote degrees of excellence, or c better,’ 6 best/ they are most
probably formed from ‘ up/ with the terminations of the
comparative and superlative degrees.
c. The terminations are sometimes added to substantive
nouns ; as, ttij ‘ a king tttjtr ‘ more a king / H'qffR ‘ most
a king.’
d. When added to feminine nouns in ^ or '3i, the finals
may be made short ; as, fining or £ more fortunate ;’ ffJTrTH
or *tfl ri'H ‘ most fortunate.’
e. The same terminations, with the syllable ^TPT added, give a
comparative and superlative force to the personal inflexions of
verbs ; as, TRtrffT ‘ he talks ;’ ‘ he talks more than
he ought TT-ajfririHIH ‘ he talks without stint or measure.’
136. Attributives formed with 7R and TTK are declined in
three genders like other nouns in ^7, and like them offer a
marked resemblance to Latin attributives in ‘ us ;’ as DTMrR: ,
MUqH'rt, &c.
137- Attributives of comparison are also formed with the
affixes ^7777 and which are analogous to the Iwv and ictto?
ADJECTIVES.
77
of the Greek ; the former properly denoting the comparative,
the latter the superlative ; although the distinction is not
always carefully observed. Those which are formed with 37
are declined like nouns in those with in the manner
explained under nouns ending in 7T (see rule 131). They
take the three genders ; as, ^7? 4 strong ^c^fartr 4 stronger,’
nom. 'Nctf'dR, 'dcSto: ; wfcTF 4 strongest,’ ^rf?5"7T,
&c.
a. These affixes have the effect of causing, as in the example
given, a final vowel to be dropped. ^75 rejects its own
and consequently the vowels ^ and ^ are attached at once to
the consonant ; so ‘ eloquent,’ makes and dfr?. If
the word be a monosyllable, however, the final is not
rejected, and the usual change by Sandhi takes place ; as u
for ftnt, 4 dear,’ with and makes ttetp, ire ; and Vi
for n^it-d, 4 excellent,’ -ire. They also cause the elision
of the possessive affixes *nt, and of when an affix
forming nouns of agency ; so ‘ having sense,’ 4 sensible,’
becomes JTffhm 4 more sensible,’ nftre ‘ most sensible ;’ HVTfT*T,
4 possessed of intelligence,’ makes JTVtTnr 4 more intelligent,’
wrftre 4 most intelligent ;’ vfa»T, 4 having wealth,’ 4 rich,’
4 richer,’ vfvre 4 most rich ;’ from ^ 4 to do,’ 4 an agent,’
‘ active,’ 4 more’ or 4 very active,’ 4 most active.’
b. The affixes and ju are attached, however, most
commonly to modifications of the original noun, or to what
are considered as substitutes for it, and which are never used
singly, although possibly in some cases they are the proper
originals become obsolete. The following is a fist of the
principal instances.
Primitive. Substitute,
•when compounded.
’3rf«tT<* near
little, young
large
Comparative.
Superlative.
darffrnr
=h fill ^
j
(
78
DECLENSION.
■^51 thin
■3TUT
■srtuTu
fyTJT quick
m
TSprfaPFT
aifay
small or mean
■^Thfhnr
Kj>f<y
ipr heavy
HT
JltfyH
nfty
HIT content
C
c?*T
crfqy
?tKt long
^rnfHnr
^rfro
distant
<rrhnr
rffT?
in? firm
■qfr^ large
■^Hnr
^rfey
*4 K"d g
Trftwhrrr
^ res rp 8
T3 ,arge
TTC
XTsfiiTH
Trfsr?
1
\ ^
yTHH
ury
1T5THT excellent -
{ WT
whh
wy
■frnr dear
TT
tpth
wy
WZ much
WhTH
nfgy
HUT much
HUT
Huftznr
HHJTy
soft
H?hrH
Hfry
\
r vn
trfyy
^ young -j
cfitrfhnr
^fifiry
<
l^FT
^HIhH
^fny
heavy
HPT
htvHth
Hrfvy
|
UcfftTH
Tffy
* 1
wy
4 ^ 1 t=h excellent
T^y
fpqx firm, stable
PZT
■rpth
WF5 gross, bulky
W^fhTH
wfiry
frcR much
HTiTTH
short
F*
gtflTRT
g f«y
c. c much,’ may
substitute
hit, and is anomalous in the
C-
first form, as htth, Hftry.
d. Occasionally the regular terminations are superadded to
these superlatives to imply excess in a still greater degree ; as,
^TFaT ‘ more excellent 'ijann ‘ most excellent,’ ‘ most best.’
rRONOUNS AfJl) PRONOMINAL NOUNS.
79
SECTION IV.
Pronouns and Pronominal Nouns.
138. Pronouns and certain other nouns are classed together,
as agreeing in some peculiarities of inflexion, by which they
are distinguished from all other nouns. The list commences
with the distributive pronoun ^ ‘ all whence they are
called or Sarva and others.
139. Besides the meaning ‘ all,’ trf is a name of Siva,
and in that sense it is declined like any other noun in ;
but when it is a pronominal noun it differs from its regular
inflexion in the following respects :
nom. plur. 7? is substituted for *tt:, as Tiif for Ttfr.
dat. sing. ^ — trtnt
abl. sing. 7*rr?T Tfa — *riw?Tx — trtTr^
loc. sing,
gen. plur. w — Kiprm — *rfn[tT
140. After the feminine form is prefixed to the
terminations of the dative, ablative, genitive, and locative
singular ; and the final of the inflective base is made short.
In the genitive plural is prefixed to
‘ all.’
Masculine,
nom. *rf: *rffr
•si*
Feminine.
^t#t:
acc. Tiff
—
wtrfT
—
—
instr. « sftXI
*r#T«rr
*#TfW:
dat.
—
—
abl. TriWrT
—
—
^rfFTT:
—
—
gen. *r§7*r
*nN
—
Trtmr
loc.
—
—
r
Neuter
nom. and
acc. TT%‘
&c.
141. All the words of this class follow this model, as far
as regards the inflectional terminations, with exception of the
two first personal pronouns, which are altogether anomalous.
80
DECLENSION.
The class consists of the following pronouns and pronominal
nouns.
i. Personal pronouns.
I.
\
RtRH thou.
* L that, or he, she, it.
2. Demonstrative pronouns.
'RRR this or that.
TTrTfT this.
\
3^R this.
3. Relative,
who, which, or what.
4. Interrogative.
f=KR wTho ? or what ?
5. Honorific.
HT?T your honour, your excellency.
6. Pronominal nouns.
1. Distributives.
f¥THT 1
firs 1 a1*’
^ J- second.
one.
faint )
RRtHI one of two.
c third.
RRian one of many.
rrr first.
"5PR other.
rtr last.
^rarax either.
half.
^TTX other.
few.
oR»TX which of two ?
chfrfRR how many.
oRrTH which of many ?
RR all.
RRX whether of two.
fRR whole.
R7TR whether of many.
rr half.
FR two, twofold.
rt all.
W T both.
*r own.
RRR )
PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL NOUNS.
81
2. Locatives.
F§ prior, east. ftft; inferior, west.
FT after. ^fgprr south, right.
FFT posterior, west. FFT subsequent, north.
FFT inferior, other. outer.
142. The pronouns of the first and second persons are very
anomalous, but their irregularities are of exceeding interest, as
they present striking analogies to those of the pronouns of the
same persons in the classical and teutonic languages.
^TFTT? ‘ I.’
nom. FjJF
'FTFT
FF
acc. FT or FT
FTFT or FT
FFTR or F:
instr. FFT
FTTFT«TT
FTFTfF:
dat. FFTF or ^
FTFT*ri or FT
FTF*FF or Ft
abl. FIT
\
FTTFT«TT
ftrf
gen. FF or F
FTF Ft: or TF
FFTTFi^ or F:
loc. FfF
FTFFf:
FTFTF
TJFT^ 4 thou.’
nom. TF
acc. 1FT or TFT
TJFT or Fm
^FTTF or F:
instr. JFFT
■§FT«Tf
FFTTfa:
dat. TJWTF or F
FFT«n or FTF
ff*ff or f:
o \
abl. TFF
FFT^FT
T**
gen. FF or F
FFfI: or FTF
■gFTTFiF or Ft
loc. TFfF
^FFT:
FFTTF
o o
143. The other pronouns are declinable in three genders, and
follow more nearly the model of the class, *rf, in their inflexions.
Those which end in as f^ &c., reject their final consonant
before all the inflexions, except in the nominative singular of
the neuter; and they thus become words terminating in FT.
Before the nominative masculine and feminine, Frf, and
FFF change their F to f ; becoming therefore F, FT, ft, tut, ff,
FFT ; as,
M
82
DECLENSION.
7R 4 that,’ or ‘ he, she, it.’
Masculine. Feminine.
nom. *t:
WT
■v
w
*rr
rn:
acc. w
—
ril»f
rri
—
—
instr.
rTT«IT
it:
TUT
7rr«ri
rTTfir:
dat. H w
—
r^T
—
«n*r:
abl. rfWlrf
—
"
rrwr:
►
—
gen. rtwr
rTtfr.
—
Tnft:
Tmn
loc. wf^T
Neuter
rHI
o
rR or rflT
\ \
Tmrf
w
?rrffT.
TTHT
O
So UTrf ‘
that,’ makes,
and tr?R,
4 this.’
masc.
W7
"S
W.
ITifr
1RT
fem. wrr
tu:
TRT
TTHT.
neut. TiR
\
*s
diifn
*TrR
Fff
tnrrR
The other inflexions of tnTT are also like those of 7R ; but in
\ \
the accusative singular, dual, and plural, in the instrumental
singular, and the genitive dual, in the three genders, IRT is
sometimes used for ir?T ; as,
masc. acc. tni or tht infr or ir^r FFTPr or f?tr
instr. s. or
gen. d. TTrrcfr: or
fern. acc. ITHT or l^TT IT7T or ^ TTrTTt or
instr. s. TTcHTT or
gen. d. or
neut. acc. I>TR -TiT iRf iRTTfR
\ \
a. The second form is employed in the subsequent member
of a sentence in which the first has already been used ; as,
^TrR rind m I <3 L| , 4 The grammar has been
studied by him ; now set him to read the Hitopadesa.’
144. The other two demonstrative pronouns, 4 this’ or
‘ that, and ‘ this,’ undergo various modifications, chiefly
of the inflective bases.
PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL NOUNS.
83
‘ this’ or ‘ that.’
Masculine.
Feminine.
nom.
Cv.
acc.
—
—
—
instr. ^PpTT
*OTWTT
’STRtfW:
C\
dat.
C\
abl. ^nTWTTfT
—
’Hwarr:
—
gen.
wq>:
C\
Cv
loc.
—
—
Cs^
Neuter nom. and acc. ^nr. ^TRfvf.
' C\ C\
‘ this’ or ‘ that.’
Masculine.
Feminine.
nom. ^nf
^TT
acc.
—
—
—
instr. ’HH4
^r«n
^HTT
*u«rf
dat.
—
—
abl. ^WTTTT
—
—
—
—
gen.
—
^rrai
loc. ’RffFTVf
—
—
vd
Neuter
nom.
and acc. ^
This pronoun also substitutes for the base in the same
cases as See above, rule T43.
145. The relative pronoun thj, ‘ who’ or ‘ which,’ is declined
like TT^ ; as, masc. nom. xn, frr, ir ; fem. nom. tit, tt, tit: ; neut.
nom. and acc. Trrf, Sfr, Trrfa, &c.
146. f^, ‘who’ or ‘what?’ interrogative, is also declined
analogously to 7HT, substituting ^ for its final consonant and
preceding vowel, except in the nom. neuter, and thus becoming
a noun in ; as,
ofi for ‘ who ?’
Masculine.
which ?’
Feminine.
nom.
acc.
instr. ifitT
ii
^fiT
^fiT
^t:
^T«n
M 2
cST«fT '^TfW:
84
DECLENSION.
dat.
abl.
^RT«n
^r«t:
^rtttt:
TRTWTT
■5fnr«r:
oRwnr
—
—
1
gen.
^■qf:
—
cRTTTf
loc.
—
—
^RTTT
o
Neuter nom. and ace. fsRH ifi wftf.
a. to various of its inflexions may affix ff^TT or ^T,
giving to it a more general and indefinite signification ; as,
ohflgri 4 some one,’ 4 any one,’ 4 a certain one 4 to
some one ;’ ^f%7T ‘ some ones,’ 4 any ones ;’ f^f^TT ‘ some-
thing,’ * any thing.’ The neuter also occurs in the obsolete
form of '2F7T ; as qrf^TrT c any thing.’ is also added to
inflexions of foW in a like sense ; as, =R^rT 4 some one ;’ f3R^?r
‘ any thing, something.’
b. The preceding pronouns may be compounded with sf3T,
or derivatives from jr$r ‘ to see,’ to signify ‘ similarity
when ir, TTiTT, iR, &c. become ttt &c., ^ is substituted for
and and «r1 for fcR?? ; as,
rTTgTJT , TTTgTT, or TTH?^, such like.
TTfrrg'TT, or TTrflg^, this like.
XJTI^T, TTTg^T, or tnrst, how or what like ?
^sT5T, f^T, or ^at or ^e.
or ofil^T, how like ?
These are declinable in three genders, forming the feminine in
mn. TniHR, f. or as nouns ending in as ril?$l*.,
H Igail, rfl£3l, &c.
b. To tit, Fit?, may be added implying 4 quantity,’
when they are similarly changed ; as, TTHTTf ‘ so much ;’
‘ so much ;’ tttt?T ‘ how much ?’ which are declinable like
nouns in ; as, WT^T, rn^nft, WRTT , &c. : they are also used
in the neuter form as adverbs, as, irPTfT 4 how much ?’ rTTTrT 4 so
much ;’ and correlatively, as trr^rt HTTrt 4 as much as.’
c. and fqra in a similar sense have TfrT joined to the
vowel of the base ; as, ^ttw 4 so much ;’ foRTHt 4 how much ?’
nom. TtttT[, ^HTT, &c.
PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL NOUNS.
85
d. To ofi substituted for fqw may be also added fir, to form
qrfi T ‘ quot,’ 4 how much ?’ ‘ how many ?’ It is the same for all
genders, and is declinable in the plural only ; as, nom. and
acc. -sRfrr, instr. qifirfrr., dat. and abl. qfirvq:, gen. qurfinq, loc.
■^nru. Similar derivatives may he formed from HrT and qq, as
irffT and qfff, but they are of very rare occurrence.
147. UTiT, an honorific term for qtJTrT, and which, like
4 Your honour/ ‘ Vossignoria,’ &c., although used for the
second, is a pronoun of the third person : it is declined like
other nouns in ; as,
masc. nom.
*qqn
nqqr.
acc. nqqf
—
HTfr:
instr. vrqTTT
qqqrr
dat. qqq &c.
loc. WqrTr
fem. nom. HTrfi
qqw:
neut. nom. HTrf
qqfi»r
148. With respect to some of the following pronominal
nouns, a few observations will be necessary.
a. THE, ‘ one,’ 4 some one,’ is also the numeral 4 one,’ and
will be again noticed. In this place it admits of three num-
bers ; as, ttsf: 4 one,’ qopf 4 two ones,’ qis 4 some ;’ as qq; q elfin
4 some ones,’ or 4 some, say.’
b. qnq and the six following words in the list of pronominal
nouns, which are analogous to comparatives and superlatives,
differ from them in being inflected like wf. They are also
peculiar in forming the neuter in w ; as, qnq?^, qnqTTTi^,
ofiTTTl'fT . The two terms preceding qr^q, qqrirT: and qqr?Tq, make
their neuters like other nouns in qr, as qqirTT, qqqrq.
c. qr*r, 4 both,’ is declinable in the dual only ; as, qm,
d. q*rq, 4 both,’ has no singular : nom. dual q>rqt, pi. qqq.
e. fgrrq and fiqriq have two forms in the nom. plural, finrq
or ff'rrqr. &c. ; so have f-nrtq, qrffq ; and the two last have
86
DECLENSION.
also two forms in both the masculine and feminine before the
inflexions of the dat., abl., gen., and loc. sing. ; as, fgTfhTPT or
ferilnw, fgTthrnr, ferfhroi, &c.
f. flXTH ‘ first,’ ‘ last,’ ‘ few,’ cRffTtni ‘ how many,’
have two forms in the nom. plur., tot: or ^TXRT: or
&c.
g. *m, when meaning ‘ equal,’ ‘ same,’ is not a pronoun : it
is declined like nouns in ?? ; nom. plur. *w:, dat. sing. *THIH.
h. 'qTT has two forms in the nom. plur., ^tt,
i. when implying ‘ property,’ is a noun ; as a pronoun
it has two forms in the abl. and loc. sing., ^T7r or ^wnt, 5?
or
J- ’J# and the remaining terms have two forms in the abl.
and loc. sing., and nom. plural, '’JfTW or pwnr, or
ipf or > so or 'PXRTiT , &c. They are pronouns only
as signifying relation in time or space ; ‘ before,’ ‘ after,’ ‘ east,’
‘ west,’ and the like. In any other sense they are nouns ; as
^fsprr ‘ clever:’ nom. plur. Tffspur:, dat. sing.
k. ’UtK is a pronoun in the sense only of ‘ outer,’ and then
takes two forms in the nom. plur. ; as, or Jprr:
‘outer houses ;’ or -.SWRU WTX^ST: * outer garments;’ but
-HVfKWTi: STTHTUT: £ of the outer hall.’ If a city be in-
tended, it does not take the pronominal form in this sense ;
as ’HnTXnif (not xft: ‘ in the outer town,’ the suburb
or Pettah.
SECTION V.
Numerals.
149. The first ten numerals are, one, % two, three,
four, five, im six, *rjnr seven, w^T eight, nine,
ten.
150. The nine first are compounded with ‘ten,’ to
form the next nine, undergoing in some instances slight changes
of termination ; as,
NUMERALS.
87
iT=JiT<^PT eleven.
mrST^ twelve.
thirteen
^jp^PT fourteen,
fifteen.
sixteen.
?TH^PT seventeen.
^?E'T53PT eighteen.
nineteen or
JHRsifd one less than twenty.
151. With * twenty,’ the simple numerals
bined on much the same plan ; as,
^fwsrfw twenty-one. twenty-six.
ITf^rfrT twenty-two. twenty-seven.
^iflN^rfFT twenty-three. ^TBTfW'STfw twenty-eight.
twenty-four. twenty-nine or
U^RsiPtt twenty-five. ^Tfg^pr one less than thirty.
152. The rest of the series and its decimal subdivisions are
composed analogously to fi#3TfiT and its subdivisions.
f^TIrf thirty. TnrfrT seventy.
MHlfCsirf forty. --Ssfifrf eighty.
tp^T^TTT fifty. flTfir ninety,
iff? sixty.
Higher numbers have distinct denominations.
^TTT a hundred,
a thousand.
Wff: or ’STOrT ten thousand.
or a lac, a hundred thousand.
fi^tor-wl
° >- one million.
H^TT*. or -if )
i£rfz: a krore, ten millions.
or a hundred millions.
*prrt<T: or a thousand millions,
ini ten thousand millions.
a hundred thousand millions,
wf: a billion.
a. Numerals, when declinable, are inflected upon the same
principles as other nouns, but in some cases they undergo pecu-
liar modifications of the base, which it is necessary to notice.
88
DECLENSION'.
b. ir=fi, ‘ one,’ is declined as a numeral in the singular
number only, in the three genders, IT^. It retains
the pronominal form of inflexion ; as, * to one e w | n
* from one,’ &c.
c. ft is declined in the dual only, substituting for its
final; as, nom. and acc. masc. ^r, fem. and neut. i", instr. &c.
gTT*rr. gen. and loc. .
d. and the rest are declined in the plural only, fa
substitutes t* for becoming before a vowel : it substi-
tutes also f?TO in the feminine gender, of which ^ becomes T:
before a vowel (r. 4).
Masc.
Fem.
nom.
f?n?:
acc. cfl'T
—
instr. f(3fW:
frnpr:
dat. 1 -
abl. }
gen.
fTT^Trrr
loc. fW'S
Neuter nom. and acc. ^Hrrr. The rest as the masculine.
e. awt:. ‘ four,’ inserts wr before the final in the nom. masc.
ON
and nom. and acc. neuter, and substitutes 7TH for the last
syllable before the inflexions of the feminine, ^ becoming ^
before a vowel.
nom. -3r?R:
acc.
instr. airfH*.
O
dat. )
abl. j
gen.
loc.
■arTV^:
O
f. arm: n. ^rtr
- — ^rarfx &c.
aTnrvq;
MrltH'li
f. The remaining numbers to twenty, declinable in the
plural only, are the same in all genders. A final a is rejected
before all the affixes, and the terminations of the nominative
NUMERALS.
89
and accusative are dropped : substitutes w for its final
vowel in the two first cases, and optionally elongates it in the
rest: thus ‘five,’ makes, nora. and acc. w, instr.
dat. and abl. x^gw*:, gen. wr^rm, loc. After which
model are inflected WfPT, &c.
xnt, ‘ six,’ makes, nom. and acc. xi?, instr. ^fW:, dat. and
abl. gen. rnui, loc.
‘ eight ;’ nom. and acc. Wl, instr. or w.rfW:, dat.
and abl. or gen. ^TTri loc. or 'srgTTT.
g. N'STfrT * twenty,’ f^5T7T ‘ thirty,’ &c. are declined like
other nouns with similar terminations ; but they are confined
to the feminine gender, and to the singular number, unless
multiples of them be signified, when they take the other
numbers ; as, sing. frSTfiT: ‘ twenty,’ dual firsTrff 4 two twenties,’
plur. fw^nnr. 4 many twenties :’ otherwise the number does not
vary with the substantive with which it may be connected ; as
fV 51 K4 1 , fwsnrr, ''Mlfitjnrr 3TT: , ‘with twenty, thirty, forty
arrows,’ &c. Instances however do occur where they take
the plural number, to agree with a plural substantive ; as
wrsrfefv. 4 with fifty horses.’
h. "5T1T ‘ a hundred,’ and 4 a thousand,’ are both neuter
nouns, and are usually limited to the singular, except when
repetition of them is intended ; as, ‘ two hundreds,’ *nrir
‘ two thousands.’ THTTHT 4 many hundreds,’ TnrjTrfoT 4 many
thousands.’ In construction they are commonly employed
with nouns in the genitive plural, as ^nr 4 a hundred
( of) female slaves ;’ although they are also used attributively
with plural nouns, as fxjHT: 4 a thousand ancestors.’ The
other numerals are inflected, like nouns in general, according
to their gender and termination.
153. Numerals in composition with nouns to form attri-
butives are inflected, like other nouns, according to their
finals ; as, *T<jxin 4 a man having three friends
‘a woman having three lovers ;’ finrfa 4 a family
having three agreeable persons:’ but fRufffW, 4 a man who has
90
DECLENSION.
three mistresses,’ makes fimfrai, Pu^firar, ftnrfira:, ftnrfira«iT,
&c. The same term may be used in the neuter ; as ftnrffra
‘ a family with three beloved females nom. and ace. fnqf<3
or finrfjra, firafiratift, fiRTrfiraf?!!, &c. in such a compound
becomes ^3Tt: in the nominative and in the accusative sin-
gular and dual ; as, nom. firm nil:, ftr^T^TO, ; acc.
ftnrsnrrc, farw^iu, ; instr. firq^TT, &c.
a. Similar compounds of WR are inflected like nouns in
and those of the numerals ending with like nouns in WT ;
but WiT may in composition be inflected like a noun in ’sra
(p. 6 1 ), or like a primitive noun masculine in w (p. 34),
or in the plural number like the simple numeral ; as, nom.
finrm, ftimsrai, fnwra:, or ftrtrrer., ftrwr, ftnrrrr: or frnmrr ;
acc. ftrwra, ftrwnfr, firwir:, or ftram, ftnwT, ftpnFT:,
ftrwTir or firwT ; instr. film sMi, ftrwwrr, fumy fa:, or ftniwr,
ftnn¥T«rr, ftnnFrfa:, &c.
b. "3HT, implying ‘ less,’ is only used, as above exhibited, to
signify one less than the numeral to which it is prefixed ; as,
Ji'Hf'-isifri: * twenty minus one,’ i. e. nineteen ; ■grrfcTSriT ‘ thirty
minus one,’ i. e. twenty-nine. It may also be used with a
definite number ; as, ir^faf'-jsrfrf: ‘ twenty minus one ;’ yylfl
f#5TfT ‘ thirty minus five,’ i. e. twenty-five ; <T5ffasrrT ‘ a hun-
dred minus ten,’ i. e. ninety. The term ‘ more,’ but
which is declinable, is also compounded with numerals to
denote addition, as tr^TiVai '^Trf ‘ a hundred plus five,’ or
‘ one hundred and five.’
Ordinals.
154. The ordinal equivalent of ‘one,’ or ‘first,’ is most
commonly ttvr, declinable in three genders, TTW, -HT, -4, and
according to the rules of pronominal inflexion (p. 79). Other
synonymes are, wf^:, WSi:, ^rnra: ; the first is restricted to the
masculine gender, the others are declinable in three genders.
155. In forming ordinals from the other cardinal numbers,
certain terminations are either added to or are substituted for
ORDINALS.
91
their proper finals, and the word is declinable in the three
genders. In the case of XTjJT, ‘ four,’ other words are option-
ally substituted.
-in -A
second.
*n?:
-■tft
-V
sixth.
ttwHt:
_in --q
third.
TTSHT.
-*ft
-A
seventh.
-xff -If j
|
-A
eighth.
-*TT -ff
>- fourth.
-ffl
-A
ninth.
v%:
-•m -A J
-iff -A
1
fifth.
<tspt:
-A
tenth.
156. The termination ^T, derived from the technical affix 3?,
7 \7
being added to IT=RT^PT and the rest as far as twenty, is substi-
tuted for the final syllable, leaving -^ft, -ST, c eleventh
l"TT3n, -sft -ST, 4 twelfth,’ &c.
157. The same affix, causing
syllable or final vowel, is also
twenty upwards. In another
finals ; as,
f^SlfrfrfH: or fifsr: twentieth,
or f^5i: thirtieth.
■'TrSlfisi^T: or ^rMlfui: fortieth.
WTSHPr: or TT^ISi: fiftieth.
Mfy hh: or tnr: sixtieth.
the elision either of the final
added to the numerals from
form they add THT to their
*TJTfrrrPT: or win seventieth.
or -HsflrT. eightieth.
Wtrinr: or ^TTfT: ninetieth.
STfTrW or STiT. hundredth.
a. In these as in the cardinal numbers the decimal subdivi-
sions are expressed by prefixing the numeral, as 31 Pri hh: or
‘ one and twentieth.’
b. There are other modifications of the numerals, declinable
or indeclinable, in different shades of meaning ; as, I'iw ‘ a
two,’ ‘ a duad 4 a triad ;’ also ffTHPT and feJriqH
in similar senses, fir. ‘ twice f^: ‘ thrice irq^rT. or i?oRVT
‘ once ;’ fim ‘ twice,’ &c. : but these belong more especially
to the subject of derivation.
X 2
92
indeclinabi.es.
CHAPTER IV.
INDECLINABLES.
158. The indeclinable words of the Sanskrit language
comprehend nouns used as nouns, and nouns or particles used
as particles, that is, in some other sense than that which is
expressed by a noun or verb.
159- 1. Nouns which retain their character of the names of
things or notions, but which are employed in one unalterable
inflexion, whatever may be their relation to the other members
of the sentence in which they stand, may be either simple
monoptote nouns, or compounds of the indeclinable class : the
latter will be noticed when treating of the different classes of
compounds : the former are not numerous ; the principal are
the following :
setting, decline, of the
sun or of fortune.
^TftrT what is, existence.
*TTf? remainder, et cetera.
water, head, happiness.
’SJRT patience, pardon,
food.
■rrit reverence, salutation.
Rlfw non-existence.
Rfff the fortnight of the moon’s
a. Besides as specified in the above list, there are a
few other verbal inflexions which may be used in the sense of
nouns ; as, and f%snr ‘ what is,’ ‘ existence TtTTft ‘ what
may be,’ ‘ scepticism or of pronouns ; as, ‘ I,’ properly
‘ I am 'srftr ‘ thou,’ properly * thou art.’ They are also used
absolutely, or as particles ; as, ‘ so be it,’ implying
assent ; Rf? ‘ come,’ ‘ begin ;’ TfSR and ‘ see !’ ‘ lo !’
k behold !’ and a few others of rarer occurrence.
wane.
sky, atmosphere.
HT. earth.
C\\
firzn: a pair,
a year.
the fortnight of the moon’s
increase,
heaven.
RTfirT salutation, greeting.
ADVERBS.
93
160. 2. The other division of Indeclinables, termed fqqirfi: ,
comprises a variety of terms, the origin and character of which
are sometimes of difficult determination, but which, from the
functions they fulfil, may be considered as adverbs, prepositions,
conjunctions, interjections, expletives ; and particles properly
so termed ; that is, syllables which are affixed or prefixed to
words to modify their meaning, although in themselves they
are apparently insignificant.
Adverbs.
161. Adverbs are numerous, and are variously formed, but
they are obviously in most instances, and very possibly in all,
attributive nouns adverbially employed in some one or other
unvarying inflexion. The prevailing form is that of the neuter
accusative ; offering in this respect an analogy to such Latin
adverbs as 4 facile,’ ‘ difficile,’ ‘ dulce,’ £ ceterum,’ * multum,’ and
the like : but other inflexions, either regularly or irregularly
constructed, are also in use as adverbs. Thus req*, ‘truth,’
means also 4 truly ini*, ‘ happiness,’ occurs as ‘ hap-
pily ;’ ■*rT:, -7TT, -7T, ‘ done,’ furnishes 4 done with,’ 4 enough:’
from wpt, 4 place,’ comes WRf 4 in place,’ 4 suitably,’ 4 fitly
and from T7Z 4 strength,’ 4 force,’ W73TFT 4 by force,’ 4 forcibly,’
4 violently.’ It may be a question if every Sanskrit noun which
is capable of being used attributively may not be employed
as an adverb, to denote the variations of mode, circumstance,
kind, degree, or those modifications which adverbs are intended
to express. The following list furnishes some of those in most
familiar use. The manner in which such are formed as differ
from the inflexions of the nouns hitherto described, belongs
to the head of derivation.
xN l rf suddenly, unexpect-
edly, without a wherefore.
■snjrf^T before, preceding,
before, in front of.
Y without delay.
■^fWrrrr )
’Hire* continuously, continually.
94
INDECLINABLES.
^siRiR ignorantly,
quickly.
OTI hence, hereafter, more-
over.
very much,
here,
so, thus.
how-else, yes.
OT rightly, truly, clearly,
to-day.
now, at present.
^TV
^rvm
down, downwards.
Mtn ITT below.
’MUR moreover, further,
^njr^tr the day after.
?!rw^T now.
’Hf«T5Rx always, eternally.
without, except ;
within, among.
'JRT77T
*R1TT
’SRra moreover.
other, otherwise,
elsewhere,
otherwise.
^jfWrTCT quickly, entirely, around,
near.
^iWlattiR repeatedly, quickly,
quickly, a little,
there, in the next world,
quickly.
^rfr* behind in time or place.
’.N'FR enough ; it is also a prefix,
without, outside.
-nwcjirf repeatedly, more than
once.
’JRHlfri improperly, unfitly.
^RRtTrR improperly, unsea-
sonably.
’'Fjrni by day.
d successively, seria-
j tim.
^rrmr near, afar.
forcibly, violently.
wfXR present, in sight.
hence, from hence.
$WVTrR here and there.
^fTT so, thus, ita.
again, another,
either day.
^fTT? traditionally,
thus,
now.
clearly, truly.
^ like, as, so.
here, in this place, in this
world,
a little.
tIr high, loud.
1 vi R subsequently.
xWrXR a subsequent day.
T<Ti3T secretly, privately, in a
whisper.
T>T^fnT on both sides.
\
1 both d
j
Ttn dawn.
rightly, truly,
rightly, truly.
ADVERBS.
95
at one place, together,
at one time.
tjcfiVT once.
at the same moment.
JTirft at this time,
also, verily, so.
thus, so, as.
^ft*T yes, so be it : it is also
an inceptive mystical term
prefixed to prayers and
charms.
j- what if, how, if ever.
3W,
}
some how.
cfiVR how.
<+Vif^7T
4iVjgiH how then, how indeed.
«f^T when.
some when, some time:
l f-M H never.
ojif| when, at what time.
some when, at some
time.
fi+ff-rt what truly, what indeed.
fcF^ further, moreover.
( a little, something ; as
p^p ■< with a negative H
v fsR^T nothing,
f^jj but, also.
but what, but how.
what.
■faww what, what how.
fcWff or what, or also,
what, how.
fisRT or, either, but how.
or perhaps,
indeed, possibly.
fa?J what then, how.
whence, how.
where.
O
somewhere.
v> \
abundantly,
excellently,
excellently, well,
enough.
B w'here.
somewhere ; fjfiqTf
nowhere.
RR7? certainly.
f^rc*T a long time. Other cases
of this noun are used in the
same sense, as fi-Rim, figw,
f-=U>q,
f-neOdm for a long time.
iTTff sometimes, some-when.
WfaTT silently, happily.
■Jaffa; quickly, frequently.
*rfrTfrT )
wftfk | quicUy-
»T^ (lT^) therefore, then.
HTHt thence, from or after that.
■fT3 there.
then, at that time.
fn'Trffa then.
7TVIT thus, so.
rivtlfi* thus, thus even,
irvfa in like manner.
rTWTfT therefore, from that,
irff then, at that time.
iTfaW so far, so much.
96
1NDECLINABLES.
fWTTT ^ crookedly ; also dis-
) honestly.
HH thou-ina;.
frarftojrR silently.
rJiiiflH silently.
TO by that, therefore.
ftfTO by day.
f^WT fortunately, luckily.
^’.TOT^ vilely, badly.
TO badly.
far off, distant.
TOTT in the evening.
^ j- speedily.
}
HfTO "J no-what, nothing, ex-
HfHH j cept.
TOW by night.
•T )
> no, not.
^ I
TOTH only.
^ l
,» > no, not.
)
WTWT many, various.
TOT evidently, variously.
f«TTOT near.
pTOTHq willingly, readily, very.
•JTO perhaps.
HHH certainly, truly,
vft no, not.
perhaps.
TOW after, afterwards.
TOWTH day after to-morrow7.
TOT'TO all round.
TOOTH ) the morrow, the day
TO^TT ) after.
TO23TTOT sufficiently, abundantly.
TT5T well, good, right.
TOTH after, afterwards, behind,
east.
TOT: again ; TpT. TOR again and
again, repeatedly.
TOWW "J before either in place
TOTT > or time, in front,
TOWTlfT ) formerly.
■git in the east, in front, for-
merly.
TjIriTT formerly, in front.
day before, yesterday,
forenoon.
TOjoR separately, distinctly,
apart.
TO in the morning.
TOTTH widely.
TOTTH ) .
>- wearily, with fatigue, m
•fl^TTH )
jrfwfWTO daily, day by day.
TOTO on the contrary, otherw ise.
TOTTH early, in the morning.
M 4 1 =nT )
y at the same time.
TOrtUTOT )
TOT2I violently, forcibly.
TOH; before in place or time,
in front, formerly, in pre-
sence of, east, hereafter.
TOHT early, in the morning.
OTTOT in a contrary w ay, con-
tinuously.
TOTOT mostly, for the most
part.
TOl^S in the forenoon.
ADVERBS.
97
ij?I after death, in the next
world.
violently, by violence
j or force,
out, without, outside.
WT*P5 speedily, quickly.
again, repeatedly ; much,
abundantly.
much, very much.
*TET speedily, quickly.
JT^TT'^ a little, slowly, dully.
JIT or *TT^ ^ no, not ; prohi-
HT9T ) bitive, * do not.5
mf^r )
Jn^RT.x | no, not, except.
mfaT? without delay.
f»r5?T "J together, mutually, in
RV1 j conjunction,
fnsqi falsely.
vainly, idly, un profitably.
JT?t: repeatedly.
jtwt falsely.
TJTT (tr) what ; *RT , cTFr , that-
which.
TTFR whence, wherefore.
^ where.
•qvjT as ; tpqT, 7RTT, so-as.
zjqrsfivir^ any how ; seldom.
TRTRftH in order or succession.
properly, rightly.
xrt when.
as far as, as much as; tthtt,
fTRTT , as much as, so much,
bad, ill.
fitly, properly.
trttr; (-V&0 at once.
^ bad, ill.
wherefore, why, because.
ITcH by night.
TR like, as.
\
TR only.
f^TRT in two ways, optionally,
alternately,
universally.
fVj many.
fV?'PTHT aloft, in the air.
y^TT vainly, idly..
^ verily, indeed.
Tflvn? slowly.
■^TTSETrT eternally, continually,
quickly,
once.
RET speedily.
^TTT well, good, right.
THTfR always.
■?RT always.
at the same time.
*RTT
^ f always, continually,
1 eternally.
*RTfT J J
R^TTT. in concealment, privily,
at once.
TRRTm wholly, altogether, all
about, all round, on every
side.
TOPT together, equally.
RfJUT near to.
rrTcr 'l near to, in the pre-
TPfiTT j sence of.
entirely, rightly.
o
98
INDECLINABLES.
««jjq*frirai happily.
TTTgfw now, at this time.
before, in the presence
or face of.
entirely, completely ;
rightly, properly.
wfiTTT wholly, every way,
every where.
*ri(? every where,
always.
*nr?TT hastily, precipitately.
^rr^TW visibly, manifestly; be-
fore or in sight.
TrrN awry, indirectly.
half, equally.
« ITgwrt now, opportunely, fitly,
evening.
Wof.JT very, exceedingly.
for a long time.
ijvt uselessly, idly.
TO good, excellent, very,
of one’s-self.
\
verily, for, because,
without, except.
) because, by reason or
%in ) on account of.
yesterday.
The same difficulty that exists in other languages applies to
various terms in the preceding list, and they may be sometimes
thought to be rather conjunctions or prepositions than adverbs.
Several, no doubt, fulfil either office, and in any case the
embarrassment is that rather of denomination than of appli-
cation, as the connexion of the sentence will readily point out
the sense in which they are to be employed.
Prepositions.
162. The most important of these are used chiefly in com-
bination with simple verbs, and form with them compound or
derivative verbs, which, either in their own inflexions, or those
of the nouns derived from them, constitute the bidk of the
language. The verbs thus compounded sometimes retain the
meaning of the original, or more frequently they have the
sense of their component elements ; but in many instances
they express significations which depart widely from those
which they might be expected from their composition to con-
vey. In all these respects they offer striking analogies to the
compound verbs of the Greek, Latin, and German languages.
PREPOSITIONS.
99
A preposition combined with a verb is termed an Upasarga
The name Gati (rrfiT:) is also given to it, as well as
to other verbal prefixes. The Upasargas are twenty-one in
number.
a. The principal or primary notion conveyed by these prepo-
sitions is in general sufficiently obvious, and may be rendered
by equivalents in English or in the classical languages. Usage,
convention, and metaphor, however, extend the primary notion
through a variety of modifications, which can become familiar
only by practice. The explanation of them all is the province
of a dictionary, and in this place all that can be attempted is
the explanation of, I. the principal purport of each preposi-
tion ; 2. the equivalents by which it is usually translated ;
and 3. its exemplification by nouns of frequent occurrence,
derived from verbs compounded of a simple verb and a prepo-
sition ; as in the following arrangement.
^rf?T 1. Going beyond a real or imaginary limit: 2. ‘over,
beyond,’ ‘ trans, ex 3. ( 1 ) ‘ going over or beyond
(2) ‘transgression;’ ^rnrsnr: ‘excess.’
'srfa 1 . Being above in place or degree : 2. ‘ over, above,
upon,’ ‘super:’ 3. (1) ‘going over or on;’
(2) ‘ going over or through,’ as a book ; ^rfu^.R; ‘ office,
superintendence ;’ vrumWT ‘ presiding spirit.’
1. After in order or manner: 2. ‘after, like:’ 3.
‘ a follower ;’ ‘ an index, a series ;’ ^nraffr: ‘ imi-
tation.’
i. Coming within a space or interval : 2. ‘ inner, within,’
‘ inter, unter :’ 3. ’SRriTff ‘ disappearance ;’ ‘ the
pervading or inner soul.’
1. Taking away in substance or kind: 2. ‘from, away,
off,’ cnro, ‘ de, dis, ex :’ 3. ‘ carrying off ;’
‘ detraction,’ ‘ censure.’
1. Affirming of a certainty:’ 2. ‘ verily, indeed’ (but this
is more frequently used alone, as an adverb or conjunction) :
o 2
100
INDF.CLINABLES.
3. ‘ a covering it is read also ftHTR. the initial
being rejected.
^rfk i. Being present, opposite, or near to ; also, being above
in place or degree : 2. ‘ to, unto,’ ‘ ad ‘ before, opposite,5
‘ ob ‘ up,’ ‘ super :’ 3. ’jrWTT? ‘ in front or in presence
of ‘ approach ^rfvriTTT: * a high land ;’ ^rfcnpr:
‘ a person of high rank.’
1. Being below in place or degree ; also, being separated:
2. ‘ down, off, from,’ ‘ de, dis, ex 3. ‘ coming
down,’ as from heaven to earth ; ‘ cutting off, exci-
sion ;5 ‘gone away, departed;’ ‘ despised.’
■53TT or iSTT 1. Bounding or limiting; also ‘reversing:5 2. ‘to,
unto, as far as,5 ‘ ad, re 3. W3iTT: ‘ form ;’ W^T3T: ‘ sky ;’
‘ going ;5 ‘ coming ;’ ‘ gift or giving ;’
^TFTPT ‘ taking.’ It is also used conjunctively with nouns
in the ablative case ; as, ‘ as far as to the village ;’
^TT^H^TrT ‘ as far as to the ocean.’
Tn or 7? 1. Being high in place or excellent in kind : 2. ‘up,
above, superior,’ ‘ super, valde :’ T|ftT ‘ flying up ;’ TRiS:
‘ excellent ;’ TSTH: ‘ great effort.’
1. Being near or next to; whence also, being less than:
2. ‘near, less,’ in to, ‘sub, infra:’ 3. TTrpr: ‘approach;’
TtTT?: ‘ a minor Veda or scripture.’
gT. 1. Condition of badness, pain, difficulty, and the like:
2. ‘in, un,’ 8vs, ‘dis:5 3. ‘wicked;’ ‘un-
happiness, pain ;’ ?W?: ‘ unbearable ;’ ‘ difficult of
access.’
ftT 1. Being within, below, or under ; also, being contrary
or reverse : 2. ‘ in, on,’ ev, ‘ in ;’ ‘ down,’ * sub ;’ ‘ un or
in,’ ‘ re :’ 3. ‘ a dwelling ;’ ‘ a heap ;’ f<m ri H
‘ coming down ;’ ‘ iniquity.’
fffT i. Being out or exempt from:’ whence also ‘affirmation,5
as excluding doubt : 2. ‘ out, without,’ ‘ ex, ab, ne :5
3. ‘ going forth,’ ‘ exit ;’ ‘ certainty f^fft?:
‘ faultless.’
PREPOSITIONS.
101
TITT i. Being opposite or opposed to; whence also ‘reverse:’
2. ‘ over, back,’ it apa, ‘ ob, re, de 3. ‘ turned
back ‘ defeat.’
irfT 1. Being all round or about ; whence also ‘ fulness,
completeness 2. ‘ about, around,5 it ep'i, ‘ per, circum
3. Trficfv: ‘ circumference;’ nfwra: ‘maturity;’
‘ perfection of fabric.5
TT 1. Being before in time, place, or quality: 2. ‘ fore, before,
above,’ 7r po, * pro, prae 3. ‘ first birth TPTTO
‘ going forth, proceeding TWR: ‘ preeminence.’
trfw 1. Reverted, or reflected, or repeated action or condition:
2. ‘again, back,5 ‘re:5 3. ufriw: ‘retaliation, requital;’
irfiTvrnn ‘ reply ;’ Tlfirfwg ‘ a reflected image ;’ irfrrfV^T ‘ day
by day.’
f% 1 . Being several or separate ; w hence also ‘ privation :’
2. ‘apart, away, without,’ ‘ dis, de, se :’ 3. ‘sepa-
rate or newT form, change of form ;’ fwfrr: ‘ disjunction,
separation ;’ f^nt: ‘ distinction ;’ froRIf: ‘ without ears.’
1 . Being conjoined with ; whence also ‘ completeness :’
2. * with, together with,’ <rvv, ‘ con :’ 3. ‘ association ;’
■H eft J ! t ‘ union ;’ ‘ perfect fabric or performance.’
*T 1. The opposite of or condition of happiness, ease, and
the like : 2. ‘ good, well,’ eu, ‘ bene :’ ‘ happiness ;’
‘handsome.’
b. Some of these prepositions may be used separately or
without verbs, especially ?rfv, ^rt, ^ni, ’'rfa, ^tt,
■qfr:, and irfir ; and there are others which are not subject to be
compounded with verbs ; as, ‘ except,’ with ‘ with,’
‘ except,’ fV'TT ‘ without’ or ‘ except,’ and Wipr, rt*T,
, or *rrf*T, ‘with,’ ‘together with.’ Some of the w^ords
given as adverbs may be considered as prepositions, as jnfN,
‘ near to.’
c. Besides prepositions in the sense in which they are usually
understood, a number of words which are actually or were
102
INJDECLINABLES.
originally nouns, of which some are included in the above list
of adverbs, are prefixed in one unvarying or uninflected form,
analogously to particles, to the verbs ‘ to be,5 4 to be’ or
‘ become,’ and ‘ to do.5 To these, in native grammars, the
term Gati, 4 motion’ or £ transition,’ is extended ; and a few of
them may be conveniently specified here, as illustrative of the
manner in which they are used with nouns derived from the
verbs above specified.
assisting the weak ;
ornament ;
’Hlfcni manifestation ;
\
>■ assent ;
}
TTft
"arl
^ striking ;
oflWItfl
TTTWl diffusion ;
r|UU reverence ;
T73T an animal, a victim ;
O 77
tItoI in the hand ;
« manifestation ;
continuity ;
XTST faith ;
good ;
manifestly ;
I ij ohU'i giving such assistance,
decoration.
^TT^fh&TT: appeared.
I
Til &c., promising, making
assent.
&c., wounded, slain.
if: diffused.
reverential salutation.
■’T'SPTrT: hurt, slain.
TTTOTSRTtn marriage.
HlgtiV appearance.
TTTiellj'rT tied in regular order.
'H d 1 4i'CH.( believing, trusting.
WicfiR treating kindly or hospitably,
being manifest.
Most nouns may also be combined in this manner with the
analogous verbs and ‘ to be,’ and f ‘ to do,5 by the
substitution of the technical affix fvq’, leaving the vowel ^ for
their finals ; as, ‘ black ;’ ‘ blackening,’ ‘ making
black,’ &c. : but this subject belongs rather to derivation.
CONJUNCTIONS — INTERJECTIONS.
103
Conjunctions.
163. The principal conjunctions are the following :
r inceptive, used to begin a
4 sentence or a subject;
‘ now, then, thus.’
and, also.
?rr? j
^|bu‘,h°w.
^TFtf^F inceptive, and imply-
ing doubt.
conclusive, used to finish
a sentence or a subject ;
‘ so it is,’ ‘ finis.’
Tff also, or.
TiTTF | whether ; implying
TFTFI ) doubt or interrogation,
also,
but.
fsFrT but.
but how ; implying doubt.
fFiJJ how, but.
fefiJTrT or how, or also.
TFFF or how, or what.
fFFT but, or, moreover.
or, perhaps.
F and, or, but.
FTj; if.
and also.
•5 but.
^ but how ; implying doubt,
but not.
but, if, is not, nonne.
FFT or not, if not.
if, how ; implying doubt,
either, or.
•JFT perhaps, or if.
^ if.
■sft^"rT if not.
\
^F if, perhaps,
iff? if.
FT or, either.
nz if.
fF for, because.
Interjections.
164. These are numerous : they are mostly sounds devoid
of signification, other than the unpremeditated utterance of
natural emotions : some are significant words, and of them some
are capable in other senses of inflexion, although others appear
to have become obsolete both in inflexion and meaning.
Of the simple exclamations the principal are the vowels, as
FT ftt, F f , F Fi, FJ »sft, which may express ‘ surprise’ or
‘ sorrow,’ like ‘ ah !’ ‘ eh !’ and FTTF, ftf, ftfFj WT, FiFTFiT, F?
FT, FTFb are exclamations of a similar kind. Others are, fFF
104
IXDECLIXABLES. EXPLETIVES PABTICLES.
implying 4 contempt ;’ importing the same, also 4 grief,’
‘ alas !’ ‘ ah me !’ T?T implying 4 grief 4 anger’ or 4 sorrow
■^T^T or ^Tift 4 grief ;’ ‘ alarm ;’ ‘ displeasure,’ &c.
a. Vocative particles, used in speaking or calling to, are
frequently employed ; some of which are respectful, others
disrespectful. Of the former class are, ’s'nfr, t, -M 7T,
it, ir, m wr, w, ■an?. Wta, Frr, ?, fr, Of the latter
are, ^T, may be used in either.
b. Some ejaculatory syllables are mystical, like the mono-
syllable ^mr, which is typical of the three great deities of the
Hindu mythology, Brahma, Vishnu, and Siva, and of the
three Vedas, and should never be uttered in the hearing of
ears profane. Others are used with charms and mystical
prayers peculiar to certain sects ; as *r, jpr, jff, ifi?. Others,
again, of which some are significant words, are uttered in the
act of pouring oiled butter on the sacrificial fire, as a libation
to the manes or the gods ; as W, %7, 3^7, ^TH7, '5^7, ^VT,
and Tjrnrr.
Expletives.
165. Syllables used mostly to complete the metre of a line
are considered to be devoid of signification ; they are, f^y, *^?y,
% TJ, ^T, % W, !?, ; being identical, therefore, for the most
part with the conjuctions.
Particles.
166. These are syllables added to words, either as prefixes
or affixes, to qualify their purport. The specification of them
properly belongs to derivation, but a few may be advantage-
ously noticed here.
vt may be prefixed to nouns of any kind, to give them a con-
trary or negative sense ; as, 4 virtue,’ wywh ‘ vice TTH
4 being,’ 4 non-existent.’ Before a vowel it is changed
to ; as, 4 finite,’ 4 infinite,’ 4 eternal.’
’HcT is a prefix implying 4 surprise ;’ 4 wonderful !’
CONJUGATION.
105
=ST prefixed to nouns gives them a depreciatory sense ; as,
‘ a man,’ <*|i4^q: * a contemptible man,’ ‘ a wretch.’
It also signifies ‘ diminution as, 3TT + TOiI = ^hut ‘ a little
warm.’
^ is also a depreciatory prefix ; * wickedness.’
1 These are added to pronouns and adverbs to give them
) a more extended sense ; as, ‘ any one,’
‘ some one ;’ 'SfTWJT, ‘ any how ‘ any
where,’ &c.
=TrT implies ‘ resemblance,’ as ■gnroTiT ‘ like a Brahman.’
tjt is usually an expletive, but when affixed to a verb in a
present tense it gives it a past signification : as, vr^fifT ‘ it
is,’ ‘ it was.’ It is also used with the prohibitive m
or nr?; as, htw ‘ no,’ ‘not,’ 4 do not.’
ff3ri is added to particles to imply ‘ doubt and interrogation ;’
as, ‘ How is it?’ ‘ Is it so?’ ‘Whether?’
‘ Is it so ?’ and the like.
prefixed to and its derivatives implies ‘ consent ;’ wtcfiTT*.
‘ assent,’ * promise.’
CHAPTER V.
CONJUGATION.
SECTION I.
Roots and indicatory letters.
167- The VTTJ or ‘ radical’ of the Sanskrit language, although
in strictness it fulfils no specific grammatical function, and
is equally the theme of a noun as of a verb, may be most
conveniently considered as identical with the latter, or as the
crude verb ; in which condition it undergoes the usual modi-
fication of conjugation, and the varieties of voice, mood, and
tense.
168. As arranged in the Dhatu-pafhas (vrjmrr:) or ‘ glos-
p
106
CONJUGATION.
saries of roots,’ the root is usually interpreted by an active or
abstract noun in the locative case ; as, #5T-fwrrt ‘ in’ division ;
rm-JTflT ‘ in’ going ; ‘ in’ being ; ^tt-sTR' ‘ in’ know-
ledge ; and the like ; intimating one general and comprehen-
sive idea to which the different modifications expressed by its
derivatives may be referred.
169. All the roots, with a few doubtful exceptions, as
‘ swinging,’ ‘ ascertaining,’ ‘ playing,’
‘ seeking,’ are monosyllables : many of them are unliteral, as
^ ‘ going,’ £ injuring :’ the greater number, however, termi-
nate in consonants, as ir#i ‘ discussion,’ rr»T * sounding,’ HT*T
‘ shining.’ In all cases, however, the root has some vowel,
most usually the short ’ST, attached to the final consonant,
not as a radical letter, but for the sake of pronunciation or
accentuation, and the mark of quiescence is therefore not
always subjoined : the roots specified, although ending as
radicals in consonants, are written tHS, tt»t, vrrtr. The whole
number is about nineteen hundred.
170. In the original lists the roots have attached to them
certain supernumerary letters or Anubandhas which
have one of two objects ; 1. Some of them denote the class or
conjugation in which the verb is inflected ; 2. Others intimate
those peculiarities to which each single verb is subject in its
inflexions. It will be useful to specify the principal of either
class for the sake of occasional reference.
1. General Anubandhas.
Sign.
Verb.
Conjugation.
75
^ 75
second.
third.
IT
IT
fourth.
I *
fifth.
V
& *
sixth.
VT
FV vf
seventh.
*
7TVT <?
eighth.
ROOTS AND INDICATORY LETTERS.
107
n
ninth.
tenth.
( a subdivision of the first conju-
( gation, sit and other verbs.
TT5T ^
another subdivision.
2. Special Anubandhas.
is added to all roots not terminating in any other radical
or indicatory vowel ; as irv (^v + ^l). This vowel should be
accented, and the accents mark the voice in which the verb is
conjugated. The grave shews that the verb takes the voice
which is termed the ^tmane-pada, ‘ the reflective the acute
accent indicates the Parasmai-pada or ‘ transitive and the
circumflex denotes that the verb takes both voices. The
accents, however, are no longer marked in manuscripts.
’ST denotes the optional insertion of ^ before tbe affix of
one of the past participles, and its absolute insertion before
another ; as, fcr^T (fc^? -f ^tt) * * * 4 to perspire indef. past part.
^5rfir?r: or ; perfect past part, ftrfy .
^ indicates the insertion of a nasal after a radical vowel in
all the tenses ; as, fafi* for Apr * to abuse ; fn, ("Vi fV) m ,
f*i rt i, &c.
^ indicates two modes of inflecting the indefinite past ; as,
+ ?T.), 4 to swell,’ makes either ’iWttt'dfTT or [.
$ prohibits the insertion of ^ in the past participle ; as,
^ i^ + %) ‘ to wet;’ past part.
7 marks the optional insertion of ^ in the indeclinable past
participle ; as, 4 to tame’ ^ ^ 0-1 W I or
■3i indicates the optional insertion of ? in certain of the
tenses ; as, f«TV (fqv + '35) 4 to succeed definite future ttitt
or ^fwr ; indefinite future or ; indef. past
rtfl H or
prohibits the substitution of a short vowel for a radical
long one in the indefinite past of the causal verb ; as,
4 to sprinkle,’ 'HfsnftssrT .
P 2
108
CONJUGATION.
denotes that this is optional ; as, (*n»T + ^)» ‘ to
shine,’ makes either ^rfWr*nT or ^rfWsTH.
restricts the indefinite past of the simple verb to one
form ; as, tpt (*pr + <s) ‘to eat indef. past
TT prohibits the substitution of a Vriddhi letter in the inde-
finite past ; as, ^ ('Sfi? + 1?) ‘to encompass indef. past
not '■sraiTtiT.
^ft indicates the change of the usual termination of the past
participle, w to ; as, -|- *ft) ‘ to break past part.
^TT prohibits the insertion of ^ in those tenses in which it
might else be inserted ; as ^ (** + ^n) ‘ to begin ;’ def. fut.
T3fT ; indef. fut. TTprfrT ; indef. past
T indicates the reflective voice ; as, (f^iT + ^) ‘ to smile,’
>T indicates both voices ; as, f^r>T (f^t sr ) ‘to serve,’ Tnrfir
or ^H7t.
fW indicates the optional employment of the past participle
in the sense of the present ; as, fsrffc^r ‘ to perspire fww:
‘ perspiring,’ ‘ perspired.’ This is an instance of what is not
uncommon, the annexation of more than one Anubandha to a
verb. The present occurs in the lists, as finfi^nn.
? indicates that the verb may take the affix to form
abstract or active nouns ; as, gw's ‘ to tremble ;’ WSTJ*. ‘ a
trembling,’ ‘ a tremor.’
1 indicates the formation of participial nouns with the affix
; as, WWW ‘ to cook’ or ‘ ripen ;’ ‘ cooked,’ ‘ ripened.’
S indicates the formation of feminine derivatives with 7TS,
as in the case of the last quoted verb tjw , which occurs WTTWS ,
and therefore forms the derivative WWT ‘ cooking,’ ‘ maturing.’
With regard to the roots themselves it may be added, that
those which in the lists are marked as beginning with the
cerebral nasal or sibilant, w or it, change usually those letters
in inflexion to the corresponding dentals ; so WS, ‘ to bow,’
makes wsf?r ‘he bows;’ w?, ‘to bear,’ ‘he bears.’ There
are a few exceptions.
VERBS.
109
SECTION II.
Classes or Conjugations of Verbs.
171. The conjugational inflexion of Sanskrit verbs is effected
by a scheme similar to that which has been described under
the head of the Declension of nouns. The verb in its inflected
form is composed of two elements ; 1 . the Anga or ‘ base/
the modified verb to which the inflexions are subjoined ; and
2. certain letters or syllables which constitute the inflectional
terminations, and are subjoined to the base. These termina-
tions, which will be presently specified, are subject to but few
changes in themselves ; but there is some variety in the manner
of attaching them to the base. The crude verb, on the con-
trary, is liable to a greater number of modifications, most of
which are special ; that is, they are restricted to the individual
instance ; and, as not being reducible to general rules, they
constitute the chief difficulty of Sanskrit grammar.
172. Certain changes, affecting a greater or lesser number
of verbs alike, have the effect of distributing them into ten
classes or conjugations. These changes regard the manner in
which the base is fitted to receive the affixes, either immedi-
ately, or mediately through the intervention of a vowel or a
syllable, accompanied in some instances by the substitution of a
Guha vowel for the vowel either of the base or of the adjunct,
when it is capable of such substitution.
a. Each conjugation is designated by a word compounded of
the first verb of the conjugation with the term wfif, equivalent
to ‘ et cetera,’ added to it. They are severally, i. v^rf? or
‘ to be,’ and other verbs ; 2. SHrJlOi or ‘ to eat/ and others ;
3- I Oj or ‘ to sacrifice/ Sec. ; 4. or ‘ to sport/ &c. ;
5. H I fi or «? £ to bear,’ & c. ; 6. TTfTTfi?' or jT<T ‘ to tease/ &c. ;
7. 'Fvrf? or ‘ to obstruct/ &c. ; 8. 7RTf<? or 7PT ‘ to stretch/
& c. ; 9. gqifc or 'aft ‘ to buy/ &c. ; 10. 0, or ‘ to steal/
&c. The following are the characteristic peculiarities.
1. The first conjugation, varf?, interposes ’ST between the
110
VERBS.
final of the verb and the inflectional termination, and requires
the Guna change of the simple vowel. Thus before fir, the
affix of the third person singular of the present tense, the verb
^‘to be’ substituting Guna becomes vft, and being inserted,
'sft with ^ becomes ^ (r. 5) ; the entire form therefore is
(*r^-fw) vr^f?T. Before the letters J? of a termination this ^
is made long ; as, nrrfir ‘ I am.’
2. In the second conjugation, ^rrrf^, the affixes are attached
immediately to the base, with only such change as the rules of
Sandhi require : ‘ to eat,’ with fir makes (^nr-fir) ’srfw.
3. The third conjugation, called tJ<^ I fif , requires the redu-
plication of the base, and the substitution of the Guna vowel
before certain terminations : no vowel is interposed. 7, ‘ to
sacrifice,’ becomes Mi and with fir, (w^T-fir)
4. The fourth conjugation, interposes 11, and in
some cases elongates a radical vowel: fi^, ‘to sport,’ thus
makes (^N-fir) ^Ntfir.
5. The fifth conjugation, , is characterised by the
addition of to the base ; the "S’ of which substitutes the
Guna letter ^ before certain affixes ; as *T, ‘ to bear young,’
becomes TT«T, and in inflexion (ipfi-fir) wrftfir.
6. The sixth conjugation, like the first, interposes ^r;
but it differs from the first in not substituting a Guna letter for
the vowel of the base : jTrf, ‘ to torment,’ makes (TT^-fir) TT^fir.
7. The seventh conjugation, subjoins ^ to the last
vowel of the base : , c to obstruct,’ becomes therefore .
The vowel is however inserted between the members of the
conjunct consonant before certain affixes ; and in combination
with fir, changed to fv, the verb makes (*jT!re-fv)
8. The eighth conjugation, Tnrrfi*', adds 7 to the final of the
base ; for which, before certain affixes, the Gufia element 'sft is
substituted: thus thj for tt^, ‘ to stretch,’ makes (infi-fir) Tnfifir.
9. The verbs of the ninth conjugation, take TT after
the final ; as -aft ‘ to buy,’ (-gihrn-fir) ^IfaTTfir.
10. The tenth conjugation, ^rxfir, inserts before the
CONJUGATIONS.
Ill
affixes, and substitutes the Guna letter for a radical vowel :
‘ to steal,’ becomes (^fttTt-f?r)
b. Of these conjugational distinctions it may be remarked,
that their especial object is obviously, in every conjugation
except the second and third, to interpose a vowel between the
base and the terminations. In four of them the vowel is
either mediately or immediately ?r, and consequently an ana-
logous mode of adapting the terminations to the base prevails
in all of them ; that is, in the first, fourth, sixth, and tenth.
The vowel of the fifth and eighth classes is T; of the ninth
'3TT. The second and third dispense with any vowel. Professor
Bopp has accordingly distributed the verbs into two principal
conjugations ; the first composed of the first, fourth, sixth, and
tenth ; and the second of the remaining conjugations. The
first he considers as agreeing most nearly with Greek verbs in
&) ; the second with those in fxi.
c. It is also to be borne in mind with regard to these con-
jugational characteristics, that they are limited to four tenses,
the present, the first prseterite, the imperative, and the potential,
in all the conjugations except the tenth, in which the distinctive
sign is preserved in most of the other tenses. In the other nine
conjugations the tenses beyond the four above named have
not the conjugational characteristic distinctions. Accordingly
Dr. Wilkins has given the four tenses specified above alone
under each conjugation, and has classed the other tenses pro-
miscuously together. Professor Bopp has followed a similar
distinction in regard to the same, under the denomination of
“ Tempora speeialia” and “ Tempora generalia." The incon-
venience however of searching for different tenses of the same
verb in different places, seems to be more than equivalent to
any advantage resulting from the more distinct exhibition of
conjugational peculiarities in the four special or conjugational
tenses ; and although the peculiarities of these will be noted
in the following pages, yet the whole of the tenses of each
verb, when particularised, will be kept together.
112
VERBS.
SECTION III.
Moods and Tenses.
173. The moods are not distinguished from the tenses by
native grammarians, who arrange the inflexions of the verb
under nine subdivisions. One of these, however, being again
subdivided, we have ten divisions, tenses and moods, of which
the verb consists. There is another, an imperative, peculiar
to the Vedas ; which, not occurring in other books, need not
be farther noticed in this place. Adopting, however, the prin-
ciple of classification common in European grammatical systems,
we shall arrange the Sanskrit verb in the following manner :
Indicative mood.
1. Present tense.
2. First praeterite or imperfect tense.
3. Second praeterite or perfect tense.
4. Third praeterite, indefinite praeterite, or aorist.
5. Definite future.
6. Indefinite future.
7. Imperative mood.
8. Potential mood.
9. Benedictive mood.
10. Conditional mood.
On which distinctions a few observations may be necessary.
174. The present tense requires no remark; it is defined
as denoting present action — action begun, and not completed :
tt '4X1 f FT ‘ he does’ or ‘ is doing;’ *rr n^fTT ‘ she goes’ or 4 is
going.’
175. The first praeterite corresponds in the adoption of the
temporal augment, and apparently in application, with the
imperfect of the Greek verb. It is defined as denoting action
recently past — action only not of to-day. But it seems espe-
cially used to signify action past, but not perfected ; or it
represents a past action continuing during another past action,
MOODS AND TENSES.
113
and accompanying it ; as, ‘ The
Rishis having gone to Manu, spake this speech.’ What they
said then follows ; so that the act of speaking was not then
perfected. Again ; ^ -rtRmiHH ftTpr ‘ The
hostile (Rakshasas) regarded not all those (omens), but attacked
their enemies.’ In both cases we have the action accompany-
ing another action, and only begun, not done and past.
176. The second praeterite is the absolute past; it relates
to an action entirely out of sight, or concluded, and also agrees
in purport, as well as construction by reduplication, with the
Greek praeterite ; as, HT^f?PTT
* Jambumali abandoned life, slain by the son of the wind with
a stone.’
177. The third praeterite is the past of any period, but
usually remote ; as, l dl £ l l ‘ There was a king ;
‘ There was a prince, a friend of the gods that is, they
were, at some time or other, in fact long ago ; but how long,
is undetermined. The application of this tense is both that of
the Greek aorists and “ plusquam-perfectum and in its forms
it varies so as to correspond more or less with them, sometimes
taking only the augment, and sometimes taking the reduplica-
tion and the augment also. It has hence been termed by
Professor Bopp the “ Praeteritum augmentatum multiforme,”
and may be suspected of being an aggregate of more than one
tense under a common denomination.
178. The first future is the definite future, denoting action
which will be after a fixed period, not remote, although not
immediate ; as, ■'iff: tnrrrrrftr ‘ Thou shalt depart to-
morrow to Ayodhya.’
179. The second future defines no limit to the commence-
ment of the action ; it will be at some future period, or it will
be contingent on some future event ; as, f?r:,5r^
*T^rT ‘ The sun will shine without fear ; the wind
will blow unrestrained that is, when the power of the enemy
Ravana shall be overturned.
Q
114
VERBS.
180. The imperative mood is defined as implying not
simply command, but the various significations of the poten-
tial. In general, however, it denotes, in the second and third
persons, injunction, advice, or command ; as, f^JT HTg ^
yfgVrrp? ‘ Let thy purpose be cruel, shew sternness,
to these (thy guards).’ In the first person, the senses are
those of intention or volition, and the verb is commonly put
interrogatively, as asking for acquiescence or command ; as,
w ‘ What may I do for thee ?’ ^,^T*nrfrTni
71^ ‘ Let us do that which is agreeable to thee, O queen.’
181. The senses of the potential, which may be also ex-
pressed by the imperative, are said to be, l. iror ‘ command-
ing ;’ as, ^ JjTJf ttsj: ‘ Thou mayest go (i. e. Go thou) to the
village :’ 2. fVppsT!! ‘ directing as, ‘ Let the
daughter’s son eat in this place :’ 3. ‘ inviting as,
‘ Let your honour sit here 4. ‘ expression
of wish ;’ as, ^^vrurrtr^riT ‘ Let the Guru teach the boy
5. WHiy. ‘ interrogation’ or ‘ inquiring ;’ as, Tit
ifril ‘Shall I peruse the Veda? or shall I study logic?’ and
6. tjt^TT ‘ asking ;’ as, vff vftiPT ‘ O may I obtain (i. e.
give me) food.’ It is also very commonly used as the subjunc-
tive mood with the conjunction ‘ if as, f^^PT vr WPW
nfft: ‘ If thou be not my protector, then I may (or shall) die.’
182. The benedictive or optative mood is considered as a
modification of the potential ; as, w W3T: afipzpr
‘ Mayest thou preserve unshaken firmness, and be steady
in the affairs of thy friends.’
183. The last tense is the conditional, which is susceptible,
like the moods, of all times, and is commonly used with the
conjunctions Trf? and ; as, TrwfMmfirtf STITT «T HT
* She (Sita) would not have been purified, if I had not pro-
tected her Tm: * You will grieve
as long as you live, if you do not relinquish this error,’
VOICES.
115
SECTION IV.
Voices.
184. The preceding moods and tenses are common to the
usual distinctions of active and passive voices ; but the Sanskrit
verb, like the Greek, has two active voices, as well as one
passive : they are called severally Parasmai-pada and Atmane-
pada, which terms are retained by Professor Bopp, and rendered
by Dr. Wilkins ‘ common’ and 6 proper’ forms.
185. The Parasmai-pada is that inflected word or verb
(pada) the action of which is addressed to another than the
agent (from Parasmai, dative of Para, ‘another’), Atmane-pada
is a word or verb the action of which is addressed or reverts
to the agent himself (from Atmane, dative of Atman, ‘ self’).
These might be rendered therefore ‘ transitive’ and ‘ reflective’
verbs, but that it is in a peculiar sense that the action is said
to affect either a different agent or the agent himself : it is
the result rather than the action, and this is therefore com-
patible with an intransitive verb. Thus, ‘ Devadatta cooks :*
in the one case he cooks for his master, the verb is then put
in the Parasmai-pada, ; but in another case he
cooks for himself, the Atmane-pada is then employed, and the
phrase is n^fTT. In ordinary usage, however, the dis-
tinction of import is little observed, and some verbs are con-
jugated in one voice, some in the other, and some in both,
without much attention being paid to their signification or
relations.
186. The passive voice takes the terminations of the
Atmane-pada, and prefixes *r ya or in some cases tt to them
before those of the four conjugational tenses. Before it the
radical vowel takes neither Guna nor Vriddhi. In the other
tenses the form is the same as in the active, with a few special
changes to be hereafter noticed.
Q 2
116
VERBS.
SECTION V.
Numbers and Persons.
187. The Sanskrit verb in its different tenses has three
numbers, singular, dual, and plural ; and three persons in
each number. They are arranged in native grammars in an
inverse order to that which we follow, the third person being
placed first, and the first person last ; but it may be more
convenient to follow the European order. The terminations
by which the persons are distinguished are shewn in the
following scheme.
Indicative mood.
Present tense.
Parasmai-pada. Atmane-pada.
Pers. Sing.
Dual.
Plural.
Sing.
Dual.
Plural.
I.
■fart
*m
R
R%
*7%
2.
firm
vnr
R
*N
R
JR
3-
f?PT
7m
\
THfijT
*S
7T
w?r
rtr!
First praeterite or im
perfect.
i.
^rfrPT
R
R
*
RfV
2.
ftrq
\
7T
7T
rtr
rttrt
jr
3-
7TT
rpt
’JHfri
■‘X'ff
Second praeterite or
perfect.
I.
R
R
r
*s
2.
■snt
\
*s
R
£
3-
WQ
^TcTO
SJ \
TR
R
7HT7T
Third praeterite or indefinite past.
i.
RT
fR
rtp?
2.
RT
RT
rrtr Ri^li
JR
3-
Rfrr
WT
vm
\
RT
^TTcTT
R7T
cl I IV?
First or del
inite future.
i.
rrmm
rflWR
rrnjr
TTT*s F
7TTW?
2.
■frrftt
tttrrr
fTTRT
tttr
tttrtr
TTUR
3-
7TT
7TTO
TrrTR
7TT
TrrrT
?rrtR
NUMBERS AND PERSONS.
117
Second or indefinite future.
I.
wjifu'q
WPHT
\
Win*
2.
3-
wtfrm
TqfriT
TqiT
Wff
Imperative mood.
i.
^Tfrpr
\
*TT*nT
\
2.
if
IT
^TT^TT
3-
in
^3
ITT
’HTTTT
Potential or subjunctive mood.
I.
m
TTPT
■jtth
2.
TTTTT
\
imr
HTfT
f^TTxn
t*T
3-
TTTrT
\
TTTWf
o \
t^mn
Benedictive or
optative mood.
i.
TTTTT
ITTFR
2.
tutt
irref
irmr
\
Tfhnwf
3-
TTT1T
iith r
Tffrrren
Conditional mood.
I.
^T
TTTTC
RTTH
•s
wnrfT?
2.
TqTT
rt
TTTTT
Ttrrnr
WTJsf
3-
writ
wnrf
WTTT
T^nrf
TTT^rT
Principles of Conjugation.
188. The inflexions of the verb are formed, like those of
nouns, by adding the preceding terminations to a base modi-
fied from the root by conjugation al or other peculiarities ;
requiring us therefore to consider the subject under the same
heads, or changes of the terminations and changes of the base.
Changes of the Terminations.
189- Of the changes of the terminations, some relate to their
structure, independently of any influence of the base, and arise
from the rejection of the superfluous and indicatory letters
which they comprehend : thus the letter in ftni, ftni, and
118
VERBS.
wherever else it occurs, is rejected, leaving fir. fa. fa, and the
like, as the real terminations. But tj is an indicatory letter,
and serves to point out that, when there is no rule to the con-
trary, the vowel of the base, whether radical or derived from
the conjugation, is to be changed to its Guna substitute :
thus ?, ‘ to go,’ makes trfa before fan, but before nn, ; n
* to extract,’ in the base before fan makes n'H lfri, before
inr, trtTrt: ; or the n serves to limit other changes of the vowel
of the base to the persons in which it occurs ; as, n?l, ‘ to buy,’
before fan is 'vfanfa, before nn, ^hrifn: . In the ^tmane-
pada, it will be observed, an indicatory n occurs only in the
first persons of the imperative, and accordingly before the rest
of the terminations the changes which that letter is employed
to indicate do not occur.
a. In the first praeterite the ^ of ^fan, fan, fan is inserted
only for the articulation of the syllable, and the real termina-
tions are therefore nm, n, <j, the latter changeable to tt :
thus n?, ‘to speak,’ having a final in the base from the
conjugation, makes When the base ends
in a consonant, n and as the finals of a conjunct consonant
are rejected : thus ‘to kill, makes ^rnrr, , not
. In the Atmane-pada the of the termination
is superfluous, leaving w as the real termination.
b. The ttt of trrq in the first and third persons singular of
the second praeterite is an indicatory letter, and as ti is so also,
as well as in 'spt of the second person, the real terminations are
'SI, ; but tr, as before, indicates the Guna change of the
radical vowel, while w indicates its taking the Vriddhi form
if it be final, or if it be a medial ; as, trft, ‘ to guide,’ makes
faRTO becoming ir, and i? becoming ^rtl, by r. 5, before
^r) : so RT, ‘ to go,’ becomes rrtt, the medial radical R taking
the Vriddhi ^srr.
c. A final becomes of course Visarga by the rules of
Sandhi (r. 37) ; so vr, im, &c. make r:, tt:, and the like.
190. Besides those changes of the terminations which are
PRINCIPLES OF CONJUGATION.
119
independent of the influence of the base, the initial letters of
the terminations are commonly modified according to the letter
of the base which immediately precedes them. Some of these
modifications are merely the changes of Sandhi, as when ^
follows a base ending in the substitute is i? (r. 2) ; as,
and ^ make and ^7TT, vrTrTT ; and dental letters follow-
ing a cerebral final become, as being part of an affix, cerebrals
also (r. 13) ; as ‘ to hate,’ with fit forms irfF, the vowel
being changed by virtue of the xt of ffr^ : so set, s?, &c. of
the Atmane-pada become ^ &c. after a cerebral. But besides
these changes of Sandhi, there are some of a special character,
of which the follow ing are the most important.
a. After a base ending in % that is, after a verb of the
first, fourth, sixth, and tenth conjugations, the ITT of the termi-
nations of the potential mood in the Parasmai-pada substi-
tutes in the first pers. sing, ^xr, in the rest as ; and
in the third pers. plur. prefixes ^ to xpr. With the of the
base ? becomes V , and w e have therefore with vr, from H 4 to
be,’ htw, &c.
b. In the same conjugations in the Atmane-pada, the x? of
the first person sing, present tense, and the initial *TT of the
terminations of the second and third persons dual of the pre-
sent, first prieterite, and imperative, are changed to which
with the conjugational final becomes f, as xnt 4 to increase,’
X?V, xjvxr, In the other conjugations the initials are
unchanged, as 4 to speak,’ second conj., WEfTXT,
c. After verbs of the four conjugations which form their
bases with ^T, the initial x<t of the terminations of the third
person plural of the present, first praeterite, and imperative in
both Padas is rejected; as xjw ‘to cook,’ , xrw^Ts
not TT^TfttT &c., as would else accrue from the concurrence of
a final and an initial After any other vowel the initial
remains, as also after a consonant,
d. After verbs which are polysyllabic, or become so by
reduplication, the nasal of the third person plural of the
120
VERBS.
present, first praeterite, and imperative is rejected ; as,
* to be poor,’ ; *TT ‘ to measure,’ reduplicated, fWff,
vrfHMTT, fHH'rfT. The nasal of the third person plural is also
rejected in the same tenses in the i^tmane-pada after all
verbs in all the conjugations except the first, fourth, sixth,
and tenth ; as, 2d conj., ‘ to rule,’ srrenr, ^lIHrf, Terrain ;
■^i, 8th conj., ‘ to do, 'J'lpT, a ft , n i, not UTTHvT, &c.
e. After a base ending in xar, whether it be the radical vowel or
derived from a diphthong, the left by TEPT is changed to
in which the final of the base is merged, as ‘ to give,’
f. The initial 7T or vj of a termination, as inr, vnr, &c., or
when it has become the initial by rejecting a preceding as
W from ^ (see next clause), is changed to v after an inflective
base ending in an aspirated soft consonant, which aspirate be-
comes of course the corresponding unaspirated letter (r. 8) ;
so fir after ^rru makes *U!if^, and vnr after makes
g. The initial TT of the compounds ^r, ^TT, bjtb, and *3-
of the third praeterite is rejected after an inflective base ending
in any short vowel except ^T, or in any consonant except a
nasal or a semivowel ; so ‘ to make,’ before w, **T, &c.
makes ^T^T, &c. ; Tm. ‘ to cook,’ before WT, Par. pada,
; before *3, Aitm. pada, (the ^ having been changed
to «r) : so ‘ to burn,’ having made its final makes
^rryi with ^fTT ; the being rejected, TT becomes v by the
preceding clause, and xt, it by Sandhi (r. 32).
h. The termination of the second person singular of the
imperative is rejected altogether after a verb of the first,
fourth, sixth, and tenth conjugations. In the other conju-
gations it remains unaltered after a base ending in a vowel, as
if? ‘ speak :’ it is changed to fv after a consonant, ‘ eat:’
it is similarly changed after the verb ■? ‘ to sacrifice,’ as yjirfv.
Changes of the Base.
191. The inflective bases are modified in the conjugational
tenses according to the rules already described (r. 172),
PRINCIPLES OF CONJUGATION.
121
or the influence of the indicatory letters contained in the
terminations affixed to them. But in affixing those termina-
tions, the final of the base, whether a vowel or a consonant,
will be further modified by the rules of Sandhi, which should
always be borne in mind, as many seeming anomalies arise
from no other cause, and admit of ready explanation. Most
of the rules of Sandhi which are applicable to verbal inflexion,
and some which scarcely belong to the subject of euphonic
combination alone, have been already inserted ; but it will be
convenient to repeat some of those which are most useful, as
immediately concerned in the principles of conjugation.
a. The final vowels of the inflective base take the changes
required by Sandhi before other vowels. Monosyllabic bases
ending in "3% "35, when not liable to Guna or Vriddhi,
change them sometimes to and ; as, ‘ to study,’
^ ‘ to join,’ ^ ‘ to bear,’ as a child, *nrr?r.
Final diphthongs in the non-conjugational tenses substitute
’STT ; as, ^ ‘ to decay,’ first future, "^jTWT ; ^ ‘to destroy,’
*fTTT, &c.
b. Final consonants in coming upon terminations beginning
with consonants combine with them, according to the rules
affecting hard and soft consonants : thus ‘ to eat,’ changes
? to w before fw &c., as ^rf%, ; before a soft consonant it
is unaltered, as But before semivowels and nasals,
although, as included in the class of soft consonants, they
should require a change in the preceding letter, yet, in conju-
gation, hard consonants remain unaltered ; as, f to speak,’
; pot. '^vqTrT .
c. A final palatal consonant followed by any consonant
except a nasal or a semivowel is changed to its corresponding
guttural ; as, before T7T makes ; ?r»T ‘ to abandon,’
ist fut., ?r^iT.
d. But there are certain verbs ending in palatals which in
conjugation, as well as in declension, substitute it for the final
(see r. 94, a) before any consonant except a nasal or a semi-
R
122
VERBS.
vowel: tvst, * to worship,’ is one of these; hence in the first
future, wr.
e. A final before becomes and forms with it Ef
(r. 27) : whether therefore ^ be derived from the change of
the palatal to a guttural, as in 7q>T, making EFT, and before a
hard consonant Et^, or from the change of the palatal to
and thence to as in xr*T, making and then tts, the
formation with terminations beginning with will be the
same, as in the second future we have with xqrfiT &c. EJE?nfTT,
TT^rrftT, and the like.
f. A final ^ or ji may also be changed to ^ before any
consonants except a nasal or a semivowel ; as, TT3T, ‘ to ask,’
with Tn makes ttft ; ‘ to be small,’ ; and with xtrfff,
UVtM Th, ESEqfiT.
g. A final ^ or V may be optionally changed to t (^) before
the of the second person sing, of the first praeterite in the
Parasmai-pada, when f^, ‘ to know,’ would become ;
but *T as the final of a conjunct must be rejected (r. 35),
leaving ; and as ^ final is changed to Visarga, the form is
; otherwise, the radical final being merely changed to its
hard consonant before *T, we have ^stTft ; so before ^ or tf of
the third person we have ETTTT or , becoming, by rejection
of the final of the conjunct, or
h. A final ^ before *T and of the first praeterite, and
before fv of the second person imperative, and Uf of the
second person plural in all the tenses of the Atmane-pada, is
changed to In the two first cases the finals of the con-
junct are rejected, leaving 7 as the final; as, fir1* ‘to hate;’
second and third persons first praet. In the latter the
hard letter becomes the soft 7, and V after a cerebral is
changed to the cerebral whence we have flTTfe, fl^.
i. A final Ef before any consonant except a nasal or a semi-
vowel rejects and is inflected like a verb ending in ; as,
^et, £to speak,’ makes with it, &c.
A final mav be changed to <* before the terminations
PRINCIPLES OF CONJUGATION.
123
of the second and third persons of the first praeterite, reject-
ing them as finals: ‘to shine,’ makes '^TWcf.T:,
Before a sibilant, *T may be changed to it ; as, =nr, ‘ to dwell,’
before makes ^irt/lTT* before wifir, In the present
tense of the indicative mood may be rejected or retained
before ftr, it ; as ^TTTT, ‘to govern,’ makes ^rrftr, 'Sint or ^rfw,
Sllfif. After ’snr, ‘ to be,’ it is rejected, making ^rffcr only.
Before fv and ^ it is rejected ; as, from ^ttw we have ^rrfv,
SfTTPt.
k. A final ^ before any consonant except a nasal or a
semivowel is changed either to or Z- It is changed to tt if
the verb begins with followed by any vowel except ; if
it begins with the syllable j?, or with any other consonant
than it is changed to except in the verb ‘ to bind,’
when becomes v. These several consonants combine with
the initials of the inflectional terminations, agreeably to the
rules of Sandhi : thus tf before an aspirated soft consonant
becomes JT ; as, ‘ to milk,’ with fir, becoming fv by
r. 190,^, as above, and changing its vowel through the tj of
fwrr , makes ifrfHi ; with vjw, <*7v: ; with WT, ^Vvt.
/. But 11 as a final, or before *t, must be changed to the
hard letter of its class, or ; before ftr therefore it makes
vtfisr, cfi and becoming eventually (r. 27). The W and ^
of the second and third persons of the first praeterite being
rejected, the verb becomes (w), (^) ; for the initial
of a word being tt, ■?, <*, ^r, and the final being either of their
aspirates or Fj the first are changed to their respective aspi-
rates, or u, <r, V, H, when the latter undergo a change, as being
the finals of the inflected term, or as coming before tsr or Tt;
hence 5? makes Vtfst,
m. When F final is changed to <?, fw and xi become (r.
190 , f) fv, w ; but the dental is changed to the cerebral after
a cerebral, and v becomes % ; when f is doubled, the first is
rejected ; fo?, ‘ to lick,’ becoming before fF from fir,
makes therefore ^fF. Before F becomes n, and that, as
R 2
124
VKHBS.
before, «fi ; whence in the second person singular present tense
we have and in the future 'srsgtrfiT, 'FSOTrT., &c. In the
two persons of the singular of the first praeterite, which reject
their and the aspirate becoming final is necessarily
changed to z, when we have w (k), (^). A few
verbs, as and others, substitute either tt or z for the aspi-
rate, as do the nouns derived from them (see Declension,
r- I33)-
The changes prescribed by these rules will be rendered
more familiar by their application, at the risk of some repeti-
tion, to the inflexions of different verbs in the paradigms that
will be given under the several conjugations.
Formation of the Tenses,
192. Present tense. The changes of the terminations have
been pointed out in the preceding rules : the subjoined scheme
gives them as they are so modified.
Parasmai-pada.
Atmane-pada.
1. fir
T.
^ or
2. ftt
it ^iror^rir sit
3. frr
tt:
Ol’ vi Pri
tt ^Tror’srrff ^r-
The changes of the base are either conjugational, or result
from the influence of general or special rides already noticed :
they will be specified in their places.
193. First praeterite. The modified inflectional termina-
tions are,
or H
w
7TT
IT
rf - or
*
xrc:
or wrRTT
^TTT or ’.1 1 (1 i"
£4
or ^Trt
Besides the special changes to which the base is subject in
this tense, there is one modification which is universal, the
prefixing of the temporal augment to a verb beginning with
a consonant ; thus makes ‘ he went and ^rr to one
beginning w ith a vowel : in prefixing the augment ^ to a verb
PRINCIPLES OF CONJUGATION.
12i
beginning with a consonant, no change takes place, but for
3IT and the radical vowel the Vriddhi equivalent of the latter
is substituted ; as, 3t7 ‘ to go,’ 3fT7H ‘ he went 4 to wish,’
ir?TT ‘ he wished.’ If the verb be a compound with a prepo-
sition, the augment is inserted between the preposition and
the simple verb : thus from vrm, ‘to speak,’ comes trfrWq ‘to
speak again,’ ‘to reply;’ first praeterite, ‘he replied.’
194. Second praeterite. The terminations as modified are,
3T
f*
■ST
3T
it
3rm
■N
3T
3m:
■?:
3rnf
After verbs in 3TT, or diphthongs converted to 3TT, 3?T is substi-
tuted for 3f in the first and third persons singular.
The changes of the base are more numerous, and the most
important may be conveniently noticed here. One of these,
which may be regarded as universal, although subject to a
few exceptions, is the reduplication of the root ; in effecting
which, certain substitutions for the radical letters sometimes
take place.
a. If the verb commences with the vowel 3f, the repeated
vowel is 3TT, which combines with the radical 3f ; as, 35^ ‘ to
eat,’ WT ‘ he ate.’ But if the verb contain a double con-
sonant, vr is inserted after the reduplication, and before the
radical vowel ; as, 3nt ‘ to worship,’ 3nTt ‘ he worshipped.’
It is also inserted before 3T3T ‘ to spread ;’ as, 3rRST ‘ he spread :’
but not before 3T5T ‘ to eat ;’ as, 3rrST ‘ he ate.’
b. If the verb begins with ^ or convertible to the Gufia
or Vriddhi elements, as before the terminations of the singular
number, by virtue of their indicatory letters, the syllables of
reduplication are 317 and ; thus ‘ to go,’ becomes ^fitt ;
and the radical 3; becoming it before trnt, forms with the 3f ot
the termination 3mr, or altogether 3*111? ; before the x? of vrq
the radical 3 takes only Guna, making The root "3^ , k to
wither,’ takes Guna before rpT, making, when repeated, 7 ;
before the other terminations of the same tense, not requiring a
126
VERBS.
change of the radical vowel, the reduplication of the initial
produces a long vowel ; as, "afRiT:.
c. An initial ^ substitutes ^rr ; as, Rj ‘ to go,’ ‘ he
went:’ followed by a consonant it inserts it; as, ‘to be
straight/ makes ‘ it was straight.’
d. A verb beginning with a single consonant, not a guttural
nor an aspirate, is simply reiterated ; as, tR' ‘ to sound,’ ;
xpr ‘ to cook,’
e. A guttural consonant is changed to the corresponding
palatal, or «s to and tt Tf to it ; as, cs ‘ to make/ ;
c to dig/ ‘ to take,’ »T?jT^r ; xpr ‘ to eat/
»T is also substituted for ^ ; as, ^ 4 to take/ In some
cases the reduplication of an initial semivowel is the corre-
sponding vowel ; as, xnr 4 to sacrifice,’ ^qTJT ; and 4 to
speak,’
f. The unaspirated is substituted for an aspirated conso-
nant ; as, h*t 4 to whirl,’
g. When the initial is a double consonant, the first only is
reduplicated ; as, ftsr 4 to serve,’ f^imq ; f&R 4 to throw,’
fisrsR. If the compound be a sibilant and a hard consonant,
the latter is reduplicated ; as, g 4 to praise,’ ttfT? ; WT 4 to
stay or stand/ rrwh If the consonant is soft, the sibilant is
repeated ; as, ^ ‘ to remember/ ttwr. If a sibilant and hard
consonant followed by if occur, the medial is repeated ; as,
■SpT 4 to ooze/ ^wnr.
h. is the reduplicate of a medial or final ^T, ’3TT,
and of a final i?, ; as, ^ 4 to make/ ; m 4 to shine/
^ 4 to sing,’ inft ; also for the ^ of 4 to be,’
i. Any other short vowel, medial or final, is repeated ; as,
JTR 4 to be pleased,’ JT»pT. A long vowel is made short ; as,
‘ to sprinkle, For a medial diphthong the analo-
gous short vowel is repeated ; as, xtTj 4 to go/ ftntFT ; F5T3i 4 to
see, c»rt l<*.
k. Verbs which begin and end with a simple consonant,
having a medial ^r. and of which the first consonant is unal-
PRINCIPLES OF CONJUGATION.
127
tered in the repetition (see cl. d), do not double the verb before
the terminations of this tense beginning with a vowel, whether
it be the vowel of the termination itself, or the inserted aug-
ment to be presently noticed. Such verbs change the
radical to ; thus tjr makes, dual and plural in the third
person, tfRir:, ; and in the first, ; and in the
second singular, before R, optionally (r. 195, g).
395. Of those changes which affect the primitive or unre-
duplicated syllable of the inflective base, some are special, and
will be hereafter noticed : the most general are the following,
and concern chiefly the vowels.
a. The terminations of the first and third persons singular
having an indicatory tit require, as observed above (r. 189 b), the
substitution of the Vriddhi letter for final vowels and a medial
as, idI ‘ to guide,’ third pers. sing. fFPTR » 7 ‘ to run,’
and 7 becoming severally ^ and changeable before a vowel
to and ; see r. 5) ; rpr ‘ to go,’ inrR. The termination
of the first person singular is sometimes considered to be
optionally and the person has therefore two forms,
or min.
b. An initial short vowel, and a medial, except *T, takes the
Guna substitute before iipi ; as, ***» ‘ to wish,’ makes ;
<pT ‘ to know,’ R^fv. A vowel long either by nature or posi-
tion, when initial, requires a different form of inflexion, as will
be presently explained : when medial, it is unaltered ; as,
‘ to live,’ fspffa ; f^TST ‘ to learn,’ ftrfgrs?.
c. The second person, Rtf, requires the Guna change of
any final vowel, and of a short medial vowel ; as, fir 4 to con-
quer,’ c to hate,’ The same if ^ is inserted ;
as, Pn vj, ftirfaR ; see cl. g.
d. Before the dual and plural terminations of this tense
in the Parasmai-pada, and all those of the Xtmane-pada, that
is, in all the persons not having an indicatory *rr or tj, the
radical vowel, if initial or medial, is unaltered ; as, "3R 4 to
burn,’ ■jRrr: ("31 becoming by virtue of the reduplication only,
128
VERBS.
as above, r. 194, b) ; ‘ to hate,’ firfT37T:, fir%3. A final
vowel is unaltered before the consonants ; as, 3! ‘ to do,’ 3^3,
3^3 ; and is changed before the vowels only according to the
rules of Sandhi, 3313:, 33i. A final 3T is rejected before a
vowel ; as, Tf ‘ to give, rTSt, rp? ; and roots ending in diph-
thongs change them, with few exceptions, to 3TT, and are
similarly inflected. ^ and ^ final undergo the changes of
Sandhi, or are changed to 3 before the terminations which
begin with vowels, or which are preceded by the augment as
fig, ‘ to gather,’ makes figuirf:, figfrqg : except when the root
consists of a single vowel, or when s is preceded by a conjunct
consonant, in which cases ^3 is substituted ; as, ^ ‘ to go,
^33: ; fig ‘ to sen e,’ finfidtUR: ■ A final 3 or 3 substitutes 3^,
as 3 ‘ to run,’ £ ^rf:, except 3, which substitutes '3*3. 3W33:.
A final substitutes the Guna and so does ^ when
preceded by a double consonant ; as, vx ‘ to remember,* 33*13:,
There are some anomalies in regard to the changes
of the radical vowels ; but these will be pointed out as they
occur.
e. Initial semivowels are sometimes changed to their corre-
sponding vowels, and the verb is inflected as if commencing
with them ; as, 33 ‘ to speak,’ 33T3, 3133:, 313:.
f. Some verbs having 3* between two consonants, of which
the latter is a nasal, reject the vowel before all the termina-
tions except those of the singular in the Parasmai-pada ; as,
33 ‘ to be born,’ 33T3, 333:, 33; 33 ‘to go,’ 3733:, &c.
g. Before 33 and the other affixes of the second praeterite
beginning with consonants, as 3, 3, 3%, 3^r, 3, ssr, all roots,
except °ji ‘ to do,’ 3 ‘ to go,’ 3 ‘ to nourish,' 3 * to surround,’
3 ‘ to run,’ 3 ‘to hear,’ ‘ to drop,’ sr * to praise,’ insert
as, 33 makes 3T33. 3fi33, 3133, 3fi33, 3f3S3, 31333, 3f3*,^ ;
but 3i, 3grit ; '5'. 33fig, &c. Before 33. roots ending in vowels
optionally insert the augment, as fig makes figgg or f33fgg ;
and roots ending and beginning with consonants having a me-
dial 3T, and not inserting ^ in the other tenses to which it is
PRINCIPLES OF CONJUGATION.
129
usually applicable, may take it before vpj, as or
The v of at may be changed to z after the augment as
or xrNur.
196. Besides the formation of the second praeterite upon
the principle of reduplication, there is another fort^f of it,
which may be regarded as a compound praeterite tense, the
radical verb being combined with the inflexions of the auxiliary
verbs ‘ to be,’ H ‘ to be,’ and a; ‘ to make.’ The syllable
is interposed between the radical verb and the auxiliary
inflexion : thus FV, ‘ to increase/ becomes in this tense,
TVTtTH
TTUIHlfn^
FVTFTftm
fvrtIitxt
FURR
5VTHTH
fvwr?:
fvrr:
V>
Cv
FVnRfsR
Cv
FVTFFFR
Cv
Cn
FVF
FVRHF
FVT^TW:
FVT^TTT
F^i^Pau
a. Verbs of which the initial is any vowel except ^ or ^TT,
and which is long either by nature or position before two
consonants (except ‘ to go/ and 4 to cover’), also the
roots ‘to go,’ ‘to sit,’ and ‘to hurt’ — verbs of
more than one syllable — all verbs of the tenth conjugation —
and all derivative verbs, as causals, frequentatives, desidera-
tives, and nominals — take the compound form of the second
praeterite.
b. In inflexion, and always follow the Parasmai-pada ;
takes either Pada, according to the voice of the primary
verb.
c. oFT^T and ^fiR ‘ to shine/ to be poor/ f^TT ‘ to
know/ ‘ to be awake/ and TU ‘ to burn/ may be conju-
gated either in the reduplicate or compound praeterite.
197. Third praeterite or indefinite past. The inflexions of
s
130
VERBS.
this tense are so various, that it has been termed by Professor
Bopp the “ praeteritum multiforme and Dr. Wilkins has
specified eleven modes in which they are formed. In these
latter, however, he comprises not merely changes of termina-
tion, but modifications of the base, and those affecting the
terminations by the insertion of certain augments.
a. The alterations of the terminations are not many, but
the terminations themselves are referrible to two classes. They
are, 1 . the terminations of the tense, as specified in the scheme,
p. ix6; or they are, 2. those of the first praeterite, as found
in the same place.
b. The changes of the first class are confined to the elision
of the *T combined with w or vi (r. 190. g). The only change
of the second class is the optional substitution of '3TT for
the termination of the third person plural.
c. But besides these forms, of which the first class may be
regarded as regular, the tense is in different verbs inflected
with various modifications of both classes, arising from pre-
fixing certain augments to these terminations. To the termi-
nations of the first class ^ may be prefixed, either singly or
with xet, as ftr ; to those of the second class, in like manner,
is prefixed, either singly or with the sibilant, as *T.
d. When ^ is prefixed alone to the terminations of the first
class, the of *ffar and of the second and third persons
singular of the Parasmai-pada is rejected. In the other per-
sons the dental sibilant is changed, of course, to the cerebral
after ^ (rule 29). We have then,
In the Parasmai-pada only, *T may be prefixed to these termina-
tions, making fwr, ftrrar, ftn* ; *ft:, frr£, ftre ; tfftr, fwzi, f^:.
e. The inflexions of the third praeterite becoming those of
Parasmai-pada.
Xtmane-pada.
?? ^rnzrf ^4or ^
TO V? V™ V**
PRINCIPLES OF CONJUGATION.
131
the first, the tense preserves an analogy throughout, and
instead of inserting the augment which cannot belong to
the first practerite, inserts % which does belong to it in the
first, fourth, sixth, and tenth conjugations. The terminations
of the tense then become,
*r.
Parasmai-pada.
Atmane-pada.
isni
•snr
VTfTT
’spt or '3':
>H7T
V rl I
>3^ror '5TK
Here, agreeably to rules already specified, has become ?it
before ^ and h ; the initial of has been rejected
after the vowel augment ; is dropped before ; and the
'3TT of ■wrnrr and ^njT, having been changed to form I? with
the augment ; so does the ^ of the first person singular.
f. Sometimes, but rarely, and only after a verb ending in a
vowel, the augment is rejected in the Parasmai-pada, when
the terminations of the first praeterite are attached directly to
the base. It is more usual, however, to prefix to them in
both voices ; making therefore,
Parasmai-pada.
Atmane-pada.
\
TTPT
fa
TTrT
*TfT
*nzn:
imn
**
TEnrf
7T7T
^mrf
Or, in order to have a convenient view of the whole at once,
we may exhibit the scheme of the terminations together, both
primitive and modified.
First class.
i. Terminations of the third praeterite, according to the
regular scheme.
Pers.
Parasmai-pada.
Sing. Dual.
Plural.
Atmane-pada.
Sing. Dual.
Plural.
I.
\
SR
fa
2.
W (*)
ftt: (w.)
3*
•FTT (ITT)
0
^ (w)
*T?T
132
VERBS.
2. Terminations of the scheme with ^ prefixed, and the of
the second and third pers. sing. Parasmai-pada omitted.
i. ^
TO
&
2. $ ^
V*
^¥t:
TO
3- t*
TO
^rnrf
TO*
3. The same with TT prefixed : Parasmai-pada
only.
1. ftnpr
faR
2.
fa?
3. tffrr
0
Second class.
i. Terminations
of the first praeterite, omitting the indi-
catory letters : Parasmai-pada only.
I.
\
*T
2. *(:)
if
ft
3- *
KT
\
or ?:
2. The same, and those of the Atmane-pada,
with pre-
fixed, according to the usual forms.
I. RR
RR
wrrf?
2*
vr
^ixit:
irfa
3. ^nr wf
or "3:
TRT
is? or RW
3. The same terminations
with *T
prefixed,
without the
Guna changes of the Atmane-pada.
I . TTHT
\
*TR
fa
Rf%
2. *t: *r
TTrT
ttxtt:
3. *R TTnT
0
7T7T
RUT
RrT
g. Modifications
of the base. These are for
the greater
part of a special description, and will best be adverted to
under each particular case. A few of the most general ones
may be here inserted.
h. The indefinite praeterite prefixes the temporal augment,
whether it retains its own terminations, or adopts those of
the first praeterite; as, tit ‘ to go,’ wPPftw ; H ‘to be,’ ^jwt.
PRINCIPLES OF CONJUGATION.
133
Combined with a vowel, the Vriddhi substitute is taken ; as,
‘ to see,’ In a few verbs, which take the termina-
tions of the first praeterite, the root is also doubled ; as, fwt
* to serve,’
i. Before the terminations of the first class, or those which
are its own, verbs having simple final vowels commonly sub-
stitute for them the Vriddhi element in the Parasmai-pada,
and the Gufia in the Atmane-pada ; as, arft ‘to take,’ cfl ,
; v ‘ to shake,’ ^ ‘ to make,’ ^srsfirnffiT . A
short vowel is however sometimes unchanged before R, when
(r. 190.(7) the sibilant is dropped; as, ^ , third pers. sing.
Atmane-pada, WRIT. A final is unchanged in the Atmane-
pada when the augment ^ is not inserted. Verbs ending in
diphthongs commonly change this to ^rr ; as, ^f, ‘ to destroy/
makes or ^RTr^.
Of roots ending in consonants, those which take the aug-
ment either with or without the sibilant, and have a medial
optionally substitute the Vriddhi wr in the Parasmai-pada ;
but not if they end in *T, 11, or a double consonant, or are
distinguished by an Anubandha nor do the roots 7RT and
■*EPfT admit of the alternative ; as, TT7, ‘ to read,’ makes wnrnfhr
or ; but to wander,’ tr ‘ to restrain,’ wrwfa.
If they end with t or c^, the vowel is invariably long ; as,
or ‘to go,’ , HRIwlTT. So it is in ^ ‘to speak,’
and ‘ to go,’ ^RTcfhT, ’'RRfrT. In the Atmane-pada the
change does not take place ; as, rt. ‘ to hasten,’ -.NNU_y.
j. Any other medial short vowel substitutes the Guna
element in both voices, except in certain verbs. If the final
is a double consonant, no change takes place, nor is a long
vowel changed ; as, ‘ to know,’ ‘ to flower,’
’Smrafht ; ‘ to shine,’
k. Of those which do not take the augment and which
are marked in lists of roots by the Anubandha the medial
vowel substitutes the Vriddhi element in the Parasmai-pada,
before the proper inflexions of the tense ; as, zj»t ‘ to worship,’
134
VERBS.
•^qrgfbr ; but not in the Atmane-pada ; as, ire ‘ to liberate,’
TRip;; ^ of being rejected (r. 190. g ), and ^ becoming m
before w (r. 191. c).
l. Before the terminations of the first praeterite — and before
which, it should be remembered, the augment ^ cannot be
inserted — verbs ending in vowels undergo the Guna change
when the affix begins with ^ ; as, w, 4 to go,’ makes :
when the augment ^ is not inserted, they are unchanged ; as,
<»T 4 to give,’ ; and final diphthongs are changed to ’•ST ;
so that 4 to drink,’ makes 'ST^rnr . Medial short vowels are
unchanged. The verbs that insert the sibilant before the
terminations of the first praeterite in the sense of the third, are
those which end in ^r, or having any other penultimate
than or m There are a few exceptions. The final sibilant
or aspirate is changed to cS before (r. 191 . e.k. I ), making the
compound as, f^T ‘to shew,’ 4 to be thin,’
’sre^pr. Verbs of the fourth conjugation of the class
are inflected with the terminations of the first praeterite in the
Parasmai-pada with the augment ^T, when the radical vowel is
unaltered; as, ttc 4 to nourish,’ So are verbs of the
class frirrf^ of the first conjugation, -^jrl H ; and verbs distin-
guished by an Anubandha 75 ; as, 4 to be able,’ 3( ot,rf .
In the Atmane-pada some of these verbs may be inflected
with the terminations of the third praeterite, prefixing and
may take the usual changes ; as, ^jtt, 4 to shine,’ makes
^raifriy.
m. Verbs which have an Anubandha ^ are conjugated in
the indefinite praeterite with both classes of terminations ; as,
f^T, 4 to cut,’ makes either or
n. Verbs having an Anubandha do not insert ? before the
terminations of the third praeterite ; as, (^*rr) 4 to obstruct,’
vKirWlri , ^TCTgT, ; or Atmane-pada, ^T*\r+trf.
o. Verbs with an Anubandha optionally insert ^ ; as,
(ftrvr) fitru 4 to be perfect,’ cT , wit, ’smTTj ; or ^ravbr,
7 ^
principi.es of conjugation.
135
p. All the verbs of the eighth conjugation, except ^ ‘ to do,’
besides taking and being inflected on the principle of cl. d,
may dispense with the ^ in the Atmane-pada, before the termi-
nations of the second and third persons singular ; before which
also they drop their own finals ; as, 7T?f ‘ to stretch,’ wart,
^Tffxn: (the of and WT*t being rejected by cl. b.)
q. All verbs of the tenth conjugation, and causal verbs, are
inflected with the terminations of the first praeterite, with the
augment The root is doubled before them, according to
rules to be given when treating of the causal praeterite ; thus
^TTL, ‘ to steal,’ makes
Of the augment
198. The insertion of this augment is not restricted to the
cases in which it has already been pointed out in the second and
third praeterites, but is extended to the terminations beginning
with consonants in the other tenses which are not comprised
within those that take the conjugational distinctions, except
the benedictive of the Parasmai-pada. The objects of the
insertion and exception may be easily understood. In the
former case it is intended to supply the place of the conjuga-
tional vowel ; in the latter, the initial of the termination is the
semivowel tt, which may be united with a preceding consonant,
and does not need the interposition of a vowel.
a. The augment ^ does not form a long vowrel with a
preceding ?, nor does it ever take the Guha substitute : Tift,
‘ to guide,’ becoming in the second praeterite, makes,
with ^ prefixed to W, *T, f^rfaR, f?rfara.
b. Although, however enjoined in most cases, there are
many exceptions to the insertion of this augment. In the
two futures, the conditional, and the benedictive Atmane-pada,
as in the third praeterite, ^ is not inserted after verbs distin-
guished by an indicatory ‘ to begin,’ ‘ he will
begin and it is optionally inserted in verbs having an indi-
catory n ; as, fav, * to be accomplished,’ makes in the first
136
VET? IIS.
future ^rr or rfvffT. In the tenses now named, however, a
more general prohibition to the insertion of and which is
not applicable to the praeterites, is when the vowel of a verb
has the grave accent. These verbs are specified as follows.
c. Monosyllabic verbs ending in vowels : except those
ending in '3i and and except also ^ ‘ to sneeze,’ ‘ to
whet,’ ¥1 ‘to fly,’ ttt ‘to praise,’ tj (2d conj.) ‘to join,’ ^ ‘to
weep,’ ^ ‘ to enclose,’ 3ft ‘ to sleep,’ f^i ‘ to serve,’ f*g ‘ to
increase,’ THT ‘ to drop ;’ which verbs admit Verbs ending in
also insert ^ before the terminations of the indefinite future.
d. The following verbs ending in consonants do not insert
this prefix.
^ to eat.
fr^ to shine.
■srrn to obtain.
(f5T to bite.
■gro to attract. (1. 6.)
^ to burn.
■jjvj to be angry.
f<T5T to shew.
to cry aloud.
fiff to smear.
fEPT to throw.
<pT to do wrong.
to pound.
to milk. (2.)
to be hungry.
to be proud.
to be distressed.
to see.
rpr to go.
to hate.
xnr to eat.
xp^ to cook.
to cut.
^ to go.
■grr to touch.
ftp* to grind.
nw to bow.
to cherish. (4.)
irr? to tie.
TT^ to ask.
ftn»T to cleanse.
to bind.
tttf to send.
to bind.
7nt to inflame. (1. 4. to.)
mr to serve.
firq to drop.
*T^ to break.
Tjr?' to torment.
to break.
TTg to be satisfied.
to enjoy.
TjTT to be satisfied. (4.)
HT5T to fry.
W3T to abandon.
H'Jf to think.
PRINCIPLES OF CONJUGATION.
137
HT3T to merge.
qq to dwell. (1.)
fir? to urine.
q? to bear.
Jpq to be free.
fqq to differ.
JT^T to perceive.
fqq to differ.
q»T to sacrifice.
fq^ to know. (4. 6. 7.)
q* to copulate.
fq^T to enter.
qq to stop.
feq to pervade. (1.3. 9.)
TpT to join.
qjq to pierce.
to fight.
to be able. (5.)
rST to colour.
^ to wither.
to begin.
STq to vow.
Ttt to sport.
%q to hurt, to distinguish. (1.7.)
TPJ to accomplish.
3pt to be pure. (4.)
ficq to purge.
3Tq to dry.
ft^T to hurt.
f?rq to embrace. (4.)
to be sick.
q^ to embrace.
rni to obstruct.
q^ to w'ither.
to hurt.
fqq to sprinkle.
to ascend.
fqq to accomplish.
to acquire.
to embrace.
feq to smear.
tqq to sleep.
fc?$T to lessen.
?mt to accomplish.
f?T? to lick.
qq to abandon.
<^q to disturb.
qq to creep.
qq to speak.
to go.
qq to sow.
qpiT to touch.
The figures mark
the conjugations in which the verbs are
inflected without ? ; in any others they may insert it. The
same verb sometimes belongs to more than one conjugation,
either with the same or with a different sense.
199- First future. The terminations of this tense undergo
no other change than the substitution of Visarga for as
in^n, htw, and the change of w to v after an aspirated soft
consonant (r. 190 ,f). The changes of the base are few and
T
138
VERBS.
simple. The final vowels 7, '3i, qj. substitute the
Guna elements, q, ^rt, *n:, whether the augment ^ be inserted
or not ; as, nr ‘ to conquer,’ qin ‘ he will conquer :’ if in-
serted, the first two are changed by the rules of Sandhi to
^ ; as, *[ft ‘ to sleep,’ srfqffT ‘ he will sleep ^ ‘ to cry,’ qfqin.
A final q and q are changed to WT, and this vowel, as well as
undergoes no change ; as, * to give,’ «fnn £ he will give
V ‘ to drink,’ vrrrTT ; $if ‘ to sharpen,’ ^ftnT. The medial vowels
'3', qj, if followed by a single consonant, also substitute the
Guna letters ; as, fqq ‘ to sprinkle,’ qqrr ; 3Tq ‘ to be sad,’
^frrxnrr ; but qj is sometimes changed to q, as ‘ to see,’
«^FT ; long vowels are unchanged, as ‘ to live,’ qlfqin. The
final consonants when not separated by the augment ^ from
the dental ft, which is the initial of all the terminations of this
tense, combine with it, according to rules already given : thus
q^r makes qqiT ; qq, iRT ; qq. ffsTT.
200. Indefinite future. The terminations of this tense
differ from those of the present only by prefixing qq ; like
them, they reject q, and substitute Visarga for a final q; as,
qqrfq, tqtq:, wta:, &c. After any vowel, except ^ or ^n, the
q becomes q ; and after a consonant it takes such form as
the rules of combination require.
a. The changes of the base are not numerous. A final
vowel short or long, or a medial short vowel, the latter not
being long by position, substitutes the Guna element, which
before ? is changed to the form which the laws of combination
require. Final consonants are also modified according to the
same rules, and to others given above. A final palatal is
changed before q to the hard guttural qi, and the compound
is formed ; as, qq ‘ to cook,’ qwfrT ; fqtfq ‘ to wash,’ fqwfff.
After a final cerebral sibilant the same change takes place ; as,
■^q for ‘ to see,’ makes ; and a similar combination
takes place after a final q (r. 191, k) : when the final is so
changed, the initial is changed to its aspirate (r. 191, /); so
qq, c to burn,’ makes 5? ‘ to milk,’ vff^fq.
PRINCIPLES OK CONJUGATION.
139
201. Imperative. The terminations in the four conjuga-
tions ending in are,
^rrfxr
N
x?
’STTXxt
- —
if
7T
x<T
7TT
vS
WT
^rTT
In the other conjugations the terminations of the second sing.
Parasmai-pada are f*r or fv, and in the third plural or
In the Atmane-pada they are ’JTTfTT in the second and
third persons dual, and ^niTT or ^Tfi in the third plural. TTHT
is substituted for the second and third persons sing, in a bene-
dictive sense ; as, ‘ may thou’ or 4 may he be.’
a. The changes of the base are conjugational, and analogous
to those of the present.
202. Potential. The terminations may be those of the
regular scheme, substituting Visarga for the final xt ; or they
may be thus modified in the four conjugations ending in ^ in
the Parasmai-pada: i. ^T, 2. ^it; 3. ^rri,
These with the ^T of the base make the initial x? ; as,
The ^ of the Atmane-pada likewise forms
x? with ; as, xtjtt, xryrxrnrr. After the other conjugations the
terminations of the scheme are unchanged; as, WUTW, rTgiilrf ,
^rnxhiTwf, &c.
a. The changes of the base are conjugational.
203. Benedictive mood. The terminations are not liable
to any other change than that of XT final to Visarga : ^ may be
inserted before those of the Atmane-pada, when XT becomes it.
a. The following are the principal changes to which the
inflective base is subject in the Parasmai-pada, and when ^ is
not inserted in the Atmane-pada.
b. Of verbs ending in vowels, most of those which termi-
nate in wr, either as a primitive or as derived from x? or x?,
substitute V in the Parasmai-pada ; they are unchanged in
the Atmane-pada ; as, ‘ to give,’ Tfxrnr, Jrrtfte. Some change
T 2
140
VERBS.
it optionally before ; as, ^ ‘ to sing,’ irnjTtf or iftrnT . Those
in which is preceded by a conjunct consonant, except FT
‘to stay,’ do not change the ; as, wtt ‘to blow,’ urnffiT.
Those ending in ^ or ^ substitute ^ in the Parasmai-pada, and
the Guna letter i? in the i&mane-pada ; as, rfl ‘ to take,’ ^farr^,
Those ending in 7 and '3i substitute '3i and i*ft ; as, ^
‘to hear,’ ^rqTTT ; ‘ to praise,’ srcrnr, *rftq?. ^ short sub-
stitutes ft:, and long in the Parasmai-pada ; as, '3i ‘ to
make,’ fwnr ; TT ‘ to cross,’ fffcnftTT. Verbs ending in ^r, and
beginning with a compound consonant, substitute the Gufia
^ for their final; as, ^ ‘to spread,’ wulH • In the Atmane-
pada the vowel is unchanged ; as, ^ ‘ to make,’ A final
is unchanged ; as, ‘ to wither,’ ^frqin .
c. Verbs ending in consonants change their finals according
to the rules of Sandhi, or others of an analogous application,
only before the sibilants of the Xtmane-pada ; nor do their
pi’eceding vowels undergo any alteration ; as, ‘ to cut,’
fgfOTrT, fiswte ; Tfr* ‘ to cook,’ tthttf, w^. If the final be a
compound, of which a nasal is the first member, it is rejected
in the Parasmai-pada, as ‘ to bite,’ ; not in the
Xtmane-pada, as ‘ to embrace,’ ; nor does this apply
to roots inserting a nasal in consequence of an Anubhandha
as, 'qf? ‘ to rejoice,’ TFUTrT .
d. Some verbs containing semivowels change them to their
corresponding vowels in the Parasmai-pada ; as, ir^ ‘ to ask,’
‘ to speak,’ ; qq ‘ to sow,’ ; tjit ‘ to
worship,’ ‘ to bear,’ ‘ to dwell,’ TGJTrt ;
T5T ‘to subdue,’ There ai’e a few verbs containing the
semivowel ■q, and ending in I?, which admit of a similar modi-
fication, and reject the diphthong ; as, q' ‘ to weave,’ 'STOUT ;
‘ to conceal,’ qftrnr ; and gr ‘ to call,’ ?nrn^.
e. When ^ is prefixed to the terminations of this tense in
the Atmane-pada, the changes of the base are analogous to
those of the other tenses before the same augment.
FORMATION OF THE VERB.
141
204. Conditional mood. The terminations follow the ana-
logy of those of the indefinite future (see p. 117)-
a. The base prefixes the temporal augment, with the same
modifications that occur in the first and third praeterites : in
all other respects it is analogous to the inflective base of the
indefinite future ; as, ind. fut. **f%wrfiT ‘ will be,’ cond. ’'wfT'tnt ;
‘ will eat,’ cond. .
SECTION VI.
Formation of the Verb.
205. From this general view of the formation of the tenses,
we may now proceed to trace an entire verb through all its
inflexions in the two active voices and in the passive voice.
In following the example of Mr. Colebrooke, and offering ‘ to
be,’ as an example, we select a verb of general usefulness, and
frequent recurrence, w^is a verb of the first conjugation: it
is properly confined to the Parasmai-pada, and in its character
of a substantive verb cannot well admit of any other. With
prepositions, however, it takes a transitive sense, and may then
be both active and passive ; as, ‘ he perceives
‘ it is perceived.’ We may, however, lay aside the preposition
for the present, that the purpose for which the verb is exhi-
bited, that of supplying a model of extensive application, may
not be embarrassed by unnecessary complexity.
206. H as a verb of the first conjugation changes its vowel
to before the sign of the conjugation It changes it to
also before the augment which it admits: and before ^
and Wt becomes ^r=r. The inflective base with the augments
is therefore and In the second praeterite ^ is added
to the radical vowel, and the verb being repeated, the base is
In the third praeterite in the Parasmai-pada the verb
takes the terminations of the first praeterite, without any
antecedent vowel : in the i^tmane-pada the tense retains its
own proper terminations with the augment
142
VERBS.
R ‘ to be.’
CV
Indicative mood.
Present tense, ‘ I am,1 Szc.
Parasmai-pada.
A'tmane-pada.
RRTfR
rrtr:
RR
RTRR RRTR?
rrtr
RRR
RRR
RTR RRSR
VR-flFT
RRff:
RTPR
RR7T
RRR RRRT
First prscterite or im
perfect, ‘
I was,’ &c.
^trrr
"RRTR
^TRRTR
^TRR
^tRRRf? "RRRTRf?
^rr:
^TRRrT
"RRTrT
twro:
"S?RTRT
^TRRtTT
^TRRR
\
^TRRIT
WWT "RRRRT
Second practerite
or perfect, ‘ I was
or have been,1 &c.
rrr
Cv
WR
Cv
RRfRR
Cv
RRR
RRfRR^ RRfRRR
RRfRR
O'
rrrr:
Cv o
RRR
Cv
RRTRR
Cv
RRRTR RRfRR (r)
RRR
Cv
RRRR:
Cv o
RRR:
Cvo
RRR
Cv
RRRTR RRfqT
Cv Cv
Third prset., indefinite, or aorist past, ‘ I
was or had been,1 &c.
Cv \
RTRR
Cv
■RRR
Cv
^TRfrfR
f
I
f
1
Cv
^TRTT
C\
^TRR
Cv
^hrtrft:
^RfRRTRT ’SRiRR (r)
^RR
C \
^rrt
Cv
Cv \
^RRRT?
■RRpmmi ^TRpPTrl
First or definite future, ‘ I w
ill be,1 &c.
RfrarffR
RtViTTR:
RfRrTTW:
RTRrTT?
RfWTR? RTRTTTfR?
vrfVnTftt
A
r< *N
r* *N *v
RMrflMT.
RRrTTTR
RTTrTTR
RRrTTRTR RR7TTSR
RfiTrrT
RRRTTT
rtrrti:
RWWT
RPrfrrrr rrrtt:
Second or indefinite future, ‘ I will
or shall be,1 &c.
RfrccrrfR
RfVsTR:
Rfrcrm:
RfRGJ
RfWPT?' RRRmt
Hfqr^rfT
^fTcnr.
RfTntR
RRRTR
Rf^TRR Rnrojs^
iTHTTZHTT
mw:
RfRRrfRT
RPHSTT
RTTOTK RTROrR
Imperative mood
‘ May I be,1 &c.
RRTTR
RRR
RRTR
RR
RTRt RRTRt
RR
RRff
RRR
RRR
RTRT RRJR
RRrTT
RRRT
o
RRrTT
RRHT RWT
PASSIVE VOICE.
143
Potential or subjunctive mood, ‘ I may be,’ &c.
hr?
hw:
>rkiT
*RfT
\
Benedictive or optative mood, ‘ I wish I may be,’ &c.
^*1
wn:
H5TT7I
C\
*nrrgr
Cs
httr:
nf^qhr nfqqfaf?
Hfwtn: HftRlirmrr (<r)
ufaqVg Hkretqrarr nf^qk^T
Conditional mood, ‘ I shall be, if,’ &c.
^wfkniR
’swfkanr
^HfqrqTlf ^wfawH
^mfrar ^mVcqrqf?'
wPrrit: ^vrPRisq
^mfranr ’SRfTkfrr ^THfratqr
Passive voice.
207. In this voice ti is prefixed to the terminations of the
conjugational tenses in the Atmane-pada, as in the first con-
jugation, or preceded by ^r. Before if a final vowel is not
susceptible of a Guna or Vriddhi change. In the non-
conjugational tenses the passive follows the form of the active
voice in the ^tmane-pada ; but verbs ending in vowels may
also take the Vriddhi change in all the tenses except the
reduplicate praeterite. In the third person singular of the
third praeterite ^ is substituted for w; and before it the radical
vowel is changed to Vriddhi, with exception of -qv ‘ to know,’
to be born,’ and ‘ to kill,’ which make ^r«ftfq ‘ he was
known,’ ’STrrkr ‘ he was born,’ ^Rfv ‘ he was killed.’
208. Before the conjugational tenses, however, several verbs
ending in vowels undergo special changes. Roots ending in
^TT commonly substitute ^ for the final ; as, ‘ to give,’ ;
m ‘ to drink,’ xfhR ; ‘ to stand,’ whi^. HT, ‘ to nourish,’
preserves ^rr, as qTzr?r. ‘ to be poor,’ drops its final,
^ and ^ are severally changed to the corresponding-
long vowels ; as, fk ‘ to gather,’ ; *T ‘ to join,’ qqw. A
long ^ is unchanged, but ^ft, ‘ to sleep,’ forms SlWfT. A final
144
VERBS.
■qj generally becomes ft, as 3;, ‘ to make,’ ; but if
preceded by a conjunct consonant, it adopts, in exception to
the general rule, Gufia, as SR, ‘ to remember,’ A final
^r, with some exceptions, becomes $T, as ‘ to tear,’
Diphthongs are changed to ^TT, and then follow the analogy
of roots in 'FT, as Ft, ‘ to destroy,’ &c. It is unnecessary
to multiply examples, as the type of the passive voice is
included in the paradigms given in the following pages. The
following is the verb F in the passive voice.
Present tense.
*N V
Cv
•v^v
FFTT
CV
Cv
First praeterite.
FFF
FmrRfyr
^njTRf?
ffttot:
Cv
fwIft
Cv
FR~qsg
Cv
FFTHT
Cv
ffttht
Cv
FFFnT
CV
Second praeterite.
Cv
FFfa- or FFlfVfa
or FFTfrsr.
Third praeterite.
FFfa- or FFTf^rf?
FHfq- or FHTfVRm
or FHTfwrrf
FFf%- or FFTfirFf?
F*rfa- or FHrfaST
F*rf%- or FFTfwfr
*rf%- or FTfVrtr?
Ff^- or HTfVrTTF
fr- or mfirwi
Rfir- or Wlfruj
Hfir- or mfirmh
Ffx- or
First future.
nfk- or HlfijriHjit
or HTfaifTHTF
or mfVfrru
Second future,
nfa- or
or
Ffa- or
Ffa- or Hlfil'iUW?
vrfx- or HTfwrsT
Ffa- or FTf^HR:
or HTfwrR?
nfir- or FTfiPFS?
Hff- or
DERIVATIVE VERBS.
145
M*mrt
mw
Cv
inraf
C\
MW
M^rq
©V
«w:
©s
H^IT
nfq- or HTfq^ftq
Mfq- or mfqql'ST:
Mfq- or mfqMiy
^THfq- or vwifqTq
wfa- or ^THlfqmqi;
or wmfVnnr
Imperative.
M^T^I
qw
M^rtT
©s
Potential.
MWvri
C\
MWrTT
Benedictive.
nfq- or
Mfa- or MTfqrfhmsqf
vrfq- or MTfMftrreri
Conditional,
qnrfq- or qmifwrqfV
or qrMiPqwqr
wfo- or vTMTfWTTT
Mfq- or
vrfq- or MTfq^?d
Mfq- or HTf^nfhTT
’Stuff- or vRMlf^'orRfV
>HMfq- or qrmfwjq
qnrfq- or wifqtw
SECTION VII.
Derivative Verbs.
209. Before proceeding to any detail of individual verbs, it
is desirable that some notion should be entertained of those
secondary or derivative forms of which the simple verb admits.
Some of these might perhaps be more correctly designated as
moods ; for causality, desire, frequency, or intensity, are but
different modes or conditions of the same action ; and the modi-
fications by which they are expressed are no more to be regarded
as distinct verbs because they take all the tenses of the simple
verb, than are the moods of the Greek verb, of which the
same circumstance may be predicated. As however the deriva-
tive forms have been hitherto given separately, and as their
annexation to the simple verb as moods would present to the
learner a rather formidable array of verbal inflexion, the distinct
explanation of them may be here also observed.
u
146
VERBS.
Causals.
210. All verbs admit of a modification implying causality,
as causing to be, to do, &c. In the language of the original
grammarians, fin’g is added to the verb ; that is, the vowel
which is convertible to and becomes before a vowel ; the
*!T in the affix indicates the substitution of the Vriddhi element
for the radical vowel ; H therefore becomes m, which with ^
makes Hlfg. or before a vowel
\
a. The causal verb may be conjugated with the termina-
tions of either voice ; with those of the Parasmai-pada when
it is strictly transitive ; with the ^tmane-pada when it is
reflective, or when the consequence of the action reverts to
the causer or instigator, is inserted before the terminations
in the eonjugational tenses, and ? in the non-conjugational ;
except in the third prseterite, which takes the terminations of
the first prseterite. The second prmterite is formed with the
auxiliary verbs »j,
b. Verbs ending in ’ITT, whether primitive or derived from
the change of a final diphthong to ’2TT, insert g, <5, or it, before
the causal augment ; as, tn 4 to drink,’ mggfTT ‘ he causes to
drink ;’ trr ‘ to preserve,’ TTTPSzrfTT ‘ he causes to preserve sn
‘ to know,’ sT"nnrflT ‘ he causes to know,’ ‘ he teaches.’ In some
instances the radical vowel is optionally made short ; as, sTf
4 to sharpen’ or 4 kill,’ srrxnrfiT or sfggfiT 4 he causes to kill
njiT ‘ to bathe,’ WTzrflT or zjgzrfiT ‘ he causes to bathe.’
c. Roots ending in ^ or ^ when substituting the Vriddhi
element ir change the latter, of course, before the vowel of
the causal form to ^ng ; as, fig 4 to collect,’ grggfiiT ‘ he causes
to collect :’ but g is sometimes replaced by g, and the vowel
in both cases made optionally short ; so that fig makes also
gTggfiT, gggfg, or gggffr. Roots ending with ^ sometimes
either change the radical to the Guna element, or preserve it
unchanged, interposing a consonant before the causal augment ;
as, fil 4 to be ashamed,’ fggnr ; gt ‘ to be pleased,’ gtaugfiT or
DERIVATIVE VERBS.
147
TrhjufiT. Roots ending in 7, '31, and mostly change
their finals to the Vriddhi substitutes.
d. Roots ending in consonants usually change a medial =3T
to ^rr ; and ^ and ^ to w, =3rf and m. Long vowels are
unchanged. There are exceptions, as in the class of roots
called TjTrfir or tf? ‘ to endeavour,’ with other verbs of the first
conjugation, which do not make the vow'el long, as 'SrqfiT.
Of roots ending in ??, some do and some do not make the
vowel long ; as, tt*t * to go,’ TjrniffT ; cp? ‘ to wish,’ ofiFniffl'.
FH, ‘to kill,’ substitutes tnrr ; as, ■srnrqfiT ‘he causes to kill.’
‘ to ascend,’ optionally substitutes it for the final ; as,
fftrcrffT or ffa-qfiT ‘ he causes to ascend or grow,’ ‘ he plants.’
e. These general rules for the modification of the base
are applicable to all the tenses except the benedictive in the
Parasmai-pada, and the third prseterite. In the former the
causal augment is rejected, although the vowel of the base
undergoes the change to which it is liable in this form, as
H becomes In the third prseterite, which takes the
terminations of the first, and the conjugational augment ’JT
before them, the root undergoes reduplication, with some
peculiar modifications of the radical vowel. With very few
exceptions the causal augment is rejected ; as, xn^, ‘ to ask,’
makes =3nrtrr^lT, not ^rxjurxnnT. In general the radical vowel,
if long, is made short ; as, ‘ to please,’ ‘ he caused
to please ;’ v ‘ to shake,’ ‘ he caused to shake.’ There
are some exceptions, as in the instance of xrr^ ; so also 3TTR,
‘ to govern,’ makes =319(31 r*nt. Some verbs take both forms ;
as, wrpt ‘ to speak,’ ■^rfavrpnr or ‘ he caused to speak.’
f. In doubling the root before the third prseterite of the
causal, the general rules are mostly to be observed (sec p. 125) ;
but there are also some peculiarities.
g. If the verb consists of a vowel followed by a consonant,
the first member of the reduplication is the entire root, with
the vowel modified by prefixing the augment ^tt ; to this, ^ is
added, with the radical consonant ; as, =317 ‘ to go,’ ‘ he
u 3
148
VERBS.
sent/ or ‘ caused to go ^75 ‘ to worship/ i'fr4<47 ‘ he caused
to worship.’
h. If the verb begin with a consonant, the reduplicated
consonant will conform to preceding rules (r. 194. d to g). The
reduplicate vowel will be ’S, or
i. rn is repeated for a radical *T prosodially long ; as, 75»r ,
‘ to obtain/ makes ‘ he caused to obtain / and for
when it is preceded by a double consonant ; as, ijrr ‘ to tram-
ple/ ‘ he caused to trample for ^rr medial, which is
preserved in the inflexion ; as, $TTTr ‘ to govern/ '^SISIIWH ;
and for and ^ in some verbs ; as, ^ ‘ to be,’ ‘ he
caused to be / ? ‘ to tear/ ‘ he caused to tear.’
j. becoming ^ before a single consonant followed in its
inflected form by a short vowel, and remaining unchanged
before a double consonant, or before a single consonant if
followed in its inflected form by a long vowel, is repeated —
1 . for or *TT when not followed by a double consonant ; as,
‘ to cook/ 'snffrr^nr ; ^(T 4 to shake/ ; wt ‘ to
stand/ ‘ he caused to stand 2. for tt, if ; as, fsr
‘ to conquer,’ ‘ to surround/ : 3. for T or
"3i preceded by tT, a labial, or a semivowel ; as, ‘ to make
haste,’ ‘ he caused to make haste ‘ to be,’
\ ' Cv \
‘ he caused to be ;’ 75 4 to cut/ : 4. optionally for '3- or
cfi preceded by the same consonants in composition with others ;
as, ^ ‘to hear/ xH fsi 'H ^ r| or : 5. for when that does
not substitute as, y* ‘ to be/ ^HVtvJ'rf7T, otherwise v'rwtlT;
or in some cases where it does take Guna ; as, '3i ‘ to make/
^T-«iloRrT ‘ he caused to make.’
k. "g-, liable to be changed to '3> by the same circumstances
which require the alteration of ^ to f , is repeated for f, "gi, ^fr,
^ ; as, ‘ to grow,’ ‘ he caused to grow/ ‘ he raised ;’
<ST3i ‘ to seek,’ ’JTT^T^ ‘ he caused to seek / * to sleep/
^TfPTTTrT ‘ he caused to sleep.’
/. Some of the forms of this tense are apparently anomalous,
although they arise out of previous rules : thus ^ ‘ to go/ with
DERIVATIVE VERBS.
149
prefixed, * to read.' makes wqTftnjir or * he
taught’ or ‘ caused to read tn * to smell,’ wftrftrmr or ’^rfinrq'?^
‘ he caused to smell ;’ ‘ to kill,’ wsrYqvnr ; and qT ‘ to drink,’
vrTlzqTT ‘he caused to drink.’
m. It is not necessary, either in the case of causal deriva-
tives or those about to be described, to multiply examples
under their several rules. In the succeeding pages paradigms
will be given of many of the most useful verbs, and these will
include examples of their derivative verbal inflexions.
Desideratives.
211. When the agent wishes, intends, or expects to do the
action, or be in the condition, which the verb imports,
technically called is added to the root. The is rejected
before the terminations of the non-conjugational tenses. The
root undergoes reduplication, and is conjugated in the same
voice in which the primitive is conjugated.
a. Before the augment ^ is very commonly prefixed.
Its exclusion occurs for the most part after those roots which
do not take the same augment before the non-conjugational
tenses (see p. 136). This does not prevent the use of the
augment before the personal terminations in those tenses in
which it is enjoined in all derivative verbs. After ^ the tt of
is changed to q.
b. The reduplication of the radical syllable follows the rules
affecting consonants (r. 194, d to g). There are some pecu-
liarities in regard to the vowels ; ^ being usually substituted for
a radical medial or final '3T, ^irr, qj, t?, i*; and ^ for '3',
3i, ^T. When the root begins with a vowel, the redupli-
cation is the radical syllable itself, followed by the final con-
sonant with ^ prefixed ; as, ‘ to eat,’ ^rf^ifsrq ‘ to wish to
eat.’ Very commonly, however, there is no reduplication, but
the initial letter or the whole syllable is changed ; as, wiq ‘ to
obtain,’ ‘ to wish to obtain qpt ‘ to increase,’ ’ * to wish
150
VKKBS.
to increase,5 &c. The same occurs with verbs beginning with
consonants ; as, ‘ to give,’ fVrflfiT ‘ he wishes to give ;5
fa ‘ to scatter,’ and £to kill,’ faw, fHrfc'fri ‘ he washes to scat-
ter5 or ‘ kill £ to be able,5 faptr, as f^T^fa ‘ he wishes to be
able,’ ‘ he learns ;’ T5H ‘ to obtain,’ fajwr, as fex^rfa ‘ he desires
to obtain ;’ tpr ‘ to go,’ fafaff ‘ he wishes to go ;’ xttt ‘ to fall,’
fcn^flT ‘ he expects to fall,’ &c.
c. Besides the changes to which the radical vowels are
subject in the syllable of reduplication, they are occasionally
subject to the same or similar changes in the radical syllable
also. When ^ is not prefixed to ^r?r, a radical short ^ and g1
become long ; as, ‘ to conquer,5 makes fiTjfixifn ; jfj ‘ to join,’
wtffa. The long vowels remain for the most part unaltered ;
as, frr ‘ to know,’ fafrrafa ‘ he wishes to know ;’ ‘ to be,’
xwxtffT ‘ he w ishes to be.5 ^ and ^ are commonly changed
to as, ^ ‘ to make,5 ‘ he wishes to make :’ but
when preceded by a labial, the substitute is git: ; as, ‘ to die,5
makes H?fafa £ he wishes to die.’
V» C\
d. When ^ is prefixed to TfHT, a final grr may be dropped ;
as, (jfcrT ‘ to be poor,’ ; otherwise Other
final vowels may substitute the Guna or Vriddhi elements,
changed before ^ agreeably to the rules of Sandhi. Thus far,
‘ to serve,’ makes far'nfimfri ; othei’wise ftT’farfa. £ to go,’
substitutes n*T, which takes and makes fanfaxtfa ; but not if
^ifa be prefixed, as ^rfafanfaff. ij, ‘ to purify,5 substitutes ^
for its radical, which becomes the Guna x?, and by Sandhi
gnt before the augment fcnrfaTrnr. gn|, ‘ to cover,5 takes
different forms, grmgfqq fn , ^abrfaqfa, or Those
verbs in gj or w hich prefix 5 to *T, change the radical letter
to n ; as, ^ ‘ to go,’ grfafaqfa £ he wishes to go.’ w ‘ to cross,5
with is ffnrft-qfR- ; without it, farffafa.
e. Most roots ending with consonants prefix ^ to *rvr. When
they do not, the finals combine with the sibilant, agreeably to
the laws of Sandhi ; as, trg ‘ to cook,’ fxprgr £ to wish to cook,’
fW8jf?T ; TT7, which takes makes faxrfstrfa ‘ he w ishes to
DERIVATIVE VERBS.
151
read.’ ‘ to spread,’ and ttvr c to serve,’ take both forms ;
as, finiTOffT or fTraf^fir, ftrarafir or fwfa-qfff.
f. Verbs having a medial ir, "3i, when ^ is prefixed to
?T, optionally substitute the Guha letter ; as, ‘ to please,’
or FTTf^tjfrl. There are a few exceptions ; as, ^
‘ to weep,’ When the final is it is changed to "a1,
when ^ is not inserted ; so fta, ‘ to play,’ makes faHuffT,
or ‘ he wishes to play.’ A medial ^ or ^
is usually changed to wr_ when ^ is inserted, but remains
unchanged when it is not ; as, to dance,’ makes either
or
g. Some verbs take the form of the desiderative, although
they have the meaning only of the simple verb ; as, ipr ‘ to
blame,’ ‘ he blames ;’ f^FlT ‘ to cure,’ fVarPRfrT ‘ he cures
*TTJT ‘ to investigate,’ JTfahtTT ; and a few others.
Frequentatives.
212. When repetition or intensity of the action or condi-
tion is signified, ir , technically called is added to the verb.
The nasal t intimates that it is to be conjugated in the
Atmane-pada only. The root is doubled. Again, it is said
that the affix is rejected ; when it is not inserted, although the
verb retains the reduplication. In that case the frequentative
form may, according to some authorities, be conjugated in
either voice, although others restrict it to the Parasmai-pada.
a. Verbs implying motion take the frequentative form in
the sense of tortuous motion, and some others in an ill sense
of the verb. With some exceptions, the frequentative form is
restricted to verbs consisting of a single syllable beginning with
a consonant.
b. When conjugated with * *T, the verb follows the model of
verbs of the first conjugation ; that is, it inserts before the
terminations of the four conjugational tenses. When has
been rejected, it follows that of verbs of the second conjuga-
tion, or is inflected without the intermediate vowel '5T.
152
VERBS.
Frequentatives inserting xi.
213. In the reduplication initial consonants are repeated,
agreeably to general rules (r. 1 94. d to g). A verb beginning with
a vowel repeats the whole, and makes the vowel of the primitive
syllable, if short, long ; as, ‘ to wander,’ £ he wan-
ders much.’ A monosyllabic vowel is changed to its Guna
x'epresentative in both syllables ; as, ‘ to go,’ ^STjdj'Fr £ he
goes often.’
a. A medial ^ or *?t is represented in the reduplicate
syllable by ; as, tr^r ‘ to cook/ trnrWff ; xrn* * to ask/
innivqTt. If a root with a medial ends in a nasal, the nasal
is repeated ; as, rm ‘ to go,’ afjj-ujw ‘ he goes frequently’ or
‘crookedly.’ Some follow different forms; as, jPT, ‘ to be
born/ makes either or ; and ‘ to kill,’
-i| ?r, or Some verbs insert a nasal in the redupli-
cate syllable ; as, ‘ to speak,’ '4^ -tUJrf ‘ he talks much.’
Some with a nasal in the primitive, retain it only in the redu-
plication ; as, ‘ to bite,’ ‘ he bites much and verbs
ending in if, 75, insert a nasal optionally ; as, ^73 ‘ to go/
or -4 ‘ he goes crookedly’ or ‘ repeatedly ;’ tr??,
‘ to bear fruit,’ has only one form, The verb ^44, ‘ to
go/ also inserts a nasal, Some verbs, having a medial
^T, require to be placed after the reduplicated consonant,
and if they have nasals, drop them ; as, * to go/ ;
or ‘ to fall/
b. The simple vowels ?, 73i, final or medial, and
whether radical or derived from the changes to which a radical
vowel or diphthong is subject in this form, substitute the
Guna letter in the reduplication ; as, ‘ to know7,’ ;
‘ to be/ i^T ‘ to give/ becoming iff, makes ;
and n ‘ to sing,’ first changed to m, makes iff, and then
The vowel ^ is put after the Guna substitute of ;
as, vnt ‘ to dance,’ TrfbTWK.
c. The radical syllable is also subject to various modifica-
DERIVATIVE VERBS.
153
tions, affecting chiefly the vowels. A final ^rr, whether primi-
tive or substituted for a final diphthong, is changed to ^ ; as,
to give,’ ^ and '3', when final, are made long ; and
if long, are unchanged ; as, fa ‘ to gather,’ ; q ‘ to coo,’
-cfi^nTT or qj preceded by a single consonant is changed
to xf; as, Hi, ‘ to make,’ becomes qqrhjw ‘ he makes’ or ‘ does
incessantly.’ If the initial is a double consonant, the vowel
is changed to ; as, w, ‘ to remember,’ makes qrXRSPW.
When medials, the radical vowels are for the most part
unchanged.
d. Some verbs containing semivowels combined with con-
sonants change them, and the vowels following them, to their
analogous vowels : thus ‘ to cover,’ becomes ; as, iNfaw
* he hides repeatedly :’ f*g, ‘ to increase,’ becomes 3T, and
makes ‘ he increases constantly ^q, ‘ to sleep,’ be-
comes qq; as, ; he sleeps frequently’ or ‘soundly:’
Tint, ‘ to make a noise,’ becomes fxrq ; as, qftwjq ‘ he makes a
great noise :’ q, ‘ to swallow^,’ becomes fare, and again changes
X to ; as, wfhxqw ‘ he swallows voraciously.’ In others, the
changes are arbitrary ; as, qx, ‘ to go,’ changes its 3 to 3:
and ‘ to bear fruit,’ changes it to "3 ; as, q’q^qq.
!
Frequentatives rejecting q.
214. The rules regarding reduplication are generally the
same for this as for the preceding form of the frequentative
verb.
a. The vowel of the reduplicate syllable is the Guna equi-
valent of that of the base ; or q for ^ ; wt for 3', 3i ; XTT for
qj, The vowel ^ or ^ may be optionally subjoined to qrx ;
thus q, ‘ to make,’ in its reduplication becomes ^0q>. qrfxq,
or qj, ‘ to go,’ becomes qrq| or qrfx^. The final ^ of n
‘to swallow,’ and w‘to cross,’ becomes qrr; as, aTPT, (Xn£. The
changes of medial vowels, and the rules affecting the insertion
or ejection of a nasal in the reduplicate syllable, are the same
as those of the preceding class of frequentatives.
x
154
VERBS.
b. As being inflected in the second conjugation, no vowel
is interposed between the terminations and the base : ^t, ‘ to
give,’ therefore makes cffiTTfrT, and ‘ to cook,’ xrrefs, in the
third pers. sing, present tense. Optionally, however, ^ may
be prefixed to terminations containing a mute xj, and begin-
ning with a consonant. Before the same terminations a final,
and if short a medial vowel undergoes the usual Guna sub-
stitution ; and when ^ is inserted, the final combines with it,
according to the rules of Sandhi ; as, ■qrf ‘ to sleep,’ ft^tfiT or
^TSTiftfiT ; and ‘ to be,’ ^T«Tfw or
c. Verbs ending in ^tt change the final to ^ before the
terminations of the conjugational tenses beginning with conso-
nants not having a mute xt • as, *tt ‘ to abandon,’ Tmffa: ;
but ‘ to give,’ and xtt ‘ to have,’ before the same, drop their
final vowel, as <?Tf:, . Before terminations containing xj
the change is optional, as WTFTffT or »TT?rfff ; ^ being changed
to its Guna equivalent. Before vowels the final is dropped,
as, third pers. plur. Tfr?fk, ; the nasal being rejected after
a reduplicate (r. 190. d). Before if the final is optionally changed
to u, as ViT^TXtTrf or WT and UT change the final to
and are inflected like verbs ending with
d. The changes of -3i, when final, are ana-
logous to those to which they are subject in conjugational
inflexion. Before those terminations which reject xj5 they
substitute the Guna letters tr, ^rt, m, which undergo the
usual changes before vowels. Before a termination beginning
with a vowel, and not containing a mute tf , they are changed
according to the rules of Sandhi, or in some cases ^ ^ make
and "5i become T31, before such a vowel. Before similar
terminations beginning with consonants they are unchanged.
In like manner medial short vowels are changed to Guna
vowels before the terminations rejecting xj.
e. There are some special modifications, which will be
noticed in the paradigms. We may now give the continua-
tion of H in its derivative modifications.
derivative verbs.
155
hiWti
HTT^ffT
’fwm:
^wRTnr
mrnT^Tx
>TT^nrra3r«r
werbt^:
■sr^brair
HprftrflTfm
♦THTniHiftr
H^rftnn
HT^frnmfrr
r*i ui r*<
W H P*^ Prl
^T^^nffT
*rr=PT
Causal form of H ‘ to be :’ mfb ‘ to cause to be.’
Cv
Present tense, ‘ I cause to be,’ &c.
Parasmai-pada.
hrttpt: hptutr:
htws: tn^TTnq-
vmtTT
HRqw
Xtmane-pada.
npnrrat
Hpnrsi vnws
*r^7r
First prseterite, ‘ I caused to be,’ &c.
^WRTtrlT
^HRtTR
’SWr^TT
^MT^5»T
wprmT
'swprarrff
Second prseterite, ‘ I have caused to be,’ &c.
o
mw^anr:
«ITO1 HTW^TTr
HIW^
HT^irrafait
Third praeterite, 4 1 had caused to be,’ &c.
wbrrw
wtHT# wbr^TT
^PpiUTflT ■^Tsfbr^TT
*PTb*^ wbreprf?
^fbTTrT
’!pfbrT53
First future, 4 1 will cause to be,’ &c.
Hrrfwr^r. m^ftrfnwr:
Hrrfwpjr: HrTftnrr^r
HRftntTO HT^ftriTR:
Hiwftnn? HRfiTHTO?
Hl^rfwra HPTftnTTOTO Hprfx?WT^
^TTfTTrTT KRfpTTTIT ^TTTflTrfTT:
Second future, 4 1 shall or will cause to be,’ &c.
HRftrarnr:
HT^fVartf:
HT^ftrwtr:
Hreftnmp:
U'l'^PqUlM
HRfqtqf^T
HTTftroT
*Trrftr«nT
HRftroiTr
HTTftniTPt?
Hrrftraro
HFrftrciTr
vn^ftrarjir
wFrftrnrw
Imperative, 4 May I cause to be,’ &c.
HRUT7
MNUrf
HPPTrri
*TRTTR
m^ntir
HTwg
m^nri
>tT^wr
m^TFrTT
m^s4
HTWTRTT
X 2
156
VERBS.
uni;
HT^r?T
\
Potential, ‘ I may cause to be,’ 8rc.
>rrwt
hr^r
wrwrf?
HRTmf?
HRU7T
HR^rT
rrw:
KTWnRT
HRXfR
*S
^v
■N •
“v
vrTTOTrr
vrmrg:
VRTR
vn-qifqrfTT
hrut^
Benedictive or optative, * I
modern vrRTTPR
Hfstn: >TT^n^ rtw
vn^rnr HRrreri Rparnr:
\ vi
pray I may cause to be,’ &c.
RRftrtfr? HiTftnfhrrerr
Conditional, ‘ I shall cause to be, if,’ &c.
^WR"fTT®F^ WWRfumR
^RTRfijTq: ^TVjRftrajri ^THTTftT'qTT
^wi'^r^mTT ■^wwftrnnrf ^RRPirBr^
^RTdPuut ^RRftRTR%
^gpn^f^Tq^i: i fn U4 vqf
^gTHHfqTqrf ^THRfq^rfrr '3W=fP*i«<'H
Desiderative form of w ‘ to be :’ ‘ to wish to be.’
Cv Vi Cv \
Present tense, ‘ I wish to be,’ &c.
Parasmai-pada.
Atmane-pada.
vi cv
r>rr: q^nrR:
Vi Cv Vi Cv
■sr*nt
Vi Cv
WWRVi: ^>RR
TP**
^nrfiT
vi Cv
^hrtt: RHnfvft
vi Cv Vi Cv
wtr?r
Vi Cv
vi cv
vi cv
First prseterite, ‘
I wished to be,’ &c.
O C\ \
^r>rr *R*nnH
i Cv o Cv
^RH^T
o cv
^R^RRfV
^RV^Rfi?
tzTV*-
^»RrT
^Rvrrvrr:
o cv
Vi Cv
RR>RR
Vi C-
*T<M*nr
vi cv \
vi c
^RRiRT
vi Cv
"SRRtRT
Second prmterite, ‘ I have wished to be,’ &c.
^rt^tt
)
*N
vi Cv
or
j-^n^rfr ^pn**«T
Tpn^rei
vi cv c ^
Vi Cv t ^
W*TT WWl
Vi Cv t
RwrtTRraiTR
vi Cv
Vi Cv t <1
■fPRT^R
Vi Cv
Tfw*:
RHRT^iti
wtRamfr
vi cv
w>RrafaT.
vi cv
Third praeterite, k I had wished to be,’ &c.
,R^HffcR*T
^RRftprr
O Cv \i c-
^^trfqfcf
Vi Cv
vi cv ^
^RHfqwrf?
vi cv v
^RH<ft:
Vi tv
>awHfwtrrvtf
Vi Cv
Vi Cv <r
’IRRtflff
Vi Cv \
^RfxTFT
*nrofxn?
si Cv
^wfqTsmrf
Vi Cv
^HftrqfT
DERIVATIVE VERBS.
157
First future, ‘ I will wish to be,’ &c.
^rfwfw ^ufinTTO:
O Cs ^
“^ifUnTR;?
O Cs ^
s^rftTrnW.
\> Cs O Cs
qwftnrm
O Cs
q^fqrllHl W
O Cs
qvrfinnz*
O Cs
Sf^WTU ^Hf^TTlT:
O Cv o Cs
->rfq-R
O Cs
■^Mfqfnrf
O Cs
■Sr^yfxrfTTT:
O C'-
Second future, ‘ I will
or shall w
ish to be,’ &c.
O Cs
zi>rf^un^: wHfwro:
O Cs O Cv
Tl^
zprfqzinT?
^»rfqTanR?
fl|U| Wn
sr^fq-arg: zr^fq-ar?
zmfqzqR
^>zfqzirzr
o Cs
zpjfwrr: qHfqzqfVfT
V> Cs O Cs
O Cs
z?uft(tjnr
V> Cs
zsufxi-oi^r
O cs
Imperative, ‘ May I wish to be,’ &c.
^T^TTR
V* Cs o Cs
V3 Cs
v> Cs
O Cs O Cs
O C\
TJ?8*
^>frin
^rvTRTrf
\» c.
o C\
Potential, ‘ I may wish to be,’ &c.
v» cs
TS?* TT™
whn:
O Cs
^>JRiTTqT
w^isr
\* Cs
^vrwi ^rw.
O Cs V> Cv v>
Tt^nnf
TfM
Benedictive, ‘ I pray I may wish to be,’ Sic.
^vrarra*r
VJ C\ \
qmqxftz?
O Cs
^^jfrrcfNrfV
zpjfzpifaf^
<|>|fWhrn
zrvrfqzfhnwf ^zftnftat
O Cs O Cs
^qfqtfll?
V> Cs
^jftoTqrcrf
Conditional, ‘ I shall wish to be, if,’ &c.
^TfHftrsnr
Cv O Cs cs
^HfqTq-fT ^r^rfinqin
vRHftpq iq im f? ^r^rfaTqTHf^
vr^^fri-arqT ^-^ftroisEr
^•^irfinqTT ^vrfq-niflf v^HfqzqH
Frequentative form of H ‘ to be,’ with the affix zr^ ; zft>*z^ £to
be repeatedly ;’ conjugated in the Xtmane-pada only.
Present tense, ‘ I am repeatedly,’ &c.
TbnrrT?
mqzm wthztvj zfhftni
Twnr wrzr wthw
Cs Cs Cs
158
VERBS.
First preterite, ‘ I was frequently,’ &c.
wthxj wr^nrmf?
^rwwrvrr: ^rsfrvpjsg
Cv Cv Cv
^THUIT WtHWT *Tqn>?ipw
Cv Cv Cv
Second prseterite, £ I have been frequently,’ &c.
Cv
Cv t
Cv
Cv
Cv
Third prseterite, ‘ I had been frequently,’ &c.
^TKfqfq
wr*rniE4 ( <r)
'^rsfwnr? wwT^rnT'TTfff ^cfrwftptTT
C\ C\ Cv
First future, ‘ I will be frequently,’ &c.
^nfftrrrm?
^mxnrnr TWfqrfmrii -^*rftnrrJ3
Cv C* Cv
■^hfftnTT ^T^fftiTnu wfcjftrm::
Second future, ‘ I will or shall be frequently,’ &c.
cn^fq-q ^prfqtqrq^ -qfafq-GtTRt
cn^ftrarit ^pjfq'iq'q ^Tufqtq^
-q^vrfqTqH ^wfqTqrf cfwfq'tq^
Imperative, ‘ May I be frequently,’ &c.
cfr^ =rt>jqT^t ■^fr«3TR%
xr*wi ^tmrjcr
xtxwr Ttawr ^rai
Cv Cv C\
Potential, ‘ I may be frequently,’ &c.
^tvr^q cfWqjrf^
■qTHq^IT: TM^rq'RJT
Cv Cv Cv
■^bjnTrT wnrwTrr xwmut
Cv Cv Cs \
Benedictive, * I wish I may be frequently,’ &c.
cftwrftpft-q -^tHfqqiqfg XT^fxrtfbrf?
^jftnfrr: ^Hftnfhrrwr (f)
XtufqqlB WWfqqlqiWT ifrxftrtffrTT
Cv Cv Cv \
DERIVATIVE VERBS.
159
Conditional, ‘ I will be frequently, if,’ &c.
vr^fw'ftt'OTTTrfV
^tHfq-urqr: Wtwfqiqj4 («r)
w^rrwfqwf ^r^brftropfr
Frequentative form of ^‘to be,’ after rejecting the affix to in
the Parasmai-pada.
Present tense, ‘ I am frequently,’ &c.
■sfrirflfpt or ^THTftr
■sfbpr:
cfpr^tfq or ^TMtfq
■sfT^nq-
or ^mnni
■^rtifrT:
Cs
^TWTT
First prseterite, ‘ I was frequently,’ &c.
^rsrwr
or vi ql*fn
WbTTT
Cs
WtHThr or WWTHTTf
WWTfi
Second prseterite, ‘ I have been frequently,’ &c.
rA 1 <*H &C.
■sfbTR or
or
■qwrre or -mHfrpr
or -srrHfsm
■sfhgf^r
or ^fw^pq:
or
or '^fr«5
or TWqTft
O O Cs o
or %I:
Third prseterite, ‘ I had been frequently,’ &c.
wrwr
■5!r^r>Tii
wtoNt: or
vpq^rFT
Cs
wr*nr
Cs
wrvRiTr or wrWriT
)
^T^TH^ftrT or ^^r^fwTT
]- WtWTTT
) * *
or
or ^NW|:
WTWtfqqiT
^nrbrTftro
wfrTTfrre
wrmfrre
WMTTWf
^-cjtmfTu:
vd
First futui
re, 1 I will be frequently.’ &c.
cfprfcnrr^r:
■=fMTTrrTW.
■^fwrqfrrm
=frafqn iwr.
TMf'-J rt 1 eq
TTHf^WT
'sfbrfTiTifT
^mrfwrr.
160
VERBS.
Second future, ‘ I will or shall be frequently,’ &e.
cfru^rfh ■srhrfesm:
^brfwsifw qftHfTOfrr: qWnrorf^
Imperative, ‘ May I be frequently,’ &c.
cft>T^TfvT 'rmT*?
■sftwfi? tmtt ■srfHH'
whre'fir or “n'^Tg '^r^rrr
Potential, ‘ I may be frequently,’ &c.
'sft^xff ^fiTR ^THTTR
■sfbnrr. wTirmrf wt>nrr?r
Cv Cv Cv
■^t*nrnr ^frw.
Cv \ Cv CnO
Benedictive, ‘ I wish I may be frequently,’ &c.
=n«xrm
^hfcrr: ^brorer ^ftOTTCT
Cv Cv CV
■^TrtirnT ^rtmjiwi -sffwTTm:
Cv \ Cv Cv O
Conditional, ‘ I shall be frequently, if,’ &c.
*TTf«fTurre
^r^brfVnr: fq ptst
^r^nrf^xqfn wbrfrni^T
The conjugation of the frequentative form of the verb, after
rejecting ^ in the Atmane-pada, is not admitted by all gram-
marians, and it is unnecessary therefore to exhibit it at length.
The following exemplification of it in the third person singular
of each tense will be sufficient.
Pres. ist praet. ’ST^bjiT, 2d praet. TW^ra'sf, 3d praet.
Wbrf%?, I St fut. TbrfeiTT, 2d fut. imp. ■sftHTTT, pot.
^TW^TT, bened. cond. wsfbtfronT.
These derivative forms or moods may be used also in the
passive as well as in the active voice ; as, msrff £ it is caused
to be ‘ he is desired to be ‘ he is to be
frequently.’ They may also take other derivative forms ; as,
the causal of the passive, HITUTT ‘ he is caused to be ;’ the
desiderative of the causal, vrrefqqfiT £ he wishes to cause to
DERIVATIVE VERBS.
1C1
be or more than one desiderative may be combined ; as,
‘ he causes the wish to occasion frequent exist-
ence.’ These complex forms, and even the simple derivative
forms, seldom occur, except the causal. The desiderative
form is most frequently met with in the derivative nouns ; as,
nrsTTtTT ‘ the wish to know ‘ one who desires to die.’
The frequentative is rarely used.
Impersonate.
There is another specified form of a verb, which can scarcely
bo considered as distinct — that of the impersonal — as it is
nothing else than the third person singular of each tense of
the passive form, either of the simple or derivative verb,
being used with a noun in the instrumental case ; as, ‘ it
is ‘ it is by me,’ i. e. I am ; ‘ it was vrfVfIT
4 it will be ‘ it is desired to be ‘ it is fre-
quently,’ &c.
Nominate.
Nouns aro also not unfrequently employed as verbs. In-
stances of this are not wanting in other languages, but not
perhaps to a like extent. At the same time it is to be
remarked, that the verbal form of the noun occurs only in
specific inflexions, and that its conjugation in every person
and tense is only theoretically allowable. The most common
inflexion is that which is usually given in example of the
formation of such verbs, the third person singular of the pre-
sent tense, and it is that of the first conjugation. There is
no peculiarity in the mode of inflexion : the modification is
confined to the base, and is chiefly the insertion of c&rw}, or
of called technically or ^*nr, between the noun and the
verbal terminations.
is inserted before the terminations to imply desire ; as,
TTcjofrrRjfTT ‘ he wishes for a son ‘ he desires heaven.’
is more extensively employed, and in most cases with
some modification of the vowel of the noun. The principal
Y
162
VERBS.
changes are the substitution of ’3TT for ^ for and "3i
for '3'; and for A final "JT or tt is usually rejected.
The senses expressed by these forms may mostly be resolved
into desire and imitative action : thus from t^, ‘ a son/ comes
TjpfhrfiT, i. ‘ he wishes for a son;’ 2. ‘he treats as a son:’
from tXJTT ‘ a king,’ ] . 4 he wishes for a king 2. 4 he
acts like a king 4 wealth,’ 4 he desires wealth
VTnrfir * he longs to acquire wealth fTSJT 4 Vishfiu ;’ famryfrt
fyipf 4 he treats the Brahman as if he was Vishfiu ttutt? 4 a
palace wrai^l tlfrf fim: 4 the beggar acts or lives in his
hut as if he were in a palace £ a kite ;’ giTcs: 4 the
crow acts like a kite 4 a nymph TPrlTnffi 4 she acts
like a nymph.’ A final is sometimes retained ; as, ^TT,
4 fame,’ makes either or zrsi^T'fi' 4 the vile man
acts as if he were famous.’
In some cases TT is prefixed to *T, implying desire ; as, 'gjft
4 milk ;’ 4 the child longs for milk :’ 4 a horse;’
^dUlfri 4 the mare longs for the horse.’
Sometimes the augment is dropped ; as, 4 he acts like
Krishfia’ may be either ■sxnrrq^ or ; 4 he acts like a
father’ may be fg^hrfrt or ftiTTITW ; 4 arrogant,’ or
4 he acts arrogantly.’
The class of verbs called takes in the Xtmane-
pada to imply becoming or acquiring that which the word
denotes ; they lengthen a final vowel before tr ; and optionally
adopt the Parasmai-pada, rejecting the augment; as, H7I
4 much, 4 many ;’ 4 becomes much :’ 4 learned ;’
trftjd ri VSH , 'qf^iTrfiT, 4 becomes learned,’ &c. The class termed
fTff^irrf? in a similar sense may take it in either Pada, or
reject it in the Parasmai-pada ; as, or
rfrffrrfiT, 4 becomes red,’ 4 reddens.’
and other words are conjugated with it, in the Xtmane-
pada only, to signify making ; as, 4 he makes a noise.’
and others are so conjugated to signify feeling or experi-
encing ; as, 4 he enjoys happiness ;’ 'srFnrff 4 he suffers
DERIVATIVE VERBS.
163
pain.’ The last also denotes, doing what will incur pain ; as,
‘ the wicked man commits what will bring him
pain,’ i. e. sin. umr ‘ smoke,’ '3'wrq * heat,’ tfR ‘ froth,’
‘ steam,’ are used exactly as in English : ‘ it smokes ;’
‘ it grows warm,’ * it heats •qhvrrqR « it froths’ or
‘ foams ‘ it steams.’
‘ reverence,’ Tnrer ‘ penance,’ ^(V>R ‘ service,’ do not
reject K before ; as, ^RRfrT * he salutes the gods
■tnmrfiT ini: ‘ he performs penance ‘ he serves
his Guru.’
A class of words called is conjugated with in the
sense of doing or suffering what the noun implies ; as, 0R15
i scratching,’ cMjsTjffr or ‘ he scratches irj c sin,’
Wtffir or H^rf ‘ he sins * dawn,’ TUfqfrT ‘ it dawns
*nfi ‘ worship,’ ‘ he is worshipped,’ &c.
There is no apparent limit to this conversion of a noun
into a verb, but the pleasure of the writer, or the practice of
his predecessors. Little or no difficulty can arise from it,
however, as the context will sufficiently explain the meaning
of such a term, whenever it occurs in a sentence.
The general construction of the Sanskrit verb having been
thus premised, we now proceed to offer paradigms of individual
verbs which are of most frequent occurrence, with such occa-
sional remarks as they may seem to require ; arranging them
under the conjugation to which they severally belong, in alpha-
betical order. The person given is the third person of each
tense in the primitive, and of the present tense in the derivative
forms ; with an occasional notice of other persons in the former,
and other tenses in the latter. When there is no sufficient
authority for the derivatives they will be omitted.
SECTION VIII.
First Conjugation.
215. The modifications of the inflectional terminations in
the conjugational tenses of this conjugation follow the rules
y 2
164
VERBS.
which have been already pointed out (r. 189. 190. 192). Those
of the inflective base have also been specified (r. 172), but they
may be here conveniently recapitulated.
a. The characteristic of the conjugation is the insertion of
^ between the final of the root and the initial of the termina-
tions in the four conjugational tenses. This is said to be
left by the the syllable
b. As the syllable comprises an indicatory tj, it denotes
that the radical vowel shall be changed to its Guha equiva-
lent— 1. when it is a final, whether it be short or long; as,
fiT becomes % w becomes becomes HJt ; and 2. when it
is an initial or medial short vowel ; as, '373 becomes
makes Ft?.
\
c. An initial or medial long vowel, whether long by nature
or position, is unchanged ; as,
d. A final radical vowel, having undergone the change
required by the conjugation, combines with the vowel pre-
fixed to the terminations, agreeably to the rules of Sandhi :
thus ^ and ^ having become F, the latter is changed to
before a vowel ; and ■? and having been modified to ^ff, the
diphthong is changed to ’H? ; as ftr, TT'trffT ; H, *TTf7r, &c. As
further exemplifications of the peculiarities of this conjuga-
tion, the following conjugational tenses of fir ‘ to conquer,’ and
FV ‘ to increase,’ are subjoined.
Present.
I
3mm
conquer, &c.
fv
I increase, &c.
fvtf? fvtf?
TTW
f?f
F'-m
FVUJ
■snrf?
3iq rl‘.
Firm
FV7T
Fvmr
First prgeterite.
I conquered, & c.
’'npTTC
’HrPTt WrPTrT
flu ri
I increased, &c.
F?
Fyrrf?
FVTFf?
fv?t:
FW
fvs4
FVW
■s *N •
FVTTT
FVFT
FIRST CONJUGATION.
165
Imperative.
May I conquer, &c.
May I increase
&c.
tmiPh
1PIR tTFTH
FU
FUFT?
frfI
SR
Ti qH 1UIH
fufi
FWI
FVS?
^3
wwr *nr;g
fuat
fwt
Potential.
I may conquer, &c.
I
may increase
&c.
■JRR tTW
FUF
F^rf?
tIU ri t( i|TT
fur:
furr
fur
■STUfTT *t
FUrT
FUUT7TT
FVFF
\
a. Of the remaining tenses of ftr it may be observed, that,
as a monosyllable ending in a short vowel, it does not take
the augment ^ (r. 198. c) except in the second praeterite
(r. 195.^). In the reduplication of the second praeterite and of
the desiderative it substitutes fh for ftr in the radical syllable,
and modifies the radical vowel according to general rules (195) ;
35 before the ^ of the augment, as before any other vowel,
becomes ; thus :
2d praet. fiTqrq frprq or fjrqfrrR, , ftrnt: ,
&c.) ; 3d praet. (?r^i, w'r, &c.) ; 1st fut. inn;
2d fut. TfTqfiT ; bened. 'sfhrnT ; cond. ^TOTT. Pass. pres.
■sftriTr ; 3d praet. WSTTHT; ist fut. »rfxnn or wrftrrfT. Caus. pres.
*nWir; 3d praet. Desid. ftrifkfTT. Freq. ^'hr?r,
and or ^ipflfTT.
Other verbs ending in ^ will be analogously conjugated.
b. tt% as beginning with a diphthong prosodially long, is
conjugated in the second praeterite with the auxiliary verbs.
It takes the augment 5.
2d praet. inwifi, uvTginr, FURR ; 3d praet. ijftre (FTufq) ;
ist fut. Ff>RT; 2d fut. TrfWff; bened. FftnftF; cond. FfwiT.
Pass. F«iw. Caus. FUFfir or Desid. ^f^fviqTf.
The most useful verbs of this conjugation are the following.
*135 c to mark.’
The ^ which is added to the verb in the list of roots is
166
VERBS.
indicatory, and denotes the insertion of a nasal before the final
consonant in all the inflexions (p. 107).
Pres. ; 1st. praet. shi ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
^TTfqj'S ; 1st fut. 'STflpn; 2d fut. ; imp. ^rti ; pot.
’sij-TT ; bened. ; cond. 'STififTinT. Pass. vM+iri. Caus.
or Desid. ^rf^rf^RK.
^rsj ( * to pervade.’
The indicatory gi shews the insertion of ^ before the non-
conjugational tenses to be optional (p. 107). The gi of gj is
rejected before consonants in general (r. 191. i ). In the second
praeterite R is inserted in the reduplication (r. 194. a).
Pres, ; 1st praet. 2d praet. (^-Rfgrg or
^trr) ; 3d praet. ^ rejig, ^t%t, gfrfijfRb or wsflrf , grrei, 'rtst: ;
1st fut. ^rfsjTTT or 2d fut. or ; imp. ssgjTj ;
pot. ; bened. cond. gnf^unr or Wrt. Pass.
Caus. SH’Ejufrf ; 3d praet. wpRgjrt. Desid. grf-Rf^Rfff.
This is also a verb of the fifth conjugation, q. v.
^»T ‘ to go.’
This verb is defective in the non-conjugational tenses, and
its place is supplied by before the terminations beginning
with a vowel or with R, and optionally before the rest ; when
qft does not, and gg does, take the augment admits
the augment in the second praeterite before g and r, and
optionally before vj.
Pres. SHRfrf ; 1st praet. RTRrf ; 2d praet. fggnr (fganp, fg^aj:,
fVrftrzT, fw? or frfigg or fgfigg or wfRR) ;
3d praet. Rggta (Rggg) or RTSTfrr (wrfRRR ) ; 1st fut. gin or
grfRfrr ; 2d fut. goifff or grftpgflT ; imp. RRiT ; pot. bened.
^hmr; cond. or . Pass. ^ftgg. Caus. giggRr.
Desid. grfRfRRfTT or fggftrfTT. Freq. gghlH.
R z ‘ to go.’
This and the next are examples of a verb regular throughout.
Pres, xsefri ; 1st praet. gnTrT ; 2d praet. grre ; 3d praet. gn^ ;
FIRST CONJUGATION.
167
ist fut. •srfrFr ; 2d fut. ; imp. ; pot. ; bened.
; cond. ^TTf?nnT. Pass. ^3^. Caus. *3T?qfff or -^.
Desid. ■^rfrfr'rfTT. Freq. (but meaning ‘ to go crookedly’) -3dl'd*H,
'snff or
wt ‘ to be fit’ or ‘ worthy.5
Pres. ^r|frT ; ist praet. 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
^I^Th ; ist fut. 'Rf^'rll ; 2d fut. ^rf^'orf»T ; imp. :3rt$ ; pot.
^nf^; bened. cond. ^nff-unr. Pass. Caus.
or -w. Desid. vsf^f^frf.
* ‘ to go.’
In the conjugational tenses a final by the general rule of
the conjugation (r. 215), is changed to the Gufia element
which becomes before the vowel ^r. It does not take the
augment ^ except in the second praeterite, where its duplicate
is in the singular, and fil in the other persons (r. 193. b).
It takes Gufia in both futures. Its derivative forms are those
of the same root conjugated as a verb of the second conjuga-
tion, in which it is most usually inflected.
Pres, ist praet. *mnr ; 2d praet. ^irnr (^Tgt,
3ptfi|vj or f'ftpT, fftw) ; 3d praet. iNtlf (inni) ; ist fut.
inn; 2d fut. ; imp. ^nrj; pot. ^nf^; bened.
cond. ijunr.
^ ‘ to see.’
Pres. ist praet. irEpT ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
idfsT? (ir%fiT) ; 1st tut. ri I , 2d fut. ^ rT , imp. ^snn ;
pot. ; bened. ; cond. Pass. Caus.
S^nfrT. Desid. tf^fgpnr.
‘ to envy.’
Pres. Ist praet- 2d praet. ^r=f<*R; 3d praet.
; ist fut. jfiq'in ; 2d fut. ^ftqiqfFT ; imp. pot.
bened. cond. ^ficqtqTT . Pass. ^rqTt. Caus. ^qrrffT ;
3d praet. uftqmT or . Desid. ffutfqqfH or ^rqfuqfri.
168
VERBS.
■g' ‘ to sound.’
Pres. ; ist praet. ; 2d praet. ■gnr (^if^) ;
3d prat, wfp; ist. fut. ^rtirr; 2d fut. more; imp. wfri; pot.
^TTiT ; bened. 'smfte ; cond. ^■nnr. Pass. ■grqw. Caus. ^TTWfl'.
Desid. •gdW^.
So other verbs ending in 7; as, or * to sound 5 e to go
3J ‘ to jump,’ &c.
Tt? ‘ to go.’
Pres. ; ist praet. *Wrf ; 2d praet. ("WiT:,
; 3d praet. ist fut. ; 2d fut. ^ftfa-grfw ;
imp. ■^flT-TlT ; pot. ff ; bened. •gwriT ; cond. WTOttnr. Pass.
■3Wff. Caus. wr^rfit. Desid.
* to reason.’
Pres, ip; ist praet. m?pT; 2d praet. ■gfTjrpfii; ; 3d praet.
ist fut. •3r%Tn ; 2d fut. ■grfir'aTW ; imp. ■ar^rfrf ; pot. "3i%iT;
bened. ; cond. wf^'ant. Pass. Caus.
Desid. ■gffwfWff.
With a preposition it takes both Padas ; as, or
‘ he assembles.’
^ ‘ to go,’ * to gain.’
This substitutes before the conjugational tenses. Its
other changes are to the Guna or Vriddhi substitutes required
by rules previously stated ; that is, becomes >htt: u ith the
temporal augment, as in the first and third praeterite and con-
ditional (r. 193. 197. h. 204. a); or with reduplication, as in the
second praeterite (r. 194. c) ; and before the futures (r. 199..
200) and before tt.
Pres. ^^fTr ; ist praet. mstir ; 2d praet. ^rnc (*rrir*I,
^Tftrr) ; 3d praet. ) ; ist fut. ; 2d fut.
^fftqnT ; imp. ; pot. ; bened. ; cond. -mfbmiT .
Pass. Caus. vr<Prf?T. Desid. Freq. -.TO art. and
vnft, ^rfxxrf=r. wtxlfrf or
With it takes the iftmane-pada, if used intransitively ;
as, hhtsJTT * it accumulates.’
FIRST CON JUG AT I OX.
lt>9
to be straight* or ‘ honest,’ ‘ to gain,’ ‘ to go,’ ‘ to live.5
Pres. ; ist praet. Arf ; 2d pnet. ; 3d praet.
; ist fut. vi (Vi n 1 ; 2d fut. ; imp. 'nArfi ; pot.
xs^nr ; bened. 'wfAiflt? ; cond. SHifVtujrf. Pass. Caus.
^nfiT ; 3d praet. . Desid.
‘ to be dry* or ‘ arid.’
Pres, ^rmfrl ; ist praet. ’CTTFTIT ; ad praet. ; 3d praet.
ist fut. ^ftf^TTT ; 2d fut. ; imp. ; pot.
^rt^TT ; bened. ^ft^rnT ; cond. siTify utri N Pass. Caus.
^mnf(T ; 3d praet. Desid.
oPT * to desire.’
'O
This verb by special rule becomes oHTJT«J in the conjugation al
tenses, and optionally so in the non-conjugational. In the
third praeterite it takes the terminations of the first, and is
inflected like a verb of the tenth conjugation.
Pres. ^THUTT ; ist praet. ^st*TOW ; 2d praet. or
3d praet. or ; ist fut. ^iHfutTT or ^fhirr ; 2d fut.
ohIHfquirf or cfifrraTTt ; imp. ^rRTnrf ; pot. cSTR^W ; bened. raftin'! 2
or nrftnfte ; cond. SH<*mftiuH or 'srsRfawriT. Pass. =FTJTIK ; 3d praet.
w«nrn. Caus. ■gfiTTnrfir. Desid. fn^FTnftnrn'.
faFiT ‘ to cure.’
In this sense the verb is conjugated in the desiderative form
only. It takes ^ in the non-conjugational tenses (r. 211. a).
Pres. f^ftarafri ; ist praet. snf-M f<+r« rf ; 2d praet. f^f^WT^RR ;
3d praet. ’srfnftjrrahrr ; ist fut. fnftsfra'riT ; 2d fut. fnftrfrRnrfiT ;
imp. f^fcjirW rj ; pot. fnftfcr+irf ; bened. fnftreqiH ; cond.
Yl‘ to be able.’
The Anubandha '35 Venders the insertion of ^ optional
(p. 107) ; the radical vowel is changed throughout to which
becomes ^r?^, the Guna substitute of r£, where that substitu-
tion is required. As belonging to the class (see the
verb sjtt), it may be conjugated in the third praeterite in the
170
VERBS.
Parasmai-pada, as well as in the Atmane-pada. This verb
may likewise be conjugated in both voices in the two future
and the conditional tenses.
Pres. 'gr^qTT ; ist praet. ^rqrRnr ; 2d praet. (-q-gfqi) or
; 3d praet. ^T^TiT and ^rqif%n? or ; ist fut. qr^rTT
or cfcfOTn or and ^K^Trrrf^T or oRf^cnrrf^T ) ;
2d fut. or cpf^qnr^, and ^S^RTfiT or ; imp.
cji^HUT ; pot. SR^'iT; bened. or ; cond. SH=K«M«t?T
or vTofif^q'nriT, and or Pass. Caus.
^iRntfiT. Desid. or fisra^TT.
^ ‘ to go,5 ‘ to walk.’
This verb, under different circumstances, may be conjugated
in either voice. In the Parasmai-pada it makes the radical
vowel long in the conjugational tenses, and prefixes ^ to the
consonantal terminations of the rest. Not so in the iftmane-
pada. In the conjugational tenses it is also optionally con-
jugated in the fourth or the first class. The vowel is short in
the causal, as the verb ends in jt.
Pres, ■gnrrfff or ^TTf or ; ist praet. ^r^FTTT or
, or ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
('snstwr ), ; ist fut. ^ftnrr, wt ; 2d fut.
; imp. ‘aiTRiT or ^tmrw, -*hhi* or wi ; pot.
or or ^qTT ; bened. , swig ; cond. ’st^faiqTT,
^T3Rlrr. Pass. ■=qiR}W. Caus. wqfrr; 3d praet. yPaaWrf. Desid.
fqifWw. Freq. ahnrqTT, or
ipt ‘ to cry.’
This does not take ^ except in the second praeterite. The
third praeterite is formed with the terminations of the first.
final becomes tt, with the usual consequences (r. 191. d. e.f).
Pres. ; ist praet. w^nr; 2d praet. ,iqisT$T
TJIfSrg:, 3<i praet. ; ist fut. 'qtnn ; 2d fut.
imp. sRt^rg; pot. ^nr; bened. ^irnr; cond. ’3rata?r^.
Pass. Caus. '^■ST'irfw ; 3d praet. , Desid.
Freq. 'sffip'qw,
FIRST CONJUGATION.
171
T5JR ‘ to bear’ or ‘ be patient.’
The final it becomes it in conjunction with the ^ or sr of a
termination, and is changed to HT by virtue of the preceding Hf.
It becomes Anuswara before any other consonant, which may
be changed to the dental it before a dental (r. 19—23). The
third praeterite is formed after class first, 1. 2.
Pres, ; 1st praet. •srepTrT ; 2d praet. or
WIT, ^rgrfas^ or or ’WfW*!, or wuh?) ;
3d praet. Kl f*T V or urejlFT ; 1st fut. ^fiTTrr or ^RTT ; 2d fut.
T^firnTTT, ; imp. ; pot. ^fiTTf ; bened. 'STfawIg or
njtfls; ; cond. VHttjfHuirf or Pass. Caus. KiHilfri ;
3d praet. ^Nr^rnr. Desid. or fVsfiTH. Freq.
and or ^wfifT.
figj ‘ to waste.’
It takes ^ only in the second praeterite : 32T is substituted
for the radical vowel before a vowel termination not requiring
Gufta or Vriddhi.
Pres. ■srirfTr; 1st praet.. ^nqiirf ; 2d praet. fwm
fi^ftrsr, or fierEspr, ; 3d praet. ^NViT (mpi) ; 1st fut.
^irr; 2d fut. '^j'orfw; imp. pot. ^pr?r; bened. 'sfhrn^;
cond. Pass, ^rhrff. Caus. ^TTrrrf<T or Desid.
fafttrqfrf. Freq. ’Tgfhtff, WififlT or wfrT.
‘ to waste’ or ‘ decay.’
Verbs ending in i? adapt their final to the ?T of the conju-
gational tenses, agreeably to the laws of Sandhi ; that is, they
change it to ^nrr. Before the terminations of the non-conju-
gational tenses they change the final to ^TT (r. 19 1. a). After
verbs ending in ^T, the termination of the first and third
persons of the second praeterite in the Parasmai-pada is changed
to (r. 194), and wr is merged in the diphthong. It is
rejected before the other vowel terminations of the same tense
in both Padas, and before the augment In the third
praeterite the form is that of first class, 3 (p. 132). In the
benedictive WT is changed to tj ; optionally if the verb begins
with a conjunct consonant.
z 2
172
VERBS.
Pres. ^ntf* ; ist praet. ; 2d praet. *<r«jT*h
or 'qfRivj, ; 3d praet. (^n^Tftnn^) ; ist
fut. ^nn ; 2d fut. ; imp. Tgrug ; pot. ^ 1 if ; bened.
Hjmirf or ^irnr ; cond. 'RKjiWrt. Pass, T^fttTr. Caus.
Desid. P^RjRfiT. Freq.
So Ifi ‘ to sound,’ ^ ‘ to sing,’ * to be weary,’ ^ ‘ to cleanse,’
uf ‘ to meditate,’ ^ ‘ to sound,’ H * to melt,’ ‘ to decay,’ and
others ; as, =jrrefrT, ^r, ^r?n ; ^mifw, spft, Jim ; xqrqfrf, ^4t,
mTiTT. ^ has but one form in the benedictive,
^rr * to dig.’
This takes both Padas. The penultimate is rejected before
the terminations of the second praeterite, not having a mute
tt, except that of the second person plural : the radical vowel
becomes optionally long, with rejection of before *T.
Pres. WTfff or -w ; 1st praet. -4UsH if, ; 2d praet. WR
; 3d praet. WRlrf, MRpffS ; 1 st fut. ^f*THI ;
2d fut. or-^; imp. ; pot. trtt, Wff;
bened. *ramr or wnffir, ; cond. vTwfH^ri, ssR«Pr|U|rf.
Pass. or Caus. ^RUPif ; 3d praet. Desid.
f^^fTfqfrT or -H. Freq. ^rw^TTf or ’srmnrff, and or
tth ‘ to go.'
This verb substitutes in the conjugational tenses. It
takes ^ only in the second praeterite, second future, and con-
ditional. In the former the penultimate is rejected, as in the
last example, and before the vowel terminations tt and *T form
nr. The indicatory "55 denotes the inflexion of the third
praeterite with the terminations of the first.
Pres, n wjfrf ; ist praet. wn^TiT ; 2d praet. 'iprPT (*TRtj:, jPTR
or RnfavT, ; 3d praet. ist fut. trtt ; 2d fut.
7rftxqffT ; imp. ; pot. TTSTi^; bened. *TW?T7^ ; cond. ^SNlPtfoirT.
Pass. JTRW. Caus. rpnrfjT ; 3d praet. ^nftyprif . Desid. fjRpfl^fff.
Freq. or
With certain prepositions this verb may be conjugated in
the A'tmane-pada, as In this Pada the nasal of the
FIRST CONJUGATION.
173
verb is optionally rejected before the terminations of the third
prseterite and benedictive tenses, as ‘ to go together,’
makes y*Plrf or *npTT?T, or TPiifly. It is inflected also
in the i^tmane-pada of the causal, when compounded with ^TT
to signify delay ; ttiTiT ‘ wait a little with ?rr in the
Parasmai-pada it means ‘ to come ‘ come hither.’
JTT? ‘ to agitate.’
The changes of the final if before a consonant are those
given in r. 191. k. jr is changed to the aspirate "g, before a
following IT or vj becoming ; that again consequently becomes
also and the first ^ is rejected (r. 190 . f). The sibilant of
WTJT (r. 190. ff) is rejected between two consonants not being
nasals or semivowels, and the '5T and vj are permuted to ^ as
before. Before *T the f becomes cfi, making ‘gj, and the radical
initial is then changed to its aspirate (r. 191. /). ^ is option-
ally inserted, as denoted by the Anubandha "35. 9
Pres, ; 1st praet. ’^mTFTT ; 2d praet. (tHTT^ or
wmf^, or •spTTffjir -^) ; 3d praet. ’spttgt:,
WTRlej, wrfHj) or (wur^Hlrli &c.) ; 1st fut. TTT2T or
mf?7rr ; 2d fut. nrw or ; imp. JTT^tri ; pot. rn^TT ;
bened. TjTEfte or ; cond. 'snrr^nr or wrf^gnr. Pass.
*TT?T^. Caus. 7n^Mrf. Desid. ftnTTfTtnf. Freq.
mj ‘ to protect.’
This verb with a few others, as fT53 ‘ to go,’ and w and
TPT ‘ to praise,’ inserts ^TPJ before the terminations of the
conjugational tenses, and optionally before those of the rest.
It takes ^ optionally.
Pres. pfqrirfH ; 1st praet. 2d praet. ribTRT^=RTTl or
or jpfVcsr) ; 3d praet. ^mqrqlir , wr^br,
or ; 1st fut. Tmnftjrn, mfqHT, purr ; 2d fut. iftqTftnqfir,
rftfq’OTfTT, rftapflT ; imp. ptqrqiT; pot. ifrqun^; bened. WtaTOTTr;
n m 1 rf; cond. ^rftqTfqTqrT, wiTftranr, ^PpP-Tp 7T . Pass. rra?^.
Cans. rffimroflT or 7TfqqffT ; 3d praet. ^r^rfrqrqTT or ^r^jqTT.
Desid. TjmqifqqffT, ^rfVfqqfiT. Freq. TTPUqTT.
174
VERBS.
tttj ‘ to blame.’
This takes the desiderative form, exclusive of the augment
^ in the non-eonjugational tenses, which it omits. In the
proper desiderative it inserts ^ (r. an. a) : see In other
respects it is regular.
Pres, ; ist praet. ; 2d praet. ; 3d
praet. ; ist fut. rjufarn ; 2d fut. ijufmuiTf ; imp.
|TOii ; pot. ; bened. ; cond.
Pass. TfJVtujTr. Desid. 'JUTfamfl'.
OO O O
*r? ‘ to revile.’
t Cv
When ^ is not inserted, the changes of the final ? are those
specified under r. 191. k: see also mf. In the third praeterite
the verb optionally takes the terminations of the first, with
prefixed (r. 197./): the final *r is changed before Tt according
to r. 1 91. k.
Pres. ir?ir ; ist praet. ^rnflT ; 2d praet. (iHTffiT or
; 3d praet. or viTJTTrf ; 1st fut. nftwT or rifr ;
2d fut. JTff'arTr or ■q^STT ; imp. JrtffT ; pot. TT^T ; bened. rfff qfg
or ysrte ; cond. or Pass. ststr1. Caus. JifufiT.
Desid. or Freq. jRlrr^Tfn or
VTc? ‘ to eat.’
In the second praeterite, before the vowel terminations, this
verb rejects its radical vowel, and ti coming into contact with
*1 becomes as usual and with the sibilant, 'SJ. Before a
termination beginning with *r, as in the second future and
conditional, the final is changed to ft (r. 191.,;). The verb is
imperfect, and wants the third praeterite and benedictive in
the active voice, and all the tenses except the two futures and
conditional in the passive.
Pres. •snrfiT ; ist praet. 'srenirt ; 2d praet. ;
ist fut. WTT; 2d fut. ; imp. pot. -qinr; bened.
in*rr^; cond. Wtn^nr . Pass, ist fut. iren; 2d fut.
cond. Caus. TiraTmT. Desid. fs^rnfrl.
ITT ‘ to smell.’
This in the conjugational tenses has for its base ftriT. In
FIRST CONJUGATION.
175
the other tenses it is unchanged. In the second pneterite
ist and 3d pers. the termination is ^n. It is one of the verbs
which optionally attach to the final the affixes of the first
praeterite in the third : when it is inflected with its own
terminations it follows form 3 (p. 132) of the first class, like
most verbs ending in m
Pres. ftnrfir ; ist praet. ; 2d praet. *nrl ; 3d praet.
(*?trnri, wg:) or wrtftir (wrfwr, win fa 3:) ; ist fut.
imn ; 2d fut. wu-Mfir ; imp. firsTij ; pot. fsrti^ ; bened. UTmTT
or innTT; cond. SH . Pass. tmfW. Caus. TnrrrrfrT ; 3d praet.
or TStfjTftniW. Desid. ftnmtflT. Freq. and
or
‘ to eat.’
As a verb having a short ^1 between two consonants, of
which the former is repeated without change in the reduplica-
tion, it substitutes tj for the radical vowel, and is not doubled
before the terminations of the second praeterite which begin with
a vowel, except that of the second person singular (r. 194. k).
Pres, ; ist praet. ^iw; 2d praet. (^Rig:, ’bj:,
’snrfrm, &c.) ; 3d praet. ) ; ist fut. ^rfipnrr; 2d fut.
^fH^nfrT ; imp. ^*nr ; pot. ^Rit; bened. ^W}T7T; cond. .
Pass. Caus. ^RTtfrT. Desid. fisrgfairfTT. Freq.
With ^TT prefixed, in the sense of sipping water, it lengthens
the radical vowel, ^rrxRflT.
‘ to go.’
As ending in t:, the radical vowel is made long in the third
praeterite : r. 197. i.
Pres, 'snfrt; ist praet. ^TTCT; 2d praet. ; 3d
praet. (w^ifbR) ; ist fut. ^fbn; 2d fut. ^fcarfir; imp.
^3; pot. bened. cond. ’srsrfiwr^. Pass.
Caus. '^TTTrfff. Desid. Freq. ^Nnirf, or
It is conjugated in the Atmane-pada, preceded by TfT with
a transitive import ; ‘ he goes beyond or transgresses
duty and by TR with a noun in the instrumental case ;
bfa ( he travels with a chariot.’
176
VERBS.
vqfrTT. ‘ to drop’ or ‘ sprinkle.’
The indicatory denotes the optional inflexion of the third
prasterite with the affixes of the first preceded by to.
Pres. 'uiVflffl ; ist praet. TOroffinr ; 2d praet. TO^qTrf (TOxqlfrtvj,
; 3d praet. TO-rurfV{ or TOTtfflfhT; ist fut. TOftfiTHf ;
2d fut. ; imp. vifidg ; pot. bened. cond.
ssjxql Priori . Pass, 'i-qiqrf. Caus. TOffmrfTT or -w ; 3d praet. rf
orTOroronriT. Desid. TO^afrmfrl or TO^'lfrfqfrf. Freq. TOtrorTtW or
o \ 00 o A v>
TOtwHiT,
o
So in the same senses. The reduplication is as in
the second praeterite, TOTORtrt.
* to yawn.’
This verb prefixes to the final, whenever that is followed
by a vowel. In the frequentative the nasal is confined to the
reduplication. ^ before any consonant except a semivowel or
a nasal becomes Anuswara, which before H is changed to *T.
Pres. >F»TTT; ist. praet. toto^HT ; 2d praet. »pT**r ; 3d praet.
TOirfoTF ; ist fut. TOfotfTT ; 2d fut. TOFHTOW ; imp. jF^nTT ; pot.
■srwnr ; bened. ; cond. TO*Tf»TTOTT. Pass. Caus.
iWJTfrT. Desid. f*jyjf«Tinr. Freq. 'snrwrff, jjifHlfrf, Ti^far.
ttN1 ‘ to live.’
The medial vowel, being long, is unchanged.
Pres. ist praet. TO ifte rf ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
TOifhflTT ; ist fut. toHVht ; 2d fut. ; imp. *fhnr ; pot.
; bened. Tflajrw ; cond. TOifHTTO7T. Pass. Caus.
>fN q fri ; 3d praet. TOf^fhnr or TO'^UV^rf r. Desid.
Freq. ?T5tNih.
So ‘ to spit,’ and ifiw or qfa * to be fat,’ &c.
‘ to yawn.’
This verb inserts a nasal by virtue of the indicatory In
the frequentative, ^1 is substituted for the vowel.
Pres, 'spurt ; 2d praet. ; 1st fut. irfonn. Caus. TO»rqfw.
Desid. TfTOfwtqir. Freq. »rdwwttf(T.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
177
* to have fever.’
Pres. iaifrT ; ist praet. 2d praet. 'JTrJTT ; 3d praet.
iS'srrdTT (^njrfwO ; ist fut. ^ ft^HT ; 2d fut. ^rajfrr ; imp.
tjTfj ; pot. bened. cond. . Pass.
Caus. ■jfuifrf ; 3d praet. ^rftriftjT . Desid. ftnfix^rfiT. Freq.
^TT^nrrT, qr^Ofrl or t| 1 qp?i.
‘to hasten,’ takes the Almane-pada : it is else similarly
conjugated ; FTCT, ^TTT, TTRt, &c.
‘ to go.’
Pres. ; ist praet. WST«R7T ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
; ist fut. ^ftfirTT ; 2d fut. STftfiiqw ; imp. ^rarffi ; pot.
<rr^7T ; bened. ; cond. ^fifcRTqTr. Pass. ^PPra. Caus.
TT^trPfT. Desid. Freq. ft^hnw.
‘ to bow.5
This verb takes ^ only in the second and third praeterites,
and prefixes *r to the latter, according to form 3. of the first
class (p. 132); in which, im ‘to refrain,’ and it? ‘to sport,’
agree with it. Before a dental, *r becomes «^, and Anuswara
before a sibilant.
Pres, vfj-jfri ; ist praet. ^ppri^; 2d praet. q'HIH (^TT:,
or irf*?^) ; 3d praet. sshhItt (^ftr^T, ^rfifirt?*? ) ; ist fut.
T=nWT ; 2d fut. Tf^crFiT ; imp. cprij; pot. ipTrr; bened.
cond. . Pass. q»frf. Caus. rRnfr? or 7?T?TTrf(T. Desid.
fqqnfr?. Freq. vrtetti, TfqTrtffT or TT^rfcr.
nil ( loir?) ‘ to lead.5
The >? intimates its being conjugated in both voices. It
takes ^ in the second praeterite only ; and before the augment
the final is changed to it.
Pres. TPTff? or -w ; ist praet. -nwUrf, 'SRUrf ; 2d praet. fiqrrpr
(fifTTfTrq or f^R-51, fVrnrw:), (frf^) ; 3d praet.
('ST^FT, ), ('STWiTT, ^Rft?) ; ist fut. ^WT ; 2d fut.
H«lfrf or -w ; imp. q n rfi ; pot. vr??, trt? ; bened. qlqiFT,
%rfb? ; cond. -hhujh or -'ariT- Pass, iffarff. Caus. iTI'Hqfrf or -w.
Desid. fvRlqfTT or -w. Freq. T?qhm, ^ififi? or ^%frT.
a a
178
VEKBS.
t[ft is used iu the ^tmane-pada in the sense of preceding or
worshipping, as £ he leads’ or ‘ precedes,’ ‘ he worships
also after different prepositions, as ^tt, wqTf ‘ he leads up’ or
c raises Ttr, ‘ he gives’ or c pays’ or ‘ averts :’ but if it
is transitively used, it is regular, f^TH-qfrf ; also if it concerns
part of the body, as TTXS fq7Rf(T ‘ he averts or turns away the
cheek.’
‘ to blame.’
The vowel being long by position is unchanged (r. 215. c).
Pres. M ^ Hr ; 1st praet. ; 2d praet. fvrnr^ ; 3d praet.
\J ; 1st fut. fclf^'riT ; 2d fut. imp.
ffr^TT ; pot. bened. f^STrT; cond. Pruitt. Pass.
ffT^ITT. Caus. Desid. nTRf^ffff. Freq. vrR'<Tff.
So may other verbs ending in with an indicatory ^ ; as,
^if^, ‘ to call ;’ ‘ to be moist ;’ ‘ to be happy,’ &c.
Hnr ‘ to endure.’
The verb in this sense is conjugated in the desiderative
form, and before *T the final palatal is changed to the guttural
(r. 1 91. c), which combines with the sibilant as usual. In the
sense of ‘ sharpen’ it is a regular verb of the tenth conjugation.
Pres, frl Pri'WH ; 1st praet. Pri frl'STrf : 2d praet. PriPrf'Sri^sh ;
3d praet. ^■rffrf'CT? ; 1st fut. frfTrfBprr; 2d fut. ffrntf'^pirfl' ; imp.
frfPrf'Hlrii ; pot. fnfrraTT ; bened. ; cond. ^PriPriP^airi.
»T ‘ to cross over.’
t
The verb substitutes the Gufia syllable ^n: in the conjuga-
tional tenses, and changes ^ to ^ in the second praeterite,
except in the first and third persons singular. The augment
^ may be made long every where except in the third praeterite
of the Parasmai-pada ; and it may be omitted in that tense,
as well as in the benedictive of the i^tmane-pada. When ^ is
not inserted, is changed to ft:. In some senses the verb is
conjugated in both voices.
Pres, nrfff or -w; 1st praet. WOT, WUf; 2d praet. THTR
(TOTb ITU, -fTrrn; or win:). 3d praet. %S7TkTh (wrfTTr.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
179
wrfbny) — i^tmane-pada wfa? or *S7f08 ; ist fut. Trfcrr
or TruhTT ; 2d fut. wfX'arfrT -7T or rnfNtrffT -w ; imp. TO, 7IT7TT ;
pot. (TOT, TT^iT ; bened. rfh^TT^, wnxfip or ttcNiI? or ; cond.
^Trtfoq H -unr or ^TrfhiTry -tott. Pass. rfhnra. Caus. TUTjqfV.
Desid. ffTnfurffT, friHOMllr or Freq. Tl^faTO, rffinclfiiT or
WTTrff.
?T3T 6 to abandon.’
The root does not take ^ ; and the final palatal is changed
to the guttural (r. 191. c), which combines with a sibilant
(r. 191. e) as By ; in the third pncterite the *T of TO"i, to, TO is
rejected (r. 190. g).
Pres. RnrfTT ; ist praet. -‘HKJ'BH ; 2d praet. BBTR (tHTOTW:,
iroftr? or ridj'^vj) ; 3d praet. (^ron^r, btoitto;, ) ;
ist fut. RT^iT ; 2d fut. BTjqfrf ; imp. ironr ; pot. w%TT; bened.
fHVJITT ; cond. BTFT^TrT. Pass. Rn?TW. Caus. WTTOrfw. Desid.
fffnmfrT. Freq. TTTKT5?T7I, TTTRt^ftflT or TOlfl.
<y<y ‘ to give.’
This is an exception to r. 194. k, not substituting £ for the
vowel in the second praeterite.
Pres. ; 1st praet. w^'fT ; 2d praet. ^f=.T.) ;
3d praet. »S(* Oyy ; ist fut. ^TTT ; 2d fut. imp. ^UT ;
pot. ; bened. ; cond. ^rrnjTOTT. Pass. (fSTB-. Caus.
^TO^frT or -ff. Desid. Freq. and ^‘T^r^fTT or
?TT%-
<*V ‘ to have’ or ‘ hold.’
Pres. <pr?r ; ist praet. btovtt ; 2d praet. ^ (i|VT7r, ; 3d
praet. btotv? ; ist fut. (ffvTTr ; 2d fut. ; imp. <?wi ; pot.
; bened. <yfvifis ; cond. ^niTOrT. Pass. Caus.
?mrcrfrr or -w. Desid. Freq. ^nyam, ?TOVfnr or
‘ to bite.’
This verb drops its nasal in the conjugational tenses ; also
before any termination beginning with 11, and in the radical
syllable of the frequentative. The final 31 before a consonant
becomes tf, and it before a sibilant becomes efi (r. 191. e. f).
a a 2
180
VERBS.
Pres. FTlfrT ; ist praet. ^TFSTF; 2d praet. f^*3T (FF%^ or
FFF) ; 3d praet. ^rsfiiT (^rei, ,3TFTfjf); 1st fiit. fft ; 2d fut.
F*^ffT ; imp. FT!*; pot. bened. FT'rTiT ; cond. ^TF^rff.
Pass. Caus. ^^rrfTT. Desid. fFF'SlfiT. Freq. or
FF^ftfa or ^fF.
F? ‘ to burn.’
The changes of the final are according to r. 191. k ; see also
FT^, p. 173. Before a dental the substitute of f is F; 7 or
F after an aspirate become V ; and F as the initial of a com-
pound is changed to it before a soft consonant, and to 3R before
a hard. In the second praeterite the vowel is changed to F,
according to r. rqq. k. In the third praeterite, as ^ is not
inserted, the F of Fri &c. is rejected (r. 190.^); and when
the guttural combines with the sibilant, F is changed to V
(r. 191. 1).
Pres. 1st praet. ^TF^; 2d praet. f^T? (FTg:s Ff^T or
FF7^) ; 3d praet. wmjftr (thfi^VT, istfut. FTVT; 2d fut.
V^lflT ; imp. FFg ; pot. ; bened. ^TTW ; cond. ^nr^TT .
Pass. Caus. or -w. Desid. Freq.
FTF?lfrT or FTF^-
FT ( F^) ‘ to give.’
V is also a verb of the second and third conjugation, and
in order to distinguish it from them, an indicatory FT is added
to it in the first. This verb substitutes in the conjuga-
tional tenses. In the third praeterite it takes the terminations
of the first, and substitutes F for in the benedictive ; in
which some other verbs ending in tht, either as a primitive or
as substituted for a diphthong, concur : see and in.
Pres. F^ffT ; ist praet. ; 2d praet. f^T (f^T^T or ^FT*b
F3jj:) 5 3^ praet. ^TFTiT (^jftf ) ; ist fut. FTTTT ; 2d fut. FTFlfw ; imp.
ir^F; pot. HflFiT; bened. f^tht; cond. ^TFTWF. Pass. FtFTT.
Caus. FTmrfrr. Desid. fFTFfa-. Freq. F*flw> FTF^fiT or FlFfw.
With TFT or Ttr prefixed in the sense of ‘ receiving,’ and with
FF or FF and u in its own of ‘ giving,’ it takes the ilitmanc-
pada ; as, vfTWrr ‘ he takes fzt^w or Finrsw ‘ he gives.’
FIRST CONJUGATION.
181
5 * to run.’
Although not excepted from the prohibition to insert ^
(p. 136), this verb is considered as taking ^ optionally in the
third praeterite.
Pres, ; 1st praet. 2d praet.
or f^t) ; 3d praet. (^Tfwr ), (^nfNr^) ; 1st
fut. ^V?TT ; 2d fut. tfftqfrT ; imp. ; pot. ; bened. HUTW ;
cond. . Pass. Caus. ^r^xrfw. Desid. FFwfrT. Freq.
^15^’ ^^f?T or ^WifrT.
f^T (F%t) ‘ to see.’
This is another verb of the first conjugation inflected by a
substitution, as it takes trjtr before the conjugational tenses.
Before the terminations of the other tenses beginning with any
consonant except tr, ^ is changed to t. The verb does not
take Before a hard consonant becomes tr, changed before
to «s (r. 191. e./) ; but having made g? with the tet of ^ari, *FT,
1ST, the «5 is rejected, leaving gT &c. ^ indicates two forms
of the third praeterite (p. 107).
Pres. rnprfiT ; 1st prae't. ; 2d praet.
or ; 3d praet. or ^rtJTCSftTT ; 1st fut.
<fgT ; 2d fut. ■?T2?jfrr ; imp. ; pot. tr^TT ; bened. fwnt ;
cond. Pass, gytrff. Caus. ; 3d praet. '3r=i^Jrr or
Desid. fF£F17T. Freq. or or
With ^ prefixed in an intransitive sense it takes the
i^tmane-pada ; ‘ he contemplates.’
T* (^3?) c to protect.’
The T denotes its being restricted to the Atmane-pada. In
the conjugational tenses it is regularly inflected, 1? becoming
before ^?. In the second praeterite it substitutes f^fh for
the reduplicate : in the third it inserts before which the
final is rejected ; and after the short vowel the TT of and
7STT?? is rejected. In the rest it is conjugated like verbs in iHT.
Pi •es. tTUK ; 1st praet. ; 2d praet. (f^rqr^,
3d praet. Wrf (^?ftqinT, ^Tf^WiT, Wxn:, ; 1st fut. ^TFT ;
182
VERBS.
2d fut. ; imp. ^nrr ; pot. qXtrT ; bened. ; cond.
^TPtnr. Pass. Caus. ^rcrcfiT. Desid. Freq.
W‘ to shine.’
This gives name to a class of verbs, of which the
third praeterite takes two forms ; one being that of the first
praeterite of the Parasmai-pada, without change of the radical
vowel (second class, 2) ; the other being regular (first class, 1.
A'tm. pada). There are in all twenty-two verbs of this class.
otrq to be able.
t
T5TH to agitate,
w? to exchange,
to hurt,
to hurt.
'O
to shine.
. >■ to fall down.
H’H )
to be unctuous,
to shine,
to resist.
C$7)
J- to resist.
■^nr to be.
c
*ftT to grow.
SW to be beautiful.
■3pt to break wind,
f^nr to be white,
to sweat,
to drop,
to trust in.
FTH to fall down.
Several of these will be found in their places.
Pres. STrTTT; 1st praet. ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
winr or ^srrfiT? ; 1st fut. umr7n ; 2d fut. amrarw ; imp.
^ffrTTrf ; pot. ; bened. ; cond. Pass.
sgrTTf. Caus. Desid. or f^sfrfirqK. Freq.
or ^sfrfw.
‘ to run.’
This is one of the few exceptions to the insertion of ^ in
the second praeterite (r. 195. g). is substituted for the
final before the vowel terminations not requiring Guha. The
third praeterite takes the form of the tenth conjugation.
Pres. ; 1st prat. ; 2d praet. ($<pHT:,
; 3d praet. ; 1st fut. ifTHT ; 2d fut. ^VujfiT; imp.
Pot- <Ti?; bened. trqur; cond. Pass. Caus.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
183
^"nnrfrT ; 3d praet. ^jtjrr or '^rf^RR . Desid. R^RfR. Freq.
<ffRRR, ^r^frT or ^T^TfrT.
So g ‘ to be firm.’
‘ to drink.’
Before the conjugational tenses R becomes ’RR ; before the
rest it is inflected like a verb in WF ; but it has three forms in
the third praeterite ; two with the terminations of the first
praeterite (second class, 2. 1), and one with those of the third;
(first class, 3) : in No. 2. of the former the root is also repeated,
and the final made short : see ‘ to give,’ 7* ‘ to protect,’ &c.
Pres, wit; 1st praet. ^rwr; 2d praet. (<fRR:, ^fVR) ;
3d praet. ^VR (^RRT, ^RR), or (’RVTRT, *TR:, ’WR), or
^nmftrT (^RTfRFT, ’HRTfRRR ' ) ; 1st fut. RTRT ; 2d fut. RTTRfR ;
imp. RRR; pot. RRT^; bened. VRTR ; cond. ^TRTTRR. Pass.
Caus. RTRRfR or -R ; 3d prmt. ’'fifiRRR or -RR. Desid.
fUrRfiT. Freq. ?vflRR, ^TRfR or RTRlffl.
rIrj ‘ to be quick,’ ‘ to gallop.’
The rj in every case becomes t.
Pres. vkfiT ; 1 st praet. RTRrtlR ; 2d praet. Rvrft ; 3d praet.
RTRtdR; 1st fut. vfftRT ; 2d fut. vftftRTfR ; imp. Rfqj ; pot.
viTR ; bened. vft§TR ; cond. RTRl rwjr . Pass. RtTRR. Caus.
\ 7 \ \
VtlRfirT; 3d praet. R^RlTR. Desid. RRtftRfR. Freq. gRHRR,
?vrtlfR or RRTft.
irt * to blow,’ as fire or an instrument.
This verb substitutes VR before the conjugational augment :
in the other tenses it is conjugated like other verbs in rtt.
Pres. VRfff; 1st praet. RIRRR ; 2d praet. ^trt ; 3d praet.
^nimfbT (^ranfiRRR ) ; 1st fut. trtrt ; 2d fut. xRmrfR ; imp. vrr ;
pot. RRR; bened. iRRTR or tririr ; cond. rtirrrr. Pass, xrtrr.
Caus. TRTRRfR. Desid. fiHRTRR. Freq. RtrffRR, RHRTR or RTTRTfR.
RR ‘ to cook.’
The final palatal becomes before the dentals and sibilant,
conformably to r. 191. c, and undergoes the usual changes. The
184
VERBS.
vowel is changed to XT in some of the persons of the second
praeterite (r. 194. k). In the third praeterite the q preceding ^rf
&c. is rejected (r. 190.^), and the radical vowel is made long in
the Parasmai-pada only. The verb takes both Padas.
Pres, qqf? -? ; 1st praet. Hsqq?, mr?? ; 2d praet. qqre
(qfqxr or qq^q), xjq ; 3d praet. mTTSfl? (mnqiT, WTST:,
TO ; 1st fut. qqTT ; 2d fut. q^qf? -q ;
imp. qq? -nT ; pot. q^? -rf ; bened. qtqTrr, qTtftq ; cond.
mrcq? -TT. Pass, qrq?. Caus. qrqqf? ; 3d praet. .
Desid. fwsjfw Freq. qjqvq?, qTqqlfrr or qTqf?.
q? ( q?) ‘ to go,’ * to fall.’
The indicatory c£ denotes the inflexion of the third praeterite
with the terminations of the first, and before them xr is pre-
fixed to the radical final. In the desiderative the vowel may
be changed to ^ ; and in the frequentative, vft is added to the
reduplicate syllable.
Pres. qnf? ; 1st praet. WiTtr; 2d praet. qqnr (qw.) ; 3d
praet. ---4MW ri (mrsm ) ; 1st fut. qfw?T ; 2d fut. xrnnqfiT; imp.
qTTJ ; pot. qwTT ; bened. qnmr ; cond. mjTTnqr^. Pass. xnq?.
Caus. qnrqfrT. Desid. fqqfrrqfTT or fqrtrfrr. Freq. qvftqw?,
qvfhTrftfff or qvjTqrq.
xn c to drink.’
This verb substitutes fxp^ before the conjugational in
the other tenses it agrees with other verbs in m, taking the
terminations of the first praeterite in the third.
Pres. fqqfrT; 1st praet. wfqq?; 2d praet. qql ; 3d praet.
writ ; 1 st fut. qm; 2d fut. qmrfn ; imp. fqq?; pot. fqq?;
bened. qqr?T; cond. mum? • Pass, xfrq?. Caus. qiqqf?
Desid. fqqTqf?. Freq. qqlq?, qixifff or qTqrfrT.
qT, ‘ to preserve,’ is a verb of the second conjugation, q. v.
(mf) xqTql ‘ to grow.’
In the third person singular of the third praeterite this verb
optionally substitutes ^ for xfT.
Pres, xqrq? ; 1st praet. ^-arT'xnr ; 2d praet. fqiq (fqftqq) ;
FIRST CONJUGATION.
185
3d pra*t. ’srsnfa or ; 1 st fut. uTTfcrfTT ; 2d fut. ■nrrftpqH' »
imp. ■omnrr ; pot. thru ; bened. 'arrftpff? ; cond. ^ranfituiri.
Pass, timirff. Caus. umnr^.
TOT ‘ to approach.’
As this verb changes its tfi to tj in the reduplication of the
second praeterite, it should not substitute for (r. 194. k) ;
it does so optionally by special rule.
Pres. T^fft ; 1st praet. 2d praet. xjtjnTrr or
xraftpt or ^ftnvr, &c.); 3d praet. or ^TOnrfbr;
1st fut. ififinrlT ; 2d fut. ■qrfiriTqfrr ; imp. trtxt^ ; pot. bened.
tfiTnrr^; cond. ^nsftrrnr?T . Pass. ifiTPTTf. Caus. TwrinffT. Desid.
fqtfiftmfiT. Freq. ■qtfirnm, xitfrolffT or 'qxprftT^.
ific* ‘ to bear fruit.’
This differs from the preceding only in the change of to
in the second praeterite being absolute, and the vowel being-
long only in the third praeterite, as the verb ends in 77. In
the frequentative the radical vowel is changed to ?.
Pres. 1st praet. ■■snfiTsvr ; 2d praet. trara (^w:);
3d praet. ; istfut. Tfif^TTT ; 2d fut. Tfife-arffr ; imp. TJiTOT;
pot. ; bened. iff^TTrT; cond. ■■‘Smfwonr. Pass. Caus.
xKi^trfk. Desid. Freq. or
WU 4 to despise 4 to bind.’
This takes the frequentative form.
Pres, ; 1st praet. vlqft HrTTrr ; 2d praet. ■sfhrrtTT^'iR ; 3d
praet. 1st fut. ^HiwfTT ; 2d fut. ; imp.
■sfbnwni ; pot. 'srt^r^TfT ; bened. -sfbTffcnrte ; cond. ^^r^hrfw^nr.
Pass. Cau3.
^V, or with JT , 4 to know.’
There is some difference as to whether these are distinct
roots or not. With ^ there are two forms in the third
praeterite (see p. 107) ; without it, only one. The causa] of
also is restricted to the Parasmai-pada. There is another
b b
186
VERBS.
verb gv, ‘ to know,’ of the fourth conjugation, which also
substitutes ^ for the third person singular of the third prae-
terite in the Atmane-pada. They are both inflected like other
verbs with a medial 7, except in the desiderative, which does
not insert and changes the radical consonant to
Pres. xfrvft -W; ist praet. wbnr -IT ; 2d praet. gxftv, g’jv ;
3d praet. (of gv) wftifriT (wfwj, (of gftr:) whfrg or
; 1st fut. ■srtfVfTT; 2d fut. xjftwfrT -W ; imp. ftug,
^TUrff ; pot. Tbnr -ft ; bened. gxzinT, ; cond. \sr=flftpiTfT
-w. Pass. tur. Caus. Thnrfw or (wfvx) xrnrtrfa -w. Desid.
WrFmr. Freq. TtTO.
p>T ‘ to nourish.’
t \
It takes both Padas. Before a xr, ^ becomes ft: or ft. In
the third praeterite, Atman e-pada, the XT of ITT is rejected after
the short vowel (r. 190. g). In the desiderative, T is optionally
substituted for the radical vowel, being preceded by a labial
(r. 21 1. c).
Pres, mftr -ff; ist praet. -7T ; 2d praet. WR ('3Rg:,
xptjt, xpp), ; 3d praet. ('SRiti, wpR), *rtt
(’snprnrr, ; 1 st fut. h#t ; 2d fut. Hftnrfrr -w ; imp. wrg -tit ;
pot. >ftiT -it ; bened. ftjxrnr, ; cond. ^THftwTT -TT. Pass.
fWtrft. Caus. >TTTXif7r ; 3d praet. ’srftvRrT . Desid. ftuftnft -W
or g^fttfiT -W. Freq. xrftpffr or ■gft>rf#.
y>T c to hold,’ and ‘ to take,’ are similarly inflected.
«tt <r to wander’ or * whirl.’
This verb optionally takes the form of the fourth conjuga-
tion. As ending in tt, it does not take Vriddhi in the third
praeterite.
Pres. >mf?T, ist praet. *njR?r, *roxxnr ; 2d praet. wr
(iftrj:); 3d praet. ^mxfriT ; ist fut. pfarTT ; 2d fut. Jjftorft ; imp.
HRg, PXXTg ; pot. WTT, H'xftfT; bened. >mTTfT ; cond. wftnrg.
Pass, pxftff. Caus. wtjfrT; 3d praet. qrPqwHiT . Desid. fwftxrfir.
Freq. xppftft or wftr.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
187
um ‘ to churn.’
The nasal is rejected before a it.
Pres. umfiT ; ist praet. ^rumu ; 2cl praet. uum (uufmu) ;
3d praet. ^rumtu ; ist fut. ufmTTT ; 2d fut. frfTgpqfiT ; imp.
umu ; pot. u^ft^ ; bened. mUTTl ; cond. fm m H . Pass,
mqw. Caus. umufrT Desid. fuufmufiT. Freq. UIH^U,
mumlfiT or UTUf%.
mu ‘ to bind.’
There is nothing peculiar in the simple inflexion of this
verb. Before a u the final is optionally rejected ; and in the
frequentative form, which rejects if, its conjunct final may be
rejected altogether before a termination beginning with a con-
sonant not a nasal, and having an indicatory u ; whilst before
any other consonant U is rejected, and U changed to 7, which
then substitutes the Vriddhi element ^r.
Pres, mufw; 3d praet. ^lu^ftw ; 1 st fut. ufufiTT ; bened. U'mw
or mmriT. Pass, u^rw or uu^nr. Desid. mufmuffT.
\
Frequentative, present tense.
*nnyj)fH or mmfu uutr: mutu:
mrnqlfu or umfu mum: mum
rnmutfu or mufu ututtt: muurfw
These modifications are rather curious than useful, as the
verb is of unfrequent occurrence.
UTU ‘ to investigate.’
This verb takes the form of the desiderative, utufu.
Pres. uTututt ; ist praet. ^ruluiUTT ; 2d praet. utmumifi ;
3d praet. ’mftmfu? ; ist fut. utmfmrr ; 2d fut. utmfuuru ; imp.
uluiurfi ; pot. ubrrmr ; bened. uluifufas ; cond. ^uftuiftrairt.
Pass, utuimif. Caus. uluiuuu.
u (ut) £ to barter.’
The final diphthong becomes before vowels, and
before consonants : it is changed to in the desiderative.
Pres, uu^; ist praet. SHHUri ; 2d praet. uu ; 3d praet. wfUT ;
b b 2
188
VERBS.
i st fut. HTHT ; 2d fut. HTRTTT ; imp. rrqiTf ; pot. rnfiT ; bened.
qfafa ; cond. wnqrr. Pass, ifrqw. Caus. mqqw. Desid.
fawff. Freq. fafafa, MHiftfa, qfafa or rrmifft.
‘ to remember.’
This substitutes »nr in the conjugational tenses.
Pres. qqfa; ist praet. WTfiT ; 2d praet. WT; 3d praet.
(qrqiffm) ; ist fut. wt ; 2d fut. grrtrfa ; imp.
pot. bened. ^RTfr or %qT?t ; cond. Pass. ^ntTT.
Caus. ^TXTtrf?r ; 3d praet. 'Stfa^qq. Desid. fay lufrf. Freq.
JfTWTff, rn^Tfa or srfafa.
qrT ‘ to worship.’
^ is substituted for the semivowel before the terminations of
the second praeterite, except in the singular of the Parasmai-
pada, where it is the letter of reduplication. It is substituted
for q before it, as in the benedictive and passive, qiT substi-
tutes q for its final before a dental, and q with q makes qj
(r. 191. d) ; but as the q of qrT &c. in the third praeterite is
rejected after any consonant, the forms are t?t, 77, &c.
Pres. qqfa -W; ist praet. ^qifrT -TT; 2d praet. ^qT3T (t*TTT:,
iqfqq or 13m. ^fqq), ; 3d praet. ^qisfar (^rqm, ■qqTEm ), 'qqq
('HHttjlrii) ; ist. fut. wr; 2d fut. q^ifa -'fr ; imp. q*TiT -711 ; pot.
qqq -7T ; bened. , q^ffa ; cond. '^qaqTT -7T. Pass, ;
ist praet. tbqTT. Caus. qrqqfTT -7T; 3d praet. wq'fqqTT. Desid.
fqqqrfa Freq. tm nqw, qiqfa.
qTT ‘ to make effort."
This is in every respect regular.
Pres, qTTW; ist praet. *Tq777T ; 2d praet. qq ; 3d praet. ^rqfa? ;
ist fut. qffTTTT; 2d fut. qffTnfa ; imp. wnf ; pot. xrw 7T ; bened.
qfrTifty ; cond. ^qfrnqTT. Pass. iron. Caus. qiTTqfa -q ; 3d praet.
’XifiqHTT. Desid. fqqfqqq. Freq. qTWfr, qTqTftffT or trnrfa.
qq 4 to restrain.’
This substitutes ^ for its final before the terminations of
the conjugational tenses. Although it does not take ^ in the
futures, it does in the second and third praeterites.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
189
Pres. xj'^rfiT ; ist praet. ^xr^fT ; 2d praet. xtxttr (xrfxrsr or
xrxfxj) ; 3d praet. (^rxrfxm, ; ist fut. irt;
2d fut. xrxxrfiT ; imp. xrxrg ; pot. xri^ ; bened. xixxjtt^ ; cond.
*'4XHTT. Pass. W. Caus. xrTRxrnr or umifrf. Desid. fxrqxrfir.
Freq. xtxttitw, dU'Hlfrf or -quf^T.
xpr is conjugated in the Atmane-pada when preceded by ^TT
in an intransitive sense ; as, TTXjt * the tree spreads
by 7x1 in the sense of marrying ; XTR: tfhrPJXTTq^a- ‘ Rama mar-
ried Sita also by ^tt or "3^ or XTR, signifying to heap together
for one’s own use ; 'a^hfbT XTXT«atR ‘ he heaps up the rice.’
X5 * to colour.’
This drops its nasal whenever *T is inserted before the
terminations, that is, in the conjugational tenses, and before
XT. Before dental consonants XT becomes
Pres. XRfiT -W ; ist praet. mWTT -7T; 2d praet. XXT3T (xx^rei or
XXfxTO, xtrTff:), TXW; 3d praet. wsfbr (w^,
(^TX^THT, ’JRfaij ; ist fut. X^iT ; 2d fut. fvFqfiT -TT ; imp. XRrT - rfi ;
pot. x^ff -H; bened. x^lrf, XEfte; cond. -tt. Pass.
X5*l*. Caus. XRxrfTT or X5ftrfw. Desid. fxxftprfiT -R. Freq.
XTXW, XTXSftfiT.
XR £ to commence.’
This verb is invariably conjugated with the preposition ^rr.
The final is changed before a consonant, agreeably to the laws
of Sandhi : tt and xt, whether primary or left by the rejection
of XT in XFT, after an aspirate (r. 190./. g ) become XT, when of
course the preceding * becomes R. Before XT, H is changed
to R, and this again to the hard consonant R. Before a vowel,
except in the conjugational tenses and second praeterite, xt is
inserted, which becomes Anuswara, and then again R before
R, as in the causal. In the desiderative, ^ is substituted for
the vowel, and the root is not repeated.
Pres. ^TTXXTff ; 1 st praet. ^TTX*nr ; 2d praet. ^rrx^ (^TTXRTW,
*nxfW^) ; 3d praet. ^nxar (’sttx'rtttt, ^srrxf'R) ; ist fut. ^rrxan ; 2d
fut. xsnxxxtTW ; imp. WRtTT ; pot. ^rrx>hT ; bened. ; cond.
190
VERBS.
■*iU+nri. Pass. ^TTT«ra. Caus. ’STWhPh ; 3d praet. ^TTTTWT.
Desid. ’Hiu.'mrf. Freq. *TRR*nr. ^TTKwfHV, *mxfaf.
With exception of prefixing ^tt, b* ‘to gain’ is similarly
inflected. Pres. WW ; 2d praet. bh ; 3d praet. ; 2d fut.
Caus. rRHiifTT. Desid. fB'SW, &c.
T*T ‘to sport.’
It is conjugated analogously to other verbs ending with jt.
Pres. 1st praet. ; 2d praet. ib ; 3d praet. vRSFT
(btIb); 1st fut. TBTT; 2d fut. IBTW; imp. TBHT; pot. tbit; bened.
trfte ; cond. Btrtnr. Pass. tbtb. Caus. tTRjnr ; 3d praet.
-.hOibtt. Desid. ftxBH. Freq. TX^qTT, frrftffT or frfnT.
fTO, ‘ to rest,’ makes HRhPh ; but when it means ‘ to lead
a married life,’ R'CHfri or ffTBH.
‘ to grow’ or ‘ ascend.’
For the changes to which the final jr is subject, see r. 1 9 1 . k,
also iTT?, ?? (pp. 173. 180). In the causal the verb optionally
substitutes tT for ?. The terminations of the third praeterite
are those of the first, with R prefixed (second class, 3. p. 132).
Pres. pt?frT ; 1st praet. ; 2d praet. ^cf? ( g: ,
30f?q) ; 3d praet. ; 1st fut. ^rsT ; 2d fut.
fterfff; imp. Wij; pot. ^r%W ; bened. cond.
Pass. Caus. Cl^.fri or TTRirnT ; 3d praet. or
^TJr^rr^. Desid. ^ElfrT. Freq. d^?lPrt or UTTP?.
HTB (T3TB) ‘ to see.’
As either the conjugational vowel or ? is interposed through-
out, the palatal is unchanged.
Pres. btrtt; 1st praet. -HBRiT ; 2d praet. BWtB ; 3d praet.
^WlP^E ; 1st fut. WTT>7TT ; 2d fut. Brfisrora' : imp. c5V^rrf ;
pot. bened. Blf^Mly ; cond. Pass. HT^TT.
Caus. pfcnrfff. Desid. BBR^RTT. Freq. c3T«Tvqfl, Wtr^t^liTT or
HT^frra.
BtBi, ‘ to see,’ is similarly inflected.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
191
^ 4 to speak.’
This and the following verbs beginning with ^ substitute "S’
for the semivowel in the second praeterite and before tr.
Pres. ^fTT ; ist praet. ^r^TIT; 2d praet. (^IT:, ^R*V|,
■35?, , Tf? or '5R'R^) ; 3d praet. ^trIit (wWTf^RH) ; ist fut.
TfiffTT; 2d fut. Tfe/orffT; imp. ^TT ; pot. ^i*tt; bened. TgffiT ;
cond. Pass. 'Jsrfl'. Caus. TT^irfTT ; 3d praet. sst^Nh, ri .
Desid. f^fyufri. Freq. TRSW, TRtftflT or
It is sometimes inflected in the Xtmane-pada, especially
after certain prepositions, and in particular applications ; as,
‘ to repeat,’ ‘to reproach (oneself),’
; f^nr? ‘ to dispute,’ fV^IT ; ‘ to repeat together/
^TT 4 to weave.’
This does not take except in the second praeterite.
Pres. T<ITTT -W ; ist praet. ’SWff -7T ; 2d praet. TTPT (T^J
or TrPq^r. ^iwt), 'anr ; 3d praet. ), Wft (*rrfat);
ist fut. WITT ; 2d fut. WtRtfTT ; imp. qtjw -ITT ; pot. ^ttit -it ;
bened. TOffiTj ; cond. -IT. Pass. Caus.
TPrtrfrT -W. Desid. fV^WfT -W. Freq. TIWIT, ^TTqlfrT or ^rrftr.
‘to dwell.’
IT is substituted for the final before a sibilant immediately
following it (r. 191 ./). If the sibilant is conjoined with it, as
in *ri, it is rejected (r. 190. g ). The verb takes ^ only in the
second praeterite.
Pres. ^rflT ; ist praet. ^srwn r; 2d praet. ('?^rfu^ or
; 3d praet. wnrftir (wrwf, wrm:, wr^ro) ; ist
fut. 'TO'T; 2d fut. Trwfrf ; imp. wg; pot. WIT; bened. Tnrnr ;
cond. . Pass. Tojff. Caus. TnnrnT -w. Desid. fTTrWnr.
Freq. THW, ^rtnfif?T, 3RTV.
T5? ‘ to bear.’
The changes of ^ before a following consonant are those
already noticed (see r. 191. k, ttt^ &c.) ; but whenever ? is
changed to «T, this verb substitutes for its vowel.
192
VERBS.
Pres. 4frf?T -ff; ist prat. WTff -rT ; 2(1 prat. (n??:,
T^rsi or Tsfte), ; 3d prat. *rroftrT (wgl, WOT), mte
( -M^fsr) ; 1st fut. ; 2d fut. -w ; imp. 4FW -irf ; pot.
-K; bened. 4 *q M- ; cond. 'smrnr -IT. Pass. T3TW ;
ist prat, -if ( <r H ; 3d prat. P^f. Caus. 4T?*rfiT -ff. Desid.
^ -A «{ PrT -W. Freq. RHTTfe.
Preceded by TT or xrfx the verb is conjugated in the Parasmai-
pada only ; as,
f to accept.’
Pres. ; ist prat. ; 2d prat. 4^; 3d prat.
; ist fut. TfirTT; 2d fut. ^rf^'qvi ; imp. 44irn ; pot.
^rt ; bened. ; cond. wf^rnrw. Pass. Caus.
^fnrffT; 3d prat. WT%rT or -.Hv-fM=M . Desid. Freq.
4Ttef#l or RtP#, r|rHtT, TnR^lfiT or RftesiiffT,
(see r. 214. a).
Y* ‘ to be.’
This is peculiar in optionally inflecting the second future
and conditional in the Parasmai-pada, and rejecting the aug-
ment ^ before their terminations and those of the desiderative.
As one of the class ?nrrf?, it has two forms in the third
praterite : see p. 182.
Pres, 4^ ; ist prat. ; 2d prat, tww (4^ri[H, 4^^) ;
3d prat. or (wwfa) ; ist fut. 4fwr;
2d fut. Rfl'BTW or 4?S'ftT ; imp. 4WT ; pot. 4W ; bened. 4ffNh? ;
cond. or ^r^hr. Pass. y*TH- Caus. TiNfiT. Desid.
fcraftnK or r44Wfri. Freq. 4f!<W, ^P^HlffT or Tftjrff or
4 th rfifri, &c., as in the last.
t 7
ij- (^>r) * * * 4 to weave.’
The final becomes ^rr before the consonants of the non-
conjugational tenses. In the second praterite there are two
forms ; in one the reduplicated root is T4 before the termina-
tions rejecting tt? and ■grtr or '314 before the rest ; in the other
the substitute is ^r, and 1? being changed to ^TT, as in V &c.,
the tense is inflected accordingly : see <*r.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
193
Pres. wfiT ; ist praet. WH"H -TT; 2d praet. (wh:,
^vj:, wftro, or gw, grfw, gsfw) or wt (wh:, *f.)f
w (wth, grfw) ; 3d praet. wrerhr (wren, wifatf), wret ;
(wrftr) ; ist fut. wit; 2d fut. gwfn -g ; imp. wit -wt ; pot.
WH-W; bened.WT'iT.^relg; cond. WlfUrf -7T. Pass. war. Caus.
WWfH -K. Desid. fwrefH -g. Freq. WTR7T, WWfTT or WlflT.
£ to cover.’
The initial is not changed. The verb as usual is inflected
as if ending in ^TT in the non-conjugational tenses, except in
the singular of the second praeterite of the Parasmai-pada : in
the reduplication 'll becomes ^ before the vowel terminations
of the second praeterite, and the augment ^ : the final W,
derived from x?, is rejected (r. 195. d. p. 128). Before a it, ^
is changed to gh
Pres, wfri -K ; xst praet. wpnr -7T ; 2d praet. fiwrq
(fwrfiw, fwrw:, fwj:)5 fw (ftrfw) ; 3d praet. wrnfh^ (wtt-
fwn), wrrer (wnftr) ; ist fut. ^tht ; 2d fut. wRtfn -g; imp.
WTT -rTT ; pot. -it ; bened. gfalTH , <=ureTy ; cond. wrwir -W.
Pass. ghr^. Caus. apw. Desid. Pi=*irefrf -H. Freq. wt^TH,
wxftffi, wfw.
^ ( ^pr ) ‘ to wither’ or ‘ decay ;’ ‘ to go.’
This substitutes ^ftxj before the terminations of the conju-
gational tenses, which are those of the ^tmane-pada. Those
of the other tenses are the terminations of the Parasmai-pada.
Pres, ; 1st praet. ^r^ffrnr ; 2d praet. WIT? (w?0 ; 3d
praet. WITH; ; ist fut. ; 2d fut. Ph ; imp. ^rhrHT ; pot.
; bened. cond. Pass. ^ffarH. Caus. ^iTTrrrfH.
Desid. fwTrefH. Freq. TSTnruTr, OTWtfir or SITTflfg.
When the verb means c to go,’ the causal retains the final,
3TT?arfH ‘ he causes to go,’ or ‘ drives.’
^iftt ‘ to desire ‘ to bless.’
This is never used without ^ri prefixed.
Pres. ; ist praet. m^ITTH ; 2d praet. gnwft 5 3d praet.
grigrfw; ist fut. m^iftnrr ; 2d fut. wwwrw; imp. wtfnrr;
c c
194
VERBS.
pot. s?r$iv7» ; bened. wnifaifrs ; cond. '^TT^rftrorrT. Pass. ^nyfUM.
Caps. ^n^i^ufTT. Desid. vTifsisifhMrf. Freq. w^rr^irtrff- ^httt-
si* *fl fri or ^isiigilW.
The root ^hr, ‘ to praise,’ differs from this in being inflected
in the Parasmai-pada, and as its nasal is not derived from an
indicatory in dropping it before ; as, pres, sivfrf ; bened.
TTW* ; pass. '5TFIW, &c.
to sprinkle.’
Pres, ; ist praet. ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
; ist fut. ; 2d fut. jbTwfi ; imp. 3f)'4irfi ; pot.
; bened. ; cond. vjsflufcuiri. Pass. Caus.
^fNnrfw -H ; 3d praet. -W. Desid. f313flp5rerf. Freq.
or
Spg * to sorrow.’
Before the sign of the desiderative, the radical vowel is
optionally changed to the Guha vowel before the augment ^
(r. 21 1./. p. 151.)
Pres, '^fr^rfr ; ist praet. ^(f^rT ; 2d praet. tittH (snj^rf:) ;
3d praet. ( ^srif^) ; ist fut. Tflf^rn ; 2d fut.
SllP^fa- ; imp. 3iWrf ; pot. ; bened. sprnr; cond.
• Pass. Caus. Desid. SJinf^nfrf
or TisfliWrf. Freq. TlVsp^j ^TtST^ffiT or snsflf^-
3W ‘ to shine.’
As belonging to the class it optionally takes the
form of the first praeterite in the third.
Pres. ist praet. ^ftaTT; 2d praet. snpr ; 3d praet.
'sr^fffrnr ; ist fut. ; 2d fut. ; pot. ^rhriT ;
bened. ^frfirtrte ; cond. ^^rfftranT. Pass. sr*i^. Caus. ^fM^rffr-w.
Desid. TTTnfirtrffT or sprfWtrfir -^. Freq. ^rsWif, TfrspfffK
or 3 Pi 3 Pi (si.
fsr (f^r>r) ‘ to serve.’
This verb, as indicated by the Anubandha »r, takes both
forms. Before a vowel termination not requiring the Guna
or Vriddhi change of the final, is substituted for it. In
FIRST CONJUGATION.
195
the third praeterite of the Parasmai-pada it takes the termina-
tions of the first, with reduplication : and in the frequentative
form it optionally rejects the augment which augment it
takes as an exception to the general rule, 198. c.
Pres. Tsurfw ; 1st praet. ’sreniTT -W ; 2d praet. f^rsrPt (f^rfaR^:,
farafa^, farfarfasr), falfafa ; 3d praet. -M fji it -w ; 1st fut.
^farfi ; 2d fut. TsrfuTqffl ; imp. ''snrrrf ; pot. tt -w ;
bened. Tsrfatffa ; cond. ^psrfann^ -w. Pass. Cans.
W^nrfTT -W ; 3d praet. ^rfarwiT -7T. Desid. f^fawfa -TT or
-7T. Freq. ^RT^flfTT or Slilfri.
^ * to hear.’
This changes the vowel to and adds the proper
termination of the fifth conjugation, in the conjugational
tenses. '3‘ before a vowel becomes ^ by the rules of Sandhi ;
or before ^ and *r it may be ejected. In the second praeterite,
even vjtj does not insert ^ (r. 195.^/). In the third praeterite
of the causal, ^ is optionally substituted in the reduplication.
Pres, ainflffi (snnTn, 3kn ft), or spi?:, or spr:) ;
1st praet. ^rsnrflTT (^3KJIfrf, ^rspj^vr) ; 2d praet. 'SnZTR'
STvifa, st^) ; 3d praet. (^WT, ; 1st fut. -isftTn ;
2d fut. zrNfir 5 imp. STCrrtij (sroTiTT, 3r<H*rj) ; pot. suayirf ; bened.
^HTTW; cond. 'Hwii^ri . Caus. qfrf ; 3d praet. *31'iMri or
■^fsr-JRrf. Desid. sperm Freq. ^ifartfa, siViflfri.
This verb is conjugated in the i^tmane-pada, preceded by
with an intransitive sense, ‘ he hears otherwise,
as, TPTO rrsprrlfa ‘ he hears the speech.’ Preceded by Ttfa or
it retains the Parasmai-pada in the desiderative form,
sh 1 sr'ywfir or wfri^^frf ‘ he serves or attends upon.’
f^OT (^sfrF^r) * to increase.’
This verb optionally substitutes g- for fa in the second
praeterite ; absolutely before the rf of the benedictive and the
passive ; and optionally before the if of the frequentative,
is substituted for as in far. In the third praeterite it has
three forms ; being conjugated with its own terminations and
c c 2
196
VERBS.
the augment ^ (first class, 2), or with those of the first pre-
terite (second class, 1) with or without reduplication: in the
latter case it rejects its own final.
Pres. Tgi}fr7 ; 1st praet. sh hum ; 2d praet. (fsifHHrj:,
fsi *y Pm^i) or srsrrw ('STsrriT:, srsTf^r. ttutt or ur^rre) ; 3d praet.
>R^ft7T (^anm, ■■arsgfq^ ), mjif^nTrt (Tsfsifsgqdi, ’srf^Tfvgtm)
or (^rani, wsgir) ; 1st fut. ^ur?rr ; 2d fut. yjfqmfrf ; imp.
; pot. bened. 3j i| l rf; cond. SHiyuiu^. Pass, sprrr.
Caus. ^gTTjyftf ; 3d praet. ’Sfaiqjrf or ^TJTSNrf. Desid. fsi^l fum'd.
Freq. ^TTgfarK or ^frsntw, fpgiftfk or STWfr.
mg ‘ to embrace.’
This root rejects its nasal before the terminations of the
conjugational tenses and before it.
Pres. *r»rf(T; 1st praet. tott ; 2d praet. WW or
TOhw); 3d praet. (tto, ; 1st fut. tNir;
2d fut. ; imp. Tr»rg ; pot. ; bened. u tU I rf ; cond.
^WTiT. Pass. *T5qw. Caus. tfsrufrf. Desid. f«>igjfrt. Freq.
TTTTT^qTr, ^TTtr^rnr or ^rnrfjfi.
( 'grT ) ‘ to decay,’ ‘ to be sad,’ ‘ to go.’
This substitutes before the terminations of the conjuga-
tional tenses. The terminations of the third praeterite are
those of the first.
Pres. Ttbrnr ; 1st praet. ->nw)rd ; 2d praet. TWPT (it^jp, HSTVt
or ; 3d praet. ^ra»:TT (^WTrri) ; 1st fut. ; 2d fut.
WUfri ; imp. pot. ; bened. n^llrf ; cond. *mw?T.
Pass. WFT. Caus. TTR’sfrf ; 3d praet. ^reftt^TT. Desid.
Freq. TnTTcTTT, or TTTTTra.
With nr prefixed, the initial becomes if, as firTVfefiT ‘ he sits
and this is repeated in the reduplication of the desiderative, as
rHfMMrufTT, and third praeterite causal, as Tqrftmrrr; the sibilant
following in fact ^ and otherwise it is not changed, as,
2d praet. ; nor is it changed after the ? of irf?r, as
HfrfKbrnr ‘ he opposes.’
‘ to go.’
This verb changes tt to sT throughout.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
197
Pres, srsrfir -Tt; ist praet. ssr«-nf^ -w ; 2d praet. FfTHT, ;
3d praet. -cn-nsfirr , vhm hnfy ; ist fut. yf-nm ; 2d fut. wf-rd^fd -w ;
imp. -7TT; pot. tt t5T^ -it ; bened. **3*rnr, cond.
SHUf-niuiTT -tt. Pass. Caus. ^rsnrfiT -7T. Desid. ftrafsr-
ttht -w. Freq. *rnmqw, imrsrfnr, Jimfis.
it? ‘ to bear,’ ‘ to suffer.’
This verb takes the augment but optionally rejects it
before the terminations of the first future : for the changes
that ensue, see JiTf, &c. In the desiderative the initial
sibilant is not changed after a vowel in the reduplicate syllable,
because such change does not take place when the *T, which
is the sign of the desiderative itself, is changed to in conse-
quence of the augment ^ preceding it (r. 21 1. a).
Pres. ^'3' ; 1st praet. ; 2d praet. '5^; 3d praet. ;
ist fut. Tlf^TTr or TTtST ; 2d fut. imp. ; pot.
bened. ; cond. ^TtfiVant. Pass, Caus. Tn^frf ;
3d praet. . Desid. Freq. ITTO?, or
mmfe.
The initial is changed to n after the ^ of fa, lift:, and fa, as
fiFRjTff ; if the temporal augment intervene, the change is
optional, as 'ara^TT or ^nrinT; it does not take place when ^
has been changed to as fanfaTTl or (nuldl.
fav (fav ) ‘ to accomplish,’ c to regulate.’
Pres, infa; ist praet. *mv?T ; 2d praet. faifa (fafatfij:,
ftmffa or favr^); 3d praet. ^favfa (wfwr) or
faffRUT); ist fut. *fairr or ifai; 2d fut. iifvr'qfa or
; imp. ; pot. Trir?^ ; bened. faumr ; cond. ^irfanriT
or Pass, fa^fa. Caus. ifaqfa ; 3d praet. ’Hfilfmnr.
Desid. fafafatffa or fafar^fd. Freq. irfa«I7f, ^favftfa or
There is also a verb fav, ‘ to go,’ which is without the
Anubandha '3i, and which therefore inserts the augment ^
invariably ; as, ftfafasr, *rfwr, &c. The initial of
either verb is not changed after the ^ of a preposition, except
when meaning prohibition ; as, fa^vfa ‘ he forbids.’
198
VERBS.
u 4 to bear children.’
This takes ^ optionally in the third praeterite.
Pres. wqfrf ; ist praet. ; 2d praet. *rcrR ('W'R'qri:,
or *nfto) ; 3d praet. Ml 4 (^wivh ) or (wrfVtm) ;
ist fut. m?rr; 2d fut. tfrerfiT; imp. FRiT; pot. bened.
mrnr ; cond. ^mtnrfr. Pass. *nnr. Caus. FRufrT. Desid.
Cv \ \ C\
mrefir. Freq. tTruk, therIm or Tftxftfrf-
0 cx 1 Cx '
The same root is also inflected in the second and fifth
classes.
4 to hurt’ or 4 kill.’
Pres. ; ist praet. ’snrfrf ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet. ^rtrf^F ;
1 st fut. *f<*TT! ; 2d fut. ^rfifore ; imp. ’^TrjTrf ; pot. ^TT ; bened.
Efts' ; cond. Fmfirenr. Pass. Wff. Caus. TRtrfirt -W ; 2d
Cv Cv' Cv cO ' *J
praet. -w. Desid. ^FffRTr. Freq.
Wpjfw.
tr (if|) 4 to serve.’
The reduplication of F is ^ (r. 194. i ).
Pres. TRff ; ist praet. \N*Rrf ; 2d praet. fiPHR ; 3d praet.
wftre, ’niifafa) ; ist fut. irre?rr ; 2d fut. ; imp. ttr-ht ;
pot. irerT; bened. iif^iftT? ; cond. ’JmfiRTrT. Pass. ^1?. Caus.
ire 13 fir ; 3d praet. 'srftrerea' . Desid. fairfatre. Freq. irereH,
ireffilT.
So similar, but less frequent roots, tr, ir, &c., meaning
also 4 to serve’ or 4 gratify by service.’
Ffit 4 to stop’ or 4 hinder.’
The sibilant being changed, the following consonant also
becomes a dental.
Pres. ftwr; ist praet. ’•'reWiT; 2d praet. lPFT»t; 3d praet.
; ist fut. RfwiTTT ; 2d fut. ^forere ; imp. ;
pot. ^pr»nT ; bened. wftniflg ; cond. HHwf**rer<T. Pass.
Desid. faRf»TiR. Freq. tttwWt, FRWtffT or rfivifat.
FT 4 to stand’ or 4 stay.’
This verb substitutes fire before the terminations of the
\
conjugational tenses. Although properly conjugated in the
FIRST CONJUGATION.
199
Parasmai-pada, yet in various senses, or after certain prepo-
sitions, it may take the Atmane-pada also. In the second
praeterite first and third pers. the termination of the Parasmai-
pada is ^fr (r. 190. e). Before 11 the ^rr becomes g or In
the third praeterite the verb takes the terminations of the first
in the Parasmai-pada ; and in the Atmane-pada changes its
vowel to after which the R of RT WTR is rejected (r. 190. g).
In the causal form it inserts it.
Pres, fwnr- ^ ; 1st praet. ^rfirTFfT; -IT ; 2d praet. irwt 7n^ ; 3d
praet. *TWTrT (’RWTR), ?tfa)rT (^fuqumT, ^rmpq-r:, ^rfwfg) ; 1st
fut. wnrr ; 2d fut. wTRifir -tt ; imp. firrgvr -ttt ; pot. -w ;
bened. WiffiT, Tqi# ; cond. -w. Pass. whTR. Caus.
wnrrfir ; 3d praet. ;RfTTfgTf^ -w. Desid. frTgiRfw. Freq.
ftIrtt, TTTwnr or irmrrfrT.
gT is used in the Atmane-pada to signify ‘ to appeal to’ or
* rely on also with the prepositions RR, "RR, R, and f% ; also
with ^TT, meaning ‘ to affirm with except it mean ‘ to
stand up’ or ‘ rise and with if the sense be intransitive,
or it mean ‘to praise’ or ‘worship,’ or ‘to have a regard
for,’ &c.
fg^ ‘ to spit.’
The vowel becomes long in the conjugational tenses : the
initial sibilant is unchanged. In the reduplication g is substi-
tuted for the cerebral optionally in the second praeterite. The
desiderative optionally commutes the final semivowel to 7.
Pres. gfirflT ; 1st praet. ; 2d praet. fggR or frifa
(fflfgTiT: or frfg^nr:) ; 3d praet. ; xst fut.
aftjrtl ; 2d fut. gftimfrf ; imp. gfaij ; pot. gtif^; bened.
cond. >agP~-|uirf. Pass. gNjg. Caus. gRRfiT. Desid. firglfegfiT
or TO^rfir. Freq. HgNnr, TTghftfrr.
f*R (f^RT) ‘ to smile.’
Pres, writ ; 1st praet. wrmr ; 2d praet. fafmij ; 3d praet.
^TCRg (wrCm) ; 1 st fut. RTrTT ; 2d fut. R*iqg ; imp. wq'rti ;
pot. writ ; bened. WRtg ; cond. ’RrHrtt. Pass. whnr. Caus.
WTRRfiT -R. Desid. fRwfRRR. Freq. RRftiirf, inRtflfrf, Rwfir.
200
VERBS.
With fa prefixed, and in the causal form, it makes fawmfa
‘ he or it astonishes that is, the object itself astonishes :
when the object differs, the Parasmai-pada is used, either in
the regular form, or with tj substituted for ^ ; as,
fawPPlfa or famine ffl ‘ she astonishes him by her form.’
(faffa^r) ‘ to melt,’ ‘ to perspire.’
The verb belongs to the class ^irrfa ; see p. 182.
Pres, 1st praet. ; 2d praet. 3d praet.
or ; xst fut. ^TfarTT ; 2d fut. Tirfafaff ; imp. ;
pot. ^TT ; bened. cond. ’Jiy fyuirr. Pass, ffasfa. Caus.
^■qfa -ff. Desid. Freq. nffa;fffrT or
Tf ‘ to go.’
When it means ‘ to go quickly’ or ‘ to run,’ *n is optionally
substituted for the root before the conjugational tenses (i. e. a
different, but imperfect root, or VTW is also admissible in
these tenses). For other particulars, see the analogous roots
1-
Pres. Trefa, vr^fa ; 1st praet. ^Tre^, ; 2d praet. Trent
(ttott:) ; 3d praet. ^rernffir ( ) or *rerei^ (^reren ) ; 1st
fut. T?#T ; 2d fut. nffalfa ; imp. TOT, VT^TJ ; pot. TOT, vfaw ;
bened. frnrnr ; cond. vrerffajTT . Pass, faifa. Caus. Tntqfa -W.
Desid. ftreffafa. Freq. wfaff, Trefatffff, Trefaff or wft.
ttti (Trei ) ‘ to go,’ ‘ to creep’ or e glide.’
The medial vowel may be changed to ^ in the two futures
and conditional. It is also optional to double the final after a
conjunct t; as, TtfaffT &c. The <5 restricts the third prae-
terite to the terminations of the first, before which the vowel
is unchanged (r. 197. p. 134).
Pres. Tfafa; 1st praet. ^rerefa ; 2d praet. Trefa ; 3d praet.
^rerq?^ (^rertnff, ^rererer ) ; 1st fut. mn or tot ; 2d fut. TJresqfa or
Titfafa ; imp. pot. tott ; bened. TOUrf ; cond. WTO<T or
^rerefair. Pass. tow. Caus. Tfawfa -w. Desid. ftrawfa.
Freq. Tnjror^, Treftrtftfa or Treifafa.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
201
‘ to go’ or ‘ approach.’
The nasal is rejected before *r, and in one form of the third
praeterite : in the frequentative, 7ft is added to the reduplicated
syllable.
Pres. ^h«*Prf ; ist praet. '■^TTsRTrjTT ; 2d praet. or
; 3d praet. (*rw?ri, ) ;
ist fut. ; 2d fut. ; imp. 73,*iri ; pot. ^fi77*7T ; bened.
^rnr; cond. ^sr^rTT . Pass, Caus. ^RT^rffT -W. Desid.
Freq. ^Tft^ftftr or
4 to envy’ or c emulate.’
Pres. ; ist praet. ^wnbr; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
WmQ? ; ist fut. TqfilTT ; 2d fut. ; imp. Tq^rTT ;
pot. Tq%"rT ; bened. T^fliftF ; cond. ^EqfjftqTT. Pass. Tq’gft.
Caus. wrt^fcT -If. Desid. fm-qffint. Freq. xnwra^, Trrrq^ffTT
or xiTTqf#.
wfini (wsnft) c to increase.’
In the causal the final is changed to ‘3T.
Pres. HfiTUTT 5 ist praet. ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
TSWfiTfitr? ; 1 St fut. wfaTTT ; 2d fut. TcsrfiquiTt ; imp. wfinnTT ;
pot. wfiT^TT ; bened. wfirftrxfb? ; cond. •^tRTfqxtnr. Pass. Wfiiiqff.
Caus. ; 3d praet. h . Desid. Freq.
TJIMflliMH, Ulrtfirqlfrr, Hiwwfrf.
vr * to remember.’
In the third praeterite, i^tmane-pada, the 7T of w, WTW is
rejected after ^j, and the vowel is unchanged. ^ is substi-
tuted for the radical in the desiderative.
Pres. TTPcfrT -K ; ist praet. ^?RT7Tv -7T ; 2d praet. 7TWTC (wwfl^l),
Trail; (^rwfxrt) ; 3d praet. ^rrarriffiT (^rran^r), 'stwtt (*wmni,
,*wfa) ; ist fut. W#T ; 2d fut. wfbqfTT -W ; imp. FRT7T -7T7 ;
pot. raRTT -7T; bened. ranzfTTT, cond. ^rraTfbinT -7T. Pass,
wdivt. Caus. wrunfa Desid. Freq. Tnwiira,
raTWt^frt, ^TTFlff .
) ‘ to ooze’ or f drop.’
This belongs to the class ^nrrf^ (p. 182). The '5 indicates
d d
202
VERBS.
the optional insertion of The nasal is rejected in the third
praeterite with the terminations of the first, Parasmai-pada.
The second future and conditional are optionally conjugated in
the Parasmai-pada, and so is the desiderative : see y?r and
Pres. ; ist praet. ; 2d praet. or
*FTriT, or ; 3d praet. (^q^TTT),
or 'ST^nr or ^^‘wraf) ; ist fut. or ^hrr;
2d fut. -W, TqwnT -a ; imp. ; pot. ;
bened. or Fiwte ; cond. ^qf^'ant -If, ^rqWiT -w.
Pass. ^q?ra. Desid. and ftn^rtrnr -w. Freq. trrrqa'ff,
or ??TTqf=r.
(try) ‘ to fall down.’
This verb also belongs to the class snrrf^.
Pres, H*nr ; ist praet. vstthra ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet
or ; ist fut. tfftnn ; 2d fut. srfWa ; imp. srcnri ;
pot. #tnr; bened. trftnfte; cond. ^Ttrftrnnr. Pass. ^n^ra1. Caus.
tfrrqfH Desid. Freq. wvflBtqrf, or
tqy and Wy, * to fall down,’ are similarly inflected.
H ‘ to drop.’
This is one of the exceptions to the insertion of ^ in the
second person singular of the second praeterite (r. 195. g). The
root takes both the augment and reduplication in the third
praeterite, with the terminations of the first, (second class, 2).
Pres. ; ist praet. 2d praet. ytrre
; 3d praet. ist fut. tffirr; 2d fut. sitqfrT ; imp.
HTfT ; pot. tjqiT ; bened. HqffT ; cond. ’SRjlmn . Pass. trq¥.
Caus. Wl'qqfri ; 3d praet. or wfwqy. Desid. ywMfa.
Freq. Tnyqrr, tntfrfTT.
(^f) ‘ to laugh.’
The vowel remains short in the third praeterite by virtue
of the Anubandha ^ (p. 108).
Pres, ftrfff ; ist praet. ; 2d praet.
; 3d praet. **:*flrf ; ist fut. ?f?nrr; 2d fut.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
203
; imp. ^Tij ; pot. ^RiT ; bened. fWHT ; cond. wftrnn^.
Pass. Caus. ^Ttrqfrf ; 3d praet. 'jnfi^RTT. Desid.
fjT^fanfrr. Freq. »TT^.
So ■pr, * to sound,’ ‘ to be small,’ except in the third
praeterite, as >ngidlrT, ^nfftr, &c.
£ (^t) ‘ to take.’
See the roots it, w.
Pres. ^rf}r 1st prset. ^RT -IT ; 2d praet. *TfTt (»Tfjj:,
3d praet. w^nsffiT (^Kbr), ^TfiT (^ftf) ; 1st fut.
^#T ; 2d fut. ^RUffir ; imp. -fri ; pot. ?br -7T ; bened.
fgHIrf, ; cond. ’■Hgft.mtT -it. Pass, ffnrff. Caus. ^RirfTT
Desid. ftTTtcrfTT -7T. Freq. irffirff, ^T#^tfrT, Wtl- or Kf 0 firf, or
or
‘ to be or make glad.’
Pres, 1st praet. r< rf ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
; 1 st fut. %ffqn ; 2d fut. ^iP.ufd ; imp. ^V^rfi ; pot.
WW* ; bened. ; cond. ^TgrfiT'OTfT. Pass. 1RTK. Caus.
^TnrffT -w. Desid. Freq. or
^rglfrl.
* to taste,’ and ‘ to sound,’ are similarly inflected.
3T (gbr) ‘ to call.’
When the root is doubled, or before if, the semivowel and
following diphthong are changed to T, which substitutes ^
before terminations not requiring Vriddhi or Guha, and is long
before 11. The third praeterite takes the terminations of the
first (second class, 2) in the Parasmai-pada, and optionally in
the Xtmane-pada, before which the final is rejected. T* becomes
,?rr where no other change is required (see ^). In the passive,
the third praeterite, second future, and conditional optionally
insert
Pres. snrffT -w ; 1st praet. -TT ; 2d praet.
or ^?>r), ^ ; 3d praet. ^7T (^«tt, ^t), ^tt
(^pri, ^sr) or ’H^rt (^mirif, ^jpfrr) ; 1st fut. ^rnn ; 2d fut.
^mfflT -w ; imp. -HT ; pot. gpfTT -7T ; bened. jnjTrT, ;
d d 2
204
VERBS.
cond. l •WIT -TT. Pass. TTTTff ; 3d praet. sh^tt or
; 2d fut. or ; cond. or ^ rfq~g»7T.
Caus. ^tWtt ; 3d prast. Desid. ^f^frT -w. Freq.
jfr^flTTT, sfftftfTT.
Second Conjugation.
216. The characteristic peculiarity of this conjugation is
the attachment of the inflectional terminations of the con-
jugational tenses immediately to the termination of the base,
■without the interposition of any vowel (r. 172. a. 2).
a. There are but two general changes of the terminations ;
f? in the second person of the imperative, Parasmai-pada, is
changed to fV after any consonant except a nasal, semivowel,
or ^ ; and after a cerebral, y or ^ is changed to It is
said, indeed, that the terminations of the second and third
persons of the first praeterite, *T and TT left by fiPI and
(p. 1 16), are rejected after an inflective base ending in a
consonant ; but this arises from a general rule not restricted
to conjugational inflexion. A conjunct consonant, when final,
loses the second member of the compound (r. 35) : therefore
to kill,’ 1st praet., making in the first instance ^^tT,
must become and ‘ to know,’ making ^rirrTT,
becomes ^RT^ in both, rejecting the finals K and (r. 189. a).
The same in other verbs ending in consonants, of whatever
conjugation.
b. The changes of the vowels of the base are analogous to
those of the first conjugation, before those terminations which
have an indicatory tj. A final ^ or ^ is in general changed to
TT ; "S’ and '3i to and ^ to ^HT. An initial or medial short
vowel is similarly changed before the same. A long vowel is
unaltered. Other changes are special, or follow the general
rules of Sandhi and of conjugational changes.
c. Final consonants are combined with the terminations agree-
ably to the laws of Sandhi, or to special rules, or to rules affecting
all similar combinations in whatever conjugation (rr. 189—191).
SECOND CONJUGATION.
205
d. This conjugation includes a class of five verbs, called
or ‘ to weep,’ ‘ to sleep,’ * to breathe,’ ^sn=r * to
breathe,’ '^sr ‘ to eat,’ which form a partial exception to the
non-interposition of a vowel between the base and inflectional
termination, as they insert I before any consonant except xt, and
or ^ if the termination consists of a consonant only, as in
the second and third persons singular of the first praeterite.
e. Another class, termed »TWTT?> is also included in this
conjugation, the verbs of which are termed ’Swret or ‘ redupli-
cated ;’ they are, *tht 4 to eat,’ ‘ to wake,’ ‘ to be
poor,’ ^=fiTTT ‘ to shine,’ ^IT^T ‘ to govern,’ ‘ to shine,’ and
4 to obtain.’ These cause the nasal of the terminations
of the third person plural of the present and imperative to be
rejected, as also of the same person of the first praeterite,
Atmane-pada (r. 190. d) ; and TH to be substituted for in
the same person of the Parasmai-pada.
The verb which is given as a model of this conjugation,
‘ to eat,’ is inflected in its simple form in the Parasmai-pada
only ; but in composition with some prepositions, as with fxr
and ’Srfir, it may be conjugated in the Atmane-pada, as
‘ he eats much reciprocally.’ It may therefore be exhibited
in both forms, omitting the prefixes of the compound verb for
the present, for the sake of comparison. The final of tst?
becomes TT before a hard or surd consonant (r. 7. d) : is
inserted by special rule before the terminations of the second
and third persons singular of the first praeterite, Parasmai-
pada. The nasal of the third person plural in the present, first
praeterite, and imperative of the Atmane-pada is rejected.
^ ‘ to eat.’
Present tense, ‘ I eat,’ &c.
Parasmai-pada.
Atmane-pada.
’.H1?: ’HU:
’HTTR ^TrXi: ’StrXT
206
VERBS.
First praeterite, ‘ I ate’ or ‘ have eaten,’ &c.
^rppr
^TT?T
*rrf?
mgf?
wrerf?
wr:
’-MlrWC
rn^vni
WRTrTT
Imperative, ‘ May I eat,’ &c.
o
^rar:
WT7T
’RIM
RTRf
’RPR
R i^i
Rnri
mm
Potential, ‘ I may eat,’ &c.
mm
^srnf
■XU I ri i
WUTrT
wq:
^Rfcrf?
^TJTrri
Of the remaining tenses it is only to be remarked, that the
second praeterite is optionally borrowed from tr (see p. 174) ;
and the third praeterite and desiderative mode are formed with
the same verb, R? does not insert ^ (p. 136), except in the
second praeterite.
2d praet. H'tiiH or ’STR (WTTg:, ^TR*., ^rrf^), sra or ’SR;
3d praet. 'WtTTT -w ; 1st fut. ’'twt ; 2d fut. ’HwfiT ; bened.
’.Mil ITT , ; cond. ’HTStTiT -tt. Pass. Caus. ’HR^tfiT -7T ;
3d praet. ’HttR'rT -TT. Desid. ftTEu^rnr.
For the l’emaining verbs of this conjugation, selected as
most useful or remarkable, the following paradigms, as in the
first conjugation, with occasional observations, will be sufficient.
‘ to breathe.’
This is one of the class ; see r. 216. d.
Pres. ’SfTfiT (’Stffnr:, wfo), ; 1st praet. T5TTiTrT or
(^TTf^THT, M'TRT'T ) ; 2d praet. ^PT (^PR:, ^TPTt) ; 3d praet. ^rpftw
(’•sniRFr, ^rfirw) ; 1st fut. ^tprt ; 2d fut. ^Tfirarfw ; imp. ;
pot. ’srsrnr (^rptt) ; bened. ^ratpr (’S^irt) ; cond. wtor.
Pass. Caus. ’.MRaifrl. Desid. ’MiVffRfrf.
The vr of this verb becomes TU after a preposition giving
cause for it, even in both syllables of a reduplication ; as,
Hlfafrf ‘ he breathes’ or ‘ lives,’ m Dll fitiTrFrT 4 he desires to live.’
SECOND CONJUGATION.
207
^TF * to be.’
This auxiliary verb admits of the four conjugational tenses
only, except in composition, when it has a fifth tense, the
second praeterite (r. 196). The other tenses are supplied by
F 4 to be’ (p. 142). Before those terminations which do not
require a change in the radical vowel of a verb, the initial of
’HF is rejected : the final is also rejected before a termination
beginning with IT. In the first praeterite, the second and third
persons singular are borrowed from a defective third praeterite,
prefixing § to the terminations. The second person singular
of the imperative substitutes f for the root, and f*r is changed
to fv. Like some other verbs, takes the Atmane-pada,
compounded with prepositions, in a reciprocal sense ; as, fthif
(■sh^Ft) * to be mutually.’ In this Pada ^ is substituted for
the root in the first person singular, present tense : f is
changed to ? before f. As this verb is useful, the inflexions
may be exhibited in detail, omitting the preposition.
Present tense, ‘ I am,’ &c.
Parasmai-pada.
A'tmane-pada.
’STffR
ft:
ft:
*N
FT?
ft:
FT
*N
F
FT^
1
’FfFT
ft:
Ffirf
*S
FT
FT7T
F^
First praeterite, ‘ I was,
’ &C.
wren
'FTFT
^FTFTf?
FTWlf?
wrft:
^TTFT
^tftt:
WFFTT
'FTIF
^rrwf
?TTF»T
^TTFT
-M IFTrTT
FTFTT
Imperative, ‘ May I be,’ &c.
’fftTf
^TTTTF
^T^
^TFR%
^TFT?f
Ffv
FT
FT
FT
FFIT
i
0
FTT
FFJ
FTT
FTTTT
FTTT
Potential, ‘ I may be,’
&C.
TUT
FTT?
FTTF
Ft?
Trhrf?
Fhrf?
fit:
FTTiT
FTTrT
fTttt:
fIttftt
FhcT
FTTfT
^TTrTT
fIit
fIftwi
fIft
208
VERBS.
The second and third persons singular of the benedictive
are considered to be TjTTTT.
^tttt ‘ to sit.’
The final is optionally doubled before a consonantal termi-
nation, except before which it is rejected.
Pres, ’s'tttft or ’sttth (,srr* or w, 'srrrmr, ’srrssr) ; ist praet.
wret ; 2d praet. 'RTTwi* ; 3d praet. snifay (^rrfaftl) ; ist fut.
wftnrr; 2d fut. ’FnftraTTr ; imp. ^rrerf (w^r. ^Trrrfa) ; pot.
’HTnlrT ; bened. ; cond. ^nfwqTT. Pass. Caus.
^rtnrfTT. Desid.
^ ‘ to remember.’
A verb consisting of a single ^ or or ending in the same,
if preceded by a conjunct consonant, changes it to before a
termination beginning with a vowel, and not requiring Guna
or Vriddhi. A verb ending in '3' or 3i changes its final to 3"3
under the like circumstances, analogously to the rule of redu-
plication of the second praeterite, but not restricted to it
(r. 191. a). See also Declension of nouns in ^ and 3i.
The verb ^ is always combined with the preposition
’srfv, and with no other : the final indicatory 35 distinguishes
it from ^ (^f)j as below. In the first praeterite the augment
with the radical vowel becomes IT. In the second and third
praeterites and in the derivative forms it substitutes the
inflexions of JTH.
Pres, •srurfir (^rwfftr:, ■srftnrfa) ; ist praet. ^anr ('^rai:, ’'tutrjt ) ;
2d praet. ; 3d praet. ^raprnu; ; ist fut. ^rar?TT; 2d fut.
mqwfrT ; imp. ■^sanr ; pot.^pffarn^; bened. ^nfftrnr; cond.^rapirfT.
Pass. Caus. 'STfwmfTT. Desid. ^nvnTJ|fHin''rr.
^ (^3*) e to go * to study.’
The indicatory T restricts this to the Atmane-pada ; and it
is invariably combined with the preposition *?fv ; as, wvfl ‘ to
go over,’ as a book, ‘ to read,’ ‘ to study.’ It borrows the
forms of ITT, ‘ to go,’ in the second praeterite and frequentative,
and optionally in the third praeterite and conditional tenses
SECOND CONJUGATION.
209
and the causal. Before a vowel termination, is substi-
tuted for the radical vowel (r. 191. a), which with the tempo-
ral augment in the first and third praeterites and conditional
becomes
Pres. ('snifarrff, 1st praet. ’S'uiw (^izrrrnrr,
; ad praet. ^rfv*FT (^fu^FTTH, ^rftnTfut) ; 3d
praet. ^rui? (-^urfa) or ; 1st fut. ^srubn ; 2d
fut. ’Snqtiiw ; imp. wfarr ; pot. bened. ; cond.
?nqifivq7r, 'sn^anr. Pass. *rvfrqw. Caus. wwrroTTfrr ; 3d praet.
^rrirrfiTTnTor ^fanftiTtj^. Desid.
‘to go-’
The indicatory iff distinguishes this from the two preceding
verbs, as well as from ^ of the first conjugation (see p. 167).
Before the vowel terminations of the present and imperative,
it is substituted for the root ; before other vowel terminations,
^iT. The third praeterite is borrowed from ttt in both the
active and passive voices ; and the causal and desiderative are
derived from tot.
Pres. xrffT (^jn, irftr, irfff, TTfa, 35:, ^t:) ; 1st praet.
^ (inn, i*ttot, H ,sttot) ; 2d praet. (^nn, §3:) ;
3d praet. ^mTfT; 1st fut. inn; 2d fut. msfir ; imp. inr (^HT,
TO^, irrfn, itnb Itw) ; pot. bened. ^HTTf (with a
prep, short, f^fbTTfr, fnfhuwi) ; cond. inTOT. Pass, :
3d praet. ^mfib Caus. TOnrflT. Desid. fimfHwfiT.
‘ to pi’aise.’
After the cerebral of the base, the w and vr of a termination
are changed to z and z ; and the radical final is changed to
the hard consonant of its class, z (r. 12). This root and
as below, insert ^ before ir and sir in the present, and ^ and
si in the imperative. It takes the usual augment
Pres. % (fTTTT, ^Tff, f^rir, $tot%) ; 1st
praet. IT£ ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet. irfr? ; 1st fut. ^friTT ;
2d fut. ffVnTW; imp. fjf 3(f?s4) ; pot. bened.
cond.^fTajw. Pass. Caus. $TitfTT. Desid. ffefTm
e e
210
VERBS.
‘ to go,’ ‘ to shake.’
Pres, ist praet. Ft; 2d praet. sft ; 3d praet. FftF ;
1st fut. ^TCTT ; 2d fut. fftruF ; imp. ^#i ; pot. frhr ; bened.
■^fFFlF ; cond. FfcaiF. Pass. fttft. Caus. ^ftf. Desid. ^ftftFF.
■§^T * to rule.’
For the change of the final to F before a consonant, see
r. 19 i.f. \ is inserted in the present and imperative tenses
before F and if ; see fF.
Pres, ^F (IfjIM, ff^TSF) ; ist praet in? ; 2d praet. Ssil^lrii ;
3d praet. Ff$n? ; ist fut. ^tft; 2d fut. Ifsraw ; imp. ^ft;
pot. f^fTTr ; bened. ifsiFh? ; cond. Ff^nFrT. Pass. Caus.
t^nrffT. Desid. tfijTT^lFfr.
FiF ( FiF'5T ) ‘ to cover.’
O' O \'
This verb takes both Padas. Before terminations rejecting
F, and having more than one letter, the change of a final
vowel may be either that of Guha or Vriddhi : when the
termination is single, as in the second and third persons of the
first praeterite, it is changed to Guha. Before a vowel, TF is
substituted for the final ; but optionally before the augment
prefixed to which the final may also take the Guna change
or FTT, which becomes ^tf. In the reduplication the second
syllable only is repeated, and the proper radical consonant
F resumes its dental character when detached from T. The
desiderative takes various forms (r. 21 1. d).
Pres, gnyffff, gjuiifa (ftff:, FFnFfFj, FiFF ; ist praet. ^ftft^
^BTri, ^TFFF ), ; 2d praet. FviFFTF, guliFF ; 3d praet.
'FTFTFbr, WinFhr or ’FtoNIh (FmnfFFT &c.), FTTFf FF, 'FIFTFF ;
I St fut. FiFifFnT, FiFTFFT ; 2d fut. FiFPN U|fF -F, FiFfF'FfH' -F 5
imp. FiFTF or FiFTF, FiFFT ; pot. FiFFTF, ; bened. gn^FTF ,
■g»J§fFFlF or gnBfFFfa? ; cond. -.h'ijIi N u| H -F or FtTFfFtFF -f. Pass.
FiFFF. Caus. FTFUFfTf ; 3d praet. ’■HIF'^FF . Desid. FSF'JJ-
FTF -F, F^FTFFfF -F, FiF^TFFfF -F. Fl’eq. FiFTJJFF, FiFfF^tTF
or FiFFtfrT.
SECOND CONJUGATION.
211
‘ to speak’ or ‘ say.’
A final before any consonant except ^ and *T rejects its cf,
and ? before y becomes z; see r. 191. h. i. The verb has but
the conjugational tenses, and optionally the second praeterite.
In all other forms tan or yj^TT is substituted for the root.
The substitutes may be inflected in both Padas.
Pres. ^ ^rir, ^37? . ; 1st praet.
3m? (3m>!( 1 riT, 3m3T3) ; 2d praet. or
; 3d praet. 3'nppr, 3r^r?r, 3mnjmft^, 3r*3irw ; 1st fut.
<y|Mi, ^Tfrr ; 2d fut. mimf? -w, ^iiHcfir -? ; imp. (■ys3,
^t£) ; pot. wiw ; bened. ^RTiT , mntTTT ,
^%Trnr, ^rnrnt; cond. w? -w, 31^51 i«itt -?r. Pass,
*SIHTrf. Caus. WTtRffT, ; 3d praet. 3rim^3nTft.
Desid. fiaWTHni -?, fiyyr^rrerflT -K. Freq.
’FafiTW 4 to shine.’
This is one of the class "JT^lTf?, or reduplicated verbs.
may be rejected before the terminations of the second and
third persons singular of the first praeterite, or changed to
when they are dropped : it is also rejected or changed to ^
before fy (r. 191. j).
Pres, ^nurfar (ysfiren, ; 1st praet. 3TTOI, 3m=RT^
(^rro: or 3myrnr) ; 2d praet. y^iFTyyrn; ; 3d praet. 3m^rabr
(3myrrfwr, 3moRT'ftnm) ; 1st fut. ycsrftrprr; 2d fut. yynfifryfiT;
imp. (yytffy or yehlfe) ; pot. yyTmTTT; bened. yyiissr^
(^ofiimTW) ; cond. 3m^rftranr. Pass. Caus. yyrayfw ;
3d praet. ^yiyyiy? or Desid. fw^rftrqfw.
ysj ‘ to eat.’
This is the type of the Abhyasta or reiterated roots in its
inflexions, although not itself a reduplicate. It also belongs
to the class (r. 216. d ).
Pres. y faff'd (yfapn, waff*) > 1st praet. 3Ty?ft7T or 3HT3j^
(3nr^fl: or 3iy3f:, 3ryar.) ; 2d praet. yysj ; 3d praet. 3T»rsft^
(3nr%?f, 3nrft^F? ) ; 1st fut. yfapn; 2d fut. yfaryfir; imp.
e e 2
212
VEKBS.
pot. »r^rnT ; bened. jT^UTT ; cond. qRfqtqrf. Pass.
Caus. *T^trf7T. Desid. far(V| mPh. Freq.
t) I t| till frf or tJ R fV.
*TPT ‘ to wake.’
The final becomes ^ before a consonantal termination
rejecting tt ; and in the first praeterite, when the inflectional
termination is rejected (r. 189. a) ; the ^ of xsr becomes Yisarga.
Before other consonants the vowel is unchanged. Before the
vowels ^5 is changed to except in the second praeterite, and
before when it becomes 'SR. The second praeterite has
two forms.
Pres. >TFTfit (tTPIit:, Tnufir) ; 1st praet. ’srrt: (xHWTJTfrr,
wrn^., W3TFT:, 'srfttt, &c.) ; 2d praet. tTRRR^r or wrrtr
(^TRPKTT:) ; 3d praet. ^RRTT^ (wsrRRSl) ; 1st fut. MHlflrH ;
2d fut. *nnfbiifTT ; imp. 5trt§ (^nnirf, rt?jf) ; pot. ^rprirnT ;
bened. ^iM^inr. Pass. »TRPzrff. Caus. suiRnfrt. Desid.
fiTRRTfbrnT.
filR (fitrfw) ‘ to cleanse.’
For the changes of the palatal final to a guttural before
consonants, see r. 191. c. d.
Pres. RR (firw, ftRW, fWw, ftRTST, ; 1st praet.
^rfVf?R ; 2d praet. fvrf?T^ (fHfirf^) ; 3d praet. ; 1st fut.
• ; 2d fut. ; imp. fVbsf (fw, ftrn4) ; pot. f qsftif ;
bened. fi?rfwqt¥ ; cond. ^rfjffVnnT- Pass. f?RTK. Caus. fifRT-
TTfw -W. Desid. fqffTf^Trf. Freq. Rfvrgw,
So fqnr ‘ to paint,’ and f^rftr ‘ to tinkle.’
‘ to be poor.’
In the conjugational tenses ^TT is changed to ^ before a
termination beginning with a consonant, and not having a
mute it. It is rejected in all tenses before a vowel termina-
tion of the same kind, or one not having tj ; also before the
augment and before ti in the benedictive. As a reduplicate
root, it rejects the nasals of the third person plural, present
tense, &c., and substitutes for in the first praeterite
SECOND CONJUGATION.
213
(r. a 1 6. e). In the second and third praeterites it has two
forms.
Pres. ; 1st praet. (*n*ft.fgfri,
5 2d praet. or ; 3d
praet. ) or
; 1st fut. ^ftf^TTr ; ad fut. ^Rf^-cqfH ; imp.
(?ftf?rri, ^Tftrr, ^fr^TTR, ^t*?) ; pot. ^ftf^Trr ; bened.
^fcsjTW; cond. (Vffj m ff. Pass. ^ KaU n . Desid. tV*? ftf^ M fri or
5fT (?rR ) * to cut.’
This retains its final unchanged in all the tenses except the
second praeterite. It takes ftr in the third praeterite, (first
class, 3).
Pres. <^TflT ; 1st praet. (^TR or ^:) ; ad praet.
(^P> ?5:) ; 3d Prset- ^nftw (wnm, ^rrftr^:, ^rfwr) ;
1st fut. ^nn; ad fut. <TRqfiT ; imp. r^nr (^rf^) ; pot. ;
bened. ^TUTr^; cond. ^TRTrT. Pass. Qaus. <fpnrf?r.
Desid. fijrrefir. Freq. ^rrrrrFr, ^r^TfiT or ?T?fir.
In this manner a number of other verbs in ^TT, belonging to
this conjugation, may be inflected ; as,
<£T to go badly, to fly.
tit to preserve.
■*5rr to eat.
trr to fill,
vrr to shine.
ITT to measure.
TIT to go.
^ to give, to take.
HT )
TT to blow.
^TT to cook or mature.
ujiT to bathe.
WT is conjugated only in the non-conjugational tenses : see
trr takes r5 in the causal, TTIc-jqfri. WfT makes the vowel
of the causal optionally short, ^refcT or
‘ to shine.’
This is one of the class of reduplicated roots, and is usually
considered peculiar to the Vedas.
Pres, ; 1st praet. ^nfhfhr ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
2U
VERBS.
; ist fut. rfHVrTT ; 2d fut. ; imp. ; pot.
^hfhr; bened. ; cond. ’ST^fVrnnt. Pass, fipflqd.
jpr * to milk.’
For the changes of the final and initial, see r. 191. k. 1.
s? becomes before the consonants, and w vj are changed
after it to v, when becomes ?t ; before TT, becomes 3R,
making as usual ^ ; and when so changed, as also before
the initial ^ is changed to V. In the third praeterite, as *r is
preceded by T (see r. 197. /), it takes the terminations of the
first, with prefixed (second class, 3) ; but in the Xtmane-
pada may be rejected before the terminations beginning with
consonants.
Pres. (?m:, vrfsr, jnn, w, pr.), 5^
(^TW, pw, V%, vr^) ; j St praet. (^), (^vt:) ;
2d praet. 3d praet. ^FTWSfrr (wpf,
(vrafinriT, ^rwgp?r, vru^fV) or
(^nn:, ; ist fut. <fmn ; 2d fut. -w; imp.
jnn ; pot. j^rnr, ; bened. ^^rnr, VTsjte ; cond. vrulaM^ -IT.
Pass. Caus. rTl^fri ; 3d praet. Desid. -w.
Freq. rTpm, <jtc?lfrT or ^t^lOv.
‘ to anoint,’ and Jpr ‘ to hide,’ are analogously conju-
gated : see also fcTf .
f%TT * to hate.’
The verb is regularly inflected. TJT is optionally substituted
for '3PT. The changes of the final are either those of Sandhi,
or of a final according to r. 191. h. It takes the terminations
of the first praeterite in the third.
Pres. |-f^, firr; ist praet. ('3T%Fr, or
^t|t, &c.), (^rfewnri); 2d praet.
3d praet. -TT ; ist fut. I'FT ; 2d fut. ir^rfiT ; imp.
(f^Tfe, •grtrrftrr), %Fr (f^b fwjv) ; pot. f%nrn^, fiTftw; bened.
fV=rnr, fTsrte ; cond. -w. Pass, from. Caus. |-trqfTT.
Desid. f^fg^ffT -W. Freq. or i^rfe.
SECOND CONJUGATION.
215
(^(*|*T) * to speak.’
This is an imperfect verb, admitting of the conjugational
tenses only. It inserts ^ before the consonantal terminations
rejecting ; and before the augment the Guna substitute
becomes is also substituted before the vowel termina-
tions having a mute tt, and before those which have not
that letter. In the present tense the inflexions of in the
three numbers of the third person, and singular and dual of
the second, in the same sense, ‘ he speaks,’ &c., but with the
terminations of the second praeterite, are considered to be
optionally substitutes for those of j|. For the non-conjugational
tenses, see
Pres, (i|7T:, sjxrfcr, sT?:, ^5, -3^?, tt?:, wn:) or
^r?:, ,wzt, -aw ; 1st praet. -h ri
; imp. si=flrf ('awT, ■a'^rrfti), wi (w?) ;
pot. aw, aabr.
jpT ( ^ST ) * to clean,’ ‘ to sweep.’
The vowel takes the Yriddhi change before the terminations
of the conjugational tenses having a mute a, and optionally
before those beginning with vowels not having such letter.
It is so changed throughout in the non-conjugational tenses,
except before a. The verb is one of a class which changes
the palatal final to a before any consonant except a nasal or
semivowel (r. 191. d). For the changes to which such final n is
subject before other consonants, or to which it subjects them,
see r. 191. e. h.
Pres, srrft (its:, or ir^nsr, irrfi#, *rrfs*f, its?:, itth:) ;
1st praet. or wrt or WF#iT ,
; 2d praet. jtxtt# ( or wt) ; 3d praet. wrsffff
(wrf#Fr, ) or wraT? (*mm, -KHTam ) ; 1st fut. *rrf^sn
or *ntr ; 2d fut. Frrf#xqf? or ; imp. stt| (iT£T, ^"sr? or
*ttsNt, HTfe, HT^TTur) ; pot. irsrnT ; bened. cond. ri
or -.su!W?r. Pass. irw. Caus. 3d praet. 1#? .
Desid. fwf^xrfir or fjmffrf. Freq. or
mwrt.
216
VERBS.
■JI * to join.’
The vowel of this verb takes the Vriddhi substitute before a
consonantal termination having an indicatory q; and before
one beginning with a vowel. It inserts the augment ? (r. 198. c),
before which T is changed to ^ft, and that becomes ’!P^.
Pres. Tnfw (qq:, qqfqr, qrfq, qffq, qq:, q*r:) ; 1st praet.
(’HUrii, qnpq) ; 2d praet. qqrq (qqq rft, qqpqq) ; 3d praet.
wqi^hr (^rqrfqqq); 1st fut. qfqrTT; 2d fut. 'qfqtqfri ; imp. qTjj
(qfq, ■gr^rf^T) ; pot. qqrTr; bened. qqr^; cond. 'srqfqrqff. Pass,
qqq. Caus. qiqqfrf. Desid. qqqfq or qqfqqfq. Freq. qtqqw,
qlqqtfff or qrqfffT.
So qj ‘ to sneeze,’ ‘ to whet’ or * sharpen,’ tj ‘ to praise,’
•sq ‘ to distil’ or ‘ drop ;’ which all take Other verbs in q
are conjugated in the same manner, except that they do not
take as, q ‘to coo’ or ‘sound;’ 1st fut. «frfrT, 2d fut. qpqfq,
3d praet. ^4iqTrt (^<*lMq) : ^ ‘ to assail ;’ sftqT, srtTqfw, wiqb^:
q ‘ to bring forth,’ ‘ to be rich ;’ qfqT, qYtqfw, See
also F and q.
^ ‘ to sound.’
This verb optionally prefixes ^ to any termination beginning
with a consonant in the conjugational tenses. It also takes
Pres. ufiT or (^"?r: or Tqbr:, ^rfq or 13) Cm) ; 1st praet.
^TUTT or qqqftf;; 2d praet. (^qq:) ; 3d praet.
(qnjfWT ) ; 1st fut. TfqTTT ; 2d fut. Tfqarffl- ; imp. tnr or ;
pot. ^qTW or T^hTTTT; bened. qqTTT ; cond. ^nfqqr^. Pass.
Caus. tiqqfrT. Desid. ^xfqqfir. Freq. ^feqw, CllXlfri, ddfir.
^ ‘ to weep.’
This is the leading root of the class ^ 1 (r. 216. d).
Pres, rrf^fw (^f^rr:, ^fqr) ; 1st praet. ^PCt^rT or mfcjbr
(q^fri, or ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
or (qrdf^qq); 1st fut. df^wT; 2d fut.
rrf^qfff; imp. TTf^q ; pot. bened. cond.
. Pass. Caus. ib»qfq; 3d praet.
Desid. ^P^qfrf. Freq. Cl^MTrf, or
SECOND CONJUGATION.
217
fFTi? ‘ to lick.’
See i’. 19 1. k. Where the final is changed to Z, and one z
has been rejected, the radical vowel, if not changed to the
Guna letter, is made long. In the third praeterite the termi-
nations of the first are used, with 7T prefixed (second class, 3.
p. 132). In the Atmane-pada the 7T may be rejected before
the consonants : see Pjr.
Pres, isfz {zstz:, nra, 73b?:, fedf:, fosn), 75^
(fbrer, «^) ; 1 st praet. wvz zr&?, ^ra?),
; 2d praet. fefet ; 3d praet. ^fps^jiT,
Tsf&si'H or ; 1st fut. ^7; 2d fut. ^reqfrT ; imp. $5 Z
(rftrz), (fc5^); pot. foi?nw, fbrfbr ; bened. fc^JTlT,
cond. -TT. Pass. Caus. Desid.
-7T. Freq. Wfr^rflT, HT>5?TfrT or
‘ to speak.’
The final becomes before any consonant, except a semi-
vowel or nasal (r. 191. c). In the non-conjugational tenses,
in which this verb is substituted for 17, it may take the
Atmane-pada. The third person plural of the present and
imperative is wanting. In the third praeterite, '3‘, convertible
to wt, is substituted for the radical vowel ; the tense is
formed with the affixes of the first praeterite, with prefixed
(second class, 2. p. 132). Like most verbs beginning with %
it substitutes ^ for the initial in the second praeterite and
before xj.
Pres. (^i*., xrfsf, Tpejr, ^7:, TxJt:) ; 1st praet.
(w^i, -.77^, ; 2d praet.
^nr:, Zr%:), ; 3d praet. (*VMrfi,
’HTffig) ; 1st fut. ; 2d fut. Wlffl -W ; imp.
W3I (xrfht) ; pot. ^srmr; bened. 7vqr?r, zzftz ; cond. -rf.
Pass, Caus. 7r-7trffT. Desid. Freq. xrRvqw,
^TTfei.
cT5I 4 to subdue,’ 4 to desire.’
The final is changed to it (r. 191./), and to Z, where the
terminations have no mute tj, or where ^ is not inserted.
f f
218
VERBS.
Pres. 'Erf? ("TO:, Tf^r) ; ist praet. (wi, w?PT,
^7, to?, ) ; 2d praet. '3PTr$T ('anjnr.) ; 3d praet. ssRisOrf
or TO-oOrf ; ist fut. Tfwr; 2d fut. ^fyurfiT; imp. ^ (TTfe,
W^iTfrf) ; pot. T^HTfr ; bened. TSTTFr ; cond. ?Rf$|UTrf . Pass.
Caus. wr^nrfTT. Desid. fERf^ITfw. Freq. ehetr^.
f^T ‘ to know.’
This verb is anomalous in some respects. In the present
tense it admits the terminations of the second praeterite, with-
out the reduplication, as well as those of the present. It
optionally forms the second praeterite with the auxiliary verbs
(r. 196. c), and the imperative with For the second and
third persons singular of the first praeterite, see r. 191.^.
Pres. irf% or i^ (finr. or R7HT or rf:, or
or fET^:, Tetr or f^, iffisi or frg'*. or fR*r, firm or
fV?T) ; ist praet. WiT or (w, ’srfET?:, TO, e«r?, or ^:) ;
2d praet. fR? (firfE^), f^fmTFT, ; 3d praet.
ist fut. ^fijrn ; 2d fut. iff^mfiT; imp. or ;
pot. fwnt ; bened. fwr^ (fErerrerf) ; cond. Pass.
iWff. Caus. Desid. Freq. Vf^ilrf,
With TOT prefixed, it takes the Atmane-pada, as rffirif ; in
the third person plural of the present, first praeterite, and impe-
rative, t. may be added to the final, as or rffr^Tf, &c.
rfl ‘ to go,’ &c.
According to some authorities, is not substituted for the
radical before a vowel ; the change is that of Sandhi only.
Pres. VfrT (rfhT:, T>w) ; ist praet. est? (rrtr or etoht ) ;
2d praet. fWR (rffro: or Itotot:); 3d praet. ’aTrfrfr; ist fut.
inn ; 2d fut. ^EqfrT ; imp. ; pot. and bened. rfhtTr^; cond.
TORTrr . Pass, rff-qw. Caus. TOEnrfrT. Desid. fWfafir. Freq.
^hr?, or
The verb has many meanings ; as, ‘ to throw,’ ‘ to eat,’ ‘ to
conceive,5 &c. In the latter, the causal, ‘ to impregnate,’ is
Ernrefir or etruitt
SECOND CONJUGATION. 219
qqft, a synonymous verb, is similarly inflected ; but in the
Xtmane-pada : Pres. (qa%, &c.
3Tra (3TTW) * to bless,’ ‘ to teach.’
The vowel is changed to ^ before terminations beginning
with consonants which have not a mute q in the Parasmai-
pada. For the change of the final, see r. 191.^': see also ^qrm.
Pres, 3TT% (fwb TJTTnffr), 3T% (stttttt) ; 1st praet. visnw
(*?f9iyi, or q^iTT^), ; 2d praet. 9131m, 31 9j > ft ;
3d praet. qrf^iqw ( qrfijrqq), q?9iTftnnT ( q?3nfaqq ), ^rurrfoj?
(qr^irftrfq) ; 1st fut. 3nftrrTT; 2d fut. 3rrftnqf?r -ft ; imp. 3tmj
(3rrfq), 3rmn; pot. f^ronq, 3m% ; bened. fTitqrrT, 3rrftn%;
cond. iW3llfauj7T -it. Pass, f^jtqft. Caus. 3TTCTqfft. Desid.
fwrftnrfrT. Freq. irnjpqft, msrnftfft or 311311%.
In the sense of * blessing,’ qrr is usually prefixed, qTT3i% or
qrrfinft ; for, according to some, the vowel is altered in the
Xtmane-pada also.
5ft (5ft^) ‘ to sleep.’
This verb changes the final to the Guna element i? in all
the tenses except the second praeterite. q before a vowel
becomes q?q, except in the plurals of the present, first prae-
terite, and imperative, where n is inserted before the termina-
tions from which the nasal has been rejected. The verb
inserts ^ (r. 198. c ).
Pres. 3m (3ntT7r, 3fcft, 3m, 31 jft, 3TU, 3lqft, ftqft) ; 1st praet.
qr^ftr (^rjrnr) ; 2d praet. fstyq (fTTljqTft, fijTfrqT) ; 3d praet.
’N3lfqy (qrsifqfq) ; 1st fut. 3rfqfTT ; 2d fut. 3ifqtqq ; imp. ffflT
(3iqT7TT, 3TT?ri) ; pot. 3Pftw ; bened. 3tfqqte. Pass. 3nqft. Caus.
3TTqqfrT. Desid. f^fqqft. Freq. 3TT3r*qft, wfw-
qm ‘ to breathe.’
This belongs to the class (r. 216. d), inserting ^ before
the consonantal terminations of the conjugational tenses, except
q ; or q? or ^ before one consisting of a single consonant. It
does not take Vriddhi in the third praeterite by special rule
(r. 197. i).
F f 2
220
VERBS.
Pres. TgfftflT; 1st praet. --S vj dl H or ssm«7T; 2d prat. srgnt ;
3d praet. ’'ngTflir; 1st fut. •jgftnTT ; 2d fut. Tgftrnjffr ; imp. Tgftnr ;
pot. and bened. ; cond. . Pass. TgrirH'. Cans.
^grairflT. Desid. Freq. TTT^TCiTt. SWR3.
3 (’5T3-) ‘ to bring forth,’ as a child.
The verb optionally admits It takes 3^ before all vowel
terminations, even those of the first pers. imper., and Guna
before before which ^ft becomes ^T3.
Pres. (^^TW, tThTT, tot) ; 1st praet. ^njir ; 2d praet. tott ;
3d praet. wwfV? or -»sTfte (TOrfqfiq or ^Trtftr); 1st fut. ^Vm,
jrPTffT ; 2d fut. firctTt, Ttfrarff ; imp. wri (tozt, TOT, totr^) ;
pot. Trqftt ; bened. TOtf?, ; cond. ^TffNrT, ’rorfrcnT.
Pass. tor ; 3d praet. ^rarfa. Caus. TOTOrfiT ; 3d praet.
Desid. totctttt -tt. Freq. ttItor, tthttHtt or tow* *.
o Cs 1 Cv
F (|»t) ‘ to praise.’
This optionally admits ^ before the consonants of the con-
jugational tenses, except 3 ; otherwise it takes the Vriddhi
form ; see tt. Before the terminations rejecting n, 3 becomes
the Guna TO ; before vowels and ^ in the inflexions not reject-
ing Tj, 33 is substituted. It admits the augment ^ in the
third praterite, Parasmai-pada.
Pres, writ or wtffiit, or ; 1st prat. TOTOiT or
TOTOffrr, or TOtT3Ttt ; 2d prat. 3FI3 TT173 ; 3d prat.
(toftirw), TOffr? (TOFfrfq) ; ist fut. tort; 2d fut.
wrorfiT -3 ; imp. ww or TO3ht, tottt, TO3ftrr ; pot. stwt, ttotItt ;
bened. ttotr, TOflft? ; cond. ^TOTR*; -3. Pass. TO33. Caus.
HTWiT. Desid. 353T3 -TT. Freq. ffTvqK, 3T2TT3.
*33 ‘ to sleep.’
A verb of the class (r. 216. d ), inserting The vowel
3 is substituted for the semivowel in the second praterite in
the reduplicate syllable, and before the vowel terminations in
the radical syllable also. Before the 3 of the benedictive and
passive and frequentative the same change occurs, and in the
third praterite of the causal.
THIRD CONJUGATION.
221
Pres, ^fxrfrr ; ist praet. or Tfr^rtfh^ ; 2d praet. ttetr
HW.) ; 3d praet. ;
1st fut. w ; 2d fut. ^rcRffiT ; imp. pot. Frarnr; bened.
H'orrfT ; cond. Pass. hutti. Caus. T^rRtrfrT ; 3d praet.
-NTmcj'FT . Desid. HtTWif?. Freq. HTUTinr HT^^ftfrr or Trr^fcr.
^ ‘ to kill.’
The final is rejected before the terminations of the conjuga-
tional tenses beginning with any consonant except a nasal or
a semivowel, and not having an indicatory 17. In the same
tenses and second praeterite ttvt is substituted for the root,
which becomes JT, before a vowel termination not having a
mute 17. if is substituted for the root in the second person
singular of the imperative. In the benedictive and third
praeterite is substituted ; Tj'JT is substituted in some tenses
of the passive, in the desiderative and frequentative modes ;
and ■srnr is substituted in the causal. takes 5 in the
\ \ '
second future and conditional in the active voice : tjtt admits
the augment in both futures, conditional, and third praeterite
of the passive, sjv also takes the augment
Pres. irfa, ff^r) ; 1st praet. (^r?7rf,
'STJTT, ■'■X? «i , ^1? qn ) ; 2d praet. -3T^TT'?T ( ai n t, *nrf»T*7 or
inr^7) ; 3d praet. (*T7fvsr, ; 1st fut. ^TT ; 2d fut.
; imp. ^ (fTTR, ; pot. bened.
WWfT ; cond. 'ss^fquTTT . Pass. pres, jnJJTr ; 3d praet. ’'TT'fu or
or or ^rrfiquTrnj ; ist fut. ?^tt or
Trrfmn ; 2d fut. f fi?pi7W or xrrfa^TW ; bened. or Trrf^pffg.
Caus. imntffT ; 3d praet. ^iftwrr. Desid. finTTCTfa'. Freq.
W^JTT or vrjfinTf, WWlffT or vNfo or or vhrfff.
Third Conjugation.
217. The characteristic peculiarity of this conjugation is
the reduplication of the radical syllable before the terminations
of the conjugational tenses.
a. The reduplication follows the rules laid down for the
222
VERBS.
reduplication of the second praeterite (r. 194), with occasional
exceptions, which may be regarded as in some degree peculiar
to the verbs to which they apply.
b. A single substitutes a following a consonant, in
the reduplication ; as, ‘ to go,’ c to nourish,’ fwf#.
c. A medial ^ substitutes the Guna letter in the reduplicate
syllable ; as, frJT ‘ to discriminate,’
d. The verbs follow the general rule of substituting the
Guna letter for a medial or final vowel before the terminations
which have an indicatory 17, and a final vowel is also similarly
changed before in the first preterite.
e. The terminations are unaltered, except those of the
third person plural, present and imperative, which reject ff ;
and the third person plural of the first praeterite, which sub-
stitutes 'JK for The compound form of the second
praeterite is optionally used in four verbs, vft, jft, and
f. The model of the class is ? ‘ to sacrifice ;’ the only
peculiarities in the inflexion of which are the optional change
of the vowel to the semivowel before the terminations of the
first person dual and plural of the present tense, and the substi-
tution of fv for f? in the imperative. It is thus inflected in
the conjugational tenses :
Present, ‘ I sacrifice,’ &c.
O
W* or W
or jpr:
with
IT1
w^rfrr
W*
First praeterite, ‘ I sacrificed,’ &c.
’HWrT
Imperative, f May I sacrifice,' &c.
^sTpy Tj-?rf W?rT
00 i A J va
^ ^
THIRD CONJUGATION.
223
Potential, c I may sacrifice,’ &c.
W*™
IT'n:
If^TTT ^^TTH ^g:
In the non-conjugational tenses the reduplication does not
take place, except where required by general rules.
2d praet. or 3d praet. ('^nrRH) ;
1st fut. ^ViTT ; 2d fut. ^rVarfiT ; bened. cond. .
Pass. Cans. ^R^frT. Desid. jRnfrt. Freq.
^ ‘ to go.’
is substituted for the root in the reduplication. The
verb rarely occurs in this form, except in the Vedas. In the
first and second persons of the first praeterite, the final of the
conjunct having been rejected, the 7; of the Guna substitute
for or becomes Visarga.
Pres. ^ 1st praet. ihq: ; imp. ^xr# ; pot.
V[*K-
For the other forms, see % p. 168.
*FT c to produce.’
Before terminations beginning with consonants not con-
taining an indicatory tj, the vowel of this verb is made long ;
and before a termination beginning with a vowel not com-
prising it, the medial radical is rejected. In the third
praeterite the vowel is optionally long (r. 197. i). See sTrf,
fourth conjugation.
Pres. (^nTTH:, »T$rffT); 1st praet.
TO'.); 2d praet. 'srsTR (Wg:, *Tsr:); 3d praet. ^nrRhr or
(^»nfVrqiT or ^TrrfxPR ) ; 1st fut. ^TfaiTT ; 2d fut. ;
imp. ( t| Tt 1 ht, ^nrrfV) j pot. ^ 1 ri ; bened. »TRT7^ or
TrrqTrT ; cond. W5TRxxn^. Pass, Caus. ^rnrxrnr. Desid.
ftnTRRfff. Freq. *T3vii7r or STRmffi, or or ^rSTn'tfR',
224
VERBS.
fto^T (ftrfsT^) ‘ to cleanse.’
This takes both Padas, and in the reduplication changes ^
to 7?; see ftiTTlT, second conjugation, p. 212.
Pres, ; 1st praet. ;
2d praet. fvRTT (fifin' srg:), frfftT% ; 3d praet. vf^pifiTT ) or
^fi?rsnT ; 1st fut. vn$T ; 2d fut. H'<Hlfri ;
imp. ; pot. %f*T^rr^5 ; bened. fVn^nr,
fjTBjte ; cond. -7T. Pass. f?rsiw. Caus. ^ipTfw. Desid.
fpR^jfw. Freq. or %%%
V (^) ‘ to give.’
This drops ^tt before all the terminations of the conjuga-
tional tenses not containing an indicatory tj, making conse-
quently, as repeated, In the second person singular of
the imperative it substitutes ^ for the reduplicated verb. It
takes both Padas. It is unnecessary to give more than the
conjugational tenses, as the rest are the same as those of ^T,
first conjugation, p. 180.
Pres. (^tn, <prf?r), ; 1st praet. %TTP, 1 H (w;wi, ^5:),
; imp. (<hct, %f%), <^) ; Pot- ^mr,
VT (VT»r) ‘ to have’ or ‘hold.’
This is inflected like the preceding, but the initial is
unchanged before a termination beginning with any consonant
except a nasal, a semivowel, or fr, which does not contain an
indicatory 17. The other tenses are analogous to those of <*T,
first conjugation.
Pi •es. ^VTfrr (xrs:, ^wr.) vir 1st praet. ^h«*vih ,
7HVW; 2d praet. <>vr, 3d praet. mT^, ’SfVrT or ;
1st fut. vrnrr; 2d fut. vmrfiT ; imp. T^rnr (vf%), vwf (xn^r) ;
pot. <*WiT, Tpfhr; bened. *nrra\ VTTfte; cond. WPRTT^ -TT. Pass.
vfarK. Caus. UTxrqfrl. Desid. ftnwfiT Freq.
or ^TVlfiT.
HU 4 to shine.’
Before a termination beginning with a vowel not containing
a mute 17, this verb, like rejects the medial vowel : nr being
THIRD CONJUGATION.
225
then conjoined with necessarily becomes xt (r. 7. d: see
also, for the changes of *T, r. 191.^).
Pres. ■qufiFT xirafiT) ; 1st praet. w^vr: *rxw:,
^h;) ; 2d praet. •swra ; 3d praet. wrrrbr; 1st fut. HftnrT ;
2d fut. HftranfT ; imp. (wm, ^vrmf?r) ; pot.
■swwrw; bened. H^trnr ; cond. xs^ftranr. Pass. hthw. Caus.
HTTTqfrT. Desid. f^HTftmfw. Freq.
nt ‘ to fear.’
This may make the vowel before a termination beginning
with a consonant, and not containing an indicatory xj, short. It
optionally takes the compound form of the second praeterite.
Pres, (f^wfbr. or fisrfirw:, f^«rfTr) ; 1st praet.
( ^^TTwlTn or wf^fvrfrr, ^rfspr^:) ; 2d praet. fwR ( ) or
faHHimahK ; 3d praet. ^THifbT (^WT, ; 1st fut. itin ;
2d fut. itxqfrT ; imp. f%ifiT (f^vfhrr or fsrfiTrri) ; pot. fcjdluTK,
fVftrxrnr ; bened. vrfarnt; cond. ^THunr. Pass, vfhiw. Caus.
HTXfqfff. vtptxttt, htxtxttt or vffanriT. Desid. fsrHhrfw. Freq.
xwftfrt or -^rfiT.
( >pr ) ‘ to nourish’ or 4 support.’
^ is the vowel of reduplication. In the second and third
persons of the first praeterite, the vowel having been changed
to the Guna ^n;, the termination, as the final of a conjunct
consonant, is rejected (r. 35), leaving t, which becomes Yisarga
(r. 39)-
Pres, fiwfl? (faHw:, fisrufft) ; 1st praet. (xsfisnjiri,
; imp. ftwf ; pot. f^jxmr .
The other tenses are the same as those of *r of the first
t
conjugation, p. 186.
*TT (*TT^) ‘ to measure.’
This verb, ‘ to go,’ and ‘ to abandon,’ drop their final
vowel before a termination beginning with a vowel, and not
containing an indicatory xj : before such a termination begin-
ning with a consonant, they change it to The vowel of
reduplication is ?.
226
VERBS.
Pres. fajftTf (fmRTF, iWff) ; ist praet. vrfarfiir (^rfwin, ^mn?) ;
2d praet. ; 3d praet. (wfl) ; ist fut. miTT ; 2d fut.
HTW; imp. fhnW ; pot. Oh mItt ; bened. HTTrlF ; cond. wrnriT.
Pass. iffaiF. Caus. h rM-M fr( -F ; 3d praet. ^THfoxi h -f. Desid.
fniUTF -F. Freq. mfrq-ff, FTHTfF or ITIFTTF.
TT»f (f^f>TT) ‘to discriminate.’
The vowel takes the Guna substitute in the reduplicate
syllable. For the effect of the Anubandha, see p. 107 ; and
for the changes of the final, r. 191. c.
Pres. T^rfiaFi wft, ftPr, wfrg:, ;
ist praet. (’spffriF, ^r=lF:, ; 2d praet. f^TiT;
3d praet. ■sPmfF (^^T, wejf), ’TRUrf ; ist fut.
irsT ; 2d fut. T?t?TF ; imp. (%fVffv, warrfjr) ; pot. %fFwnr ;
bened. fVsiTF ; cond. Pass, Caus. FipifiT.
Desid. f'-TK«)frT. Freq. ^Pfiff, FFfli.
fFF ‘ to surround.’
Pres. fftf, FfFF ; ist praet. ftfff, 'FFTFF ; 2d praet. fFFF,
Pm nm ; 3d praet. wsflrf (we^f), 'stff (^-Tra) ; ist fut. fft;
2d fut. wrfw -if ; imp. ffi*, FfFFT ; pot. ^ P^iqTF, FfFFfF ;
bened. P^uilri, f^F ; cond. FTF^nr -IT. Pass. froiF. Caus.
FFtrfF. Desid. fMFSjfF. Freq. fP^uh, FFfF.
^ ‘ to go.’
See F above.
C
Pres, fwf# ; ist praet. ; 2d praet. ffk; 3d praet.
'Htl ifiTrT or ist fut. F#T; 2d fut. FfcqpF ; imp. fwf ;
pot. fFFiUrf ; bened. fFFTF ; cond. %SFfcujF . Pass. fiyiiH.
Caus. FKuPri. Desid. ftreftftTF. Freq. ffThh, wft.
fT (fT^) ‘ to go.’
See FT above.
Pres. ; ist praet. ^rfw^fir ; 2d praet. art; 3d praet.
’Ffrer ; ist fut. ftft; 2d fut. fuff ; imp. fsr^rhrf ; pot. PffIf;
bened. -?nftF ; cond. ^ttff. Pass. Caus. FiuqfiT.
Desid. Pfl^ilUrt. Freq. tTTFTFF, STTFTfF or mFfF.
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
227
fT ‘ to abandon.’
The Anubandha ojj is to distinguish this root from the
preceding. The reduplicate is regular in other respects. The
inflexion is analogous to that of HT. In the second person
singular of the imperative, or "STifl is optionally substituted
for the root : wr is dropped before the of the potential.
Pres. *r?TflT ■sr^rfrr) ; ist praet. 2d praet. irft ;
3d praet. ; ist fut. ^TrTT ; 2d fut. ?rRTf?r; imp. '3T?Tff
or »r?Tf?) ; pot. 1 H ; bened. t^TTrf; cond.
Pass. Caus. 3d praet. Desid.
Freq. ^Rrhrw, or sTT^lfw.
jft ‘ to be ashamed.’
Pres. f>TfffT ; ist praet. 2d praet.
jffTxr or 3d praet. '^tfnftrT ; ist fut. fWT; 2d fut.
imp. finhT; pot. ftnfhrnj4 bened. frhn»T; cond. UT^tq-rf .
Pass. |rhq?r. Caus. Desid. ftrilqfV. Freq. WfrhiTT,
5T?41frf or
N. B. The verbs of this conjugation are mostly restricted
to the Vedas in the forms which they derive from the
conjugation.
Fourth Conjugation.
218. The syllable it, technically termed ^ift, is interposed
between the inflective base and inflectional terminations of the
conjugational tenses.
a. The terminations of the conjugational tenses are the same
in this as in the first conjugation (r. 172. 4).
b. Before it, a radical vowel is not capable of a Guna
substitute (r. 186), and a consonant is unchanged.
c. The terminations of the first praeterite are substituted
for those of the third in the Parasmai-pada, and sometimes
in the Atmane-pada, after verbs belonging to the class ^rrf^
or T»> &c. ; comprehending nearly a third of the whole
conjugation.
g g 2
228
VERBS.
d. A final is changed to and a final ^ is rejected,
before is changed to ^rr before other terminations.
e. The class of roots called SRTfc or &c. — all of which,
except ‘ to be glad’ or ‘ intoxicated,’ end with n — make a
medial ^ long.
/. Verbs which end with ^ or usually prolong a medial
-3‘, c5-
g. Any other changes are special. The verbs of this class
are somewhat numerous : most of them are to be found in
other conjugations, sometimes in the same, sometimes in dif-
ferent acceptations, when the non-conjugational tenses often
adopt different modes of inflexion.
h. The model of the class is (f^) ‘ to play,’ ‘ to shine,’
&c., which by the clause/, above, becomes in the conju-
gational tenses.
Present tense, ‘ I play,’ &c.
s’Nre: rffarm:
<?Nrjr. <rNrsT
^Nnr.
First praeterite, e I played,’ &c.
^rfNnR
^fNir sue! am
Imperative, ‘ May I play,’ &c.
cfNi
Potential, ‘ I may play,’ &c.
^■rfi
There are no peculiarities in the non-conjugational tenses.
In the desiderative there are three forms (r. 21 1 ./): in the
frequentative, rejecting tj, the final is changed to t.
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
229
2d praet. ; 3d praet. ) ; 1st fut.
?f^rTT ; 2d fut. ^fir^lffT; bened. (fhtrnr ; cond. W^franr. Pass.
^Nrff. Caus. Desid. f^feqfrf, f^fqqfw or f^pqfrr or
5^5frT. Freq. ^Wff, ?f^^frr or rarfff.
*ra (^m) ‘ to throw.’
This is a verb of the class wrf? (r. 218. c), and subjoins vr
to the final in the third praeterite.
Pres. ^mrfrT ; 1st praet. ^HiryrT ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
('^TTWirr, 'smsm); 1st fut. ^pHriT ; 2d fut. ^rpR'crfft ; imp.
^snRTiT; pot. ; bened. cond. 'mftranr. Pass.
Caus. ^rraqfrf. Desid. *rfafifTqfrT.
t ‘ to g°-’
With the augment the initial becomes
Pres, frre; 1st praet. ttutt ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet. itw;
1st fut. inn ; 2d fut. inqff ; imp. ; pot. ; bened.
; cond. q’anr. Pass, fxrff.
For the derivative forms, see second conjugation,
to increase.’
The verb belongs to the class qqtfiT.
Pres, ^wrfir; 1st praet. ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
mirt; 1 st fut. ^rfikbn; 2d fut. ^fitTarflT; imp. ^w?f ; pot.
bened. ^tqirf ; cond. wfvsr?T . Pass. qjwrff. Caus.
^f^rnr. Desid. ^rff fvqfn or frfrfrt.
‘ to throw’ or * send.’
Pres, ffcnqfiT ; 1st praet. : 2d praet. fi^q ; 3d praet.
^mqfbr ; 1st fut. ‘^rsT ; 2d fut. mRjf?r ; imp. fs^nr ; pot. fisp^TT ;
bened. fwnrnt; cond. ^nsp*qw. Pass. Caus. ^rq^frt.
Desid. fiqfgfqrflT. Freq. ^ Pai'^rf,
tFT (*nfl) ‘ to be born.’
This verb is changed to *TT before the conjugational tenses :
in the second praeterite the penultimate is rejected (r. 195./').
Pres. *rnrff ; 1st praet. ’Hirmrf ; 2d praet. in? ; 3d praet. ;
230
VERBS.
i st fut. 'JTfTrn ; 2d fut. jTfVpqw ; imp. ^TT'q'fl i ; pot. *TTOfT; bened.
RfrNfa ; cond. ’3nrf?r&irf.
For the rest, see ir, third conjugation.
( jR) * to grow old/
■§^ is substituted for the radical (r. 218. d). The verb
optionally substitutes f for the reduplication of the second
praeterite ; takes optionally the terminations of the first pre-
terite for those of the third ; and elongates the augment ^ in
the futures and conditional.
Pres, ■jfldjflf ; 1st praet. 2d praet. 1RTT (if jRrit,
TOH, ; 3d praet. ^irtt ; 1st fut. a* fan,
vjO H [ ; 2d fut. ^rtx^frr, ^RTTrrffT ; imp. jfhzhr; pot. aflufrf : hened.
TfcEfTTT; cond. vnrO'vtrf. Pass, afrahr. Caus. rotht,
aTK'qfff. Desid. fsnrfbrfrT, firoilFftT, ftnftifiT. Freq.
RTWft.
^ (^) ‘ to fly.’
Although a monosyllable ending in a vowel, this verb takes
the augment ^ (r. 198. c).
Pres. Tfarff; 1st praet. 'srsfanr ; 2d praet. f^qr (fijfijqq) ; 3d
praet. •'Hdfqy ; 1 st fut. Tfarn ; 2d fut. Tftrarff ; imp. ihnrr ; pot.
; bened. 'sfintflv ; cond. ^Tftrnnr. Pass. ^HTT. Caus.
TnrqfrT. Desid. fiTftntw. Freq. ^Ttffnr, T?fw.
It is also a verb of the first conjugation ; Tiffi, ^n^TTT, TqTTT,
^w.
Tjnjr (W3t) ‘ to perish.’
It belongs to the class and may in the third praeterite
change to tt. It inserts a nasal before any consonant except
a nasal or semivowel, and optionally inserts ^ in the futures,
conditional, and desiderative, when the nasal is not prefixed to
the sibilant.
Pres. ; 1st praet. 2d praet. 7TTOT %3T:,
nlSR, TO); 3d praet. ; 1st fut.
; 2d fut. TOrf?T, RTST'orffl' ; imp. RSUH ; pot. TOHT; bened.
cond. ^TOITT or ^rPshhw. Pass. tor. Caus. vrrsiqfiT.
Desid. farofw, fTOfsnrfTT. Freq. RRW, RTTOlfw, HRfF.
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
231
qrjr * to bind.’
The final is changed to v, instead of ^ (r. 191. k), which
undergoes no other change than conversion to before a soft,
and n before a hard consonant, by the rules of Sandhi. After
V, the IT and vj of a termination become V, also of ^T, TsrT?T, &c.,
the sibilant being rejected (r. 190./". (/). It takes both Padas.
Pres. vr^fiT ; 1st praet. >5H^itt -IT; 2d praet. vpTT? (*T*T"Sr
or %?*:), if? ; 3d praet. ^TTriftrr (^RT^T, ),
( -TT^TrH I H i, wfrTt) ; 1st fut. ^TjJT ; 2d fut. fTWfrT -W ; imp. TOW
-ITT ; pot. TOTT , TOW ; bened. TOTW, 'H rtfls ; cond. ^TOTW -it.
Pass. tow. Caus. WTW^iT- Desid. fTORfw -w. Freq. WTTOff>
TOTfe.
TT*T £ to heat,’ ‘ to perform penance.’
Pres. wntw ; 1st praet. ^TWOTW ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet. ’STTTST
('Huftn) ; 1st fut. wut; 2d fut. inR'fr; imp. wwi; pot. iranr ;
bened. H1# ; cond. WWTIT. Pass. Tnqw. Caus. WTqqfw.
Desid. fwwRw. Freq. wttow, tflrifN.
ittt ‘ to satisfy,’ ‘ to be satisfied.’
As belonging to the class it should take the form of
the third praeterite which that class requires ; and as a verb
of the fourth conjugation (p. 136), it should not insert In
both respects, however, it offers optional deviations. It may
be conjugated also in the fifth, sixth, and tenth conjugations, to
which the different forms should perhaps be restricted : they
are always, however, given together in this conjugation.
Pres. Tpifrf ; 1st praet. ^TOTT ; 2d praet. wwrf (TTWriW:, WWiTO,
WTOT, WWR); 3d praet. *?WTTW, ^tttjTtt (TOFqWw), WPtfFiT
Ohhc^h ), ^cTTwfiir (wrwm) ; 1st fut. w&t, pnrr, wfqwT; 2d fut.
wmffw, ar^qfw, wfrofw; imp. tow ; pot. Tjwfrr ; bened. wonw ;
cond. WCRW, ^irw, wfrow. Pass. ^rqw. Caus. WTOffT.
Desid. twwwTtw, fwwfqwfw. Freq. wflfliqw, wiftplfw,
rtOnfw.
ITT, * to be proud,’ is similarly conjugated.
232
VERBS.
^ ‘ to decay.’
This root changes its final to ^ in the non-conjugational
tenses, except in the second praeterite, in which it inserts it.
Pres, s'farff ; ist praet. ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
^TCT (vr?inr) ; ist fut. <rnrr; 2d fut. <577*^ ; imp. ^frnn ; pot.
<fRf?T ; bened. ; cond. ^T^TTTTiT. Caus. ^TiPTfiT. Desid.
firflqTT or fir?nr?r. Freq. ^tttt, or %?fw.
So jfiir ‘ to injure,’ and ‘ to embrace,’ except in the
second praeterite, in which rff makes ; and 75I, fp^T ; the
latter also takes two forms in the other non-conjugational
tenses ; as, ; TSTTT, HT7TT ; T^OTff, TSTWff ; ^rte,
; and or
‘ to shine.’
This verb optionally inflects the third person of the third
praeterite like the same in the passive voice : see "arm, p. 184.
Pres. <TfaTW; ist praet. ^rffanr ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
or vr^fxT ; ist fut. ^Ifwr ; 2d fut. <ftftrnnr ; imp. ^nr?rf ;
pot. ^tunr ; bened. (ffxnfte ; cond. ^Fftfq-ariT. Caus. Tfttnrfw.
Desid. Freq. TpffrftfiT or
4 to oppress,’ ‘ to injure.’
This optionally substitutes ■£! or 3f for the final (r. 191. k).
In the third praeterite it takes the form of the first, as belong-
ing to the class T^TTf?, and also optionally inserts ^ in the
futures, conditional, and desiderative.
Pres. ^rnr; ist praet. ^<r*nT; 2d praet. 3d praet.
vr^Tfr ; ist fut. <fmn, ’5Trr, ; 2d fut. irt^rffr;
imp. TfSTiT; pot. bened. TT^TT K ; cond. ’S?g)fi£'qrT, ,mfrs?l'fT.
Pass. Caus. ^i^uPh. Desid. r^TfftTfrr, Freq.
<rnr*rfr> ^TTftfHr or Tnyrf?.
o » ,
So fun^ ‘ to be kind,’ and tOTsT * to vomit.
tttt ‘ to dance.’
C
This verb optionally omits the augment ^ before TT in the
non-conjugational tenses.
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
233
Pres. Tnufrr ; ist praet. 2d praet. qq#; 3d praet.
■>m H WT n ; 1st fut. qf#qT 5 2d fut. qffjiqfq or Hrttj fii ; imp. T^;
pot. qrqq; bened. HRJ ( rf ; cond. or "qqqqq. Pass,
qiqq. Caus. q#qfiT. Desid. fqqftqfq or fqqFqfrf. Freq.
qffTpqq, qrf^qtfq, qtfqft.
q^ 4 to go.’
This forms the third person singular of the third praeterite
in 3^. It does not take the augment
Pres, 'q^nr ; ist praet. *rq?iq ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet. ^qqrfr
wqqrq, ^ntfrp) ; ist fut. qqr; 2d fut. qiqrq; imp.
q^Tfri ; pot. q#q ; bened. qq#? ; cond. ^rqsqq. Pass. qgq.
Caus. qT^qfw. Desid. fqpRTT. Freq. qiqsrq, qTq^ffq or qiqfq.
qq £ to nourish.’
This is the first verb of a class which in this conjugation
requires the terminations of the first praeterite to be substituted
for those of the third, when the radical vowel is unchanged
(r. 197. 1. p. 134).
Pres. qtqffT ; ist praet. ’'njiqw ; 2d praet. qqfq (w*q:) ;
3d praet. ’Jfqqq (’Rqqrii, ’qqqq); ist fut. qtrr ; 2d fut. qrsqfq ;
imp. qrqq; pot. q'tqw; bened. qtqiq; cond. ■qqfqqq. Pass. qtqq.
Caus. qVqqfq Desid. qqqfq. Freq. qrqq?q, qfqqiflT, qmfi?.
The class qqrf# consists of the following verbs.
W to throw,
qq to assemble,
qjq to increase.
■^q to be angry,
qrq to embrace.
O
to become thin,
qiq to be angry.
to become moist,
to let loose,
qrq to be hungry,
qw to be agitated,
qq to disturb.
nq to be greedy,
qn to let loose.
f?q to throw.
TEPT to hurt.
HT3T to perish,
qq to toss.
3* to hurt,
qq to be pleased.
T* to satisfy or be satisfied.
r[q to thirst.
<?q to toss.
qq to become bad.
h h
234
VERBS.
to oppress or wrong,
xrq to burn.
Vi
r r to fall.
j
qq to weigh,
qq to break.
q?to be perplexed or foolish,
qq to take pains,
qq to disturb,
iq to hurt.
^q to disturb.
^q to be angry.
to roll on the ground.
Hq to be lost.
to covet,
qq to fix.
fqq to convey,
qq to cast off.
vi
Trq to be clean or pure.
Stq to become dry.
f%q to embrace,
fqq to become perfect,
fqrrq to be kind or bland.
to sweat.
^q to rejoice.
Many of these verbs, however, take other forms also in the
third praeterite, as belonging originally perhaps to different
conjugations ; but they are now so blended, that they are
usually placed together under this conjugation, however incon-
sistent with their classification under the head Tjqrf^; see V-
iff ‘ to please’ or ‘ be pleased.’
It is a verb also of the first and ninth conjugations. Before
the terminations of the second praeterite, ^q is substituted for
the final (r. 19 1. a).
Pres, qlqq; 1st praet. qrqhnr ; 2d praet. fqfqq ; 3d praet.
(qmfq) ; 1st fut. snrr; 2d fut. inqq ; imp. qfarrri; pot.
qtqq ; bened. qqfp ; cond. Pass, qlqq. Caus. qTqqfq
or qhnqfk. Desid. fqqtqfrT -7T. Freq. qiflqq, qqqffq, qqfff.
So vfl ‘ to uphold,’ ql ‘ to drink,’ qt e to injure,’ qt ‘ to
choose,’ &c.
qq ‘ to understand.’
This forms the third person singular of the third praeterite
optionally in ^ (see rffq ). When the final is changed by the
rules of Sandhi before a sibilant, q becomes q (r. 191. 1).
Pres. qyiW ; 1 st praet. qtqum ; 2d praet. qqq ; 3d praet.
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
235
or (^flTflnri, 'srrit) ; ist fut. -^t^T ; 2d fut. Hiww;
imp. ^unrr ; pot. ^tzftr ; bened. Hrtfte ; cond. WtenT.
For the other forms, see T* first conjugation, p. 185.
(flfsj) ‘to fall.’
This drops its nasal before xr, and in the third praeterite : it
belongs to the class unify .
Pres. ist praet. W31HT ; 2d praet. =^$1 ; 3d praet.
^WSflrT ; ist fut. Wf^rfTT ; 2d fut. HfyrcrfTT ; imp. ; pot.
bened. iJ^THT; cond. ^wfyrant. Pass.
For the other forms, see Hfl, first conjugation, p. 202.
fl<* ‘ to be mad,’ ‘ to be delighted,’ ‘ to be intoxicated.’
As belonging to the class ^prrfy, the vowel is made long in
the conjugational tenses (r. 218. e).
Pres. JtTHfir ; ist praet. ^UTrafT ; 2d praet. HAT? ; 3d praet.
wnfbt; ist fut. flfynT; 2d fut. Afyurfa; imp. artt ; pot.
mint; bened. srSTTTT ; cond. ^mfyunr. Pass. air. Caus. AT^Afir.
Desid. fWtrqfrT. Freq. Hlfliirf, nTfltrffrr, ATflfw.
‘ to know’ or ‘ to respect.’
Pres. JRTW; ist praet. 2d praet. fl% ; 3d praet. ^SflflT
; ist fut. aatt ; 2d fut. ARff ; imp. rpqiTT ; pot. A'afiT;
bened. njfn? ; cond. "stara. Pass. AfllA. Caus. ATflnfrT. Desid.
fAAAA. Freq. ATflflR, flTflfflT.
■ftr^ (fflfA^T) ‘ to be unctuous.’
This verb takes the Guha substitutes of the vowel in all the
persons of the conjugational tenses. As belonging to the class
iHAtfy (p. 182), it takes the form of the first praeterite in
the third.
Pres. Auffl (a?TTT:, Hirfo) ; 1st praet. ^TAlTfT ; 2d praet. fAAi* ;
3d praet. ; ist fut. Afy AT ; 2d. fut. AfyujfA ; imp. A^ITj ;
pot. flint; bened. fflUTT^ ; cond. ^TAfyunr. Pass. fiRA. Caus.
AAnfA. Desid. fflflf?UTA or fflfflfynfA. Freq. flfiraA. flflfw.
fl? ‘ to be silly,’ ‘ to be bewildered.’
It belongs to the class ijnTfy : for the changes of the final
11 h 2
236
VERBS.
see r. 191. k. 1. It takes ^ optionally in the futures, conditional,
and desiderative.
Pres, ; 1st praet. ; 2d praet. gm? (girlnr. g*tte
or gnil'V'*!, ggf^ or gg^r) ; 3d praet. ^g^g ; 1 st fut. *fmn,
m^r or mf?irr ; 2d fut. mwfK or miirarnt ; imp. g^rg ; pot.
gigg; bened. gang; cond. wrs?nr or wrfVw?T. Pass.
Caus. jfr^frT. Desid. ggfjiMfiT or gmf^frf, ggmff or grfmfiT.
Freq. mg^m, mg?fif7r, hi hi Du or HiHifij.
gv ‘ to fight.’
Pres, gwff ; 1st praet. 'jfguirl ; 2d praet. ggv ; 3d praet.
(^grHMi, ^rgfw) ; 1st fut. in^rr; 2d fut. *frw7r; imp.
gtifirr ; pot. gant ; bened. irtrHfg ; cond. Pass. gapr.
Caus. xffinTf7T. Desid. ggrHH. Freq. xftgnrff, xfrqrfw.
giT, £ to engage in devotion,’ is similarly conjugated : Pres,
giqw ; 3d praet. ^^gs (^gm) ; 1st fut. ifr^T, &c.
4 to colour.’
Pres, ; 1st praet. *n^7T ; imp. t^wt; pot. t5SpT.
The rest as in T&, i&mane-pada, of the first conjugation,
p. 189.
4 to hurt.’
This verb inserts ff in the second praeterite, but optionally
before the augment ^ : it takes ^ optionally in the futures
and conditional. In the third praeterite it belongs to the
class gmOj.
Pres. Txtrf?r; 1st praet. wrapt ; 2d praet.
or txi-, Txfont, T33) ; 3d praet. *r>pt (wrMTri) ; 1st fut. ttvht
or T^rr ; 2d fut. Tfv^rnr or Tj^rfrr ; imp. tap*; pot. ot?; bened.
tumr; cond. ^rcfir&r?r, ^nWrT. Pass. tare. Caus. rpnrfH.
Desid. ftrfvnffT. Freq. TLTtairf, &c.
TTV (UVT) tr. * to propitiate ;’ intr. £to be finished’ or
4 accomplished.’
Pres. uarfrT: 1st praet. WW?T ; 2d praet. xxtv ; 3d praet.
WrHld (Wiw); 1st fut. 2d fut. tiwfif; imp. uaig ;
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
237
pot. TjtflTT; bened. nwH r; cond. ^iiWr) . Pass, uurff- Caus.
TTtnrfTT. Desid. ftwftr or fmrRfrf. Freq. uTT«rn\ &c.
JTUt and in the same senses are similarly conjugated.
75H ‘ to covet.’
It takes ^ optionally in the first future, absolutely in the
second and conditional : it belongs to the class M n l Hi .
Pres. c5*rffT; ist praet. *rF5«rrT; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
ist fut. o>ilsn. ; 2d fiit. c>v1th Pri ; imp. m ;
pot. bened. ; cond. ^TrSTfirnnr . Pass. <^wik. Caus.
rtl^qfri. Desid. ‘tu 11. Freq. cil rti rtTTIT.
‘ to be,’ ‘ to exist.’
Pres. ; ist praet. ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
’*T?r (wfw) ; ist fut. t?tt; 2d fut. wit; imp. f^rsr rrf ; pot.
fqaw ; bened. ; cond. Pass. firaw.
For the rest, see fq<*' ‘ to know,’ second conjugation.
(^T*n) ‘ to pierce’ or ‘ injure.’
This changes the semivowel and following tst to ^ in the
conjugational tenses, and also in the benedictive, and before the
terminations of the second praeterite beginning with vowels.
Pres. frwrfrT; ist praet. ^rfqrwa;; 2d praet. ;
3d praet. ^ajTrtflrf ) ; ist fut. ; 2d fut. isrwfiT ; imp.
pot. fqunr ; bened. fqurnr; cond. Pass, fqwff.
Caus. ^mnrfrT. Desid. fq^qwfrT. Freq. qi=qq1fri, TRrfe.
‘ to be able.’
This is also a root of the fifth conjugation, q. v. According
to some, it may take In the third praeterite it takes option-
ally the forms of the first.
Pres, -w ; ist praet. ^nyi^nr -tt ; 2d praet. ^i^rn*, SHfi ;
3d praet. ^sr^lTT (wfatm ), ;
ist fut. ^iT, ^farTT; 2d fut. mqf7T-W, ?rfq;iqffT -w; imp.
5l^rti ; pot. STSTiT -ft ; bened. ^T'^mT , ■grfqrit-? ; cond.
^SfVWri -TT, ^TfqraiTT -TT. Pass. SPPTff. Caus. TTT^qfiT. Desid.
fwifTT -w. Freq. m^TTr, mspftfw, unpins.
238
VERBS.
um (*Tf) ‘ to be tranquil.’
This is the first of a class of which the vowel is made long
in the conjugational tenses. The third praeterite has two
forms, and ^ is optionally inserted.
Pres. 5TTT*jfiT; Tst praet. ; 2d praet. 3T3TTH ;
3d praet. 'srSTHTT or vT^mlrr ; 1st fut. $rftnTT, TJPfTT ; 2d fut. ?nnxqfiT.
^nqfrt; imp. ; pot. ; bened. cond.
^rs[n?irr. Pass. ^175?^. Caus. sprqffr. Desid. %srfqqfiT, %SfnrfrT.
Freq. 'JITSTWH', UTTSTf^T.
The other roots of this class are,
WJ to be sad. qq to wander or whirl,
qjq to be patient. ^qq to be weary,
qq to be distressed. q** to be mad.
to tame.
f*jq ‘ to embrace,’ ‘ to adhere to.’
In the first sense this verb inserts q before the terminations
of the first praeterite in the third: in any other it does so
optionally. It may also take the ^tmane-pada in the third
praeterite, and ^ in the third person singular. In the sense
of embracing, ’ST is usually prefixed.
Pres. f%Tqfq ; 1st praet. ^TW^nr; 2d praet. f^r'qq ; 3d praet.
^fVgjrr, or ^srfwfq (^ftrsrrrri; ^rfwr:, ;
1st fut. ^FT ; 2d fut. wsqfrT ; imp. fgxqiT ; pot. fgqfiT; bened.
f^xtuTT; cond. ^PSTFfnt. Pass. rgxqq. Caus. 'ifqqfri. Desid.
Freq. 'sra'OTq, fr?rfF.
q? ‘ to bear.’
Pres. qqrfiT ; 1st praet. ’SrqqrrT; 2d praet. TTCTT? ; 3d praet.
(wf?qq); 1st fut. qf^iTT or qf^T ; 2d fut. qfqxqfq ;
imp. qqriT; pot. qqfrt ; bened. qqrTfl ; cond. "qqfVTqq.
For the rest, see qq, first conjugation.
fqq ‘ to be perfect’ or ‘ successful.’
In this conjugation it belongs to the class qinfr.
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
239
Pi •es. fmzrfo ; ist prat. ’HfqttfiT; 3d prat. ^fmnr ; imp.
fnxtrj; pot. ftnflTT.
For the rest, see fqv, first conjugation.
fqq (ft?q) ‘ to sew.’
This makes the vowel long in the conjugational tenses, and
before q.
Pres. TfNjfw ; ist prat. ; 2d prat. fbqq ; 3d prat,
ist fut. qfqin; 2d fut. itfirntflT; imp. *fNnj ; pot.
bened. ^fNqTTT ; cond. Pass, tfNw. Caus.
qqqfir. Desid. fqqfqqfiT, thuum. Freq. qifcqq, qqfftr.
f?q, ‘to eject saliva,’ is similarly conjugated.
it ‘ to bear,’ as children.
C\ 7
Pres, qqq ; ist prat. wtnTrr ; 2d prat. (wq-f^nl) ; 3d
prat. (wtfq), wfqs (^rafrfa) ; ist fut. TftrTT, qfqffT ; 2d
fut. *fhqw, wfcnqw ; imp. mnrf ; pot. TrcfiT ; bened. qtqf? ; cond.
•*mTuiri, ■^rttVcth'. Pass, mrfr ; ist fut. HTfwr; 3d prat. -.Munq.
For the other forms, see q first conjugation, and q second
conjugation.
ql ‘ to destroy.’
Verbs ending in ’'ft lose it before the q of this conjugation
(r. 218. d) : in other tenses is substituted for the final.
There are two forms in the third praterite.
Pres. RjfirT; ist prat. ’SREflT; 2d prat, ttht (qw:, qftrq) ;
3d prat, or ('srarfqqq ) ; 1st fut. qnn; 2d fut.
TrrrqffT ; imp. ; pot. Tqw ; bened. qqiW ; cond. ’SRTTRJ'fT .
Pass. qtqq. Caus. qrtnrfTT. Desid. fqqmfw. Freq. infrqw,
qmrfiT or mirffi.
In like manner are conjugated ’Sfl ‘ to cut,’ <ft 4 to cut,’ and
?fr * to pare.’ has but one form, ^TTTrr, in the third praterite.
qq 4 to abandon.’
For the changes of the final, see r. 191. d: see also qq,
p. 188.
Pres, qqjw ; ist prat, qqqnr ; 2d prat. qqq (qqfqq) ;
240
VERBS.
3d praet. (*nrEfrnT, ; 1st fut. f?t; 2d fut. ;
imp. TT^Tri ; pot. TOnr ; bened. WBfto ; cond. Pass.
Caus. *T5RTfl -w. Desid. PH'HBjH. Freq.
Fifth Conjugation.
219- In the conjugational tenses the verbs of this class
affix the syllable 'g' to the base.
a. Before those terminations which reject tr the vowel is
changed to the Guna letter ^rt, which combines with a follow-
ing vowel, agreeably to the rules of Sandhi. Before the vowel
of any other termination "3 becomes w when the root ends
with a vowel ; but if it ends with a consonant, with which
VT combines. Before the consonant of a termination not con-
taining tf, the T of 'g is unchanged, but it may be dropped
before ^ or ??, if it be not preceded by a conjunct consonant.
b. The termination of the second person singular of the
imperative, fir, is dropped after xt attached to a final vowel
in the root : if attached to a final radical consonant, fir is
retained.
c. The type of the class is w>r ‘ to extract,’ as a juice or
spirit : .of which the conjugational tenses in both forms are
the following :
O
Tnffftr
O
*nfrfiT
Present tense, ‘ I extract (the Soma) juice,’ &c.
Parasmai-pada.
OO O O vd O
Tfrrsr:
rf ;
00 o
A'tmane-pada.
OO O o
First praeterite, ‘ I have extracted juice,’ &c.
( -'mm
J 00
\
O \
1
V 0
* 1
^*T*TrT
0 0
SSfWrjril
O \
0 0
WHIdi
O >3
O
FIFTH CONJUGATION.
241
ST1"
TT"'*
TT"T
Imperative, ‘ May I extract juice,’ &c.
vd
IT*
TT7
TT5*
0
TT"
TT7"
1 fit
w*
Potential, ‘ I may extract juice,’ &c.
TTnUT^ TTTrqT5? W^T^fs
v> o o 'O o N
wfnrni wththt ^hn:
O xi O O V> V>
w^rmri
* o
ttt
Tr^ftxrrrrf
v>
ttkAhOp
s>
TT^fter
o
\» \
The other tenses are not dissimilar from those of it of the
second conjugation. It takes ^ in the third praeterite of the
Parasmai-pada, and, according to some, optionally in the
i^tmane-pada also.
2d praet. WtW, KSxj- ; 3d praet. ^RfrT, ; 1st fut.
kr?n ; 2d fut. Tftuifri -w ; bened. tttttw, ktxfte ; cond. WlutFT -7.
Pass. mrff. Caus. TTRT?fpr ; 3d praet. 'BnrtRTT . Desid. Wjqfrf -TT.
Freq. umWlfrf, Trrktfk.
There are not many verbs in this conjugation. The fol-
lowing are amongst those of most frequent occurrence. A
few which have been met with in previous conjugations, are
repeated here for the sake of the differences which their inflex-
ions present.
^TST e to pervade/
As the verb ends in a consonant, ^ becomes before the
vowel terminations not containing ; the Anubandha "3R denotes
the optionality of ^ (p. 107).
Pres. 1st praet. ; 2d praet.
■?tr% (^TRornr, ; 3d praet. (^rernri, ^^rrfsr), ^nf>is
(^Trkt'RTrTT, W%ftT) ; 1st fut. WT, xHfuirtT ; 2d fut. ^nkxqTf ;
imp. X'PgTrr ; pot. ^^fhr ; bened. ; cond. ’'rn^riT,
Pass. x^xtw. Caus. '^n^l-qfw. Desid. ^fsifsi^ri.
^TtT ( ‘ to obtain.’
For the effect of 75, see p. 108.
Pres. ^TTJnfff (^TTSfTC, ; 1st praet. errata; 2d praet.
242
VERBS.
wr (writ:, 5srrg:, wt*r) ; 3d praet. 'strit ; 1st fiat, ; 2d fut.
’ST^lfrT ; imp. -hi>Tvh (wntfV) ; pot. s.TT«i|lrT ; bened. ;
cond. ’SnxRTfr . Pass, wcrfl'. Caus. (with u prefixed) nmufk.
Desid. fj'sfa1.
W* ( ^i) ‘ to increase.’
Pres, ^rnfff ^sprf^T) ; 1st praet. ^mfr# ; imp. ^irtg;
pot. ^TTTrT.
For the rest, see ^pr, fourth conjugation.
■a ( ?.»T ) ‘ to injure/
Pres, «poffw, 1st praet. rf ; imp.
^nw?rf ; pot. ^nrrw, ^wlri.
The rest like ^ ‘ to do :’ see eighth conjugation.
‘ to injure.’
This verb and fvrfa, ‘ to go,’ drop the semivowel before tj ;
and the influence of in causing the insertion of a nasal, is
suspended in the conjugational tenses.
Pres. 'sirnffT; 1st praet. ws*!?lTT ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
^5T'3i7Rl'fT; 1st fut. ■sfWar ; 2d fut. ; imp. ; pot.
^ranrr^; bened. '^itpjtt'^; cond. ^ftjrunr. Pass. Caus.
Y^nfrf.
fier (fg»r) ‘ to collect.’
The palatal becomes optionally the guttural in the redu-
plicate base, in the second praeterite, and desiderative.
Pres. f^RTfrr, 1st praet. wfi'snftrT, ; 2d praet.
fwi or fiq^rnr (mfro or fi^^rvr. facfiftnr or fisravr, fafnre or
fig-ppre), or ; 3d praet. (’sHhrir), w? (*HrffT);
1st fut. ; 2d fut. ^rarfiT ; imp. fi^frw, pM*|rii ; pot.
fx(^ni7T, r^hr; bened. ^rhTTTT, cond. ■tf-q'qrf -TT. Pass.
Caus. ^TWTT. Desid. fisrghrfrr or fisnsfaflT. Freq.
^iflfrf, ^fTT.
s*j e to deceive.’
The nasal is rejected before "H, and before it. In the second
praeterite the verb is optionally conjugated as if it ended in a
single consonant (r. 194. k).
FIFTH CONJUGATION.
243
Pres, ^rrfw (^fin) j i st praet. *T<^ftY ; 2d praet. (<^*»Th:,
%vrgt ; ^fwr, ; 3d praet. ^wrtrr; 1st fut.
^f*HrTT ; 2d fut. ^fVvrorffT ; imp. TfXffij ; pot. ^nmr; bened.
^«mr; cond. ^f^rniiT. Pass. Caus. ^wrqfrr. Desid.
ftnrrfTT or \fNrfw. Freq. ^w?tt, <^»t1ttt.
V ( u>T ) ‘ to shake’ or 1 tremble.’
Pres. WTlfiT, o^’ Ist Praet- 2d praet. ^vt^,
3d praet. ist fut. vtffT; 2d fut. vlmfrf -?r;
imp. pot. Y^1^’ bened. YYT7T, uPfte; cond.
'^rvftoTTT -TT. Pass. vqw. Caus. v^ufH or VTTrrfiT. Desid. Hvrrrf?r.
\ C- C\ O
Freq. ^hnr*’ <fnnftnr, (frutfir.
v ( \t»t ) ‘ to shake’ or ‘ tremble.’
It inserts ^ before the usual terminations optionally, except
^ and tt of the second praeterite, where it is absolute.
Pres. VTlffT, ’ 1 st Pr£et* ^Y^TtiT , ^YY77 ’ 2<^ praet. *\TR
.rvf^), gu^ ; 3d praet. 'STVl^ftlT ( wrfwr ),
(w^y), ’srufire (^rvfVfrr) or 'snfr? (^nfrfrr) ; ist fut. vfwr,
\ffin ; 2d fut. vfrcrfiT -w, vftorfk -w ; imp. vrfrw, yY777 5 pot.
YY7*^ y?^t ; bened. YY^Y’ vfcrte ; cond. ^rwfV'q'rT - w,
^TUWfT -TT.
The other forms are the same as in the preceding.
U ‘ to delight.’
Pres, ; 1 st praet. 2d praet. wn (trqfuvT, UTHT:) ;
3d praet. ( 'wt* ) ; 1st fut. u#T ; 2d fut. ufr^fir ; imp.
pot. uimum; bened. ftrtrnr; cond. ^rqix'nrfT. Pass. ftnrfr.
Cau3. WPOTfrT. Desid. YY^- Freq. wrffaTr. u^flfiT, xjuf#.
f*T (f^Y.) * t° throw.’
This substitutes ^TT for its final in all the non-conjugational
tenses except the second praeterite i^tmane-pada, and before tf.
Pres, farnfk, ; ist praet. ^RTThT, ’'TfirgH ; 2d praet.
*nft 3d praet. ^mrer ; ist fut. tttut ; 2d fut.
TTTWfir -K ; imp. firvfV^, fir'^TTf ; pot. frrTpnY, firv^hr; bened.
1 1 2
244
VERBS.
sftrm, cond. wn*Rx -tt. Pass, ifix^. Caus. RTTqflT
Desid. frwffT -7T. Freq. mrhR, Wftfir,
nv ‘ to accomplish,’ ‘ to injure.’
In the second sense it optionally substitutes jj for the radical
vowel before the vowel terminations and the augment ^ of the
second praeterite.
Pres. TTNTfiT; ist praet. 2d praet. 7XTV (tttvj;,
TITTTT TTrftr^ or'hrj:, tfvrs, tfv^) ; imp. pot. TTjpTTrT •
For the rest, see ttu, fourth conjugation.
T (■cT’T) ‘to choose,’ ‘ to enclose.’
This, which admits the augment ^ (r. 198. c), optionally
prolongs it, except before xr in the second praeterite : before
the other consonantal terminations of the same tense it does
not take It optionally inserts ^ in the benedictive, and
may change its vowel to '3i in that tense in both voices, and
in the third praeterite, Xtmane-pada. In the latter it has
different forms.
Pres. ^irnf?T, ist praet. ^TTnfrf, *T|WfT; 2d praet. TTR
(=nrfrzr, Taw:, tst. or t?t), TTt or Tit (t|t?) ; 3d praet.
■eniOrr wrt, *ntt; ist fut. tItht,
Trr ; 2d fut. Tfbufrr -w, TfNfff -w ; imp. w?ri ; pot.
^rnTTir, ; bened. fwrnr or , Tftrh?, Ttft?, Ttfft ;
cond. -w, TTtftq'H -rt. Pass. fTTff. Caus. -T.
Desid. fwbsfiT -w, fT^rffafrr -w, ^T*lfw -w. Freq. TcffaR, ffr^,
T#f#.
(^T®) ‘ to be able.’
Pres. 3'1^'lfri ; ist praet. imp. pot.
For the rest, see 3TT, fourth conjugation.
R ( W>t) ‘ to cover.’
This inserts ^ optionally, except in the second future and
conditional, where its insertion is absolute, and it may be
prolonged when inserted.
Pres. RTrfrfft. RTJTW ; ist praet. ^n^rrtrT, ^TWTnfT ; 2d praet.
SIXTH CONJUGATION.
245
iRttt, to; 3d praet. ^rttItt (wrftwj or ’srronffrT (sawilR),
vrerfw, or wtt; 1st fut. r#t, Rfbrr, r^wt; 2d
fut. flmfri -IT, tnO^rn -IT ; imp. ilTl ij, *1 <m fTT ; pot. rtuRTT,
WTr-dfl ; bened. RUjin , RRE, RfriftF ; cond. ^rerfb«fiT -IT,
^rttNtt -it. Pass. rrw. Caus. TOncuffT. Desid. fwRfrqfiT
TritriO mTh -TT. Freq. 7T n iwO fri, Tnwf^.
Sixth Conjugation. f
220. This class is characterised by the insertion, before the
terminations of the conjugational tenses, of ^T, that is, of the
short vowel *T, with the effect of precluding the operation
of an indicatory tr ; and the vowel of the root therefore is
unchanged either to the Guna or Vriddhi element.
a. The terminations of the conjugational tenses undergo,
in other respects, the same modifications as in the first
conjugation.
b. Verbs ending with vowels change ^ ^ to ^tr, "S’ to
to ftrr , and ^ to , before the of the conjugation.
c. A class of verbs called from the first of them JTOTf^
insert a nasal before the finals in the conjugational tenses.
d. A class of verbs termed extend the prohibition
of the Guna or Vriddhi change to the non-conjugational
tenses, except the first and third persons singular of the
second praeterite.
e. The type of the conjugation is ^ ‘ to inflict pain.’ It
takes both Padas.
Present, ‘ I inflict pain,’ &c.
IKJTfR
3^
W?flT
^tt:
*N *N
First praeterite, ‘ I have inflicted
pain,’ &c.
\
O ^
W^Rf?
’ST^fT
^7T
* \
^rfi
’STRTTT
0
246
VERBS.
Imperative, ‘ May I inflict pain,’ &c.
rTTR
&
^TTT
■piTT
Potential, ‘ I may inflict
pain,’ &c.
3^Tf5?
#T
FtrTT
tthi:
The other
tenses
are,
2d praet.
3d
praet. WTRftiT (wr
wit), ^
wBTOTr, 'srafw) ; ist fut. Trrrr ; 2d fut. rrtwfrT -k ;
bened. TT^rnr, tftoftF ; cond. rflW H -IT. Pass. tt?tw. Caus.
O V \ o
Desid. ri rf w Pn -W. Freq. 7TT?T?lrr, ffl rTl Ps .
^ ‘ to wish.’
This makes ‘ to wish,’ in the conjugational tenses. It
may omit the augment ^ in the first future.
Pres. 2^ffT ; ist praet. ir^srfT; 2d praet. ?*pt ; 3d praet. infbr
(^Pmmh ) ; ist fut. Trfsnrr or FFT; 2d fut. TrfwffT; imp. ^TT;
pot. bened. ^arnr ; cond. irfTrnnr. Pass. ^jtt. Caus.
I'MUfri. Desid. Mfm
^ ('^) 4 f° sound,’ ‘ to coo.’
According to some, the vowel is unchanged in the non-
conjugational tenses : ^ is optionally inserted in the futures,
benedictive, and conditional, not in the third praeterite.
Pres, ; ist praet. ; 2d praet. ; 3d praet. ft^tt ;
ist fut. '^TTT ; 2d fut. ^f=)Tqd, ; imp. f wf ; pot.
^ipT; bened. ; cond. ^P^iqH, ^asuin. Pass. -srtf.
Cans. ojrRTrfrT. Desid. ^nstTH'. Freq. or grtet^r.
O C\ A Cv C\
"&Z * to be crooked.’
This is the first of a class of verbs which retain the vowel
unchanged, except before ttttt.
Pres, ^frf ; ist praet. ^?rT ; 2d praet. 5 3d
SIXTH CONJUGATION.
247
pnet. ^T^ffT (’S^fTTO); 1st fut. ^frlTT; 2d fut. ^fruifTT; imp.
; pot. oRT?^ ; bened. ; cond. 'sr^frnnr . Pass. ^Tff.
Caus. ^nfd. Desid,. Freq. 'sft^Tff,
The class consists of a number of verbs having, with few
exceptions, a medial ^ : the most useful of them are,
■3^ to contract.
to be childish.
^5 to be thick.
JT3T to sound.
JJ? to preserve,
to make effort.
>to cut.
w to bind,
frtr to throw.
KZ to make a riot.
IT? to inflict pain.
H? to cut.
ip to be firm.
it? to abandon.
O
to bud, to expand.
FjiT: to throb.
‘ to draw furrows,’ ‘ to plough.’
This takes different forms in the third praeterite, either the
first of the first class or the third of the second inserting *T as
ending in (r. 197. l) : the vowel is optionally changed in the
non-conjugational tenses to the semivowel.
Pres. ^qfrr ; 1st praet. ^nprr -w; 2d praet. ^3^ ;
3d praet. ^rgrrafft, ^rgrreffiT or -5t=+HiTT , and ^3^ or -h3iSI7T ;
1st fut. 3ttT or Ml; 2d fut. greqfiT or ■g^rfir ; imp.
3r37T, ojnriTT ; pot. '31371 -7T ; bened. 3rnrr?r , ofisffp or ■grefte ; cond.
-rt, ’srareqtt -IT. Pass. grarrf. Caus. gitprffT. Desid.
f^rpffrf. Freq. ^f^TTr, giWt.
3i 4 to scatter.’
t
The vowel is changed to as above (r. 220. b), in the
conjugational tenses, and before it. In the futures and con-
ditional the augment ^ is optionally prolonged in this and
other verbs in this conjugation ending in
Pres. faiffT ; 1st praet. grfgnjT ; 2d praet. ^nmr (’goRTir.,
^ns^:) ; 3d praet. ; 1st fut. gron or 2d fut.
wfxwfrT or grff'nrfTT ; imp. foRTT ; pot. fasbr ; bened. ^hzhTT ;
248
VERBS.
cond. ^umrf, qrqvffaqq. Pass, qffaitq. Caus. qRqfq. Desid.
fqqn-qfq. Freq. qqfrztTT. qTqrff.
fqirq £ to throw,’ ‘ to revile.’
Pres. fgjqfq -q ; xst praet. qrfqjqq -q ; 2d praet. fqqfq
(fqq?fqq), fqfgjq; 3d praet. qriNrlrr (^qrqm), *i%sr (*rmfqr) ;
imp. f^qq -(TT ; pot. fejqq -IT ; bened. fgjTqriT, cond.
W<*q'rT -q.
For the rest, see fqrq, fourth conjugation.
q ‘ to swallow.’
t
This verb optionally substitutes 75 for the Tl which is derived
from the radical final, except before q.
Pres. fqqfiT, fq75Tq ; 1st praet. qrfqtjT, wf-Tc^TT ; 2d praet.
^•qTt, ^TTfo ; 3d praet. wmftq, ’SqTTitq (*fqTf75qq); 1st fut.
qftqr, qifruT, qf^qr, qqftqT ; 2d fut. qftqrfq, q^urfq, qfTSTqfq.
q’st'^ifq ; imp. fqiq, fq?5q; pot. fqr;q, fq^; bened. qfnfTfT;
cond. ^qfttq rf , ’'nrfhqq, wrfe'orff. ??q75hqq. Pass, qfaqq.
Caus. qRqfrT, qT75qfq. Desid. fqqfxqfq, fqqf?5qfq. Freq.
qfqqqq, *rmffr.
to hurt.’
Pres. RHfrf ; xst praet. ^rqqq; 2d praet. qqt; 3d praet.
qrqqTff; 1st fut. qftrTT; 2d fut. qftn?Tq or Rfqfq; imp. qqq ;
pot. qqq; bened. qqrrq ; cond. ^rqfl'or^, ^rq^q. Pass. qqq.
Caus. qwfq. Desid. fqqfqqfq or fqqTqfq. Freq. fqqqiq,
fqqft.
tfr ‘ to praise.’
This root takes as an exception to r. 198. c : q becomes
q^ before the conjugational vowel, and optionally before It
belongs to the class qrrfq.
Pres. ^qfq; 1st praet. 2d praet. xprrq (wqfqq) ;
3d praet. ^vfiqlrf . -R^qlq ; 1st fut. qfqqT, qfqqT; 2d fut. qfqrqfq,
gfqujfq ; imp. »jqq ; pot. vpq ; bened. qqrq ; cond. wqfq^q,
qrgfqqnr. Pass. qqq. Caus. qiTqfq. Desid. ^*Jlrfq- Freq.
qtqqq, qtqffq.
Cs J
tit, £to praise,’ is similarly conjugated; so is q £to sound.’
SIXTH CONJUGATION.
24‘)
to satisfy.’
Pi •es. ij'crfTT ; ist prret. Tnrxrff ; 3d pr.net. 'ssnfafrr; imp. wxttt;
pot. Tjxfa.
For the rest, see ^xj, fourth conjugation.
to be firm.’
It belongs to the class ^rrfa.
Pres. 'HTfw ; ist praet. 2d praet. rpifa ; 3d
praet. *nnfat; ist fut. tffain ; 2d fut. tffaxqfa ; imp. HTfr ;
pot. ipTT ; bened. ‘U^TTr; cond. xMUNujtt. Pass. ipfa. Caus.
YWqfw. Desid. H^fanfa. Freq. ifripfa, ^tTpftfa.
? (?^) ‘ to extend.’
ftnt is substituted for the root in the conjugational tenses
{r. 220. b).
Pres, ftnfa ; ist praet. ^ftnnT ; 2d praet. xfa ; 3d praet.
(^^TilT) ; i st fut. ttSt ; 2d fut. xjfaafa ; imp. farnri ; pot.
flRH ; bened. xj-qfa ; cond. ^snjftsnr. Pass, faxfa. Caus.
xrrqfw. Desid. xr^ifa. Freq. wfaTT, mxiff.
The verb is commonly used with fa and W3- prefixed ;
^JTfafaff ‘ he conducts business.’
TT53 c to ask.’
This verb changes t: to ^ in the conjugational tenses, and
before it. The final becomes xi before a consonant (r. iqi.y),
and ^ becomes =fi before a sibilant (ibid, e ).
Pres, xpgfa ; ist praet. 2d praet. xnra[ (xjuf^vj or
xnr?, xnrarg:) ; 3d praet. (*hikjh) ; 1st fut. m; 2d
fut. irexifa ; imp. ; pot. ; bened. xj'Sjrrnr ; cond.
'^H'rHITT. Pass. iJTO. Caus. irarqfa Desid. faxrfexrfa.
\ t \ C
Freq. x^fa-^xfa, tjntfa.
HT3T ‘ to fry.’
This verb commutes the first of the conjunct consonants to
»T, and becomes >?t5T. In the conjugational tenses ^ is sub-
stituted for the semivowel : in the non-conjugational tenses
the substitute is optionally ^TH. A final »T becomes xj before a
consonant, convertible to before a sibilant (r. 191, d. e).
ic k
250
VERBS.
Pi •es. »jwnr -k; ist praet. ^wwiT -IT; 2d praet.
^>TW, W=sr; 3d praet. *wr^frT, ; ist fat.
>m, >m ; 2d fut. traf? -w, Wfnt -w ; imp. HW3, Hwrf ;
pot. KWfT -W ; bened. >purnr, Hsfte ; cond. *nre?i7T -IT,
-IT. Pass. )p5^rw. Caus. vr#qfjr. Desid. -ff,
Twsrfrr -w. f^fsprfiT -TT, fsr^rfrtmTT -w. Freq. Twf?.
75T*T, e to be ashamed,’ becomes in like manner 'FTSST (HWnT,
75Wrr).
5F5T ‘ to be immersed in water,’ £ to sink,’ ‘ to drown.’
This also converts the sibilant to it. In the non-conjuga-
tional tenses it inserts a nasal before the conjunct final, and
then one *r is rejected (r. 35. a).
Pres. T3wnr ; ist praet. -MH-srlrf ; 2d praet. Jiiffi (mhw, ;
3d praet. whffrT (wNd, ist fut. fi^rr; 2d fut.
ifelfi; imp. HttIh ; pot. bened. cond.
Pass. JT555TW. Caus. H-rHufri. Desid. f^daifif, rHHfnjMfri. Freq.
) ‘ to liberate’ or ‘ loose.’
The class of which this verb is the first, inserts a nasal in
the conjugational tenses (r. 220. c). It takes the form of the
first praeterite in the third, Parasmai-pada, but not in the
Xtmane-pada (r. 197. k).
Pres. g^flT -W ; ist praet. -it; 2d praet. «Hf^, ;
3d praet. wsrnrf, ist fut. 2d fut.
mwjfrf -w ; imp. Jpirr, ; pot. jt%it, jt^it ; bened. Jpirnr,
rrtEfte ; cond. ,smt2?TIT -IT. Pass. JTnrff. Caus. HT^tlffT. Desid.
Freq. *fmtr3i.
The other verbs of this class are,
oKIT ( ffl ) to cut. HIT (cJPtrfiT -w) to cut.
flf? (n^fiT) to hurt. ■fo? (fir^flT -w) to find.
fxr^T (fwnr) t° be organised. (fff^fiT -w) to sprinkle.
( M'«?frT -w) to smear.
Of these, the three last have an Anubandha 15, and therefore
make one form only in the third praeterite, Parasmai-pada, 2. of
SIXTH CONJUGATION.
251
second class, and the vowel unchanged (r. 197./): fen and
have two forms in the Xtmane-pada, 2. of the second, and
1. of the first class (p. 131), ^rfo'qir or ’Srftr^'fT or ;
■^TiT and take <+P^ri l, ^n^rfhr, Tsrf^tTT, &c.
h (itt) ‘ to die.’
This verb substitutes frit for the vowel (r. 220. b) : it fol-
lows the Parasmai-pada in the second praeterite, futures, and
conditional. In the desiderative, '3' is substituted for
Pres. ; 1st praet. ; 2d praet. iron: (wg:, or
HMUvj, ; 3d praet. (^rofit) ; 1st fut. jtIt ; 2d fut.
Hfcmfrf ; imp. ftpnTT ; pot. iVint; bened. Rif? ; cond. .
Pass. faxiw. Caus. HTT^flT. Desid. Freq. irgluTf, irmfit.
‘ to deceive.’
This substitutes ^ for the semivowel in the conjugational
tenses, and in the second praeterite before the vowel termina-
tions, and before if.
Pres. (%Mfri ; 1st praet. ; 2d praet. (fafwrr:) ;
3d praet. or 1st fut. wfisfriT ; 2d fut. -^rf^TqfTT ;
imp. pot. bened. cond. ’Sxqf^'arrT. Pass.
f^TTT. Caus. ^T^rsfrr. Desid. Freq. ^fxpsnr,
^ I cMTil fri,
( era) ‘ to cut.’
This substitutes the vowel ^ for the semivowel in the conju-
gational tenses, and before tt. In the non-conjugational tenses
it optionally inserts 5^; and when it does not, the final ^ is
rejected; and 31 becomes it before a consonant (r. 191./").
Pres. ^aflT ; 1st praet. W^lT; 2d praet. ;
3d praet. ^sT^lrT (^TtlfsgiR ), ^TaTEflrT ; 1st fut. trf^rTT,
; 2d fut. ■afvg'cjfrr, awf* ; imp. ; pot. ; bened.
ysTTrT ; cond. ^nsroTft, Pass. ^'©TW. Caus.
Desid. fwf^xrfiT or fwBffiT. Freq. xn^^frr, xn^sriV.
ftxf ‘ to let go,’ ‘ to abandon,’ ‘ to create.’
Pres. ^ TtfiT ; 1st praet. ^nr*TiT ; 2d praet. 7=Tnt or
WT¥) ; 3d praet. WTgflw ( ) ; 1st fut. ; 2d fut. ;
k k 2
252
VEBBS.
imp. TpTT; pot. VsfaT ; bened. Tpqirf ; cond. w^nt. Pass,
fl-riflt.
For the rest, see *nr, fourth conjugation.
‘ to touch.’
This optionally substitutes the Guna syllable or the semi-
vowel only in the third praeterite, futures, and conditional : in
the third praeterite it may take also the form of the first,
3. second class. For the changes of a final ^T, see r. 1 gi.f.
Pres, wpifri ; 1st praet. SH*33r'fl ; 2d praet. tp*ret (ttwtttt:) ;
3d praet. '•'nrrrefhr, ^trr^rT^ or 1st fut. nrtr, wt;
2d fut. ; imp. ; pot. ^grit ; bened. wjgqnr ;
cond. ^=q^7T or . Pass. Caus. Tq^Rfk. Desid.
fqwtKjfk. Freq. ^CiTqgyri, xr^wff .
Seventh Conjugation.
221. The characteristic peculiarity of this conjugation is
the insertion before the radical final of Tf, before the termina-
tions which contain an indicatory tj, and ^ before the rest.
a. All the verbs of this class, which are not many, end in
consonants ; and the union of them with the initial conso-
nants of the terminations takes place according to the rules
of Sandhi, or the special rules affecting conjugational change
(r. 190. 191).
b. A verb containing a penultimate nasal compounded with
a final, rejects it in favour of the conjugational sign.
c. The insertion of tt before the radical final, and those
terminations which begin with a consonant, will have the effect
of bringing three consonants together ; as, ^ will make
■^7=: ; + V: ( Tnr changed to u:) will make ; but by
r. 34. a. a medial consonant, if similar to that which follows it,
may be rejected, and we have therefore Some
authorities change the nasal to Anuswara, as
d. tt after a radical * is changed to jtt, but not r^, as
SEVENTH CONJUGATION.
253
e. fv is substituted for ftr in this class.
f. The type of the conjugation is ‘ to hinder’ or ‘ob-
struct,’ which takes both Padas.
g. After the aspirate, it and vj become V (r. 190./); and
the radical aspirate, when not rejected by clause c, will be
changed to the unaspirated letter
h. In the first praeterite, second and third pers. sing., the
terminations H and ^ being rejected, as the finals of a con-
junct (r. 35. and r. 189. a), leave the radical letter final, which
will become optionally the hard or soft unaspirated letter
(r. 9) ; becomes therefore or
i. But before the sign (left by ftnr) a final ^ or v may
become ^ (r. 191.^), and a final ^ is changeable to Visarga ;
the second pers. sing, of the first praeterite may therefore be
(tHtj'tiit).
Present, ‘ I obstruct,’ &c.
^er.
^HT.
PrlT
<>
First praeterite, ‘
I obstructed,’ &c.
^T^aT
. t
iji'l fT
'STTn -U r|
■>a <j -m 1 ft 1
-U fl
Imperative, ‘ May I obstruct,’ &c.
T'TTVTH
W*rm?
^if
^^5
^HTT
Potential, ‘ I may obstruct,’ &c.
^ari
^arR
^arm
^au:
^wnf
^ajTTT
^anK
^dhiriTf
254
VliKBS.
The rest are,
2d prat, ^ftv, ; 3d prat. ^viT or
(*^'rHlrtT, ^TFr?»rr, ; 1st fut. P?T; 2d fut. ^trTqfrT ;
bened. •^'urnr, ; cond. ^Oti+Mrt -IT. Pass. ^tUTr. Caus.
m^rflT. Desid. «^r«frf -ff. Freq. rr^wrff, dtrf^r.
( ^TsT ) ‘ to become manifest.’
Notwithstanding the Anubandha "3i, the augment ^ is
inserted in the third praterite. This and the two following
reject the nasal penultimate (r. 221. b ). The final palatal is
changed to a guttural (r. 191. c).
Pres. sjRffi (#aK, ^T^RT) ; 1st prat. ’STtr;; 2d prat.
or ^TR^r) ; 3d prat. wr^TTT (^TlfWR ) ; 1st fut. ^hfiT,
^rf^riTT; 2d fut. ^TSFiTTr, ^T%arfTT ; imp. (wfHj, ^srqsrrfq) ;
pot. #stt?t ; bened. ^i?rnT; cond. ^ristr^, ^TTf^tfiT. Pass. ^TtTR.
Caus. Desid. ’^rfgftrqfw.
(^ft) ‘ to shine.’
Pres. ^ (stw) ; 1st prat. ih=y 2d prat, ;
3d prat, 1st fut. 2d fut. gfHraR ; imp. T^ri;
pot. ^ifhrT ; bened. ^=unT? ; cond. ^ycnr. Pass. Caus.
S^nniTT. Desid.
^ (^) ‘ to wet.’
Pres. Tqf% (T»rT:. TT^fnT) ; 1st prat. ^TfiT or ^R;) ;
2d prat. ; 3d prat. Wf^hr; 1st fut. ■gf^HT; 2d fut.
■gf^urnr ; imp. TRW; pot. ■jcrnT; bened. ■gr^rnr ; cond. ^Tfr^sqTT.
Pass, ■g'^rw. Caus. ■g'^rfrT. Desid. gfr^fqrrfw.
s|q ('SfqT) * to play,’ ‘ to shine.’
The augment ^ is optionally inserted before *T in any of the
non-conjugational tenses.
Pres. ^ ; 1 st prat. vrsznrf , W^T ; 2d prat.
or ; 3d prat. ^TfTfT, ('srsrffmr),
a ft? (>sra fw, 'H Vjfq fET) ; 1st fut. ; 2d fut. -tf fi^qfrT -q or
di^lffT imp. 'Strr|, TRTT ; pot. ^srnr, "g^iT; bened. StHrj,
SEVENTH CONJUGATION.
255
aff^, Srtfly ; cond. -w, -w. Pass. asr^.
Caus. at^frT- Desid. faafa^rfrr -7T, faaarflT -W. Freq. artaa^,
a? * to injure.’
This verb affixes ^ to the conjugational sign before the
terminations beginning with consonants which reject it; and
a and ^ become a. For the changes of a , see r. 191. k. m.
Pres, Tjafa (anfaT. d-urf^i, aa?:, ij^Oa, a^:) ; 1st praet.
(^TijTTsf) ; 2d praet. aaf (aaffa) ; 3d praet. aa^fg; ( wffjnT) ;
1st fut. affaT; 2d fut. aff-aifa; imp. aara (ataf, aaaj) ; pot.
agna; bened. gatff ; cond. ^aaff'crg. Pass. gara. Caus.
atafa. Desid. aaffafa. Freq. atftjara, a#ft.
fag (fafgT) ‘ to break,’ ‘ to divide.’
Pres, faafa, faa ; 1st praet. afaaa, afaa ; 2d praet. faag,
fafag ; 3d praet. afaga or aaaft?^, ^rfaa ; 1st fut. aar ;
2d fut. frf -it ; imp. faaa, faari ; pot. fauTa, fd'^ta ;
bened. fa^rra, faafte ; cond. airaTrT -a. Pass. faua. Caus.
agafa. Desid. fafawfa -a. Freq. afasia, aafa.
There are several other verbs in this conjugation similarly
inflected ; as,
ag (arfin;) ‘ to send ;’ ararfa, to, afraT, ararga or ssaTiafia ,
vd
fag (fsrfgjt) ‘ to cut fgRfa, fs^, awr, afaror or aripata ,
afaa.
ga (gfax) ‘ to join,’ 4 to unite aafa, ga, aPST, aropr or
•■niuts/lrf , arga.
fca (ftfaT) ‘ to purge ;’ ftarfa, fta, tar, aftaa or mafta,
ana.
faa (fafa*:) ‘to separate;’ faafa, faa, aaT, afaaa or
aagfbt, afaa.
aa ‘ to break.’
The nasal is rejected in favour of the conjugational sign.
The palatal in this and the two following is of course changed
to the guttural letter before consonants, except nasals and
semivowels.
256
VERBS.
Pres. vnrf^R hjh:, vi-arsn, *r3«:) ; ist praet. wnf; 2d
praet. ; 3d praet. ^mtsiffrr ; ist fut. ; 2d fut. ;
imp. Vfrr^i; pot. vnsjT?^; bened. H5?jTrr; cond. . Pass.
Caus. H^rfrr. Desid. f^rgffir. Freq.
>nT ‘ to eat,’ ‘ to enjoy,’ ‘ to cherish.’
Pres. »prf^i, *pS; ist praet. 'cwnR, 2d praet.
; 3d praet. ^Hra'tTT , ist fut. vrV^rr ; 2d fut. vrreqfk -w ;
imp. ; pot. hstttt, ijgfrir ; bened. *n?TT?T; ;
cond. -7T. Pass. iT5*jTT. Caus. H l'ifufri. Desid.
Freq. ^rt^TT, -wVrfm
f^nr (^rfinfl) ‘ to fear,’ ‘ to tremble.’
This verb does not change its radical vowel when ^ is
inserted.
Pres. pcRf* ; ist praet. 2d praet. (firfirf^t) ;
3d praet. ?r ; ist fut. ; 2d fut. ;
imp. fcj'rjTS ; pot. firSTTW ; bened. cond. ^rfsrfirTHI* .
Pass. frsr^. Caus. ^inrfrT. Desid. f^f^f^qfir. Freq. ^fV5?rff,
f^iq (%*) ‘ to distinguish.’
The final is changed in the first praeterite, first and second
sing., and before fv, to z (r. 191. h). <5 restricts the third
praeterite to the form of the first.
Pres. fgiTfi? ; ist praet. ’SfgRT; 2d praet. f^nt (fsrsrfwsj) ;
3d praet. ; ist fut. 2d fut. 31 fWTrf ; imp. %*T5?
(fijrftj3 or fsH^Tfa) ; pot. fgfrirnT ; bened. f^r^TTir ; cond.
Pass, fgnqw. Caus. grpnrfir. Desid. f^rf^TW^T- Freq.
^rnntqw, wfe.
(finr) * to grind,’ is similarly conjugated.
fy*T (fVffc) ‘ to injure’ or ‘ kill.’
The nasal which the verb derives from the Anubandha is
replaced by the conjugational sign in the conjugational tenses.
The final is changed in the first praeterite to ^ (r. 191. g.j).
Pres. fV'qfta' ; ist praet. ’HlV^TT ’5Tf?^T: or ^rf^nr,
EIGHTH CONJUGATION.
257
; 2d praet. f^rf^TT ; 3d prtet. (^rfirftrw);
1st fut. f?finrr ; 2d fut. fVfH'^rftr; imp. fV^n^; pot. fjrrurrr;
bened. cond. ^fVftnqTT . Pass, f^rqw. Caus. fsnr^rfff.
Desid. f^rf^f^nrfTT. Freq.
Eighth Conjugation.
222. In this conjugation T is subjoined to the root, which
before a termination containing an indicatory 17 becomes
and before a vowel becomes
a. Before a termination beginning with ^ or H the augment
"S' may be rejected, as in the fifth conjugation (see r. 219. a).
b. nr in the imperative is rejected.
c. In the third praeterite of the Atmane-pada the sibilant of
*FT, wrw. may be rejected, when the radical final consonant is
dropped.
d. There are but few verbs in this conjugation, and with
one exception, that of eR , they all end in nasals ; being there-
fore exactly analogous to verbs of the fifth conjugation, which
insert »T.
e. Such verbs as have a penultimate short vowel, other
than ^r, change it optionally to its Guna equivalent in the
conjugational tenses.
The type of the conjugation is tht ‘ to stretch,’ which takes
both Padas.
rPfrfa
rHTrfh
»RTnT
Present, ‘ I stretch,’ &c.
TTpH rf^qT:
rr?PZT:
lPT*Tt fi t
•HP*
rt fa
ri r'4
rPJHlT (TST?'
n«-qn
First praeterite, ‘ I stretched,’ &c.
^TfR^nr
f
-
^nr^r
■^rt»H
’H n
^ '-M rt ^ Hf!
ft if
w-jwf
’an *jrt
wjjxtt:
>H H h!
W?T7T
O
^TrT^TrTT
■»art^*ifV
WfPTrT
258
VERBS.
7PH i Ph
rPT-qf
O
rPT^rn
rT^r^
Imperative, ‘ Slay I stretch,’ &c.
THT^tr
rl «-N IH
TTTTTR%
UJW
TTfrT
TT^WT
TT^ST
fT^rn
TT^TTf
7T *4 1 rt i
Potential, ‘ I may stretch,’ &c.
Hxpre Tnprm
wxprnr TTg-^Tfr
H^TTH
TT^xr TT^rf?
Tr^fhrr: rarhrnTT
TTr-TTFT TT^fhrrwf
(T«fhrf%
7T^fH4
TFWhTT
The other tenses are,
2d praet. TTfTR', ; 3d praet. w^rbr or wrffrrT, WiT or
1 st fut. Hfcnn ; 2d fut. rrf?rwffT bened. TT^nw ,
HtVrV? ; cond. ^TTTRxirfT -IT. Pass. H’^TTT or Tmrw. Caus.
TTRXTfw. Desid. nTTri^nrfrT -W, frTHTTlfrT -W, friri«frf -W. Freq.
TPH’HTW, TTXrFflTTT, THtT^rT.
The remaining verbs of this class, which, except end in
a nasal, are the following : they all may take both Padas.
■qpjT ‘ to go ’RRiTfrf, ’Htrtt, or ^rrrffr, ^rr?r. ^rftnTrr, wraT?r,
’Srm or wfw.
^p!T £ to kill or hurt it does not elongate the vowel in the third
prseterite : WinffT, ^ftu'HT, ^THTTrftrT, ^THfrT or mffw.
m?rr ‘ to kill or hurt fgjTtnfri or RTOTfrT, fmrrw or %xt7T,
TjriwT, mniflrf, ^nw or ^miw.
■mrr ‘ to shine vunfff, xjxiiw or TpfffiT, ^rnTT, ’sfrT'rTT, XTRCrTT,
■>r miffTT , *nr?t or
THU ‘ to eat grass ^Trftfw or TTOtHT, HWH or THRTT, TCTOTn,
SHriVjiTrT, Wff or -.STinim.
j?xt ‘ to understand flf^TTT, ^TTTrT or fvp? .
xjTf ‘ to ask XHlfrf, xpjW, THTHT, ^xpfftr or WR^TT- Wff or
vRR?.
tnir, ‘ to give,’ optionally rejects the final, and makes the
vowel long before tf; it does the same before the TT (tft)
and vtttt (wp&) of the third prseterite : TRtfrT,
TTR7TT, TTSTTiT or TTTXrnT, or ■‘TRIffifT . ^TTW or x*raf?T?
( ’Rjttxjt: or -ruPh at:).
EIGHTH CONJUGATION.
259
‘ to do.’
t
In the conjugational tenses the radical vowel substitutes, as
usual, the Guna letter before the conjugational sign in the
inflexions which have an indicatory tj ; but before the rest it
substitutes '3T. It rejects the conjugational sign before H,
and the it of the potential. In the benedictive, Parasmai-pada,
and passive, it substitutes ft for the radical before As this
verb is
of frequent
occurrence, it may
be useful to
give the
entire verb in both
forms of the active voice.
Present, ‘ I do or make.’
wm
3irrnT
f&T^
^df?r
<x~N
^rf
First prseterite,
4 I did or
made.’
o
xsntff
O W
^T^if
^rcstnr
^cS^TT
^tTcrf
Second praeterite, ‘ I have done or made.’
^3RTt
-q-*i
C 4
-'SR
V9
Third praeterite, ‘ I had done
or made.’
e
C
A
\
’sr^wir^
^rf^n:
^^TTTvn
^ ss -«r
*1*
^T^qTWf
c
First future, ‘ I will do or
make.’
oh-^lfw
t *N
■qrqr^r?
C.
t "S
«2 "N
wrm
,
ofiwwr^r
w:
3i#T
Second future, ‘ I will do or
make.’
«jrftsrR:
^frxEiTH:
^fTU?rq%
^ifrarTH?
cfiftont
^rftnr&g
-SfifrrtrfrT
qrfrar^
L. 1 2
VERBS.
260
Imperative, ‘ May I make or do1.
qa^nkr
^Vrt
°hCl H
V3
1^3
fVfrr
^fTWf
^pr
Potential, ‘ I may do or make.’
,3?C§f
0
0
<+dTvai:
^ikmri
^RTfTT
ore':
O O
^ikrnrT
ktrq-rcm
f%tTT:
f%rrnr
\
Benedictive, ‘ I wish I may do or make.’
f^rrerr
f^aiw
fktrnj:
^nfhET
44fa?
Ydhrrpqf
^rahrreri
^Tqk'OR
\
^H^n-Tq;
\
Conditional, ‘ If I may do or make.’
vii<*roqrg ^T^n-arrR ^r«iik$
^=t>fc«4n
^kRTTT
^r<*U-Tqfl
^■cfuurerr: ^kakri ?Rk^R
^Riksnr nf ^nafiLm^
Pass. pres. fkqTT ; imp. f^RiTT; 3d praet. ’SRTk. Caus.
^KTTSfff -W ; 3d praet. -7T. Desid. kr^fiT -ff. Freq.
or ^fhpkkr ; R%ff, Rksff or R^Uft.
Ninth Conjugation.
223. The verbs of this class subjoin TfT to the root before
all terminations which reject tj ; vfl before the other termina-
tions beginning with a consonant ; and ^ before those w hich
begin with a vowel.
a. The terminations undergo no change.
b. Verbs ending in consonants substitute for the con-
jugational sign and the termination k> in the imperative.
c. A class of verbs called t^rk, from ^ ‘ to purify,’ ending
in long vowels, make them short in the conjugational tenses.
Some others make the vowel short only before the termina-
tions of the second praeterite not requiring Guna.
NINTH CONJUGATION.
261
The model of the class is ^ ‘ to buy,’ which takes both
Padas. The ^ of the conjugational augment becomes trj after
* (r. 19).
Present, ‘ I buy,’ &c.
^fcnifa
^hrri
r:
'snfamr
\
^fitTTfa
^fihrrnr
■ShTtllfai:
^hnhi:
^?hnfar
■*Jkfl ri
^Nfhr|
^hJTTrf
■^hrrw
First prieterite, c I bought,’ &c.
juT^t
^liiOrfi
^T^tinTiT
w^lfirr ^rsRhnfafa
^ntfWfan: w^hrrRn ^rahrfls^
^nfiWbr '^r^hrrrFT
Imperative, ‘ IMay I buy,’ &c.
^ShrrR ^rhrrm
^hrfhf ^Trrqi
^tufbrf ^hjFij ^hrOiif ^ftrrnri
Potential, ‘ I may buy,’ &c.
-=*il -uH Trr^"
^frrfrmw
■+I nd n 1 ri i
■^hrfhrm
^hrrhr:
-fl . ,r\ r\- p
^Wnr "Snrmrt^
^Ixrfl'srr: ^Nfhrrsrf
■^Rt^rflrr ^ihifhmrr
■=hl<U 1*1%
^hrftsEi
■*1 <u ri i
•#irrfafa
Shifts?
^tufrnr
The other tenses are,
2d praet. fknfirn (fafartiw:, fanffa^T or fariiw), fafai^; 3d praet.
^npfhr, ; 1st fut. ijurr ; 2d fut. -grsrffr -w; bened. ^hrnr,
'OTfa ; cond. ^ rf -7T. Pass. ■affaff. Caus. "ismufk. Desid.
fq^brnr -W. Freq. MaftiUrf, ^'adlfrt,
So pfa 4 to desire,’ and iffa ‘ to injure’ or ‘ kill :’ the latter
in the non-conjugational tenses substitutes ^STT for the final :
see fa, fifth conjugation.
^T5T ‘ to eat.’
Pres. -Nyifri ; 1st praet. WOTrT ; 2d praet. ^TT^T (^Tfijia) ;
3d praet. ^Tjflrf (^srrfanm) ; 1st fut. 'STf^TTTT; 2d fut. ^faiwrfa ;
imp. wra (^IT^t) ; pot. ’H'JflfaTiT ; bened. ’ST^TW ; cond.
^Tfanmr.
For the rest, see *t$t, fifth conjugation.
262
VERBS.
^ ‘ to go.’
As belonging to the class Tqrff?, the vowel is short in the
conjtigational tenses. In the futures and conditional the aug-
ment ^ is optionally long : is substituted for ^ in the
benedictive.
Pres. '^TTlfrf ; 1st praet. xHn&TrT; 2d praet. -DU^IT; 3d praet.
; 1st fut. ^rfTHT, FTtfilT ; 2d fut. ^TTarfff, ^snffxqflT; imp.
^prrnj ; pot. ^rfhiTTT ; bened. ; cond. ^TTfxxciH , wtfant.
See qj of the first conjugation.
f^TSfT (f^rcr) e to be distressed.’
Pres, ; 1st praet. FrilfiFrnT ; 2d praet. fisrijrjT; 3d praet.
^Twlrl (wfwr) or Frfprepr (^rept); ist fut. wf^nn, ^ft;
2d fut. ^f^rarfw, ifreqfff; imp. f^FTTH ; pot. ffi^hTTfr; bened.
%3XTTrr ; cond. FrififsTopT, ^Wrt. Pass. Caus. irerqfff.
Desid. fiq#iftTqfTT, fiqf^rfsTqffT, Freq. ^f^UXTfT,
mr £ to be agitated.’
O 0
Pres. •CT^rrflT ; ist praet. FrsrvTrT; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
FNjfhTtw ; ist fut. V^rfHfTT ; 2d fut. FfHVntfw ; imp. tJVTF (Fwprr) ;
pot. ^^fNrnr ; bened. ^vqTft ; cond. FT^ftfimiT. Pass. mwiff. Caus.
m^qTTT. Desid. ^rfvnrfTT. Freq. ^TTHTWTW,
7pvj ‘ to arrange in order.’
This rejects the radical nasal in favour of the conjugational
sign ; also before q, and optionally before the terminations of
the second praeterite, when before those which do not require
the change of a radical vowel, x? may be substituted for ft, and
the root is not doubled.
Pres. J^PTTTTT ; 1 st praet. FTJjvprr?T ; 2d praet. 'srcpq, tTtjtxi
(iTCpqw:. ?pqw:) ; 3d praet. ; ist fut. Jjfvsnn; 2d fut-
Tjfxvrccrfrr; imp. JjvnTTjT ; Pot- U^fNTTT ; bened.
cond. FTJjfxvron^. Pass. Jjsqw. Caus. TpvprftT. Desid. fi^fazpifiT.
Freq. HPJW7T,
Other verbs are similarly inflected ; as, ‘ to suffer pain
^VTrTTfp, ^qfTT. or ^xqTTT . — ‘ to churn :
NINTH CONJUGATION.
2(13
n-sprifu, or j)nrer, *wr?r. —
‘ to loosen :’ ^riRTfir, ^rl^flT, or Sl^snxi (^PSP^JH:,
TTWrl, &C.
jj? ‘ to take.’
This substitutes for the syllable Tl in the conjugational
tenses. It makes the augment ^ long in every tense except
the second praeterite.
Pres. Jy^STfn, ; 1st praet. 2d praet.
W? ; 3d praet.
; 1st fut. JjFhlT ; 2d fut. -w ; imp. jv^ttt
(ij^nu), Pot- bened. ipnw, JJjflffftf ;
cond. ^T^TqiT -W. Pass. Caus. ^T?ilffr -W. Desid.
ftryinffr -w. Freq. *Trfjpiw, Tnuflfw, 3ri?jf^.
$rr ‘ to know.’
This becomes 7TT before the conjugational tenses.
Pres. 'srRTTTT, ttrIk ; 1st praet. ^ TTHTTiT, ^HTRl 7T ; 2d praet.
WT, ; 3d praet. WPfiTr (^Tftmrr), wrer (^rfa) ; 1st fut.
frrfTT ; 2d fut. sriwfa ; imp. itrtw, ^rpftrif ; pot. mutant,
»rR3rr; bened. ^ifTr^, $rnrnr, srmte ; cond. -71. Pass,
srrqw. Caus. saxt^fri. Desid. ftr^rttifa- -tf. Freq. ^TT^nn^, TrnjffTT
or TTTsnfH'.
‘ to beome old.’
The syllable tn is changed to ^ in the conjugational tenses,
and to ^ before tr.
Pres, fit Hlfrf ; 1st praet. ^fjPTTfr; 2d praet. f*rrqf; 3d praet.
Nn^rrabfr (^r5*nftnpr) ; 1st fut. ^ttit ; 2d fut. imp.
fiffiTiT; pot. fTTvft^TTT; bened. sfliirrr ; cond. ^nqPRni. Pass.
tTTUTT, Caus. I?nqiif7r. Freq. ^TKfTfw.
v (nst), v ( v>r), ‘ to tremble.’
As the verb with the long final vowel shortens this in the
conjugational tenses, there is no difference in the inflexions :
in the other tenses the difference is that of the insertion or
omission of except in the third praeterite, Parasmai-pada,
where it is inserted in both verbs.
264
VERBS.
Pres. vvrrfTT, ; Jst praet. ^Tv^rn^, ; 2d praet.
; 3d praet. or ; 1 st fut. iforr, vfT?TT ; 2d
fut. vfcqfTT -W, vfVa?fTT -w ; imp. v^TTr, vrjhri ; pot. wfl*nw, ;
bened. 'ttht, vttfa, vfirifte ; cond. ^tvtott -7T, ^rvf^pinT -fr.
For the rest, see v and w, fifth conjugation.
tR ‘ to nourish.’
In this conjugation the verb takes and is inflected regu-
larly in the third praeterite.
Pi ■es. Y^TTfiT; 1st praet. ^TtranTrT; 2d praet. Y^ ; 3d praet.
wfrftir ( wrfVEtJt ) ; 1st fut. tfrftrn ; 2d fut. tfrfq^rfir; imp.
YWHJ; pot. Tgxcihrnr; bened. Y15^ > cond.
The rest as tr, fourth conjugation.
Y ‘ to purify.’
This is the first verb of a class ending in long vowels, of
which the final is made short before the conjugational sign.
Pres. Y^Tfib Y7^ 5 Ist Prast- ^Y7^’ ^dlrf ; 2d praet.
Y^T (Y^fT^r), YY^ ; 3d Prset- wfr?
(^rqfqrfii) ; ist fut. TrfVrTT ; 2d fut. xrfi^-aifTT -W ; imp. Y^fjJ’
Yrfbri ; pot. y^^y, Y7^ ; bened. YF^’ ; cond.
-7T. Pass. tPR. Caus. TJTTirffT. Desid. MMqfri -W or
\ cv o C\
ftRfVJtfw -it. Freq. xftTTXTFT, Tfafrfw.
The following verbs belong to the class T^rfi? :
Y to go as above : to which also such of the following
as end in are analogous.
Y; ‘ to injure ipTTTT, cF.ftiTT, ^xtrrr,
^rdrTTT.
n ‘ to sound *rfcn, Ttflin, ifrdmr .
Y ‘ to decay ipTflT, Trfcn, ^TfrTT, ^RT?T-
tr ‘ to tear irnfri, ?ff?rr, ^tIht, *r?rd7T, ^hztnr .
v ‘ to shake as above.
CN
Y ‘ to fill Y^TTTT, TjfcrT, TTfriTT, ^TXITTtT^, Y^TW .
H ‘ to threaten Hfbrr, vncbrr, ifhzjtTTt.
c to support fijWTfir, ijrn, W^lrT.
Y ‘ to injure Y^'frf, *?ftrTT, JTlfcTT,
NINTH CONJUGATION.
2()5
4 to roar fwTnr, Tin,
4 to cling to fefnfrT, 73TTT, 'Jratflfl .
(S 4 to cut T^nfiT, c^fxTHT, ^T?STxfrrT . *T?rfT!7.
^ 4 to choose :’ see W below.
4 to choose :’ fcTOTflT, M, ^Tcl*friT .
$ 4 to support %?tt, >s%cfht .
5T 4 to injure see below,
nr 4 to spread :’ see below.
xft ( tfl>T ) 4 to please,’ 4 to desire.’
This and several other verbs of the class ending in long
vowels do not make them short, as not belonging to the class
■crrnr.
Pres, jfhrnfff, tffaft'H' ; ist praet. mfhrrn^, wfafftr; 2d praet.
ftnmr, nrftni ; 3d praet. ’snNbr (wtnr), w? (^Txrfsr) ; ist fut.
RTTT ; 2d fut. trofiT -W ; imp. Tfhmrr, Tfatbri ; pot. , tflrrfffT ;
bened. ipffe ; cond. wnnr -IT. Pass. TffiTK. Caus.
TfbTiirffT. Desid. fwfaiTr -W. Freq. ^TT^fVf?T, tnrfir.
So 3 ‘ to sound,’ wriTT, gjifftw, &c. ; and 4 to cook,’
C- Cv Cv
^fhnTfrT, >ft 4 to cook,’ and 4 to choose,’ are option-
ally long or short ; WftjrrfrT, ftmiffT ; tflmflT, faTJTfiT.
‘ to bind.’
This drops its nasal in the conjugational tenses, and before xf.
Pres. •srrnfiT; ist praet. WiTHT ; 2d praet. xpn*T or
xnF*r); 3d praet. ^THTRfl'TT (^rrrST, is»TTi^:) ; ist fut. ;
2d fut. vffprfrT ; imp. xj-ytij ; pot. xr*fhn7T; bened. xrurr^ ; cond.
^Wi^Trr. Pass, Caus. Desid. fxTHrflflT. Freq.
XTPTWrT, WTXp^fHir, THTnj.
iff 4 to kill’ or 4 injure.’
This verb, like fir in the fifth conjugation, is inflected as if
it ended in ^rr in the non-conjugational tenses, except before
the terminations of the second praeterite beginning with vowels,
and before XT.
Pres. *Tfcrrf?T, iffiffTT ; 1 st praet. ^nffcrnr , ^HHfftT ; 2d praet. rmt or
m m
266
VERBS.
httht (ftmrw:, *fi?vr or tor ; 3d praet. (*TRTfaw),
WRf r (wrftr) ; 1st fut. rtit ; 2d fut. mrnnr ; imp.
Jnvfhri ; pot. irhfhrrrr, *lrtftiT; bened. jftrrm; cond. ruu-UTT -7T.
For the rest, see fir, fifth conjugation.
tj ‘ to join.’
Pres. TprTTTT, Tpftw ; 1st praet. ^H^TiT- imp. ^TTR,
; pot. Ttiladn ,
For the rest, see tj, second conjugation.
Y ( Y3^) ‘ t° choose.’
Pres, wunffl, 1st praet. H ; imp. ^TTH,
^*tfl rt 1 ; pot. ^ ail -41^. ^ ufl H .
For the rest, see ^ of the fifth conjugation. ^ (t?) and
^ (^»t), verbs having the same meaning, are similarly conju-
gated : the first is of course restricted to the ^tmane-pada ;
the second makes its vowel short in the conjugational tenses.
ST ‘ to hurt.’
t
It is one of the class RTfi?.
Pres. SKiJlfri ; 1st praet. ’HSiaiM ; 2d praet. ^TSTTT (snTTj: or
STW:)j 3d praet. ^r^rnfh^; 1st fut. ^rfrtrr, ^ithrr; 2d fut.
tjrncwnr, sitl^rnr ; imp. snuirf ; pot. spffanrT ; bened.
cond. ^rsrfTWT^ ’B^lOwj'rT . Pass. Caus. STTrtlfTT. Desid.
fsiSTftwfrr, T^TtfafiT, fsnjfthffT. Freq. STTSlft.
ftt ( ftrtT ) ‘ to bind.’
Pres. fiRTrffr, twttt ; 1st praet. ^Trtrtrnr, vrftrtfbr ; 2d praet.
frnrnr, ftrnr; 3d praet. *rfNfar, ; 1st fut. wr; 2d fut.
irRfrr -w ; imp. ftHTa, ftrrft?rf ; pot. frnftwTT^, froTbt ; bened.
will'd , irtfte ; cond. -7. Pass. tfftTTT. Caus. ^rroifiT.
Desid. Ph aim'd -w. Freq. inrtftftr, wfir.
Ri (^f>r) ‘ to leap,’ ‘ to cover.’
Pres. ^TfiT, ; 1st praet. RT^pTTiT, R^pfhrT ; 2d praet.
rrr, ; 3d praet. W ; 1st fut. Win ; 2d fut.
UJ Hr -?r ; imp. RTOrt, ; pot. RiHiMIrT , ; bened.
TENTH CONJUGATION.
267
; cond. -IT. Pass. Caus. T3PnrfTT.
Desid. -7T. Freq. ^^Htt.
O C\ 1 Cs
It is also a verb of the fifth conjugation.
(^T»j) ‘ to stop.’
This rejects its nasal before the conjugational sign, and
before ; also before the terminations of the first praeterite in
the third, which it optionally takes.
Pres. ^cT^rrfir ; ist praet. *roT¥T7T; 2d praet. 7TOTOT ; 3d praet.
^roro^ or sswwfhr ; ist fut. wforwT; 2d fut. ^rfWnrnr ; imp.
5TVTTT; pot. ^rT^Thmr; bened. ^T«rnT; cond. ^fwrxq^. Pass.
Caus. ^rwnifiT. Desid. fri wfwrfrr. Freq. irrorwra,
rrreroftfir, Trrerfhi.
It is also a verb of the fifth conjugation, ^rertfff, &c. In
the same manner are inflected Tn»j, and having
the same meaning.
‘ to cover.’
A verb of the class T^Tf^. It takes different forms in the
third praeterite, Atmane-pada.
Pres. wHTTfff, *rrrft^; ist praet. ’srojrrrPT, *rojnrl7T ; 2d praet.
front, ITOT^; 3d praet. ^WTtlfT, wftF, ^TOT^ or profit; ist fut.
WftrfT, WtllTI ; 2d fut. T?rftvqf?T -W, -W ; imp. THTfJTW,
wtitrif ; pot. THtrhrnr, sjnftrr ; bened. sfhzhTT, or ;
cond. VHwftuiif -ft. Pass. Caus. W1CTH. Desid.
fTrorftnfw -tt, frTOrflwfrT -w, ffroftwffT Freq. wrorft.
Tenth Conjugation.
224. Verbs of this conjugation take for their conjugational
sign technically termed ftu^r ; and they extend the insertion
to all the tenses except the benedictive, Parasmai-pada. ^ is
converted to u, and I? becomes before a vowel. The
indicatory tT of the sign requires the substitution of ^TT for a
radical medial ^sr, and of the Guna equivalent for any other
short medial vowel.
a. Before the terminations of the conjugational tenses all
Mm2
268
VERBS.
verbs of this class insert SR , that is, ; whilst as they all
take the augment ^ in the two futures and conditional, there
is in all these tenses a vowel, before which the conjugational
sign ^ becomes t*, and then
b. In these modifications of the base, verbs of the tenth
class are analogous to the causal mode of verbs ; and this
analogy extends to other particulars, such as the insertion of
cei’tain augments, as tj, if, &c., before the conjugational sign.
c. The analogy to the causal mode is still more evident in
the identity of the construction of the third praeterite. It is
formed with the terminations of the first praeterite, pi'eceded
by (second class, 2. p. 132), and with a reduplication of the
root, agreeably to the rules already given for the causal
(r. 210 ./-/. p. 147).
d. Although not peculiar to the causal, an analogy is also
presented to it in common with derivative forms in the second
praeterite, which in this class is formed with the auxiliary
verbs (r. 196).
e. Verbs having a medial do not make it long when they
are said to belong to the class fort, that is, have an indicatory
; and ^ or any other radical short vowel is unchanged in
the class , the verbs of which are said to have an indi-
catory final ^T.
f. Verbs of this conjugation, with the conjugational sign
attached, are considered to be polysyllabic, and therefore do
not take the frequentative mode ; nor can they be considered
as having a causal mode, since it is the same with their own,
and it is only necessary to substitute a causal for an active
signification to the same inflexions.
g. All verbs signifying ‘ to speak’ or ‘ to kill’ may be con-
jugated in the tenth, as well as in the class to which they
belong, as may a variety of other verbs ; and most of the
verbs which belong to this conjugation may be inflected also
in the first. The number of verbs is therefore somewhat
indefinite ; but from the uniformity whieh prevails amongst
TENTH CONJUGATION.
269
them, not only in the employment of the conjugational sign,
but in the formation of the second and third praeterites, and
the insertion of the augment ^ in the other tenses, they may
be regarded as offering fewer difficulties than the verbs of any
other conjugation.
The verb which is given as the type of the conjugation is
£ to steal,’ which admits of both Padas.
'Nkufy
Present, 4 1 steal,’ &c.
klw^:
ku;u(u:
kK'iir^%
kkw.
ktT.tpzT
kkus*
kn^ttr:
kn"q?r
'^TCO.'ff
krxuvrf
First praeterite, 4 1 stole,’ &c.
ss-tTkiifi
toot
wrnrstT:
Wtirnr ^kkri
Second praeterite (in both Padas), 4 1 have stolen,’ &c.
krrirmm
kTt’tmTftnr ^Tr^T^rm^:
kk^mmTr: krtrrmT^:
'O
or ktr^rrg^fT, kk*rp^fiR or &c.
Third praeterite,
4 1 had stolen,’ &c.
CvV) C O
*T^?ts4
c o
kkfwrfor
kfkWTPH
ktirwr
First future, 4 1 shall steal,’ &c.
r: kVkwrw:
kknrfmsr: kTifwmr
kkfwrcT krdkrTR:
kkftnrrir kirnrfrre? kitf mvi rui^
ktr/rnriTT krckirrnnk kkftnrrsir
kkftnrr km^rra kkfwrc
kkftrarrftT
^rcftrnrftr
kkftranw
Second future, ‘ I will or shall steal,’ &c.
kkftrnre:
kftftnqTr:
krrftr'trR:
k'Rftrsnr
kkftrcif^T
krrftrcT kTnwnk
kkftntr^
kkftmsr
krnqtq^ri
270
VERBS.
^tr^:
^Tc§WR
^rarn^
Imperative, ‘ Let me steal,’ &c.
^TUTR
■^ktTTT
Potential, ‘ I may steal,’ &c
^frr^r
^tTTm
^rnrret
^TTWi
^TOTTT
'qU.4(E?
’srktta
^TT^nr
^ftwi
■^rrnm
^TTTTrT
vn:^:
■qkMM
^'twcIt: <i^-iuvii
^Tr^nr ^frttrqTrri
■^lUIOT
Benedictive, ‘ I pray I may steal,’ &c.
^nfmjr
<t*5iw
,*fl*5 ivi
■^TOtTR?
■^idturl
^rtstrnr:
^TrfiR'hrr: wtrflwri
^Ttfwtp ^ftrtfhrrerf
^'ufiiai)a4
Conditional, ‘ I will steal, if,’ &c.
wnfTTOTJT
vr^Tlfi?-arR w
^kfWiT WkUlUfri
wrrfttTirfn ^rktafiiur^r
wrtfk^jyi: Wkfturvjf
^rtfwirr
'-S ■q’l <Pq *qsg
The remaining forms are.
Pass. 3d praet. Caus. ^bnrnr. Desid. ^fp
tfW*.
‘ to disrespect.’
This substitutes ^ for the radical vowel in the reduplication
of the third praeterite.
Pres. ’M J^frf ; 1st praet. ^n^rT; 2d praet. ’kgnmiH ; 3d praet.
THlfggH ; I st fut. ^nTTTT; 2d fut. ^ajPcrcrfiT ; imp. ; pot.
xHgaiH ; bened. ^TTrT ; cond. ^T^ftTOTH. Pass. VTgk ri . Desid.
*rf^fWw.
to hurt,’ ‘ to pain.’
Pres. ’Hjplfrf ; xst praet. ; 2d praet. ^|i!ikT4.TT ; 3d
praet. 1st fat. ^rffx?7TT ; 2d fut. ^ff^rarfrr ; imp.
pot. ^rfxfiT; bened. ^fqiw ; cond. ^rrffxnqrr. Pass. ^|a?.
Desid. ^rft^fq^fjr.
^15 ‘ to send.’
Pres. TTF5irflT ; 1st praet. xh^inr; 2d praet. ; 3d praet.
TENTH CONJUGATION.
271
irffSHTT ; i st fut. ircsftnrr ; 2d fut. ; imp. 1*75x17;
pot. p«^riv ; bened. ^TTiT ; cond. p^fq-air^. Pass.
Desid. pf?5f3fWlT.
‘ to wink,’ ‘ to close.’
This and most other verbs make the medial long through-
out (r. 224). They have the vowel optionally short in the
third praeterite ; when the reduplicated vowel is changeable
to ^ (r. 210. j. p. 148).
Pres. '^srprirfH'; 1st praet. WTirnixr^; 2d praet. cRTPTitrt*T ; 3d
praet. or 1st fut. ^npifnirr ; 2d fut. ^ronrornr ;
imp. ; pot. 7770*17 ; bened. csnpni; cond. wTnTtffxrsnr.
Pass. ^mnw. Desid. f^^iprfq'Ernr.
ofr^l 4 to speak.’
This is the first of a class rejecting a final and the
radical vowel therefore is unchanged : in this verb it is option-
ally changed to ^ in the reduplication of the third praeterite.
Pres. ofrsjirfTT ; 1st praet. WTtWrT ; 2d praet. TrxpTTTrrFf ; 3d
praet. or ; 1st fut. XRXTfwr ; 2d fut. cS^ftixqfTT ;
imp. 'SfivntK; pot. TT^xfiT; bened. TiEtrn? ; cond. ■^ofrgfiq'n^. Pass,
spinr. Desid. f^TnqfxnrfiT.
Other verbs of this class are,
WF5 ‘ to count 7i?57f7, 'M7'775rl.
^7 * to contract *a^j4<rr.
77 ‘ to astonish oFfufrT, «-=l<*s7 .
ttpi * to count:’ nTriifiTT. But this optionally takes ^ in
the third praeterite : or vnfixTOTT.
‘ to speak :’
htt 4 to advise W^ftT, WMlrf .
XT? ‘ to take JT^xr7,
taiT ‘ to sound t^PrftT,
77 ‘ to tie :’ 777Tf7, ^^77 .
7^ 4 to go 7*77^7 •
T^T ‘ to tie 7^7T7, 7177^.
Y‘ to contract ^777.
272
VERBS.
1JJT ‘ to seek inruw. RMjiTTT.
c c c
rg £ to make T^rafw, .
T^r ‘ to leave T^irfw, ’R llg 7T . It also makes -»R rt .
TO ‘ to surround :’ TOqfrf, *HTOTT .
TO ‘ to choose :’ TOTOff, WTOH;.
TO ‘ to speak ill :’ TOqfff, TOTTmr.
tjtvt ‘ to be weak :’ WTOEfff, TOmTO .
SRT 4 to sound :’ SRnrfFT, TOSTTO.
^ ‘ to envy :’ ^q«pr?r .
‘ to sound :’ ^Rufir, ^m^RTT .
TOTO ‘ to play,’ as a child.
Pres. ■sJTRqfTT; ist praet. ; 2d praet. ;
3d praet. ^ry ^.MTTH ; ist fut. ^imfqTrT ; 2d fut. ^TlfwnT ; imp.
^rnTTO ; pot. ; bened. TOiiuiTtf ; cond. ^htotV'TO.
?tr ‘ to be feeble.’
Pres. ; ist pr0et. ; 2d praet. 3d
praet. ; ist fut. ^qfq?!T ; 2d fut. qrqfqTtrfrT ; imp. ;
pot. 'sqqw ; bened. 3TOnT ; cond. ^rqftpqir . Pass, TOTO.
Desid. f^yqfqqm
‘ to be able.’
This substitutes TO*T in its inflexions : see the same root in
the first conjugation, p. 169.
Pres. TOroffT ; ist praet. ; 2d praet. TOqqiHm ;
3d praet. ’Hf^qr^TT ; ist fut. q^finn ; 2d fut. qr^qurmfn ; imp.
QraTO; pot. cf^nriT; bened. TOWHrf ; cond. ^q^qfWfT.
3mT ‘ to sound or utter,’ ‘ to celebrate.’
t
This substitutes for the radical penultimate in all the
tenses except the third praeterite, where it is optional.
Pres. ; ist praet. ; 2d praet. •^l^q'RTn ;
3d praet. ’CTs't^TfrT or ist fut. qNHTOT ; 2d fut.
^tftrarnr; imp. qNhriT ; pot. bened. ofr^RT; cond.
^ ^htfzrnnr . Pass. qIPsq*. Desid. fsnft’Sfqqfir.
TENTH CONJUGATION.
273
Tp ' to proclaim.’
Pj •es. TfrquflT ; ist prmt. ^nftWiT; 2d praet. vrenT^U ;
3d praet. ; ist fut. ^TqniTrr ; 2d fut. ; imp.
xn 4 Xi rT ; pot. ttViritt ; bened. TiTOTi^; cond. ^TfaftrarTT. Pass.
wanf. Desid. jpnqnrqfrT.
fq (fiq»r) ‘ to collect.’
This verb optionally substitutes ^tt for its vowel, when it
also substitutes v for it. As belonging to the class fint, it
makes the vowel short, so that 'srr becomes ^T.
Pres. -^WTT -W, xjnnfrf -k ; ist praet. ’STWqTT -7T, SSMUUit; 5
2d praet. ^xrm^oRn:. wqT^'rfi ; 3d praet. *r*fNtT7T -7T, -71 ;
1st fut. ■■emuTHi, ^afarii ; 2d fut. ^xmnqfiT -w, ^xrfM'arffr ;
imp. ^fxinw -711, WH7T -7TT ; pot. ^xnnr -7T, ^n^TT -7T ; bened.
^^nTTTT or '^UTirf , or ^-qfqxd? ; cond. ^TTrqupT -7T,
SH-MUf^'OTTI -7T.
See f%, fifth conjugation.
r*T7T (f^fiT) * to think.’
Pres. f^TnrfTT ; ist praet. ^rf^rPTTT ; 2d praet. f?R?nTTm7T ;
3d praet. ^Tfqfig^TH ;; ist fut. f^rlfqTn ; 2d fut. f^^fqxtrfiT ;
imp. f^tTXTW ; pot. f^tTTTTT ; bened. ; cond. ^rf^TTfxRnT .
Pass. fi^W. Desid. faf^fwTT.
frcr ‘ to know,’ 4 to make known.'
This verb is one of those said to have an indicatory 17.
Pres. sltnifTT; ist praet. W'HITT 5 2d praet. sHTTn^rR ; 3d
praet. ^TtsnTTT or ^nftsRTT ; ist fut. sHTfurfT ; 2d fut. irqfqtqfTT ;
imp. srqiTK; pot. sPHTTr; bened. ^'OTTrT ; cond. W'rfVnTTT. Pass,
srcnr. Desid. frTsiTifir'rfrT.
The other verbs of the class frriT in this conjugation are,
^ ‘ to pound Wtrfff, ^nrqTT, .
‘ to pound : ^frilfTT, ,H-'cm?7T, ■« -=fl -q ? ri .
; as above.
■rm ‘to feed:’ niRTfrr, ’srcfhnTrT.
Wi9 ‘ to five RFFTUTT, 7T , ^rNTo'iT .
N n
274
VERBS.
to give pain.’
This makes the radical vowel optionally short in the third
praeterite, when the vowel of the reduplication is made long.
Pres, tftrqfff ; ist praet. *sqlTqH ; 2d praet. tfteqrq'Sfin; ; 3d
praet. ^q^fqTiT or qrfqqTr^.
The same applies to the following verbs :
4 to live wfsnfiqTT or ^yflfijnnT.
\ \
<frq ‘ to shine <ffarqTTT, or ^fi^qq .
vrm 4 to speak mqqfir, ^rnrHTTiT or
KTH ‘ to shine >mrqfiT, *rf%>TT?TiT or wqhrqiT.
>rm ‘ to shine HTOtrnr, q»fswra»r or .
\ \
‘ to close :’ qteqfiT, or
qq ‘ to throw.’
A penultimate qj may remain unchanged in the third
praeterite.
Pres. qivjqffT ; 1 st praet. qrqrqq^ ; 2d praet. tnvhjWrH ; 3d
praet. qrqlqqTT or ; 1st fut. qr^fqrfT; &c.
tt 4 to fill.’
t
Pi •es. qTTqfiT ; ist praet. qrqTCqTT ; 2d praet. qRilim'H ; 3d praet.
^rcrTxnrrr ; ist fut. xnrfwr ; 2d fut. qmqqrfff ; imp. qTiqq ; pot,
qTTqTT; bened. qTOTTT ; cond. VfqRfqTqrT.
qiT, 4 to cross over,’ is given in similar forms, except in the
third praeterite, which is qrqqTCTT .
qq 4 to declare.’
This and some other verbs do not substitute ^ for the
radical vowel in the reduplicate syllable of the third praeterite.
Pi •es. qrqqfiT; ist praet. -umqqH ; 2d praet. qrqqr^qrR; 3d
praet. qrqqqq ; ist fut. qrqfqrn ; imp. qTqqff ; &c.
The other verbs that come under this example are,
«? 4 to tear ?TTqfw, qj^trT.
FTC 4 to hasten jqrcqflT, Wr^rT.
q? 4 to trample qrrqffT, qmq^iT .
TqUT 4 to touch wmnqfff, *TqwTSTfT .
TENTH CONJUGATION.
275
e to remember wrrqfrT, ^TTTWrT.
‘ to spread TfTTTtlffT, ’H'rURTTTT.
‘ to make effort,’ and ^ ‘ to surround,’ have two
forms : ^rg^UTT or wf^FfT, WTPfT or ^tr^tt .
Tft ‘ to please.’
This verb optionally prefixes vf to the sign of the conjugation.
Pres. TffaniTTT -ff, TrnnifiT -w ; i st praet. wftrrcr^ -tt. ’srqT^TTrT -TT ;
2d praet. TfhrnrRTTT, irnt^TiTTH ; 3d praet. ^qlnrurTT -tt, ^Ttfrn^nT -IT ;
1st fut. Tfurf-qTiT, irrqftfTT ; 2d fut. TiiTnfti'aifTT -tt, ■Rnrni'crfw ;
imp. jfftrnpr -HT, Tmnrw -rlf ; pot. irftrnTT^ -TT, TrnrOTT -TT ; bened.
TnuTTf , Tffcrftrtfte, Trnrftrtfte ; cond. wirlwfWfT -tt, ^m^rfwTT -it.
For the rest, see 'Eft of the ninth conjugation. So also
‘ to shake,’ makes v?prfrT or W^fTT, &c.
CS
(frfo) ‘ to advise.’
Pres. *n*nrnr ; 1st praet. w^nTT -IT; 2d praet. m*nrprr?T ;
3d praet ^Tmrr^nr -it; 1st fut. jpgnjfrr ; 2d fut. H^nrcjnT --ft;
imp. Jf^niTT — rfT ; pot. *n*ni7T -TT ; bened. n^rnr, JT^ftreT?; cond.
st»paftrnnT -TT. Pass. rrWff. Desid. ftrH'^lfWfT -W.
\
So ^nr ‘ to speak falsely,’ TTfa' ‘ to support,’ as a family,
and ■qfg' 6 to contract.’
* to melt,’ ‘ to cause to melt or fuse.’
This optionally takes the augment ^ before the conjuga-
tional sign.
Pres. cTTTrqfiT or 75nr*rfTT ; 1st praet. WcSTrnTTT, ^tthtt^ ;
2d praet. HTtnrRTTT, pSnnTTJT'RT ; 3d praet. *TT3fc5^, ;
1st fut. p5nrfwr, Hnrfwr; 2d fut. ■FST^ftrarfiT, htwtbtttt; imp.
WTTPTTT, Tmnrff; pot. TTR^tt, •FSFTSTT; bened. T^nm?; cond.
’STSTq-R'aTrT , ^^Tufq-arrT . Pass, Caus. T^TT^TrT or
Desid. fHHlwnT -TT. Freq. <^FfhrflT, HT^dffr, HT^firT.
eft is also a verb of the fourth and of the ninth conjugation,
and it is to them that the derivative forms are to be referred.
sni ‘ to laugh at.’
Pres. ^Ttrrnr ; 1st praet. ^rt^; 2d praet. irtuTRTO ; 3d
n n 2
276
VEKBS.
praet. ^srsrsnhr or wlSTV* ; Tst fut. srffftnTT ; 2d fut. ;
imp. srtTTiT ; pot. ?lf^7T ; bened. ^refnr; cond. ^rtfa-anr.
Pass. snif*. Desid. f^inref*.
*TR * to tranquillize.’
Pres. TTTR^ffT ; 1st praet. ^rthtr ; 2d praet. ^TPHTT^RTR ;
3d praet. --SH HR* or wfiR* ; 1st fut. HTRP77TT ; 2d fut.
TrRTtrerf* ; imp. HR'q* ; pot. hr^K ; bened. ^n^T* ; cond.
"SRTHurar*. Pass. hirr. Desid. fWRfWir.
On the conjugation of Verbs in different voices, fyc.
225. The forms of the roots which have been given in the
preceding pages are those which are usually assigned to them
by native grammarians. The student must not be surprised,
however, if he finds occasional departures from the models
here specified, or a verb inflected in a different conjugation,
or in a different Pada, from that in which he will have found
it here represented. As to variations of meaning, they will be
frequent ; for in the examples cited, the principal signification
only of each verb has been purposely stated, in order not to
occasion doubt or perplexity in an early period of study. The
other senses will become familiar by practice. Of the varia-
tions of inflexion, the greater number are ascribed by gram-
marians to poetical license, or even to error (trt*) ; but it
may be doubted if they do not, sometimes at least, arise from
circumstances which have been yet imperfectly investigated in
the history of the grammar of the Sanskrit language. The
variations of import are no doubt often imputable to the liber-
ties taken by Sanskrit writers, relying upon the purport in
which they employ any particular verb being rendered intel-
ligible by the context of the passage in which it occurs. Some
part of the uncertainty, however, proceeds from an incomplete
analysis, and the want of examples to illustrate the abstract
term which is used to express the meaning of the root.
Authors consequently disagree as to the interpretation. How-
CHANGE OF PADAS OR VOICES.
277
ever, these difficulties need not embarrass the student : he
must be contented to take the verb as he finds it, and must
not look upon its regular grammatical type as absolutely
unalterable.
226. There is one class of modifications, and that the most
frequent, which is recognised by grammarians. A simple verb
may be inflected in one Pada, and when compounded with a
preposition may be inflected in the other, either in its primi-
tive, or in a modified sense. A fewr of these compound verbs
have been already noticed, but it may be useful to extend the
number of instances, arranging them in alphabetical order.
'5m 4 to throw,’ preceded by any preposition, may take
either Pada ; as, with fvjt ‘ to throw off fa or
f*RftJTT ‘ he casts off the bond.’
*3T^r 4 to reason,’ preceded by any preposition, may take
either Pada ; as, w ith ^srp 4 to throw off’ or ‘ repel,5 --up'r^rf tjnj
‘ let him remove sin ‘ he removes that :’ also with
TW , as -7T.
f, which in its simple state admits of either Pada, is
restricted to one or other according to the prepositions with
which it is compounded, and the meanings thence derived :
^•HcRlfrt ‘ he imitates 4 he overcomes 4 he
informs against 4 he reviles ;’ TP^^T jrix 4 he wor-
ships Hari ;5 4 he changes,5 as a property ;
4 he polishes;’ tnr^ftffT 4 he does well;5 4 he offers
violence to,’ as a female ; wftfPT TXPtrr: 4 Ravana carries
off Sita also 4 to recite ;’ as, imn: TT^TT 4 he recites hymns.’
^ is used with ffr to imply change or production of some kind
or other ; and when the verb is used intransitively, or the
production is confined to sounds, the Atmane-pada only is
employed ; otherw ise, the Parasmai-pada ; as, '5T^‘T 4 the
scholars change,’ i. e. they learn ; ^TTP^fi: 4 the
singer varies his notes ;5 but fip^ fit iff =tr: 4 passion trans-
forms the heart.5
4 to scatter,' when the act of an animal or bird, takes the
t 5
278
VERBS.
Atmane-pada after ?rp, and inserts a sibilant :
4 the cock throws up (the earth, either for pleasure or to make
a hole to lie down in) ;’ but 4 the woman
scatters flowers.’
TiP, 4 to go,’ without a preposition takes the Atmane-pada,
signifying 4 being engaged in’ or 4 assiduous,’ or 4 becoming
manifest’ or 4 developed in;’ as, Pjfip ’arff: 4 the under-
standing is engaged in (the study of) the Rig-veda ;’ ’RUUMiq
TiPTT 4 he is assiduous for study;’ T,PPT sffRP 4 the
Sastras are manifested (or fully understood) in him.’ So with
TP and ptj in the same meanings : TPTWTT, PTTPfPT ; but not
with PP, as PTiTPfrT. So with ^tt prefixed, meaning 4 to ascend,’
as a heavenly body, not as any thing else : WTPP7T PPf: 4 the
sun ascends but ’RVPiTPTTT v*rt 4 the smoke rises.’ Also with
fp, meaning 4 motion of the feet ptv fp"P>PT Pntf 4 the horse
trots well ;’ but TPPiTPffT pfpt: 4 the joint splits.’ So with TP
or P, implying 4 power’ or 4 valour :’ TPPPT, PPiPT 4 he is
mighty’ or 4 valiant ;’ but TPPTRfw 4 he comes’ or 4 approaches ;’
p^rnffT 4 he goes’ or 4 departs.’
4 to buy,’ is restricted to the Atmane-pada, when pre-
ceded by ^P, pff, or fp. The two first have the same mean-
ing as the simple verb, 4 to buy;’ the latter means 4 to sell:’
VRP pirpflpfiT, 4 he buys ;’ fp rfludw 4 he sells.’
pftp, 4 to play,’ takes the Atmane-pada after *tt, ptp, PTT,
and ; as, Prrpfer 4 he plays much ;’ ’JHrfiUrf 4 he plays
like ;’ P fofcfep 4 he plays again ;’ 4 he plays well’ or
4 completely :’ but not if influences the government of the
case ; as, PTOPPiPPpitTfrT 4 he plays with the boy nor if, with
PP , it denotes 4 making a noise ;’ as, PpfeTTT 4 the wheel
creaks.’
fpfp 4 to throw,’ preceded by Trip, :pfp, or pfk, is confined to
the Parasmai-pada : Ptfirmpfr 4 he throws much’ or 4 beyond ;’
^fPTTjpfia' 4 he throws on ;’ pfrfstpfiT 4 he throws or sends back.’
Eijt with PP takes the Atmane-pada : p^jnp 4 he sharpens
the weapon ;’ TTP.pPTP PF^P 4 it aggravates (his) grief.’
CHANGE OF PADAS OR VOICES.
279
Tffi, ‘ to go,’ has a variety of prefixes, and consequent modi-
fications of form and sense. With >ht prefixed, and used in
the causal form to signify ‘ to have patience,’ it takes the
Atmane-pada : TTTTfT ‘ wait or delay a little.’ With
tut it takes the Atmane-pada in an intransitive sense :
‘ the sentence is plain’ (or is coherent) ; Trfafa:
‘ he goes with his friends but jjth TPl^sfrT ‘ he goes to the
village.’
n ‘ to swallow,’ preceded by fTO, takes the meaning of
‘promising’ or ‘uttering,’ and is conjugated in the Atmane-
p; da : tjt?t TrfrTtW ‘ he promises a hundred (rupees)
ipiTfr UNltrf ‘ he proclaims the qualities of the prince :’ other-
wise *rfiRf?r ‘ he swallows a mouthful.’ It takes the
Atmane-pada after ^ ; ’^'^rfvRTT ^ITnn'ff ftfSTT^: ‘ the goblin
swallows blood.’
‘ to go,’ with "a? in the sense of * going astray’ or
' ‘ departing from,’ takes the Atmane-pada ; as, vwhpaTTT 4 he
deviates from virtue :’ not if it is intransitive : ‘ the
tear overflows:’ but it is so used with or with *T»T, ‘3?,
and ?rr, connected with a noun in the instrumental case ;
(or tt»tt ‘ the king rides writh (in) a chariot.’
ftr, ‘ to conquer,’ is limited to the Atmane-pada after tfTT
and f% ; as, TOVTUTT, ‘ he conquers.’
$rr ‘ to know,’ without a preposition, if used in certain
senses intransitively, is conjugated in the Atmane-pada ; *rftbfl
WRlw ‘ he engages (in sacrifice by means of) Ghee :’ also
after in the sense of ‘denying;’ ■SFrrr^'rTRlw ‘he denies
the (debt of a) hundred (rupees) :’ after Trfff, in the sense of
‘ acknowledging ;’ TtfrTirPTl'fl’ ‘ he acknowledges the hun-
dred :’ and after in that of ‘ demanding’ or ‘ expecting
rf It is used in the Atmane-pada without a prepo-
sition, and transitively when the result of the action reverts to
the agent ; as, jtt 'srpfffT ‘ he obtains a cow :’ not else ; as,
HTtR WPTTiTT ‘ he knows (the dwelling of) his mother:’ nor if
the verb be preceded in such a sense by a preposition ; as,
2S0
VERBS.
«T PtHtti Ph ‘ the fool does not recognise (or obtain)
heaven.’
trif, ‘ to guide,’ in certain senses takes the Atmane-pada :
as, ‘ to excel in iTHTT ‘ he excels in the Sastra — ‘ to
determine Wrsf ‘ he ascertains the principle.’ Also after
■3TT, meaning ‘ to lift ‘ he lifts up a staff.’ After
"3TJ, implying ‘ to invest with the sacred cord qrTc3'T^'Jfaff ‘ he
invests the boy with the string :’ — ‘ to hire ^ujaRi
‘ he hires servants.’ After f^, signifying * to pay ;’ fa^Hfl
‘ he pays the tax :’ — ‘ to grant’ or ‘ endow ;’ ^ttt P=Mtnr ‘ he
grants a hundred’ (for some religious purpose): — ‘to restrain,’
when the object is in the person ; ‘ he restrains
wrath :’ but not if the object be in another ; jtct: '^TV fail'd
■5TW. ‘ the pupil assuages the wrath of the teacher:’ nor if the
object be corporeal ; ‘ he turns away his cheek.’
tt, ‘ to praise,’ is conjugated in the Atmane-pada after ’srr ;
VHl'Td ‘ he praises.’
(HT, used intransitively after TJT and fa, takes the Atmane-
pada ; ^WCITt, fafTTW wcf: ‘ the sun shines :’ also if it mean ‘ to
warm or heat a part of one’s own body ;’ '3'^tlW, farRTT V I fili
‘ he warms his hand :’ not if a part of another ;
TjTfanT^tfa ‘ Chaitra warms or burns the hand of Maitra :’ nor
when it means * to melt or burn substances as, THRiw-tfiTfrT
‘ the goldsmith melts the gold.’ When it means ‘ to
practise devotion,’ it is used in the fourth conjugation in the
Atmane-pada ; TrotH THTOTmt: ‘ the ascetic practises penance.’
According to some, it is confined to the Atmane-pada after ^r*J,
in the sense of ‘ penitence ;’ as, ^T*T?nTW ‘ he repents.’
(^T*?) ‘ to give,’ when preceded by ^T, in any other sense
than that of ‘ setting open,’ as the mouth, &c., takes the
Atmane-pada ; as, ‘ he receives wealth ;’ fcraTHRW
‘ he acquires knowledge :’ but ^TTfprTfw ‘ he opens his
mouth,’ ‘ he yawns :’ not, it is said, if it be another’s mouth ;
as, faxtfffararr: ‘ the ants open the mouth of
the grasshopper.’ The Parasmai-pada is also used after ^tt in
CHANGE OF PADAS OR VOICES.
281
other senses ; as, ^tT^TftT TU: ‘ the physician lays
open the boil vpfl ^nTtTrfiT ‘ the river lays open (under-
mines) the bank.’
<fT ((fnrr ), ‘ to give,’ is used in the Xtmane-pada after *m,
either singly or with another preposition, with a noun in the
third case, having the sense of the fourth ; ^ttctt TEnratW or
‘ he gives to the female slave.’ If the sense of the
third case is preserved, the Parasmai-pada is retained ; Jfren
VT TNFgT«3TTT fTTTTT ‘ he gives wealth by the slave girl to the
Brahman.’
4 to see,’ with and used intransitively, takes the
^tmane-pada ; * he considers well : so does TTT ‘ to
ask,’ as a boon ; as, srfrNt TITT 4 he asks for Ghee :’ and
‘ to ask,’ with ttt ; as, 4 he takes leave of :’ and with
TTN, used intransitively ; as, 4 he inquires.’
H»T, 4 to eat,’ takes the ^tmane-pada ; HTi 4 he eats
boiled rice :’ also 4 to possess ;’ T fanfare: 4 the
king possessed the earth :’ also 4 to suffer TIT PT
‘ the old man suffers hundreds of pains :’ not if it mean 4 to
protect ;’ as, rrwr 4 the king protects the earth.’
T* ‘ to bear,’ with Tjfr. prefixed, is conjugated in the
Parasmai-pada ; TjnTpTftT 4 he endures’ or 4 forgives.’
■qrr, 4 to restrain,’ varies the Pada according to different
meanings and prefixes. With ttt used intransitively it takes
the Atmane-pada ; rHj: 4 the tree spreads :’ but ^rRTSTTT
^TTlT’j £ he draws the rope from the well :’ unless part of
one’s own body be intended ; as, 'STTqWff TTftn ‘ he stretches
out his hand.’ Also with tit, meaning 4 to take as a wife ;’
TiTT^ST Tran 4 he takes the maiden to wife.’ In this form the
third praeterite optionally rejects the nasal ; tin: «lrti*jMTTT or
TTRTT 4 Rama wedded Sita.’ If it implies taking the wife of
another, it is NPTTgTTWiT : if it signifies acceptance in
general, it is restricted to the Atmane-pada ; 4 he
accepts the donation.’ It also takes the same voice after tst,
TT, and N*T, not signifying any thing relating to books; as.
o o
282
VERBS.
‘ he puts on the clothes ‘ he takes up
the load ;’ sftjfixT ‘ he stacks the corn but
^'dTH ‘ he studies diligently the Veda.’
xr»T takes the i^tmane-pada after and prepositions ending
with vowels ; as, B’liNs ‘ he makes effort -a HUTti ‘ he sets
after or ‘ according to,’ £ places in order fri^ 7T?^T=rRXJ3)
‘ according to that command he placed them in order fjTzpfi
‘ he appoints ITg^i ‘ he arranges unless it refer to sacrificial
vessels ; JJsRIcflftll THJrifj; ‘ he sets in order the vessels of
O
sacrifice.’
<?T ‘ to sport,’ preceded by ^7, lift:, or fe, is restricted to the
Parasmai-pada ; ^UKHfff £ he rests ;’ TrrcTTTnt £ he goes about
f^Twfrt ‘ he takes rest.’ Preceded by TXf, in the sense of
‘ dwelling with as a wife,’ it takes either voice ; as, Txp^fff or
■jtnTTTr ursjf £ he takes a wife.’
"37;, ‘ to speak.’ is conjugated in the Xtmane-pada, when
signifying ‘ to excel in’ or ‘ to be acquainted with ;’ as,
£ he is learned in the Sastra :’ — ‘ to labour ;’
‘ he labours in the field.’ Also after ?r«T, used intransitively,
and in the sense of ‘ articulate speech ;’ as,
‘ Kacha speaks after or like Kalapa :’ otherwise, £ he
repeats the speech ;’ and TSTn^fTT ^hrrT £ the lute sounds.’ Also
after used transitively to mean ‘ pacifying ;’ as, MrXjT^xrxnR
£ he pacifies the servants :’ — ‘ advising ;’ as, £ he
advises the scholar :’ — or £ communicating with privately ;’
‘ he intrigues with another’s wife.’ Also after f%
and it optionally, implying difference of opinion expressed
articulately, ‘ dispute ;’ as, or T%pxp^f7jT x^tt: £ the
doctors dispute.’ Also after and 7t, to signify articulate
speech uttered simultaneously ; as, trrsntnT: £ the Brah-
mans speak or chaunt together :’ but KWR-if-rf £ the
birds sing together. Also after ^xi, when the result of the
action reverts to the agent ; Tsrqxp^- \PT=BT*U s-^rnT ‘ the man
desirous of wealth reviles improperly otherwise, -‘RiwffT £ he
speaks against’ or £ prohibits.’
CHANGE OF PAI)AS OR VOICES.
283
T? * to bear,’ preceded by u, takes the Parasmai-pada, used
intransitively ; tr! TPT?f7T 4 the river flows.’
‘ to know,’ takes the Atmane-pada after and option-
ally affixes T: to the final in the third person plural ; or
‘ they know well.’
fcTTT, ‘ to enter,’ takes the Atmane-pada after fVf ; fnfasiw
‘he enters in.’
‘ to swear,’ when the effect of the oath reverts to the
speaker, is conjugated in the Atmane-pada ;
* the nymph swears by Krishna.’
vsr ‘to hear,’ after Tm, used intransitively, makes TOTCT7T ‘he
o 7 V J 7 CO
hears well :’ otherwise, ‘ he hears the sound.’
yr, ‘ to stay’ or ‘ stand,’ takes a variety of pi’epositions, and
is conjugated in the Atmanepada after ^r, tt, f=r, used
intransitively ; SH^fdSTT ‘ he waits patiently xrfTTS'W ‘ he stands
or sets forth ;’ ‘ he stands apart’ or ‘ still H OrTSTT
‘ he stojjs or stays w ith’ or ‘ proceeds.’ Also after ^TT, used
transitively ; as, ‘ he assents to the eternal
word. It occurs with ytT also in the Parasmai-pada ; fafwr-
fwfa ‘ he observes the rite.’ Also after Trf, not implying to
stand up or rise, or to exact or demand ; as, £ he
aspires to salvation :’ but ‘ he rises from the stool ;’
‘ he levies a hundred (rupees) from the village.’
After in the sense of performing religious rites, of wor-
shipping, of doing homage to, of uniting with, of shewing
affection to, or of tending towards, as a road, yT takes the
Atmane-pada ; as, ‘ the Brahman preserves
the sacred fire ‘ he worships the sun ;’ Tyqjpi fay'd
‘ he attends on, or does homage to, the king ;’ tt^t ^JPnirqiTrgTf
‘ the Ganges unites with the Jumna ^TWcrfayd ‘ he befriends
the pious ;’ ^TddyfdFd ‘ the road leads to the village.’
It is also used intransitively in the Atmane-pada after dy ; as,
*nw^3il'<4 7yiW?f ‘ he waits or stands by at the time of eating :’
and transitively in either Pada, when expectation, or service
not religious, is implied ; n?dps: SH^yfayfa or Tyfayd ‘ the
0 0 2
284
VERBS.
mendicant waits upon the master’ (for alms) ; vi 3 rimtfrf a fri
or 'imfriVTT iTTCl ‘ a woman waits upon, or ministers to, her
husband.’ FT is also used in the Atmane-pada, without a
pi’eposition, to signify ‘ to manifest dependence upon ;’ as,
ifpff ^TiriTXf faFff ‘ the nymph places her trust in Krishna or
4 to adhere to,’ as a leader ; FTOTfaF frTFff 4 he adheres to, or
follows, Kama and the rest.’
‘ to sound,’ takes the Atmane-pada after ^TT ;
‘ he sounds.’
‘ to strike’ or 4 kill,’ takes the Atmane-pada after ^rr, if
used intransitively ; or when the object is part of one’s self,
transitively ; as, 4 he strikes or fart: ‘ he strikes
his head but ttppcT fan; w?far 4 he strikes the head of
another.’
^ 4 to take,’ preceded by ^PT, implying 4 to take after,’ or
4 act like,’ takes the Atmane-pada ; FlpPTOT 4 horses
take the nature of the father :’ but not if actual presence is
implied ; as, fin!T*p[tfa 4 he takes after his father."
3T, 4 to call,5 used intransitively, takes the Atmane-pada after
FF, fa, fa, and wr ; as, FFSTFW, fa^TFW, fa^FF, i-faFF 4 he
calls out,’ 4 exclaims,’ &c. : also after ^tt, used transitively in
the sense of 4 defiance ;5 4 he defies or challenges the
enemy :’ but Fgrrr^fFfa 4 he calls his son.’
Causal verbs ordinarily take the Parasmai-pada, and seldom
appear in any other ; but, as observed already, they may
assume the Atmane-pada when the effect of the action reverts
to the individual ; as, WTT Hfafafa 4 he causes the place to be
cleaned ;’ wwfa FTWFff 4 he causes himself to be cleansed or
purified.5 There are certain causal verbs, however, which
are limited to one or other Pada, according to their meanings,
nv 4 to be greedy,’ in the sense of 4 deceiving,’ takes the
Atmane-pada ; FTF5 n’t FIT 4 he deceives the child :’ otherwise,
Flfa Flfafa 4 he excites the dog to be greedy.’ So F^T. 4 to
deceive,’ makes FWT 4 he deceives the girl :’ but F?fa
WFfa 4 he drives away the snake.’ So combined with a
DERIVATION.
285
word signifying ‘ falsely’ or ‘ erroneously,’ takes the Atmane-
pada ; as, frraxTT TfrmnT ‘ he causes a false alarm or
proclamation to be made but wg ^TTSfrT TJg ‘ he causes the
word to be accurately repeated.’
According to some authorities, the following verbs do not
admit the Parasmai-pada in the causal mode. HT ‘ to drink,’
gH * to tame/ £ to restrain,’ and ttw ‘ to make effort/ pre-
ceded by ’TT ; w? ‘ to be perplexed/ preceded by trftl ; ‘ to
shine/ Rfr * to dance/ ‘ to speak,’ ‘ to dwell ;’ as, U1UH7T,
vrriTRTtK, ^rnmnrff, ttrrtt, rh?, TrgirR-, Tnrcr?r.
So also V ‘ to give suck ;’ VTtT*Tff . This limitation is however
qualified as above ; and when the object of the action is dif-
ferent from the agent, these verbs take the Parasmai-pada ; as,
^nrr?T trnnrfjr ‘ he causes the calves to drink the milk/ &c.
It is unnecessary to prosecute this subject farther, as it
would be impossible in this place to collect all the variations
that occur in books, and they will be readily recognised when
they are met with.
CHAPTER VI.
DERIVATION.
SECTION I.
Verbal Derivatives.
227. The derivatives of the Sanskrit language are arranged
under two principal classes ; the first comprises those nouns
which are formed from the verb ; the second, those which are
formed from other nouns. To the first is assigned the name
Kridanta, or nouns formed with terminations attached to verbal
roots : to the second, the denomination Taddhita, or nouns
which import relation to other nouns. We may be permitted
to distinguish them as verbal and nominal derivatives, and
proceed to treat of the former.
286
DERIVATION.
228. One principal class of verbal derivatives consists of
what we are accustomed to consider as parts of the verb itself,
or the infinitive and the participles.
Infinitive.
229* The infinitive of the Sanskrit verb is regarded by
native grammarians as an indeclinable noun, formed from the
root by affixing to it the syllables rnpr, leaving ipr.
a. Whatever modifications the root undergoes in the first
future before the affix WT (r. 199), it equally undergoes in the
infinitive before 7T*T , inserting or not inserting and com-
bining with the augment, or with the first letter of the termi-
nation, conformably to the plan pursued in the first future
tense ; as a few examples will suffice to prove.
Verb.
First future.
Infinitive.
^ to go
tTrTT
^ to go
""I*
TTU to grow
irfVTTT
O \
efi to do
t
0 \
n*r to go
JItI!
7Tn
^ to steal
^rrtfwr
^'kftrTnr
0 \
rf to sing
imn
TTT^
to bear
0 N
fsr to conquer
rl 1
*s
to burn
to give
?TrTT
to cut
?rnrr
g"ST to see
xrer to cook
XT5TT
to be
C\
nfrin
O \
to sport
V'tl 1
*3*1
W? to bear
f TTT^T
v 0 \
■?T to stay
Tsrnn
tstnnt
0 \
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. INFINITIVE PARTICIPLES. 287
tttj to creep
( TT&T
o \
6 A
(httt
to hurt
ffjfiRTTT
^ to take
?NtT
b. The Sanskrit infinitive presents a general analogy to the
Latin supine in ‘ urn,’ and in many instances the words are
the same ; as, WIHH ‘ statum £ datum xrrg*? ‘ potum
iftWH ‘junctum;’ ‘ sopitum.’ In others, we have
the same principles of formation displayed ; as makes
so ‘ facio’ makes c factum as ^3^ makes so ‘ unguo’
makes ‘ unctum as may make ^rwr, so ‘ rumpo’ makes
‘ ruptum.’ The augment ^ also is observable in such supines,
as ‘ monitum,’ c domitum,’ &c. ; and in some cases we have it
optionally inserted or omitted, as in ‘ altum5 or ‘ alitum,’ and
the like.
Participles.
230. The participles are of two kinds, declinable and inde-
clinable : to the latter the denomination of Gerunds has been
given by Professor Bopp.
231. The declinable participles are of the present, past,
and future times, diversified according to the Pada, or the
voice, to which they are considered to belong.
a. The indeclinable participles, or Gerunds, are indeter-
minately past.
Present Participles.
232. The present participle may be active or passive ; and
the active is distinguished as belonging to the Parasmai or
^tmane-pada.
233. The present participle, Parasmai-pada, is formed by
adding the syllable ^T7r , technically called snr, to the root :
the initial ^ indicates that the base undergoes, before the parti-
cipial affix modifications which it derives from its conju-
gational peculiarities, especially before the termination of the
third person plural of the present tense : thus H makes
288
DEH1VATION.
‘ being ftr, *nr?( ‘ conquering ;’ rr , rrh ‘ cooking rt^,
‘ going RT, fxj^W 4 drinking ?t, fjTFff ‘ staying ^7^
‘ eating;’ jr<{ 4 killing 7, ^7T ‘ sacrificing f^, <ft*RR;
‘ playing R, Tpnf; 4 producing -pw £ tormenting ^V,
^UlT 4 obstructing R , ^fir ‘ doing Rif, ^h!J7^ ‘ buying
RTOTTR £ stealing and the like.
a. The present participle ending in RTiT is declinable in the
three genders, according to rules already given : see p. 56,
r. 105, &c.
b. In the case of fR^, £ to know,’ RR is optionally affixed in
place of w, making fR!R £ knowing,’ ‘wise’ (see p. 72); as
well as fR^R.
234. The present participle of the ^tmane-pada is formed
by adding 7lTR"R, that is, rttr, to the inflective base of the
verb, as modified for conjugation in the present tense. When,
as in the first, fourth, sixth, and tenth conjugations, the inflec-
tive base ends with RT, then it is prefixed to the termination ;
as, TTR. xrRRTR 4 increasing rr. RRRTR £ cooking :’ in the other
conjugations the termination is added at once to the verb ; as,
7ft, UTRTR ‘ sleeping RT, ??RTR 4 having f, RITOT £ making;’
&c. These participles are declined in the three genders like
nouns in RT; RRRTR:, R^RHT, RRRTR.
a. There are some participial nouns formed with termina-
tions of an analogous character, and having the same letters ;
as, HR, HRTH: ‘ enjoying ;’ H, fRHTOT: £ wearing ;’ ^R, TR7TPT:
£ slaying,’ &c., formed with RTRR : also RRRTR: ‘ purifying,’
£ a purifier,’ ‘ the air ;’ and RR £ to sacrifice,’ RRRTR*. ‘ sacri-
ficing,’ 4 a sacrificer,’ &c., formed with TTHT^.
b. RTTR, £ to sit,’ makes wh?;, -ht, -r, 4 sitting,’ 4 seated.’
235. The present participle of the passive voice is formed
with rtr attached to the inflective base of the present tense ;
as, «fi 4 to do,’ fRiRTT ; TRiRRTOT: -TOT -OTT 4 being to be made :’ RT 4 to
give,’ rftxfTT ; RrRRTR: -rt -R 4 being to be given :’ OTR ; RRRW,
R7RRTR: -RT -R* 4 being to be destroyed HR 4 to go ;’
4 being to be traversed ; RTRRTR R RRTTftRRfT RiTRrTT ROT 4 That
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. PARTICIPLES.
289
which was to be gone over (by the sun), was not untraversed
by him (Hanuman) preceding:’ 7fTTT§: ‘ Bhima
being overwhelmed with arrows.’
Past Participles.
236. There are two participles which follow the analogy of
the second or reduplicate praeterite, one for the Parasmai, the
other for the Xtmane-pada ; which latter serves also for the
passive voice.
Participles of the second praeterite.
237- The participle past of the second praeterite, Parasmai-
pada, is formed by adding technically termed Ui?T, to the
inflective base, as it occurs before the terminations of the dual
and plural numbers of the reduplicate praeterite (r. 195. d.
p. 137).
a. The augment ^ is prefixed to when the inflective
base consists of a single vowel followed by a consonant; also
after certain other verbs. When the verb is reduplicated, so
that the inflective base contains more than one vowel, ^ is
ordinarily not inserted ; as in the following examples.
b. Participles in are declined in the three genders ; as
in p. 71. r. 130.
^ to go ; tfitrm did go ; |frpTR , ffq^TT .
^ to go ; *nfMHx did go ; *TTfT3T?T, ^Tlft^rT .
"St, to make ; did make ; ^TiT.
Jin to go ; fTpJireTT or did go ; igf^T'JT, [,
Jl J 4-qxfk -rl j rjlft, Itf'tl'-I ft , .
im to eat ; did eat ; jTfspTTJT, *TftpT?r .
iTT7] to be awake; snTPrt*, »nrrJT^x did wake; ■JHTRf'R',
,5nn7prFT, ^ *nrT?pft, snrpjwir.
?T7T to give ; did give ; THTifi, rinyrf.
to see ; or did see ;
^fwx,
to cook ; xirfiq^lT did cook ; xjfV^r^, M^mI, .
fir? to urine ; did urine ; rfb|"R,
p p
290
DERIVATION.
^ to weep ; did weep ; R^RR, RRgffi,
f^T to know ; RfiriR or fsrfVjf^W did know ; falVlR,
ftrfRIrT or frfTRTR, firfaf^RiT .
feR to enter ; N N »A « or fafwf^RR did enter, &c. ; as in f^?.
^ to bear ; did bear ; RT3fR, RTg^fl, Rl^TT .
?R to kill ; V( Phth or Rvrr did kill ; RTjn'R, vrrr , &c.
238. The past participle of the reduplicate prseterite in the
i&mane-pada is formed by adding rr to the inflective base,
as it occurs before the termination of the third person singular :
thus tir, ‘ to cook,’ makes trr ; R, 4 to do RRiTCIT ; TR, 4 to
speak,’ 2d praet. rr, part. '3RR; r, ‘ to hear,’ 2d praet.
part. sraqm.! ; &e. These particles are declined in the three
genders like nouns in r.
Indefinite past Participle.
239- The indefinite past participles are two ; one having
an active, the other a passive signification. Neither can be
said to appertain to any particular tense, as they do not, like
the preceding, follow any analogy of construction.
240. The indefinite past participle active is formed by
adding RTg to the root or crude verb, leaving 7R7T; the effect
of the ^ in this or any technical termination being to preclude
the Guna or Vriddhi change of the radical vowel, and to occasion
the rejection of a radical nasal penultimate : 4 to do,’ there-
fore makes ^FRfT 4 was making’ or ‘ made ?UT ‘ to see,’ IWg
4 was seeing’ or ‘ saw ;’ 4 to bite,’ 4 was biting.’ It
is commonly used with an auxiliary verb ; as, Rjr ^ri'NRfw
4 I was doing’ or 4 1 did.’ The declension of the participles
so formed has already been described (p. 57. r. 106).
241. The indefinite past participle passive is formed by
adding to the root or crude verb the affix R, that is, 7T ; the
object of the cfi being, as just mentioned, to bar the substitu-
tion of the Guna or Vriddhi equivalent of the radical vowel,
and eject a penultimate nasal : thus fR, 4 to conquer,’ makes
fvnt 4 conquered ; ’ ^ 4 to hear,’ 4 heard ;’ R 4 to be,’ RtT
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. PARTICIPLES.
291
‘ been g ‘ to take, ^nr ‘ taken ;’ fiFTT ‘ to think,’ f=F^ 4 thought
‘ to bite,’ ‘ bitten and the like.
a. When following a verb ending in an aspirated soft conso-
nant or jr, the termination w is changed to F, and combined
with the final, analogously to the combinations of the same
verb before the w and vj of the tenses (r. 190./') ; as, ‘ to
burn,’ * burnt F*r 4 to bear,’ inr? ‘ borne.’
b. In verbs ending in consonants the augment ^ is occa-
sionally prefixed to the termination w, when a medial ^ or ?
may be optionally changed to the Guna equivalent ; as, ^
4 to weep,’ ^f^TT or TTf^TT 4 wept ;’ fF? ‘ to know,’ fFRH or Ffinr
‘ known.’ «qr?> 4 to take,’ makes the ^ long, and optionally
substitutes the vowel for the semivowel ; as, rpjffa or ipftlT
‘ taken.’ FIT 4 to dwell,’ and FF and FF ‘ to speak,’ substitute
the vowel for the initial ; as, FTFTT ‘ dwelt,’ FF> and FfFrT 4 said.’
c. Verbs ending with ^ commonly reject the nasal ; so fit,
4 to go,’ makes fit ‘ gone ;’ FF 4 to refrain,’ FTT ; tit 4 to be
engaged in,’ T7T ; but FF, ‘ to desire,’ makes F.TFT, &c.
d. The termination of this participle is sometimes changed
to IT; as, FTT, 4 to cook,’ makes FTTTT £ cooked F ‘ to shake,’
VF ‘ shaken :’ also after verbs ending in F or T, not inserting
F ; as, fvnr ‘ to break,’ tvtf ‘ broken ;’ FT 4 to fill,’ Fifr ‘ filled.’
Verbs taking this form are denoted in the lists of roots by an
indicatory (see p. 107).
e. Although not changeable to a Guna or Vriddhi letter, a
radical final vowel sometimes substitutes a different vowel.
Thus, of verbs ending in WT, FT 4 to stay’ makes fwiT ; ITT ‘ to
mete,’ Iff ‘ meted tn ‘ to drink,’ xffrT ‘ drank ;’ ft ‘ to abandon,’
iftiT 4 abandoned :’ or a final ftt may be dropped ; as, FT, ‘ to give,’
makes F^ : and in this root the initial may be rejected, when
a preposition ending in a vowel precedes ; as, FF or FFF
* given away.’ If the vowel of the preposition be f or 7, it
must be made long, when the initial of FT is rejected ; as,
or Fftv.F 4 completely given ;’ ttf or ttff 4 well given.’ ^fr?T,
4 to be poor,’ makes ?fTf?7T 4 poor,’ impoverished.’
p p 2
292
DERIVATION.
f. Verbs ending in substitute ft. for the final, and ^ for
w ; as, ^ ‘ to scatter,’ ctfhjt 4 scattered ^ 4 to be old,’ jft#
‘old.’ ‘to fill,’ and ^ ‘to kill,’ substitute ■grc:; as,
‘ filled,’ ‘ killed.’
Cn
g. Verbs ending in ^ are anomalous in their participles past :
4 to cherish,’ makes ^ ‘ to suck,’ vffrr ; H ‘ to barter,’ rfiir ;
^ 4 to weave,’ TiT ; R 4 to cover,’ ^hr ; ^ ‘ to invoke,’
h. Verbs ending in ^ usually change it to ^TT ; as, stf, ‘ to
meditate,’ makes uttw, 4 meditated ;’ 4 to be dirty,’ RTR ; but
* to sing,’ makes rff?T ‘ sung ;’ 4 to waste,’ ^flrT. ‘ to
shrink,’ makes, when it signifies ‘ being cold,’ sfhr ; when it
means ‘ congealed,’ ; when it denotes ‘ shrunk,’ ^TR.
‘ to decay,’ makes 'ETR ; and R ‘ to surround,’ Rta or Rfa.
i. Verbs ending in ^ optionally substitute ^ ; as, 'gft 4 to
cut,’ 'srrrT or 4 to cut,’ <*T7T or fiR ; '^rt ‘ to pare,’ ^TTrT
or fsFITT.
j. Whether ending in ff or 7f, the past indefinite participle
is declined like nouns in ; Y^b Y^b ^ ; fsrfiR:, rfl,
ftrftR ; fWw:, f»RT, f»R ; &c.
k. The participles formed with from verbs signifying
motion, f^pr ‘ to embrace,’ to sleep,’ ITT ‘ to stay,’ ‘ to
sit,’ ‘ to dwell,’ *nT ‘ to be born,’ * to mount,’ ^ ‘ t°
grow old,’ may be used in an active sense ; as, JTj^T JR: ‘ he
went to the Ganges;’ ^RRUR: ‘he mounted the horse;’
UdHif\yy: ‘ he embraced his son.’ They are also sometimes
used absolutely, in place of the past tense ; as, fwa1: 4 he
stood ;’ JT jr: 4 he went.’
/. The past participle in the neuter gender is often used as
an abstract noun ; as, mfw?f 4 speech,’ 4 that which is spoken ;’
4 sleep,’ 4 repose ;’ Rf%R 4 prattle ;’ 4 laughter ;’
f?R 4 good.’
The following alphabetical list contains many of the verbs
ending in vowels which form the participle past with ?T, or are
in other ways anomalous, and most of those ending in conso-
nants which do not insert the augment
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. PARTICIPLES.
293
to pervade,
PT3 to move, '3T3; ; but ‘ to
worship,’ ^rfw.
PTO to anoint, PT3i.
PT^ to eat, 3TP or PT3, and
sometimes pr. ptr food ;
what is eaten.
PT3T to spread, ptp ; but ‘ to
eat,’ PrfjTTT.
ptr to obtain, pttp.
to kindle,
to be wet, tr or "3R.
■3# to injure, 3n&.
to cover, '3nPW.
■3R to weave, ■gnr.
to go, gone ; also, true :
but when meaning a debt,
3J3T due, owed.
^P? to go, ^p.
3R to shine, o|R.
oRH to desire, crrt or ofifinr.
to extract, ^p.
^iTT to cut, 3R.
«£3i to grow thin, 3i3T.
to draw lines, to plough, Pip.
P< to scatter, ctfHt.
^{P to stink,
PR to go, w^r.
to be angry, ip.
PRP to cry, pip.
liP to be weary,
to be distressed, fgip or
3R to dig, TTTrT.
PfP to be patient, pjtpt.
faf to waste, fspr or T^hir.
to be moist, f^R.
fsjP to throw, fpm.
fpjp to be drunk, fsjfp.
m to agitate, w
PJTTP to shake, Pulp.
to be distressed, fwp.
tr to go, tttt.
JTT? to be thick, PR-.
JJ to void excrement, PP.
np to preserve, pp.
PC to take pains, jpff.
P? to hide, P<f.
P to swallow, pN&.
r?5 to be sad, R5TP.
PP to proclaim, PP or ^finr.
trr to smell, HTcT or pnir.
fpp to be sensible, fpp.
to cover, or ■grf^rT.
to cut, fpp.
PP to touch, ^P.
pp to be born, pip.
pp to pray silently, 33 or pfpp.
pf to kill, PPf.
ijp to be pleased, ^p.
PT to decay, »n&.
PP to yawn, ipt.
P to grow old, phlf.
pp to know, pp or srfp'rf.
PTT to decay, pip.
iift to instruct, pfa-
pi to grow old,
^1 to fly, pfar or ^hr.
294
DERIVATION.
10*? to bow, r? r?.
to perish, y?.
yrf to tie, y^.
firry to clean, fyyi.
Tuy to send, yy or yy.
7m to pare, tt?.
ITT to stretch, THT.
7TTT to be hot, 7T5T.
7J^ to torment, Tjy.
yf to kill, 7TXT.
7PT to be satisfied, 7TF.
to be satisfied, ttst.
7T to cross over, 7fh&.
t
Tmr to abandon, rTyi.
<yy to be ashamed, yy.
gy to be afraid, ^7y.
^ to preserve, yiy or ;yro.
jyyf to pare, Ty?.
73X to hasten, Tnif or flfcH.
fiyy to shine, fiy?.
to bite, y?.
yy to tame, yryr or yfinr.
yy to burn, yry.
fyy to play, ?ry ; to game, STT.
firm to show, fir?.
fyy to smear, firor.
yt to waste, yly or yty.
yty to shine, <fiy.
7* to suffer pain, yy or yy.
yt to kill, yyT.
yy to be made bad, hf.
yy to milk, yry.
f y to fear, to arrange, far.
fST to see, 7TF.
yy to be firm, yy.
y to tear, cffiit.
if to despise, yrry.
yTf to awake, <j irf .
% to sleep, yro.
fyy to hate, fg"F.
VT to have, fyTT.
yx to injure, yyf.
yf to injure, yyf.
V to shake, vy.
7 Cx
VX to injure, vyr.
yy to be proud, vf.
yj to satisfy, TITO,
yy to cook, Triji.
yy to go, yy.
fyy to grind, fy?.
yy to cherish, yy.
yy to stink, try.
Cs.
yx to fill, ij^T or yfry.
yy to mix,
y to fill, yyt.
t
■any to grow fat, yty or ytfT.
rra to ask, yy.
yr to fill, ylr.
yiy to blow, as a flower, yy
with y prefixed, TTOTyrT.
yvy to bind, yf.
yy to know, yf.
O Vi
yy to worship, yy.
yy to break, yry.
fyy to break or divide, fyy.
yy to eat, yyi; to be crooked,
*TrT.
o
yy to wander, ym.
yry to fry, yy.
yf to serve, yfirr.
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. PARTICIPLES.
295
to be mad, HH.
ir to mind, H7T.
HR to be immersed, HR.
to be unctuous, fnH.
fH? to urine, rffe.
HH to liberate, HHi.
H§ to fasten, *p§.
to be foolish, ^ or hr.
hh! to faint, H# or HPcj'ri.
HIT to clean, hf.
H^I to consult, hf.
H to kill, hhI.
t Cv
J-Hnsjto speak barbarously,
to be dull or dirty, *cHR.
HH to worship, ^f.
HIT to strive, HH.
HH to restrain, HfT.
HIT to join, HH.
HV to fight, Hi’.
T5T to colour, Ri.
R to be engaged in, Rl ; so
with ?!TT prefixed, to begin,
’HTRT.
R to sport, to be intent on, R.
ft?H to be separate, fR.
■fTST to injure, ftF.
to kill, Tfcr.
to break, ^R.
to obstruct,
^UI to injure, TjF.
to be angry, ^f or ^fiHiT.
to ascend, h<?.
R to sound, real.
HR to be in contact, H5R.
<HH to gain, Hat.
HSR to be ashamed, H5R or
eiPuiri.
fHSH to smear, fH5H.
fcHUT to be small, f<HF.
fHSH to lick, hsIh.
HSl to embrace, HStH-
H5H to lop, HR.
<HH to covet,
HSH to covet, (HH.
7^ to cut, HjTH.
HH to speak, R.
HH to weave, to sow seed, TH.
HH to vomit, HTHT or HfHTT.
HH to bear, R.
HT to blow, HT7T or HR ; firfro
blown out, extinguished.
HTfr to shine, HR.
fHH to divide, fHH.
fHH to divide, fiR; to be agi-
tated, fHR.
to gain, to find, fHH or
fHH.
fH^T to enter, fHF.
fHH to surround, fHF.
HH to leave, HF.
to be, ^h.
to be great,
to break, ygi.
Hf to choose, nter.
$ to s°> ifr-
UIHi to be able, UR.
UT? to fall, UTH.
UTH to curse, UTH.
UTH to be quiet, uttht ; tr. utPhtt.
UR to praise, UTHT, HURT.
296
DERIVATION.
%*T to have, %T? ; to distin-
guish, fafsis.
to sleep,
STV to be pure, 3T1'.
3R to dry, SJin*.
■SjTTi to injure, trnTf.
ST to injure, sfafr.
to he weary, TJTFtT.
^TT to cook, WHT.
to cook, W!I.
PJPT to embrace, filTC?.
TfftT to breathe ; with fo,
fearer trusted in : but yjfad
breathed.
fqj to increase, STT or sifTrf.
to adhere to,
^ to faint, tr.
ftru to become perfect, ftrg.
to injure,
fWf to be bland, f^v.
vsrg to embrace,
to sound, ^TRT or ^rfaw;
to adorn, with wr prefixed,
’STCpjr or SHiyfHH.
to sleep, ttw.
fcsPT to sweat,
tt*t to let go, to create, wg.
to creep, tot.
to gO, T3R.
to cover,
to touch, wp.
TOitq to swell, T*#?T or FfiTiT.
to thunder, TOTqf.
^ to void ordure,
^?T to strike or kill, ^TT.
to be glad,
jr to be ashamed, fm or fbr.
to rejoice, ^ or ^rf^r.
Future Participles active.
242. The active future participles are two, one in each Pada,
and bear the same relation to the present participles as the
indefinite future does to the present tense ; the terminations
being the same, with tit prefixed. Thus the terminations of
the participles are TtTH or tott and tottr ; and the insertion
or omission of the augment or any other modification of
the base, follows the analogy of the indefinite future tense ;
as, H ‘ to be,’ 4 what will be JR ‘ to go,’ JTfroq^ ;
f»T ‘ to conquer,’ want £ what will conquer ; ’ ^ ‘ to hear,’
^ftxtnr ‘ what will hear.’ This participle is declined Uke
the present participle in ^ ; as, m. f. vrfiraRft,
n.
So TOT, ‘ to increase,’ makes ^ftraRTUT ‘ what will increase
‘ to torture,’ rfn^TTOTT ‘ what will torment ;’ ‘ to liberate,’
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. PARTICIPLES.
297
‘ what will liberate ;’ ^ ‘ to do,’ cfiftnnTTO * what will
do,’ &c. These are declinable like nouns in
Future Participles passive or neuter.
243. A class of future participles, most extensively employed,
is formed by adding to verbs the affixes vr<ai rf, *nr,
or *nnt . Of these, the two first reject the final, leaving TT^T
and whilst the three last leave only tj. The participles
thus formed express not only the sense of futurity, but the
conditions of fitness, probability, or necessity ; or that which
is to be, which ought to be, which may be, or which must be,
as and the like.
a. The participles thus formed are declinable in the three
genders like nouns in ; and in one or other gender, but
especially the feminine and neuter, they assume very com-
monly the office of nouns : thus ‘ to be made or done,’
from ^ * to do,’ becomes f. ‘ a magical rite,’ and n.
* motive’ or ‘ cause.’ Further instances will be specified.
244. ri<=Hrf is attached to the base analogously to the mode
in which the TTT of the first future is connected with it. If the
verb prefixes so does the participle; as, to be,’ vrfqTpa?
‘what is or ought to be ;’ ijy ‘ to increase,’ ‘to be
increased :’ otherwise, as, f^T £ to conquer,’ ‘ to be con-
quered ^ ‘ to make,’ briber * to be made ;’ ‘ to oppose,’
‘ to be opposed ;’ ‘ to bear,’ jfR'oj ‘ to be borne ;’ &c.
245. is attached to the final consonants of verbs
without change, and to final vowels agreeably to the rules of
Sandhi. Short medial vowels, and finals short or long, are
changed to their Gufia substitutes : thus, of the verbs above
cited, * makes ; fw, ;
©v C
^V, fhnffal ; &c. ; * to be,’ * to be increased,’ ‘ to
be conquered,’ &c. This and the preceding termination, w^T,
is annexed to all verbs indiscriminately.
246. The participles formed with if are not so indiscrimi-
nately applied, but are restricted, with exceptions, to certain
Q q
298
DERIVATION.
verbs or classes of verbs. They affect the base also differently,
according to the letters with which the it is combined.
247. Ri^ is added to verbs ending in vowels, when it requires
a final rt or a diphthong to become R, and other vowels to be
changed to their Guna equivalents ; as, RT, RR 4 to be given
% RR 4 to be sung Rf, ini ‘ to be cut f^T, wit c to be
conquered iff, ini ‘ to be guided.’ In some cases the final
vowel being changed to the Guna letter, combines with R, as
if it were a vowel : thus fR, ‘ to be conquered,’ may be RXR
(see r. 5. a. p. 14).
a. rr is added to verbs ending with a labial consonant, R,
tfi, R, R, R, if preceded by R ; as, RR, RPR 4 to be sworn ;’ 75*,
75«I 4 to be acquired ;’ TR, T7R ‘ to be agreeable :’ but 75H,
preceded by RT, requires the insertion of R before R ; as,
W75*«i 4 to be killed also when preceded by RR in the sense
of ‘ commending 7R75*>r: RTR: 4 the virtuous man is to be
praised :’ but not in its primitive sense ; as, RR75«i RR 4 wealth
is to be acquired.’ RR 4 to pray silently,’ and RR 4 to bowT,’
preceded by RT, take TTTr^, as well as rr, making rtr or RR,
^hrihi or RTRJR. The following verbs also, although ending
in labials, form their participles with irr : RR 4 to eat,’ with
RT prefixed, RTRR 4 to be sipped’ or 4 tasted ;’ rr, rt^I 4 to be
ashamed ;’ RR, RUR 4 to be tamed ;’ TR, UR 4 to be spoken ;’
75R, TFPR 4 to be spoken RR, RTR 4 to be sown.’
b. rr is affixed to the following verbs : rr 4 to seek,’ rr ;
RRi 4 to laugh,’ rrr ; RR 4 to worship,’ rir ; rr 4 to worship,’
RRT ; ^TRi 4 to be able,’ rrr ; 7TR 4 to slay,’ RTR ; RR 4 to
endure,’ RRI ; and rr substituted for rr ‘ to kill,’ RtR. Of
these, rr, rr, and RR may also take trr, making rfr 4 to
be divided’ or 'portioned,’ rtrt 4 to be worshipped,’ rttr 4 to
be slain.’ rr is also affixed to the following : rr 4 to speak,’
RT 4 to go,’ rr 4 to be wild,’ rr 4 to restrain,’ if not preceded
by a preposition ; rw 4 to be spoken,’ rtr 4 to be gone’ or 4 prac-
tised,’ R?1 4 to be made frantic or drunk,’ rrr 4 to be restrained :’
but rt may be prefixed to RT. if not meaning a spiritual
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. PARTICIPLES.
299
teacher ; as, ^r: ‘ a country to be gone to ;’ otherwise,
‘ an Acharya’ or ‘ religious instructor.’
c. The following words are considered as irregularly formed
with and are used as nouns, as well as participles :
mfn. ‘imperishable;’ but restricted to companionship
or friendship ; as, ^nraf TTJT?f ‘ uninterrupted association
from *T * to decay.’
‘ a master,’ ‘ a Vaisya from ^ ‘ to go :’ otherwise, ?rn§:
‘ a respectable man.’
tHTU*. -UT -U ‘ improper,’ ‘ bad,’ ‘ what is not fit to be said,’
‘ reprehensible,’ * blamable ; ’ from ^ ‘ to speak,’ which
more regularly takes making mfn. ‘ not to be
uttered.’
Twdp ‘ a female fit for impregnation TmzfT tt: ‘ a cow fit
for the bull ;’ from tt with tit : otherwise, TWn§ mfn. ‘ to
be gone to’ or ‘ approached.’
TO: -WT -TR ‘ to be bought’ or ‘ marketed,’ ‘ to be pledged ;’
from w ‘ to praise :’ otherwise, iiTTPT mfn. ‘ to be praised.’
Tiff: -dfr ‘ fit to be chosen’ or ‘solicited;’ thIt f. ‘a
maiden to be sought ;’ from ^ ‘ to choose as a bride’ (a
maiden) : otherwise, TfCT ‘ to be chosen,’ with ^TT ; or
mfn. ‘ to be appointed or selected generally,’ with Wi^.
T3T ‘ a conveyance,’ ‘ a vehicle,’ ‘ that by which any thing is
borne ;’ from T? : but with tant it makes TT^r: mfn. ‘ to
be carried.’
248. The termination ^nr intimates by its initial T, that in
affixing v, the radical vowel is not to be changed to its Guna
or Vriddhi equivalent, although it may be liable to such other
changes as its conjugational inflexion prescribes ; it also shews
that a radical nasal penultimate is to be dropped : whilst T
requires the insertion of 7T in some cases before T. This
termination forms participles with verbs ending in consonants
having a penultimate ; as, y?T ‘ to choose,’ ‘ to be
chosen ;’ ^ ‘ t° increase,’ tut ‘ to be increased :’ except
Q q 2
300
DERIVATION.
‘ to praise,’ ip 4 to injure,’ and ortj ‘ to make,’ which take tht,
making ‘ to be praised,’ ‘ to be injured,’ ‘ to be
made.’ So H*T, with the preposition ^ or h, or v| ifVn ‘ the
hand,’ prefixed, takes ; as, ’JHHJij or fivj $ ‘ to be let go,’
VI fiim J 'if ‘ to be let go by the hand.’
a. is added to the following verbs ending in vowels :
‘ to be gone ;’ with ’srr prefixed, WgTH ‘ to be
respected;’ H (f^)j JW ‘ to c^osen »’ ‘ to be
praised.’ Also to these ending in consonants : ^rt, ‘ to
be celebrated ;’ sth, ‘ to be pleased ^rm, f^pq ‘ to be
governed.’ When annexed to TfH ‘ to dig,’ h is substituted
for ; as irq ‘ to be dug.’ qqq is optionally affixed to form
the following words :
cK ‘ to make,’ ^rtr ; or with tnfir, HtTni ‘ to be made.’
Jpr ‘ to hide,’ 7T5I ; or with irw , ritel ‘ to be hid’ or * kept
secret.’
7711 ‘ to take,’ with ^rfq or TrfiT prefixed, ^rftpT^r, ‘ to be
received ;’ or with 7nnr, TTTFTifTST.
‘ to milk,’ ; or with int , ^ter.
ipr ‘ to nourish,’ hut ; or with inr^, HT*£} ‘ to be nourished.’
jj»T ‘to cleanse,’ literally or metaphorically, ^5?T; or with
HFij ‘ to be cleansed,’ * to be purified.’
^ £ to speak,’ "311 ; or with int , W : with any term signifying
e falsely’ prefixed, it is only '3'u ; as, ^npfteT, Hitter, &c. :
with a preposition it takes ; ttrra ‘ to be declared.’
‘ to rain,’ Y5* 5 or 'with HTT, ‘ to be rained.’
3TH ‘ to praise,’ $THtr ; or with ^n?T.
b. A number of words are considered to be irregularly
formed with this affix ; as the following :
^tHTor; -■ntT -sq * suffering no pain’ or ‘ fatigue ;’ from hpi ‘ to
pain.’
‘ clarified butter ;’ from ‘ to anoint.’
TZr: the name of a river ; from ‘ to leave (its bed).’
any valuable metal except gold or silver; from ijq * to hide.’
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. — PARTICIPLES.
301
-xij ‘ ripening or flowering in cultivated ground :’
so 4 growing wild,’ &c. ; from 4 to ripen.’
-^rr ‘ dependent,’ ‘ servile,’ e confined ipm snsr. 4 the
encaged parrots attached to as a partisan, 4 a friend
of the gods :’ with tr prefixed, TPJ^f a term in grammar,
* an exception.’ Fem. only, and combined with other
words, 4 without as, iNn ‘ the army outside of
the village from 4 to take.’
fi^TlT 4 a funeral fire 4 maintaining a sacred fire ;’
from fiq 4 to gather.’
■firwt 4 a plough from f»T 4 to conquer.’
frron one of the lunar constellations ; from to please.’
one of the lunar constellations ; from to nourish.’
*rrnh a proper name. When meaning 4 a wife,’ it is formed
with Tnnt, from H 4 to nourish.’
\ t
fvrer. the name of a river ; from fW-' 4 to break (its banks).’
-nn -Tif to be used as a conveyance or carriage ; a horse,
an ox, a car, &c. ; from to join,’ 4 to yoke.’
-WT 4 agreeable,’ 4 liked from 4 to please.’
f^fhn 4 refuse,’ 4 sediment ;’ from tnl with fa prefixed, 4 to
take away.’
(Vmu: 4 Munja grass ;’ from ^with fa prefixed, 4 to purify.’
fasr. a lunar mansion ; from fa*i 4 to accomplish.’
c. with forms >rcr, to denote, in combination with
other words, 4 state’ or 4 condition as, 4 divinity,’ 4 the
being a god :’ and with forms inm 4 killing,’ which is
also used in composition ; as, 4 slaughter of an enemy,’
4 murder of a Brahman,’ 4 homicide.’
d. The following participial nouns are considered as being
formed with this affix, which in the feminine gender become
denominations :
worship, from to worship,
a litter — ^ to go.
faiTWT muddy earth — tjh to go.
302
DERIVATION.
fjfWf an assembly, from to sit.
HT*17 livelihood — >J5T to nourish.
JRTT the jugular vein — tr to know.
RSTT knowledge — to know.
cTSTT wandering about as a mendicant — to go.
^pzn a court — ■3ft to sleep.
an assembly — ^nr to go.
ablution, bathing — "tt to bathe.
249. The last of these terminations, Wf^, indicates by its
initial that the radical vowel is to be changed to its Gufia or
Vriddhi equivalent. It may be affixed — to verbs ending in T
or "3i, when ‘ necessity’ is implied ; as, H ‘ what is to be,
necessarily;’ otherwise : — to 'U, rr ‘to be mixed;’ and
it, with :3rr prefixed, ‘ to be stirred up :’ — to verbs ending
in or as, ‘ to be made ;’ * to be torn —
also to verbs ending in consonants not labials ; as, TT^r,
‘ to be borne.’ As noticed above, it is also annexed to some
verbs ending in labials.
a. When rtt is added to verbs ending in palatals, they are
usually changed to gutturals, or ^ to «fi, and *T to jt ; as, tr,
tTT^PT ‘ to be cooked ;’ ^if, f’tR 4 to be made sick but there
are many exceptions. It does not effect this change if the
verb takes the augment ^ before the 7T of the passive past
participle ; nor when * necessity' is implied ; as, xrr^iT * what
must be cooked ;’ mT5*T ‘ what must be abandoned ;’ utr ‘ what
must be worshipped ;’ tTTTR ‘ what must be said.’ Some
verbs optionally admit the change in different acceptations ;
as, >pT ‘ to enjoy’ makes ‘ what is to be enjoyed ;’ but
>pT ‘ to eat’ makes : xpT, with f»T prefixed, ‘ to appoint,’
makes e what or who is fit to be employed ;’ R*TRT
* what or who may be employed so ^,,g, ‘ to speak,’ makes
‘ what may be said ;’ but TRfi ‘ a sentence.’
b. The following are considered as irregularly formed with
Tpnr :
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. PARTICIPLES.
303
^Tl^pn or ‘ day of conjunction of the sun and moon
from * * 4 together,’ and XTT ‘ to dwell.’
* to be brought from a particular fire,’ the Dakshifi-
agni ; applicable only to a form of sacrificial fire ; from
lift ‘ to take,’ with ^TT prefixed : otherwise, ^TRiT.
'3'q-4iui: a kind of sacrificial fire ; from fiq ‘ to collect,’ with
Ttf prefixed.
a kind of sacrifice ; from * an altar,’ and t>T ‘ to
drink ;’ in w hich the Soma juice is drunk.
VTntT 4 a sacred text ;’ from in ‘ to have’ or 4 hold.’
‘ a dwelling from ‘ to collect,’ with fn.
‘ to be brought as fire for a sacrifice from nix and
‘ to collect.’
■qnn a sort of liquid measure ; from srr ‘ to measure *T being
changed to n.
-Tin -t*T e adverse,’ * disliked,’ ‘ disagreeable,’ ‘ not ap-
proved of’ or 4 agreed with ;’ from Trft 4 to guide.’
TTnifT 4 a sacred text ;’ from t; 4 to sacrifice.’
tnpni ‘ a royal sacrifice,’ held by a paramount sovereign ; from
UtJT and n 4 to bring forth.’
yijvy: 4 to be carried as sacrificial fire ;’ from and x? 4 to
bear.’
v'-STUC a sort of sacrifice.
4 clarified butter ;’ from and xft 4 to take.’
250. An affix of similar import, though not much employed,
is which leaves T»f<3*T, attached to verbs ending in con-
sonants, without change of the radical vowel : thus tr^r makes
-*t: -*TT -*t 4 what is to be cooked’ or 4 ripened ;’ fir?,
■finfforr -*t: -ttt -*f ‘what is to be, or may be, broken’ or
4 divided.’
Indeclinable Participles.
251. There are two participles of the past tense, which are
very extensively used, and which admit of neither gender,
number, nor case. They are formed by adding to the verbal
304
DERIVATION.
base the termination WT leaving 7TT, or leaving xr. The
latter is affixed in the place of RT only when the verb is a
compound, or is preceded by a preposition. In either case
the accompanying letters are indicatory, and denote that the
radical vowel is not changeable to the corresponding Guna or
Vriddhi letter, and that a penultimate nasal is to be rejected.
When however the augment ^ is inserted before m, the Guna
substitute may sometimes take the place of the radical vowel.
a. Although implying past time, or something that has
been, the participles thus formed with rt and n have not an
absolutely past signification : they rather suspend the mean-
ing, importing that although something has been, yet that
something else is immediately to follow ; as, XT >TiiT tftjgr c^fri
‘ having eaten and drunk, he goes
‘ having heard this, Hiranyaka said.’ The designation of
indeterminate past participles would therefore perhaps better
express their character than that of Gerund, by which, as
ordinarily employed, something remaining to be done is alone
intended.
b. As a general rule, whatever form the base assumes before
the sign of the indefinite past, it also takes before w, that
of the indeterminate past ; as, ^ ‘ having done
Xg ; ^jt:, xgr^T, ‘ having heard m ; xfrrT:, xftRT, ‘ having drank
<fT ; (T¥T, ‘ having given vt ; ffw:, f?RT, ‘ having held
FT; ftsnr:, f&Ml, ‘having stood:’ xrt ; HR, Til, ‘having
said HT ; tPr:, ifxtrlT, ‘ having dwelt "Bpi ; 'SrfVnT:, TflfuRT,
‘ having hungered IT' ; ‘ having eaten n*T ;
xr:, xtrt, ‘ having gone xpr ; xrj, XTRT, ‘ having bowed to
; X3Tfr:, X1TRT, ‘ having dug ; ^ifiiR:, ‘ having
slept ^ or irtf^TT:, NfdWT or xfrf^rlT, ‘ having been
pleased:’ fxR; XlflTT:, ‘having served:’ JJf; JTjffiT:,
‘ having taken :’ and the like.
c. The deviation from general rules affects chiefly the influ-
ence of the indicatory tr upon a penultimate nasal and the
augment
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. PARTICIPLES.
805
d. Thus, although a penultimate nasal should be rejected,
the following are instances of its being retained : ‘ to go,’
makes tor'll ; and ‘ to go,’ Ttn^T, or with 4 having
gone.’ A verb ending with ? or tfi, preceded by a nasal, and
which inserts optionally rejects the nasal ; as, jp?, ‘ to
arrange,’ makes or * to loosen,’ ^rfsn^T or
; and 4 to tie together,’ or nf^St^T. The same
with ‘ to deceive,’ which makes either ^P?r=H or wf%i^T ;
and ‘ to cut,’ or c^f^rTT. Verbs ending with
»T, preceded by a nasal, optionally reject it ; as, ‘ to break,’
HWT or vrirr ; 7^ 4 to colour,’ T^fiT or fw ; 4 to anoint’ or
‘ to worship,’ makes ^niT, T5T^rr, or ^Tf^fr^T ; ttf^, ‘ to perish,’ may
retain the nasal which it inserts in conjugation ; as, or
^TfT, or with ?f3TT?T.
e. With regard to the change of the radical vowel when ^
is inserted, all verbs beginning and ending with a consonant,
excepting a final 7T or ?, and having a penultimate ^ or ?,
optionally take the Guna vowel ; as, f?5^, ‘ to write,’ makes
frifijMI or wftTRT ; 4 to shine,’ or atfflRl ; 4 to be
hungry,’ or tsjVfVr^T. A vowel initial has but one form ;
3V to go,’ Trfitr^T ; and so has a final ? ; as, fir? 4 to serve,’
to know,’ and ^ 4 to weep,’ are also exceptions to
this rule, having but one form ; The following
are additional instances to those already specified, of the vowel
being unchanged when the augment ^ is inserted : ?? 4 to
embrace,’ ?fifi?T ; *p 4 to ply,’ ?fVr?T ; ip 4 to steal,’ ;
jp 4 to be glad,’ RKHI ; JT^ 4 to trample,’ Rfyril.
f. In the following, the vowel is optionally changed before
^ ^ 4 to go,’ or ^ftr?T ; ^ ‘ to be thin,’ ^fsrrJI or
?f7Tp?r ; 4 to draw,’ ^f?i?T or 4 to thirst,’ TjfiqrTT
or rrfMRT ; ?? 4 to endure,’ Hf?i?i or Jrftb?T.
g. Verbs having an indicatory ?■ optionally insert ? (p. 107) ;
as, 'Sipr, 4 to be tranquil,’ makes TJlffn?T or '5IPt?T ; a final ?
requires the radical vowel to be made long, when ^ is not
inserted : but 4 to go,’ has different forms ; '■*<**!
r r
306
DERIVATION.
or ; fiR, ‘ to play,’ makes or yfVfll ; to purify,’
■u^T or ; ^RT, ‘ to go,’ makes ^Tf>T, but when it means ‘ to
worship,’ ’Hf^l ; cj*, ‘ to beguile,’ forms '?5Tf>Tr?T, but * to be
covetous,’ ; first ‘ to be distressed,’ or fiiTfT ; &c.
252. The termination is used when the verb is a
compound, particularly when it is preceded by a preposition.
The radical vowel is unchanged.
a. When affixed to a base ending in a short vowel, H is
commonly prefixed to it ; as, ^ ‘ to make, ‘ having
made like’ or ‘ after;’ fsr ‘to conquer,’ un 0^73 ‘having
‘ defeated F ‘ to praise,’ TTW^r * having celebrated :’ and this
prevails though the radical vowel become long by combina-
tion ; as, ^ ‘ to go,’ with vTPJ prefixed, ‘ having studied ;’
or with u, irrc ‘ having deceased.’ When is attached to a
base ending in a long vowel, no change takes place : in ‘ to
stay,’ nwrrf ‘ having gone forth ‘ to fly,’ T|far ‘ having
flown up ;’ H ‘ to be,’ ‘ having perceived.’ is com-
monly changed to ■§* ; as, ‘ to cross,’ ‘ having come
down.’ »TPJ, * to wake,’ changes its vowel, T55TPTal ‘ having
woke up.’ Diphthongs, as in other instances, are usually
changed to ^rr ; as, V ‘ to suck,’ HVTO ; ‘ to sing,’ unm ; 'sft
‘ to cut,’ ttctr.
b. Some verbs ending in vowels or diphthongs modify
their finals in a special manner before if. Thus fry, * to
decay,’ makes fwfsjT?! or ^ ‘ to waste,’ ‘ to
dissolve,’ Urt’ht or ttffpt ; *T ‘ to barter,’ or ^!r«prnT. %
‘ to weave,’ and R ‘ to cover,’ make ITTR and tr^TR ; but after
uft or v, R may make either tffrT/Tv, rhrhr, or tfRTR,
c. Verbs ending in nasals occasionally change them to IT,
or admit some other modification of the base. Thus T^T, ‘ to
dig,’ makes either or ■RWR ; rn? ‘ to go,’ or ^rmiTT
‘ having come ;’ THT ‘ to produce,’ THTR or *r*rnt ; tfTR ‘ to bow,’
or triw; ‘ to stretch,’ f^rTR ; *T^T ‘to mind,’
‘ having assented ;’ tf*f ‘ to refrain,’ or fvjirrti ; rR ‘ to
sport’ or ‘ rest,’ RR??? or front ; ?"tt ‘ to kill,’ ‘ having
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. PARTICIPLES.
307
beaten’ or ‘ slain.’ «r, ‘ to desire,’ makes its vowel long,
‘ having desired much : ’ so does ‘ to go,’ fi^Rt
‘ having considered.’ ^TR, ‘ to obtain,’ may substitute 'SRI ;
as, utot or jtrr ‘ having obtained.’
d. Causal verbs, and those of the tenth conjugation which
do not make the radical vowel long by virtue of a grammatical
rule, or in which it is not long naturally or by position, prefix
^R to tt ; as, ‘ having caused to compute ;’ ROHR
‘ having made to stoop,’ ‘ having bent’ or ‘ bowed trrr
‘having declared’ (from cjR, tenth conj.) : but v ‘ to hold’
causal, vrnrffT, makes UHJidj ‘ having caused to hold ;’ and >R
‘to adorn,’ tenth conj., HtRfiT, makes ‘ having similarly
adorned.’
Participles of repetition, or Adverbial Participles.
253. In one form the indeclinable participle of repetition
is nothing more than the indeterminate participle past repeated
— HRT RHT ‘ having gone repeatedly,’ ^RT ‘ having done
repeatedly’ — and is rather a case of grammatical construction,
than part of conjugation. There is another form, no doubt of
an analogous character, although specially provided for by
adding the termination tiRR to the verbal base : this leaves
, whilst the initial trj indicates the change of a final vowel
to the Vriddhi equivalent, to be again changed before the
vowel of agreeably to the rules of Sandhi : thus f%, ‘ to
gather,’ becomes which makes rr RR ‘ having collected
repeatedly;’ ‘to hear,’ becomes r!, and H ‘to be,’ ht,
thus making trr rr ‘ having heard repeatedly,’ HR HR
‘ having been repeatedly m, ‘ to remember,’ makes tmf
‘ having remembered repeatedly.’ A final inserts r before
the termination ; as, ‘ to give,’ <*R <»R ‘ having given
repeatedly.’ When the verb ends in a consonant, a radical %
if not preceding a compound consonant, is changed to and
any other short vowel to its Guna equivalent : vowels long by
nature or position are unchanged : thus hr makes HTR HTR
r r 2
308
DERIVATION.
‘ having cooked repeatedly ^tth, ‘ governing repeat-
edly ^ ‘ knowing or having known repeatedly
»pT, vft»f ‘ eaten or having eaten repeatedly &c.
a. The reiterated form of this participle is however by no
means the mode in which it most frequently occurs, and it is
much more often found singly in particular senses or combina-
tions in which it offers an analogy to an adverb. Thus it
occurs with words signifying ‘ first as, ^Tlrf or or
inpi — anfrf ‘having first eaten, he goes.’ '5i, ‘to do/
employs this form when used transitively, and with a verb
signifying ‘ to call / cRRRT^t^Tfw ‘ he calls out, having
made or imputed theft / i. e. he calls out, ‘ Stop thief.’ The
same verb also uses it connected with strep? ‘ how,’ or
‘ thus ;’ or ^r'dj^K * having done, thus or how, he
eats or with ‘ sweet ;’ wijpfiR ‘ having sweetened it,
he eats.’ ‘ to live,’ takes this form in conjunction with
*n^ff ; ‘ having lived so long, he studies ;’ i. e.
he studies during life. tr, ‘ to fill,’ takes it with or ;
* having filled the skin ‘ having filled his
belly.’ jpT also takes it ; as, TT*rFr*rnr ?f^rT ‘ killing all entirely,
or to the very root, he slays ;’ or tn^TTrf * he strikes,
kicking with his foot.’ Instances might be infinitely multi-
plied of the use of the indeclinable or adverbial participle
employed without repetition to signify an action indetermi-
nately past.
SECTION II.
Verbal Nouns.
254. The nouns that are derived immediately from verbs
comprehend a great variety of terms, for which an unexcep-
tionable classification can scarcely perhaps be proposed. There
are two principal classes into which they might be divided, as
adjectives or attributives, and substantives or names ; but the
same word is very frequently used in either form, the quality
or attributive constituting the appellation of the individual :
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. NOUNS.
309
thus «sx or ^nx in their generic acceptation signify 1 any thing
or person that does an action, or makes any thing whilst in
combination, f^: means ‘ a servant,’ ‘ a potter and
singly has for one of its meanings ‘ toll’ or ‘ tax,’ and «STX:
‘ a letter of the alphabet.’ To distinguish derivative words
therefore according to their import, would lead at least to
much inconvenient repetition.
255. These different nouns are formed, agreeably to the
usual scheme of Sanskrit grammar, by affixing certain termi-
nations to the crude verb, which is modified in a greater or
lesser degree, and then forms the inflective base. These ter-
minations are very numerous ; but the greater number have
a very limited, in some instances almost an individual, appli-
cation ; others comprehend a large class of words. It would
be inconsistent with the object of the present grammar to
furnish very numerous examples of these derivatives ; nor is
such detail necessary, as they will be found, where they seem
to be most appropriately placed, in the Dictionary. It will
be sufficient therefore to give here a selection of such words
as may appear to be most useful, or as may best exemplify
the principles upon which they are constructed ; classing
them under the terminations by which they are formed, and
arranging them in alphabetical order, as has been done by
Professor Bopp. He has, however, taken only the essential
letters of the affixes ; but I prefer exhibiting them as they
occur in original grammars, as from the letter or letters by
which the essential element is accompanied, a clue is usually
obtained to the modification to which the inflective base, or
some word compounded with it, is subjected.
■3T is added to derivative verbs to form abstract nouns,
declinable only in the feminine gender, and which therefore
add the feminine termination (rnr) ’ST ; as, £ to wish to
do,’ fqctftftT ‘ the desire to do ;’ ‘ to desire a son,’
‘ desire of a son.’ It is also added to verbs ending
with consonants preceded by a vowel long either by nature or
310
DERIVATION.
position, to form similar substantives : ‘ to endeavour,’ ^tt
* effort’ or ‘ wish ;’ ‘ to reason,’ '3t?rT * reasoning.’
RSq leaving r to be added to the verb, forms feminine
abstract nouns from verbs which have an indicatory xr, and
f*re ‘ to break,’ and others, forming the class fW^rfe. The
nasal prevents the change of the radical vowel ; as, fir^T
‘rupture;’ ‘reflection,’ from figfiT ‘to think;’ tj*tt
‘ worship,’ from ‘ to worship ;’ jiwr ‘ cleaning,’ from * to
cleanse:’ except in the case of a final as, it, ‘to decay,’
makes »TTT ‘ decay.’ ), ‘ to be ashamed,’ makes gxu
‘ modesty.’ ‘ to have compassion,’ changes its ^ to ;
as, ym ‘ clemency.’ is also added to verbs in rt w’hen
preceded by a preposition or analogous term ; as, ‘ to give,’
‘ a gift ;’ *TT ‘ to shine,’ TTHT ‘ light ;’ and ‘ faith,’ and
RXrrltT ‘ disappearance,’ from vt ‘ to have’ or ‘ hold,’ preceded
by ^ or ^r^rc.
leaving % is one of the most widely applicable affixes,
i. It is added to the class of verbs called xr^rf^, or, according
to most authorities, to all verbs whatever, to signify the agent ;
forming attributives which may take the three genders, but
which are commonly used in some one gender as appellatives.
A final vowel is changed before R, according to the rules of
Sandhi ; as, xj^ ‘ to cook,’ xjxf ‘ who or what cooks’ or ‘ ripens ;’
^ * to go,’ RC ‘ who or what goes ;’ ‘ a male fol-
lower,’ ‘ a female attendant ;’ ‘ to steal,’ RR:
‘ a thief ;’ « ‘ to be,’ ^ ‘ what is,’ * the world,’ or a name
of S'iva ; xr (xt^) ‘ to sound,’ xr1 ‘ what sounds ;’ x^ ‘ a male
river,’ xrxff * a female river.’ (Obs. Those verbs of the class
xj^Tf? which have an Anubandha z require the feminine to be
formed with not rt ; as, Rtf, Rttf, «r^l, &c.)
2. RR is also added to certain verbs compounded with
their objects in restricted acceptations : as to ^ ‘ to take,’
bodily exertion being omitted ; as, ‘ an heir,’ ‘ one who
takes his portion ;’ but »tr?r: ‘ a porter,’ ‘ one who takes a
load :’ also with RT prefixed ; xpr^n: ‘ having flowers,’ ‘ bios-
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. — NOUjNS.
311
soming.’ It is also added to jjq, ‘to take,’ in a similar
manner ; as in ‘ a spearman,’ ‘ one who holds a pike
— to q'l ‘ to be worthy ;’ qsn'tT ‘ a female Brahman,’ ‘ one
worthy of reverence — to qq ‘ to whisper,’ and R ‘ to sport,’
compounded with cRfj ‘ the ear,’ and ‘ a bush,’ put in the
locative case ; as, qio qq*. ‘ an informer ;’ 4 an elephant :’
— to verbs compounded with ^pT to form proper names ;
STWR: Sambhava : — to ^rl ‘ to sleep,’ compounded with various
terms ; as, tq^rq: ‘ who sleeps in the air,’ ‘ a divinity ;’ (jqgq:
‘ who sleeps in the heart,’ ‘ Cupid ;’ qqTq^ra: 4 one who sleeps
supine.’
3. Verbs ending in ^ take ^qq to form abstract masculine
and neuter nouns ; as, fq ‘ to conquer,’ qq: ‘ victory ;’ fq ‘ to
gather,’ qq: ‘ collection ;’ ‘ to fear,’ Hq ‘ fear,’ ‘ peril.’ It
is also added to a few other verbs, with a similar effect ; as,
qq 4 to rain,’ qq: 4 rain,’ or 4 the rainy season.’
qqr, leaving q, with the change of a short radical vowel to
Vriddhi, is added to verbs to express the agent when com-
pounded with the object ; as, q 4 to make,’ q*qqrR: 4 a potter,’
4 one who makes pots ;’ ^ 4 to take,’ qRqn:: 4 a porter,’ 4 one
who takes a load.’ When added to 4 to strike’ or 4 kill,’ z
is substituted for the final in certain combinations ; as, ^TfTqT?:
4 who strikes the tree,’ 4 a woodpecker.’ When is prefixed,
the final may be q ; as, qqfqijTC: or q^q^Ttr: 4 a collection of
letters,’ 4 an alphabet.’
■qvrq, leaving wq, is added to a few verbs, distinguished by
an Anubandha z, to form masculine abstract nouns : qq (qqq)
V ' O t '
4 to tremble,’ qqvp 4 a trembling ;’ fsg 4 to increase,’
qjqq*. 4 intumescence ;’ 5 (^h) 4 to be distressed,’ ^q^t 4 anxiety,’
4 pain.’
^qfq is added to verbs to form masculine nouns implying
imprecation ; as, from qffq 4 to live,’ qqfqfqqf 4 may loss
of thy life be 4 mayest thou perish.’
^qq, leaving q, forms masculine appellative and abstract
nouns from verbs ending in q, q, qf, ; as, j* 4 to praise,’
312
DEltIVATION.
qrq: * praise ;’ q ‘ to join,’ qq: * barley ^ ‘ to purify,’ qq:
‘ winnowing corn ;’ s ‘ to make,’ qr. ‘ the hand ;’ n ‘ to swal-
low,’ ttt: ‘ poison.’ ‘ to spread,’ preceded by fq, makes fqwx:
‘ prolixity,’ ‘ diffuseness ;’ but fq?x*. ‘ a bed,’ ‘ a tree.’ It may
also be added to ‘ to take ;’ as, ‘ a planet :’ — to fq c to
collect,’ preceded by fq^; f?pqq: ‘ certainty :’ — to qq ‘to go
qq: ‘going:’ — also to qq, substituted for ‘to eat,’ pre-
ceded by a preposition ; as, fdvv:, qqq:, fa VW:, ‘ food’ or
‘ eating :’ — to qq ‘ to meditate,’ and ^qv ‘to pierce,’ not com-
pounded with a preposition ; qq: ‘ silent prayer,’ ^qq*. ‘ wound-
ing :’ — to qrq ‘to sound;’ ^q: ‘sound:’ — *rq ‘to laugh;’
qq: ‘ laughter :’ — to qq ‘ to refrain,’ either singly or preceded
by qq, fq, fq, and as, qq: ‘ restraint,’ qqqq: ‘ marriage,’
fqqq: ‘ fixed rule,’ fqqq: ‘ cessation,’ qqq: ‘ restraint :’ — to qq
‘ to speak,’ qq ‘ to sound,’ qq ‘ to read,’ qrq ‘ to sound,’ pre-
ceded by fq ; as, fqqq: ‘ speaking,’ &e. : — also ‘ to sound,’
either singly or with fq when it means ‘ to sound as a lute ;’
UPi: fq^Sr: ‘ the sound of the Vina.’ There are other com-
binations with this affix, of which it may be observed, that its
use very commonly alternates with that of qq, which latter
makes the vowel long. Thus optionally with the preceding
words we may have, fqqiq:, qrq:, q?Tq:, fTq:, URXin, which
are formed with qq.
\
qnjq, leaving qrq, forms abstract nouns mostly of the neuter
gender ; as, qr?T ‘ to pervade,’ with q substituted for the initial,
qqq ‘ fame ;’ ^1 ‘ to pass away,’ qqq ‘ life.’
qnqt is added to 3J ‘ to injure,’ and qq* ‘ to praise ;’ as, SRiq:
‘ mischievous,’ q^l^: ‘ praising,’ qv^rq: ‘ a bard.’
l is added to a few verbs to form attributives implying
possession of the quality signified by the verb : thus ‘ to
take,’ tenth conj„ q"^qT^: ‘ greedy,’ ‘ insatiable ;’ qq ‘ to be
compassionate,’ qqn?: ‘ kind,’ ‘ pitiful ;’ fqq ‘ to sleep,’ fqqTc?:
‘ sleepy,’ ‘ slothful ;’ ‘ to envy,’ TqqqTt^: ‘ envious.’
q is added to a class of verbs called qqif^ to form masculine
or feminine abstract or appellative nouns ; as, ^ ‘ t° plough/
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. NOUNS.
313
^fa: ‘ ploughing’ or ‘ agriculture n ‘ to swallow,’ fafc ‘ a
mountain and the same affix, or as derived from the
technical affixes and ^irr, forms similar nouns with the
classes cjqifij and ^nrrf? ; as, ’TTfa: ‘ a pond,’ from ^ * to sow
and ’5rrf>r: ‘ war,’ from ‘ to go.’
is added to a few verbs to form neuter nouns chiefly
signifying an instrument ; as, ‘ a spade,’ from * to
‘ dig ;’ ‘ a sickle,’ from H ‘ to cut :’ but ‘ to go,’
means ‘ instituted observance,’ also * a history’ or ‘ nar-
rative ;’ and w ‘ to purify,’ tjfag ‘ the sacrificial thread,’ ‘ a
prayer of the Vedas,’ or ‘ sacrificial fire.’
^fa, leaving ^T, is added to various verbs, either single or
compounded, to form attributives ; as, fa, TrfiPT ‘ conquering,’
‘victorious;’ >^with xrft: prefixed, xrft>rfa*T ‘ who is disgraced;’
»$• ‘ to be quick,’ jnrfafT * who is quick.’ These, when inflected,
form jfat, Wftpft, wfa (see p. 65). To form masculine appel-
latives is added to fa^ ‘ to sell,’ preceded by the article
sold, as ‘ a vender of oil ;’ and sometimes in a
depreciatory sense, as ‘ a low Brahman,’ ‘ a vender
of the Soma juice,’ which is used at sacrifices.
^EOT^, leaving ^nr, forms attributives, declinable in three
genders, from various simple and compound verbs ; as, from
^ffaiT ‘going,’ ‘what goes;’ from *j*r, Trfirsm ‘what
endures ;’ from eg with as, ‘ what adorns,’ or
with far and ^rr, as, faTJcfiffan ‘ what annihilates’ or ‘ makes
nothing of,’ &c.
forms attributives with desiderative verbs ; as, ‘ to
wish to do,’ ‘ desirous of doing :’ also with a few others ;
as, ‘ to wish,’ ‘wishful ;’ fa? ‘ to know,’ fa?<£ ‘ knowr-
ing ;’ $1 fa ‘to wish,’ ‘desirous;’ and fas^ ‘to beg,’
faw ‘ begging,’ fasr: ‘ a mendicant.’
forms attributives after various verbs ; the final indi-
cates the lengthening of the radical vowrel ; as, from 7?^ ‘ to
desire,’ ‘wanton ;’ f to desire,’ sfiTJpi ‘ desirous ;’ to
314
DERIVATION.
be,’ TRT £ existing £ to fall,’ Trips £ falling ‘ to kill,’
xrTHofi ‘ destroying,’ £ destructive.’
TUT, leaving T, forms a number of appellative nouns of
various genders and purports : the radical vowel is made long
by virtue of the final xrr . Thus with T £ to make,’ TT^*. £ an
artisan ;’ fr £ to overcome (disease),’ TPT. £ a drug ;’ TT £ to
blow,’ TP?*. £ the wind ;’ £ to pervade,’ ^?T3T ind. £ quickly,’
or *rr3T*. m. ‘ a sort of rice ; ’ £ to be born,’ TTT n. £ the
knee.’ The chief importance of TW is, however, its standing
at the head of a very numerous class of terminations, thence
called ‘ Unadi,’ or ‘ Un and others ;’ the effect of which, as will
be observed even in the few examples above given, is confined
to no particular signification, and which form derivatives not
always bearing an obvious relation to the verbs whence they
are derived. The principle of the Unadi derivatives is in fact
merely their resolution into conjectural etymological elements,
without much regard to the sense either Of the primitive or
derivative. The terms are too numerous to be further parti-
cularized in this place, and they will all be found in the
Dictionary, which contains the whole of those specified in the
five Unadi chapters of the Siddhanta Kaumudi.
«S, leaving ^r, forms attributives after verbs having any
penultimate vowel except or the change of which is
barred by the initial «s ; as, from for? £ to write,’ £ who
or what writes — from tm £ to know ’ tt £ who or what
knows.’ It is added to iff £ to please,’ fin ‘ what pleases,’
‘ dear,’ £ loved,’ * liked ;’ — to T ‘ to scatter,’ fisn £ who or what
throws.’ It is also added to verbs ending in tstt, either as a
radical letter, or as a substitute for a diphthong, and with or
without a preposition, when the final ’^rr is cut off ; as, from
TT ‘ to knowT,’ si or T? £ who or what knows ;’ gr £ to call,’ ^ngr
£ who or what calls.’ It forms appellatives or attributives
with verbs in ^TT, preceded by a subordinate term ; as, 37 £ to
give,’ £ who gives a cow ;’ 37 £ to preserve,’ qifujld £ the
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. NOUNS.
315
rear of an army and from in ‘ to drink,’ f^xr: ‘ an elephant,’
who drinks with two things, his mouth and his trunk. It is
added to tft, 4 to stay or be,’ in various forms and senses ; as,
TOW ‘ who or what is level’ or ‘ at ease,’ fqrow ‘ who or
what is uneven’ or 4 in difficulty ;’ TT¥ 4 what goes first,’ or
TTW: 4 a measure ;’ the sibilant being unchanged in this as in
some other derivatives of the same class. g?, ‘ to take,’
changes its to FJ before forming appellatives ; as, ijir 4 a
house,’ JTj?T: (always m. pi.) ‘ a wife.’
, leaving is added to 171, when compounded with
pronominal nouns, to denote 4 likeness ;’ as, TO and inr make
whilst =HT, leaving F, is added to the same verb, simi-
larly compounded, when the two sibilants form ; as,
&c. : so *Ts2$r, rTTTST, &c. : see p. 84.
fis, leaving which is substituted for the radical final
vowel, is added to verbs in ftt, or those which substitute ^tt
for a diphthong, when preceded by a preposition, to form
appellatives ; as, from vt ‘ to have,’ fVffVx: ‘ a treasure ;’ Ffw:
‘ a joint,’ &c. : also when preceded by a subordinate term ;
as, »TF5fvT: ‘ what holds water,’ i. e. the ocean.
WIF, leaving tt;, forms attributives from fro ‘ to break,’ fF?
‘ to know,’ ‘ to cut ;’ as, 4 who or what breaks ;’
‘ who or what knows ;’ who or what cuts.’
leaving fir, is added to verbs to form feminine abstract
or appellative nouns. There is a general analogy between the
mode of attaching the final to the base, with the formation of
past participles with Hi : thus ^1 forms 4 act,’ ‘ action f,
praise ;’ Frffi: ‘ hearing’ or ‘ the Veda ;’ FF ‘ to go,’
with TO or fF prefixed, TOFTF: ‘ prosperity,’ fFFfF*. 4 calamity.’
‘ to sacrifice,’ makes 4 sacrifice ;’ FT ‘ to stay,’ ftsjfff:
‘ staying,’ ‘ station ;’ ^ 4 to sing,’ Flftr: 4 singing ;’ FT 4 to drink,’
Flfri: ‘ drinking ;’ FF 4 to cook,’ FfFi: 4 cooking,’ 4 maturity
4 to go,’ TTfrr: 4 going,’ 4 motion ;’ 4 to sport,’ Tfrr: ‘ plea-
sure.’ Verbs ending with "Si or FJ, change the W to F ; as,
u 4 to be anxious,’ ufa: 4 anxiety ;’ Fi 4 to scatter,’ ctflfiih
s s 2
316
derivation.
‘ scattering.’ tft, ‘ to destroy,’ makes ‘ destroying
‘ to kill,’ ffw: * a weapon and ‘ to celebrate,’ ohtfit: ‘ fame,’
* reputation.’
f^rr forms adjectives from verbs which have an Anubandha
1; as, (dn-q ) 1 to ripen,’ Tjf=jiJT ‘ what ripens’ or ‘ is ripe.’
leaving ff, forms attributives from ftEPt, JTV, and >nt ;
as, ‘ who or what throws jtjj * greedy ;’ ‘ fearful ;’
wot ‘arrogant.’ Wt, ‘ to fear,’ takes sfi, 'a^rfT, or ^oR'JT, in all
which the is indicatory, to form adjectives ; as, Hhj,
or ‘ timid,’ ‘ fearful.’
<Wbl forms adjectives with or its substitute TTtt ‘ to eat ;’
as, ^rax, WTT, ‘voracious;’ and it ‘to go,’ TptX ‘movable,’
‘ moving.’
IfifVpT, leaving =r?r, forms adjectives with a few words in
particular combinations ; as f5T ‘ to see,’ with the object pre-
fixed ; TJTT1T!9»T ‘ who has seen across ;’ also ‘ to fight,’ and
<5 ‘ to make as, xr»TTur?T ‘ who has fought the king XTST^rpR
t 7 O \ ° ° c \
‘who has made a king;’ ‘who has fought with;’
‘ who has done any thing along with (another).’
These words are declined like nouns in p. 6 1.
UK*? forms adjectives with ^xr ‘ to go,’ fvr ‘ to conquer,’
XI^T ‘ to perish,’ and S ‘to go ;’ as, ‘ what goes,’ fvfiXX
‘victorious,’ vptrc ‘perishing,’ tttxx ‘moving,’ ‘going:’ also
with 7T*T, which changes its final to ft; as, tttxT ‘ what goes.’
These adjectives form the feminine with as, Hrlr^-O,
•TTr^ff, &C.
ffFT, leaving a blank, or, in other words, annexing no addi-
tional letter to the final of the verb to form its derivative, is
subjoined to WTST, ‘ to touch,’ to denote the agent combined
with the object or instrument, when the former is not water :
a final before this affix is changed in inflexion to Xi (see
r. 120. p. 66) : (-W?) ‘who touches Ghee;’
‘ who touches (fire, &c.) by prayer :’ but ‘ who
touches water ;’ the affix being tj>t. The following nouns
are irregularly formed with this affix : ‘ a priest,’ from
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. NOUNS.
817
iHT ‘ to sacrifice ‘ arrogant,’ from yir ‘ to be proud
* a garland,’ from fit ‘ to quit f^’51 * a quarter,’ from
f^"5T ‘ to shew ;’ Tfw? ‘ a kind of metre,’ from furr? ‘ to be
bland :’ these form their nominatives in fs. The derivatives
\
of wrg ‘ to go,’ as TTP¥ ‘ east,’ &c., and the words F5T ‘who
joins,’ and ‘ a curlew,’ are also formed with this affix (see
nouns in ^ &c., p. 50).
finT is an affix of very extensive application ; its effect is
precisely the same as that of the preceding, which is separated
from it only to mark the peculiarities of inflexion to which
nouns formed with fgjF are subject, ffjm adds nothing to the
verb. The derivative ends with the same final as the primitive,
modified occasionally, but never by the addition of a vowel.
The nouns it forms are both attributives and appellatives ; as,
Tpr. ‘ a mother,’ from F ‘ to bring forth ;’ m. ‘ one who
goes in the sky,’ ‘ a deity,’ from ^ ‘ to go ;’ trfV't ‘ an
enemy,’ from fjpt ‘ to hate ;’ sy vj ‘ a lunar mansion,’
from ‘ a horse,’ and ^ ‘ to join ;’ FFTfft: ‘ a general,’ from
FFT ‘ an army,’ and Ttd ‘ to lead frOF (tj?) ‘ Brahma,’ from
TT*T ‘ to shine.’ Verbs ending in short vowels add tr before
flfixr , as the F indicates : thus ‘ to collect,’ makes ^rfxrrf^TT
‘ who collects the fire,’ ‘ a householder ;’ fir ‘ to conquer,’
ftfiT, as ^FjfijTfT * the conqueror of Indra,’ a proper name ;
V ‘ to praise,’ FpT, as ijqw if ‘ who praises the gods ;’ F ‘ to
sprinkle,’ as ‘ who sprinkles the Soma juice ^ ‘ to
make,’ as ‘ who does the work,’ ‘ an artificer ; ’ HWf, T
‘ who makes the gloss,’ ‘ a scholiast.’ jrjfl ‘ to see,’ 4 to
touch,’ FtT ‘ to leave,’ take fur^ to express the agent when
combined with the object, as (-2"^) ‘ all-seeing ;’ FwiTF'ST
(-«pfi) ‘sharp,’ ‘corrosive;’ N lyw'q (-^pF) ‘all-creating,’ ‘the
Creator :’ so does ia? ‘ to eat,’ as ‘ who eats flesh,’ ‘ a
\' N
goblin and ^»T ‘ to kill,’ as (ft) ‘ who kills a Brah-
man.’ The following are modifications to which the base is
in some instances liable : tST?, ‘ to cover,’ makes its vowel
short ; as, 'rPTSuf ‘ w hat covers the body,’ ‘ a garment :’ verbs
318
DERIVATION.
ending in a nasal, on the contrary, lengthen the vowel ; as,
^ ‘ to be tranquil,’ jrSTT*T (TT$TT*T ) ‘ who is tranquil;’ iPT ‘ to
stretch,’ UrTT^T ‘ who extends.’ 7H^, '^T, and xpr, however,
may change their finals to if, and then the vowel remains
short ; as, ^TKPTiT ‘ who goes along the road ;’ irdinr 4 every
way extended ;’ wz nr 4 humble,’ ‘ lowly ;’ Tnrff ‘ self-restrained.’
‘ to instruct,’ substitutes ^ for its penultimate :
‘ w ho instructs a friend :’ also with ^ prefixed ; as,
■^rrf^PT, nom. W^fh, ‘ a blessing.’ ‘to swallow,’ makes fnT:
‘ speech.’ TTTT, s^TT, ‘ to fall,’ &c., drop their nasals, and
substitute 7f for the final ; as, TT^HTT ‘ falling from a car ;’
3 WiHri ‘ falling from the pot ;’ xptiigrT ‘ falling from the leaf.’
g in various combinations as a radical letter is changed to ^
or '3i, when ffiTt follows a verb : thus ‘ to play,’ makes
^TT , as WBngTT ‘ who plays with dice,’ 4 a gambler :’ 4 to
preserve,’ makes "3i: 4 a pi-eserver ;’ which with a preceding ^
substitutes the Vriddhi -letter, as 4 w ho preserves man-
kind :’ if, 4 to weave,’ becomes "3i: 4 a weaver :’ sjr: and jgr: make
tR 4 one who is ill ;’ TR 4 one who is quick.’ ^ and g final,
preceded by ^ are rejected ; as, ipf , 4 to faint,’ makes 4 w ho
faints ;’ and v'f 4 to injure,’ vr, nom. v:, 4 who injures ;’ as,
4 a load,’ 4 what injures the axle of a cart.’ Some verbs
form nouns as it is considered irregularly w ith this affix ; as,
xnt 4 to speak,’ 4 speech ;’ 4 to ask,’ TTT5?, nom. HR,
4 who inquires ;’ IT 4 to move,’ ^WlT: 4 a worm fig 4 to serve,’
■55ft: 4 prosperity 4 to go,’ nfcarJT 4 who wanders about,’
4 an ascetic ;’ fqH 4 to shine,’ fi^rf 4 lightning 4 to go,’
4 the world fat 4 to meditate,’ vk 4 understanding ;’ and
many others, for which the Dictionary must be referred to.
is added to 4 to colour,’ Trra: 4 a washerman,’
O \ \
4 a washerwoman ;’ but if the derivative be formed with
or the feminine noun signify 4 a wife,’ the form is
rh and its analogous affix R5T, each leaving form a
number of attributive and appellative nouns, compounded with
the object or instrument of the action, which the letter R
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. — NOUNS.
319
indicates is to retain the terminations of the accusative case.
The 151 of the one indicates that the form of the derivative is
analogous to that of the conjugation : the ^ of the other, that
the radical vowel must be always short. Words formed with
are, from ^ ‘ to speak,’ * who speaks kindly ;’
‘ who speaks authoritatively from tt*T ‘ to go,’
‘ who goes in the sky from ^ ‘ to make,’ HilUT: * fearful,’
‘ alarming ‘ what removes fear ‘ what brings
good:’ from ‘to nourish,’ ‘what nourishes all;’
fxp^wiTT ‘ the earth from ™ ‘ to scorch,’ XR^rin: ‘ who
scorches or subdues an enemv,’ ‘ a hero : ’ from xm ‘ to
restrain,’ ‘ an ascetic,’ ‘ one who restrains his speech’
or ‘ observes a vow of silence from «r ‘ to tear,’ vixr. (not
^T) ‘ who tears or destroys a town,’ a name of Indra.
H * to be,’ with *TTf^l7T ‘ fed,’ makes ^nf^nr»TT: ‘ food’ or
‘ satiety.’ Of words formed with T3TJT the following are exam-
ples : from TT3PT ‘ to cause to tremble,’ ■JFPnPT: c who awes
mankind,’ the name of a prince : from vs'st ‘ to go,’ xrnrxnr:
‘ who goes with the wind,’ ‘ a deer :’ from V (v?) ‘ to suck,’
fern, -xft, * who sucks the breast,’ ‘ an infant from
WTT ‘ to blow,’ ‘ a piper :’ from ‘ to torment,’
‘ who tortures the moon,’ ‘ the planet Rahu
‘ what afflicts the marrow,’ ‘ what is very painful :’ from xr^
‘ to cook,’ fvj'nwrq: * who cooks by measure,’ ‘ a niggard :’
from in? ‘ to scorch ;’ r6c41d»dxr. ‘ what scorches the forehead,’
‘ the sun :’ from rr? ‘ to be or make mad,’ ‘ what mad-
dens or shines upon the water,’ ‘ lightning.’ From ‘ to
mind’ or ‘ think,’ implying conceit or imagination, come such
compounds as ‘one who thinks himself a Pandit;’
‘ who fancies himself a cow.’ It is unnecessary to
multiply examples further.
leaving ^r, is added to verbs preceded by Ht,
or tt, to form adjectives implying the mode of the action ;
as, ‘ that which is made by a little at a time ;’
‘ what is made with difficulty ;’ *pR ‘ what is made with ease.’
320
DERIVATION.
This affix is sometimes used indiscriminately with qs^r : see
below.
fa uipq and w«hH are attached to q ‘ to be,’ and qqq to cn
\ O \ C\ 7 Vd \ c
* to do,’ compounded with certain verbs, which, as in the case
of and ^'51, the ^ indicates must terminate in a nasal:
thus vii^twriVcnT: and ‘a man who becomes wealthy,’
* not having been so before,’ are formed with the two first
affixes ; and ‘ the means of becoming wealthy,’ with
the last : so qrqpqfqqiT:, ‘ becoming blind ;’
‘ means of blinding ;’ &c.
t?, leaving qr, forms nouns, for the most part masculine,
implying place, or instrument, or appellation ; as, from '3',
?ht=St:: ‘ a mine,’ ‘ where men work ;’ * to cover,’
‘ the lip,’ ‘ that by which the teeth are covered ;’ ;qq * to dig,’
'■>3TT7?q: ‘ a spade ;’ xittt ‘ to deal,’ wqqT: £ a market qt^ ‘ to
touch,’ fqqq: ‘ a touchstone ;’ qx ‘ to go,’ iffqx: ‘ pasture-land ;’
X? ‘ to bear,’ X?: ‘ a conveyance &c.
q»T is one of those affixes of which the application is most
extensive, and it forms a number of very useful masculine
nouns, signifying the act, the agency, the instrument, the
thing, or the abstract property. The essential element is qr ;
but the q indicates that a final palatal is to be changed to a
guttural ; and the q, that a radical medial ^ is to be made
long, and a final vowel to take its Vriddhi element, whilst any
medial vowel except qr is changed to the Guna equivalent : a
penultimate nasal is, with a few exceptions, rejected. Thus
qq , ‘ to cook,’ makes qrq>: * cooking’ or ‘ maturity ;’ qit ‘ to go,’
qnj: ‘ a foot ;’ qw ‘ to desire,’ qqq: * desire,’ ‘ love ;’ qq^ ‘ to be
weary,’ fq^TH: ‘ rest ;’ q ‘ to go,’ qrt; ‘ strength,’ ‘ essence.’ qTfflqrc:
‘ diarrhoea ;’ ‘ to take,’ jrrc: ‘ a necklace,’ qtTfTX: ‘ food ^ 4 to
cry,’ with qq , qiTq: ‘ roaring ;’ q ‘ to be,’ mq: ‘ nature,’ ‘ con-
dition ;’ fqsT ‘ to enter,’ q^i: ‘ an abode ;’ ^ ‘ to be sick,’ xfn:
‘ disease ‘ to touch,’ ‘ touch ;’ ‘ to kindle, qq:
‘ fuel ;’ ‘ to loosen,’ qqq: f flaccidity,’ the vowel remaining
short ; xg ‘ to colour,’ xm: ‘ passion.’ but Xjf: ‘ a theatre :’
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. NOUNS.
321
‘ to go,’ makes either tjtt: * speed,’ or ‘ dropping :’
and ‘ to throb,’ make ?=cfnx: and Ttfira: ‘ throbbing
fR, * to collect,’ changes its initial to cji ; as, 'Rrni: ‘ the body,’
‘ a habitation.’ Many words formed with tj>T admit of
^PT also, as observed above ; taking one or other in different
senses or combinations : as, tnl, ‘ to guide,’ makes ‘ lead-
ing ;’ but TPTR ‘ affection,’ TrfWR ‘ throwing round,’ ttIwr:
‘ marriage XT? ‘ to take,’ with ^ and ftr prefixed, to form
terms of imprecation, makes v'TR'JjTfr: * dishonour,’ ‘ death,’
as but ‘ acceptance or seizure of
the wealth,’ f*TCTsr: ‘ confinement of the thief.’ Some of
the distinctions are very fanciful : thus fR compounded with
a flower,’ takes tpt when it means ‘ gathering by hand,’
as ; but ’FnT when it means gathering in any other
way, as wuq^tr: ‘ gathering flowers (with a stick).’
forms attributives in requiring the change of
to ^rr, and of any other short vowel to its Guna substitute,
and of a final palatal to a guttural : ‘ to leave,’ unfJT'T £ who
leaves ;’ £ to join,’ ‘ who joins,’ * a religious man ;’
‘ to hate,’ irf'TJf ‘ who or what hates ;’ £ to play,’
‘ who plays ;’ ttr £ to touch,’ *n=trfi'?r ‘ what touches’ or
‘ is close to ;’ R? £ to speak,’ TJtWTf^ £ who contradicts.’ The
class of verbs simf? (see p. 238.) does not change the vowel ;
‘who is calm;’ except with ■g’ft or Tt prefixed,
or ■RJTTf<pT £ mad,’ ‘ intoxicated.’
leaving "3T, is added to fj?? £ to be unctuous,’ vrrw £ to
shine,’ £ to break ;’ as, £ unctuous,’ HTWC ‘ splendid,’
vi^t. ‘ fragile.’
vd
Z, leaving is added to «R £ to do,’ ^ £ to go,’ and £ to
go,’ to form attributives and appellatives in composition with
other words, z indicates the formation of the feminine in
as, faut: £ a servant,’ £ a female servant.’ When the
feminine is fsK^T, the derivative has been formed with ;
so £ who makes the sky,’ ‘ the sun ;’ vi ipr: ‘ who makes
light,’ £ the sun :’ -id -<d £ what makes fame,’ ‘ honourable,’
T t
322
DERIVATION.
‘ glorious so also q??jqq: ‘ one who goes before,’ ‘ a leader
fnetl-qr: ‘ one who goes for alms,’ ‘ a mendicant &c.
Z*, leaving qr, is added to jrq in certain compounds, when
is substituted for the root, to signify the agent ; as, qiqTq:
* a man who kills his wife qffrqt ‘ a woman who kills her
husband qqT?q: ‘ one who destroys or breaks open a door,’
* a thief fqqxf ‘ what destroys bile,’ ‘ clarified butter.’ Com-
pounded with qrfqr and hit, in the sense of ‘ manufacture’ or
‘ art,’ q is substituted for the root ; as, qrfqiq*. or 7nTq: ‘ a
mechanic,’ ‘an artisan.’ It is also added to q ‘ to sing,’ and
qT ‘ to drink,’ in certain combinations ; qnqq:, qrfqqt, ‘ a male
or female chaunter of the Sama :’ qruq: -xft ‘ a winebibber :’
but qT, ‘ to preserve,’ takes q; ; as, qfiqqT qTErqfi ‘ a female
Brahman, who keeps the milk.’
q, leaving qr, is added to qq ‘ to go,’ and ‘ to kill,’ to
form attributives and appellatives : the s indicates the elision
of the radical final : q'f^q ‘ who or what goes every where
fq^q*. ‘ who goes in the air,’ ‘ a bird ;’ qqq: ‘ w hat goes on its
belly,’ ‘ a snake ‘ a destroyer of an enemy Tfrftq^:
‘ what drives away darkness,’ ‘ the sun.’
q forms nouns with to be,' preceded by fq, q, and q;
as, fqq; ‘ who is every where,’ ‘ a deity ; ’ qn: ‘ a master
qrq: ‘ a progenitor :’ also w ith Tf ‘ to flow,’ preceded by its
object ; fqTiir ‘ what runs in a measured course,’ ‘ the ocean ;’
^TiTTf: ‘ what runs in a hundred (streams),’ ‘ a river.’ ^iw:, a
name of S'iva, is considered to be formed also with this affix,
from 'ST ‘ auspicious,’ and to be.’
qT, leaving qT, preceded by q, is added to verbs ending in q5T
or in diphthongs substituting qq for their finals, to form nouns
of various kinds ; as, ‘ to give,’ ^Tq: ‘ a portion ;’ VT ‘ to
hold,’ VTq: ‘ a possessor,’ ‘ one who has’ or ‘ holds ;’ $q ‘ to
go,’ qtq^qiq; ‘ fi’ost :’ also to ^ ‘ to go,’ q ‘ to ooze,’ qf ‘ to
destroy,’ ^ ‘ to take,’ preceded by prepositions ; the qr in
this and the following affixes implies the Vriddhi change of
the final vowel or a medial qr, and the Guna change of a
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. NOUNS.
323
medial short vowel ; as, 'qiqrq: 4 going away,’ 4 end,’ 4 destruc-
tion ;5 4 trickling ^TWR: 4 end,' 4 conclusion,’ or 4 who
or what ends 4 a shark/ also 4 who or what takes
away also to qft 4 to guide,’ qrq: 4 a means fes? 4 to lick,’
4 licking fgq ‘ to embrace,’ int: 4 embracing 4 to
take,’ ?jT?r: 4 an alligator ;’ ^qv 4 to pierce,’ ^rrv: 4 a hunter.’
It is also added to qq 4 to be born,’ preceded by nouns or
particles in various senses ; as, qq 4 unborn fqq 4 twice
born fqq: 4 a Brahman ;’ qqq 4 born after ;’ qqq: 4 a
younger brother qxfqq* 4 a lotus,’ 4 born in a pool ;’ qqpq:
4 a monkey,’ 4 one born in a stable ; ’ qj?iq 4 born from
accident,’ or 4 what has not been foreseen.’ From xnp 4 to
dig,’ it forms qfwr 4 a ditch.’ It is also added to 4 to
eat,’ preceded by fq ; as, 4 food :’ and to 4 to be
possessed of,’ qq 4 to desire,’ 4 to eat,’ preceded by their
objects ; as, qT*ngtc3 4 having flesh,’ 4 stout ;’ iTPEnrp? 4 desirous
of flesh ;’ qfqqgj 4 eating flesh :’ also to 4 to see,’ and qy
4 to go,’ preceded by ?fT ; as, qqqTflqr 4 expecting happiness
oR^tTWr^TX 4 one of good habits.’ These make their feminines
in qr ; as, qfq^fbqf &c.
fnrfVr is an affix of extensive use to form attributives from
verbs. The essential termination is ?q^; the effect of the
initial m is noticed above. Roots ending in qT insert q before
as in the preceding affix. Nouns thus formed are mostly
declinable in three genders as nouns in ^ (p. 64). It is
affixed to a class of words called ; as, 4 who or
what takes ;’ qinfqq 4 who or what stays’ or 4 is stationary
ftTXfspr 4 preserving,’ 4 protecting ;’ qronjq 4 who or what
offends ;’ qfxqifqq 4 what disgraces.’ It is also added to ^q,
preceded by =nnx or ; as, ^RqTnrq 4 who strikes the
boy '^ftqqifiTq 4 who strikes the head :’ — to verbs preceded
by nouns ; as, qqriqlfqq 4 who eats his meal hot ;’ qTuqrftq
4 who does what is right ;’ qqqrf^ 4 who declares Brahma’
(the Vedas or the true god). It is also added to them to form
attributives implying 4 similarity,’ as d y qifiiq 4 who cries like
t t 2
324
derivation.
a camel or to denote a religious obligation, as
‘ who sleeps on the ground,’ in consequence of a vow.
is affixed to a few verbs to form appellatives or attri-
butives : T!T has its usual influence ; z indicates the feminine
termination to be and tt, wherever it occurs, indicates
the final of the derivative to be '5RT : thus, from rf ‘ to sing,’
TTrtR:, TTnnfl, ‘ a male’ or ‘ female singer from ‘ to aban-
don,’ ?rnrTT: 4 a year,’ or 4 a kind of rice.’
■RR is added to ^ ‘ to take,’ with the effect of except
that it prolongs the vowel ; as, (nom. ‘ one to
take his share,’ 4 an heir.’
is an affix to verbs in general to form nouns attributive
of agency : trr, as usual, indicates the change of vowel ; whilst
xj indicates the termination of the derivative to be : thus <S,
‘ to do,’ makes cbRoB ‘ who or what makes ;’ * to cook,’
‘ who or what cooks’ or ‘ ripens jpr * to kill,’ xrriTcfi * who or
what destroys ;’ 4 to give,’ 4 a givei'.’ Some verbs do
not make the vowel long ; as, TRTcfi 4 who tames ;’ X>J,
4 who kills ;’ tR^, -5RT=K 4 who begets,’ 4 a parent.’ Femi-
nine nouns usually substitute ^ for the penultimate vowel ; as,
ofirriXafiT, tj|f^=hT, &c. : so do some feminine nouns, names of
diseases, formed with this affix ; as, tTS"ff=RT 4 vomiting,’ XRT-
f^T 4 diarrhoea:’ they are considered irregular: so are ^rifa^T
4 sitting,’ and STTfxRFT 4 lying down.’
TT^ is an affix of extensive use to form appellatives of
agency ; it leaves w, and nouns formed with this affix are
declined like nouns in ^ in the three genders (see p. 44) : thus
‘to make,’ ‘a maker,’ 4 a doer ;’ trt, JRtJ ‘a goer ;’ tr* ,
4 a cooker,’ 4 a ripener.’ The noun follows the analogy of the
original verb in inserting or omitting ^ before IT ; as, tffg' or
4 who bears;’ trfrijr or 4 who wishes;’ WRT, or
4 who goes ;’ &c. After some verbs, is said to be
used instead of ; as, from 1? 4 to sacrifice,’ 4 the minis-
tering priest.’
leaving vf, forms substantives from 4 to worship,’
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. NOUNS.
325
qrg ‘ to ask,’ qq 4 to strive,’ fq^T ‘ to shine,’ gqq 4 to ask
as, qg: ‘ sacrifice,’ qtqqT 4 solicitation,’ q^: ‘ effort,’ fqqj ‘ shin-
ing,’ and jpg': ‘ a question.’ 4 sleep’ or 4 a dream,’ is
formed from tqq 4 to sleep,’ with q^ affixed.
qfqT' forms adjectives from ^q 4 to sleep,’ irq 4 to thirst,’
qq 4 to be proud ;’ as, ^qq ‘ sleepy,’ qqrjq ‘ thirsty,’ gqnY
‘ arrogant :’ they are declined in three genders like nouns in
ST (p. 50).
qfqq forms attributives and appellatives from verbs ending-
in vowels ; as, from qr 4 to give,’ q^lH'q a proper name ; '3T ‘ to
injure,’ 31^ a title proper for a Brahman.
vq, which, as remarked under the head of leaves, for
the termination of the derivative, qq, forms attributives of
agency and appellatives after verbs that signify ‘ motion,’
‘ sound,’ ‘ ornament,' or ‘ anger ;’ as, qqrq ‘ who or what is
going ;’ qsqq 4 who or what is shaking iqqr ‘ who or what
is sounding ;’ wqqr ‘ who or what is adorning ;’ -qtqq 4 who or
what is in a passion also after verbs beginning with a con-
sonant, and having the indicatory vowel gravely accented ; as,
Y * to be,’ q#q ‘ who or what is abiding ;’ Yv ‘ to increase,’
^rtq 4 who or what is increasing :’ also after various other
verbs ; as, q 4 to be quick,’ qqq 4 fleet ;’ 3^ ‘ to burn,’ q^>q
4 burning,’ ‘ shining ;’ &c. The feminine termination of nouns
formed with qq is TPT ; as, qqqT, q*qqr, &c. : it also forms
feminine nouns signifying the act, after verbs of the tenth
conjugation, or causals ; as, qflWT ‘ causing to do ;’ flu'll
‘ causing: to take :’ also after a few other verbs ; as, qrrq ,
qTqqr ‘ sitting ;’ 4 loosing ;’ q£, qgqT 4 effort,’
‘ exertion ;’ qfq, qqrqr 4 praising ;’ fqq, q^-TT 4 perception.’
forms attributives with qq 4 to bow,’ qrq 4 to tremble,’ ftq
4 to smile,’ qg 4 to desire,’ fqfq 4 to injure,’ qfq 4 to shine ;’ as,
qq 4 bent,’ qrg 4 tremulous,’ 4 smiling,’ qq 4 desirous,’ fqq
4 mischievous,’ 4 cruel,’ qhj 4 radiant.’ It also forms the inde-
clinable noun qqq 4 continual,’ from qq 4 to let loose,’ with
\
the negative prefixed.
326
DERIVATION.
forms attributives with certain verbs ; as, 4 to give,’
‘ to cut,’ fir 4 to bind,’ 4 to decay,’ ‘ to go ^ c who
or what gives,’ or 4 who or what cuts ;’ ‘ who or what
binds ;’ ‘ decaying qq ‘ what goes.’
qqi forms appellatives with afPr , ‘ to wake,’ and verbs in
the frequentative mode ; as, jTPT^i ‘ vigilant,’ and 4 who
worships frequently,’ ‘ who bites keenly,’ ‘ a
snake ;’ from xf 4 to worship,’ c;'3T ‘ to bite ;’ &c.
qq forms nouns of agency from a class of verbs called ^-infrf,
and from a variety of others : for the effect of xj, see and
xrq above : ‘ to delight,5 qTqq ‘ who or what is delighted ;’
it? 4 to madden,’ pqq ‘ who or what maddens ;’ fr ‘ to accom-
plish,’ qprq ‘ who or what effects ;’ wt? 4 to bear,’ TTIR ‘ who
or what bears.’ These nouns are very commonly used in the
masculine gender as appellatives ; as, qxqq: 4 a son,’
4 Love,’ qqqqq: 4 the destroyer of Madhu,’ a name of Vishnu :
and the like.
is an analogous termination to the preceding, and also
forms derivatives ending in Ffq ; but they are not nouns
signifying an agent ; they denote the object, the act, the
instrument, the site, or the abstract condition ; and although
sometimes masculine or feminine, are more usually neuter
nouns: qrqq: 4 an article of food,’ Htqq ‘ food in general’ or
‘ feeding,’ from qq ‘ to eat;’ qqirq 4 chattering,’ from qrq? 4 to
talk ?rqq 4 laughing,’ 4 laughter,’ from ?q 4 to laugh ;’ qpTT
4 accomplishing,’ or 4 means,’ 4 instrument,’ from xnw 4 to effect
trrq 4 drinking’ or 4 drink,’ from tn 4 to drink ;’ 4 an
implement of cutting,’ 4 an axe,’ from 4 to cut ;’ qr^rq'I
4 an implement of milking,’ 4 a milk-pail,’ from HTj 4 to milk.’
The 7 of the affix denotes the feminine formation in
qiR forms attributives, which in one or other gender become
appellatives, from different verbs ; as, FT 4 to stay,5 RlFt 4 who
or what is stationary,’ WHR 4 an inanimate product of nature ;’
tn 4 to be powerful,’ fqR 4 who is powerful,’ 4 God ;’ qpFT
4 to shine,’ HTOT 4 radiant,’ &c. It is also added to xq, 4 to
VERBAL DERIVATIVES. NOUNS.
327
go,' in the frequentative mode ; TrPTRT: ‘ who or what goes
repeatedly.’
is added to fvFj ‘ to abuse,’ and other verbs, to form
attributives signifying the agent ; as, ‘ who or what
reviles ;’ ferra ‘ who or what injures ;’ also to f<ra ‘ to play,’
and '^,3T 4 to cry,’ preceded by ^Tr ; as, ^rf^cfi £ who sports’ or
£ plays 4 who calls out’ or ‘ cries.’
■^T, like the preceding, leaving ^fi, forms attributives with
IT £ to go,’ w 4 to go,’ and 7% 4 to cut as, inr=fi ‘ who or what
goes ttt=R 4 who or what moves c5^R ‘ who or what cuts.’
It also forms benedictory nouns ; as, 4 living,’ is used
as wishing long life to ; sfiTcsfe ijrrr: * Mayest thou be a
liver,’ i. e. live long.
^T, leaving ^r, is added to different verbs to form attri-
butives and appellatives. The indicates that the derivative
follows the conjugational form of the verb ; as, tjt, ferfir 4 to
drink,’ fxr=r £ who or what drinks ; to see,’
4 who or what sees ;’ V, unfit ‘ to suck,’ uu £ who sucks,’ un:
4 a boy,’ urn 4 a girl.’ So £ to give,’ and in ‘to hold,’ third
conj. ; ^ 4 who or what gives ;’ ^u £ who or what holds.’ So
feu 4 to smear,’ and 4 to know,’ of the sixth conjugation,
make fe^n and ; as in fefewTT: 4 the unsoiled,’ 4 the
gods ;’ rfffn^: 4 who tends the cattle,’ a name of Vishnu. So
derivatives from verbs of the tenth conjugation and causals
retain the sign ; as, 4 to think,’ 4 who or what
reflects;’ n, URU 4 who or what fills;’ n-? and tT5T, n^"5PT
4 what causes to tremble.’ is also added to various verbs
to form feminine abstract nouns ; as, feuT 4 act,’ 4 action,’
4 wish,’ ufcnniT 4 worship,’ uftnun 4 wandering,’ 3RntT 4 hunting,’
4 roaming,’ 'JTTtt^T 4 waking,’ 4 vigilance.’
WTofifT, leaving W3R, forms attributives from a few verbs ; as,
■^TTSfi 4 prattling,’ 4 a babbler,’ from 4 to talk idly ;’ ftrejTUi
4 begging,’ from fast 4 to seek alms ;’ &c. The feminine is
formed with t — ^ -dM i ^7, fegfral, &c.~ — by virtue of the indi-
catory initial U.
328
DERIVATION.
like &c., as above, leaves and forms attri-
butives denoting tbe practiser of any art or business : the
feminine, in consequence of tt, ends in thus vnr, ‘ to dance,’
makes ^^<+1, * a male or female dancer ‘ to dig,’
WH <+:, 4 a male or female ditcher.’
■grr, leaving 3, forms neuter and feminine nouns from
various verbs, signifying the instrument or means by which
any end is effected ; as, 4 to cut,’ ‘ a sickle ;’ nr? ‘ to
sprinkle,’ srgf £ a bucket ;’ 1? and Tpr 4 to join,’ or xft^i'
4 fastening of a yoke STtf 4 to injure,’ STfjj 4 a weapon ;’ lift
4 to guide,’ ^ 4 the eye ;’ ^*31 4 to bite,’ 4 a tooth 4 to
govern,’ T5TTF? 4 a scripture.’ it, 4 to purify,’ makes til# 4 the
snout of a hog,’ or 4 the shaft of a plough.’ v, 4 to suck,’
makes VT^fl 4 a nurse ;’ and vt 4 to have (health by it),’ a
particular shrub.
W4H is added to the verb 4 to sing,’ to form tttw. 4 a
singer.’
SECTION III.
Nominal Derivatives.
256. Having formed primitive nouns from verbs, other
nouns may again be derived from the primitive nouns, to imply
every possible relation to the things, actions, or notions, which
the primitives express. These derivative nouns, called, as
already mentioned, Tad-dhita (‘relating or belonging to that,’
that is to say, to the primitive), are formed in the usual mode
by attaching certain affixes to the base, and modifying the
latter agreeably to special rule, or to the indications afforded
by the letter or letters accompanying the essential elements of
the termination.
257- The difficulty of an unexceptionable classification of
the Taddhita derivatives is still greater than even that of the
classification of Kridanta words, inasmuch as the former are
still more diversified in form and purport, and as many of the-
affixes are applicable in a greater variety of acceptations. We
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES.
329
must therefore have recourse again to the alphabetical arrange-
ment of the terminations, distinguished under a few different
heads, and occasionally associating such as are of an analogous
and limited application.
258. Some of the most extensively useful of the Taddhita
affixes are connected by an analogous diversity and extent of
application. They are mostly employed in forming words
which are one or other, or sometimes all, of the following :
i. Patronymics and terms denoting lineal descent, or com-
munity of origin ; 2. Attributives of a variety of qualities
and circumstances ; 3. Appellatives, or names of persons and
things ; 4. Nouns of aggregation ; and 5. Abstract nouns.
These may therefore be classed under one head, as Miscella-
neous nouns. Another considerable class of terminations is
employed to denote possession of a thing or property by an
individual object ; and they may constitute another class, as
Possessives. The terminations forming the superlative and
comparative degrees are included amongst the Taddhita affixes ;
and so are those which form various pronominal derivatives,
and terms connected with number, as ordinals, &c. : these may
be grouped together. Finally, there are various indeclinable
and adverbial terms. Thus making four classes of nominal
derivatives ; in each of which the terminations may be alpha-
betically arranged. With exception of the last of the above
classes, Taddhita derivatives are declinable in either one or all
of the genders.
259. The letter or syllable which forms the essential
adjunct to the base, is sometimes merely added to it agree-
ably to the laws of combination ; but it more usually takes
the place of the last vowel of the primitive, and if that be
followed by ?r, of the consonant also. Thus from comes
fnr ; from ; from f^RTn, TJffixr. A final g- or gi
may be changed to its Guna equivalent, and then combined
with the vowel of the affix, as ; but it may be some-
times cut off, as £a stone,' makes grnR
330
DERIVATION.
‘ stony ‘ the Vedas’ or ‘ Brahma,’ mai ‘ relating to
Brahma’ or ‘ the Vedas but as a generic term of descent, it
makes dl4Uli: ‘ a Brahman.’ So nouns ending in ^ usually
preserve the final ; as, '-3 few ‘ a car,’ -=110*111 £ belonging to a
car.’ There are many varieties, however, in the annexation
of the affix to the base, for which the Dictionary must be
consulted.
260. It is also a general rule, that all those terminations
which contain an indicatory ?rr, »r, or ■gi, require that the first
vowel of the base, whether it be a simple or compound term,
substitute the Vriddhi equivalent ; as, ^'snr * the eye,’
‘ relating to the eye.’ In some polysyllabic words the Vriddhi
letter is repeated ; as, ‘ a friend,’ ‘ friendship ;’ and
from wfrvf and combined, comes -RlPMHUjri ‘ sacred to
Agni and Marut’ (fire and wind). If the primitive begins with
a compound letter, of which the second member is t? or =r, the
Vriddhi diphthong or is commonly prefixed to the semi-
vowel ; as, from '^rriT ‘ logic,’ comes ‘ a logician ;’ from
^TTC? £ a tiger,’ wn ‘ covered with a tiger’s skin from
( to-morrow,’ sfnfVi* ‘ of, or relating to, to-morrow.’
261. In some instances, nominal derivatives retain the form
of the primitives unaltered ; as, tr^TcS: £ a native of Panchala,’
otherwise ‘ belonging or relating to the Yavanas,’
otherwise irPPT. In these cases it is affirmed that the usual
affix had been attached to the primitive, but again rejected,
together with its effects : this is called Taddhita-luk.
262. Attributives formed with affixes containing an indi-
catory 1JT, >r, Z, <?, *?, and taking the three genders, form, with
a few exceptions, the feminine with as,
&c.
Class I. Miscellaneous affixes.
■?PT, leaving ’S, forms, 1. Patronymics ; as, iirfRT: 4 a son’ or
‘ male descendant,’ of TW : also generic terms of descent ; as,
‘ any divine being,’ from ‘ a deity :’ 2. Attributives in
certain senses ; as, ip? £ covered with an elephant’s hide,’ from
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES. MISCELLANEOUS.
331
fgTT ‘ an elephant ;’ *rrfT5 ‘ dyed with turmeric,’ from jrfcyr ;
f*"3ifR.=r ‘ made of the wood of the Devadaru pine:’ 3. Appel-
latives ; as, rj 4 a man,’ tttiJ ‘ a woman ;’ wf'inl 4 the earth,’
TJTfihn * a prince :’ 4. Nouns of aggregation ; as, cfiTTfnf 4 a
flock of pigeons,’ from ^tfnr : and 5. Abstract nouns in certain
senses ; as, ‘ the nature of a horse.’ In general, ’ST»I may
be considered as forming similar derivatives with the analogous
termination ’^nrr, and to be applicable to the same primitives,
although theoretically it is limited to words of which the first
vowel is gravely accented, which terminate in '3', or which
belong to certain specified classes ; as, or and
others.
forms from 33*hT, 4 act,’ the attributive 3W? 4 active,’
4 energetic.’
3itrr, leaving ^r, is an affix of very universal application. It
forms, 1. Patronymics; as, ‘a son or descendant of
TtPT TTTT33: ‘ the son of Vasudeva’ that is, Krishna :
also terms of descent in general ; as, 4 a Brahman,’ from
A final is changed to 3*. before the of in this
sense ; as, f^TTn:: ‘ the son of two mothers,’ from % and JTTiJ
‘ a mother.’ 2. Attributives ; as, fiftrsn 4 Madder,’ ‘ of
the colour of, or dyed with, Madder ;’ 4 cloth,’ 4 made
of, or covered with, cloth,’ &c. ; 4 relating or belonging to,
or a worshipper of, Siva ;’ TS!T3 4 relating or belonging to, or
a worshipper of, Vishnu ;’ 3W3 4 belonging to, or produced in
the country of, Nishadha.’ 4 a horse,’ makes 4 belong-
ing or relating to a horse,’ 4 draw n by horses ;’ snin 4 sugar,’
STT#* ‘ sugary,’ 4 made of sugar,’ or 4 as sweet ;’ 4 woollen,’
4 made of wool,’ from 3nnT 4 wool 4 produced
in the hot or cold weather,’ 4 summer,’ 4 winter ;’ 4 diurnal,’
from 31^7^ 4 a day ;’ Tf^T 4 nocturnal,’ from f^T5IT 4 night ;’ WNrHt.
4 annual,’ from 7T3WT. 4 a year ;’ ^TTlh; 4 bodily,’ 4 corporeal,’ from
4 the body.’ It also forms possessive attributes ; as, WT
4 wisdom,’ TtTsT 4 having wisdom,’ 4 wise.’ 3. Many of the attri-
butives already given are also appellatives : thus ffa: and
u u 2
332
DERIVATION.
mean severally ‘ a follower of Siva or Vishftu is a
proper name, ‘ king of Nishadha * * * 4 a carriage drawn by
horses.’ tttw, relating to the asterism war, is in the masculine
the name of a month, when the moon is in that asterism ;
and in the feminine, wNt 4 day of full moon in the month of
Paush.’ 4. Aggregates ; as, 4 a flight of cranes,’ from 4 a
crane wsf £ a troop of beggars,’ from tWr: 4 a beggar.’ 5. Ab-
stract nouns ; as, STfw: 4 who is pure,’ ‘ purification
4 a silent sage ;’ htw 4 silence ;’ 4 young,’ 4i^u" 4 youth
4 a man, wf^w 4 manliness,’ 4 manhood,5 4 manly stature,5
& c. ; 4 large,’ wHhf 4 bulk,’ 4 bigness.’ ^rtrr is also some-
times used pleonastically ; as, or wfuw: 4 a kinsman ;5
^ftwnr: or ■^frwu 4 a drug ;’ ^WfTT or Ijww: 4 a divinity.’
leaving forms patronymics only ; as, 4 a
descendant of Daksha ;’ TWrwf^i: 4 a descendant of Vyasa’ ('3R
being inserted).
and analogous terminations, cR and fq7W, are added to
fww and fw, substituted for fw, to form fwfsiiW, and fwftrc
signifying 4 flat, as the nose,’ fwftRT WTftnfiT ; or 4 flat-nosed,’
fwfa?: &c.
^f»T is added to a class of words to form nouns of multitude ;
as, yffidl 4 a number of mills :’ also to and
severally authors of rules for an order of mendicants, and
for acting ; to imply their disciples ; 4 a mendicant,5
‘ an actor.’ is of more extensive application as a
possessive affix.
leaving ^rrr^, forms abstract masculine nouns from
attributes of sensible properties ; as, SHfi 4 white,’
4 whiteness ;5 4 large,’ trfvRW 4 bulk ;’ K? 4 soft,’
4 softness 4 great,’ 4 greatness 4 heavy,5
TifbTW 4 heaviness &c. These form their nominatives in ^tT ;
as, 'STfimT, &c. (see p. 61).
WtR is added to 4 the rainy season,’ forming ITT^WTR
4 what grows or is produced in the i-ains.’
is added to appellatives to signify 4 multitude ’srfww?:
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES. MISCELLANEOUS.
333
4 a flock of sheep :’ also to various prepositions to form attri-
butives conveying their general purport ; 4 manifest
‘ large,’ ‘ extended ‘ contracted TFT3 ‘ much
‘ near.’
added to forms I * a multitude of carriages.’
ofi?T, that is, =fi, forms a variety of derivative words, mostly
attributives ; as, JTtjR ‘ produced or born in the country of
Madra,’ ‘ stout,’ £ dyed yellow,’ 4 belonging to
me,’ 4 belonging to thee,’ Ti3t 4 sad,’ tp^cfi ‘ bought with five,’
4 bearing or receiving five,’ as tax or interest. It forms also
attributives implying 4 skill ;’ as, 4 one skilled in dressing
hair :’ or 4 limitation ;’ as, fgR 4 cut,’ fgRoji 4 a little cut :’ also
4 likeness ;’ as, 4 cold, as it were,’ i. e. dull, slow ; TtUR
4 hot, as it were,’ i. e. quick, smart. It is added to prepositions ;
as, to ^rfv 4 over,’ 4 more than ;’ and to 4 after,’ and
4 near ;’ ’Srfrrsfi or ^rvfbs 4 lustful.’ It forms also appel-
latives ; as, 4 an heir,’ 4 one who takes his portion,’ from
4 a part ;’ particularly when pity or contempt is intended ;
as, 4 a stumpy tree ;’ 4 an inferior Sudra ;’ 4 the
poor child ;’ <*: 4 the unhappy Devadatta ;’ 4 a vile
horse.’ It sometimes implies 4 doubt as, ’3P5R: 4 the horse (of
whom is this).’ It is frequently pleonastic ; as, or
4 a sheep ;’ Jrftri: or nfilR: 4 a jewel ;’ &c.
and the analogous terminations and are
affixed to nouns to form appellatives implying 4 inferiority
friTr^:, f3TgT!T:, fVlWtfffa:, 4 an inferior scholar.’ They are
also attached in an adverbial form to verbal inflexions ; as,
&c. 4 he cooks incompletely,’ 4 he does not finish
cooking.’
T? and are analogous terminations, of which the essen-
tial adjunct is ; the second requires the Vriddhi vowel :
they form, I. words implying 4 descent ;’ as, from ^73 4 a race,’
or 4 sprung from a good family :’ 2. Attributives ;
as, 4 a day,’ makes 4 to be done in a given number
of days ;’ wrWR: 4 either bank of a river,’ 4 who or
334
DERIVATION.
what goes or extends to both banks utjt: ‘ a village,’ flTHlifl
‘ rustic,' ‘ village ^TTW?r makes ■’srmrffhT ‘ what is fit or good for
oneself ;’ ‘ all mankind,’ fiq sy'jf'HfcT ‘ what is fit or good
for all 3. Appellatives ; frTFS, ‘ sesamum,’ makes IfplfH ‘ a
field of sesamum Krm? ‘ seven steps,’ ^TTSnr^T ‘ friendship,’
‘ intimacy ;’ ‘ fresh butter,’ from ‘ to-day,’ and ITT
‘ a cow.’
if, leaving forms, 1 . words of descent ; as, from ‘ a
man of the military caste,’ the same, as sprung from
him : 2. Attributives ; as, tTg: ‘ a country,’ ‘ relating or
belonging to it.’
If and tprr are analogous affixes, both leaving fit : the one
requires Vriddhi ; the other not: they form, 1. words of
descent in general ; as, 4 a sister’s son,’ ‘ the
son of a father’s sister :’ 2. Attributives ; or
‘relating to Mahendra ;’ ‘suited to, or fit for, a calf;'
I|[<+.ri5<I ‘ fit for a wall 3i is inserted before the affix after
some words ; as, ‘ own,’ ‘ royal :’ 3. Appellatives ;
as, trfTftiT: ‘ a mountaineer.’
and are two affixes to nouns to form attributives
\ O V»
implying ‘ being known by as, or ‘ known
by, or on account of, learning.’
>r, leaving ^r, forms feminine nouns of descent ; as,
‘ a female descendant of ttPsttI ;’ and nouns of action, com-
pounded with xrnr ‘ falling ;’ as, '*i RidV I ri I ‘ falling of an hour,’
‘a lunar day.’ After ‘a hawk,’ and firFJ ‘sesamum,’ a
nasal is inserted; as, ^vfRnrr ‘hawking;’ TTFRUITT ‘an obla-
tion’ (in which sesamum is scattered).
■fcnr alternates with after a few words, and like it leaves
for the termination ; but it differs in forming the feminine
with as, 3iT% ‘a city’ (Benares), «STnPfi ‘belonging to
Kas'i ;’ fem. ; with it would be ’Sfrrfsi^t.
vq, leaving tt, forms a few appellative and abstract nouns ;
‘ the lapis lazuli,’ from f^T a mountain so named ;
ttTrH*T ‘ depth,’ from 7T»fh: ‘ deep ;’ ‘ infinity,’ from
Nominal derivatives. — miscellaneous.
535
■3FRT 4 endless ‘ hospitality,’ from ^ffrfvi 4 a guest
and others.
with the analogous terminations and are
added to the preposition to form attributives implying
4 flat,’ as the nose ; -sniTlZT, *Hvnrr, or '3T5H7T, 4 a flat
nose ;’ ^TT*TT?:, 4 a flat-nosed man.’
7R or is an affix, leaving ^vr, to form attributives from
adverbs importing 4 time :’ 7T is inserted : as, 7TPT 4 evening,’
7TTRRR 4 what is of the evening ;’ 4 to-day,’ '^TU'rTTf 4 what
is of to-day ;’ TTT^ 4 in the forenoon,’ 4 what is of the
forenoon ;’ Art. 4 long,’ fiRT»rPT 4 lasting or delayed long ;’ &c.
is an affix forming a number of words, substituting ^cR
for the finals of nouns ending in or RTT, or in and
adding Ri to others : it forms, i. a few patronymics from
feminine nouns in the final of which is also cut off ; as,
IW5 4 a descendant of *Rrft :’ but it also implies 4 inferiority’
in this form ; as, JTTfrficR 4 an inferior,’ ‘ a young or silly
descendant of TTTrff.’ 2. Attributives ; as, <3T7TT makes cTTTSJRi
4 dyed with Lac ^fv, ‘ made w ith, or fed with, curds ;’
RW?, VTfwf5 4 virtuous,’ but 4 wicked rttctsr 4 given
or lasting for a month ;’ Rit, RTfRRi 4 annual,’ ‘ lasting for a
year ^tjt, irfVrR; 4 belonging to an army.’ 3. Appellatives ;
SH 1 fni <+: 4 a gambler,’ from RTSf 4 dice ;’ trit^or: 4 a logician,’
from trir 4 logic ;’ mfRTRt 4 a believer,’ 7fTftrT5: 4 an atheist,’
from 4 what is :’ ?nf7T, 4 a sword,’ makes R?rftr=*i: 4 a swords-
man ;’ RRR 4 a bow,’ RT*p5‘. 4 a bowman.’ 4. Aggregates of
inanimate objects ; as, RT55 4 a heap of parched grain :’ but
also of elephants, *nfRtoR ; and of kine, ViR.
7>r forms similar derivations as the preceding, but is mostly
limited to attributives, which sometimes become appellatives ;
as, 4 relating to the Vedas,’ Rf^=R: 4 a Brahman who
studies or teaches them ;’ 7ri?JTfh5 4 relating to war or battle,’
RNJlPHRu 4 a soldier.’ It is extensively used to form adjectives
relating to measures of value, quantity, number, or time :
fffteKgj 4 bought with, or of the value of, a Nishka ;’
336
DERIVATION.
or ’3TTif,5:tfui«fi 4 containing, or relating to, half a droha’ (a
measure of grain) ; 4 bought with, or of the value of,
twenty ‘ daily’ or 4 lasting for a day itrftrofi 4 monthly’
or 4 lasting for a month ;’ f'l.i fd'<* 4 lasting for two nights
=filfc<5'<=R 4 continuing for a time.’ Some terms of philosophy
are also formed with it ; as, ^rrfv|f^R, ’srrfwHTToii,
relating to that which is celestial, elemental, or spiritual. It
also forms nouns of aggregation ; as, 4 a field,’ * a
number of fields.’
7^7, like the two preceding, supplies for the termination
of similar nouns, but it does not require the Vriddhi change
of the vowel ; as, ttc1 4 a jar,’ •*rf?cfi 4 what is placed in a jar
^fr 4 a boat,’ 7rrfr«fi 4 who or what goes in a boat,’ ‘ relating or
belonging to it ;’ c who sells,’ 4 who buys,’
* a dealer,’ 4 a tradesman ;’ ^ITT ‘ a hundred,’ ^lf7T«S
4 worth, or bought with, a hundred.’ It is affixed to and
HFT to signify 4 rate of interest ;’ or HTfiToR '^TrT 4 half per
cent.’ It is also a possessive affix ; as, 4 a staff ;’
‘ one who bears a staff is^r 4 hair,’ 4 one who has much
hair rft and ^pr 4 a hundred,’ Wl"5Tfrr^fi 4 one who has a
hundred cows.’
is considered as an affix forming the words fxnrr-
Jpr: *T!"ri iw^: 4 paternal and maternal grandfather and
grandmother,’ from fqw and UTH'. added to *TTiJ forms
JTPTF5: 4 a maternal uncle ;’ ^77 to ftrff, ftnpt: 4 a paternal
uncle ;’ and ■aj to Hpr, >JPT^P 4 a brother’s son.’
is a useful affix : it leaves and forais, I . Patronymics
and terms of descent ; as, 4 the son of ^gni ;’
name of Garucla, 4 the son of Yinata ;’ 4 son of Mitrayu ;’
the final of the primitive being cut off : sometimes is
prefixed to the termination ; as, <+l c-ilrq: or 4 the son
of a respectable woman,’ ; when means 4 a harlot,’
the derivative implying 4 her son’ is being formed with
the analogous affix So either of these, forms words imply-
ing 4 descent’ from a disfigured or a base person ; as, or
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES. MISCELLANEOUS.
337
‘ the son of a one-eyed man or ‘ the son
of a slave.’ ‘ a sister,’ in combination rejects its final
before ; as, ‘ the son of a fathers sister,’
‘ the son of a mother’s sister.’ 2. <T=R also forms attributives
\
signifying ‘ produced in,’ or ‘ derived from 4 aquatic,’
from 10 4 a river ;’ ‘ earthen,’ from ‘ the earth and
3. a few appellatives ; as, from pftfV: £ rice,’ ‘a rice-field.’
^oR>t is analogous to the preceding, adding or to the termi-
nation ; as, c&risucfi ‘ belonging to, or derived from, a family ;’
otherwise It is also added to a few words in a con-
temptuous sense ; as, ?p*T, ‘ a village,’ makes 4 a clown ;’
7PR ‘ a city,’ TniKHoR: ‘ a libertine,’ ‘ a profligate.’
<*»T is another termination allied to the preceding ; differing
from <?eR only in being restricted to certain words ; as,
‘ a man,’ in particular acceptations ; as, xthriH! ‘ a killing
of men ;’ xtsrtr: 4 an assemblage of men ;’ trf^rirt f^KTT:
‘ mortal or human change -iff -xj ‘ done by a man’ or
‘ human being.’
trr, leaving vtj, forms a few feminine nouns that signify
‘ striking in sport ;’ as, ^Tlirr ‘ quarter-staff,’ and iron ‘ boxing,’
from ‘ a staff,’ gfp ‘ the fist :’ also some attributives ; as,
xrf ‘ all,’ ‘ fit or good for all.’
TR, leaving xt, forms words implying ‘ descent ;’ as, ‘ a
demon,’ * a son of Diti ;’ ‘ an Aditya,’ 4 son of Aditi ;’
‘ a descendant of Kuru.’ It is added to irfrr, when
preceded by a noun ; as, irrsrrawt ‘ son or descendant of
tnnxrfiT and to words signifying ‘ an artisan ;’ as, r^turnr, ‘ a
weaver,’ makes Tnxrr^txxT: ‘ a weaver’s progeny :’ it also forms
appellatives ; as, xrftxT^ makes xjTftxrsr: ‘ an assistant at an
assembly.’
7175 forms feminine nouns signifying, 1. Aggregation ; JjTHriT
‘ a number of villages ;’ iHHT 4 a number of men ;’ 7T*T1TT ‘ a
herd of elephants :’ 2. Abstract property ; 4 womanhood,’
xftrTT ‘ cowhood,’ g^fTT ‘ childhood.’ It is also added pleonas-
tically to ^ ; as, ^TrTT 4 a divinity.’
x x
338
DERIVATION.
<5T is added to some words to denote 4 time as, 4 of
last year ‘ of the year before last ‘ of a long
time ago :’ also to ^ substituted for ‘ new the latter
takes THTS in the same sense, TjfPT, and, as above,
Tq^i is added to terms of place to form attributives ; ?l\lVilfq
‘ produced in the south,’ ‘ a native of the south,’ &c. : so
trP3TW, xfr^rH, ‘ produced in the west, east,’ &c.
TH ofi^T forms feminine appellatives after the prepositions
and Tq; as, ‘ an acclivity ;’ * land at the foot
of a mountain.’
Tqxr is affixed to indeclinables to form attributives implying
‘ productibn as, sfliq ‘ produced where TT^T ‘ born or pro-
duced there ‘ born or produced here :’ with ^wt, 4 toge-
ther,’ it forms ^nrnq; 4 a minister.’
is added to iff, 4 a cow,’ to denote 4 multitude ifteTT ‘ a
herd of cattle.’
^ forms neuter abstract nouns from any other nouns ;
‘ Brahmanhood,’ * childhood,’ "qqqrq ‘ holiness.’
and fwq are added to nouns to denote 4 measure of
height ;’ 4 as high as the thigh.’
itjt is added to in the sense of 4 milk 4 ewe’s
C\ C\
milk.’ and equally anomalous affixes, and probably
obsolete words, meaning 4 milk,’ are similarly employed ; as,
and
r(>T and the analogous affix *3>T are added severally to
and ipr to form appellatives ; ^pcrr 4 produced from, or by, a
woman ;’ trr?q 4 produced of, or by, a man.’ In the neuter
gender they may be abstract nouns ; 4 womanhood,5
4 manhood.’
TTTSrq forms attributives from nouns in the sense of 4 infe-
riority ;’ as, fvrq^Stirjr: 4 an indifferent physician compounded
with it signifies 4 quantity ;’ 4 abundant hair :’
43IT131: has a similar purport.
fWst and are added to f?r?5 to denote 4 barrenness ;’
fiTTsfw: or ffn^qjT: 4 barren sesamum,’ 4 not bearing seed.’
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES. — MISCELLANEOUS.
339
TfiiS and fqR are affixes forming principally patronymics or
terms implying 4 descent the former furnishes the termina-
tion muxpt, the latter ^rnrfiT ; as irrrrfrqirT: or TTF^Frftr: ‘ a
descendant of the sage ipr!:.’ Analogous to them is
forming attributives of which the feminine takes f , as denoted
by the sibilant : thus from qfftTSTT, ‘ a country,’ comes ofiTfu'jrnrsT
‘ produced in it as, ofirf^IPFr *?V ‘ honey of Kapisa =&rftr-
Srinql rei | ‘ a grape of the same.’
JR? is added to nouns to import 4 made or consisting of ;’
as, £ made or consisting of stone,’ ‘ stony,’ ‘ marble
cfiiaHU 4 wooden,’ ‘ made of wood JPTJR: 4 earthen,’ ‘ made of
earth or clay it also implies 4 containing’ or 4 abounding
with ; ’ as, ^T^JR 4 containing food’ (a dish, &c.) ; jff^fiJR
4 containing sweetmeats’ (a shop or the like) ; UriH'ifT Jr?: 4 a
sacrifice abounding with clarified butter,’ i. e. one in which
many oblations are offered. It also forms with iff, 4 an ox,5
the term ifffR:, which may mean either 4 cow-dung’ or 4 the
nature or property of a com .’
jtt^R is added to words to denote 4 measure,’ either of
height, capacity, or number ; 4 as high as the knee ;5
Tpsprn? 4 as much as a Prastha ;’ q^JTTW 4 five in tale WR«H|^
4 so much.’
ij is added to a few words to form, I. Attributives; as,
JJPT 4 a village,’ iTHR 4 rural,’ 4 rustic ;’ niq 4 the face,’ hir
4 principal ;’ 4 punishment,’ 4 deserving punishment
4 respect,’ £ deserving respect qv 4 killing,’ qxq 4 de-
serving death :’ 2. Abstracts ; as, 4 a friend,’ *n?tf 4 friend-
ship ;’ ?TT 4 a messenger,’ 4 mission qfqnT, 4 a merchant,’
makes wuii-jqi 4 trade :’ 4 a thief,’ makes JSR 4 theft,’ 4 thiev-
ing.’ q is more frequently combined with other letters, as in
>q, nq, m<*, q>T , and qw.
qxs forms a few abstract nouns : rr»PT, 4 a king,’ makes Uiq
4 kingdom TRTqffT 4 a general/ *RTqr<i 4 command qctf^TT 4 a
family priest,’ qTffffTq 4 priesthood.’
x x 2
340
derivation.
rr, leaving r, forms, i. Patronymics or terms of descent;
as, ^rfaf-TrT a proper name, wfafRiR: ‘ the son of Abhijit
‘ sprung from a god ;’ RTRT ‘ a native of the outer ( Rf?rj
country 2. Attributives ; as, fftR ‘ is produced in or on an
island,' I'br : 3. Aggregates ; as, RRTT ‘ a field,’ rrtir ‘ a
number of fields R^t: ‘ hair,’ Ri^R ‘ a quantity of hair
‘ a noose,' rirrt ‘ a number of snares &c.
rr , leaving R, and requiring no change of the radical vowel,
is of much more extensive application than either of the pre-
ceding : it forms a few terms of descent ; as, TTRR: c a man of
the military tribe, sprung from a Raja cSRR ‘ of a good
family but its chief application is to form attributives imply-
ing derivation, relation, or fitness, becoming frequently appel-
latives ; as, rsr ‘ what is fit for a carriage ;' rsr: ‘ a horse fit
for harness rsr ‘ a carriage-wheel rrs relating to the root,
or to original price ; JJRR: ‘ price,’ RyR ‘ profit ;’ rrtr ‘ suited in
age,’ rrr, whence RRTr: * a friend.’ Of other attributives
formed with this affix are RRR ‘ like,’ * suitable,’ rsr
‘ appropriate,’ ‘ agreeable,’ rr ‘ wealthy,’ ‘ chief,’
rjtr ‘ virtuous,’ rrt ‘ relating to the people,’ 4 popular,’ * cur-
rent,’ R$iR ‘ fame,’ R'SHR ‘ famous,' sftRirer ‘ deserving decapi-
tation,’ from ^ftR for f$TCR and ‘cutting.’ Nouns ending
in R and the word Rf take Guna before RR ; as, ‘ a stake,’
■jTjrpR ‘ fit for a stake’ (wood) ; Rar ‘ relating to a cow’ or
‘ derived from one,’ Raj ‘ cow’s milk :’ ^R , ‘ a dog,’ changes
the semivowel ; as, 3TRI or 3TR ‘ canine :’ Rtfi?, ‘ the nave of a
wheel,’ makes R'*R ‘ fit for the nave ;’ and rtr * the nose,’ rtrt
‘ fit for the nose,’ rtr ‘ a nozzle :’ rtr ‘ a part,’ rfr* ‘ half’
(at interest), rpr ^tr ‘ half per cent.’ Of the appella-
tives, besides those specified, are, Ran ‘ a bridemaid,’ from
RR'f ‘ a wife ;’ RRan ‘ a milch cow,’ from R«J, the same, with
a inserted ; rtr: ‘ an actor,’ from rr c dress rwkn) ‘ vigour,’
from rjrr ‘ act ;’ and Raj ‘ thing,’ ‘ wealth,’ from R ‘ a
tree.’
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES. MISCELLANEOUS.
341
^ is added to nouns to form diminutives ; ‘ a house,’
* a small house ‘ the Sami tree,’ ‘ a small
Sami tree.’
irtq is added to words to imply * cause ’ or ‘ origin,’ if the
latter be man ; as, wnrar ‘ what proceeds from the same
cause ;’ ifarj-fivui ‘ what originates with Devadatta.’
ft is added to fa<^, and fqc5, substituted for fans
‘ moist/ making faw, and fq^, to signify ‘ blear-eyed.’
fqrq and fa^rfa^r are added to the preposition fa to form
attributives ; as, fafa?, fafaiffa, ‘ thick/ ‘ coarse also * flat
or crooked nosed.’
q»T is a useful affix : ^ always, as in the Kridanta deriva-
tives, denotes the addition of It forms attributives sig-
nifying chiefly ‘produced in’ or ‘from;’ as, jffar ‘the hot
season,’ ‘growing or produced in summer;’ Tg ‘a
camel/ ^frgqi ‘ produced from a camel ;’ ofi«Tc5«fi ‘ made by a
potter/ 3jc?Tc5 ; '•mqq'cfi ‘ produced in a wood,’ ‘ wild.’ It is
also added to names of countries to signify either the place
or people ; is synonymous with qT^faq^: ‘ Pali-
bothra ;’ ^TT^ofiT: means ‘ the people of Anga:’ also any thing
peculiar to the country ; as, from qrs', ‘ Cutch,’ comes qrr^jqit
qrpq; ‘ a man of Cutch ;’ ^rfafi ‘ a Cutch laugh.’ It
also forms nouns of aggregation ; as, wsfa, from TEpT ‘ an
ox/ ‘ a herd of oxen ;’ '^nqqqqi ‘ a number of the descendants
of Upagu,’ or ‘ his family or tribe collectively.’
qq, like the preceding, adds qrq, but does not change the
vowel of the primitive. It forms such attributives as
from qiq * order,’ ‘ one who knows the order ;’ q^qq ‘ produced
in or on the road ;’ qqq ‘ one who knows the road ;’ wfl
‘produced in the forenoon:’ also a few feminine nouns in
particular acceptations ; as, from qq for qfa, ‘ a quarter,’ comes
qf^qrr ‘ quarter,’ when succession is implied ; as, faqfaq.i ^Tfa
‘ he gives two and two quarters ;’ faSTfaqi ^Tfa ‘ he gives two
and two hundreds or when succession is not implied, but legal
proceedings are ; as, fa^faqf ?fajrT: ‘ fined two hundred.’
342
DERIVATION.
also forms feminine nouns from compounds implying
* enmity between the objects ;’ as, ‘ the natural
hostility of the crow and the owl.’
31773^ forms an attributive noun with the preposition f% ;
fr^ITTS ‘ large,’ * extensive.’
^rra<r and are added to names of vegetable substances
to denote * a field as, ?sr5TTSR3 or rsprifW ‘ a field of sugar-
cane.’
is added to nouns to form appellatives with the sense
of ‘ diminutiveness’ or ‘ inferiority :’ jfnrfl ‘ a sack,’ nWfarft ‘ a
small sack ;’ TtM ri f. ‘ a young calf ;’ ‘ a foal,’ also ‘ a
mule ‘ an ox unfit for the yoke.’
TT?T forms attributive nouns analogous to those formed with
7»T, as above, but in particular senses ; and the feminine
termination is f. The words imply, i. ‘Who or what goes
by means of ;’ as, ^rng=s ‘ one who goes on a horse nf^oR*. -oft
‘ a cripple,’ ‘ one who goes by means of a wheel-chair trcq: ;
iffvnn: -oft ‘ a traveller,’ ‘ one who goes along the road ;’ or, as
applied to inanimate things, Trfb7fV=fi ‘ what comes, or is
brought, by water 2. ‘ Who or what takes by means of ;’ as,
‘ an inflated skin,’ >rf^cs: ‘ a ferryman,’ ‘ one who takes
passengers or goods across a river on a skin ;’ f=RV: or
* a yoke for carrying burdens by a rope at each end,’ fwfv«fi:
or offafvss: ‘ a porter carrying loads by a yoke :’ and 3. Con-
taining a given measure ; as, grr^f^Refi £ containing two Arhakas
of grain,’ ‘ a field,’ &c.
is similarly applied to a few words ; as, ’STRTO'sfi: -^1 -«R
‘ who or what goes by being dragged.’
■£?5>r is added to 3Pfl, ‘ the Sami tree,’ to signify ‘ made of
its wood,’ 3Tifh^:
tij»T forms abstract neuter nouns from a variety of words ;
as, 3T3i ‘ white,’ 3ITW3 ‘ whiteness ‘ firm,’ ‘ firmness ;’
jfV7 ( sweet,’ JTPraf ‘ sweetness ;’ jtt|: ‘ a blockhead,’ jttm ‘ folly ;’
xrfc ‘ a thief,’ ^TST ‘ stealing ;’ ‘ a thief,’ ‘ stealing ;’
fig-Spr: ‘ a knave,’ ti3ptr ‘ dishonesty ;’ sfTSnir: ‘ a Brahman,’
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES. POSSE SSI VES.
343
■3T5TTnr ‘ the nature or office of a Brahman ‘ the four
castes,’ ‘ the duties or institution of the four castes
trwtu ‘ successively,’ ‘ succession,’ ‘ tradition.’ When
taking the feminine gender, these nouns reject 11 before ^ ; as,
* right,’ ‘ fit,’ makes or ‘ fitness.’
and *TT are added pleonastically to ‘ earth ;’ so is
making Jjfi^iT, JTRTT or ‘ earth.’
Class II. Possessives.
leaving ^T, is substituted for the terminations of a few
words ending in vowels, and added to others ending in conso-
nants, to form possessive adjectives ; as, makes ‘ who
has braided hair ;’ '3T*T ‘ the breast,’ "3TTT ‘ breasted ‘ sin,’
4 sinful ;’ ’srjfTT ‘ who has haemorrhoids,’ from ; & c.
and are added to nouns to signify possession
or use of the object they denote, but in a depreciatory sense ;
as, TM, ‘speech,’ makes or '4 Ml <4 ‘one who speaks
much and nonsensically.’
added to ‘ property,’ makes -fft 6 a
master’ or ‘ mistress,’ ‘ an owner of property.’
•^rPCofivr is added to ‘ a horn,’ and ‘ a heap,’ to form
attributives ; as, 3J"/fltch ‘ horned,’ ‘ preeminent.’
4H<4-q forms attributives of possession, with the sense of
‘ non-endurance ;’ with 'sfitT ‘ cold,’ '3'nn ‘ warm,’ and Fit ‘ oiled
butter ;’ as, ^fhTTcF ‘ suffering from cold,’ ‘ freezing ;’ d UJIIc4
‘ suffering from heat ;’ WTtT^ ‘ having, but not liking, oiled
butter.’ ^^Tt, ‘ the heart,’ forms ‘ kind-hearted.’
forms possessive attributives from the class of words
called ; as, iTTT3iT ‘ a star,’ rTlu^TT ‘ starred,’ ‘ starry
■qot ‘ a flower,’ 'qfwnt ‘ flowered,’ ‘ flowery ;’ 'swrr ‘ a flower,’
wfa'iT ‘ having flowers ;’ ‘ a part,’ ‘ parted,’ ‘ di-
vided,’ ‘ having parts ;’ fcpTTtTT ‘ thirst,’ fqxrrftnr ‘ thirsty ;’
‘ pain,’ F'.ftFF ‘ afflicted,’ ‘ pained ;’ ‘ pleasure,’
‘ happy,’ ‘ at ease ;’ &c.
forms TjifcFff ‘ fruitful,’ from ‘ fruit ; ’ and TffTrr
344
DERIVATION.
‘ peacock-tailed,’ or ‘ a peacock,’ from 4 the tail of
that bird.’ ‘ dirt,’ makes irf^T, or with
* dirty,’ ‘foul,’ ‘wicked.’
?T> is affixed to nouns ending in to denote possession
actual or figurative ; inr? ‘ a staff,’ >; uid »t ‘ one who carries a
staff ;’ v^T ‘ wealth,’ vf?PT ‘ wealthy ;’ Kif ‘ happiness,’
‘ happy ;’ jp.Tq ‘ pain,’ ipftpr ‘ sorrowful :’ also to ’q-# in parti-
cular meanings ; '’TffpT ‘ one who has priority,’ i. e. one who
has done (eaten or drank) any thing on a former occasion ;
cpngfjt qi Z ‘ he formerly made the mat.’ '^rrg makes ^nf^T
‘ one who has partaken of a Sraddha ’ or ‘ funeral feast
and Trrsf ‘ visible,’ ‘ one who has seen any occurrence,’
‘ a witness.’ It is also added to certain words in ^srr or f ; as,
fsiHT ‘ a crest,’ fsrfwff ‘ crested,’ * a peacock ;’ JTTF5T ‘ a
garland,’ srrra^T ‘ having a garland,’ JTTFft ‘ a gardener ;’
‘ rice,’ sfrf^T ‘ having rice :’ also to numerals connected with
age ; as, q^ftPT ‘ having the fifth (month or year) TTFj:
‘ a boy in his fifth year.’ Occasionally cfi is prefixed to ;
as, Tnrfqr^ ‘ one who suffers from disordered wind.’ It forms
various feminine nouns of locality ; as, ‘ a pool having
the lotus :’ so 'qfTPft, &c. It forms various appellatives,
as above, and as ‘ an elephant,’ from ‘ his trunk.’
is affixed to a class of words termed fq^TH to form
possessives ; as, fq^3"T ‘ mud,’ fiiPoSci ‘ muddy ;’ "TOT ‘ the
chest,’ ‘ broad-chested ;’ TT5TT c knowledge,’ qf$ic4 ‘ wise :’
also to qwr ‘ froth,’ ‘ frothy :’ to frreuTr ‘ sand,’ and 5T#TT
* gravel,’ as epithets of place ; fn<*Pri c«5T or ST^TT?5T Hftr: ‘ sandy
or gravelly soil :’ also to and other words ; ‘ corpu-
lent,’ ‘ big-bellied,’ &c.
is added to ‘ a tooth,’ to form ‘ having large
or prominent teeth.’
■giH is added to ^5 ‘ force,’ and qrTT ‘ wind,’ to signify
‘ impatience ;’ ‘ not enduring force WTTTFJ * not bearing
wind the latter is also an appellative ; TTipF. ‘ a gale,’ ‘ a
whirlwind.’
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES. POSSESSIVES.
345
fnrfq' forms ‘ eloquent,’ * well spoken,’ from
‘ speech.’
is added to ^ and ; as, ?T|<5 ‘ abounding with
reeds ^TTg75 ‘ abounding with young grass’ (a field, a
country, &c.
if, as a possessive affix, is added to a class of words termed
UPrrf?, and which imply ‘ diseased ;’ as, ‘ itch,’ xmi^T
‘ itchy ;’ ^ftpr ‘ a worm,’ '^rfprJT 4 affected with worms.’ It also
forms irregularly WTFJT ‘ moonlight,’ from nfrffTM ‘ light.’
vr is added to the words and ^fi?5 ; as, rrf^>? ‘ hav-
ing corpulence,’ ‘ corpulent ;’ ‘ lousy ‘ wrinkled.’
is in an especial degree the affix implying ‘ possession
the essential element is rr?^ or wjt, inflected as jttjt, *Trft, *T7^,
or 7R, Tift, tTiT (see p. 57). The rr is changed to ^ after a
final or penultimate or ^ht, and after any consonant except a
nasal or a sibilant : it is so changed after a final or penultimate
*T ; it is unchanged after any other vowel than 'ST or ^T, and
after a nasal or a sibilant : but there are special exceptions to
these changes : thus fsw makes fsfiTiT £ having something ;’
TT3TTT ‘ fame,’ HSI^rT ‘ famous ; ’ ‘ prosperity,’
‘ prosperous.’ A great variety of attributives and appellatives
are formed with this affix ; as, \n=HrT e wealthy,’ w^TT ‘ fla-
voured, HVTs'ff ‘ intelligent,’ rfWTT { having cows,’ 4 hav-
ing land.’ TTSTT retains its final, if meaning ‘ well governed,’
w: 4 a well governed country ;’ but TTW 4 ff 4 having a
king.’ ‘ water,’ substitutes ■3^ before jthtt ; as, 3<^iT
‘ having water,’ 4 the ocean.’ The following are irre-
gularly formed with this affix : 4 the knee’ (having a
bone) ; the name of a king (having a country) ;
the name of a mountain (having salt) ; ‘ the
river Chambal’ (having a skin or hide). In their literal
acceptation these are regular ; as, wfeTTiT, ^TTrT, &c. In
place of ittHT, the affix in certain senses is termed ^JTTPT, the
initial 3 causing the elision of the final vowel of the primitive ;
Y 7
346
DERIVATION.
as, ‘ a lotus,’ ^nft ‘ a place abounding in lotuses
4 a buffalo,’ nffraTift the name of a city.
*rq is added to a few words to form attributives ; as,
‘ snowy iTini ‘ excellent,’ * * 4 having merit 4 having a hand-
some form also car. 4 a coin,’ i. e. having an impression.
CH is added to -3UiiT 4 wool,’ ■gufj'pi 4 woolly also to 4 1,’
4 aiTogant and 4 good,’ innc 4 lucky also to ^
and Tjf ; as, 4 happy,’ 4 prosperous.’
^ forms attributives and appellatives after certain words ;
CR!| 4 paleness,’ ‘pale;’ rrv 4 honey,’ inJC 4 sweet,’
4 honied ;’ cfa 4 a hole,’ cftTC 4 perforated ;’ 'Si'q 4 saline soil,’
"arm: 4 having or abounding with such soil.’ CC, 4 a mountain,’
makes tpr 4 a city’ (having houses as lofty as mountains) ;
and tree 4 darkness,’ rrfac or rfftwT the same ; the penultimate
being changed to
forms attributives with various words ; ^rtr 4 the
\
shoulder,’ 4 strong;’ TW 4 a child,’ WPET75 ‘affectionate;
CTT 4 a crest,’ ^TTF5 4 crested ;’ vfR 4 froth,’ 4 frothy.’
C is added to 4 hair,’ i*rsTC 4 having fine or abundant
hair ;’ in which sense it may be also cfijnT, or c^lCiT ;
as a name of Krishna, it is alone. It is added to a few
other words ; as, to rrftrr 4 a jewel,’ and fijriinT 4 gold,’ to form
prftric: 4 a particular Naga ;’ ftrtCR: 4 one of the treasures (per-
sonified) of the god of wealth :’ also to 4 water,’ which
rejects its final, ’sniN': 4 the ocean.’
forms attributives, used chiefly as appellatives, after
certain words ; 4 crested,’ 4 a peacock.’ A
final short vowel becomes long before it ; as, 4 a tooth,’
4 an elephant ;’ cfa 4 culture,’ =fnftr?r. 4 a husbandman ;’
wefrT 4 spirit,’ ^RTTfhro: 4 a distiller ;’ irfbt? 4 a court,’ Tjfbncr.
4 a Raja ;’ 4 menstrual excretion ;’ TlTOHT 4 a woman at
that period.’ '3vt#C, 4 strength,’ makes 'Si'CCrFS 4 strong.’
fefe is added to words ending with ?!m ; as, Tree 4 penance,’
irqf^T 4 who practises penance,’ 4 an anchorite ;’ 4 fame,’
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES. — PR ONOM INALS, &C. 347
‘ flimous also to rrntT ‘ illusion,’ ‘ deceptive,’
ifVT ‘ apprehension,’ NVTfTJT * intelligent ;’ ‘ a garland,’
H(T^?r ‘ having a garland ;’ and ‘ sickness,’ with the
final made long, 'iTTUmf^vr ‘ sick,’ ‘ ill.’
UT forms attributives from a class of words termed FStNTiR ;
as, and ‘ hair of the body,’ cStoST, ffcrgr, ‘ hairy ;’
3Sfq ‘ an ape,’ ‘ tawny ;’ &c.
Class III. Degrees of Comparison : Pronominals : Numerals.
263. The affixes which form the comparative and superla-
tive degrees have already been specified, as trti or wrpJ, and
or and 3^? or ; they are noticed here only as
belonging to the class of Taddhita affixes (see p. 76).
264. Pronouns take some of the preceding affixes, with the
same effect and signification as those already specified : thus
is added to the possessive cases plural of and TpiR,
making wjTWRi, Ttf'JT'Ri, ‘ what belongs or relates to us’ or ‘to
you :’ also to the same cases singular, with inserted ; as,
rrpFRi, ‘what relates or belongs to thee’ or ‘ me.’ ^ is
also added to ; as, ^.NWrfhl * relating or belonging to
me;’ and to NTiT ‘you’ (respectfully); ‘yours’ or
‘ your honour’s.’ Besides these, they have some peculiar to
themselves.
^T5R^ is sometimes substituted for the proper terminations
of fw.*T, and fn? ; as, ^Tofi ‘ which ?’ Hcfi ‘ who,’ Tlofi ‘ that.’
and TiTH^ are added to the same pronouns, also to
to form comparisons between two or many ; as, oRTTTI, ttht,
‘ which of two ;’ eSTTH, tTnN, ‘ which of many ;’ war, TTrUT, ‘ that
of two’ or ‘ of many;’ JT^uRT, ‘ one of two’ or ‘ of many.’
TffT is added to foFN , forming ^rf7T ‘ howr many.’
is added to several of the pronouns to imply ‘ quan-
tity:’ it leaves TrT, as already noticed (p. 84). To these may
be added frnpfi, forming attributives from them ; fri v| ‘ hav-
ing or being how many;’ TTHfrTq ‘ having or being so many.’
265. Nouns of number take Taddhita affixes to denote
Y y 2
348
DERIVATION.
ordinals and other modifications : some of them have been
already noticed (p. 91).
^ is added to and its compounds, to fW^lfrT and the
decimals ending in to form numerals in addition to others
with which they are inflected. z, leaving causes the elision
of the final letter ; 4 one hundred and eleven
4 a hundred and twenty.’
ZZ forms ordinals from cardinals for all above ten ; Tr=frPT3T
4 eleventh," ‘ twentieth,’ &c. ; or those from twenty upwards
prefix trt to ZZ, making &c. (p. 91).
f%fT^ added to wrf^, 4 first,’ forms the ordinal SHifim 4 first
it also forms terms signifying 4 relative order,’ either in place,
degree, or time, with £ before,’ ^T^rT ‘ end,’ and tp^TIT £ after;’
as, ■’Hfipr ‘ first,’ 4 prior ;’ 4 subsequent;’ trf^T ‘ posterior.’
THTT added to numerals implies 4 division ;’ as, wrm
4 wood in five pieces,’ or 4 five pieces of wood.’ It forms
similar derivatives with and fa1 in alternation with xra; as,
ffTHT or fzi, famt or 4 two’ or 4 twofold,’ 4 three’ or
4 threefold.’
rffa is added to f|r and fa, the latter of which changes ft
to aj, to form ordinals ; as, faffN 4 second,’ rpfm 4 third
to these, wa, that is, ^r, taking the place of the primitive %
is added, to imply 4 division ;’ as, f§“rfNl vrm: 4 a second part,’
4 a half Frftat am: 4 a third :’ so 4 a fourth,’ 4 a
fifth,’ &c. ; ordinals being in fact the same as fractionals. W
and take optionally a, making either tr? or aro 4 a sixth,’
anm or amm 4 an eighth.’
aa is added to fg\ fg-, and aar, making fwa, aaa,
4 in value twice,’ 4 thrice,’ 4 four times.’ a becomes Visarga,
and that again ^ before a sonant ; as, f|fa^ 4 he eats twice.’
is added to siw and a?a to signify 4 bought with’ or
4 worth :’ ^TTIT 4 bought with a hundred ;’ aitm 4 bought with a
thousand also to signify general relation to those numbers.
«fia may be added to numerals not ending with or fw
to signify 4 bought with ;’ 4 bought with five :’ the
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES. INDECLINABLES.
349
exceptions take ; TSTfirPF 4 bought with twenty
‘ bought with forty.’ It may be added to them to form deno-
minatives ; as, fipTfrPF. 4 a book containing twenty (chapters).5
It is also added to terms of quantity, formed with as,
HlVrF, or with 37 inserted, TTpfiPF ‘ bought with so much.’
^ is added to numerals forming attributives to imply a sum
given either as interest, tax, profit, or bribe ; as, Tf^=Ft TT3TT
4 the king, who has received a tax of five ; ’
‘ Devadatta has taken five (per cent, interest) ;’ &c. Deriva-
tives with other affixes are similarly employed ; as,
4 one to whom a hundred has been given,’ &c.
^ may be added to PisrfrT when preceded by a numeral or
by ^rwrf 4 plus a half :’ to signify 4 value,’ =f is inserted ; as,
‘ worth twenty-two ;’ f4 srftT^Flvf 4 worth twenty
plus a half,’ i. e. worth thirty.
TP or thT may be added to to signify ‘ being worth’ or
‘ bought with ;’ or * what is worth a hundred ;’ also,
as above, 4 he to whom a hundred is given.’
7TT is added to numerals ending in frT or to signify
* value fippF, f^PF, ^Tr^rfinjpF, ‘ bought with, or worth,
twenty,’ &c.
JTH7, added to numerals, implies 4 equal or equivalent to in
value ;’ as, WPTT 4 the butter-milk is worth two (it
is twice the value) of the barley.’
Class IV. Indeclinables.
266. A variety of indeclinable words, chiefly significant of
time or place, are formed with affixes considered as belonging
to the class of Taddhita terminations.
^ is affixed to f=FJT 4 what,’ which is changed to ^ in the
sense of 4 place ;’ as, U\ 4 where.’
^rPpr forms with T3T 4 north,’ and 4 south,’ or 4 on
the right,’ the indeclinables 4 in or from the north,
l\u!l7T: 4 in or from the south,’ or 4 on the right hand.’
^rftr and form adverbs of place or time with ij^, wq ,
350
derivation.
and considered as substitutes for ’irMX , and as,
^T::, TJTWriT 4 before,’ 4 prior,’ 4 in front,’ 4 in or on the east
■^rvi:, W-TOTf^ 4 down,’ 4 below,’ 4 inferior ^raVTITT 4 behind,’
4 after,’ 4 in the west :’ the latter is also optionally ssRtWIrf .
tft optionally takes ^TnpT or ; as, trit:, tr^tth 4 after,’
4 subsequent.’
is considered as irregularly substituted for ^*T, 4 this,’
4 in this time,’ 4 now.’
is added to different pronouns to signify 4 time
as 4 this,’ iTFrft ‘ in this time,’ 4 now ;’ and Tiff 4 when ;’
rfft 4 then,’ 4 at that time.’
is added to •g’WT: and to signify 4 in’ or 4 from ;’
TtTvT or ^fgprr ^tfrT 4 he dwells in the north’ or 4 in the south ;’
or 4 returned from the south.’ They
take ^rrff in the same sense ; , ^fsprrrff .
TT^T^T is added to the same words ; 4 in or on
the north’ or 4 the south.’
is added to numerals and to to signify 4 times,’
when alluding to the reiteration of an act essential to life ;
ijifi 4 he eats twice :’ so , ^TT^nr , , and
the like.
converts into indeclinables, nouns compounded with any
of the derivatives or inflexions of or *r 4 to be,’ or as 4 to
C\ t
make,’ to imply that the object is, or is made, what it was not
before. A final or ^rr, except when the word is already an
indeclinable terminating with the latter, is changed to ^
and are made long ; and ^ is changed to ft ; as, ^wiNuT
4 made black,’ 4 blackened ;’ 4 he makes white’ or
4 whitens (ffapjTrHjr: 4 the day has become evening ;’
4 he becomes pure ;’ trrtFT 4 becoming eloquent ;’ rrr^hjTTT
4 become a mother.’ *R^T, and drop their finals ;
4 making sore ;’ TT*T?ftftTT7r 4 he will become mad ;’
’3‘^'^S^Htt 4 he looks upwards.’
Tra is an affix similar to the preceding, attaching *TT to the
end of a word joined to the derivatives or inflections of the
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES. — INDECLINABLES.
351
verb ^ 4 to make as, ‘ he pains’ or ‘ distresses ;’
‘ he makes happy ftrtfT^CtfTT * he pleases also
after reiterated words expressing inarticulate sound ;
ojPCtfrr 4 he makes the sound pa£ pat' also after particular
words used in the sense of ‘ ploughing fgrffalT or ijTflmsivCtfH
4 he ploughs (a field) twice or thrice ;$irre.fVfTT ‘ he ploughs
(a field) back again ;’ ^sn®FXtf(T ‘ he ploughs (a field) with the
seed,’ 4 he drill-sows it.’
TTftr is substituted for the terminations of the instrumental
and ablative cases ; the former implying 4 cause ‘ by,
or on account of, behaviour;’ ‘ by, or on account of, its
rotundity JfRTt: 4 from the village 4 from the first
mznr: ‘ from the middle also as implying 4 descent
4 Pradyumna was descended from Krishna.’ It is added
to the names of diseases, to imply their removal ; jf HTfP?r3rnr:
4 make him (free) from flux.’ It is considered to represent
the genitive case in such sentences as WJpJfft ‘the
gods were (on the side) of Arjuna.’
TrftTFS, which, like the former, leaves ms, is added to pro-
nouns and pronominals in the sense of the ablative and loca-
tive cases : or 4 hence’ or 4 here mm 4 thence,’
4 therefrom,’ also ‘ therefore’ or 4 there titto 4 whence,’
4 wherefrom,’ 4 wherefore,’ 4 where ;’ mwfm 4 here and there,’
4 every where.’ fsm before an affix beginning Avith tt or
becomes ob ; 4 whence,’ 4 wherefrom,’ or 4 wherefore,’
‘when;’ *rfpnr, 4 every where;’ ?mnTTT 4 on both
sides :’ so 4 on both sides ;’ Trfcm 4 all around ;’ 4£ri?f
4 in many places or ways.’
is affixed to pronouns and pronominals in the sense of
4 locality ;’ as, ‘ where,’ He? 4 where,’ rf<? 4 there,’
4 every wrhere.’ is substituted for mR? ; as, 4 in this
place,’ 4 here.’
3T is added to certain words with the sense of the accusa-
tive or locative case : 4 I salute the gods ;’ X?T
4 1 delight in the men ;’ ( many ways.’
352
DERIVATION.
is affixed to pronouns and pronominals to denote
4 manner,’ 4 kind ;’ as, ijvn 4 as,’ 4 in what manner FSTT 4 so,’
4 thus,’ ‘ in this manner ;’ cjrsn 4 how.’
"SHT is added to and fsjw, substituting severally ^ and
=R in the same acceptation : 4 thus,’ ^rr 4 how.’
is added to pronouns and pronominals to imply ‘ time ;’
as, TT^T 4 at what time,’ * when ;’ ‘ at that time,’ 4 then
4 when ;’ * once ;’ 4 at another time *rf^T
‘ always :’ also *T being substituted for *rf, ^t.
is added to and 7R to signify ‘ time the initials
of the primitives only are retained ; 4 now,' 4 at this
time ;’ riqpflH 4 then,’ 4 at that time.’
VT is affixed to numerals to imply 4 numeration as,
4 once,’ 4 one,’ singly ;’ fgvn or %VT 4 twice,’ ‘ twofold ;’ f^VT
or j=pn 4 thrice,’ 4 threefold ;’ 4 five times’ or 4 fivefold’ or
‘ five parts ;’ as, ir*fi tTf^i ^ 4 make one heap into five.’
The analogous affix VJpT is added to % and f<?, making
ipnr, c twofold,’ ‘ threefold.’ x£?ft>r may be added to ir^, making
■?rr is added to the preposition f^, making f^n 4 without,’
4 except and ffT*? to the negative , ttrt, 4 manifold,’
4 various.’
and fcEifrM are added to t<7, substituted for 'TWTT ;
as, wft: or 7TJTT?T7T 4 up,’ 4 above.’
affixed to words forms indeclinables implying 4 resem-
blance in act ;’ as, cTT^UI^H 4 like a Brahman ;’ 4 like
a Kshetriya :’ also denoting 4 fitness,’ 4 suitableness ;’ TTST'TW
4 fit for, or worthy of, a king :’ also if the preceding word
have the sense of the genitive or locative case ; 4 as in
Mathura ;’ 4 like (the figure of) Devadatta.’
^PT is added to ’5T57 and to imply 4 degree ;’ ’R<ajdi: 4 a
little;’ 4 much,’ 4 abundantly,’ 4 for the most part:’ also
to numerals and terms of measure, to denote 4 successive
order ;’ %^i: 4 two and two ;’ 4 Masha by Masha.’
*rrfff is added to words like to signify a thing’s becoming
COMPOUND WORDS.
353
what it was not before, in combination with the same verbs ;
also with words signifying ‘ production as, HwraTTT cfcrtfff ‘ he
reduces to ashes HWTfr ‘ the weapon is produced
as fire,’ or ‘is in a blaze also ‘ is fire.’ It also
means ‘ dependence as, TT^THT^^frT ‘ the country becomes
dependent wholly on the king or ‘ appropriation as,
f^nrfTTTT ‘ he makes the gift wholly the property of the
Brahmans.’
CHAPTER VII.
COMPOUND WORDS.
267. The composition of words prevails in Sanskrit to an
extent that much exceeds its occurrence in any other language.
It is termed in original grammars, Samasa wtth:.
268. When a greater or lesser number of words are com-
bined, so as to form one new term, the characteristic signs of
case and number are, with occasional exceptions, rejected by
all the members of the compound except the last.
269. Compound words are arranged, agreeably to the nature
of this construction, under four classes :
1. The first class consists of substantive nouns simply
aggregated under one head, which, if not compounded, would
be held together by the intervention of a copulative ; as,
‘ Rama and Lakshmana,’ ippg H’CTTin?, make, when united,
This is termed Dwandwa, ‘ doubling’ or ‘ aggre-
gation.’
2. The second class, termed Tatpurusha, is not confined to
substantives, but combines nominal and verbal derivatives in
different relations ; such as that of the object and the act, as
fsnrsre: e dependence upon Krishna that of the object and
the agent, as Jjpnrm ‘ arrived at the village or that of the
attribute and the object, as ‘ a blue lotus.’ It also
comprises adjectives, participles, and particles aggregated, so
z z
35-i
COMPOUND WORDS.
as to form compound attributives or appellatives ; as, ^ntrSTfi
‘ black and white ;’ eSTTTsrfT £ done and not done ^fffrnT
‘ surpassing the king.’ The two last are, however, considered
as forming either a subdivision of this class, or a separate
class termed Karmma-dharaya, ; and so is the com-
bination of a numeral with a noun ; which subdivision is
termed %jt: . Of these terms, Tatpurusha, ‘ the man of him,’
refers to a word that commonly exemplifies this kind of com-
pound, or ‘ the king’s man.’ Karmma-dharaya implies
‘ that which comprehends (dharayati) the object (karmma).’
Dwigu is a technical word derived from Dwi ‘ two.’
3. The third class of compounds, called is the
association of any given number of terms, simple or com-
pound, to form an epithet to a noun, of which the word Bahu-
vrihi furnishes an example : as separated, it means £ much
rice as compounded, ‘ that which has much rice,’ a field
or the like. In compounds of this class, the last member,
whatever its original gender, takes that of the noun with
which it is connected ; as, £ (a man) who has a
beautiful wife.’ These epithets are sometimes used absolutely
as appellatives ; as, £ having eyes like the lotus ;’
a name of Vishnu. As an instance of the multiplication of
terms in a Bahuvrihi compound, we may take ^qi7r?r*TT*3T-
£ (a place) of which the waters were sanctified by the
bathing of the daughter of Janaka.’
4. The last class is termed Avyayi-bhava, being the
construction of indeclinable or adverbial compounds (Avyaya),
consisting for the most part of a preposition and the noun
governed by it in the objective case neuter, as and
requiring a verb or verbal derivative, expressed or understood,
to complete the sense ; as, fn yfrf ‘ he stays near to
Krishna ;’ T<T3iTinir^«Tt £ Arjuna (is) near to Krishna.
270. In forming these several kinds of compounds, various
peculiarities occur, the most important of which we shall
specify under their respective heads.
DWANDWA COMPOUNDS.
3 55
SECTION I.
Dioandioa Compounds.
271. When words are combined in this form of compound,
the final usually takes the sign of the dual number where
there are two objects, as ‘ Vishnu and Siva and that
of the plural if there are more than two, as ^uj?r,T:
‘ desire, virtue, wealth, liberation’ (the four objects of human
existence).
272. The following words, when compounded, terminate
in the neuter singular : terms for parts of the body, as trtftn'qrj
‘ the hand and foot players on musical instruments,
rtfcns ‘ players on different kinds of drums component parts
of an army, rty Or? ‘ the chariots and horse members of
different trades, ‘ a washerman and weaver specific
terms not signifying living things, ‘ fried grain and
barley wTater names of small insects, Trgrrfo'sj ‘ flies and
lice names of animals, natural enemies, ‘ the snake
and ichneumon a class of words beginning with TT«rrsj ‘ the
cow and horse :’ names of rivers and countries, if in different
genders, ‘ Kuru and Kurukshetra but if the gen-
ders are the same, then they vary the number, as
‘ the Ganges and Yamuna.’ Some words take either form,
when more than one is meant, as or xra riwjluT
‘ Plasksha and Nyagrodha trees ;’ but it is confined to the
dual to signify a Plaksha and a Nyagrodha tree ; or
Ytnrt £ first and last or ^rvjftWTl ‘ upper and lower,’
‘ many or one of each.’ Qualities, if contrariety be meant,
take either form, uftffrari or ‘ cold and hot.’ A com-
pounded word preceded by a definite number takes only the
first form, as £ ten teeth and lips ;’ but if the number
is indefinite, and the numeral is converted into an attributive
which is not part of the compound, the form is optional,
or '3‘'qr^5TT ?^rtFT: ‘ about ten teeth and lips.’
273. Various rules are given for the order in which the
z x 2
35b
COMPOUND WORDS.
words are to be arranged in Dwandwa compounds ; but they
are liable to many exceptions. Thus in general the shortest
term should come first, as Siva and Vishnu so
should words ending in ^ or 7, as or ‘ teacher
and pupil.’ Names of seasons and asterisms, if of equal
length, follow the natural order, as ‘ winter,
dewy season, spring but ‘ summer and spring,’
the first being the shorter. When names of castes or persons
come together, the precedence is to be given to the most
worthy or the senior ; ^ ra HI S] f<?qf^r5T <rr: ‘ the Brahman,
Kshatriya, Vaisya, and Sudra ‘ Yudhishthira
and Arjuna.’ ’STT is sometimes interposed, as ‘ Mitra
and Varufia.’
274. In some compounds different terms are occasionally
substituted for the first member ; as, ^ or for wrm, ‘ a
wife,’ in TP^ffi or ‘ wife and husband ,’ for fij'q in
‘ heaven and earth so STRT^T, &c.
is substituted for in TcrnTHT^i ‘ the dawn and the sun
\ C\
and repeated makes as wafrai ‘ one and another,’
‘ one another and tpc, tutt , as in ‘ mutually,’ or £ in
succession.’
275. Single words have sometimes the force of Dwandwa
compounds : thus TPTT means ‘ the two Ramas ;’ T1T*TT: ‘ the
three Ramas,’ who were Paras' urama, Ramachandra, and Bala-
rama. A masculine noun in the dual comprises the feminine :
thus hMt is put for and or ‘ the gander and the goose
so HTTO means ‘ sister and brother ;’ 'g^T ‘ daughter and son
ftTH^T, * parents,’ may be used for HTTTrfwu £ mother and
father ;’ and Tgsrcr, ‘ parents-in-law,’ for
SECTION II.
Tatpurusha Compounds.
276. This class includes, as above remarked, three sub-
divisions ; to the first of which the term Tatpurusha may be
for the present restricted. In compounds of this order the
TATPURUSHA COMPOUNDS.
357
words stand in a relation to each other which would require,
if they were separated, the use of different cases ; the one
exercising a syntactical government over the other, and not
being connected, as in the preceding class, by copulatives
understood, nor, as in the subdivision Karmmadharaya, by
simple concordance. The words thus formed are mostly
attributives and appellatives.
277. The following are arranged in the order of the cases.
a. Words in the sense of the objective case are mostly
compounded with the past participle as the governing member ;
as, JJIHPTM ‘ one who has reached the village HiTjffifhr 4 one
who has overcome pain 4 a fool,’ ‘ one who lies in
his bed :’ in the literal sense it is not compounded ; 1 bd ;
* mounted or lying on the couch.’ They may also be com-
pounded with verbal derivative nouns denoting the agent ; as,
■gWcfiTT. 4 a potter ‘ a weaver.’
b. With the instrumental case nouns as well as partici-
ples are combined ; as, 4 a piece cut by the nip-
pers ; ’ VRTrtJ: 4 wealth acquired by grain ; ’ fqiprgsr. ‘ (a
son) like his father;’ mtnjf ‘prior by a month;’
‘ dispute by or with words ;’ ‘ rice sprinkled by
curds,’ 4 dressed with them ;’ 7T3VT^f 4 rice mixed with sugar :’
also 4 killed by a snake ;’ 4 cut by a sickle ;’
qrrau'q ‘ to be drunk by a crow,’ as ■qrrarciTT ‘ a river with
muddy water, fit only for a crow’s beverage.’ In some com-
binations the termination of the third case is retained ; as,
‘ done by force ;’ TprT'pr. 4 younger by a male’ (having
an elder brother) ; 4 a goddess mentally,’ a proper
name ; »)<? 1 fawns: ‘ a penitent, by his braided locks.’ Where
these and similar combinations with the third or any other
case retaining its inflexion are used as appellatives, they may
be admitted to be compound words ; but where the latter
member is a participle or adjective, which qualified by the
preceding term forms an attributive declinable in the three
genders, it must be regarded as constituting an exception to
358
COMPOUND WORDS.
composition ; ’Mlyiwi sstt, for instance, cannot be considered
as properly a compound term.
c. Compounds are formed with words in the sense of the
dative case, as expressed not so much by the sign ‘ to,’ as by
that of ‘ for’ or 4 on account of as, 4 timber for a
stake this sense is also conveyed by with which words in
the dative case form attributives ; as, wj:, fg^i
xpr: * broth, gruel, or milk, for, or on account of, the
Brahman.’ The grammatical terms and Wr+RtT?? are
compounds of this class retaining the sign of the case.
d. Attributives are formed with participles preceded by
nouns having the sense of the ablative case ; as,
4 removed from happiness,’ * unhappy ;’ T^UMfriri' ‘ fallen from
heaven.’ Composition does not take place after words signi-
fying ‘ near,’ 4 far,’ ‘ a little,’ or ^ in the ablative case ; as,
^fWr<*iyi7T ‘ brought from near ;’ ‘ come from afar
4 loosed from a little ; ’ ^v^rrSJTTl 4 obtained from
penance ;’ &c.
e. There are many compound terms in which the first
word has the sense of the genitive case ; as, TTiTpR: 4 the
king’s man ;’ 4 a grove of Mango trees TUTsJ’R'. ‘ a
cutter of wood,’ i. e. a hatchet ; ‘ dulness of intellect.’
Verbal derivatives terminating in ^ or ^T3i, and denoting the
agent, do not form compounds with words in the sense of the
sixth case, with the exception of words belonging to the class
7rr»RiTf(T ? as, ‘ a worshipper of the gods ;’
‘ a reverencer of the Brahmans ‘ a lord of the earth.’
If the agent is not meant, composition may take place ; as,
‘ eating of the sugar-cane :’ also if play or profession
be intended ; as, ‘ who breaks the flowers (in sport) ;
‘ a cleaner of teeth,’ 4 a dentist.’ The sign of the
sixth case is retained in these compounds ; ft^qrfirc 4 lord of
heaven,’ 4 Indra ;’ ^rr^wnr: 4 lord of speech,’ a name of Vri-
haspati, the preceptor of the gods ; 4 the servant of
heaven,’ a proper name.
TATPU RUSH A COMPOUNDS.
359
f. Compounds in which the first member has the sense of
the locative case are formed with 'jfpGS and other words ; as,
‘ a gambler,’ ‘ one skilled in dice Sll^^n^TT. ‘ one
learned in the Sastras * one skilled in work,’ ‘ an
artisan ;’ ‘ one dependent on, or trusting in, God ;’
‘ what is dried in the sun ;’ WTTSftrgi * what is boiled
in a pot qnretlH £ born or produced in a month TT^iiT
‘ done there,’ £ in that place ;’ 4 done in the forenoon.’
Terms of ridicule are formed in this manner ; as, rrNN»T3K ‘ a
crow at a holy pool,’ i. e. a man out of his place ; ‘ a
frog in a well,’ i. e. a man ignorant of the world. In this
sense it is also usual to form compounds retaining the sign of
the case ; 5t?3TT: ‘ a hero in his house,’ £ a cot- quean ;’ 'nt^ra:
‘ one dexterous in his dish,’ ‘ a gourmand.’ Various nouns
ending with ^ or a consonant, and forming appellatives or
proper names, retain the sign of the seventh case ; as,
‘ who sports in a clump of grass,’ £ an elephant ;’ £ who
goes in the sky,’ £ a deity ;’ W3T7: £ who whispers in the ear,’
£ a spy,’ £ an informer sTWsre: £ who sleeps in water,’ ‘ a
fish ;’ wfvfxrt: £ the firm in battle,’ £ the elder of the Panclus :’
O
SO iff, £ a cow,’ makes TrfVfsx: ‘ firm in cattle,’ a proper name.
Some woi'ds take both forms, or ‘ what has
strength in its skin,’ £ a kind of deer ;’ Titf^nT or £ born
in a lake,’ £ a lotus ;’ or £ who resides in heaven,’
‘ a deity.’
g. Certain words which imply the part of any thing, when
compounded with the word signifying that whole of which
it is a part, are prefixed to it ; as, ‘ the front of the
body ;’ £ the back of the body.’ If it is a part of a
part only, composition does not take place; as,
£ the front of the navel of a body.’ in the neuter gender,
but dropping the sign, is also prefixed ; as, £ a half
of the pepper :’ but not if used in the masculine ; as, Siwri:
£ half a village.’ Fi-actional numbers may be placed first or
last ; as, fW^frfWl^ or %ffhrf*r2TT £ half of the alms ;’ ttttt and
360
COMPOUND WORDS.
governing the objective case, may take either form ; as,
or Tftf^rernr: ‘ a man M ho has obtained a liveli-
hood:’ so or .
Karmmadharaya Tatpurusha Compounds.
278. Compounds of the Karmmadharaya division of Tat-
purusha do not require that the members of which they
consist shoidd exercise any government the one over the other ;
they are connected together by implied, though not expressed
concordance, or by copulatives understood.
a. The most numerous series of Karmmadharaya com-
pounds is that in which the attribute is combined with the
object ; as, cffcytrqiS ‘ a blue lotus ‘ a black snake
fl^TTTST: ‘ a great king fiPMTOT ‘ a dear wife
‘ the northern Kurus’ (a country) ; torr: * the seven Rishis,’
‘ the constellation of the Great Bear.’
b. Compounds of this class may consist of attributives
only ; as, ‘ black and white ; ’ fetiHRlViH ‘ anointed
after being bathed W ‘ equally white ;’ Hf-jifl UTT ‘ warm
enough to be eaten ;’ ‘ a little red or of substantives
and attributives forming attributives to a third term ; as,
‘ black as a cloud ;’ ufbl=M ‘ made as a heap ;’ ^ UT3 fUTfl
* considered as a Pandit fVpRJlff ‘ gone to death,’ ‘ de-
ceased ;’ &c.
c. When the sense of the term is complete in itself, com-
bining the object and the attribute, the latter usually precedes
the former, as in the instances &c. When it forms
an attribute to a third term, the adjective or participle is
usually placed last, as in TjfjIRrT and the like : but there are
many varieties in this respect. Words denoting ‘ excellence,’
or used metaphorically for that purpose, are placed after the
object; as, ‘an excellent king;’ rfrr?7r%^iT ‘a
capital comt ;’ TpjTRnrr: or ‘ a man-tiger,’ * a man-
lion,’ i. e. a superior man. ^Tit and other terms implying
‘relative position’ or ‘merit’ precede the object; £a
KARMMADH AR.AYA COMPOUNDS.
361
preceding or superior man ‘ a subsequent or infe-
rior man * a middle man,’ 4 an impartial one,’ or
4 a middling man,’ 4 one of indifferent character :’ so cftr, ‘ a
hero,’ forms «fl m : ‘ a heroic man.’ ipf, forming an attri-
butive of time, is placed after a participle ; ifFtpi 4 formerly
seen 4 formerly been.’ Terms of depreciation require
the object to be placed first ; as, 4 a very bad
grammarian except when compounded with ttr or ^nn'SR ;
as, TTPTTrftnr: ‘ a vile barber ‘ a bad potter.’
f°W, also used in a depreciatory sense, precedes the object;
as, f^TT^T ‘ what sort of a king is this,’ xft T^fiT XT»TT; 4 who
does not protect his subjects ?’ ‘ young,’ or * a boy,’
precedes certain terms ; as, 4 a gentle boy ;’
* a tender girl :’ so it does when substituted for 4 a girl
as, K'i luft 4 a slave girl ;’ 4 a young harlot.’ ^
is placed before ^TOT, and to form 4 an
aged or infirm youth ;’ TprqfFTrr. 4 a grey-haired youth ;’ ■gTq-
feir: 4 a wrinkled young man.’ On the other hand, and
others are always last ; as, *i%: 4 a milch cow ; ’ r: ‘ a
young elephant ;’ 4 a little fire ;’ &c.
d. In Tatparusha compounds, of whatever class, certain
words, forming the second member of the compound, undergo
changes of termination; , that is, a final ?r, being substi-
tuted for ^ or for or added to a final w : thus Tfrfe, 4 a
friend,’ forms 4 a friend of the gods ;’ TxfS': 4 night,’
qinH l<?: 4 a holy night ;’ 4 the thigh,’ when similitude is
implied, jpurerq 4 a thigh like that of a deer ;’ Ti^PT , as irhcist;
4 a supreme king ;’ 'snpT 4 a day,5 Trf^^rnr: 4 a fine day ;’ or
is sometimes substituted, as 4 the whole day,’ or
4 lasting for the whole day makes TST^iTT*?*. 4 a white
stone :’ WSTH becomes 'asr in such terms as JTTT5I3r: 4 a Brahman
\
of Gaur.’ After ^ and *T^rT, implying 4 baseness,’ the change
is optional ; or ^3SIT, or q^T3?rr, 4 a low Brah-
man ;5 *r*r?r being used ironically. 4 a dog,’ preceded by
an indeclinable, takes as, wfffTgt ^TTtr: 4 a boar swifter
3 A
362
COMPOUND WOHDS.
than a dog ;’ ifaT ‘ service worse than that of a dog :’
but not if similitude to human beings is implied ; as, ippraT
‘a dog-like maft,’ ‘a cynic;’ ‘iron,’ makes
‘ black iron ‘ food ‘ a kitchen.’ z^{ is added
to as tnTTn'W: ‘ an excellent ox ;’ and to "Jn compounded
with ?«rf, as ’SrfviTf ‘ half a boat ;’ or with numerals, fgrrre
‘ two boats collectively,’ when even combined with a Taddhita
affix, as ‘ what comes from two boats.’ When or
^rfw or a negative, however, are prefixed to these words, form-
ing appellatives, the finals are unchanged ; as, TRtfR: ‘ a good
friend ^rfrfwfe: ‘ an excellent friend ;’ ‘ not a friend,’
‘ an unfriend ;’ or &c. : so toiTtR, -.Htl il H , &c.
H^TT, being the first member of a Tatpurusha compound,
becomes *nrr ; as, ‘ the great deity S'iva ;’ h^RIjT: ‘ a
great king ;’ &c.
e. The following are considered by some as irregular com-
pounds of the Karmmadharaya class : ‘ high and low ;’
fff’StTR ‘ picked out and heaped up :’ ^rf=R^nT ‘ having nothing,’
‘ poor ;’ ^r^rfw^ c fearless ;’ ‘ the mind alone ;’
fitRirr ‘ drinking after eating.’ Derivatives of ^ ‘ to do,’ com-
bined with ‘ I ;’ as, ^eSR:, ‘ self-sufficiency,’
‘ egotism ;’ also ‘ contending to be first’
or * foremost.’ Compounds with ‘ come ;’ as, trnr^RTTTT
‘ come and welcome ;’ ^fV=rrftrrftlRrr * come and trade
4 1 fill PfloUT ‘ go and leave trade :’ also with »rff , ‘ abandon,’ in
particular acceptations ; as, ‘ one who cries, Leave
the clump of grass.’ These and others of a like anomalous
character very rarely occur.
Dwiffu Tatpurusha Compounds with Numerals.
279- Compounds are formed with numerals to signify
attributes of weight, measure, or number ; as, W^rcrrH * mea-
sured by five cups ;’ tp^jrqrFS: RCtTT^r: ‘ butter offered at
sacrifice to the extent of five cups ;’ wn 4 gold of the
value of eight oxen * of the measure of two inches.’
TATPURUSHA COMPOUNDS WITH PARTICLES, &C. 863
a. Aggregates of any given number of things are formed
in the same manner, when the final takes either the neuter
gender or the feminine with the termination as,
‘ three worlds fd cii ^ the same ; ■=) d 5rf ‘ the four ages
Tr^rumft £ a work in five chapters or f<=r?3^t ‘ a col-
lection of three bedsteads.’
b. The changes to which finals are subjected, as enumerated
above, are of course applicable here ; as, f<=KM ‘ three kings
collectively ‘ five cows ‘ three friends
‘ a term of three nights ‘ a meeting of four roads
‘ an assemblage of eight boats.’
c. These same compounds may be used as possessive attri-
butives ; as, flrTTf ‘ who or what has three boats ;’ ‘ who
or what has three cows fgTra £ what lasts for two nights.’
d. The combinations of cardinal numbers to form multiples
are considered to be compound Tatpurusha terms ; as, Tr=fiT^3T,
&c.
Tatpurusha Compounds with Particles and Prepositions.
280. Besides the two subdivisions usually specified, the
class of Tatpurusha compounds comprises a number of words
formed with nominal or verbal derivatives, preceded by parti-
cles and prepositions, which may be conveniently separated
from those compounds which are formed with nouns alone.
a. Compound attributives and appellatives are formed with
negatives prefixed to nouns ; as, ^rzTT^TW: or ‘ a man
not a Brahman ‘ an animal not a horse ;’ 4 who
or what is not £ untrue,’ £ who are not untrue,’
* the Aswini Kumaras vr?: £ what has not space,’ £ a finger
nail ’Ftt: or vrt: ‘ what does not go,’ ‘ a mountain’ or £ tree ;’
£ what does not depart,’ trcr: ‘ sky :’ ^t^r: ‘ what does not
decay ‘ a letter of the alphabet ;’ £ a constella-
tion :’ £ not male,’ £ neuter :’ and in short, most words
to which a negative is prefixed, retaining either their literal,
or assuming some conventional, meaning.
3 A 2
364
COMPOUND WORDS.
b. The combination of the indeclinable words comprehended
under the term Gati with the verbal derivatives of the verbs
or to be,’ or ^ ‘ to do,’ is considered to form a class of
Tatpurusha compounds ; as, wi ‘ promising,’ ‘ hav-
ing promised,’ ‘ promised,’ & c. ; of which examples have
already been given (see p. 102). To which may be added the
following : ‘ having set ‘ having met ^Tester
‘ having spoken to ;’ * having placed before frrfpjTi
‘ having disappeared ‘ having made present’ or
‘ visible.’ Analogous compounds are formed with the deriva-
tives of and H with nouns retaining the inflections of case ;
as, ‘ having made salt ;’ or -^T^T ‘ having made
up the mind,’ ‘ having determined ;’ or ‘ having
placed on the breast;’ or '^TOT'3rII ‘ having placed in the
hand,’ i. e. having married or promised to marry.
c. The following are Tatpurusha compounds with prepo-
sitions : ^f(TTT3T ‘ surpassing the king ;’ ‘ more than a
day ;’ ‘ exceeding the necklace (in beauty)
‘ overcome by the cry of the Koi'l ;’ fVrc^nfff ‘ gone from
Kaus'ambi ;’ ‘ weary of study ;’ ur^TtEf ‘ over whom
the teacher has authority.’ These are attributives ; as,
*r^fl ‘ the minister more powerful than the king ;’
‘ the mind overpowered by the Koil’s song ;’ &c.
281. Tatpurusha compounds, when attributives, take the
gender of the substantives with which they agree ; but when
they form appellatives, adopt for the most part the gender of
the concluding member of the compound, in which respect
Dwandwa compounds agree with them. There are, however, a
few exceptions : thus, in the latter class, ‘ a horse,’ and 'qfsTT
‘ a mare,’ form ; and ‘ a day,’ and Tjfg' ‘ night,’
with numerals in the sense of ‘ aggregation’
becomes neuter, as fgtra ‘ a term of two nights ;’ and 'snnr
masculine, as in?*. ‘ a period of two days:’ so substituted
for is masculine, as * midday ;’ when joined with
an adjective, it may be neuter, as ‘ a lucky day.’
BAHUVB1HI COMPOUNDS.
365
a. Nouns of aggregation are formed with numerals ; the
gender is either neuter or feminine, as already noticed.
preceded by a preposition to form an appellative, is neuter ;
as, fwzj * a cross-road,’ ‘ a by-way.’
b. twi, preceded by a word meaning ‘ king,’ except
and one not meaning ‘ man,’ implying ‘ an assembly,’ is
neuter ; as, ‘ an assemblage of princes ‘ a
company of women :’ but tTtTTWT. rrq'ormTT. When it signi-
fies the place of assembly, it remains feminine ; as,
‘ the hall of Indra ;’ uwtWT ‘ a hall of justice.’
c. ‘ an army,’ STTFTT 4 a hall,’ sSTijt c shade,’ ‘ wine,’
fsqiT ‘ night,’ when members of a Tatpurusha compound,
retain tbe feminine, or adopt the neuter gender; as, WKi^l -*T
‘ an army of heroes ;’ rflDUVJI -74 ‘ a cow-house ;’ '^Kr^iin -tJ
‘ the shade of a tree ;’ -t. ‘ barley-wine,’ i. e. beer.
SECTION III.
Bahuvrihi Compounds.
282. Two or more words, or two or more compound terms,
may be put together to form the attribute or epithet of an
object. There is no limit to the component members of such
a compound, and the final may be a noun of any gender ; but
it loses its own distinctive mark, as it takes, like all attri-
butives, the gender of the word to which it is related : thus
‘ water,’ makes Hivflr!<+t jjr: ‘ a village at which the water
has come ;’ trnrftofiT c a pitcher which has been filled
HivTlr; ‘ a pool with water in it.’ ‘ a wife,’ may
become masculine ; as, ‘ a man who has a
handsome wife ;’ m ‘ a cow,’ masculine or neuter; as, f^cPT*.
‘ a man who has a brindled cow ;’ ‘ a field in
which such a cow is feeding.’ Compounds of this class may
be formed with particles ; as, ’STOWT ‘ a childless (man or
woman);’ y^T: { a tree of which the leaves are fallen;’
*TT: * a cow in whom there is milk :’ also with numerals ;
366
COMPOUND WORDS.
as, ‘ near to twenty,’ & c. Nouns implying ‘ interme-
diate space’ are also compounds of this class, the substantive
f^5T, ‘ quarter,’ being either expressed or understood ; as,
the south-east,’ ‘ the north-west.’
a. In general, the order of the words of w'hich a Bahuvrfhi
compound consists, places the term indicating the principal
subject of attribution, and which will be the substantive, last ;
as in the preceding instances. When the principal term
retains the sign of the case, it may be put first ; as,
‘ who is black in the throat,’ Siva : otherw ise, ^TcJ«Rf3:. Pro-
nominals and numerals are usually put first ; as, ‘ who
is wrhite all over ;’ ‘ what is white in two places when
they are combined, the numeral precedes ; as, srt ‘ having
other two.’ Participles are usually put first ; as, ‘ one
by whom w hat was to be done has been done ;’ 4 one
who has made the mat ‘ by whom water has been
drunk :’ but not always, w hen connected with words implying
‘ species’ or ‘ time,’ or the term ; as, TTKjf ‘ by whom
venison has been eaten ;’ frrawnr ‘ produced in a month ;’
‘ produced easily.’ In the compound signifying ‘ one
(a Brahman) by whom a domestic fire is maintained,’ the par-
ticiple takes either place ; as, ^rrf?pTTfr»T: or wrarTf^Tt:. Forms
implying ‘ using a weapon ’ place the participle last ; as,
‘(a soldier) hfting up a sword (to strike):’ but
‘ one who has his sword sheathed.’
b. As an epithet is commonly formed by a feminine sub-
stantive, preceded by its adjective, and the former being
changed according to the gender of the newr term to which
it is attached, it becomes a question what is to be done with
the latter : thus, for instanoe, JTT: being converted to an
epithet, tr becomes R, and may be masculine, r:, as the
epithet of a man having cattle. In that case is fiq<fT to
remain feminine ? So RT^iT becoming an attribute of a
man ‘ having’ a handsome wife, and HTOT accordingly becom-
ing Rizij:, what is to be done with In general, adjec-
BAHUVR1HI COMPOUNDS.
367
tives so circumstanced are reduced to their crude forms, and
in the examples given the compounds are
There are, however, exceptions to this rule.
1. When a compound epithet, of which the final was
originally feminine, is preceded by more than one adjective,
all except that preceding the final retain the feminine termi-
nation ; as, *or ‘ one who has an old
brindled cow.’ According to some authorities, both should be
feminine, as ; but this appears questionable.
2. When the preceding term is necessarily feminine, it
retains its termination ; as, ‘ he who has the river-
goddess Ganga to wife also if it ends in ■gs feminine ; as,
‘ one who has a wife of elegant shape’ (handsome
thighed) : also if the first term have no necessary relation to
the second ; as, ‘ having for its head an illustrious
woman’ (a family) ; ‘ having a woman for witness or
authority’ (a suit, & c.) Feminine nouns having a penultimate
preserve their final ; as, xnfiqgrmm: * one who has a wife
that can cook.’ used either as an attribute or as a name,
retains a feminine termination; as, ‘one who has a
wife given,’ or ‘ whose name is Datta.’ Ordinal numbers do
the same ; as, ■q^jflvrnsf: ‘ he who has a fifth wife :’ so do
nouns ending in t implying part of the body ; as,
‘ who has a wife with fine hair so do nouns implying caste ;
as, 'ST^thtse}: ■gi^tifhTTni: ‘ one who has a wife of the Sudra or
the Brahman caste.’
c. The final members of Bahuvrihi compounds occasionally
undergo some modification.
i. The most common is the substitution of ^ for the final
vowel, or in some cases for the penultimate vowel and final
consonant of the last member of a compound epithet ; as,
‘ a thigh,’ ‘ long-thighed ;’ (but not if used figura-
tively, as ‘ a cart with long axle ;’) ‘ the
eye,’ ‘ lotus-eyed ‘ a finger,’ when applied
to any thing of wood, ‘ a rake ;’ but jyfrtfsT:
368
COMPOUND WORDS.
‘ the hand.’ ?nfW ‘ the navel,’ and other words, optionally
change ^ to ; as, or '3nt'JTTfH ‘ having a woolly or
hairy navel so f f?5 ‘ a furrow,’ ‘ the thigh,’ or, accord-
ing to some, ‘ utility,’ optionally change the final after a
negative, ‘ bad,’ or ‘ good as, or ‘ unfur-
rowed,’ -’fey or &c. Numerals preceded by particles
or by other numerals, to signify ‘ approximation,’ take for
their finals ; T^'STT: those which are ‘ near ten,’ i. e. nine or
eleven ; fecrr: ‘ two or three ;’ xpgm: ‘ five or six fg-fg^TT:
‘ twice twenty.’ It is added to ^riTT, preceded by certain parti-
cles ; riC ‘ what is not four ;’ ‘ what is about four.’
‘ a leader,’ takes ^ when preceded by the name of a constel-
lation ; as, JJ7TRW ‘ what has Mriga for a leader.’ After a
numeral, substitutes for its final syllable ;
‘ two-headed, three-headed : ’ so does after -RfflT, and
\ \
as, ‘ haiiy internally ; ’ ‘ hairy exter-
nally.’ The following are considered as irregularly taking ;
TTTrTTl ‘morning,’ ‘having a good morning;’ fifglT ‘a
day,’ JT'fg'g ‘ having a good day ;’ xg?? ‘ morrow,’ ‘ having
a good morrow ;’ ‘ the belly,’ gfr'd-Rf ‘ green-bellied,’ as
3T=f: ‘ the green-bellied parrot ;’ ‘ an angle,’
‘ quadrangular.’
2. In a few instances a final is changed to another vowel,
or substitutes or ; thus jfxi, * smell,’ makes with TW,
xjffl-, 7T, and TTTW, 'drif-M ‘ emitting- smell,’ and JTTfWrrfi^X
C\ 7 o7 vd 7 o ^ o
‘ fragrant,’ * fetid :’ also in compounds implying ‘ a
little ;’ as, q'rNifaj ‘ smelling slightly of Ghee :’ and intending
‘ similitude ;’ as, ‘ fragrant as a lotus :’ but not if the
odour is separated from the object ; as, ‘ a shop
of fragrant things,’ ‘ a perfumer’s.’ ‘ a wound,’ in one
combination takes as, ^fiEjiuwrT ^r. ‘ a deer wounded by
a hunter :’ so does ‘ a tooth’ or ‘ food,’ after *r, t-ftrl, HW,
or TTfir ; as, TnpH'JT ‘ having good teeth ;’ ‘ having
green teeth ;’ ‘ eating grass ;’ ‘ eating the
Soma plant :’ but not after any other term ; as, tmnr*W
BAHUVR1HI COMPOUNDS.
369
* toothless. takes in composition ; as,
‘ who performs his duty well.’ u>TT ‘ offspring,’ and ihrr
‘ understanding,’ take when compounded with a negative
or with or ; as, ’SnnrFT ‘ without progeny
‘ a childless man,’ ^1 ‘ a childless woman so
7TTT»T'H ‘ having bad or good children ‘ stupid,’
‘ dull,’ qqqq ‘ intelligent.’
3. In various instances, the final term of a Bahuvrihi com-
pound substitutes a different form, and especially when the
word signifies a part of the body : thus vjT* is put for vrrftr^rr ;
as, "3^ ‘ high-nosed,’ qqra ‘ prominent-nosed.’ With and
^ the substitute may also be ; as, TsTUtret: or
or tppq: ‘ an ass-nosed or hoof-nosed man.’ After WF5
the primitive is unchanged ; as, WFsqrraqi ‘ large-nosed.’ After
fq, the syllables 1-?, rj, and 73 may be substituted ; as, fqT3,
fq?3 ; also ‘ noseless.’ qr3 is substituted for
when ‘ resemblance’ is implied ; as, ‘ having a foot like
a tiger but not after the class ; as, ?rf5RrqTt* ‘ elephant-
footed.’ After numerals and 7?, the substitute is used ; as,
fww, ‘ biped, triped,’ &c. ; qqpT ‘well-footed.’ is
used in the feminine after ‘ a jar,’ qq; ‘ one,’ fvi^ ‘ with-
out,’ and other words; as, qjqqt;'!, 7*3^3, ffr'eqr.'t, ‘ (a woman)
having a foot like a water-jar,’ &c. If masculine, the form is
as in q*>rqT?, ‘jar-footed’ (a man). making in inflexion ^7^,
, is substituted for <^qr ‘ a tooth,’ preceded by q ; as,
‘ having good teeth :’ by a numeral, when * age’ is implied ; as,
‘ having two teeth ;’ fl^TT qTH: ‘ a child old enough to
have two teeth :’ but ‘ an elephant with two teeth.’
The feminine is fonned with ^ ; as, qT?JT ‘ a two-toothed
female infant.’ In feminine appellatives the same form is
used ; as, a proper name : but wnjvtt ^1 ‘ a woman
with even teeth.’ is substituted after certain other words,
as, spj, and and others ; as, T5T>J^7T ‘ white-toothed ;’
‘ having teeth as sharp as the tip of Kusa grass ;’
qfq^lT ‘ ass-toothed,’ &c. : also optionally after jqtq and ;
3 B
370
COMPOUND WOKDS.
as, or ‘ black-toothed ;’ miqcjF or ‘ hav-
ing discoloured teeth.’ st is substituted for *TPJ, ‘the knee,’
after q, Tm, and optionally after ^ ; as, TO ‘ prominent-
kneed,’ qjT ‘ compact-kneed,’ "3v|sT or '3ilpTT*J ‘ high-kneed.’
4. In words not signifying parts of the body we have qrfq
put optionally for qnn 4 a wife ;’ as, TpHTTR: or * a
man who has a young wife ■gqj for ■gsv^T * an udder ;’ as,
qrnft ‘ (a cow) having a large udder :’ UTqq for ‘ a bow'
as, having a bow of horn :’ optionally if the com-
pound is a proper name ; as, ^TTn^T or the name of a
prince, ‘ he who has a hundred bows.’ qr^1, ‘ a hump’ or ‘ a
peak,’ drops its final when denoting ‘ age as, ‘ a
young ox," ‘ one whose hump has not grown :’ or when signi-
fying ‘ a mountain ‘ a three-peaked mountain.’
4 the palate,’ drops its final after TiT or fq, and optionally after
qw ; as, ■^WT'ss? or fqcST^T ‘ without the hal’d palate qqiqrrqF
or q?r|=trr*q ‘ having a complete palate.’ is substituted for
^q, 4 the heart,’ after q and ^ ; as, ‘ kind-hearted,’ i. e.
a friend ; ‘ bad-hearted,’ i. e. a foe : in a literal sense the
compounds would be q<|qq, F<|^q.
5. cfi, technically termed qq, is added to many Bahuvrihi
compounds ; as, to qxq ‘ the breast.’ 4 broad-chested ;’
to qfqq 4 ghee,’ fqqqfqzq ‘ fond of ghee ;’ to qrt, 4 object,’
after a negative, *T?fvN; 4 useless,’ and optionally after a prepo-
sition, qtqivj or qtqrqq ; to q5Tq, 4 fame,’ optionally, as, q?iq$iq
or qqTqTnq 4 very famous.’ It is substituted for the finals in
^q, to form feminine attributives ; as, from qfqqq 4 an ascetic
bearing a staff,’ 4 a Dancli,’ come qiprrcrqqT qqft 4 a city having
many Danftis qqqrfrqqT WT 4 an assembly of many eloquent
persons.’ If masculine, q may be optionally substituted for
the final nasal ; as, qqqiiqi or qyprftjqqf 4 a village with
many Danclis.’ When added to feminine nouns in qrr, the
final is optionally short ; as, HT75T 4 a garland,’ qsprr?5Tqi or
qiprrF3=F 4 having many garlands.’ qTsfl and TTqft do not take
q, when used anatomically ; as, qqqTfq: qiqt 4 the many-
INDECLINABLE COMPOUNDS.
371
vesselled body;’ ‘ the many- fibred neck:’ but
they may add it in other senses ; as, iw: ‘ a clump
with many pipes’ or £ reeds ;’ ^sJH«r-fi=RT ^rrrr ‘ a many-stringed
lute.’ ofi is added to >JT1T in a depreciatory sense ; as. inTOTipi:
‘ one who has a foolish brother : otherwise TrSTOnJTff * having
an excellent brother.’
d. *r*r * with,’ forming the first member of a compound, is
commonly changed to *T ; as, £ having a son,’ £ being with
a son ;’ £ having an office or object,’ ‘ occupied,’ £ transi-
tive ;’ £ being with hair,’ £ hairy.’ When the compound
is connected with a term of benediction, is retained ; as,
wftcT U? £ health to the king, along w ith his son but
not before the words iff £ a cow,’ £ a plough,’ or TO ‘ a calf ;’
as, TlfrtTtl, HFrT usually substitutes in a
similar situation in this as well as in other kinds of com-
pounds ; as, **^TiW«T £ great-souled,’ ‘ magnanimous ;’
£ great-bodied ‘ very strong :’ but is unchanged
before words signifying £ become grown’ or £ made ;’ as,
£ become large’ or ‘ great.’
e. Words implying £ mutual striking,’ when repeated, pro-
long the final of the first member, and substitute ^ for that of
the last ; as, ^IT^T^I £ pulling hair,’ £ cudgelling,’
jpfaf? £ boxing.’ Although these words are used adverbially,
without a substantive, they are Bahuvrfhi compounds, and
regarded as epithets of Tpf, £ fighting,’ understood.
SECTION IV.
Avyayi-bhava — Indeclinable Compounds.
283. Indeclinable words are formed by combining a noun
with a preposition or particle, when the former is put in
the accusative case neuter. These compounds being in fact
compound adverbs, and like all adverbial terms, when not
otherwise inflected, taking the sign of the invariable neuter
accusative.
3 B 2
372
COMPOUND WORDS.
a. The following are examples of indeclinable compounds
formed with prepositions and particles, which, it will be
observed, retain their own sense, and exercise the same effect
upon the purport of the noun which they would do if uncom-
pounded. The sense of each term is complete in itself, but,
agreeably to its adverbial character, requires a verb, either
present or understood, to connect it with a substantive.
i. Prepositions.
^rfiT ‘ beyond ‘ beyond the Ganges,’ ^frrrr^ ITP7: ‘ the
village (that is) beyond the Ganges ‘ after the
cold weather,’ ^th fgJWTrra.fi! TOr: ‘ spring comes after the
cold weather ^fi-rfJTTr ‘ after sleep,’ ^frTPT'g'Hf^y fff
‘ the man gets up after sleep.’ These examples will suffi-
ciently explain the relation in which this sort of adverbial
compound stands to the other members of a sentence.
‘ upon,’ ‘ near to :’ ‘ upon Hari or Vishnu ;’ ’sraffinT
‘ near to, or upon, the fire.’
^T»T ‘ after,’ ‘ according to,’ ‘ near to ^wr^urj ‘ after Vishnu’
(following or worshipping) ; ‘ according to order ;’
according to seniority ^T«T^T ‘ near to the wood
‘ near to, or upon, the Ganges.’
’STT £ off,’ ‘ from as, ‘ in the off-point,’ i. e. in the
intermediate point ; * from Vishnu,’ ‘ withdrawn
from,’ ‘ hostile to.’
WT, limitative ; as, ■^TTJjf^i ‘ until final liberation ;’ "^JTTTTJTTf ‘ unto
the sea ;’ c to the boys,’ as, ^JrfeiJhrfTT ‘ faith
in Hari extends even to the children.’ The termination of
the fifth case may be also used with this preposition ; as,
wps:, WTR^Tr!, *rprra*?:.
* near to :’ ‘ near to Krishna ;’ TU7JTU c near to the
village.’
ffTt ‘ out of,’ c exempt from :’ frr^T ‘ lonely,’ ‘ void of men ;’
* free from flies.’
about’ or ‘against:’ TiftfRTin ‘about or against Vishnu.’
INDECLINABLE COMPOUNDS.
373
It follows numerals and the words 4 dice,’ 4 a
man (at draughts, &c.),’ or a numeral, when signifying
4 loss at play as, 4 losing one ;’ 'srspiiT ‘ having the
dice against one ;’ ^rFTRTR'ft: 4 losing a man.’
trfa ‘ to’ or ‘ towards trurf^T TtcTHT: wfor ‘ the grasshoppers
go towards the fire.’ It also implies ‘ severalty’ or * suc-
cession as, TTRT^r" 4 according to each several object or
signification TrfiTrP*T 4 birth after birth.’
is usually substituted for signifying 4 similarity’ or
‘ sameness,’ as ‘ like Hari ;’ also ‘ association,’ imply-
ing 4 finality,’ as ‘ he eats with the grass,’ i. e. even
to the grass ; also ‘ possession,’ as a property, as
‘ having, or rich in, fields.’
2. Particles.
implying 4 so,’ ‘ such,’ and the like ; as, ‘ such is
(the word) Hari.’
‘ bad,’ and w ‘ good as, ‘ bad with the Yavanas ;’
WS ‘ well or prosperous with the Madras.’
xr^TT 4 according to ;’ as, 'WT^rfei ‘ according to power or abi-
lity but not when it signifies * analogy ;’ as, nxn ftH vj |
‘ such as Hari is, such is Hara.’
xrmr ‘ as many or as much as ;’ as, i|lT^ sMSUUR ‘ as
far as there may be food (for them), invite the Brahmans.’
fTOT and ill 4 near ;’ as, ‘ near to Lanka ;’ ♦iHHI'gf
4 near the city.’
b. The derivatives of 4 to go,’ implying 4 direction,’
optionally form indeclinables ; as, or w^PTTfT ‘ east from
the wood :’ so does ‘ out of,’ 4 without ;’ as, or
^T^RTTr 4 out of the village.’
c. Indeclinable compounds may be formed with numerals,
except ir=R 4 one,’ referring to families or classes ; as,
fkgffT 4 born in, or belonging to, a family in which there have
been two or three Munis :’ so fdgpff 4 the grammar of
which the three Munis (Panini, Patanjali, Katyayana) are
374
COMPOUND WORDS.
the authors.’ Names of rivers are also combined with nume-
rals, to indicate the place of junction ; as, 4 at the meeting
of the two Gangas 4 at that of the three Yamunas.’
They are also combined with other words in a like accepta-
tion ; as, £ at the place where the Ganges is furious
£ where the Ganges is red as,
£ Benares (stands) where the Ganges is rapid.’
d. In this, as in preceding forms of composition, the finals
of the last member of the compound are sometimes changed.
When the final is a long vowel or a diphthong terminating
a feminine noun, its change to a corresponding short vowel is
nothing more than the alteration required by the substitu-
tion of the neuter gender (p. 43) ; as, 4 a female,’ makes
■^rfirf^? 4 surpassing the woman ;’ «fi 4 a boat,’ 4 beyond
the boat.’ But the more special alteration is analogous to
that which occurs so frequently in Bahuvrihi compounds, the
substitution of for a final vowel, or a final 'W ; or its addi-
tion to words ending in consonants ; as, "g^lfTR or TqfrTfr:
4 near the mountain ■g'TRp? or TqTfV 4 near the river ;’ ^TRIsT
4 under the king ;’ *rujirW 4 over or in the spirit.’ If the noun
ending in be already neuter, it may retain its own termina-
tion ; as, or 4 off the skin.’ ^R?? 4 the autumn,’
and other words, add ; as, 4 near the autumn :’ or
sometimes words with final consonants, not nasals, semivowels,
or sibilants, add ^ optionally ; as, tftjg 31? or 4 near to
the stone.’ 4 the eye,’ substitutes when compounded
with the prepositions *r»T, tr, T?fiT, or w ; as, 4 accord-
ing to the eye,’ 4 visibly,’ 4 perceptibly.’ tr substitutes wt for
its own final, whether in a Tatpurusha or Avyaya compound ;
as, triei 4 away from the eye,’ 4 absent,’ 4 invisible ; ’ HWEj
4 before the eye,’ 4 present ;’ and wet also 4 before the eye,’
4 visible’ or 4 present.’
e. ERf 4 in front,’ 4 in the midst,’ ttr 4 on the further
side,’ may be compounded with nouns in this form ; as,
4 in the presence of Rama ;’ 4 in the midst of the
GENERAL RULES.
375
Ganges ;’ RTTRR'S ‘ beyond the ocean or the terms may be
optionally used with the signs of the case, either their own or
the noun which they govern ; as, qf^THH^TTr or RTTTr(
‘ from beyond the ocean.’
f. The following words are considered as forming inde-
clinable compounds of an anomalous description : 4 a
day,’ as Ml ^ * in the forenoon iff ‘ a cow or ox,’ fayR 4 at
cow-standing (time),’ i. e. when they stand to be milked, Rfir
4 at ox bearing,’ i. e. ploughing (time), ^TTRTffjTR 4 at cattle-
coming,’ i. e. at the time of their coming home ; 4 the
right hand,’ 4 walking round a person or thing, keeping
it on the right xr^TflT 4 a foot-soldier,’ RRJR^TfiT 4 at drill-
time,’ or when the soldiers are in line : yfit 4 earth,’
4 (at a place) where it is level ;’ RR 4 a deer,’ TRpT 4 at deer-
coming,’ f^pf 4 at deer-going ;’ rr 4 barley,’ 4 when
barley is on the threshingflooi-’ (the season), opTRR 4 at barley-
cutting ;’ and other compounds : so RR 4 chaff,’ trsIrr 4 at
chaff on the floor (time),’ &c. ; 4 a car,’ RTR 4 at chai-iot-
going ;’ rrt 4 a year,’ rtrrr 4 during a wicked year,’ RWRR
4 during a virtuous year;’ rr 4 equal,’ writ 4 level’ or 4 even,’
fRRR 4 uneven.’ rr is compounded with mItt, as ■HHlfn 4 now,’
4 at present.'
SECTION V.
General Rules.
284. Thei’e are some changes which are common to all or
most of the classes of compounds. Some, as the substitution
or addition of a final rj, have been noticed : the most useful
of the others are the following, affecting either the final
member of the compound or the initial :
a. i. rir, 4 water,’ is changed to RJTcr ; as, fRRRSTR 4 having
pure water,’ fRRRjTR Rt: 4 a clear lake.’ After fg-, or a
preposition ending in any vowel except ^T, the initial is
changed to ^ ; as, 4 an island,’ 4 having water on both
sides ;’ also ^RnrfR 4 an island,’ 4 in the midst of water ;’ ififtR
376
COMPOUND WORDS.
* reverse/ with ^ makes ^TRfq ‘ near ;’ but in a literal
sense, ‘ having water equally.’ After the vowel
becomes '3i, if applied to a country ; as, ^Hiit ^51: ‘ marshy
land but ‘ upon or along the water.’ After a prepo-
sition ending with ^r, the change to ^ is optional ; as, tn: and
H make either trut or tht* ‘ where the water has retired ttr
or ITT ‘ where it has gone forth.’
2. tiftrTT, ‘ a path,’ is changed commonly to q'sj ; as, JT^rpr^i:
‘ a great road ‘ a place where four roads meet ;’
U-q'ij q| tfgr: ‘ a place having a pleasant road ;’ Tqtpsj ‘ near to
the road.’
b. 1. a particle implying ‘ inferiority,’ ‘ vileness,’ or some-
times ‘ a little,’ is variously modified before different words.
In a Tatpurusha compound, and preceding a word beginning
with a vowel, it is changed to cRtt ; as, sy: ‘ a bad horse,’ ‘ a
hack ;’ eB^g: ‘ a bad camel but tTtTT ‘ a prince who has a
bad camel :’ also before and as, cF/tps: ‘ a bad chariot ;’
oRg^: ‘ one who speaks ill :’ before wtff, signifying ‘ a species,’
cR^rrr £ a kind of grass ;’ but ‘ bad grass in general.’ ^ is
changed to cjrr before as, cfiPTST: ‘ a bad road ;’ ‘ the
eye,’ as cRfgj: * a tear ;’ and optionally before Tppn, as
or ‘ a mean despicable man,’ ‘ a coward.’ ^rr is also a
diminutive ; as, ‘ a little sweet cKHtS ‘ a little sour
before tott, ‘ hot,’ either ^r?r, =r, or oST may be used ; as,
3fira!Tj £ a little hot,’ £ tepid.’
2. The infinitive mood is used as the first member of a
compound with °RTR and jttft, when it optionally rejects the
nasal ; as, $rnprpR or srnpjFT ‘ desii'ous to know ;’ ofrjbnTH or
‘ inclined to do.’
O \
3. '^5'a, £ certainly,’ optionally rejects its nasal when com-
pounded with a future participle ; as, or
£ what is necessarily to be done.’ ij'TCT, £ flesh, compounded
with TfRi or £ cooking,’ optionally rejects its final vowel ;
as, JtreHTcB: or m^TToFi:, or £ cooking meat.’
4. ’Srtf becomes before various words, if not in the
SYNTAX.
377
sense of the instrumental or genitive cases ; as, w^T^TT ‘ hope
in something else ^TR^rsfl: 4 benediction in or on another
* one who does something different.’
5. The substitution of R for Rjr has already been noticed ;
but it is also substituted for rrpt 4 same,’ ‘ like as, rtrj
4 being of the same party RURf 4 observing the same duties
whence RTRr^j 4 community of the duties of caste, profession,’
&c. ; RgHMlfi 4 a fellow-student,’ 4 one studying under the
same teacher ;’ so rttH?: also 4 a fellow-student,’ 4 having the
same holy object’ or 4 preceptor.’ R is substituted for RRTR
before 4 to see ;’ as, Rg^r: 4 like,’ 4 similar,’ 4 of like appear-
ance :’ so Rg'cfi and RgRf. . It is also substituted before the
following words in the sense of either class of compounds :
RfffffR 4 light,’ RRTR 4 country,’ 4 night,’ RlfR 4 navel,’
rrj 4 a relative,’ rrj 4 smell,’ fq?!3 4 a lump of rice,’ &c. ; cSlfgfT
4 blood,’ 4 side,’ RRft 4 braided hair,’ R^t 4 a wife ;’ as,
RRfffir. 4 equal in lustre ;’ rrrr^ 4 of the same country
RfiR3 4 of the same cake RR7T3: 4 a relative connected by
offerings to the same ancestors ;’ &c.
The following take either R or rrtr ; Rtf 4 form,’ rpt 4 name,’
Rfa 4 family,’ RR 4 caste,’ RRR 4 age,’ TRR 4 speech,’ RRt 4 duty,’
Rnffa? 4 specific,’ 4 uterine ;’ as, rrr or rrrrr 4 of the
same form ;’ RrI^ or RRTRRt^ 4 of the same race ;’ Rt^Rf or
RRTRt^Rj 4 related in the female line,’ as Rt^Rft RTiTT 4 a brother
by the same mother &c.
CHAPTER VIII.
SYNTAX.
285. The great body of Sanskrit composition is in metre,
and the construction of sentences has consequently been sub-
ordinate to the necessities of rhythm. Examples therefore of
syntactical arrangement are not so diversified as might be
3 c
378
SYNTAX.
expected ; and it is not always certain, whether any unusual
combination may not be a license of the poet, rather than a
law of the language. The use of protracted compounds also
in a very great degree supersedes the occasion of individual
inflexion ; as a sentence or a stanza, embracing a great variety
of circumstances, may be made up of a nominative and accusa-
tive, with a single copulative, the rest of the words, however
numerous, being compound epithets of one or other of the
nouns. There also prevails very commonly an elliptical style
of construction, in which the verb is altogether omitted, or its
tenses are supplied by participles and analogous words.
In the following line from the Mahabharata we have two
sentences without a verb or any other copulative, and only a
nominative case : fqiTT ipj: ‘ A father (or)
a spiritual preceptor (is) the lord, the giver (of) knowledge, of
the Vedas : (there is) no doubt (of this).’ Instances of the
absence of a verb are numerous in the didactic verses of the
Hitopadesa : ^ svr: Tjjj^rr vr fqiT?r ^ vrfwg;; l qw
fof.'q'T II I * * 4 What (is) the use of a son (being)
boi’n, who (is) neither learned nor pious ? What (benefit is
there) from a sightless e}*e ? (such) an eye (is) even only
pain.’ In the following stanza from the Kumara Sambhava
there is only one verb, and one change of inflexion from the
nominative to the instrumental, which, if the metre had not
needed a long syllable, would probably have been dispensed
with : fqfrfv|TT^f^Tj.rTUl?irnt I II
I cnfrqfT rfW ll ‘And that grove of
penitents was pure ; (for in it) animals of hostile natures (had)
abandoned their former animosity ; guests (were) reverenced
by its trees with desired fruits ; and within its new-reared
cottages the (holy) fires (were) enshrined.’ Thei’e is a little
more variety of inflexion in the following verse from the Raghu
Vansa ; but it is sufficiently rare to shew how much syntac-
tical constmction has been set aside for l’hythnxical disposi-
tion, even in the works of authors who have not indulged in
NOUNS.
379
that abuse of elaboration which characterises later and inferior
writers : TOT ¥ nR^^n^IrWT TOTTTTfu TOR I <^T
ftnrrrnT^rTTTiT n gfroRrr^iiiT inn tt? fsifare i nfonwn-
ff ^cSsJTT ll ‘ He then, whose mind (was) liberated
from objects of sense, having delivered to his young son the
symbol of royalty, the shelter of the white umbrella, with the
usual solemn rites, repaired together with his queen to the
shade of the trees of the grove of hermits : for such (is) the
observance of the princes of the race of Ikshwaku, when in
the decline of life.’ In this long stanza we have but one verbal
inflexion, f^rfrof, besides the indeclinable participle in^T*
Although, however, in this manner dispensed with in com-
position to a great extent, yet the relations of words in sentences
are expressed in modes analogous to those adopted in other
cultivated languages ; as the following rules will exemplify.
SECTION I.
Nouns.
286. The noun substantive expresses as usual the subject
or object of a proposition by the different modifications of
number, gender, and case. Its relations to other parts of a
sentence depend especially upon the latter, and will therefore
be better explained, as in native grammars, in the chapter
to which the title of to: is attached, in the order of the
cases. When, as not unfrequently happens, more than one
case may be employed to convey a similar relation, the alter-
natives will be found, with some exceptions, under that case
which is subsequent in order, according to the scheme given
under the head of Declension (r. 47).
287. Nominative case (ofi^T or ITWr). The nominative
case declares the simple sense of a word ; as, j^ht: c a man,’
ft# ‘ a woman,’ sfR ‘ knowledge.’ Its employment in a defi-
nite or indefinite manner is usually indicated by the context,
as there is no article. The numeral or a pronoun, however,
3 c 2
380
SYNTAX.
sometimes performs the same office ; as, ‘ a nian,’ **
‘ the or that man/ csftjHrr. ‘ a certain king,’ *qrr ^rg'arni:
‘ an old tiger.’
a. Two substantives may be connected absolutely in the
nominative case ; as, sftftr: ‘ rice a drona (in measure)
f^rfr:: ‘the mountain a kos (in extent);’ JffitT ^TH*. ‘a
mother an enemy ;’ fqffT ‘ a father an enemy ;’ fVtf tWT
‘ Society (is) poison to the poor but in these cases
the copulative ‘ is’ must be understood, as in similar phrases
it is expressed ; ‘ Iniquity becomes virtue.’ The
nouns in apposition may be in different genders and numbers :
TfijofiTfiT tfrvrr: ‘ The acts of the Vedas (are) his
path to heaven ^ <rr fT ^ TTTTvrTFq^ ‘ Who
engaged in unprofitable undertakings do not become a subject
of disgrace ?’
b. The nominative case is connected with the active verb,
or governs it, when it expresses the agent, and with the
passive when it signifies the object : oRT "<*Cl fd ‘ Deva-
datta makes the mat f^iUTT ‘ The mat is made by
Devadatta.’ It is also put absolutely sometimes in a sentence,
as the object of an action, but where the accusative that
should express that object is omitted : fqtt-Jtsft sfq ffq-gf ^-q
‘ Even a poison-tree, having reared (it), one should
not of oneself cut (it) down.’ In this the complete construction
should be, *ft sfq fqwsj: Wff ‘ Having
reared a tree, it is not proper to cut it down, even though it
be a poison-tree.’
c. When various nouns, separated by a disjunctive particle
expressed or implied, occur in a sentence with a common
verb, that which is nearest to the verb may become its nomi-
native : -sr? n*rt *TSTT ^TT Hfbqfw ‘ I or Rama, the
king or Lakshmaha, will die : ’ «T =TT
TTTPpTlj TT Tpjj ^TT stSttot ;q-qT II ‘ Neither was the sun
able, nor I, -by motives of affection, to conciliate him, or
(induce him) to enter into amity with thee rt^TT
NOUNS.
381
1 Tnrru 'SFW75: • #flxr?rrff?f to *nfNni: n * Fire
gratifies not, neither do clothes nor a blanket, the region that
is afflicted with cold breezes, so much as thy rays (O sun).’
d. When two or more nouns are joined together by a
copulative conjunction, they usually govern a verb in the
plural number : tttt: ^ U'JTT ^ l ^5:
TT^T 'iJRHt: rf^T II ‘ Then afterwards Kunti and the king
and Bhishma, with the kinsmen, gave to Pandu the obsequial
offerings, with libations to the manes.’ This is not invariably the
case, however, and the verb may have for its nominative only
the nearest of the nouns combined by copulative conjunctions:
^ Twnff ^ i rt^fr. trfr^rTT npurfl ^rftr
11 ‘ And the queen Satyavati and the illustrious Kau-
salya, and also Gandharf, attended by the wives of the king,
went forth aTHfHt l Mt I
ufd’y VTSffsftr jn^rfiT ^TXrtT ^ 11 ‘ The sun and
moon, wind and fire, the sky, earth, waters, the heart and
Yama, and day and night, and both dawn and evening, and
also Dharma, knows the conduct of a man.’
288. Accusative case (ofiw or fgTfhn). The accusative
expresses, after a transitive verb, the object of the action :
cwjfri ‘ The potter fabricates the vessel ;’ fix vnrfw
4 The votary worships Hari.’
a. The accusative follows a neuter or intransitive verb, when
it denotes place or time : ^fqfiT 4 He sleeps in the
country of the Kurus ;’ TlfrTSW 4 He proceeds for a kos ;’
f^zpJT <fl<4HWfr TrfTf 4 They dwelt for some time on
the mountain Gandhamadana ;’ irwf fent: 4 He stayed
two months in the house of his preceptor.’
b. Verbs signifying 4 motion to,’ literally or figuratively,
govern the accusative case : jjttt Ji'-edPrl 4 He goes to the vil-
lage ;’ JrtnTT yorjirftT 4 He goes mentally to Krishna,’ he wor-
ships him ; fxFPT tito *nrf 4 He went to (or felt) great
astonishment.’ The accusative is also employed when 4 going
along a road’ is intended; xtTOrti xrrfw trftns: 4 The traveller
382
SYNTAX.
goes along the road but not if ‘ going to a road’ is meant ;
TrWTf TT3 Tr^fw i He goes by a byeway to the road.’ The
dative case may also be used optionally, when actual ‘ motion
to’ is signified ; gjmrq 7T«3rfrr.
c. The accusative case follows verbs of giving, to signify
the thing given ; jjttt tprrfa ‘ I give the village to the
Brahmans also verbs of hearing, to denote the thing heard ;
SRiT c Hear from me the Asura (creation).’
d. A double accusative follows a number of verbs, when
the thing done, and the thing or person that is the object of
the action, are both designated. They are mostly verbs that
signify, i. speaking, 2. asking, 3. instructing, 4. knowing,
5. conquering, 6. leading, 7. dragging, 8. taking, 9. collecting,
10. stealing, it. fining, 12. cooking, 13. milking, 14. churning,
and 15. obstructing ; whether they have these meanings lite-
rally or metaphorically. 1. USTT^T fltf stff RK: ‘ The spy tells
the whole to the king wa'gfYff ‘ Kunti said
to him words full of meaning 2. Rt Tfbif ‘ He asked
Lakshmana (after) Sita 3. fyrnrR V«T '5TTfRT ‘ The Guru
teaches the disciples virtue 4. f^|vT: ‘ The wise
know punishment (to be) virtue 5. ‘ Hav-
ing conquered his kingdom (from) Nala the king 6.
vmfn ‘ The shepherd leads the goats to the village
7. ^TCFTTi * The officer of justice drags the
thief to prison 8. *T ‘ He took the Ablrira
women to the forest 9. ^p^ivfTfTT xfiHTfYr RTH: ‘ The boy
gathers the fruit (from) the tree:’ 10. 5^^ vvf HWrrftT w-fr:
‘ The rogue robs Devadatta (of) his wealth:’ 11. snf
<T?RirfrT ‘ The king fines the debtor a hundred (rupees) ;’
12. tTRfrr Rq°FTT: ‘ The cook dresses the grain (and)
the boiled rice :’ 13. jtt tni: ‘ He milks the cow (for)
milk ;’ TtRTT'JT ‘ Milking (abandoning) life (from)
himself :’ 14. *VT 'RIRRT: ‘ The gods and A suras
churned the milky ocean (for) ambrosia:’ 15.
TST% rn: ‘ Govinda shuts up the cows (at) the cow-pens ;’
NOUNS.
383
(V^j^r^Vrf * He confined his grief (in) his heart.’ ^*r, ‘ to
bear,’ is sometimes similarly used ; ctT^TT or xpHxn'^Tr^
4 He bore the damsel to the house.’ In common with other
transitive verbs, these verbs may govern a single accusative,
when only one object is designated ; HTWT^r^ xftn: ‘ The hero
said to his mother.’ Several of them may govern the object
in other cases also, as will be subsequently noticed.
e. The causal modes of verbs signifying, i. motion, 2. speak-
ing or articulate sound, 3. or eating ; 4. the causals of intran-
sitive verbs ; and 5. of 4 to take,' * to see,’ and ^ 4 to
hear’ — govern a double accusative, when the object and the
subject of the act are both expressed. 1. 4 He
caused the enemies to go to heaven 2. xj^'Frwnxrxpf flPT 4 He
caused the Brahman to read aloud the Vedas :’ 3.
4 He caused the gods to eat nectar :’ 4. ^TTTT'qw *rfof5
tpjf xf: Tf h 4 That Hari is my refuge, who placed
(caused to sit) the earth upon the waters ;’ tflrft
MTrff eR ‘ If I am pleased, I will cause thee, lady, to
enjoy the three worlds 5. 4 He made the boy
take learning ;’ TTH xftfTT 4 They shewed (caused to
see) Sita to Rama ;’ ^TTZ"Sfi 4 Recite (cause to
hear) the drama to the company.’
f. There are some exceptions to the preceding rule. The
causals of ^ and WHT, 4 to eat,’ require the instrumental case
for the subject of the action ; ’STRfir or
4 The Guru causes the rice to be eaten by the pupil.’ So
when it means 4 eating;’ 4 He caused the food
they liked to be eaten by the cowherds but if it means
4 destroying by the act of eating,’ it may be followed by a
double accusative ; *rH?Trffr TTR 4 He makes the oxen
eat up the corn.’ 4 to sound,’ in the causal mode requires
the subject to be put in the instrumental case ; 34^;
4 He causes the sound to be uttered by Devadatta.’
*T=g and some other verbs, signifying 4 articulate sound,’ are
similarly combined. The causal of ^ 4 to bear,’ when it
384
SYNTAX.
implies ‘ driving,’ governs a double accusative ; ttjh-
^ W- ‘ The charioteer makes the horses draw the car
otherwise the subject is put in the instrumental case ; ^ iul
HTfnfiT HR H?PT ‘ The master makes the load be borne by the
hireling.’
g. The causal modes of Hi ‘ to make,’ g ‘ to take/ * to
speak,’ with htth prefixed, and of f ‘ to see,’ in the Atmane-
pada, may take either a second accusative or the instrumental
case for the agent or subject of the action : HTRnfw
or f^rfxtPTT ‘ He causes the workman to make the mat,’ or ‘ he
causes it to be made by the workman :’ so ^RqfrT iRW H7T or
‘ He causes the messenger to take the message,’ &c. ;
HrfHHRXTr hsr or ‘ He makes the devotee salute the
deity,’ &c. ; htujihhh or ‘ He makes Arjuna see
Krishna,’ &c. The fact being, that when the causal is used in
a passive sense, the subject or subordinate agent is specified
in the instrumental ; when it is used in an active sense, it is
specified in the accusative case.
h. A second accusative may sometimes follow a verb, as a
qualification of the first, being put absolutely or in apposition :
hOjh) H ‘ Give me, O lord of the Danavas,
earth, three paces.’
i. The accusative case may follow various prepositions and
indeclinable words or particles. Of the former class are
HtfiT, Hrfvj when reiterated, hi fir, HPT, HH, HR, and wfir. HrfrT
frix: ‘ Hari is beyond the gods ;’ HtffRTH ‘ Superior to
Rama’ (ht^, ‘ I am,’ understood) ; HTU|f*P5YH fetm: ‘ Vishnu
abides over and above the worlds ;’ HffbpJHfHrTT inTT ‘ The army
will halt at, or along, the river ;’ jTHHH HTHHTT ‘ It rained after
the prayer ;’ ss'^fuTTRT ‘ The son goes after, or
imitates, the father.’ HPT and TH, indicating £ inferiority,’ also
govern the accusative : H HHRHUH HIT ‘ If you are not infe-
rior to Rama ;’ THSTjX ‘(If) thy conduct is not beneath
a hero.’ HPT, Hfx, and Ttfir govern accusatives designating any
particular object ; as, fjrfXRH (nfl or nfff) fwlTTH fq^«T ‘ The
NOUNS.
385
lightning flashes at or toward the mountain ;’ P^inu'ra
rir+l&i win TTfft ‘ He considered that grave matter
concerning his daughter — a part of any thing or person ;
(irfd ttFc or TrffT) * Lakshmi is part of Hari:’ — 'and
several and successive order ; (trft or xrffr) fb^fiT JTTF51
‘ The gardener waters tree by tree ;’ trft pjf or ^pff)
‘ In love with every (successive) woman.’ The
indeclinable words governing accusatives are ^rirrsv:, '3’qx|qiT,
'-HtRi, whir, ^rfVirr:, trfcr:, THtnr:, tmtn, fairer, fir*, ?t ;
as, tHVtsv: >jfK trrrrra: ‘ Patala is below the earth;’ ■3"q*§,qn:
trfer^f in: ‘ The sky is above the earth F^TU^ITT ^unfwgffT
‘ Krishna tarries away from thee UW.
‘ Ravana, of dreadful form, having raised up his
sword (to cut) Vaidehi in two *r ‘ There is no
happiness without a mistress;’ (or trftrft)
HI KfHT: ‘ The Rakshasas ran upon or around Rama ;’ ^tnr:
tfftrr: ‘ The cowherds (were) on both sides of Krishna ;’
*rfw: TTTtn^* »UJjffT ?t!3Vlfttli: ‘ All around the palace watch
the staff-bearers ;’ WR ITR fa<*m ■qi *R3frT e He goes near
to the village,’ * near to the city ;’ fvtfi -^nTmvrgi ‘ Fie on one
not devoted to Krishna ;’ FfTSTpT ‘ Alas ! (for) the enemy of
the gods.’ Several of these may be combined with other
cases ; as, ^ WWT £ Above and over all,
like the sun in splendour ;’ ^q^TTg £ or inferior to heroes.’
j. The neuter verbs ‘ to sleep,’ tstt £ to stay’ or be,’ and
£ to sit,’ when compounded with ^rfv, govern the noun
expressing the site of the action in the accusative :
■qtqi? ‘ The maiden sleeps upon the couch ;’ ^rfvfrTffTqr'R'R
‘ Kesava presides in (or over) the soul ;’ ^l«rret
‘ Hari abides in Vaikunfha.’
k. fq^r, £ to enter into,’ as a transitive verb, governs an
accusative ; Ttfq'SrnT £ He enters the house.’ When pre-
ceded by qrfW and fq, it may govern either the accusative or
locative ; as, frT VRTU £ He enters upon a good path ;’
^fafqrqgifrf ttr £ He enters upon (or falls into) wickedness.’
3 D
386
SYNTAX.
When preceded by Tq, and implying ‘ to sit,’ it is followed by
the locative only ; HHIUH sf^R^qfqgirf ‘ Sit down on this seat.’
I. qq ‘ to dwell,’ preceded by isrfv, qnr, ^rr, or Tq, may
govern an accusative case ; &c.) qq tpt:
‘ Rama inhabits the wood 3jvqH«jq«g'q ‘ He inhabited a
lonely wood ^qqnqTRiqntflfr ‘ He dwelt at the city Ayo-
dhya ywjfqqafiT ‘ He inhabits the village but when qqqq
means ‘ to fast,’ the site is expressed in the locative only ;
TqqTrfiT qq TTR: ‘ Rama fasts in the forest.’
289- Instrumental case (qqrrr or TT'rffarr). This case expresses
the agent, the implement, or the means by which any thing
is done, or any end is accomplished, whether active effort is
implied or not : qnrRTTT HqT >JTrTT TrrfwTT: ‘ By me, unknowing,
my brother has been slain ;’ qnnq fir: ‘ Killed by Rama
with an arrow ;’ qiiqq qfc ‘ Hari is seen by (or through)
virtue ;’ ^rurnpHT q#q ‘ He subsists by teaching ;’ q[^:
‘ Beautiful by nature.’ It also expresses the manner or degree
in which any object is effected : qtqq »flqfTT ‘ He lives with
ease’ (happily) ; qrrw ‘ He goes with difficulty TTRTU
qrflTq: ‘ For the most part (usually) a sacrificer.’ It also
denotes any mark or circumstance by which an object is
characterised : q?TfWqrrqq: ‘ He is an ascetic, by his clotted
hair ;’ qqqT qTqqr: c a Brahman by caste ;’ JTFq: ‘ a
descendant of Garga by family.’
a. The instrumental case may be employed with words
signifying ‘object’ or ‘result:’ q?iqq qtsxh ‘What is the
object of effort?’ qfQ/qHH fq qiH ‘What is the fruit of
lamenting ?’
b. Words implying ‘ bodily deformity’ require the instru-
mental case for the organ or member in which the defect
occurs : qwm qnqr: ‘ blind by an eye qi^q ‘ lame by
a foot.’
c. Prepositions signifying ‘ with,’ ‘ along with,’ are con-
nected in sentences with the instrumental case : ’X py snq qqr
‘ Stay along with me ;’ fhm qfrrernt qf qqTnqTiT ‘ The
NOUNS.
387
mind is depraved, O sire, from association with the base.’
Verbs signifying c association’ also govern the object in the
same case : jgirr TSTTVt ‘ Having met, O pious man,
with thee.’
d. The particle implying * enough of,’ governs the
instrumental case : ‘ Enough of prolixity.’
e. The instrumental case may be used optionally with the
accusative in various instances ; as after the verb ‘ to play/
'STEfr»T or ;3r^<;?arnT STRiTIi: ‘ The gambler plays dice,’ or * with
dice:’ also after sn ‘ to know,’ preceded by *m; as, tr fqrrt
(or fq^Tt) TFbrRfaq 1 Recognise thy father.’ When it signifies
‘ calling to mind’ or * thinking upon,’ it governs the accusative
only: firsn * Meditate on Vishnu.’ When c space’ or
‘ time’ are spoken of, in connexion with an act or event com-
pleted, the instrumental case is employed : wt^tt or tt^
‘ Having gone for a day, or for a Kos, he arrived at
home.’ But if the act or event is incomplete, the accusative :
Ttfwfft TgmTTT: ‘ He has been travelling (for) a month,
but is not arrived.’
f. Words signifying c weight,’ ‘ measure,’ or ‘ number/ when
succession or repetition is also implied, are put after verbs
either in the instrumental or accusative case : (or
5TW $nf) 4rHR xjTHufrf tnt: ‘ He gives milk to the calves to
drink, by a hundred at a time ;’ flRRR or vrt
‘ He buys com by two Drofia (measures) at once.’
290. Dative case (wt^r or wsff). This case expresses
the object or recipient of a gift, either literal or figurative :
arailRTT ^fr ‘ He gave Nishkas (gold coins) to the
Brahmans ;’ R5T %RPT ‘ He offers an animal to S'iva ;’
r trr Rnf ^?rnT ‘ Let him not give understanding to a
Sudra :’ and it may be used after verbs w hich imply ‘ pre-
senting’ or ‘ offering,’ although not bearing such import ori-
ginally ; as, urtr rrt RR5 RjJrO: ‘ The gi-eat sage made (or
offered) worship to Rama.’
a. Although, however, the fourth or dative case most appro-
3 D 2
388
SYNTAX.
priately follows verbs that imply ‘ giving,’ of some kind or
other, yet the genitive case is frequently used with a similar
purport, and sometimes also the locative : TTE ^ F
7TF c Spirit of air, I may give thee the prosperous
kingdom of the S'ivis ?r?T sfirfawft ^
‘ Having given (food) to guests, gods, ancestors, and his own
household ^TTrffracftr c Thou who wishest to
give the earth to Rama.5 When the genitive case is thus
used, however, an ellipse is implied, to be filled up by a noun
understood in the dative case : rff ‘ to the hands of
thee ‘ to the persons of his own family/
b. Nouns expressing ‘ cause’ or ‘ purpose,’ that for or on
account of which a thing is done, or that for which a thing is
fit or suitable, follow verbs in the dative case : Hvrnr
FP*: ‘ The pious man worships Hari for the sake of liberation
vrf-3!^ RP4 ‘ Devotion is practised for the sake of holy
knowledge ;’ FTrTPT cfrfxTFST fFlITT ‘ The pale lightning is on
account of (it is a sign of) a gale TSpmt ‘STTift
sf^in: ‘ The unfriendly performers of cruel acts are born for
the destruction of the world ‘wraw*! ffrft vwh ‘ Virtue is fit
for a Brahman.’
c. Connected with this application of the dative case, is its
optional substitution for the infinitive after a verb :
Jivafrf ‘ He goes for fruit,’ for Tfic^RTnrtr JR3"fiT 4 He goes to
bring fruit ;’ m I qi’st rirtrfir c He gives orders for a sacrifice,’
for ‘ He gives orders to sacrifice.’
d. Intransitive verbs signifying ‘ to be agreeable’ or ‘ accept-
able’ govern the dative case : ‘ Devotion is
acceptable to Hari ;’ FT?yPT *rt^: 4 The sweetmeat is
pleasant to the boy.’
e. The verbs ’STR ‘ to praise,’ jr ‘ to conceal,’ FT 4 to stay,’
‘ to curse,’ may be connected with the object of the act in
the dative case, when some particular feeling is implied by it :
jftxfi RtTTT ■gniF JR frTW $PT^ ‘ The Gopi praises, hides
from, stays with, vows by Krishna, through love.’ When no
NOUNS.
389
such feeling is implied, such of them as are transitive govern
the accusative : TT3TPT yjTTjTT ‘ The minister flatters the
king.’
f. With a similar kind of relation, verbs signifying c desire,’
* anger,’ ‘ wrong,’ ‘ jealousy,’ or ‘ detraction,’ govern the object
in the dative case : 7H3T sttt ‘ He being filled with
desire for her ;’ ‘ He was not angry with
Sita, nor did he revile her 7n?T ‘ He vowed
to her, dissembling with her.’ When the feeling is not excited
by the object, they govern the accusative : trfir:
‘ The husband is jealous as to his wife,’ that is, he cannot
endure that others should look at her ; ‘ Let
(the pupil) never offend him.’ and preceded by pre-
positions, govern the accusative : f«fi HT tfawftr ‘ Why art thou
angry with me ?’ HT ■q^^fW'^tnn: ‘ Commit not violence against
another’s property.’
g. v, ‘ to hold,’ in the causal mode, having the sense of
‘ owing,’ literally or figuratively, governs the person to whom
the debt or obligation is due in the dative case :
VTT'qffT ‘ He owes a hundred to Devadatta ;’ VTttrfw
ffc ‘ Hari owes liberation to his worshippers.’
h. ^ preceded by or irfcT, signifying ‘ to promise,’ governs
the person or thing to which the promise is addressed in the
dative : fsnrnr m^isuiftfifr or TrfWTJT^fiT TT5TT ‘ The Raja promises
a cow to the Brahman ;’ STTITSJ: trffTSTTUI P<tT ftuwt: ‘ Common
persons promise assent to those who counsel them.’
i. it, ‘ to sound,’ preceded by or nflT, implying ‘ to
conform to’ or ‘comply with,’ governs the dative case:
TTfwirwfir or ‘ The Adhwaryu (or reciter of the
prayers of the Yajur-veda) acts in conformity to the Hotri (or
Brahman of the Rig-veda) ;’ irrrrgff Hf^VT: ‘ Others,
such as I am, do not conform to those who flatter us.’
j. tTV ‘ to accomplish,’ and ‘ to see,’ when signifying
‘ to think or consider about,’ govern the object in the dative :
390
SYNTAX.
rPflffl or ^wnr^TTr * Garga considers concerning or
about Krishna.’
k. Forms of reverential address or religious invocation, such
as TOT?T, ^VT, &c., are followed by nouns in the
dative case : v|tt: ‘ Salutation to Siva Jr^TTHTHT
‘ Health to the king ‘ Salutation to the gods
‘ Salutation to the manes.’ '?R*T compounded with
governs either the accusative or dative : or
'THT^ftnr tpp e We make, or he makes, salutation to the
gods.’
l. , when signifying c to be sufficient for’ or ‘ equal to,’
governs the dative : vtt?5 TO1H ?TTF5 ctOTJt ‘ Friends
are not (alone) sufficient for happiness, nor enemies for misery;’
HWR c One wrestler is a match for the other ;’ fpirwft s h
front ‘ Vishfiu is equal to, or a match for, the Daityas.’ Com-
pounded with a transitive verb, it governs the accusative : ttr
TTTFhfiW unvft sf% ‘ He is not able to be a match for, or over-
come, sin.’
m. The prohibitive jtt may be used with the dative case,
with the verb understood : ‘ Be not for unsteadi-
ness,’ i. e. Do not act unsteadily.
n. Verbs of motion, as noticed above (r. 288. b ), are most
usually followed by the noun in the accusative case ; but they
may also be associated with the dative : Trarfk £ He goes
to the village.’
0. *PT, ‘ to mind’ or 1 think,’ when of the fourth conjugation,
and implying ‘ disrespect,’ governs a subsidiary noun, signi-
fying e degree’ or ‘ comparsion,’ in either the dative or accusa-
tive case : vf uto ttwht or to ‘I value thee not a straw.’
jp of the eighth conjugation is followed by the accusative
only : ?T rTT HTO" TJW. If the comparison be intimated by the
terms ‘ a boat,’ ‘ a crow,’ ^ ‘ food,’ sp: ‘ a parrot,’
or 3pTT?5: ‘ a jackal,’ the accusative only is employed : vf
‘ I hold thee not of the value of a boat,’ & c. If ‘ dis-
NOUNS.
391
respect’ be not intended, the accusative only follows the verb :
*rar oRi8Hc«j>HW ‘ I suppose the mortar to be wood.’
p. When a term of number or quantity is used to signify
‘ rate of wages’ or ‘ hire,’ it takes either the dative or instru-
mental case : or ^ft^hnTfrT ‘ He hires servants
by or for a hundred.’
q . ^nrr, * to give,’ preceded by , and implying ‘ cohabita-
tion,’ governs the dative when the act is legal ; the instru-
mental when criminal : nfaf ?TTtrr trffr: ‘ The
husband cohabits with his wife,’ ‘ with his bondswoman.’
291. Ablative case (^rtrn^PT or This case denotes
‘ a taking away,’ ‘ a separating of or from,’ ‘ removal’ or
‘ departure’ of any kind ; as, irraFrRrnT ‘ He comes from the
village ;’ wsr Jrjpmi: ‘ He returned from
the water of the Ganges afflicted ;’ VTTrfr svett^ TjwffT ‘ He falls
from a galloping horse.’ It also implies metaphorical dis-
junction ; as, tnxrTfiTJrffr e He refrains from sin vn^TrUHrafiT
‘ He strays from virtue.’
a. The ablative case has also an inceptive signification,
implying the cause or motive of any act or feeling, or the
origin from which any thing proceeds, literally or figuratively :
^TTf^rffT ^ ‘ The woman is afraid of (or from) the thief
7T*n * The king protects from thieves ;’ vftrft Rif
■WTnrrfVfa *TT WRrff *rr: ‘ People will think of me thus, He is
afraid of Arjuna in battle ;’ 'a^Rir: THTH * Progeny are born
from Brahma ;’ f^n: *#t: ‘ Reli-
gious acts proceed from w ealth, like rivers from mountains.’
b. Verbs signifying, 1. hindrance, 2. disappearance or con-
cealment, 3. being ashamed of, 4. acquiring knowledge from,
5. being averse to, govern nouns in the ablative case. 1. *l%wrt
JTF*. 'qR^ffT jffillpi: ‘ The cowherd keeps off the cow:s from the
barley :’ 2. RTFRpjfqw yon: ‘ Krishna hides from his mother
3. ^JRifWgfTT ‘ He is ashamed of his father-in-law :’ 4. "grTT-
WPTnftrfff f^fWT. ‘ The pupil (reads with or) acquires learning
from the teacher:’ 5. ‘The pupil is
392
SYNTAX.
averse from (or tired of) reading;’ *t W3TWTT 4 She
(Sita) averse to (or abhorrent of) Ravana.’ When f*r with
xitt prefixed is used transitively, it of course requires the accu-
sative : «fta 4 The hero overcomes the enemies.’
c. The ablative is used to express the site from which any
act is performed : 4 He looks from the palace ;’
4 He rose from his seat.’ Also a place or period
from which distance or time is computed : IJt Ml'SH
4 From the wood the city is a Yojana distant ^rrf#^TT
TRifi h i h 4 From Kartik into the month Agrahayana.’
d. The ablative is also sometimes used to express the
means by which any end is accomplished : trrtr 'SfcHRlTf
I ^ II 4 Committed sin is
destroyed by good acts, by refraining from it, by (from)
visiting holy places, and by repeating texts of the Vedas and
the institutes WPTTfa TT#5i: 4 Their places
in heaven have been obtained by the gods through violence.’
e. The words ^rtT, ^TRTTT, ^7T, TT>jf?T, terms
significant of relative place or time, and compounds ending in
words derived from 4 to go,’ are connected with nouns in
the ablative case : 4 other than Hari ;’
* different from Krishna ;’ WCTsrvrnr4 near to the wood
TT^-prnr 4 without the man ;’ tht: TT5T or rTWTff unfit 4 thenceforth,’
4 thereafter ;’ uIttt unfit 4 from after a year ;’ UTKTgf?: 4 out
from the city ;’ JjTUTit ufft 4 a tree east from the village ;’
1ph Uire*pTt 4 The month Phalguna is before Chaitra
JOT UFUUT^ 4 a city east of the wood ;’ yjTHTTT 4 a
mountain west from the village.’ When ^ and similar terms
denote 4 a part’ of any thing, they require the genitive case :
Uf : UiTUTU 4 the fore part of the body ;’ yfHJHT ntu: 4 the
latter part of the day.’
f. The preposition requires the ablative case in the
sense of 4 limitation,’ either of place, time, events, or things :
4 as far as to the ocean ;’ 4 to the end of
the age ;’ ^tnie: natr: 4 Repeated birth occurs until final
N0UN6.
893
liberation pTST ‘ Brahma extends unto (or compre-
practise mendicity even until liberation from the body.’
g. and Tjft; implying ‘ separation,’ and trfirT signifying
‘ substitution’ or ‘ equivalent,’ require the ablative case :
Tytifiwft ?5^;ini wfit: ‘ Dwelling in Lanka, away or apart from
the world ;’ TrfTf<?*nfwrt ‘ The g°d (Indra) sent rain
away from Trigartta ;’ ^'WnT IjfiT ‘ Pradyumna is the sub-
stitute or representative of Krishna ;’ irfTT <TS‘fTT JTPTR
‘ He gives Masha (pulse) in place of, or return for, sesamum.’
h. Words implying ‘ bound on account of a debt’ may be
connected with the ablative, when the reason, not the debt, is
intended : ^TrMTif ‘ Property pledged on account of a
hundred Jilin £ Like one bound on account of debt
but ^nbr £ Bound by a debt, held in bond, or indebted, by a
hundred.’ Either the instrumental or ablative case may be
used, when the state or circumstance of the person is the
result of some property, not expressed by a feminine noun :
jTT^Pt or ifTWiir: ‘ Bound by or from stupidity =PT jfMbw
nfflW £ Thou goest to the wood through folly.’
i. The words *cff=F, may be used after a
verb, either in the instrumental or ablative case, to imply
‘ degree’ or ‘ manner;’ as, or £ left or liberated
a little ;’ or ^F^TiT * made with difficulty ;’
*fmrrsr ‘ having come with difficulty ofifirq^T or ^.firq7irrUT?r;
£ obtained in some degree.’ When used with a substantive,
they agree with it in case ; as, *rft%?T f^rai jp*: ‘ killed by a
little poison.’ When employed adverbially, and not signifying
£ instrumentality,’ they are put in the accusative neuter ; as,
Trarfrr £ he goes or does a little,’ £ a short way,’
or £ for a short time,’ or * a small quantity.’
j. The particles «TRT, and fnT, govern either the
accusative, instrumental, or ablative case : tiw or
tW 1 ?t £ separate from, or without Rama ;’ fm or tthtt ^PT
or £ without a deity ;’ f^HTT vf WTW. tTRT'm^T
3 E
394-
syntax.
‘ Penitents do not practise emission of breath without destruc-
tion of life 5:*H%TT W £ Pleasure is not obtained
without pain gvi=fi '3'^T g-TT ‘ done without deceit
‘ except the wind.’
292. Genitive case (^Pr. or wg-gr: or irtft). This case is
employed when one noun follows another, expressed or under-
stood, having a different meaning, and to which the latter
intimates some relation ; as, n?r: * the man of the king
HT?rr ‘ the mother of the boy vfVpft tnf £ the wealth of
the rich man tjwpw Pgr: ‘ the quality of the thing.’ The
prior noun may be understood : I HTPrT
1(gfrTfWsTTfTPT ll ‘ Fearlessness, purity of nature, &c., are of a
man born to a heavenly condition they are the qualities,
rnm: understood.
a. Verbal derivatives signifying ‘ the agent’ are followed by
the object in the genitive case ; as, HFT ‘ the creator of
the world ;’ *nrf gTcSg: ‘ the protector of the good ;’ TRcfiFi
f*rnn: ‘ the victor of (over) hell.’ Those formed with g from
desiderative verbs govern the accusative ; TT3TT J3T* ‘ The
king is desirous of seeing thee.’ So do those with gg ; as,
tpfTPT gnpFt *rfc ‘ Hari is the destroyer of the demons but
not when the root is gw ; grrwnrr: gTwg: ‘ the lover of the
\ O
beloved.’
b. Similar derivatives, implying ‘ the act,’ may be followed
by the agent or the object of the act in the genitive :
fgigr ‘ the act of a man ■gT^nrrRT vwt: e the duty of Brah-
mans ;’ gin*: TTT'T £ the drinking of milk pgr ‘ the milk-
ing of kine.’ The subject also may follow the property in the
genitive ; as, g*T: ‘ the speed of a horse ;’ gvg: ‘ ^ie
sweetness of honey.’ When the act is followed by both the
agent and the object, each may be put in the genitive case ;
»TTfT: ‘ the creation of the world of (by) Brahma :’ or
the agent or instrument may take the instrumental case ; 'sprir:
wfggiTOT. A noun signifying ‘ acceptance’ may be followed
by the genitive, implying not only the thing received, but the
NOUNS.
395
person from w hom it is received : Jj'RWT ‘ acceptance of
a gift Tjjft h^rit M ft jj ; ‘ acceptance of (from) a covetous
king.’ A term expressing ‘ aggregation’ is followed by the
objects collected in the genitive : n$rf urn 4 an assemblage of
princes ■qSTRT * *T*mrR: 4 a flock of cattle VH^MwRTpF5c3TT^rlT
4 a collection of wind, water, light, and smoke.’
c. Verbs of 4 speaking to,’ ‘ communicating or representing
to,’ ‘ conveying to,’ as 4 speech and the like,’ are commonly
followed by the person spoken to in the genitive case : TP?? ^
‘ Tell me that ;’ ^fitranfh 4 1 will tell thee ;’ >!INH *
^rftr it TTIT: 4 Tell me, mighty-armed, for thou art thought
of me to be all-wise ;’ M<giwR
* He represented to Chitrasena, and he to (of) Indra ;’ ftnTRT:
^ ?R ‘ Bear news of me to my beloved.’ Instances of
their occurrence with similar terms in the accusative and
dative cases have already been given. "ftt^t, 4 to ask’ for any
thing, governs the object in the genitive : y?n sfi'sra 4 Ask for
firmness ;’ v^PRT ttttth * He asks for wealth.’ But when the
person is designated, it governs an accusative : vnvjf^T ^ •TTK *T
7Tfa*TT^T £ Who do not implore the lord of the world?’ TT^,
‘ to ask,’ may govern the person in the genitive, the thing in
the accusative : ofiTqflcrwn^T* 4 not asking the way from
any one.’ It also governs a double accusative, the person
being one : ^51 <4 ysfff iqi 4 He asks thee after thy health.’
d. The verb 4 to hear,’ governs the genitive case of the
person speaking ; as, ^ spiT 4 Asking, hear of me ;’
*TT?f TTI^JII ofi^rmr: (h) 4 Hear from me, describing it, the road :’
but this is considered as an elliptical form of expression, the
word or some synonyme of words or speech, being
understood. The verb governs also the ablative : ^it^'PTWrT
TRU'm'V ht 4 She will hear very attentive from me.’
e. ^ 4 to be, preceded by it, signifying 4 to have power or
authority over,’ may govern the object in the genitive case :
mrrfirT frrJrTTT M^RITT. 4 The prince has power over
his own daughter ;’ HtTRT tn»TT 4 The king is lord over
3 E a
396
SYNTAX.
the people.’ Verbs expressing ‘ to be stronger than,’ or ‘ to
prevail over,’ govern the genitive : vnwiWV.Hf cfivgr^ ‘ No one
prevailed over him.’ Verbs signifying * to be angry with,’
* to do violence or injury to,’ or ‘ to desire,’ may govern the
genitive : ^ rfcT FT Ftrqir ‘ I am not angry with
thee, O thou who knowest virtue ; thou hast done no wrong
to me :’ XHTT tffHrrPTT ^ ^r^V.jfTT I ^TTTT IPHTT
ll ‘ When a man neither does wrong to, nor
wishes for, all beings, either in act, thought, or speech, he
obtains Brahma’ (final felicity). These latter verbs may also
govern other cases (r. 290./’).
f. frr ‘ to know,’ when signifying something else than true
knowledge, and when knowledge is not a property of the
thing known, governs the genitive case : ^rfnpft sTRlff ‘ He
knows ghee.’ ‘ to have pity on,’ ‘ to be lord of,’ and
"3! ‘ to make,’ implying some particular effort, and verbs signi-
fying ‘ to remember,’ also govern the genitive : ^bTRT
‘ Have pity on the wretched ;’ v»TRT*ft^l7f ’T^T: ‘ The Yakshas
rule over riches ;’ ‘ He prepares the fuel and
water for an oblation ;’ ^TWrnTR e The two
princes have made preparations for coming hither ;’ JTTiT: Rtfk
‘ He remembers his mother
‘ Does any one, being in pain, wish to remember pleasure ?’
7R oS’CfRIj: ‘ Lakshmana thinks of thee.’ In these cases, how-
ever, an ellipse is supposed, a prior substantive in the accusative
case being understood : *?fnpfr 7nri"pT iTFffw ‘ He understands
C-J O \
(the properties of) ghee ;’ e Pity the condi-
tion of the wretched,’ &c. Otherwise these words govern the
accusative : jTR'trf, ?fhTPT 75T^rpfl%, HTctt PTtfrT.
g. jf^r, ‘ to see,’ in the causal may govern the person in the
genitive, instead of the accusative (r. 288. g) : *r HTfftTTqmiTT
"iff =PCT ‘ Pie shewed of (to) his brother those two hands.5
h. Verbs implying ‘ sickness,5 except from fever, govern the
person in the genitive : ^TTOffRrc: ‘ Dysentery affects
the man :’ but w jjr. ‘ Fever affects him.’
NOUNS.
897
i. snt 4 to hurt,’ literally or figuratively, 4 to kill,’ pre-
ceded by f% or tt, or both, 7D7 and ‘ to hurt,’ and fxrtr 4 to
pound,’ when it implies 4 hurting,’ govern the object in the
genitive case : ^kFftWTtnrfiT IT*n 4 The king punishes the
thief ;’ l « ah i+H ; ‘ Remove or destroy thy sorrow ;’ TT^-
*TRT TTfrrr^f^^l fd (TT^firrnTfrT or ) tjn: 4 Rama will destroy
the Rakshasas or wsrufTT 4 He destroys the
outcaste KTf PfRrq *1*1: 4 The elephant grinds the felon.’
If 4 injury’ is not meant, frnt governs the accusative : vftt:
ftTnfi? 4 He grinds the corn.’ Other verbs, signifying 4 to
injure,’ usually govern the object in the accusative : xfftnfi
4 The tiger destroys the traveller.’
j. Verbs signifying ‘acceptance’ may be followed by the
noun in the genitive case, signifying ‘ the donor it xnrn ^~i n h
^'TT^ras^fifTrrT ‘ Let not a Brahman receive (the gift) of a
butcher, an oilman, or a publican.’
k. The compound verb tir=nf 4 to transact business,’ and
■qTrr 4 to deal,’ or ‘ engage in any office,’ govern the word
signifying the terms of the transaction in the genitive : ^ifTFT
W^lPrl or w 4 He sells or buys or deals for, or stakes, a
hundred ;’ 4 Ravana, bringing
thee hither, has trafficked for (or staked) his life.’ So ‘ to
play,’ meaning ‘ to deal’ or 4 pledge :’ ^^lfw>ftTnvrr ‘ He has
played for his kindred and enjoyments.’ But when is
preceded by a preposition, it may govern either the accusative
or the genitive ; or 4 He has staked, or
has trafficked for, his own fortune.’
l. Participles, whether past or future, having a present
application, govern the object in the genitive case : TT$n ^rwnft
or Pro 4 The Brahman is esteemed or reverenced of the
Cv
king ;’ *7 wf sfiT: 4 That which is thought virtue of
(by) the good ^ trpct ttrit 4 He gave the signet,
recognised or cherished of llama ;’ 7TRT c5RT^?T ftfiTT 4 Both
worlds are conquered of or by him ;’ ^7©:
4 (Marked) by the feet of the chief of Rama’s race, praised
398
SYNTAX.
of (by) men.’ Participles of the neuter gender, signifying
‘ site’ or ‘ circumstance,’ have a similar government : tjh'HJ
^ifmf H# rf jrfarf fenf
‘ Sita, having repeatedly inquired after the sleeping, eating,
talking, laughing, staying, going of Rama, dismissed Hanuman.’
(The participles are in fact used as nouns, and are consequently
followed by the noun to which they relate in the genitive).
m. The word ‘ cause,’ ‘ motive,’ or * object,’ follows a
verb in the genitive case : ^ hi %TtT?pTfl3rffT ‘ He follows for
the sake of food ; ’ ?TTr¥lUU< HfWTT: TrreTRl t c He
repeated the praise of Rama, for the purpose of apprising
Maithili.’ It is also used interrogatively and responsively, in
this and in other cases, with a pronoun ; as, %TTt:, TrpTT,
‘ For what reason ?’ ‘ why ?’ ‘ wherefore ?’ TTTJT TfTh, finTT,
riwnirft: , ‘For this or that reason,’ ‘thus,’ ‘therefore.’ Its
synonymes may be similarly used ; as, cfptf urft-
&c. : but they are more usually employed adverbially in
the accusative neuter ; as, fcfi f?rfcr#, and the like.
n. Indeclinable words fonned with the affix ^3^*? govern
the genitive case : ^7T3t‘T*cH‘*U(T: tp?: ‘ The best of
the race of Raghu thinks of thee alone a hundred times of a
day.’ Numerals in a similar sense of repetition have a similar
government: ‘ He reads twice a day.’
o. Indeclinable words, or words so used, being terms of
relative site, may govern the genitive (as well as the ablative)
case : 7TRI fwi^T ‘ Having stood in some manner
before it, (the cloud) 'JU £ Thou art before or in front
of me TT^brf "gwriT ‘ before your friends ?JTTOT TOT: ‘ in
front, or on the east, of the village ;’ or d u l rf
‘ above the tree.’ When such words are formed with ^rr,
they may govern the accusative : or ^etttr ‘ south
of the village.’
p. Words implying ‘ propinquity’ or ‘ distance’ may govern
a genitive case : ITTOT^T ‘ near to the Madhavi
bower ;’ *tt jtwt ‘ she having gone near him ;’
NOUNS.
399
fvpiTTT^ ‘ They alighted near to Damayanti
vpriPT ht: mr: 4 He went far from the city.’ They also govern
the accusative : ‘ Once Rama ram-
bling about from the neighbourhood of the hermitage.’
q. Words implying ‘likeness’ or ‘equality’ may govern
either the genitive or instrumental case : trtt vfTfta-
^fvi^TTrfq ‘ The equal of whom in valour is no one upon
earth svift sfTFT TrrSTT ttt? ‘ Who else is like me ?’ or ^ j^rrr
^TgTFT: -ctif^rf f^"g fanff ‘ The like to thee is not known in
the three worlds ;’ ^TT*. wfi?: TnrPTT: ‘ Devoid of virtue,
(men) are like beasts.’ The substantives TTcST ‘ equality,’ ft^T
‘ resemblance,’ are followed by the genitive only : it ^xtriTTT
TTFST or 7W tt hth: ‘ He has not the equality or similitude of
Krishna.’
r. Neuter or indeclinable nouns importing ‘ benediction’
are followed by the object in either the dative or genitive
case : or ‘ Long life ( be ) of or to
Devadatta.’
s. The genitive case is used absolutely with a participle :
TJTa a'WW ‘ as he was going ;’ frnnrr vf: ‘ as we were looking
on ;’ qwnrnrr: ‘ whilst Vaidharbhi was beholding.’ It
is also used with the auxiliary verb *ttt in the sense of ‘ pos-
session Pw H ‘ there is of me,’ i. e. I have ; vrtet
fw ipjrTT ‘ There is of this person some power,’ i. e. I
have some power.
t. The term governs a genitive case : ^T^oRWUi ttjtrtt
‘ for the sake of a brief dominion.’
293. Locative case (’SrfvpfiPli). This case expresses the
site or receptacle of any object, whether substantial or ideal,
that, in or upon or over which any other thing is situated,
any act performed, any property exhibited, or any notion
comprehended, &c. : wn fwfrT tr: ‘ The man stands on the
ground ;’ ^ frr^: ‘ The lion roams in the forest
■^rreT arsiTli: * The Brahman sits on a mat ;’ prTPTPTW Tj^rfrT ‘ He
boils the rice in a pot ;’ ^TjfrT ‘ He speaks or whispers
400
SYNTAX.
in the ear ;’ pfaft TU ‘ timid in war p&j ‘ fortitude in
adversity ^ l ‘ whiteness in the swan ^Ur+T^lrWTP P
TT^irflT ‘ He beholds spirit in himself.’
a. This case is sometimes used to express the thing or
purpose for which any act is performed, when it is essentially
connected with some other thing, the object of the act :
'sflfiH Tf^rifr ff^r jjfwp i ^rfr’ ^fpr ^tt: ii
‘ He kills the tiger for his skin ; the elephant for its two tusks :
he kills the Yak for the long hair : the musk-deer is slain
for its musk.’ If the connexion is not intimate, that for or
on account of which the act is done requires the dative case
(r. 290. b). The locative is also used when the object is of a
more general nature : p^TT Wf sfp wrWT pwbj ‘As thou art
made by the Creator for acts, perform them.’
b. The locative case is usually required in connexion with
prepositions signifying ‘ being over’ or * upon’ in any manner :
‘ The virtues of Hari are above infinite num-
ber ;’ -sami pfe TP*: ‘ Rama is over the world but both these
may signify ‘ inferiority’ also ; as, TP SJTP * inferior to heroes
TIP P: ‘ The earth is under Rama.’ When ’SrfW is com-
C\
pounded with and the verb implies ‘ subjection,’ it governs
the accusative case : HTPTVPtfupfw ‘ If he
will acknowledge me superior (lit. If he will make me over
him), he shall be appointed to the work.’ In the sense of
‘ superiority’ the ablative case may be also used ; c5T* or
‘ Vishnu is greater than the world :’ also when
‘ peculiar right or authority’ is intended ; wur ’3TT3 sfvrnrf sfpr^
|Tpt HMfP ‘ The right of that (Brahman) to this Sastra
is to be acknowledged, and of no other person.’
c. The words ptv and fnPU are followed by the object in
the locative case, unless the prepositions 'ST'P, pfr;, or pfiT
intervene : PTTrlx Ptv: * pious to his mother ;’ ftnrfit fpPU:
4 dutiful to his father :’ but HTTR ITHT ptp*. TPWTPP fPPU: .
d. The locative case is sometimes used to signify that from
which any result may he expected, in the like manner as the
NOUNS.
401
ablative ; as, fRRT^t (or f^VTT^rnr) vwtTFTOT Ri<5 ‘ In
(or from) the destruction of the sons of Dhritarashfra what
advantage is obtained ?’
e. A frequent use of the locative case is its employment as
the ablative case absolute, in connexion with a participle in
the same case : rtr ‘ I being gone TtfwvtrfH' ‘ that being
so TTSTtrir RHTR ‘ The month Sravana being at hand Rra
STR 'RTS' ‘ A lucky time being arrived.’ More than one sub-
stantive may be thus connected with the participle, when the
latter will agree in number and person with the substantive
nearest to it : RTF5 '^TWIWRRg R ‘ The boy Abhi-
manyu being slain, and the sons of Draupadi (jTRR being
understood.) As mentioned above, the genitive is similarly
employed ; as, or ^fir RIRlJflrT ‘ (Though) his
son was weeping, he went forth (to lead a life of mendicity).’
f. Words signifying ‘ proximity’ or ‘ distance’ may be used
adverbially in the locative case : Trwn sh*0r R1RT c having gone
near her’ (in her vicinity) ; 4 at a distance from the
village.’ These and similar words may be used in like manner
in other cases ; as, &c. mR takes only the
locative case : RRffrral TT>TR FT ‘ Bhaimi was resplendent
amongst (in the midst of) her companions.’
g. The names of asterisms, employed to signify the period
of their being above the horizon, may follow a verb either in
the locative or instrumental case : (or jt^r) RTRTjfRWRt*
TOr (or trr^r) fRR-nia'fT ‘ Let a man invoke Devi at the time
(or rising) of the lunar constellation Mula, and dismiss her at
that of Sravana. If the asterism itself is intended as the site
or receptacle of a planet, the locative alone, of course, is used :
rr RRir: * The moon is in Pushya.’
h. The locative case is used to designate any given period :
TTfW^ RT& ‘ at that time ;’ RTR RRRFT ‘ upon the close
of this speech ;’ RTR s jrfa R RRgT R R5TT ‘ like the
Sthala-padma flower on a cloudy day, neither awake nor
asleep.’ It is also optionally used with the ablative to denote
3 F
402
SYNTAX.
any intervening terra, either of time or space : ^ >TfiT sz|
(or ufpt) WU e Having eaten to-day, he will eat in or after
two days sq (or xnjllrf) c5^T ‘ Standing here,
he pierces the mark at (or from) a Kos.’
i. The words TtftTrT and TrR^i govern either the instrumental
or locative case : qffTrVi ^fwr or 4 attached to Hari tnqT
qfcqqq or TTrCpr Trfwa- 'jflfh^inFrofiT 4 The wife is anxious for her
O >9
absent husband.’
j. The words wqqi and xsjitj govern either the genitive or
the locative case, when not used literally : wqqit or
q»R ‘ intent upon worshipping Hari so ^5R or UVR
4 happy in worshipping.’ If literally employed, they govern
the locative only : yq*r: sr=fi7 4 the bullock harnessed to
the cart cfOTftrr 4 skilful in work.’
k. A noun following either of the words 'JS'pft, ^gx:, wfqqftf:,
<rnrn?:, wrol, TrfrR:, or tnjiT:, is put in either the genitive or
locative case : JTqj or jftq 4 the owner of kine qfqqjT:
or ‘ lord in or of the world ;’ U'Rq or Jjmwmfv-
xrfw: 4 chief in or over the villages fq^UTR or ^TUT^:
4 heir of the paternal portion or *rRrt 4 witness
in or of a suit ;’ ^SfbTW or 'PrfrR: 4 a surety in or of (for)
appearance iffq or qqr UXfft Wbr. 4 the cowherd born amongst
or for cattle,’ i. e. to tend them.
294. Vocative case (qgrtR). This is considered in native
grammars to be not a distinct case, but the nominative
employed in addressing or calling, with a slight modification
of the singular number only. Its use is the same as in other
languages : 4 O Indra, come !’ qfqirtfqT? ttFUTIx 4 Gan-
dhari, rise up !’
ci. The vocative case is commonly used without any inter-
jection ; but it is also frequently employed with one, when,
as above stated (r. 164. a), different particles are employed
to signify respectful or disrespectful address : vft ht: qnrTFrn 4 O
Panclits !’ t qpq 4 Ho, traveller !’
ADJECTIVES.
403
SECTION II.
Adjectives.
295. The adjective agrees with a corresponding substantive
noun or pronoun, expressed or understood, in gender, number,
and case : Tpcij: 4 a strong man TrqTfft ‘ a beautiful
woman ‘ a white umbrella ftnrrf^r 4 like
two mighty lions ; ’ <T
4 He approached the steeds, spare, vigorous, (and) able for the
road.’
a. When a common adjective occurs in a sentence with
more than one noun or pronoun, it may take the plural
number and the prevailing gender, and agree with them
collectively : HrffaTPia 4 I and mine are all
dependent upon thee ^ HTTnftJTO Tpr:
rf "^T *HNu 4 Manu has said, that both
parents when aged, a virtuous wife, and an infant son, are to
be nourished, even if they do a hundred improper acts.’ If
the words admit of the disjunctive copulative, expressed or
understood, the adjective will be put in the singular number,
and agree in gender with the word nearest to it : "SlITT:
cR!f: Tf^H'RT xl cpfw 4 Sorrow, strife, or itching, being yielded
to, augments.’
b. Many words properly attributives are used as substan-
tives : *t^Jt Wrtfr: ** fw'ft ‘ Mortals are
become immortals (or immortal) ; there is no difference what-
ever.’ Most attributives of agency, derived from verbs, admit
of this application ; — 4 the maker of the world,’ ‘ a
deity iti=rRT ifrIT 4 the leader of armies,’ 4 a general,’ &c. ; —
as has already been intimated in considering the cases of the
nouns.
c. Adjectives, when expressing degrees of comparison, influ-
ence the inflexions of the nouns with which they are con-
nected. When they express the comparative degree, the noun
is put in the ablative case : tt 4 There is nothing
3 F 3
404
SYNTAX.
better than wealth ^ 4 Yudhisht'hira is
older than Arjuna.’ When the superlative, the noun takes
either the genitive or the locative case : vrekigg or VT^TTHWf
jrqTVFT: TTrnre: 4 Duryodhana was the wickedest of the sons of
Dhritarashfra.’ The comparative may also be used with the
instrumental case : cfiT ^ JT^TT 4 Who has a more happy
ending than I ?’ *T UtfTrUJW rfr^ ^ m
‘ If he has died who was four times more pros-
perous than thou, Srinjaya, and more virtuous than thy son,
grieve not for thy son.5 The termination of degree may convert
a substantive into an adjective : flrfita: fin: 4 Contentment is
most heavenly.’
d. The adjective is sometimes employed in a comparative
signification, whilst retaining its positive form ; as, TTTRWnt
^fr?T ‘ a heart hard (or harder) than stone or
‘ Maitra is clever (the cleverest) of, or amongst,
the scholars.’
e. either singly or compounded, expresses the super-
lative degree, and governs either the genitive or locative case :
Tin trwr mUri* =M'^H ‘ The cow is the best of
quadrupeds ; gold the best of metals.’ This word may be
similarly used in the neuter gender and singular number in
apposition with nouns in any gender or number, and in con-
nexion with a negative : TCHTOT IT 4 Of
(sons) unborn, dead, or silly, the two first are the best, not
the last TCrft ^ ^ JITRUT 4 One son of good
qualities is better than a hundred blockheads.’
f. Terms implying 4 less’ or 4 more,’ either in quantity or
degree, and used in a comparative relation, govern the ablative
case : 4 less than a hundred 'SFITTT^nr^ 4 more than a
hundred ;’ ^Tjp'nT 4 Intelligence from a lover
is something less than a meeting.’ may also be con-
nected with the noun in the genitive and locative case :
snnfi: irw: 4 A Prastha is more than a Kudava
jTTtn: ^ 4 five months more than those (years).’
PRONOUNS.
405
g. The government of numerals has already been adverted
to (p. 89) ; to which it may be added, that their Taddhita
derivatives may be used analogously to snr, with the invariable
neuter termination, with nouns of any gender and in any
case : TTIT: wr^TTT ^TT: ‘ After that, he had
fifty maiden daughters tpgrsnr mft: fofjfr
‘ Fifty other sons of the Manu were upon the earth.’
SECTION III.
Pronouns.
296. Personal pronouns of the first or second person have
but one gender : those of the third, and pronouns of the other
classes, vary their gender according to the noun to which they
relate, expressed or understood : 4 that man irt TTTt
* this woman 7PT 4 made by that artist.’
a. The optional inflexions of the two first personal pronouns,
*TT, q, «TT, tt:, rt, W, qpr, q:, are not used indiscriminately, but
with certain limitations. They are not to be used at the
beginning of a metrical foot or period, nor in construction
with the conjunctions q, TR, TT, or the expletives q and
nor with a word meaning 4 seeing,’ used metaphorically : TR
■SfT^Tt JTR q s'mfiT'51^: 4 Thy enemies, O king ! they are
still more mine ;’ not W STWq: at the head of the line, even if
the metre allowed it ; not qr and qf with % 4 of
us two, and of you two qft?Pqq 4 May Hari even pre-
serve me,’ not jtt ; ^TPTwi qr qqw 4 Let it be given to us
or to you,’ not q> qj qt qr ; q7qfq*Frq ^ qqr 4 Thy wealth is in
vain,’ not q In these prohibitions euphony is consulted,
and also distinctness. When 4 seeing’ is intended in any other
than a literal sense, the substitutes are not employed : qqwr
RThI^TH 4 He sees thee by his mind.’ When the 4 seeing’ is
literal, either form may be allowed, ffT or «rr, TqT or pqr qjqfrf
4 He beholds me,’ & c. ; q^qq rqrrqqsfgq 4 Let him see thee
without delay.’
406
SYNTAX.
b. These substitutes may not be used after a noun in the
vocative case, being the first in a sentence, unless an epithet
intervene : wtf jth Tprsrwi ‘ O my Guru ! salutation to thee
but jfTL cfrilicVt ?r: c O merciful Hari ! protect us.’
c. The relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in num-
ber and gender : the case is determined by its connexion with
other parts of the sentence : U? iR 'U-riM TRUtt
‘ Let a wase man associate that with that, with which any thing
in the world corresponds UH: TTr§ TfUTUTFSUTfifT >Trfi%
UR TTrf ‘ He is the supreme male, O Partha, in whose
interior all beings abide, by whom the universe is pervaded.’
d. The masculine and feminine inflexions of the third per-
sonal pronoun are not unfrequently used in combination with
the pronouns of the first and second person, or as substitutes
for them, like £ ipse,’ c ipsa,’ in Latin : Rt s^Rfri JTfir 1TTST: ‘ I
(ego ipse) have come to this condition;’ rts^t RlTURT ofNi
‘ I (ego ipsa) am the vilest of women in the world ;’ R
% RTwfRRTR IjfffRR'URT ‘ Do thou ( tu ipse ) console these
thy brothers R TU RURt yrT^TRRT * We (nos ipsi)
traverse this earth in search of Damayanti.’ It is used some-
times without the proper personal pronoun : RT fwTTRlfri? rst
TR ut ‘ Do thou (ipsa) quickly mount either an elephant or
chariot R R7UT TTf^T R%URT Wrfufv iJTTR I ‘ Do thou
(ipse), having gone quickly to the Bahuda river, offer fit liba-
tions to the gods.’ The third personal pronoun may be also
used in a similar manner with a demonstrative pronoun : stf
BlUrtUSeTFr RTf swffff ‘ That very man approaches to an extended
road.’
e. A relative pronoun may be sometimes used in like
manner with a personal pronoun, when the sentence is inter-
rogative : irur fUHTT'rfT sffrRarfR T^fur? ‘ Thus bereft of
my children, who (am) I, (that I should) wish to live ?’
f. The relative and interrogative pronoun, the latter in
combination with the particles firfT or rr, are sometimes used
together to form an indefinite distributive pronoun : TOTUTT UR
INDECLINABLES.
407
‘ by some act or other ; ' itt: ^srf^HfiwiTT ^pun:
qf%m: 4 Whatever acts of enjoyment may be done by a living
man/
g. The relative is sometimes used with the third personal
or demonstrative pronoun to imply a more general sense, and
at the same time to preclude the repetition of the demon-
strative ; as, inn ?nn m*rft sftj nujnnr np ‘ Of whatsoever
Cv O \ C\
man (there is) a meritorious son, (that) man is honoured.’
SECTION IV.
Indeclinables.
297. Adverbs. The greater number of these, as already
observed, are merely nouns in an invariable neuter inflexion ;
most commonly that of the accusative neuter, although other
cases are sometimes admitted ; as, fnt or fntur izrmT 4 Hav-
ing meditated for a long time nfgTTTn
4 The two earrings were begged by the king of the gods, for
the good of thee ;’ tHTRI afinrvf tfJTqjriiTvr ‘ The kings came
for the maiden 4 He kneaded others,
kneading-ly with his hands 4 Indra was rain-
ing, according to the season 4 He dwelt there
privately.’
a. A number of adverbs are formed of nouns in the inva-
riable neuter, compounded with ir^TT ; as, 4 Offer
sacrifice according to rule "grTT nvnurni =Kr5TT 4 Having made
worship as was fitting ;’ 7TSR '^vrtrnfrriT 4 He told him as
it had happened ijxjriJTf^ ^^TiT 4 Let him do according to
his ability.’ f^rfv 4 sort,’ 4 kind,’ becoming in composition fav,
is also used adverbially with ■31?, ifRT and the like ; as, 1TRT-
4 in various ways :’ and so is irf, 4 before,’ combined with
a noun, to express something prior to an act done ; as, UNHrKf
•^irfVd ^rir^fj 4 Being thus addressed in many ways, preceded
by acts of conciliation HiTTR bjjbtT ?HT RiTT 4 Through
108
SYNTAX.
(previous) ignorance, thy cow, O sage, Mas killed by me wf
*twpt ‘ Having been promised by him,
I M ill liberate thee, preceded by an oath.’
b. Many adverbs are also formed from pronouns, or are the
pronouns themselves, in the invariable neuter accusative, or in
some other case ; as, tttt , *riT, wrriT , ‘ wherefore,’ ‘ M'hence
riwif^, ‘ therefore,’ ‘ thence.’ They are frequently
put correlatively, as in a familiar verse in the Hitopades'a,
which exhibits most of them : wmr Sr R WT R i
TR ^ 7JHTSTHH I rH I WW1 ^ TTSTT R rFTT R 7T3 I
o o
rTPr^ rH^UTR^frT l * Whence, and wherefore, and as,
and when, and what, and how much, and where, one’s own
acts are good or evil ; thence, and therefore, and so, and then,
and that, and so much, and there, (the condition of a man)
proceeds from subjection to destiny.’
c. The adverb ‘ thus,’ ‘ so,’ ‘ ita,’ is of constant use, not
only in its own sense, as ‘ having so said,’ ‘ hav-
ing thus heard,’ but to mark a quotation or a parenthesis, or
separate one part of a sentence from another : Vf
‘ He reads the Sastras : this is not the cause : ’ fj?
YT*TT ^RPTT mTR n: ^TT ‘ Indra is the chief king of the
gods : so it has been heard by us :’ ‘ Be
seated : thus they said :’ ^nr gj I £ In this manner
sang the quiristers of the gods:’ ofitsgn^rffrrfTT ^THT
SlTfffT ‘ Who waits (so) ? I am here ; (thus) let him say ; and,
Give your commands ( thus let him speak ) Wift s jr
tt ^TTT'T ‘ Therefore I say, By desire of a bracelet
and so forth. ^ffT in combination with WYTT forms an adverb
of assent, ‘ so be it,’ the verb being understood : TrSngwr
‘ Vidura having said to him, So be it.’
The influence of adverbs on the cases of nouns has already
been indicated. The manner in which they are connected
with verbs Mill be presently adverted to.
298. Prepositions. It is unnecessary to make any further
remarks upon their government, as, whether singly or in
indeclikabi.es.
409
connexion with verbs, sufficient instances have already been
given (p. 99).
299- Conjunctions. The employment of copulatives of this
description requires no particular observation, as they fulfil
their usual offices, and being sometimes omitted, or sometimes
midtiplied, for the sake of emphasis or perspicuity.
a. The copulative conjunction in most frequent use is ^
‘ and which, when it connects words in the same sentence,
connects nouns either in the same cases or in those having a
similar government, and verbs in the same tenses or in different
ones of like purport : TnJJTtfrcfasr W Sirix: ^ HrffWt
‘ Having taken the wives and sons of Pandu, and those two
(dead) bodies, they set out TTWT ^ £ From
his proficiency in the science of arms, and by his intense
devotion ^ ^ fa:*nfbrr
‘ And the harlot was punished, and the cowherd’s wife was
banished, and Kardarpaketu was honoured TRTn^TPTintuJill
‘ Tranquil they consoled her, and said these
words.’ When the sentences are different, they have then-
several construction, although connected by the copulative :
wrftnt: i h ?rrm: xmid-cjute
TTyinr: l ‘ The son of Kuru was left in that wood, and the
Nagas disappeared even as the Pandava was looking.’ The
conjunction is sometimes repeated, either for emphasis or to
imply immediate connexion : ^
£ And they reached the ocean, and Vishnu woke ;’ i. e. ‘ as
soon as.’ ^ is frequently combined with other copulatives,
either for the sake of emphasis or for the convenience of the
rhythm : 7T UHR? |
311^ ^ 1 ‘ He having heard of the science of arms, and
also the heavenly weapons of Rama, fixed his mind upon
them, and also upon the science of polity.’
b. Disjunctive copulatives may likewise combine words in
similar inflexions : TT ‘ Choose the arms
or my person WT ?f?nTT fgr?5 ‘ A man’s
3 G
410
SYNTAX.
self, a son, a friend, a wife, or in difficulty (in their absence) even
a daughter Ttpr? TtFRu? u? trqnnr i w 31^
iTT^W l ‘ That which thou sayest, O rich in devotion,
is the progeny of the benevolent ; but this grief is not to be
removed by a human being.’
c. The connexion of certain of the conjunctions with parti-
cular tenses of the verbs will be subsequently explained.
300. Interjections. These are used sometimes with nouns
in the vocative case, or sometimes in the accusative or dative, as
already intimated. They also occur singly as exclamations.
The following verse from Bhaffi collects some of either kind :
W. W ^TT ? TTTrf?T?nf?r fV3j I Tl fmT. liTfa ? W
faciryPT W. ‘ Ah sad ! O ! alas ! strange ! O mother ! Shame on
the gods ! O father ! Where art thou, O lovely-browed ? Thus
he frequently exclaimed.’ Various nouns and phrases are also
employed as interjections : wv ‘ well done !’ * bravo !’ or
‘ good luck !’ ^mrf ‘ welcome !’ * hail !’
‘ lucky !’ ‘ prosperous !’ and the like : and also others which
are specially employed in offering libations to the gods or
manes, as noticed above.
SECTION V.
Verbs.
301. The different voices in which the active verb may be
conjugated have been already described (p. 115), as well as
the changes to which either may be subjected when a verb is
compounded with an inseparable preposition (p. 276). Besides
those distinctions, and their derivative forms or modes, the
verb occurs also in construction in the passive voice, and as
transitive, intransitive or neuter, impersonal or reflective ; as,
PW: TTjTTrr c Suparha quickly seized the large
serpent ;’ ui^J-UrT *T?Tfrc3: ‘ The vast mountain shook ;’ mnMHf
fiT^n vni>f ‘ The sound of drums is heard ;’ ^rUPn
‘ All beings are supported by householders *HTT
VERBS.
411
4 It is done by me ‘I do or have done fgTn
‘ It is gone by thee ;’ 4 Thou goest or art gone ‘ It
was risen by the moon ‘ The moon rose Trerrarift
»TmH TT ‘ It is not (by any one) deceased or born out of season
=fiTSf 4 The wood breaks ;’ it breaks of itself: THfpS trniH
* The rice boils ;’ it boils of itself. When a verb is not
impersonal, it agrees with a nominative, expressed or implied,
in number and person, as exemplified under the nominative
case of nouns. When impersonal, it may be considered that
a nominative, the name of the thing or action intended by the
verb, is understood, Thus f^n ‘ It is done by thee,’ is
nothing more than the ellipse of the perfect sentence,
ofiwi' 4 The act is done by thee being understood.
The powers of the different tenses have also been already
described (p. 112) ; but their application in construction is
subject to some modifications, which it is necessary to notice.
302. Present tense 75?). This tense indicates
present time, actual or continuous, that which is now, or
which is occasionally or always : ?ri?T SMUtf nfflri 4 At
this moment he reads the Sastra *rra T^T^flT 4 He eats flesh
he does so habitually : -*1 d fV ‘ Here the boys play
either now or occasionally : ^rr TTH^l ! -ri( ni'IrfT 4 The world
lasts until the time of dissolution.’
a. The present tense may also express other modifications
of time, or the absence of any distinction ; as when used with
^rfxi or jfrw to intimate ‘ censure’ or 4 condemnation :’ sfq
»TPCT WrTffT 4 A man even abandons a wife ;’ he either does so
now, or has done or will do it :’ »TTiT rT3*T^T*T
‘ Your reverence even causes sacrifices to be made for SMdras.’
b. The present tense may be used in reply to a question
referring to either past or future time, when not remote :
sfa ‘ When hast thou come ?’ ^ift s^Hm-adlfh or
4 I come, or I have come, now ;’ JTfcrorfH 4 When wilt
thou go ?’ JHIT s*f or um'cnfH 4 1 go, or I shall go, now.’
It may also be used in reply to a question referring to time
3 G 2
412
SYNTAX.
past, when it is preceded by h*J ; as, froTOffi * What hast
thou done ?’ rpj toHh TOT ‘ Verily I perform an action
instead of ^<*|V ‘ I did.’ It may be used in the same way,
it is said, when preceded by H or by ; TOH^liff: ffi ‘ What
hast thou made the mat ?’ H TOfH ‘ I do not make (for, I
have not made) it H TOTfn ‘ Verily I make (for, have made)
it.’ The present tense may be used with a past signification
when connected with HYT ; as, hyt ?T?rfr. ‘ Brahmans
formerly dwell (for, dwelt) here.’
c. The present tense may be used for the future in con-
nexion with the particles HTTO , HYT, H^T, or cff? ; as, ht*
Give him as long as he eats (will eat) h n^TfH HYT
7VTJTO ‘ I go not (I will not go) again to Lanka
as long as I have (shall have) life TOT or stiff xj^Tnfw
‘When do I (shall I) see Govinda?’ It may also be used
for the future when in connexion with a word expressing a
short time to come : 'gilr fen ‘ I die (shall die) after
an hour.’
d. When deliberation or election is intended, the present
tense may be used for the future : fe TOTH ‘ What do I ?’ for
fsR oRftunfiR ‘ What shall I do ?’ toto toy or toht toh -TYnfq
or qftrqfH ‘ Which of these two, or of these, wilt thou choose ?’
cfi h Y^rfH HtTOTO ‘Whom sorrowful do I (shall I) ask?’
It may also be used for the future, when conditional conse-
quence is implied : HT sn 771 frf H Hfe HTfiT ‘ Who bestows food
goes (will go) to heaven.’ And it may be employed in a
future sense with the usual signs of the conditional mood, nfe
and TO ; as, ^q^'fqfe >TRi TOTH: ‘ If the heaven rains, we
sow7 (shall sow) the corn.’ In such a sort of phrase the
future or the past may also be employed. The present may
alternate with the future also, in a similarly constructed sen-
tence, with nfe or 'HT^, when the consequence is expressed by
the imperative: iiamunn WH^afri (or TrmfH^qfw) in TOHnhn
‘ If the teacher comes (or will come), do thou read the Veda.’
e. A more remarkable modification of the present, and one
VERBS.
413
of frequent occurrence, is effected by the addition of the
particle 9?, 'which gives it a past signification. This particle
appears to be derived from the first person plural of the
present tense of the auxiliary verb, wi: ‘ sumus,’ ‘ we are,’
rejecting the Visarga. It is used, however, indifferently in all
the persons and numbers of the verb to which it is attached :
W Tjfvfirc: ‘ Yudhishfhira sacrificed 'srfWuRf-tl w
‘ The citizens ran quickly w ‘ by whom it was
stood.’ It may precede the verb, either immediately or in a
different part of the sentence : j# w ifff WT? ?T
‘ Thou didst not acknowledge, O great king, what
Vibhishana said FT ‘ He said in council what
was good.’
303. First praeterite or imperfect As already
remarked (p. 112), this tense indicates action that has taken
place at any time prior to the current day ; and although it is
very commonly used in a vague manner, yet the past is in
general not absolute or perfect, but implies continuity or con-
nexion with some other action : JTHra^TsrPT ‘ He gave com-
mand (to do something) c He gave alms
as long as he lived the giving was continuous :
■fiTW'tl I J vfiv) unr my ‘ This full moon being passed, he read
the Agni prayers, and sacrificed with the Soma juice these
acts were dependent upon a period not remotely past : rnff
fffrri tpt 1 (
‘ After that Indrajit was seen ascended into the air, striking
the illusory Sita with his sword, the son of the wind spake
to him.’
a. The imperfect may be used in connexion with the pre-
sent tense of verbs implying ‘ recollection,’ if preceded by inr ;
^rfinTRTftr HIT ‘ Thou knowest, Devadatta,
how we did dwell in Kasmira :’ or TR may be dispensed with,
if a connected action is also described ; as, trtIr <+l3uTr ^-H«IU
‘ Thou rememberest we did dwell in Kashmir,
and did eat rice there.’
414
SYNTAX.
b. Either the imperfect or the perfect may be used with
the expletive ? ; ^fir ^ ^PRtTT or ‘ Thus he did also
after STOTT ‘ continually ^TOT«RT?T STO^^TT, ‘ He did continu-
ally.’ They may also be optionally used in question and
answer, if the time be not long past ; as, fss ‘ Did he
go ?’ ^n«3>T £ He did go »RTT*T ‘ Has he gone ?’ rtttr
‘ He went.’ But if the time of the act be remote, the perfect
only is used : 'SitfTT: ^tr tPTPT TO 4 What ! slew Krishna, Kansa?’
rf sHTR R: 4 He slew him.’
c. The negative rt, derived from rtt, may be conjoined
with rt, and attached to the imperfect, to which it gives the
sense of the prohibitive-imperative. When rt? is used in this
manner, the temporal augment ^T is rejected : rtrtvto: ‘ Be
thou not rtrt =Rf7T 4 Let him not do jttrt U'^'tT tjtt 4 Do
not you two weep ;’ RTRT ffiFfT ‘ Do not ye tarry.’ The nega-
tive is also used without the particle rt ; but not in the
imperative sense, although it causes the loss of the augment :
RT ‘ Thou hast not known my disposition.’
304. Second prseterite (trTO fc$?). This tense denotes some-
thing absolutely past : 4 he made ;’ rrtr 4 he cooked ;’ TfTTt
fRRTR R7RT7T TTW tt^rVwr: 4 Krishna, having gone forth from
the city, departed ;’ rilsTOUafi fRjfsrR Ur: 4 Rama killed (the
female demon) called Tadaka 7TRfR: R3TRTRTR fwfjRHfrTTlfi^fR:
4 The Rishi did him honour with particular attentions.’ The
tense may also be used when mental absence or unconscious-
ness is implied : Rsfts? RTOFJTO 4 Whilst I slept, he still
talked.’ It is employed in construction, however, without
much attention to any particular specification of past time,
and alternates, at the convenience of the writer, with both the
imperfect and the indefinite past.
305. Indefinite past (rtrto TR-?). This is properly used
in a general and indefinite manner for time past, whether
proximate or remote : Rf sun? fR7T*l ri ildTrf RRRRT
rrtr i Rpre Rav-nintH »flirr rrrsrttt i 4 He studied
Cv \ \ c\
the Vedas, he sacrificed to the gods ; he made ljbations to the
VERBS.
415
manes, he respected his kinsmen ; he subdued the class of
six (evil feelings), he delighted in regal polity, and utterly
destroyed his foes ‘ Rain was, or it rained, to day
7TT S£T ‘ Having seen her, he was happy
‘ He asked the Rakshasas, Why have ye
awakened me ?’
a. This form of the praeterite, or either of the others, may
be used as well as the present (see r. 302. b ), when preceded
by RTT ; as, ^TRTrHfc? RU fgRT: ‘ Brahmans formerly dwelt
here also RRTRR or rur, as well as RRfRT, as above. It
may be used also optionally with the future or present, when
the conditional consequence of a past action is expressed :
RPRRRHR? £ If it had rained, we had sown the grain.’
b. rt, derived from RTT, is frequently used with the indefi-
nite past, when it gives it the force of the imperative, and
causes the rejection of the temporal augment : rt rrI: ‘ Do
not fear RT 3TR*. ‘ Do not grieve rt hr ‘ Let it not be
RR RRRT: rr: ‘ Never do so again rt RTVRr RR*. RiRT:
‘ Do not give your mind to wickedness.’ It may also be
employed with rt ; as, rt RT ^tstt: ‘ Do not go.’ It is also used
in the same manner with another negative, in an affirmative
sense : RT flRt R ‘ Do not not-kill (i. e. kill) my foes.’
There are examples, however, especially in the older writers,
of the use of this negative with the indefinite past, in which
the augment is retained ; as, RT fRRR*' xrfTTST TRRRR: ‘ Do not
thou ever obtain reputation, O barbarian ?’ Ramayana : and
when the verb is compounded with a preposition, the augment
of the imperfect and the indefinite past may be retained ; as,
r Rt rt RTRRR ‘ Let not faith depart from us Manu : RT
RRR^TRTRRT: ‘ Do not be subject to wrath Mahabharata.
On the other hand, it is rejected in compounds also ; as,
R1RRTRT: WHVrRIvj ‘ Do no disrespect to thy own soul.’ The
difference is explained by affirming that a different negative,
RT not RTF, is employed ; the former not requiring the elision
of the augment. It, and not rtt, is also said to be used with
416
SYNTAX.
other tenses ; as with the imperative, *tt HTJ, or the future,
*TT ‘ Let it not be.’
306. Definite future ('HH^itH <57). This tense indicates
future time, defined either expressly, as in the example above
given (p. 1x3), or by some circumstance or event not immedi-
ately proximate, or as it is expressed, not of to-day ; as in the
following example from Bha^fi : WHU.'aNxfl:
ftnr 1 HTin:: Hfyssi -rffST ^ HTTT: xrt 1 ‘ Our mothers, having
seen thee, shall be delighted, and shall ask after the welfare
of us both, along with Maithili ; and Bharata will rejoice
exceedingly.’
a. This form of the future is used optionally with the inde-
finite future or the present in certain phrases or combinations ;
as with or ; '^t or WlifilT, WTiTT or *>q l*-q fri,
‘ When will he eat ? Where will he remain ?’ also with the
interrogative implying c preference ;’ fsfi cfiHT or ^fl7TTf« or
e What or which wilt thou choose ?’ also when it
denotes the consequence of a conditional act ; ^TitT or
7T imrr or ‘ He who shall give alms will go
to heaven.’
307- Indefinite future (<s<r %xt). The time expressed by
this tense may be either immediately or remotely future :
S?T ‘ I shall not be seen to-day ;’ JT'fl.'airfifT TT
‘ Since my sons are slain, I will die or conquer.’
a. When connected with verbs implying ‘ recollection, this
tense may be used with a past signification ; as, wtftx
7ft^f ‘ Rememberest thou, Krishna ; we shall dwell
(for, we were dwelling) at Gokula:’ also optionally, when one
action is dependent upon another ; as, xniftr
‘ Rememberest thou, Devadatta ; we dwell
in Kashmir, and dressed (shall dress) rice there :’ otherwise
the imperfect may be used, as above.
b. It alternates, as above remarked, with the definite future
after cr^t and ^rff ; also when ‘ choice’ or ‘ consequence’ is
signified, or when an act contingent upon some event is
VERBS.
417
predicated : ?T^g"Pt'orfiT VTsi TS=m*T: ‘ If it shall rain, we will
sow the corn.’
c. The indefinite future is to be used where dispatch is
signified ; as, hit: irfhf irfirotfcT ‘ The messenger will go swiftly
also when continuous action is implied ; HM-nOws ^TWfrT ‘ As
long as life lasts, he will give food also when an act is
followed for a certain time without interruption ; tptTRTTFTTTr-
JTTfa^l Ht^TJTT^rwrnTW TTWH ^ ‘ When this future day of
new moon (is), on that (day) he will read the prayers to Agni,
and sacrifice with the Soma juice.’ It is used in like manner
when ‘ after,’ is employed to denote immediately subsequent
place or time : ift srmi^T rpfT^t Hnwf^FSWTiT 7TRT ^ri-
^rrer^nrvf ‘ This is the road to be travelled by to Pafa-
liputra, (and having gone) subsequently by that of Kausambi, we
will there eat food :’ ifr sxf Htmpfl hft iTHWrrwnrwr*T<?
HrajTqiH? ‘ When the future (next) year (is arrived), then
immediately, on the full moon of the month Agrahayana, we,
entering upon devotion, will study (the Vedas).’ If tJT*T be
used instead of the definite future may be used ; tnrrpj-
5IWIWH HTUirTTWH or ; and the latter only is to be
employed if days or nights be specified ; as, ift stt jtttt
(WTO warriqHTwt £ When the future (next) month
(is arrived), and fifteen days after it (have passed), then we
will study.’
d. When disbelief, doubt, or intolerance is signified, and
especially if put interrogatively, the indefinite future may be
used optionally with the potential : it TWliJinfa, or H inril
fpT^rfx or firf^iqffT ‘ I cannot believe, or I cannot
endure, that you revile Vishnu,’ i. e. either should or shall
revile or have reviled : ofil ■srrRT or jrfd or
‘ Who or which may or will revile Hari ?’ ofi ytTcH n =1 I *
or irmfwffr ‘ For what Sudra may or will your reverence
perform sacrifices ?’ If preceded by the compound particle
fWaSY? or by or its synonymes in these senses, the future
only, not the potential, is employed : tt HTR
3 H
418
SYNTAX.
^ TTnrftnqfrT ‘ I cannot think it possible your reverence will
sacrifice for a Sudra:’ also qrftrT, Hqfrt or fwff, *rqrq
xrnrf-M'ojftT ‘ Is it (possible, can it be) your reverence will sacri-
fice for a Sudra?’ The same tense may be used optionally
with the potential when ‘ possibility’ is admitted or expected :
mgqw (or HTPT £ I think it possible your
excellency will eat ;’ qrq TWTfTft rmr qwrofitifTq nqq: i W
mg’Tfw MWTlfqi ^ f <<*,**} frf i £ By whom is it supposed, that in
battle Raghava will cut to pieces the limbs, or scatter the
members, of Kumbhakarna ?’
e. The indefinite future is used with exclamations of
astonishment, if any conditional particle, as qw or trfe, be not
inserted : qqq "^^fTT ‘ Wonderful ! the blind man
will see (can see) Krishna.’ It may also be used with the
particles TiT and ’'tfq, when implying ‘ doubt ;’ qq qfinqfq
‘ Will the staff fall (or not) ?’ ^rfqvnqfrT qrt ‘ Will he shut the
door?’ and must be used with ’5TF5H when it signifies ‘ cer-
tainty’ or £ capability ;’ qrqj qftpqfq £ Certainly
Krishna will kill (that is, is able to kill) the elephant.’
308. Imperative (fqf*r?5Tq). The uses of the imperative
tense require no particular illustration. It has, however, a
first as well as a third person ; to which, ‘ command’ or
£ injunction’ is not applicable : but as the powers of this mood
correspond with those of the potential, and consequently com-
prehend * permission’ anti £ capability,’ as signified by ‘ may,’
£ let,’ £ can,’ there is no difficulty in understanding their appli-
cability to any person indifferently, q Tpqqv 'qtT
K qfq: £ Let this be thy determination, I may not cause the
dreadful destruction of the servants :’ qfq <*ldjgp*r<5 q qjqT
qq^ zjqq ‘ Be thou my messenger ; and having gone, say
(thus) to Raghava.’
a. The imperative is very frequently used in the third per-
son singular of the passive, either with a nominative expressed,
or with the agent in the instrumental case expressed or under-
stood ; in which latter case it is used indefinitely : qrpftqin
VERBS.
419
4 Let the queen be brought Rt Rfi TrfirSTrr: ^WT 4 Ho
Panclits, be it heard,’ i. e. TJRTlfH: ‘ by you f%*nri 4 Let it be
done ^urRjffT ‘ Let it be come,’ i. e. 4 by some one
Rtw RwrrtTRfT. ‘ Sita, let it be gone hence,’ i. e. by thee, or 4 Go
thou away ;’ tyi: RfNwT 4 Let the carriage be stopped,’ or tvrt
Rjfanri ‘ Let it be stopped by the carriage JpxrRTTRTSTT: 4 Let
all hopes be dismissed,’ w: 4 by them.’
b. When any act enjoined is to be done after a short time,
the imperative may be used in relation to the future, the
present, or the potential : (^TFrsf?T
or ’RTRRTfr) JR 4 If the teacher shall (does or may)
come after an hour, do thou (then) read the Veda.’ Or it
may be used where time shortly past is implied, without any
condition, when rt may be combined with it, '3i|f R?r#TTr
rt R^ fTJTTT: 4 After an hour be mistress of the earth.’
c. The imperative may be used optionally with the poten-
tial to express 4 wish ;’ ^STTR RTTR R^ftfT or R^f ‘ I wish your
worship may, or would, eat.’ So with =fiTR^T, 4 1 desire,’
4 I beg,’ or other synonymous verbs.
d. When desire to have any thing done that should be
performed is expressed, rt is used with the imperative : ^
crr?RrsflTxpT RT 4 Do thou cause the boy to read ;’ 4 do thou
teach him.’
e. The third person singular of the imperative of the sub-
stantive verb is often used with the particle tt# 4 so,’ 4 thus,’
absolutely, to signify 4 assent ;’ as, frd RTiT, WAR, 4 So be it
RWffRffT TT ^THT *lfWfH'{*. 4 And Yudhishfhira also thus
replied to him, So be it.’
f The negative RT is prefixed to the imperative sometimes,
with a sense equivalent to that of the present tense : RT RTiT
4 there is not ;’ RT ^ W fRTJtf: 3Tc3"R rrrNh ■qrfei^ 4 There is not
(or may not be) any crime in thee, O prince, killing thy foes.’
'
g. TTTrT is substituted for the terminations of the second
and third persons singular of the imperative, when used in
a benedictory sense : R^rilrjf^^T JRR7T ^%3RfR 4 Mayest
3 H 2
420
SYNTAX.
thou be undivided from thy husband henceforth in thine own
dwelling.’
309- Potential mood f<3T).
The senses of the potential mood, as detailed in the citation
from Panini, have been explained above (p. 1 14). It is suffi-
cient here to add a few examples of its application.
T[in^Ft 5R: ‘ Let a man pleased make the Brahmans
happy, and feed them deliberately WRrgW'
‘ Therefore let a man of fortitude neither rejoice nor grieve tt
wrwrf! wfft' ?r 1 ?r t 1
‘ Let not a wise man disturb a cow drinking, nor tell of it to
another ; nor, having seen a rainbow in the sky, let him point
it out to another.’
«. The potential mood is very commonly employed as the
conditional or subjunctive mood in combination with particles
indicating 4 condition,’ ‘ contingency,’ ‘ alternative,’ ‘ uncer-
tainty,’ ‘ doubt,’ 4 astonishment,’ and the like ; as, ^rf?, '%W,
‘ if ;’ ‘ as,’ 4 since ;’ 4 as wr 4 as,’ ‘ so,’ ‘ that
4 where,’ chowT 4 when 'WTff ‘ ever ^rftr 4 although,’
4 since ;’ or th or TiTTfq ‘ whether ;’ f4. ‘ w hat cjrsR;
‘ how ;’ * wonderful &c. RTF# ff TT^TT Tffarif# FJTlft ff TJ
‘ If punishment does not protect, people may not recognise
property fror^ifOTTuT: THTT: 4 If there were not
punishment in the world, the people would perish :’
— TTrfT^T *n«pf WYrsrr: fsrtprw 4 O grief! that, having done
manly deeds, thou (shouldest) abandon glorious fortune irg
7RT# crop ff 4 I did not believe that thou couldest act
thus :’ wrnrR^rR-fxt wr ^ 1 ^ ^
ift’CT 1 ‘ So that I may not be also in other races a
destroyer of my kin, I will not eat, nor partake in any way of
drink TRT JT'aiTT TJF TO T?T3R l ^ TT^T iTRTf^
TTffT 1 4 When he may judge his own army in good condition,
and that of his adversary in the reverse, let him march against
the enemy :’ 3:^ *7 tt »nrj HTO 4 He who is
distressed by the grief of others can never be happy : TRT<?3TT:
VERBS.
421
^rr^&T ‘ That such persons should revile Krishna,
astonishing !’ or irf^ may be used with similar exclamations ;
fsp? xif^ *ff svffafftr ‘ Surprising ! if he read.’ T?T and may
be used to imply 4 doubt of will’ or ‘ capability Tit or ?afti
‘ Will Hari destroy sin ?’ * Will he be pleased to
do so ?’ ^rftr fhft: frrarnr 4 Can he indeed break a moun-
tain with his head ?’ ‘ Why should I grieve ?’ etrsr,
when used reproachfully, may be connected with the present
or the potential : f# v**T ?T5r: or ‘ Howr canst thou, or
dost thou, abandon virtue ?’
These particles may be also understood, or dropped alto-
gether, when the condition can be expressed by the use of
correlative terms, or by a preceding phrase : ^FPTT ?t:7r Tfhtf
4 (Since) Ravana carries (may carry) off Sita,
(so) the binding of the great sea may occur nriRTW W fqTrfx
fViHriT 4 But if the father be living, let him offer liba-
tions to those prior to him.’
b. The potential mood is also used to intimate * fitness,’
‘ propriety,’ or ‘ capability R ofi'ari 4 Thou shouldest or
oughtest to marry the damsel w HTTtrr?TjT ‘ He may or can
carry the load wwrftr 4 Aided by Karna
and Arjuna, I could conquer even Indra.’
c. Verbs signifying 4 to wish’ or 4 desire’ may use the
potential optionally with the present : or 3«3fiT 4 He
wishes to go WTmf^jfnrg cfiFTSTT or =BT*TO7r 4 He desires to
embrace her.’ The object of the wish may also be expressed
in the potential, instead of the infinitive ; as,
4 He wishes he may or might embrace her.’
d. The potential often takes the place of the imperative,
with a similar signification ; TTWr^Tit *1^: 4 Having taken
w ater, thou mayest go,’ i. e. go thou : especially w hen pre-
ceded by W5i?T 4 to order’ or 4 enjoin ;’ Tgrrufafivn:
4 If the teacher come, I desire that thou read.’
e. The potential may be used with a present or future sense
when time not remote is specified : UTft: wn: 4 The
422
SYNTAX.
time is come that thou perform thy penance
‘ Let him sacrifice after an hour.’
f. In didactic and injunctionary sentences the potential is
constantly employed without a nominative expressed, referring
either to a noun previously enunciated, or to such words as
‘ some one,’ ‘ any one,’ ‘ a man,’ or the like, understood :
■srrs^f wf TTSjfpTT'T i *m»rFr ^nrir i
‘ Let a man preserve his wealth against misfortune ; but his
wife even by his wealth : let him even preserve himself by a wife
even, or also, by wealth ua <ftxrTT 4 Let
(one) not a niggard give to the Brahmans that which may be
agreeable to them.’
g. The potential is used in a future sense to signify the
conditional result of an act which a person may perform :
*T 2rf ^W^TWrfTfT: I ^^37 H
7TTTTT i 7T «K}!Uf I 4 Whatever Brahman
may read attentive this Birth of Skanda, or may cause it to be
heard by Brahmans, or may hear it repeated by a Brahman,
he, having obtained abundance and happiness, may obtain the
heaven of that divinity.’
310. Benedictive mood (r?5 j^USTm). The term by which
the power of this mood is defined imports 4 blessing but as
there is also connected with it the notion of 4 wish,’ and as
this wish or desire may concern oneself as well as another, the
term 4 optative ’ would better indicate its character ; as,
^TT fwjnpivT YTTOTi-ii i f'-TJfkrw ^ i 4 May
the gods direct us, so that we may either conquer such enemies
as Ravana or die.’ It is used sometimes optionally with the
imperative in a benedictory sense : Tfl^rnt or 'jflTrT
4 May your excellency live long.’
311. Conditional mood (f?5T cgT). This mood is
considered as the equivalent of the potential when 4 cause’ is
indicated as well as 4 consequence,’ or when one act or condi-
tion is contingent upon another act or condition, and whether
the cause and consequence be future or past. Like the poten-
VERBS.
423
tial, it is commonly used with the same conditional particles,
xrf<T, ^TT, &c., as specified above ; as, H^fE^HfrnrrT rH?T
wfVnjTT ‘ If there shall be abundant rain, then there will be
plenty;’ *T HUT ?Ft sHf^rtqTT TTrft sh^HW £ If he had been
seen by me, he should have been devoured (by me).’
a. Although the same notion of ‘ contingency’ prevails, yet
this mood is also used analogously to the potential, to signify
‘ uncertain consequence,’ ‘ doubt,’ £ suspicion,’ ‘ possibility,’ £ in-
quiry,’ and the like ; as in this exemplification of its application
from Bha{t'i : tt^ ftrr: *ftrri ^wrfrr: i
O o Cs
jTTrHHTTQTfT Pvn 14 I Hl^iffUT^ rfdH SJdHTHHT I
HHTHHH'^nTH^N' IIH TfirTTf^R^HTH II £ O Rama, unjustly thou
wouldest entertain suspicion of Sita ; for although the vile
enemy warmly solicited her, and sometimes menaced and some-
times vaunted his own magnificence, yet she, pure of mind,
would never bestow a thought upon him.’
b. The conditional mood, like the potential, is employed with
exclamations of surprise, but they require the addition of
or ; as, ^rpsr&i ira or HH' £ Strange ! that
a woman should in any way abide in thy evil opinion.’ When
used interrogatively, it requires an interrogative adverb ; as, fas
•TTT.I HTHHT7HTH HPTtt^TrT HTTH*T ‘ What ! do you not know your-
self to be the unborn Narayana?’ WTHT^RTT fr-My IHT fafi fafiH-
ciXTqxn: iFo5 £ She being dead through fright, what then ? what
benefit wouldest thou obtain ?’ In the following example many
of the particles with which this mood or the potential may
be connected are illustrated : H?KT*T 1
HHlfvi srnj rrmfn fas HT^HHHtf?7T 1 £ Mighty king ! as what-
ever and however thou mayest have (or hast) accomplished
in the destruction of the demons, what ! wouldest thou not
ever thus also bring (or have brought) thy desired purposes
to fulfilment?’
312. Infinitive mood. This, as shewn above (r. 229), is
considered to be a verbal derivative noun, and is attached in
the invariable accusative apparently to a verb ; as, ^fnrfH^TfH
424
SYNTAX.
‘ I wish to hear nrnfnrprf ftr ‘ Thou art able to tell ; nWfV'ot
n vflffi'd’ ‘ I will not endure to live.’
a. Like other verbal derivatives, the infinitive may exercise a
similar government as one of the moods or tenses of the verb
from which it is formed : itfvR ^rf^TTT JTnJ nniTWr:
‘ They resolved to go together to Draupadi’s marriage elec-
tion.’ It cannot as a noun, however, admit the difference of
active and passive voices, and the effect of the latter is given to
it by its association with participles, and especially with the
future participle of the verb 4 to be able,’ in connexion
with the object ; the agent, when expressed, being in the
instrumental case : s^r nnfir 4 Now that
blockhead is to be conquered n R'THHH fnnlwn nrf
(^TufUfT r^TTT ‘We are not to be intimidated to-day by thee
with this terror nrei -5^ 4 How is the enemy to be
seen s?r SPTTOi^nT nfr ‘ Nor can these gods,
sages, and progenitors, be thus now nourished by thee.’
b. The infinitive is also used after nouns and participles ; as,
TOT *rM ‘ time to eat cfiir* n*rsh 4 able to do ;’ TJT? xnr: ‘ gone
to see but these are evidently elliptical phrases, in which
the verbal copulative is understood ; ort?s! sfnr 7n?j ‘ It is time
to go.’ The same may be said of the like combination of the
infinitive with adverbs or adverbial nouns ; as, n ^ITn fvr?rf
$T<| ^ 4 (It is) not right, O princes, to slay again
a slain enemy TrnrnflTOT TOfujjTO^ 4 Palaces (are) fit to be
compared to thee am rain: nmn?: n Tnftfnrj ‘ There-
fore Yoga is the desired object of the eminent ; but it (is) to
be made known with difficulty.’
SECTION VI.
Derivative Verbs.
313. The derivative forms of the verb are not of common
occurrence, with exception of the causal, which is of very fre-
quent use. As this must from its nature be a transitive verb,
Derivative verbs.
425
it will govern an accusative case, either singly or doubly, as
exemplified above (r. 288. g). The following are a few additional
illustrations of its use : ^fiT OTT taTTnfT ‘ We
are called severe ; this we apprise you’ (cause you to know) ;
fWPTWfw ‘ The queen represents ‘ Nay, she
commands ;’ 7T nri fw^fq-arfar 5:^?^ ‘ Those evil dis-
posed ones will alienate thee from me’ (will cause to separate
from) ; rff igfk: Tjn^rrsTT ‘ Let the king cause her to be
devoured by dogs *n§r?f w qTTlftnqfrr fwq?HT 3TOT. ‘ The enemy,
being valiant, shall strike off thy head’ (cause it to fall) ;
^TRTTRmra TTqfepTT: ‘ He caused the women, with their
attendants, to be brought ‘ He did not cause
him to be disunited from his life’ (he did not put him to
death).
a. The desiderative form is also from its nature transitive,
and has the government of transitive verbs : Trrf?,IT5pT qt WRI
OTOTstott otothw 1 u* wfqfq^jpftsnr 1 ‘The monkey
(Hanuman) did not wish (or would not) look at the dance, nor
hear the singers, desirous of remembering Rama, suffering the
pain of absence.’ This form of the verb implies ‘volition’ as
well as ‘ wish ;’ as, WPOTOTT iPJT WS- W ‘ Thou wilt
not give my father’s share, being asked for by me, O fool.’ The
desiderative form of ‘ to hear,’ implies not only ‘ to wish to
hear,’ but ‘ wait upon’ or ‘ obey ;’ that is, to wish to please by
service : OTWOTin mfrTw wtft snqqff 1 w wots: ww
^TOTT 1 ‘ He who until the end of his life waits upon his Guru,
goes assuredly to the eternal mansion of Brahma.’
b. The frequentative mode expresses either ‘ repetition’ or
‘ intensity’ — the doing of an act repeatedly or energetically —
but it is of very unfrequent use in either : ^TfofiqiT SW TTTnqUT-
^Trfsryfqr ‘ They stand, like Chatakas, crying aloud repeat-
edly i ww qfUOTWWi OTT*. ‘ Again the bird eagerly assailed
him ;’ WOT qnfe?W: ‘ He cut the wings of the bird
to pieces.’ With verbs of motion this form may also imply
‘ going crookedly’ or ‘ badly ;’ as, WTOTiWW ‘ The lame man
3 1
426
SYNTAX.
goes awry.’ With certain verbs it also intimates * defect’
or 4 impropriety as, wraw: 4 The Brahman prays
hypocritically.’
c. From a desiderative verb others may be formed ; as,
far-MRfWTT ■qrwrffT ‘ He wishes to cause (the people) to hear
the Puranas rrrav: irRfqqfa ‘ Why dost thou wish to cause
me to go downwards ?’ A desiderative may not be formed
from a desiderative, unless some other mode intervene ; as,
suf^R *nt: ‘ The blockhead wishes to cause the
C\ Cv
desire of frequent existence in the sage.’ And in this manner
the forms might be compiled without end ; but the practice is
not adopted.
d. The conversion of substantives into verbs is not unfre-
quent, and depends apparently upon the pleasure of the writer.
A few examples of the use of such verbs in construction will
be sufficient to illustrate their application :
tn3!3Tsf<i "^TrPTW ‘In a spot destitute of trees the castor oil
plant becomes a tree 5'^ffT ^rr^n;: ^ffrT: ‘ A
burning coal burns the hand ; when cold, it blackens it TtfT-
31 ^=hl PiTrr s ¥TT7?r: ‘A minister who is made the
companion of (a king’s) private amusements, if active, kings it
himself ^FRfftr ‘ The mind of the
Cv
virtuous oscillates (or swings) by the speech of the wicked
I ^rfbnr: ‘ All men are in sorrow ; he
alone is happy :’ nTHfst’CtTT w. ‘ If the god
of love should see thee, he would not grieve much (for his
absent bride) :’ rrrk wtfst htftt: TitTW
*pft ^ FfwrqTT ‘ This maiden is the hunter, her eyebrow is
her bow, her glances are arrows, and my heart is the deer.’
SECTION VII.
Participles.
314. Those participles which are declinable are, like adjec-
tives, inflected in the gender, number, and case of the noun
PARTICIPLES.
427
with which they are connected in construction. Both the
declinable and indeclinable may exercise the same government
as the verbs from which they are derived.
315. The present participles active of transitive verbs ordi-
narily govern the noun in the accusative case : wfpT or Ws}H!i:
pJSTT ‘ Brahma is making (or makes) creation
‘ The pupil is reading the Vedas ^
‘ The woman (is) decorating herself wgWTrfTT 4 They
two (were) crossing rivers ; ff fwfa'WTRTCR'rad 4 They search-
ing that hermitage W TF5 wfrTTRJW fwwn?TW: ^^TrT ‘ He,
considering the strength of Bhimasena, was consumed (with
envy).’ The participle present of ffw, ‘ to hate,’ optionally
governs the genitive case : or Jiewf f|rw^ 4 Hari (is)
hating (of) Mura.’ The participles of verbs of remembering
may also govern the genitive ; as, fit or im W'tO ‘ remembering
(or thinking of) me.’ The present participle may be used
with particles in the sense of the potential mood; as,
■qvn yu{ | w-cqww ‘ Listen, that so acting (for, that you may
so act that) you will not fall from duty.’
a. The present participle of the passive voice involves no
notion of past time, but implies the continuance of the state
or thing suffered. Thus iff WTWT WWT 4 He also
being thus bitten by the reptile,’ signifies that the biting
has not ceased, but is going on : so ri I rH M* HVHIHRf
‘ When he perceived himself being devoured
WipTfaTEffa: 4 Being pursued by numerous guards.’
316. The participles of the perfect tense are not of very
frequent occurrence ; they follow the general rules relating to
concord and government, and are not unusually employed
without a verb in the sense of the perfect tense : w frTT^JTiTW-
TnrqT frpT'iHfa'g: 4 They desired the death of the animals that
were near (them) ;’ F^tifqTPTPFr ‘ Thou art arrived ;’ wet fww-
w TWWR 4 He (was) seated (or sat down) on a
couch in the presence of the destroyer of Kansa.’
317. The indefinite past participles are of much more
3 1 2
428
SYNTAX.
universal use than the preceding, and bear an important part
in the formation of sentences : they take the variations of
inflexion according to the noun or pronoun with which they
are connected, expressed or understood.
a. The active indefinite past participle governs the same
cases as its verb, and may be used absolutely, with the
auxiliary verb implied : rTrft c Then Sankara
said to Rama ?riTPT 4 Krishna slew the demons.’
b. The passive indefinite past participle is ordinarily con-
nected with the agent in the instrumental case ; <|7TT
riVrTT rftrTT ‘ Sita, seized by Ravana, (was) conveyed to
Lanka but in some cases it may be optionally connected
with the agent in the genitive ; as, TT$r: or TT5TT *Trft f^H: ‘ The
Brahman is respected by or of the king or fprfaj f*T?n
‘ This earth is conquered of or by him.’ It also governs the
agent in either case, when signifying the site or subject of the
action ; as, or Tpr: srnriT ‘ This was (the) slept of or by
them i. e. the place where, or the time when, they slept :
or TTRH rfrf ‘ This was (the) gone of or by him i. e.
the time or manner of his departure.
c. When derived from neuter or intransitive verbs, this par-
ticiple may be used with a noun in the place of the past tense
of the verb : Tprfrrft IT5TT TTSpri ‘ The king of the llakshasas
wept ;’ ^jtt Jpft stj ‘Ah ! he has died (or is dead) of himself.’
d. The indefinite past participle of verbs of motion, and of
others already specified (r. 241. £), takes an active sense, and is
used in place of the past tense, governing a noun in the same
manner as a transitive verb : JTPJTf 4UPT: T^'OqP^
riTT: ‘ Hiranyaka entered his hole ; the crow went to his own
nest :’ Tf PTtpr PTC ‘ That hero is not to be
mourned (who is) departed to death in battle.’ Other verbs than
those above enumerated, which bear analogous imports, may also
be used in this manner: UP?: ‘Alas ! I have incurred
impurity UT 1PJ1TT irstfguf? 4 She bore an excellent offspring.’
The time expressed may also be indefinite ; as, ^fspUT-
PARTICIPLES.
429
irrfVtTT: ‘ Kings (affecting) dwelling in the south.’ The past
indefinite participle of intransitive verbs may also be used to
denote time indefinitely present or continuous ; as, TTfinTTO
TOt TOT ‘ At the end of his day Brahma sleeps.’
e. The past participles of verbs signifying ‘ to speak,’ ‘ to
ask,’ and the like, when used with a masculine or feminine
noun, imply ‘ spoken to,’ ‘ inquired of,’ referring the object to
the noun with which they agree, and being followed by the
agent or speaker, when specified, in the instrumental case : ^
Hf^r: ‘ That sage thus spoken to ;’ TO mfTOT TTT 4 She
addressed by him ;’ ^ w: y?: ‘ He inquired of by them.’ The
participle may also govern the matter of the speech, like an
active verb, in the accusative : sfig ‘ Thou art
spoken to, a speech by Krishna ;’ fiTOTTTO TO <fTO-
TOTO ‘ Thus spoken to by the king of Sindhu, a heart-
agitating speech.’
f. The indefinite participle past is often used for a noun,
the noun or pronoun being understood : tor
‘ Punishment watches over those who sleep ;’ topi, ‘ people,’
understood : trgfrq^vr ‘ subsisting by ripe and unripe
lETTO, ‘ fruit,’ understood. In the neuter gender it is used,
not only as an abstract noun (r. 241. /), but absolutely or
adverbially : toIts ‘ as it is said :’ TOT^TT 4 so it is done ;’
TOTTO5 4 as it is proper,’ ‘ fitly,’ ‘ rightly.’
y. Both the past participles indefinite are commonly used
with the different tenses of the auxiliary verbs "TO and w,
forming in fact compound tenses, which might be comprised
within the scheme of conjugation with as much, or rather
perhaps with as little, propriety in Sanskrit as in other lan-
guages ; as, TOTsfrrr or TOTIirfar ‘I am or have gone;’ TO
"TOT TOT s to, TOTOTHT, TO=TT*7TO, ‘I was or had gone;’ TOf
HfTOTfw? or or TOTOT HfTOTTO 4 I shall be or have
gone;’ TOT or TO TOT TOif ‘I may be or have gone,’ &c. ;
TOTOT 1 HU ‘ I have done improper acts ;’ TOf to
HfTOfiT TJf?: ‘ Rama will be gone to-morrow to the forest ;’
430
SYNTAX.
mgru: c-sf nfTciffi ‘ Thou shalt have obtained unequalled
fame.’ When used alone, either absolutely or transitively, it
may be inferred that the form is elliptical, and that the verb
is understood ; as, irfwf shtt ‘ Hirahyaka was or
had entered his hole.’
318. The indefinite past participles indeclinable are also of
very extensive and important application. They are especially
used to suspend the close of a sentence, acting at the same
time as copulatives, and connecting something which precedes
with something which is to follow ; as, mt: ‘ Having
so spoken, he went away ^ ‘ (I) having
long considered, it was done by me.5 They may be repeated,
to imply a succession of actions preparatory to some final one :
Tpfruiifri'ifi ^rrfc^nr^ ‘ Having thus discoursed (to
them), treated (them) with hospitality, and embraced them, he
sent (them) away.’
a. As ordinarily employed, these participles undergo and
exercise the same government as the tenses of the verb ; that
is, they are connected with the subject in the nominative, and
the object in the accusative or some other case: tT3TT
^fEJTDT ‘ The king having presented gifts to the Brahmans;’
£ Hiranyaka, having made a hole,
dwelt ;’ cfiqrpg TtJliT ‘ Speak, having dismissed fear.’
b. It often occurs, however, that these participles are used
elliptically or parenthetically, and in appearance absolutely
or without government; whence it has been inferred*, that
they are rather gerunds than participles. It is doubtful, how-
ever, if in any case the deficient nouns may not be readily
supplied : thus, 7R jTIc? fwfti ‘ By
that fowler, (he) having scattered the grains of rice, a net was
spread :’ srfff tv#: mil ‘ The vulture was
killed by all the birds, (they) having thus concluded:’
* This was first proposed in a very elaborate and interesting investigation
of these and some other verbal forms, by the late Baron W. Humboldt,
published in the Indische Bibliothek.
PARTICIPLES.
431
TTTWT Trern=fiT7rftyiT: ‘ By the unwise, the self or
person, (they) having diligently adorned (it), is made the tool
of another.’ This sort of construction is, no doubt, often
complicated, but it may perhaps be always unravelled in this
manner : U'RT fWTTTSt ufumT-
V7r: ‘ The cat named Dadhikarha
was placed by that lion in his cave ; (he) having thus reflected,
and having gone to the village, and having given (the cat)
flesh and other kinds of food, and brought (him) thence with
much trouble.’
319- The participles of the future tense are said to have
these significations in common with the imperative mood,
‘ directing,’ ‘ commanding,’ and indication of season or oppor-
tunity : '5R7: cfirnffa: ‘ The mat is to be made ; it
must be made ; it is time for it to be made.’ They also
intimate * fitness'* or ‘ propriety ;’ ‘ The girl is to
be married she is marriageable : 5 nUU'ilu: ‘ Duty is to
be observed and they denote ‘ ability’ or ‘ competency ;’ RTfi
HrI ^rrfhr. ‘ The load is to be borne by thee ;’ w? WWSufT
‘ If I am fit to be killed, 1 am to be killed.’ In these
and the like phrases they agree with the object, and are used
without a verb, although it is evident that the verb is under-
stood : c vz: being properly ssz: sfe ; so *r is
properly sfet?.
a. Future participles are used absolutely in the neuter
gender, either in place of a noun, or with the noun implied :
*T*TT Tt^TiT ‘ As it is to be, so be it ;’
* He caused to be said what was to be said to him,
\
asking what was (fit) to be asked.’
b. These participles, when capable of a transitive effect,
govern the object in the same case as the verb to which they
belong ; as, ‘ It is to be gone by him to the
village ;’ iTTTf ^xinvf £ The cows are to be taken to
pasture by Krishna ;’ ‘ He is to be fined
an eighth part of his property ;’ 4 That is to be
432
PROSODY.
said by thee of (to) me. The agent, agreeably to their passive
signification, is usually in the instrumental case ; hut it may
he also sometimes in the genitive ; JT*rr or ‘ Hari
is to he worshipped by (of) me.’
320. Some verbal derivatives of a participial character exer-
cise the like government upon nouns as participles, as already
noticed (r. 292. a). To the examples there adduced the follow-
ing may he added. The derivative from as with prefixed,
and affixed, governs an accusative : ‘ The
husband adorns, or is the adorner of, his wife.’ Derivatives
from efi with the affix may require the instrumental case ;
'§Efr=sn: sTncfTT ‘ The material world is easily made by
\ ishnu : or the genitive ; *T w) £ f«4) l 11*4*11 ‘ No-
thing here is difficult to the persevering.’ Derivatives with
rPT are followed by nouns in the accusative ; fq'Tirr: c^ST^rnT
‘ Vishnu is the maker of the worlds but considered as substan-
tives, such derivatives may be followed by other substantives
in the genitive case, and ^i#T ?5T3TRT is equally allowable.
TV oi’ds formed with <r?T, when * futurity’ is implied, govern
the object in the accusative : £ Who is going (will go)
to the pasture ?’ ‘ Who is giving (will give) a hun-
dred ?’ A noun formed with yf?T from the indefinite past
participle may be connected with another in the locative case :
yT'-fiTW 'attain 4 well read in grammar.’
CHAPTER IX.
PROSODY.
SECTION I.
General Rules.
321. It would be inconsistent with the plan and limits of
the present work to attempt any lengthened detail of the
infinite varieties of the metrical system of the Hindus ; but
a brief description of the principles by which it is regulated,
GENERAL RULES.
438
and their illustration by a few examples of the most frequently
occurring kinds of metre, will not be out of place, and may
be of use.
322. The essential element of Sanskrit prosody is Quan-
tity. As the long and short vowels have distinct symbols,
their value is at once determined. A short vowel, however, is
considered to be prosodially long when it pi’ecedes a conjunct
consonant, also when it precedes Anuswara or Visarga. At
the end of a line or stanza, also, the last vowel is regarded as
long or short according to the exigence of the metre.
323. Syllables of various quantities are arranged in certain
definite groupes to form prosodial feet. This is effected
according to two different methods.
a. The first method is that which is employed in the
greatest number of popular metres, and is the formation of
trisyllabic feet. Of these, eight varieties are enumerated.
Each has its equivalent denomination in Greek prosody ; but
by native writers each is designated by a distinct syllable,
having the term tto, ‘ class’ or ‘ number,’ attached to it, as in
the following list :
1. Na-gafia WTO: ^ w Tribrach.
2. Ma-gafta WTO: Molossus.
3. Ja-gafta WTO*, w — w Amphibrach.
4. Ra-gana T7TO*. — w — Cretic.
5. Bha-gana WTO: — ^ w Dactyl.
6. Sa-gana wtrt*. w — Anapaest.
7. Ya-gana wro: \j Bacchic.
8. Ta-gana WTO*. ^ Antibacchic.
With given numbers of these feet a monosyllable or dissyl-
lable may be further necessary to complete a line, but they
are regarded as supplementary syllables, not feet, and are
specified accordingly as one or two long or short syllables, or
one long and one short, as the case may be.
b. In the second method of forming prosodial feet, which
3 K
434
PfiOSODY.
characterises a peculiar class of metres, the element is a syl-
labic instant, or short syllable : of these, four constitute a
foot ; that is, a foot consists of either four short syllables or
their equivalents, viz. two long or one long and two short
syllables.
c. There is another mode of measuring verse, which dis-
penses with, or only partially permits, the use of regular feet.
In this a definite number of short syllables, or their equiva-
lents, without further subdivision, constitutes a verse ; certain
portions of which, however, commonly consist of feet of the
first class.
324. A varying number and disposition of these several
feet, or syllabic instants, form a verse, which differs as to
length and proportions. This verse is a stanza or Sloka,
which, with some exceptions, consists of two lines or hemi-
stichs : each of these is again subdivided into two parts : so
that the entire stanza is for the most part a tetrastich, com-
posed of four Padas or Charanas, literally ‘ feet,’ or, in our
understanding of the term, lines or semi-hemistichs : the inter-
vals between the first and second, and third and fourth of
which are not always so distinctly marked, as that between
the second and third.
a. When the metre consists of feet of the first order, and
is single, the Padas are of equal length, and of corresponding
quantities. Sometimes, however, two or more kinds of metre
may be mixed in one stanza, and then the hemistichs or
Padas may vary in length and in quantity. When feet of
the second kind are used, the Padas are of different, though
definite lengths.
b. Rhyme is not employed in any of the older, or in the
higher order of writings. It is met with in poems of a lyrical
character, and of later date ; and in them also great inequality
of metre is introduced. In the best and oldest compositions
great regularity prevails, although the metre is occasionally
varied even in the same work.
varna-vritta.
435
SECTION II.
Varna-vritta.
325. Of the two classes of measures which depend upon
feet, the larger and more popular is also regulated by another
principle, viz. the number of syllables contained in the stanza.
The class is thence denominated Varna-vritta or Akshara-
chhandas, ‘ Literal or syllabic metre.’
a. The number of syllables in a verse of this class may
vary from four to nearly four thousand ; but of the prevailing
orders of this class few contain less than twenty-four syllables,
or six syllables in a line ; or more than one hundred and
four in a verse, or twenty-six in a line. Within these limits
twenty-one orders are specified, each of which, by the varying
disposition of the feet, and of the pause or caesura, comprises
different species. The number of species ordinarily enume-
rated is above two hundred ; but of these, many are of rare
use, although the whole number is infinitely less than the
possible combinations of this class of metre, which, as a matter
of arithmetical computation, is reckoned at many millions of
millions. The forms in popular use do not perhaps exceed
twenty or thirty, and range from thirty-two syllables to fifty-
six in the verse. When they exceed the latter number, the
verse is very rarely employed in continuous passages of any
length, but is inserted occasionally, or occurs at the close of a
canto or section, as a more stately and sonorous close. We
shall specify the different orders of this class, with a notice of
their varieties, and exemplifications of a few of their most
ordinary species.
x. Gayatri, 6 X4=24. Eleven varieties. This metre is not
of frequent occurrence in profane versification, and when used,
as it is in the hymns of the Vedas, it is most commonly a
triplet, somewhat varying in length. The most usual form is
a triplet of three lines of eight syllables each, as in the follow-
ing, which is the most sacred verse of the Vedas, and known
3 K 3
436
PROSODY.
emphatically as ‘the’ Gayatri. It is held in such reverence,
that it is never to be uttered in the hearing of ears profane.
#1 TTTRfVftfbr'T I vfaf? I fvpft ^ TT: JT^UTT^ I
‘ Om ! let us meditate on the glorious splendour of that divine
sun, that he may inspire us.’
2. Ushfiih, 7 x4 = 28. Eight varieties; none of frequent
occurrence, except in the Vedas.
3. Anushfubh, 8 xq = 32. Twelve varieties. This is by far
the most frequent and useful form of Sanskrit verse. It is
that in which the great body of metrical composition, whether
narrative or didactic, exists. All works of considerable extent
are written in it, relieved by the occasional introduction of
other measures. It is the prevailing form of metre in the laws
of Manu, the Mahabharata, the Ramayana, and the Puranas.
a. The Anushtubh or (in the nominative inflexion) Anushfup
stanza is divided into four Padas, of eight syllables each. In
its most regular form the first foot is any one except a tribrach ;
the second may be a dactyl, a tribrach, cretic, or anapaest ;
the other two syllables are indifferently long or short. In
the twelve species, howrever, other dispositions occur. Thus
in that termed Vidyunmala the whole stanza consists of long
syllables, or is a verse of molossi and spondees : in another,
Pramani, we have alternately short and long syllables, a stanza
of amphibrachs or iambics : in a third, Samani, long and short
syllables alternate, forming a verse of cretics or trochees : whilst
in a fourth, Tunga. the first six syllables of each line are short,
or two tribrachs.
b. Another rule given for the formation of the Anushtup
verse is, that the fifth syllable of each line shall be short, the
sixth long, and the seventh alternately long and short ; whilst
the first four syllables and the eighth are arbitrary. This w ill
be found to be usually the form adopted, with occasional
exceptions. The following are examples :
_ _ ^|_ 1 1| II ||
VA11JJ A-VUITTA.
437
‘ This universe had become darkness, undiscerned, uncharac-
terised, indescribable, incomprehensible, as if every where in a
deep sleep.’ Manu.
- - -I 1- ~ll— -I - ~ -l«- I
*tt frtrnr pffTFi ttotu: ^nwftmT:
_ - ~i~~ -i — - i 1--11
xnr
* Never, barbarian, mayest thou acquire fame for endless years,
since thou hast slain one of these birds, heedless through
passion.’ Ramayana.
Tradition affirms of this, that it is the first Sloka or
Anushfup verse ever composed.
__ _]_ — || ~-_| — — |u - II V 1^^-| - -||~~-| - ^ -|~- II
ttPh" w?rq i wttt: w<f * *i%7T pht: i
‘ At Gangadwara was a great holy sage, Bharadwaja by name,
ever engaged in devotion.’ Mahabharata. In the first Pada
the sixth syllable is short ; and the seventh is short in the
first, second, and fourth.
__ 1- -II— -I— -I— II - --I I _ _|| | -|w_||
rre t WU f^T^TRT fWlTO I
‘ Maid with the long and lotus eyes, O look upon me again.
It is an ancient saying, that in the world poison is the antidote
of poison.’ Sringara Tilaka.
The following is given in the Sruta Bodha both as the rule
and the example of a verse of long syllables :
1- 1 - - il I - - -I - - II
*rli ^Hfr tot fwra: ftttt w tt? i
■ — ir - - 1 - - ii - — i- - -i - - ii
^ffniT^Tftrr cirr^TTTTT ttt f^prTc5T i
‘ That (verse) in which all the vowels are long, and there is a
pause at each Pada, is called, O lute-voiced, Vidyunmala by
the learned.’
4. Vrihati, 9x4 = 36. Twelve varieties : not much used.
5. Pankti, 10 X4 = 40. Fourteen varieties: not much used
alone, but sometimes mixed with the following.
6. Trishfubh, 11 X4 = 44. Twenty-two varieties. Some of
the species of this order are next in frequency of use to the
438
PROSODY.
Anushtubh, and are generally employed, even in poems written
for the most part in the latter metre, in passages affecting a
more elevated or animated tone. Many parts of the Maha-
bharata, the Puranas, and the plays, and the greater portion
of the Raghu Vans'a, Kumara Sambhava, Rhafti Kavya,
Magha, Kirataijuniya, and other popular poems, are written
in one or other form of the eleven- syllable metre, either singly
or alternating with other kinds, especially with the next or
twelve-syllable metre ; or sometimes mixed with it or with
the ten-syllable metre in the same stanza ; but then it is
considered to belong to the third class of metres, under the
name of Vaitaliya or Aupachchandasika, as will be subse-
quently noticed.
a. The most frequent form of the order Trishtubh is that
called Indravajra, a verse of four Padas, each of which contains
two antibacchics, an amphibrach, and two long syllables. In-
stead of a double antibacchic, the first foot may be an amphi-
brach, when the metre is termed Upendravajra: and a third
variety, named Upajati, is said to be formed when these two
are, as is very commonly the case, mixed in different Padas of
the same stanza, as in the following examples ; the first of
which is in the Indravajra, the second in the Upendravajra,
and the third in the Upajati metre.
^■?nfjTwr?r ^rftf^rrfr sfa i
Trfk i ^ Trrwmxrr: i
\ O O C\
‘ These princes returned to their tents, displaying in their
appearance and attire the vexation which their disappointed
love for Bhojya had excited, resembling planets, whose lustre
fades before the dawn of day.’ Raghu Vans'a.
TTl^PT TP^T I ^ 1
— '-'I — — v/ | -* — | — — || — — v^| — — ^1^- '■'I — “ II'
I <*U!ll«fcdlSTCr jT.*? I
‘ The grief that was felt (by Yudhishlhira) for the loss of his
VARNA-VRITTA.
439
most precious jewels, his treasure, or his kingdom, was not so
severe as that which was inflicted by the glances of Krishna,
darting anger and shame.’ Mahabharata.
'-'-'■'I >■' I— - II '-'I V^|— — ||
f^Tr^TUlTWT I Tm-q fq^Ul |
- _ w|- -w|w-w|_- II I- - w|« - W|— II
f^fw i yj i fh ^fi rH i
‘ When the sun, having completed his (southern) sojourn,
commenced to travel towards the quarter protected by Kuvera
(the north), the region of the south breathed forth a fragrant
zephyr, like a sigh of regret.5 Kumara Sambhava. In this
the first and fourth Padas are in the Upendravajra, the second
and third in the Indravajra metre.
7. Jagati, 12x4 = 48. Thirty varieties. This order of
metres is also of frequent employment, and very commonly
alternates with the preceding in the same passages, or in
separate cantos. The most common variety of it is the Van-
s'astha, a stanza in which each line consists of an amphibrach,
an antibacchic, an amphibrach, and a cretic.
4% sftr TT I fi Hm*TT7TTfrT HFT?HF»PT: I
‘ With the music of the waves that murmured against the
borders of the pool, with the songs of the flocks of ko'ils, and
the graceful dance of the peacock, an entertainment was pre-
pared for him in the forest. Where is it that the man who is
prosperous meets not with delight?’ Naishadha.
Another variety, the Indravansa, differs from this only in
the first foot, which may be an antibacchic as well as the
second ; and these two being mixed in the same stanza, as in
the foregoing order, form a species of Upajati. They may
both, again, be blended with the two first varieties of the
Trishfubh, as in the following, in which the first Pada is in
the Indravajra metre, the second in the Indravansa, the third
in the Upendravajra, and the fourth in the Vans'astha.
440
PROSODY.
- - *->1- - 4'-' — II — — w| — — >->|w— ^|-^/-||
fwr ■Jproffa: i Trcnsrcft fwnn i
«|__^^_ ^|_ _ ii — ^i__ ^ i ^ _^i_„_n
w: fwftnw: i ftr^pr^csfw f?r?m *: i
‘ Varaftasi, the eternal, is the city of salvation, the native land
of the acquirement of true wisdom : hence he wishes to dwell
perpetually here, being desirous of observing the practices
that cut off (the bonds) of family attachment.’ Prabodha
Chandrodaya.
8. Atijagati, 13 x4 = 52. Sixteen varieties. In the earlier
writers this order of metres is not common, although occa-
sional stanzas occur in the plays. In works of later date, and
especially in the Magha and Kirataijuniya, whole cantos are
composed in one or other of its varieties.
a. One species, the Manjubhashini, consists of an anapaest
and an amphibrach, each repeated, and a long syllable ; as,
^ _|w - | — I u - ^< | — II — | W — I — I vy - w I — II
J( fh rt I «T*T *TT »TT*T 4 U frl qqlHMT *
‘ Waft me home upon the new cloud, converted into a chariot
for our happy journey, decorated with the many-coloured bow
of Indra, and waving the swift gleaming lightning for its
banner.’ Vikramorvasi.
b. Another species, the Praharshifn, consists of a molossus,
a tribrach, an amphibrach, a cretic, and a long syllable :
— — '■'I « — '-'I — « — I ■
•d =1 1 frt rl «hXJ I ci =fc<i<su 1 rtT I
‘ The speed of my flight through the sky invests me with
terror as well as grace, being musical, instead of with bells,
with the fierce clanging sounds of the skulls that form my
necklace, striking against each other in my undulating motion.’
Malati Madhava.
c. A metre composed of twelve and of thirteen syllable
lines is also to be found in some extended passages in the
same works in which other varieties of this order are used.
VARNA-VHITTA.
441
This, however, which is termed Pushpitagra, is also considered
to be a variety of the third class of metres, or of those regu-
lated by syllabic instants.
9. S'akkari, 14x4 = 56. Twenty varieties. The forms of
this order are also not unfrequent, and one of them especially,
the Vasantatilaka, is often used. This contains in each Pada
an antibacchic, a dactyl, two amphibrachs, and two long
syllables.
~ l_~ J|~- 11 1-~ ~l~- -I-- II
1 ttot ttw crsrpft fvr»n: 1
1 wfr<5: 1
‘ The enemy, hastening from many parts, seized the women of
his family, and plundered the treasures of the king, thus fallen
from his throne, as a rocky fragment carries away the fruit
and flowers of a tree that has been hurled from the summit of
a mighty mountain.’ Raja Tarangim.
10. Atisakkari, 15 x 4 = 60. Eighteen varieties. They occur
occasionally, though not in passages of any length. The most
common is the species termed Malini, which consists of two
tribrachs, a molossus, and two bacchics.
~~ ~ | ~~~| - - -I-- -1- - - II ~ ~ ~|v> v^l- - -| v/ - - |~ - - II
vrn-m wfpj wfwrq *rfnr i nfrt fafg vra q ^ 1 ^ vn m ^i^Tfvr 1
FTtftt TTtWfflf 7T^ Tf I WITR ^ I I
' O
‘ Rememberest thou, O lovely-formed, those days which we
passed happily together in that mountain, when all our service
was performed by Lakshmaha ? Rememberest thou the hol-
ders of the lake, or the Godaveri river? Rememberest thou
our habitation upon its shore ?’ Uttara Rama Charitra.
11. Ashfi, 16x4 = 64. Twelve varieties. They are very
rarely met with.
12. Atyashfi, 17x4 = 68. Seventeen varieties. Some of
these are popular, occurring principally in short passages at
the close of a section, although sometimes forming the only
metre of entire poems, when they are not of great extent.
Thus the whole of the Ananda Lahari is written in a popular
3 L'
44-2
PROSODY.
variety of this metre, termed Sikharim, in which each Pada
contains a bacchic, a molossus, a tribrach, an anapaest, a
dactyl, and one short and one long syllable.
-I -I
-i— i
^fhfTTjT^nT iwRfrrrr^
Hwffrt ftt* >rsn:
‘ Some blessed sages worship thee, the wave of spiritual feli-
city, having thy resting-place with the supreme S'iva upon the
throne in which his fivefold form is typified, in the temple of
the all-bestowing jewel, which stands in a grove of Kadamba
trees, near a lake surrounded by the trees of heaven, on the
island of gems, in the midst of the sea of ambrosia.'
Another variety of this order, the Mandakranta, forms also
the metre of the whole of the Megha Duta. It consists of a
molossus, a dactyl, a tribrach, two antibacchics, and two long
syllables or a spondee.
1_ ^ v^l 1 ~|- i I
^Ttrtrt ims'fatrsrr
^fT7^nirvqfc}^ST^Tfi?r
o
‘ Enveloping w ith thy shade the region Brahmavartta beneath
thee, go thence to the field of Kuru, infamous for the slaughter
of heroes, and w ith thy falling rain-drops pelt the lotus flowers,
as the wielder of the bow Gandiva here showered his sharp
and countless arrows upon the faces of the warriors.’
13. Dhriti, 18x4=72. Seventeen varieties, but of rare
occurrence: and of all these higher numbers it may be ob-
served, that they are seldom used in books, except in occa-
sional and closing stanzas, and that it is only in elaborate
and commonly turgid panegyrical inscriptions that they extend
to wider limits. The concluding verse of the twelfth book of
the Raghu Vansa is an example of the variety of this order
YARN A-VIUTTA.
413
termed Mahamalika, in which the Pada is formed of two
tribrachs and four cretics.
UU^UV/U|- W- |- —I— ^.-1- — |
rf^'rfw^T nj^ri
1 1— — ^ _ |
f%ni :
•rtwit:
Hrfdq jrf$
‘ Rama having received his bride, purified by fire, and trans-
ferred the kingdom of his foe to his friend Vibhfshana, set out,
accompanied by the son of the sun and Saumitra, to his city,
in the heavenly car which his arm had won.’
14. Atidhriti, 19x4 = 76. Thirteen varieties. One of these
is a favourite metre as an occasional stanza. This is the
Sardula vikridita, in which the Pada consists of a molossus,
an anapmst, an amphibrach, an anapaest, two antibacchics, and
a long syllable.
- 1 -
tffattnvr TTrj fi=rrN=q c^yf 7rr?rf^^T
irrraf
■*^i*<si Pwh: 'A *1 t[ : <*5,,Pc)*pil<>e
‘ Having contracted his body, and examined the whole of
Lanka, whose rows of white palaces shone with augmented
beauty, as glistening in the autumnal moonlight, and having
beheld Janaki in the Asoka garden, surrounded by Rakshasa
females, the son of air ascended a Kankelli tree, and there
remained concealed.’ Hanuman Nataka.
15. Kriti, 20 x4 = 8o. Four varieties: not often used.
16. Prakriti, 21 X4 = 84. Three varieties; of which one,
the Sragdhara, is met with in an occasional verse. The Pada
comprises a molossus, a cretic, a dactyl, a tribrach, and three
bacchics ; as,
— _i_ ^ — 1 - ~ 1 v — — 1 ^ - -I -1 — — 1
vt<?t f?rv*T ^ ^ ^PRIT
I - ^ -I- v,w|w«v4«- -|w_-|w__J
tcak: vtst TrTr^i’^rj7uf
3 L 2
444
PROSODY.
jjTirnrRfw?rtx 35
'TTsrrHjT *t?t4T wip^rt:
4 Who are they, and for whose use created, who were formed
by Bi'ahma treasures of every excellence ; surpassing in their
splendour the lords of the elephant herd, when shedding the
dews of passion from their brows ? Like the haughty and
proud monarch of the forest tribes, who submits not to have
his teeth broken, so sovereigns such as those emperors of
the world suffer not their orders to be disobeyed.’ Mudra
Rakshasa.
17. Xkriti, 22 X4 = 88. Three varieties.
18. Vikriti, 23 X4 — 92. Six varieties.
19. Sankriti, 24 x 4 = 96. Five varieties.
20. Atikriti, 25 x4=ioo. Two varieties.
21. Utkriti, 26 X4=i04* Three varieties.
22. Dahdaka is the general name given to all metres of
this class exceeding the Utkriti measure.
SECTION III.
Gana-vritta.
326. The second class of metres consists of those in which
the feet are formed of four short syllables or their equivalents.
There are sixteen classes of this metre, and each of them
admits of sixteen species ; but it will be sufficient to notice
the five principal classes.
1. Xrya. This is a stanza of four Padas, the first of which
contains twelve short syllables, the second eighteen, the third
twelve, and the fourth fifteen. As regulated by the feet,
however, the division is best adapted to the hemistich, and
the jArya stanza may be more conveniently regarded as a
couplet ; the first half of which contains thirty syllabic instants,
distributed amongst seven feet and a half ; and the second,
twenty-seven syllabic instants, distributed also amongst seven
GANA-VRITTA.
445
feet and a half, but in which the sixth foot consists of one
short syllable only ; as in the following :
I- « ~|_ _| - _|w ~ -I 1— I-
TBjkftr ir^T 'R^f%nn?r
V^l I ^ 1 - _ ~|--|«|--|-
ttzit T?Tf%:
‘ In like manner as the secretion of the unconscious milk
occurs for the nutriment of the calf, so the activity of (igno-
rant) matter takes place for the liberation of spirit.’ Sankhya
Karika.
| — I-
fT tm: fi^r: TTTxw^fcr
--i- - -i- - i - --i- - 1 - 1- -i-
WT f? TTfT^T fwHT ?TH^TT
‘ Fall not in love with women, for they disdain the man who
loves. If one should bear you affection, love her ; if she be
scornful, let her go.’ Mrichchakati.
a. The disposition of the feet in the Arya verse is not
altogether arbitrary : in the first hemistich the sixth foot must
either be a long syllable between two short, that is, an amphi-
brach, or else four short syllables. In the second hemistich
the sixth foot consists of one short syllable. The odd feet in
either hemistich, the first, third, fifth, and seventh, should
never be amphibrachs.
b. A variety of the Arya, and of the other classes also, is
termed Chapala; in which it is required that the second and
fourth feet should be amphibrachs, the first a spondee or an
anapaest, and the fifth a dactyl or spondee. This rule may
apply to both hemistichs, or to the first or to the second only ;
constituting thus three varieties in addition to the regular one,
or four in all.
c. In like manner, when the pause occurs after the third
foot, the verse is tei'med Pathya ; when after any other, Vipula :
and this variation may prevail in either hemistich or in both,
forming therefore four modifications of the pause ; which being-
applied to the four modifications of the metre, compose the
sixteen varieties of each order of this class of metres.
PROSODY.
446
d. The Arya metre is in general employed only in occa-
sional verses ; but the whole of the Sankhya Karika is com-
posed in it, as is the Nalodaya of Kalidasa.
2. Udgiti. This differs from the Xrya only in inverting
the order of the second and fourth Padas. The first contains,
as before, twelve short syllables ; the second fifteen ; the
third, as before, twelve ; and the fourth, eighteen.
3. Upagith In this class each hemistich consists of but
twenty-seven short syllables ; the second as well as the fourth
containing but fifteen ; the first and third are unaltered.
4. Giti. Both hemistichs consist of thirty short syllables ;
the fourth Pada as well as the second consisting of eighteen.
5. ^Lryagiti. In this class each hemistich consists of eight
full feet, or thirty-two short syllables, divided into Padas of
twelve and twenty syllabic instants.
SECTION IV.
Mdtrachhandas .
327. The third class of metres is regulated in the first
instance by the number of short vowels or syllabic instants,
or Matras, as in the preceding class ; not by the number of
syllables, without regard to their syllabic length, as in the first.
It so far partakes, however, of the character of the first class,
that, after having defined the number of short syllables, or
their equivalents, which the stanza shall contain, they may
be, either wholly or partially, distributed into trisyllabic feet ;
so that the verses may in many instances be identified with
recognised varieties of the first class of metres, more or less
intermixed in the same stanza. The principal orders of this
class are the following.
1. Vaitabya. This is a stanza of four Padas; the first and
third of which contain the time of fourteen short syllables ;
the second and fourth, sixteen. Each Pada should end in a
cretic and iambic, or else in a dactyl and spondee. Of the
MATS ACH H AN DAS.
447
remaining moments, which are six in the first and third, and
eight in the second and fourth Padas, neither the second and
third, nor the fourth and fifth, should be combined in the
same long syllable ; nor, in the second and fourth Padas,
should the sixth and seventh Matra be combined in one long
vowel. There are exceptions, however, to these rules, which
constitute varieties of the class. Entire cantos in this form of
metre occur in the Magha, Kiratarjuniya, and Naishadha ; and
occasional verses in it are found in other works ; as in the
following, in which the last syllables of the three first Padas
are long by position :
TrffTftra^ tht i qnstqf *nr
tR-ufnrfVrr f?r i yjrfwt sfq i
‘ This was (an act) prohibited to a king ; but Dasaratha (did
it), having transgressed the prohibition. Those even who are
learned in the Vedas, when they are blinded by passion, set
their feet on a forbidden path.’ Raghu Vansa.
The first and third Padas of this stanza correspond to the
Sanyukta species of the Pankti, or ten-syllable metre ; the
second and fourth to an undefined variety of the Trishtubh,
or eleven-syllable.
a. A variety of the Vaitaliya in not unfrequent use, termed
Aupachchhandasika, is formed by merely adding a long syllable
to each Pada ; making the first and third therefore contain six-
teen, and the second and fourth eighteen, syllabic instants.
q faqtspnzT sfa wit:
‘ Those princes who are now joined in alliance with the enemy,
but who know themselves, will quickly fall from him, like
cuckoos soon deserting the nest of the crow.’ Magha.
This stanza might be resolved into a verse of mixed metre,
in which the first and third Padas would belong to the eleven-
syllable order, and the second and fourth to the twelve ; in
U8
PHOSODY.
each corresponding Pada admitting of precisely the same dispo-
sition of the syllables into trisyllabic feet.
b. There are several sub-species of each variety of the Vaitii-
liya ; and one of the Aupachchhandasika, termed Pushpitagra,
is of frequent occurrence. The whole of the tenth Sarga of
the Kiratarjunlya, from which the following is taken, is com-
posed in it.
w v/v|vy v^ v^| — 1^— — \ vvvy]vv — v,| vv — vs I - vs — I —
TM H Pjf rf f^T I fcT =( 1 1 Pa +1 £ i’ N r^l ; I
o o o
~~V^, 1- VS - | VS -_| VS vsvslvs- vs|.s- Vs|- VS - |_
W^TRTWfT s^q fwiT^ fVtficj rnTTHT^TT II
‘ The celestial nymphs, beholding the form (of Arjuna), effacing
the splendour of the universe, and capable of protecting the
three worlds, felt that all attempts to distract the penance in
which he was immersed, for the sake of victory, would be in
vain.’
The verse, in fact, is a compound of the twelve and thirteen-
syllable metres, and the trisyllabic feet in each Pada are regular,
and correspond throughout.
2. Matrasamaka. This, which is the second order of the
class, consists of a verse of four Padas, each of which contains
sixteen short syllables, or their equivalents : the ninth syllabic
instant must be single, and of course short, and the last long.
Varieties are made by restricting other syllabic instants, as the
fifth, eighth, and twelfth, to single or short quantities, or by
allowing the ninth to form part of a long syllable. The follow-
ing is an example of this metre :
*?'-! friH uil rittT «TT3iT
4 Life is as unstable as the water that trembles on the leaf of
the lotus. Association with the virtuous, although for a mo-
ment, is the only vessel to bear us across the ocean of existence.’
Moha Mudgara.
3. Gityarya. This is, like the preceding, a verse of which
ON THE GRAMMAR OF THE VEDAS.
449
each Pada contains sixteen Matras, or syllabic instants ; but
they are all short, except sometimes the last of each hemistich,
which may be long. Varieties are also formed by constructing
one hemistich entirely of long syllables, and the other of short ;
or by slightly altering the number of short syllables in the
stanza ; so that each hemistich may contain but twenty-nine,
or the first may contain twenty-nine, and the second thirty-
one ; or the first thirty, and the second thirty-two. These
forms of metre are not often met with in works of standard
reputation.
As a specimen of irregular metre, as well as of rhyme, the
following stanza is inserted from the Gita Govinda, in which
lyrical poem a great variety of anomalous, but exceedingly
melodious versification is exemplified. The passage is left
untranslated, as a short exercise for those who may have
accompanied this Grammar to its termination.
’•TmfrT WfinTTJT TTR RW
SUPPLEMENTARY CHAPTER.
ON THE GRAMMAR OF THE VEDAS.
Preliminary remarks. — In treating of the Grammar of
the Vedas as something different from that of other Sanskrit
writings, we must not be led into the error of supposing that
the usual principles of inflexion are not followed in the
language of those works. The contrary is the case. The
predominating construction is precisely the same as that of
ordinary Grammar, and we have for the far greater part the
same modes of inflexion, derivation, and composition, as are
3 M
450
ON THE GRAMMAR OF THE VEDAS.
found in more modern writings. It is not in the exclusion of
current forms that the peculiarity of the Grammar of the
Vedas consists, but in their concurrence with other forms
which are no longer met with in popular compositions.
They may be sometimes, although sparingly, observed in one
or more works of an ancient date, as in Manu and the Maha-
bharata ; but this is to so limited an extent, that they may be
regarded in all essential respects as exclusively the property of
the Vedas. Those works, then, have their own peculiar gram-
matical forms as well as those which are recognised in general
literature.
Although, however, the Vedas have a number of exclusively
peculiar grammatical forms, it can be scarcely said that they
have an exclusively peculiar Grammar. It would seem as if
portions, at least, had been written before Sanskrit Grammar
had assumed fixed principles, and consequently, the practice
being undetermined, the forms employed, although following a
general analogy, varied with the notions and habits of each
individual writer. It is therefore admitted by native gram-
marians, that in many respects no general rule is to be laid
down, each case is to be treated on its own merits, and every
deviation from customary construction is to be accepted, not
as the result of any established precept, but upon the authority
of the passage or passages in which it occurs. Such are the
following, which are quoted as exemplifications of deviation
from the ordinary formations even of the texts of the Vedas
themselves.
Under the head of Declension we find one case used for
another, and made to agree with a different one ; as, vft:
^fspTPTF:, 4 On the right hand side (of the sacrificial) car,’
instead of ^fsjTrrnrf ; where an adjective in the genitive case is
connected with a noun in the locative. The gender may be
changed, as fnrterfn: ‘ Satisfied with nectar where is made
masculine instead of neuter. In verbs one person may be
used for another : ft instead of 4 May
PRELIMINARY REMARKS.
451
he be separated from his ten sons ;’ the second person for the
third. So, in regard to number, a verb in the singular may
have a plural nominative : it TraftT (for rfr.iw)
* They who pare the wood for the stake to which the horse is
bound.’ One voice may be used instead of another : sjsjxrrfT-
JnfH’SJTT (for rsfw) ‘ He wishes for the religious student
■jrrftqrraT -grfw^UTnT (for trum) * The reflux wave contends with
another.’ Participles may be confounded: s f-'TfrrTVT^IH'R'JT
‘ By him about to place the fire to-morrow ;’ the indefinite
future being used instead of the definite required by the
specification * to-morrow.’ Consonants may differ : thus we
have for ^ ; but this may be easily explained by
supposing that the refinement of changing the unaspirated
dental to its aspirate (r. 191. /) had not been devised when the
passages in which such forms as ^Tjsr?r occur were written.
Vowels may differ ; as, ^ ^T*r: for fa<?T T9. The affixes
used in forming derivative words may also be varied ; as,
for &c. In all these and similar variations the difference
is defended by the comprehensive rules «nfF5 (Bahulam
chhandasi) ‘ Manifold (construction is allowable) in the Vedas;’
and (Vyatyayo bahulam) ‘ Transmutation {is
allowable) in many cases in the Vedas.’ Some of the varia-
tions may perhaps admit of explanation, but it may be rea-
sonably inferred that they arose in general from the circum-
stance that some of the hymns and prayers, or some parts of
them, were composed whilst the language was yet in a transi-
tion state, and before uniformity of practice or weight of
authority permitted the establishment of determinate rules.
Long before these hymns and prayers were put together,
however, and formed into, a collection, the practice had become
subjected to positive precept, the irregularities had been dis-
carded, the scattered materials reduced to system, and the
language was ‘ perfected’ (Sanskrita). The collection com-
prised, however, the earlier as well as the later passages, and
hence the existence of various ante-preceptal forms in parti-
3 M 2
452
ON THE GRAMMAR OF THE VEDAS.
cular texts concurrently with those which are now regarded as
regular.
We shall now proceed to detail some of the Vaidik pecu-
liarities as they have been represented by Panini, from whose
Sutras, through which they are irregularly dispersed, they
have been selected by the author of the Siddhanta Kaumudi,
in eight chapters. Neither Panini nor Bhaffoji Dikshita have
perhaps always given an accurate view of the peculiar modifi-
cations, nor comprised the whole that are to be found ex-
plained in the works of the commentators on the text of the
Vedas. They have furnished, however, sufficient for the pre-
sent purpose, which is, not to give a Grammar of the Vedas,
but to point out some of the principal circumstances in which
it differs from the forms that have been illustrated in the
preceding pages. We must be contented also with a selection
of the most important of the illustrations which the above
authorities offer, as to give the whole would extend the pre-
sent chapter beyond its due proportion.
Sandhi. — The rules in force for the combinations of let-
ters are generally observed, but not without very numerous
exceptions, and adherence to any given precept appears to
depend chiefly upon the will or convenience of the writer.
The following are the principal rules to be found in our
authorities upon this subject.
In ordinary practice, a word ending in u or when not
combining with a following wf, agreeably to r. 5, causes its
elision (r .6.f). There are various exceptions to this in the
Veda : thus, it is not elided if the words come together in the
middle of a Pada or division of a metrical stanza ; as, TQ
irqvfft ‘ Beginning the sacrifice.’ If not in the middle of
a Pada, they may have the usual effect ; as, W ‘ they
worship,’ where the latter word begins a newT Pada, as w 1
7 s^nr^ ‘they said.' In the Yajush, parts of which
are not in metre, examples of the absence of elision occur :
'srfv ‘ over Vasishfha ;’ ^TWRmrr. ‘ The waters, our
SANDHI.
453
mothers, (may purify) us.’ When is followed by F or ^ it
is said to be subject to elision in the middle of a Pada, as in
the example, ws^tt; but exceptions are not wanting; as,
SlWlfr ’ni ‘ This gem is hundred-edged;’ l rt
‘ Let him bless us with riches.’
preceded by the same diphthongs does not lose its
own initial, nor does it in the locative case cause the elision
of a following short vowel ; as, unrrl Frjf ‘ The
vital breath plays in each limb.’
These modifications are often dependent upon accentuation.
Thus >!T with the grave accent, and followed by a guttural or
by V, is not elided after F or *ft .
If acutely accented, it is elided; invtsif and so it is
when followed by any other consonant ; . The
very same word may or may not lose its initial, as it may be
or may not be accented. In , ‘That he may
make offering to the Rudras,’ the vowel has the acute accent
and remains. When unaccented, it is elided, as in
s^TT^n:. The accents perform an important part in the Gram-
mar of the Vedas, but the subject is too extensive to be more
than occasionally alluded to in this place.
An initial F or ^rr sometimes causes the elision of a preced-
ing t!T or ^tt, instead of combining with them (see p. 12. cl. i) ;
H I <;H*T makes HH q , and rTT ^T'RT'T,
Certain words ending with ^rr do not affect a following
vowel in any way ; as, ^tn ‘ a (golden) shaft, a
golden axle ;’ ‘ She (sounding) like a bow-
string on a bow ;’ inn ‘ As the giver of strength.’ A
nasal vowel is not subject to combination ; ^rf ‘ Water
as far as the sky.’
A final short vowel is very frequently made long, in some
cases perhaps for the convenience of the metre, in others by
special rule ; as, FFT (for fjr 7T ‘ Verily even of thee ;’
(for FT: ‘ Be with us for our good ;’ f^rr f?
r^T yFFTF ‘ We know thee, most bountiful !’ =niTRf ‘ If (a
454
ON THE GRAMMAS OF THE VEDAS.
gift) of food.’ Various particles also are optionally elongated ;
as, tt for 7T, TTT for tt, ^ for tj, ^ for trer for TO, for
and ttwt for ttw, as t^TT T^fT ‘ Where are you going
with your car ?’ also the final of ; as, ’J'Fvn Tift fafasfat:
‘ Protect us from imprecation also the final of before tt ;
as, ^ ttt: TTTfaTTTrrfain * Do thou be well the guardian over
our friends.’
The cerebral letter ? may be changed to <3 or to the Vaidik
letter 3o if preceded and followed by a vowel, as ‘ I
praise Agni but not before a semivowel or consonant, as
‘ to be praised.’ may be changed to <3 combined with
j, as TIH^: for tthtt., TT^f: for Jpf: . T1 and H are interchange-
able, as for
A sibilant may or may not be inserted between tt and a
hard consonant of the palatal, cerebral, and dental classes ; as,
TTSnr?T TTR tt'ST+H i Ti'Zt or TntwiVtft. There is great variety
in the use of Anuswara, or the nasal sign of the vowel, in
similar combinations.
The insertion of w between a nasal and the dental sibilant
(r. 17), which is seldom practised in ordinary writing, is of
frequent recurrence in the Veda, as WJK: ‘ The great
and bountiful (Agni).’
Some peculiar changes of the dentals tt and tt to the cere-
brals TTT and tt occur. The change of the former after a word
ending in (r. 19), although separated by other letters, is
recognised ; as in ttw, ‘ Who thinks of (or regards) man-
kind ;’ fn rjTjTTrr ‘The beverage of the manes.’ It is also
changed in the initial of the pronominal inflexion vnr, when
preceded by a different word containing t or if; as, ’Sffa t^T
tit: ‘Agni, protect us;’ f^THTT TrffsfaTVf ‘Teach us in this;’
UPSifa ‘ Grant much (wealth) to us.’ is similarly changed
after tt * good,’ as in ’Hvft U ttt: ‘ (Be) good towards us ;’ also in
-3^ ■gi "2 tj: fffFT ‘ Rise up well, even for our protection.’
The initial sibilant is optionally changed from a dental to a
cerebral in verbs preceded by the prepositions fa, fa, ^fa,
SANDHI.
455
when separated by the temporal augments, as or ,
&c. ?!«T, 4 to possess’ or 4 to give,’ changes its sibilant, according
to rule, when the derivative from it drops the final ^T, as iftRT
‘ having cattle,’ ^TT 4 cherishing men ;’ but not if the nasal is re-
tained, as 4 a giver of cows.’ F?, 4 to endure,’ preceded by
TpPTT or takes the cerebral ; as, ^prrqi7, names of
Indra ;’ ^rfhtT# tfiiHWTF \rw 4 Give us foe-overcoming wealth.’
After a vowel ordinarily requiring the change, it may or may
not take place ; f^FHT. ‘ As you two, Indra and Agni,
are in heaven ;’ tttt f|T ft: 4 You are lords of the sky.’
The optionality is not allowed to the particle v, as in the text
above quoted, *T FT, where F becomes n after '35.
A final F becomes in the Vedas before the inflexions of
the second personal pronoun which begin with IT ; also before
cHT and H rt a : , if the words occur in the same Padas ; ’H D H %
4 thou Agni c to thee with these ;’ nfvs^f ‘ O
Agni ! thy abode is in the waters ;’ ^0»TT?fysg ‘ that all is
Agni ^nyrqfy^ff f^inTEr; 4 They pared heaven and earth.’ If
the words are in different Padas, the change may not take
place ; 4 Agni is that, the sun is that ;’ where
Agni ends a line. These changes occur, however, sometimes
in the prose passages of the Yajush, as or
4 Thou with the rays.’ The final of becomes the cerebral
before tht, if 4 repetition’ is not intended ; 4 The
Rakshas was consumed :’ but fi^FPTflT 4 He melts the
gold repeatedly.’
A final Visarga may be changed to F before a guttural or
a labial, as or 4 pain-causing,’ qMun^ or
TTR: ttt<? 4 a vessel of curds :’ not before ir, as *rfr?n TlfTi'T'JT
4 Most wise Agni nor if the word be a repetition, as Tj^rtr.
tt*ft: ; nor after the word before =b, as yvn vfl
4 So that the earth may make (or bear) for us.’
Visarga substituted for the sibilant of the ablative case
may become F again before "qfx, in the sense of 4 over’ or
4 above,’ as thth 4 He was first born above the
456
ON THE GRAMMAR OF THE VEDAS.
sky also before trrfr, as WST ‘ May Surya from
the sky protect us.' The same takes place with Yisarga de-
rived from the genitive case before certain words ; as,
‘ the lord of speech ‘ the son of the sky
»T^FTR: WT^rfH: ‘ Praised by his votaries, he ascended above
the sky ifmrwrrc ‘ the further bank of darkness
‘ He sits in the place of the earth ;’ Httmhu
‘ (Bestow) abundant wealth on the worshippers.’ ?3T or
changes the Visarga optionally before the same words ; ^n-
or 3[TPTT: ‘ The son of the earth.’
Yisarga becoming T. may be substituted for a final ^ before
a word beginning with a vowel, and exercising a government
over the preceding term : the mark of the nasal is inserted : fxm
TTTRJTar*T ‘ Drink the Soma juice after the Ritus for
Declension. — The declension of nouns presents an infi-
nite variety of differences from the prevailing practice ; and it
may be almost affirmed, that there is no one form of inflexion
which does not admit of a variation from that which is ordi-
narily received. Some of them may be regarded as the more
natural or regular constructions, but there are others of which
it is not easy to understand the origin or the object.
Of the modifications to which the inflectional terminations
are subject, there are a few which deserve notice more parti-
cularly, as they are of most frequent occurrence, being used
as often as, if even not oftener than, the usual terminations.
Thus, in the dual nominative and accusative, ^TT is very com-
monly substituted for ^T; as in the passage,
qTr firfawtsiT 'STfavn ttt for ifr &c., ‘ We
invoke the two divine Aswins, both being skilful charioteers,
and sojourning in heaven :’ tt^TRT VTfTTT £ Do
ye two approach for our aid, upholders of mortals,’ instead of
JT^rrcT VffTTT ; SjltH'rfT c I invoke ye two to our
assistance.’ Every hymn furnishes examples. In the follow-
ing the vowel of the base is also made long ; vrsftirnTT OTHfnrr
‘ I invoke both lovely night and dawn.’
DECLENSION.
457
Another form of very frequent, although less constant recur-
rence is that of the nominative plural of nouns in '3T, with ’WH
prefixed to the regular termination ; as cJTRT. for r.TTt ; wfanrfat
‘ The mighty Rudras,’ for TfalTT ; and the like.
In the third person plural fair is not unfrequently retained
instead of the substitution far, which is enjoined after nouns
in w ; as, ?*ift ^faTTiTWlT ‘ Let him, a god, come with the
gods ;’ Wfffa: ttV# ‘ declared by all ^T^infaT^i: ‘ with tawny
horses.’ On the other hand, the substitute is sometimes used
where it never appears in regular inflexion, as vnsi:, ‘ by rivers,5
instead of W^tfa:.
Another variety, which, like the preceding, is of not unfre-
quent occurrence, especially after nouns in 7, is the substitu-
tion of it for «t before the sign of the instrumental case sing.,
as yGppr, instead of vunwi. It is found, although
it is believed very rarely, after nouns in as VENTHH for
A curtailment of the neuter plural of nouns in is of rather
frequent occurrence, the fa being omitted, so that the case
ends with WT, as in e those fields,’ for ijrfa ; so i(T
^ nmRlii ITT TTT faTJTRT ‘ As many as are thy bodies, so many
are the obsequial cakes,’ for mfa and infa.
The vowel ’WT indeed seems to have been a favourite termi-
nation in the Vaidik grammar, and is considered to take the
place of the regular terminations, either singly or in combina-
tion, on many other occasions than those above specified : thus
W is used as the termination of the accusative singular ; ff
HT^ lfcliii fanflfa 4 I do not revile that (it) Brahman irnfa fa^T
ITTfFcrr ‘ That whom we know’ thee for it and 7f. WT, techni-
cally TT, may be used as the sign of the locative sing, of nouns ;
as, (for WTPflj 15 WIT £ Let him worship in spring wtht
(for WTW) wfa^TT: 4 In the navel of the earth.’ ^ST may also be
used for as irt for infa ‘ with a club ;’ and for W7, as
UWllpn for TTWTWWT c with protended arm.’ *?i{T may be used
for the ^TT of the instrumental, as iTRUT, ‘ with a boat,’ instead
of WTWT ; and for WT, as wfawi for iJTfanT for ?r$T!TT,
3 N
458
ON THE GRAMMAR OF THE VEDAS.
for TprfgrrrT. 3TT. leaving tit, may be employed as the
sign of the ablative, as for ^TH¥THT: ‘ according to order.’
tit may be added to the base as the sign of the nom. sing,
masc. ; XT^rn ^rTTfl TITVTIT ‘ the good path of the sun.’
A single sibilant may take the place of the plural termina-
tion, and dispense with the usual modification of the base, as
tjt^it: for tt-ttr: ; as, TRT tr^it: ‘ Let the paths be
straight.’ The final vowel of a case may be dropped, as ttt?t
■^ftRXT for * in the highest sky.’ In the instrumental
sing, of feminines in ^ the vowel may be made long, and the
termination rejected, as vfaft for vtwT, for JTWT, for
TTTRIT, and the like. Feminine nouns ending in ^tt, preceded
by op, do not always change the antepenultimate vowel to
thus we have xnT^rr, not titpt^T ; as, ttttsti tt: TTTRiTft W
‘ Let Saraswati, the purifier, be pleased with our offering.’
Of nouns ending in ^ and 7, the Guna changes of the
vowel before certain of the cases may or may not be observed ;
as, nom. plur. as well as ^Rtj: ; dat. sing. as well
as ; so tps: and xra for trjpr. and ; HR: (for
xjtttxt ‘ Make (them) drink of the honey.’ Some nouns in ^ may
make the vowel long, as an annual plant, which lengthens
the final before all the consonantal terminations except ftr, as
^qvfwif, WRvffri ; so TtfW may become TT^ff in any case except
the nom. plural, as tit tT^f tt?t TRfifW: ‘ The night which was
created by many nights but nom. plur. TT^xi: only. The
neuter nouns 'Slfgj, ^fv, and ^rfspri may make their finals
long in the dual, as wzft W ^5 ftr^ TRqftrr ‘ Thy two eyes, O
Indra, are brown, like those of an ape ;’ so %swl«!T, &c.
These nouns also present additional proofs of their alternation
with nouns in (r. 66. a), tsthjr, dropping their termi-
nations, or being inflected like such nouns before the termina-
tions beginning with consonants, and in the nom. and acc.
plur. ; ^^TTgTI'W WFTfw ‘ Having separated the bones, he offers
burnt offering H<r thTtw ‘ Let us see with our eyes
that which is auspicious.’
DECLENSION.
159
3frt, when constructed with a noun in the genitive case,
may be regularly inflected like other nouns in as,
3f7RT 33 f? 333 33T3f3 * We sacrifice by that master of the
field so 333 33: ‘ Salutation to the lord of the
Kulunchas.’ In any other combination the forms would be
w, 33.
Nouns ending in ^ and 3i, which are subject to the substi-
tution of 3^3 and 3^ for the finals, do not always observe the
change, as 3«ft: or 3f33f:, f3>3 or f333. Nouns in -3, which
do not admit of the substitution, may nevertheless take it, as
3«r or H33 333 c Let us cherish the body.’
Nouns ending in ^ may retain their final before the termina-
tions of the dual and plural nom. and dual accus., rejecting the
diphthong ^rr and the vowel of 33 , but retaining the sibilant ;
as, 333bg33: c the four female Maruts 33PT?T ‘ two
hog-skin slippers ;’ 3ifrf{.3;*3 TJH3: ‘ the abundant gifts of
Indra.5 After the long vowel the initial of the accus. sing,
may or may not be rejected; as, spft makes or 3ft,
3*f or 3x3.
3ft and ?TRt!fl most usually prefix 3 to the termination of
the gen. plural, as 3ftnrr, qT33it3T.
The long ^ (3^3) is invariably used to form the feminines
of a class of words, which in ordinary use take it only option-
ally, as 33*. or 3^1; in the Veda the latter only, 3^^T3t3*ft3T
‘ Of many annual plants.’ Derivatives of 3, preceded by fa
or 3, take ^ only in the feminine, as fafat, c a mistress.’
is substituted for nrSTT when forming an attributive noun ;
^rnpcf 3 t>3T3T 33W ‘ The evil goddess, she with the
long tongue, is the pilferer of the sacrifice of the gods.’
Some nouns in 3, properly masculine or neuter, become
feminine by lengthening the final : 3"?: a proper name ; cfifiUfTy:
‘ a water-pot ;’ 3V: ‘ honey ;’ 3T3: ‘ lac.5
A final 3j may or may not become long in the genitive
plural, as 3T33IT or 3T3l!lf, f333!T or f?T3t!TT.
3t sometimes prefixes 3 to the sign of the genitive plural :
3 n a
46*0
ON THE GRAMMAR OF THE VEDAS.
fk 737 3m WVqf ‘ We know thee, O chief, to be the lord
of kine '3r*Pf 7fRr * like the udder of cows.’ The regular form
is of more frequent use ; f^XT^f jfttrfw tt^T * as the mighty lord
of cattle.’
The adjective ‘ great,’ is represented in various inflex-
ions by other than its regular forms : thus we have for
fTFTnT ; as, JTFTTr«TtTfT TJTFT ‘ They praised the great and famous
(troop of the Maruts).’ takes the place of the instrumental
sing. ; *r*r: 3TTfNrr m^rrf ‘ May they aid with great happiness
also of the ablative ; TaR: ‘ from the vast sky and of
the genitive ; tit. ‘ superior over mighty thee.’ The fem.
form may be ; as, wr e to great earth.’
Possessive nouns formed with affixes leaving ■qrr may adopt
a Visarga in the vocative sing. : thus a name of Indra,
may make or ; as, ^ Tnf? RtR ‘ O Indra,
lord of the Maruts ! here drink the Soma juice so
‘ mountain-bearer,’ a name of Indra, makes trtft
shP^tj; f O Indra ! grant wealth.’
WrJrtr may drop its initial when the inflexion ends with mr,
as in the nom. and instr. sing., making RT and tirt; as r*RTS:
* propitiated by yourself :’ otherwise it is regular ;
■qfTrgW ‘ He does not get that which is his.’ The elision, it is
said, occurs in other cases, but not in the hymns (Mantra).
A noun ending in , preceded by t?, either singly or com-
pounded, may leave its penultimate short in those cases where
it is in general long, as in the nom. dual and plural, and the
accus. singular and dual : thus we may have either or
and the like ; as, ^ ‘ I invoke Indra,
named Ribhuksha ;’ 17 rTSJTTT * He spoke to Taksha
standing,’ instead of TTSTTrt.
Some nouns ending with it follow the analogy of in
changing the final to ^ before f*R: thus HR, ‘the moon,’
makes *rrfk: ; ^tr, ‘ he who protects well,
‘he who confides in his own vigour,’ HR^fk*. ; and ‘the
dawn,’ ^nfk:.
CONJUGATION.
4GI
The words and ^TiR^T, and the pronominals com-
pounded with ?'5i, may substitute a nasal for the final of the
nom. sing., as T^ft ?rn5RT T3TFT
4 May your protecting car, O Aswins, come hither.’
The nouns ^fiRT? a name of Indra, 4 one for whom
a sacrifice is performed,’ 4 clarified butter,’ 4 an
inferior worshipper,’ are properly Vaidik nouns, and are con-
sidered as analogous to nouns in *T before the terminations
beginning with consonants, as ^hrt:, %?Rt«ri, &c. (see r. 125).
In the vocative they sometimes retain the long vowel, as
$ ^wr:.
Of the personal pronouns it may be remarked, that those
forms which are given in the grammar as secondary and occa-
sional, as *tt, rt, TR, »nr , are of constant recurrence in
the Veda : we find also peculiar forms, as for TITT ; ^
vWfirT 4 You two receivers of vows where also the final of
V7T3TH is arbitrarily shortened : irt: for wrzff: ; ^Trf? T7T. 4 The
car of you two :’ and R for Rftr ; R f^n(ftr) ^in(fW) Wr(fir)
4 All pious works collected in thee.’ The termination u is
substituted for every termination of the plural after both ’STOTT
and so that ^ot and trt represent every variety of
plural inflexion : 4 We, Indra and Vrihaspati
^fT OT*i'4OTT. 4 You friends of battle ;’ vf^ 4 Give to us.’
(See also Rig-veda by Rosen, notes to hymn ix.)
■§?T occurs for the accus. sing, of ^ ; as, JOTrsrrrrSR »TT.
4 Otfer this quickly to the swift (Indra) ;’ where the first term
is the combination of ’STT and ipr.
3TTTT. does not always form the neuter with but occurs
regularly inflected ; STTlfarR Tfrr^rw 4 Another and another is
produced.’
Conjugation. — The general principles of conjugation, the
scheme of the terminations, and the conjugational distinctions,
which are observed in general literature, prevail equally in the
Vedas, and the greater number of the forms of the verbs are
perfectly regular. At the same time, here, as well as in
462
ON THE GRAMMAR OF THE VEDAS.
Declension, various peculiarities are also to be found, which
are no longer met with in more recent compositions.
One of the changes of termination which is not unfrequent
is the substitution of rrra for in the first pers. plur. pres,
tense ; as, vpfr HTTJT iprffl ‘ We come offering homage ;’
wfa ‘ Thou art ours ; we are thine
IhP« * * * 4 We say (these things) from the birth of our old
father.’
In the Atmane-pada, the initial 7T of a termination may be
rejected ; as, ^fstlWrr. (for %w) ‘ He sleeps on his right side
f»a«r. ijzr: 4 Let him milk (for ?rvri) milk from the Aswins.’
s^TrT may be substituted for ; as, 4 Pre-
vent heat in the interval.’ Before the pronoun tpt the final of
may be rejected ; as, 4 Do you worship him.’
The verbs 737^ 4 to blaze,’ ^ 4 to drop,’ Tjpr 4 to endure,’
4 to vomit,’ 4 to go,’ may substitute ^ for the ^ of the
first conjugation before the terminations, as injwfir, thtutt,
wfhfft, tthtw, ^rfhfrT, as ^«TPTfrt 4 Varuna approaches.’
The substitution of fv for 1% in the second pers. sing, of the
imperative is by no means restricted to the conjugations to
which it is confined by general grammar, but may be regarded
as universally alternating with the regular form ; as, Trfv (for
3Tw) ^Tqf 4 Hear the invocation :’ tjqwnt 4 Grant abundant
CO' v C\
wealth,’ from 4 to fill ;’ TlT^ni 4 Make (or grant) us
abundant (wealth).’ 4 to enclose,’ with a preposition,
makes ^fv ; as, HTPPT cT»T ffrl 4 Set open the cow-pen.’
properly requires no other modification of the base than
that of conjugation, but in the Veda the vowel of the base may
undergo alteration ; as, or 4 sacrifice ;’ Tprfv or
TTtfrfh 4 join ;’ Tfhrfff^ or TfhUTf? 4 propitiate.’ does not take
its conjugational form, as we have TtHRU for ipra ; and TH ,
properly a verb of the first conjugation in the Atmane-pada,
takes the form of the third in the Parasmai-pada ; as, wfa
•ff 4 Soma, sport thou in our heart.’
fir is sometimes substituted for fi? ; as, 2%f? £ Come
CONJUGATION.
463
Indra, rejoice with food from HW ‘ to be glad so with
‘ to sacrifice as, fta: mwWi Trfsj W 4 Invoker and purifier, do
thou sacrifice so wfsf, from WW 4 to convey wf?W, from
‘ to go and others.
Before a final nasal is very commonly elided : thus from
JPT, with ’Hr prefixed, we have ^TRTf^ ; as, tw 'iqfaTFrf? WTWfw:
4 Do thou come with those viands.’
In the second pers. plural of the Parasmai-pada various
terminations may take the place of w ; as TTTiT ; WTf^hr TjPTTmr
4 Do ye dig the earth w&i w^fprirrTTrr 4 Direct your eyes to
the sun wu, which is w, requiring Guna ; as, 'STTnVrT for 'STTiT'fr
4 Hear ye WW1?, or TFT, requiring the same ; as, WWtWW (for
WWW) 4 Bring ye forth.’ So TiWW, WVTWW, for TRW, ; also WW,
not requiring Guna, or any deviation from the usual form,
may take the place of w ; as, ttsi wwlww (for wwfw) 4 Purify the
sacrifice it may be substituted for sw ; as, WWTTW (for wusw)
4 Be ye pleased.’ xrw is the last of the series ; as, WW (for
Wt) 4 if ye be WTWW 4 Go ye to the auspicious (rite).’
A form of the potential and imperative, termed having
all the significations of those tenses (see r. 180, 181), as well as
those of the conditional and impersonal, is peculiar to the Vedas.
It also implies an engagement ; as, 4 If I succeed, I will perform :’
or expresses a doubt ; as, 4 If such be the case, will not such be
the result ?’ The rules which are given for its construction are
very incomplete, and the examples that readily offer themselves
are commonly limited to a few of the persons ; so that it is
doubtful if illustrations of the entire tense are to be met with :
at any rate, this can only be determined by a more patient
search through the Vedas than even Panini seems to have
attempted. A complete tense might, it is true, be built up from
analogy, but it would want the confirmation of authority, and
might be open to question. Indeed, from such fragmentary
examples as occur, it is evident that more tenses than one are
comprised under this denomination, and that at least three
may be recognised, each having several forms. The term
464
ON THE GBAMMAK OF THE VEDAS.
‘ Let’ may therefore, perhaps, be regarded as designating a
mood identical, as conjectured by Prof. Bopp, following the
opinion of Prof. Lassen, with the Greek subjunctive. (Trans.
Comp. Grammar, 957.) Mr. Westergaard also appears justi-
fied in designating the several forms, of which he cites
examples, as the conjunctive present, imperfect, and aorist.
We may consider them as the present, imperfect, and in-
definite praeterite of the subjunctive mood ; following the
analogy of those tenses of the indicative in construction,
although it does not appear that they denote any distinction
of time.
The general rules applicable to all the forms are the prefix-
ing of ^7 or leaving ^ or ^rr, to the terminations, with
the change of the radical vowel to the Guna equivalent, and
dispensing optionally with the characteristic of the conjugation.
When the latter is preserved, and is any other vowel than *r, it
also takes the Guna change. Thus we may have qqfir or 4iFlfrf,
TOT: or tott:, TOTnT, or TOTfiT, TO^THT, &c. in the Parasmai-
pada. In the first person dual and plural the sibilant is option-
ally rejected ; as, TO^: -^, TO*T. -*T.
In the ^tmane-pada some other changes are enjoined, but
the rule Bahulam chhandasi may always be employed to
account for deviations from the precept. Thus i* is directed
to be substituted for the initial wr of the terminations of the
second and third pers. dual present, making TO*t, TOff,
TO17T ; and a final tr is optionally changed in other persons to
T? ; as, qTF or qfF, =*iFrf -ff, qiFTTT -7T,
For some of these forms examples may not be unfrequently
found ; as, ^T*. TOUVT?T * May he grant happiness to our
steed ^FITT ‘ Who may resist him ? BMfrT MNVlfrl ‘ May
he increase our joy xnrrfiT Tnff ‘ May the gale light
upon the forest firsrrqTrrftT ‘ May the thunderbolt fall -ql
TnnfrT tftotft ‘ Let who may worship, worship ^TT ^ 71 T
^ri ‘ Mayest thou bring hither the gods WT hhttt: ‘ May
those two gratify us ‘ If indeed I were lord
CONJUGATION.
465
of beings, (I would grant your request) Tpn tottI ‘ Let him
sacrifice with the spoon ;’ TOfi tTlTTR c If wre are dis-
honest, shall we not go to hell ?’ RRTTVT 4 Let the sacrificial
vessels be taken.’ A sibilant is sometimes inserted before the
terminations of the present tense, although more usual in the
aorist : thus may make TO ; as, fVirt TO^rT 4 May the
invoker bring hither (the gods) ;’ in? ’^^Vq'^^rrrr: 4 May the two
horses bring (thee) hither.’
For the imperfect, we find the terminations of that tense in
the indicative, without the augment, added to the conjuga-
tional form of the verb ; jrvft TOTT 4 Mayest thou kill
Vritra ; mayest thou overcome the waters rIr ‘ O Soma !
know ufaTORrf ‘ Let him (or, he may) enjoy wealth
^TTrfair ‘ Let them be increased to us.’
The most frequently recurring form of 4 Lef,’ however, is
analogous to that of the indefinite praeterite or aorist, adopting
the terminations of the first praeterite, without the changes to
which as a conjugational tense it would be subject, and reject-
ing the augment. The sibilant may be inserted ; and those
verbs which admit the augment ^ insert it, when a radical
vowel may take the Vriddhi change ; others do not insert the
augment. The close analogy between this tense and the
indefinite praeterite, in all respects except the prefixing of the
augment, has suggested the notion that there is no real differ-
ence between them, the praeterite being used in the sense of the
imperative, as occurs with the prohibitive particle. We find
so large a proportion of one of the forms of this tense exem*
plified, that we may hazard an entire representation ; as,
TON’. -R
tor: -r
TO
TOT
TOR
TORT
TO!^
Thus we have R R: RRxrr. tot ‘ May he make us followers of
the right path TORT R*. RTTVR*. ‘ May they two make us
wealthy.’ We find also tor, TO*^, and tor. We have also
3 °
466
ON THE GRAMMAR OF THE VEDAS.
a number of similar forms ; as, 7T ^777 ‘ Verily he
will come, if he hear ;’ 7IWRT77 ‘ Let the gods come for
our aid ;’ 7777 i 4 Let us worship the gods, if we
be able ; 7T 7T 7#T wfHTTTPTTT 4 Let not mortals hurt our
O ^
bodies.’ We find many forms also of the long vowel w?T ;
as, oft 717 Iff 4 Who may live ?’ TIT trf fVfK^TTrriT 4 May your
winged chariot descend ;’ 77f«i rTnJTTrf 4 Whoever may give to
thee ;’ 3T717 7I7T7 4 Hear what they may utter 7W ^TT
TSTN^Ir^ ‘To whom may the gods bear?’ Some verbs take
special changes. Verbs ending in wr may shorten their vowels,
as vrr, used, as it frequently is, in the sense of 4 giving ;’
Let him give treasures to the donor but the
long vowel may also be retained ; ^777 ^?TrT 4 Let him give to
Agni.’ 77 4 to speak,’ inserts 7, as in the praeterite, becom-
ing ^rr ; as, 7J7T7*. 4 Do thou announce to the gods.’ 7
takes 7^ ; as, TTjtTF: TifTffT 777 4 May Varuna be (our) pro-
tector.’ The inflexions of the ^tmane-pada in this form of
the tense are less frequent, but they do occur ; as,
77 fhrt ‘ May Agni be pleased with our hymns ;’ 7(7 h'rR'ft
tfs: 4 if men should increase.’
The other form of the subjunctive aorist, inserting 7, follows
the analogy of the indefinite prseterite, with the same augment :
thus 77, 4 to be pleased,’ makes TtfqTrf 4 May he be pleased;’
*rf^ 4 to be happy,’ Tf^TiT ; 7 4 to cross’ or 4 to preserve,’
; as, n "77777 rnftTrf 4 May he preserve our lives.’
f*T, which does not admit may make 777 ; as, 77:
4 Mayest thou overcome the celestial water:’ so 77, 4 to sacri-
fice,’ makes 77pT ; as, 7$r 7f TEPT 4 Let those two offer sacrifice
for us.’ Further research would probably furnish other illus-
trations, but these will be sufficient to indicate the principal
modifications to which the tense, or rather the mood 4 Let’ is
liable.
An optional insertion of a sibilant takes place in those tenses
also which are analogous in import to 75^, as in the imperative
CONJUGATION.
467
and potential ; as, ^ITT (for ^nrg) 4 May Indra guide
you by it Tl»rr (for rfo) ^ ‘ With Indra, our
ally, we defy Vritra.’
As observed in the introductory remai’ks, the classification
of the verbs according to their respective conjugations is not
very regularly adhered to, nor are the conjugational character-
istics always preserved, neither are they always limited to the
conjugational tenses : thus fir? 4 to break,’ a verb of the seventh
conj., and jj ‘to die,’ of the sixth, are inflected as if belonging
to the first ; *rr?53T H^ffT ‘ He destroys the progeny of
S'ushma '3TT*rr RTW trfrr: 4 The master dies of old age,’ for
; so (for =rthjRr) RT *TFH*C 4 May good praises mag-
nify thee.’ In the following we have the conjugational pecu-
liarity combined with the termination of the second prseterite ;
^7TT«T trrf^T TSjftFtl 4 The riches which have been heard of.’ In
verbs of the second conjugation a vowel is frequently prefixed
to the terminations ; as, ^ jr^rffr 4 The slayer of Vritra
slays Vritra ;’ 4 The snake sleeps on the
ground.’ In other conjugations the vowel is omitted ; as,
(for Tt 4 O gods, protect us !’
The reduplication which is the sign of the third conjugation
is not always observed ; as, (for ^Tfir) fil ill fill 4 He
gives wealth, whatever is desired :’ and in the case of VT,
meaning ‘ to give,’ the vowel may be changed to ^ in the second
pers. sing, imper. and the benedictive ; as, Atmane-pada,
(for Vr^) 4 Give excellent food :’ so f\ra7"5f for
VTTrhr ‘ May I have’ or 4 hold.’ On the other hand, verbs not
usually reduplicated may take the form, as ^r, of the second
conj., ■q7§T f=J*l Wlfim’ 4 He desires a spoon filled (with ghee) :’
when also ^ is substituted for ^ in the syllable of reduplication.
So >T, 4 to be,’ may take the form of the third conj. ; as,
^TWTcfi 4 May he be our benefactor.’
The insertion of Tl after Hift of the second conjugation may
be extended to other verbs ; as, 4 to milk,’ ‘ the
gods milked ;’ the H of the termination being rejected : other -
3 ° 2
468
ON THE GRAMMAR OF THE VEDAS.
wise t may be added to ‘ to see vHgmum g^nff
jT^TT ‘ His bright rays shone upon mankind
where, it is said, the first pers. sing, is used for the third
plural.
^i, ‘to make or do,’ which is properly a verb of the eighth
conj., is very commonly inflected with the sign of the fifth;
as, cMrijfG, or ^ajij h. This, however, is
considered to be a different verb, or ‘to injure,’ fifth conj.,
which drops the ^ before the terminations (see p. 242).
Verbs of the ninth conjugation ending in consonants, which
usually take *TR instead of in the imperative, may substitute
; as, mrnt fsT^'41 HV ‘ Take the honey with your tongue
where the ^ of becomes *r, a not uncommon change.
‘ to take,’ undergoes a similar change : thus mmiTpR W ‘ I re-
ceive of thee GS4T sTHTt: ‘ I took the honey.’ The regular forms
also occur, ‘ to kill,’ a verb of the ninth conjugation, may
shorten its own vowel before terminations beginning with
as TTfittnfirT or TpfhEJ'fcr.
The alteration to which the terminations of the potential are
subject in the first, fourth, sixth, and tenth conjugations, may
take place in them without involving the usual conjugational
modification, and may be applied to other conjugations ; as,
for ffflN ‘ I may stay rmff for 7T3TT ‘ I may go for
as ftnrt ^ sT^W TRTrPC. ^ £ May I behold father and
mother.’ of the second conj., takes the same form, and
inserts 7, as in the third praeterite ; ‘ Let us
recite a prayer to Agni.’
The first prasterite is mostly regular : wrf, ‘ to vie with’ or
‘ contend,’ may substitute the vowel for the semivowel ; as,
fewf ‘ What Indra and you, O Vishnu, didst
contend for.’ '^nr, ‘ to be,’ may be inflected without the aug-
ment and reject the w as part of the final compound letter,
becoming "sn: ; as, ^'firr: ‘ Verily this whole
was water.’
There is a variety in the form of the augment in this tense,
CONJUGATION.
469
and also in the indefinite praeterite and conditional, and ^rr
may be substituted for even before a consonant ; as,
or wjrtn* ‘ be destroyed ’arm 4 he spread ;’ as below.
The repetition of the syllable, which is directed in the second
praeterite, may not always be observed, and a short may be
substituted for a long vowel ; as, ^tJNITC;, 4 he awoke,’ for
tTItTPIR. On the other hand, some verbs having a final or
medial short vowel make it long in the reduplication ; as, w £ to
increase,’ if Wirre: ; V ‘ to uphold,’ 3TVTC if: ‘ He who upheld
the earth also in the participle of the same tense ; as, rfinrPT
‘ who is quick,’ from tttT for ^ 4 to hasten.’ 4 to regard,’
substitutes oft for the radical syllable ; as,
4 They regarded one, and disregarded the other.’ f^, ‘ to be
distressed,’ may make f5f?T3 instead of
(rtT 4 to spread,’ and iitt 4 to go’ or 4 fall,’ reject the penulti-
mate from the radical syllable before the vowel terminations of
the second praeterite ; as, ^if: ‘ The wise have ex-
tended ;’ ^f^rfT 35 tfffm 4 We have alighted like birds.’ vnr,
‘ to shine,’ may reject its penultimate and its final before the
consonantal terminations, leaving only *f, or reduplicated
The 7T of a termination becomes V after an aspirate, and H in
conjunction with y must be the unaspirated letter, whence we
have ^arr 4 They two shone.’
^ may be substituted for 35 in the second praeterite ; as,
3U writ: 4 The waters first upheld :’ the regular form also
occurs ; as, 'STVTPFfr 4 Men have had Agni.’
The verbs H, 7T5, 175, 5, do not always insert 5 before the
signs of the reduplicate praeterite, to which it is ordinarily
prefixed : thus w7e have M ^5 (for ipfiTTiT innf?:
4 Thou hast been victor in conflicts ;’ 4 Thou
hast spread the vast sky ;’ »FTWrr W 3*# 4 We have
taken, Indra, thy right hand ;’ ^ 4 Thou
hast enclosed darkness with light.’
5 , 4 to bear,’ substitutes in the reduplicate praeterite for
the vowel in the syllable of reduplication, and retains its own
470
ON THE GRAMMAR OF THE VEDAS.
vowel unaltered, inserting ^ before the terminations, as
for hut? ; as, ufyuPR * A cow brought forth a full-aged
(calf).’
The following are considered to be anomalous forms of the
reduplicate praeterite : "3111 ^R^rPT^: (for WPT§:) ‘ The fierce
ones who poured out water ^rarPT?: (for SHRsj:) ‘ They
desired riches for f-gtufeq 4 Thou hast dropped tt
fw?n*T 4 who has abandoned’ (for !T7?rnT).
^vtj, 4 to kindle,’ may not take the usual compound form of
but repeating the vowel may reject the nasal, making
■|v ; as, £ I have lighted (a fire), most destruc-
tive of (my) foes.’
The third or indefinite praeterite presents, as might be
expected, a number of peculiar modifications. In the Mantra
( the hymns and prayers ) the verbs *R 4 to eat,’ ‘ to be
crooked,’ literally or morally, W5T ‘ to perish,’ ^ ‘ to choose,’
c to burn,’ verbs ending with ’ST, ^ ‘ to abandon,’ ^ ‘ to
make,’ tr ‘ to go,’ tPT 4 to be born,’ present various apparent
anomalies. Thus we have 4 They ate, and were
very glad ;’ where tnt can scarcely be recognised : its more
regular form would have been *nnPT, but the radical penulti-
mate has been rejected, leaving ; and before iff
becoming the hard unaspirated letter, the guttural and
sibilant form as usual 'EJ, and with the augment mjR : tr also
sometimes dispenses with the augment, as well as the vowel
preceding the termination, as in TRri Tjvf ‘ They two have cer-
tainly eaten,’ instead of ^'TWiTT. 3T rejects the usual termina-
tions, and makes instead of sa^TOrf ; as,
r 4 Do not thou, O Mitra, be averse to me.’ So we have
*5?R5T instead of ; as, ht ?t: ^rt uf#: w?
‘ May not the calumny of a venomous man destroy us where
the final has been changed to '5, and that to a nasal before a
nasal, while the augment has been rejected under the influence
of the prohibitive HT, which has also given the tense the sense
of the imperative mood. From ^*1? taking ?rr as the augment,
CONJUGATION.
471
comes T'T'RT instead of as, fa ^fhRTT: iJTjvft ^
‘ The sun has spread his beams on every side.’ ^ makes
instead of "sjrvrre^: ; as, jit iftsiTsfi ‘Do not consume us.’
trr, ‘ to till,’ makes ^nn: instead of wrat: ; as, ?rr nr
‘ Thou hast filled heaven and earth •’ TV to abandon,’ forms
'Jnw in place of ’S=T55ff: ; as, HTPtfi mTMil'vqT 4 Thou hast aban-
doned it, like the bearer of a load (his burthen).’ ^ is used
with the terminations of the first praeterite, changing the vowel
according to general rules ; as, WHIM ‘ The dawning
rays made the minds conscious’ (for ^nfiT^:). tr may be in-
flected without the augment ; w jfa TfiJpjijfr sttrtt (for
tttpt) 4 Thy praisers obtained wealth through thee it may also
drop its final before the regular terminations ; as, T*PT
4 We have combined with the fluid.’ Although the prayers
(Mantra) are specified, the Brahmana furnishes instances of
similar anomalies : thus from 4 to be produced,’ instead of
we have ^sr?T ^7 ^ttt: ‘ His tooth was produced,’
as well as the regular form ; as, tj Trr fa it: 4 They
did not take them, for he came.’
The verbs P, usually take the terminations of the
first praeterite in the third, with prefixed (r. 197. e) ;
ff«ft s 4 They have made this salutation to them :’ so
^TOtTT instead of ^mrr 4 He has died ^TTT for ^falrf 4 He
tore and xn^rnTt: ^rr^r^FfT (for ^tranr) 4 As one who has
ascended from ridge to ridge.’ i
In the first person sing, of the indefinite praeterite, *T$T,
leaving *r, may be substituted for the termination, when ^ is
prefixed to it, and the augment is rejected ; as, ^ 4 I
slew Yritra,’ for ’Sr^fvpi ; so 31 177 i 4 1 went to the
branch of the tree.’
JPT , ‘to presei’ve,’ takes different forms in the third praeterite ;
as, ^*TT7T 7ft fjrgT^TTjT Jprpr ^JTcnf (or TUrffa) 4 Do you two,
Mitra and Varuna, protect these dwellings ;’ the tense having
the force of the imperative. The regular forms, ^rrfaTfair,
may also be met with.
472
ON THE GRAMMAR OF THE VEDAS.
The rejection of the augment in this tense after the prohi-
bitive HTT, with the sense of the imperative, is far from invari-
able ; as, *TT q't Mtx'liti'qqtu: ‘ Let not other seed be sown
in your field but, as will have been seen in some of the
preceding examples, considerable latitude prevails in regard to
the augment, and it is not unfrequently omitted ; as, yffqgi
‘ He was born strong to endure.’
In forming the third praeterite of the causal with reduplica-
tion, the radical vowel may be subject to a Guna change in
the syllable of repetition. In the Veda the change commonly
occurs in the radical syllable ; as, 'flifNrf ‘ He delighted.’
Verbs having ^ for their penultimate, retain it unaltered, as
to increase,’ makes ; so ‘ All
have magnified Indra.’
The indefinite praeterite of the verbs and
does not admit of the reduplication of the base in the causal
mode (r. 210. a) ; as, HT ‘ Do not disap-
point (cause to fail) the desire of thy eulogist, dependent on
thee;’ m FTI^J^TtfiiT (for ^ScPTir) £ Let not fire make thee
resound :’ so FcTqfrr ‘ He sent (made to go) ‘ He
inflicted pain ;’ instead of , wfftTrf.
We meet with some anomalous forms of the third praeterite
of the causal, in which the usual sign of the mode, ?rq, is
followed by the Vaidilc form of 'a, ^T3iT, with wr inserted,
analogously to the compound form of the second praeterite :
thus we have '5TvqrHi'^iH'^: ‘ He caused grief to be allayed
IHHmnqr. ‘ He begot progeny ;’ clinch: £ He caused a heap
to be collected ;’ 'tnq w<*: e He caused to be delighted.’ ■q, ‘ to
purify,’ in the causal may take a similar construction, but in
the benedictive tense ; as, £ May he make us pure.’
‘ to know,’ takes a somewhat similar form in the third
praeterite, but without a causal import ; as, ‘ they
knew ;’ as the same verb does optionally in regular grammar
(r. 196. c).
The forms of derivative verbs or modes which are recog-
CONJUGATION.
473
nised in ordinary use are found in the Veda with occasional
peculiarities. Some of those relating to causals have been
adverted to. Those which are formed from nouns, most com-
monly imply ‘ desire’ or 4 wish,’ and may be inflected without
the prolongation of the radical vowel, or the substitution of ^ ;
as, faqqq 4 He wishes for a friend.’ qq, however, makes
qtflud ‘ He wishes for a son ;’ qrftqq ‘ He desires progeny.’
MrHI shortens its owrn vowel ; as, ‘ He battled with
Indra.’ The most usual forms, however, are not verbal in-
flexions, but nouns formed from nominal verbs with q, and
participles, as fq^q:, wrqrqq, and others, which will be subse-
quently noticed.
Several examples of the intensive verb rejecting the q are
cited, as presenting varieties of inflexion. Thus vq, 4 to hold,’
may make or ^rqfit ; q 4 to be,5 qtafirT or qta^flfTr ; ffR
‘ to be sharp,’ qfqqi ; ^ ‘ to go,’ ; as, qraff ^ qq
‘ O Soma ! the foe, or wrath, comes.’ trot, 4 to go,’ in-
serts qt, and with qn prefixed makes in the present participle
WRfaOTrT. ‘ to go,’ in the same participle occurs qqfq-
so q,4 to do,’ makes qfrqiq 4 doing repeatedly.’ qrf^, ‘ to
go,’ occurs in the third praet. third pers. sing. qfqq^'iT ; as,
‘ Foretelling what is to happen.’ q, ‘ to nourish,’
pres, part., occurs HftqrT ; as, fq qf HTR^tqqlq firRn 4 (Agni)
who thrusts his tongue among the herbs.’ aq ‘ to injure,’ in
the same,’ makes rffqsqTT ; as, qfqsqrft T^qq: q*qR ‘ The rays
of the consuming sun.’ gq, 4 to shine,’ makes in the part.
<?fqprt. TT of the third conj., ‘to cross,’ ; as,
H U/d ri *. 4 of (one) rushing forth with power.’ qq 4 to go,’
qfl^qq . qq 4 to abandon,’ qth|Tn^- qq, 4 to cleanse,’ in the
third pers. sing, redup. praet. forms instead of qqr# ; and
RT, with 'srr prefixed, in the third pers. sing, of the present
tense occurs as qnqqlqfqr ; as, q^qqftq^Tqqlqf^r qittr 4 (The
sound) comes to the ear as if uttering (a pleasant) speech.’
Verbs compounded with prepositions are, as will have been
already seen, of frequent recurrence ; but great license is taken
3 p
474
ON THE GRAMMAR OF THE VEDAS.
in the collocation of the preposition, and it is as often as not
detached from the verb, and inserted in any other part of the
Pada or line of the verse in w hich it is used ; as, srfrwrf qiyifa
wfl ‘ Come with thy two steeds to the dwelling where the
regular form is wrnrrfV. Again, ^TT ‘ Come,
Indra, with thy loud-neighing steeds and Hf^TT ‘ He
strikes down with the fist.’
Verbal Derivatives. — Infinitive. — A variety of termi-
nations are employed to form the infinitive, in place of the
now exclusive termination tht, and they are such as in most
cases to justify the conjecture of Dr. Rosen, that they are the
dative cases of obsolete nouns, used to imply * for’ or ‘ on
account of.’ They are, i. ir, as rrff ‘ to bring wealth.’
2. itfT, also leaving it; (the object of the Tf in this and similar
following alternatives being to indicate that the radical vowel
has an acute accent ;) as, fTPTRfT ‘ for those two to go ;’ from
3. w, as ifbrw Vi: ‘ Grant years to live.’ 4. W^;,
of which no example is given. 5. «KT, as ipr ‘ to send ; where
the of the affix preventing Guna, we are to consider the I?
of IT as the result of Sandhi. 6. leaving ; as, ffsjfTfTT
‘ They desired to pour water to behold (him).’
7, 8. gw, ^rwfcr; as, ^r«t ‘to fill the belly.’ 9, 10. crnifl,
ofiwpr : as, "3m ‘ to invoke ye both Indra and
Agni.’ 11, 12. snzr, ^paNr, where the intimates that the
form is to folluw the analogy of the conjugations inserting w? ;
as, 'S'HT TT*nr: ‘ to propitiate both with wealth ;’ tTth-
^Tni% ‘ (the places) for Indra and Vayu to drink
Soma.’ 13. fit, as ‘ to give.’ 14. WBT, as ‘ to pour
in libation. 15* TTT*^, as ^THT ‘to do.
There are also similar forms of the infinitive, which are
regarded as anomalous, and not constructed with the above
affixes ; as, tjtj ‘ to go ;’ ‘ to ascend vraiftraj ‘ not to
distress ;’ ‘ to see ;’ and ‘ to explain,' from wr ‘ to
tell.’ Other forms are used after certain words, as after
implying ‘ one who is able,’ as i ‘ able to go, the
VERBAL DERIVATIVES.
475
affix being cfftpr ; or ‘ able to write,’ where the
affix is the =s barring Guha. Infinitives are also formed
with ; as, mzjws? ‘ he found much to do.’
The same affixes, wtor and ^nr, form infinitive or abstract
nouns with the verbs wr, «s, 7, 7T*r, *TT; as,
’HlWIrii: wfaf-r) ‘ They proceed till the stopping ;’ ttu wntnfl-
%rft: ‘ Before sunrising 'QTT TRTT^TT^tt=Jurf: ‘ Before the loosing
of the calves;’ w*r H=rf^7ffi7vn iffirar ‘ It is to be offered to fire
before speaking;’ trn M^ftrfT: ‘before going;’ w^TfftTTnTW-
fttfgfrf e He stays attentive until the offering ->R | d Ph rfl fw y fd
‘ He stands till the wearying’ (until he is faint or weary) ;
‘ We willingly remain till being born.’
ott, * to go,’ takes ; as, 'qTT fetftSFPT 4 O caller
(Vishnu) before the thronging battle :’ so does 77 ‘ to strike ;’
as, 'qTT ‘ Before striking mortals.’
Similar terminations form indeclinable words having the
force of the future participle or gerund, importing ‘ what is or
ought to be vf ‘ It is not to be spoken barbarously ;’
^RT[T?r * It is to be bathed ;’ ^g"S?tnr ‘ to be devised,’ ‘ to be
seen ;’ KTHT * not to be denied by a foe.’
Participles. — The affixes employed in regular grammar to
form the participles of the future and analogous participial
nouns may be used, subject to modification, in the Veda.
Thus the terminations of the second praeterite, respectively
forming the participles of the two voices (r. 237, 238) are
indiscriminately employed; as, tfr s ‘who was
collecting the fire ;’ til 'srcft.'ff 'srqrg: ‘He, O Agni,
who was unfriendly to us, and wished us evil.’ H’JT, ‘ to give,’
when preceded by the substantive *rf?T, may become
instead of irfq^r ; as, r^wvj ^rfvr 4 I invoke thee,
O Agni, liberally giving gifts.’
The past participle of the passive presents several deviations
from the received forms, assuming in some instances a more
regular structure than that in common use. Thus tpj, ‘ to go’
or ‘ sit,’ makes instead of ^ in various cases ; as after a
3 p 2
476
ON THE GRAMMAR OF THE VEDAS.
negative, ‘ not gone after f?r, as iftTTT fbwr
‘ The invoker abiding among the progeny of Manu.’ So ,
‘to be wet,’ with a negative, makes ; r^T, ‘ to hasten,’ may
make instead of W3& ; and w#, with u prefixed, may make
the same, jtf#. it, ‘ to go,’ may form Trt ; and VX, ‘ to take
pains,’ nit ; as, ftpgniT: ‘ who is capable of all things.’ il, ‘ to
cook,’ may make either ^HTTT or ftgTT ; as, ^Turret TTTHT: ‘ The
Soma juices are dressed for thee, Indra ;’ ‘nsfrTT fft ?J?t: ‘ Our
vessels are prepared.’ From ftjrn, ‘ to serve,5 we may have
3ftf ; as, #: ‘ Compounded in the midst.’ The part,
of 5f, ‘to be crooked’ or ‘to hurt,’ may be ?it ; as, ’Hirin’
t 'O
‘ The uninjured receptacle of clarified butter :’ but not
if preceded by nix ; as, ^ 4 fLp n I nrsf ‘ Let us unmo-
lested receive our meat.5 The regular form occurs also, espe-
cially in connexion with TTPT ; as, HT vfr nTfft 5tfxfT. ‘ Let not
Soma be averse to us.5 The following are irregular in inserting
^ ; as, JjftTrt for 77TR ‘ taken ;’ rTKtfHTT for ftr-nst ‘ impeded ;’
for ?tt3t ‘ stopped :’ or with Trt, On the other
hand, ‘ to ask,’ and vw ‘ to go,’ may reject making
and ViTR ; as, %>tt ^ ‘ O Aswins ! ye have
thrice (revived) the departed Syava.’
A long ^ may be substituted for the short vowel, to which
the ^TT of VT and ?T is changed in the past participle, as for
f^lT; and so it may in the indeclinable form, as ^bVT for f^mr.
VT may retain its initial when preceded by TT, VV, or ; as,
V$r HTHT vfviT ‘ The mother preserves the well-preserved em-
bryo V* filURTrfr ‘ Wealth placed in (or offered to) Agni ;’
vfHfVTTT Tf VHVT ‘ Like manly energies in battle.’
‘ to bear,’ may substitute for its regular form in the
indeclinable past part. Trrvl and TTTCT; as, TTTVI TTVf^TV and
‘ Having been equal to (or conquered) foes.’ VrT is
sometimes added to w ; as, ttvwt rnvrv ‘ Suparna having
gone to heaven :’ and f may be substituted for the final ; as,
*Tc5Wfv ‘ Having washed fi’ee of dirt vbvt WHW VT|V
‘ Having drank of the Soma juice, he has thriven.’ frf may
VERBAL DERIVATIVES.
477
be added either to ^ or tSTT ; as, ‘ Having worshipped
the gods ;’ ‘ Having drank.’
■5 ‘ to purify,’ and 31 ‘ to swim,’ make their vowels long before
the form of the indecl. past participle with 11 ; as, f^PTJT, f^3pl.
The rule that confines the past part, to the termination ti,
when the verb is compounded with a preposition, is not always
observed ; as, Tnq ^fqp^T ‘ Having asked.’ On the other hand,
11 may be used where there is no such prefix ; rTTJT
4 Having worshipped those gods.’
Participles of the futures and analogous participial nouns
are formed with the usual affixes: thus we have with inr, *P2l
‘ mortal,’ from c to die ;’ SEfrzi ‘ to be hurt,’ from m ;
4 a heifer,’ from 4 to spread ;’ ^1'ai, or with WiT , ^RT 4 to be
dug.’ tht, with ^ preceding, forms a fern, noun with 11, as
in <T^rni <**££1 4 Be pure for the sacrifice to the
gods, a holy rite.’ *rni 4 dreadful,’ 4 what is to be feared,’ and
ireci ‘ what is to be trained,’ are considered as irregular forms
with this affix, from vft 4 to fear,’ and 4 to go.’
4 to take,’ preceded by ’Srfh or nfiT, takes (r. 248. a),
but the forms are considered most appropriated to the Veda ;
ri 4 Nothing is to be accepted from him ;’ JTWTit IlfiPTsi
4 It is not to be taken of me.’ gr 4 to call,’ with ^ prefixed,
forms a participial noun with this affix, changing its semivow el
and diphthong to ^5, as IfTfni:, meaning, it is said, 4 battle’ or
4 conflict,’ or more properly 4 challenge,’ 4 defiance TT
^ 4 They contend, verily, in defiance of the gods.’
The same forms future participles from irft 4 to take,’ with
Tit or n prefixed ; as, T^fai 4 to be taken up,’ whl 4 to be con-
secrated :’ also with 4 to discriminate,’ w ith ^ prefixed ;
yftriui 4 what is to be left.’ So 4 to ask,’ with ^TT prefixed,
makes with the same 4 to be reverently addressed
whence it may mean 4 a holy person ;’ as,
4 The abounder in food repairs to the sage, the upholder (of
all).’ The same is added to 4 to sew ;’ as, Jifjnffiai 4 to be
resewn.
478
ON THE GRAMMAR OF THE VEDAS.
The following are said to be formed with TnTiT ; ‘ that
which is to be cut’ (as wood), from ^tt ‘ to cut,’ with pre-
fixed, and the radical consonants inverted ; as, rt
‘ Let him who is desirous of cattle collect fuel
O
‘ a text of the Veda,’ from forming also, as in regular
grammar, with other affixes, and '3U (r. 247. c) : >tt^T
‘ what is to be,’ from TFTT^I £ to be praised,’ from ? ; Ttr^TUT
4 to be collected,’ from rq ; used in composition with VJ, the
form may also be as or T«7^npT? 4 gold.’
may be added to »T^T and $TR, in a transitive or causal
sense, without the causal sign ; as, for ^RfifiT, for
arnfuri. The verbs tt 4 to cross,’ TT and v>f 4 to choose,’ in
forming nouns of agency with w, prefix to it T or '3!, as or
TT^iT ; as, Tf TT^rTT 4 He is not his opposer or conceder
TTJTWT fft RFT 4 May Tw ashta, with the protecting
goddesses, be our guardian.’
Verbal nouns may be formed with ^ from verbs ending w ith
^TT or tjjt 4 to go,’ ^ 4 to kill,’ TT^T 4 to be born ,’ when the
base follows the analogy of the reduplicate praeterite : these
nouns may have a verbal government ; as, tifq: 7?f*i 4 a drinker
(of) the Soma juice ;’ ?f^r: 4 a giver of kine ;’ ‘ a
wielder of the thunderbolt 3TTT ^^nrufr tt 4 Like heroes,
verily, swift-going combatants so slfTi:, Similar deriva-
tives from 4 to bear,’ T? 4 to carry,’ ^7^ 4 to go,’ 4 to
fall,’ may prolong the vowel of reduplication ; as, TTTCriV:,
TRf?*., ^TTsrfFr: . Verbs ending in ^ may change the
vowel of the base to 'g- ; as, from tt, 4 to cross,’ comes "fTTfr:: ;
and JT, ‘to sound,’ *PTTb.
tjtt , 4 to eat,’ may take fir to form an abstract in combina-
tion w ith tt, for ttpcpt 4 same :’ the vowel and sibilant are
rejected ; H after tt becomes v, as in the inflexions of verbs ;
and the result is Ttfiv 4 eating similarly,’ tt becoming it before
an aspirate.
Nouns of agency may be formed from T«T and TTT^, when
they imply 4 possessing’ or 4 protecting,’ H'ET 4 to preserve,’ and
DERIVATION.
479
rxt * to churn r^T ‘ (We invoke) thee, protector of
Brahmans "3TT vft jfftrfW ftp} ‘ (Come to) our cow- bestowing
rite M'ijiR tffqrsi q: ‘ The path-protectors of our ways ^fMt-
4 Upon the churners of clarified butter.5
»f5T ‘ to be born,5 tttt * to possess,’ 4 to dig,’ '3PT and
‘ to go,’ may reject their finals, and form nouns of agency
in ^ ; as, nfat 2^ '^TT ‘ Thou art, Indra, the bestower
of cows, the protector of men :’ so ‘ what is born of
water ‘ a well-digger ;’ TfftreiT: a deity so termed ;
4 a leader.’
Nominal verbs, implying 4 wish’ or ‘ disposition,5 may form
nouns of agency with 'ct, in some cases elongating the vowel
of the base, in others leaving it short ; as, faSTSt ‘ one who
wishes to be a friend ‘ one who desires (another’s)
happiness:’ but 4 sin,5 4 to sin,’ makes its vowel long; as,
^nrni: * who wishes evil,’ ‘ malignant xrTrf y?.Tff*rnrt: 4 Pre-
serve us from the malignant thief.’ So in the present parti-
ciple the vowel may be long after nominal verbs from wsg,
H as, VTvjmvr 4 who cherishes horses ;’ ‘ who
affects or honours the gods 4 who desires happiness.5
In some instances other words are substituted for the originals;
as, for 5^, as 4 wickedly disposed ;’ for TT^T, as
<yfe7!r?3T 4 desirous of wealth.’
Nominal Derivatives. — The formation of derivative
nouns and adverbs from primitive nouns, as observable in the
Vedas, is regulated by the same principles as nominal deriva-
tion in general grammar. The same affixes are subjoined, and
with the same effect ; and the words so constructed are for the
most part the same as those met with elsewhere. A few may,
however, be considered as peculiar, either in their structure or
their meaning ; of which the following are some examples.
IT, from or other technical affixes containing the semi-
vowel, forms many derivatives of special application ; such as
nouns implying locality of production, as iron c produced in a
cloud,’ 4 generated by lightning;’ as, wnTTO ^ Rasnn
480
ON THE GRAMMAR OF THE VEDAS.
‘ Salutation both to that which is born in the cloud, and
which is generated by the lightning (rain).’ ■qjpq and ^rPr^r"
‘ produced in season,’ ‘ produced in the foundation,’ are consi-
dered to be irregularly formed from and with inr.
IT, as derived from ^TTR, causes the elision of the final vowel
or syllable, and Vriddhi change of the vowel of the primitive :
it forms words of similar import with ttvttt ‘ the sky,’ and Tnff
‘ a river ;’ as, Trrn? ‘ produced in the sky,’ * in a river.’
HfiTW, ‘a stream,’ may make either HTiq or, with ttw, HTTPS
4 produced in a stream.’ The terms and STg:, ‘an evil
spirit,’ take inr in the sense of possessing similar propensities ;
ITT TT TT^: ‘ That body of thine, O Agni, which is
destructive as a Rakshas:’ so STTHST. It may be added to
form attributives of a month, or of the body ; as, HTHt
‘ a cloudy month ;’ ^ijpETT TT^: * a vigorous body.’ The term
^TTTl may take if, to imply ‘ property Tr HTTrSTW ‘ That
vessel may belong to the Asuras.’ If ‘ illusion’ is signified, it
takes ^ttt ; as, ^TTrpt HTST ‘ infernal delusion.’ it may be added
to PTcft, *TiTfft, and ^TT«T, to intimate ‘ praise of ;’ as, Ys?T ‘ a
hymn or the like in praise of Revati :’ so TTHTd, Ffrer. H, from
tt?5, may be added to HH, if preceded by T?r ‘ strength,’ or
tttTTT ‘ fame,’ alternating with TS, leaving ^T, and implying
‘ possession ;’ as, or ‘ who is possessed of
strength ;’ TT^ffiT^T: or TTsfM'Tfcr: ‘ who is possessed of cele-
brity.’ The same affixes or may be added to to sig-
nify ‘ made ;’ as, trftrfH: q?s:, Tpjfrrr:, or TjfffW: ‘ By paths made
by those of old.’
•q, from inr, may be added to ws, to imply ‘purified by,’
as in qwjr'H'OT ^rfq: ‘ He of whom the oblation is purified by
water :’ to words to imply ‘ fitness ;’ ir»rrftT HTT*T ‘ I pour
honey fit for oblation.’ TT7T may take the place of HH in a
word such as when it designates a hymn in which
the word TSH occurs, and when the derivative with inr is
applied to the fuel placed on the altar ; as, s^PTT fflRU ‘ the
wood placed on the altar with the hymn Varchaswat:’ so
DERIVATION.
481
means 4 fuel placed with the hymn in which the term Ritu
occurs,’ With ^rf^PT, in a similar sense, the affix may
be ; as, wf^PfNpJ<pnffT ‘ He places the wood with the
hymn or ‘ that has the term As' win.’ If the words
Murddhan and TJPT occur in a hymn, thence named
the affix may be iw'l ; as, ■T^VTfTT ‘ He places
the fuel with the hymn Murddhanvat.’
HTt is peculiar to the Veda only in its connexion with
forming 4 manifest,’ as in ’'rrfewt ‘ The lovely
manifest (light) increases.’
The possessive affix *TiTq, leaving T?T or *r?^, forms two dif-
ferent words with T. 4 wealth,’ T3"iT or tfWiT ; as, jft^T
4 Giving kine is the delight of the wealthy ;’ ^fnnT*T trfi?-
Tt^Tt 4 the opulent cherisher.’ After an ^ or an the termi-
nation is T?r ; as, gfr^TT 4 the possessor of horses.’ After a
noun ending in ^T, which has been substituted for another vowel,
as Tirsj for it inserts a nasal ; as, ’HRrw?T 4 having eyes.’
may be added to the objective cases of personal pro-
nouns, to imply 4 like,’ 4 such as,’ as *TTTrT 4 such as I,’
‘ such as thou ;’ ^ (qiun JlTTfr: 4 (Accept) the sacrifice of a
worshipper like me ;’ r^TTPT ^ ^Tfr'ETW 4 Such as thou
has never been nor will be born.’ Words which are formed
with the same affix, and in a like sense, if they end in a sibi-
lant, may retain the final unchanged, as 4 like the sky,’
rf ‘ like Angiras,’ JT'Tt^rT 4 like a man ;’ as,
14 14 1 fd '-t rf 4 O Agni ! like a man ; Angiras like An-
giras ; like Yayati.’
^ may be used as a possessive affix ; as, tyfloy ?T 4 as
a charioteer (soothes) his weary steed.’
Possessives formed with f%i=r may require the prolongation
of the finals of certain words ; as, 4 who has camels ;’
4 who has a heart gTTrfe 4 what has two.’
The affix *H47 may require or not the change of a final sibi-
lant, as H'THWH or 4 made of iron :’ after it drops
its initial ; as, (VumiH ufVffT 4 the sun with a golden car.’
3 «
482
ON THF. GRAMMAR OF THE VEDAS.
Numerals may take, without change of import, the affixes
or ; as, ‘ He created the seven times seven
(the forty-nine) Maruts s ‘ Half-months hav-
ing fifteen days.’
rfffrr may be added to and ^ without affecting their
meanings ; rf | Ph ‘ all,’ ^■snrrffT: £ a divinity and to ^T, f$re,
and ^rfh?, to denote ‘ making’ or ‘ producing as, ^TWTfk: * who
makes happy or in the sense of £ condition as, f^TTfnfiT:
* auspiciousness,’ ‘ happiness.’
Ordinals may be formed with vj as well as ; as, or
£ fifth.’
Before the terminations of the comparative and superlative
a nasal may be inserted or retained ; xjTrfvpfltt ‘ a better road ;’
‘ most destructive of thieves.’ substitutes w for
its final ; as, £ one who is most bountiful.’ xfvjrT
substitutes f for the last syllable ; as, xyfiim: xv/lvp ‘ the best
charioteer of charioteers.’
Prepositions may take Tf?T, to form nouns implying ‘going
as, TnfjT PTrTT TtlTBlin £ The deity goes by (the path) going
down or going up.’
The terms trfutjfTSjTr and are irregularly formed
with ^ ; as, *TT rJT tJTbffwr f^^TT FTT xrfbrfx^RT ffrpT £ May
no enemies harm thee ; may no adversaries harm thee.’
Indeclinables may be formed from pronouns with ^T, as
£ here ;’ or vrr, ^rVTT £ thus,’ cfcvn ‘ how’ or ‘ why as,
‘ How may we give ?’ tp$ and may be used instead of
WTTT.
Compounds. — The rules of composition are rarely departed
from : a few peculiarities may be met with.
Thus, compounded with or with does not drop
its final nasal, as ‘vigorous ;’ as, ~|mHH£ A
pair of horses full of vigour, bearers of Indra
‘ Thou wast, Mena, (daughter) of Vrishanaswa.’
fqUTT and jqTiTTT are considered to be irregular forms in a
Dwandwa compound ; as, ^ m WT fwumTrTTT ‘ My father
COMPOUNDS.
483
and mother came to me.’ The order may be reversed ; as,
*TTrnnf^?rrr. In the Dwandwa compounds %*Rrf5l%lT ‘ winter
and the dewy season,’ and the gender is that of the
first, and not, as more usual, of the last member of the
compound.
as the last member of a Tatpurusha or Bahuvrihi com-
pound, preceded by a word ending in a short ^ or T, may in
a prayer or hymn (Mantra) require the insertion of a sibilant ;
as, proper names ; ‘ brightly shining.’
When follows fa, the two last letters of the numeral
are rejected ; as, ‘ a hymn of three stanzas.’
THTT, as the last member of a Bahuvrihi compound, may
terminate in ; as, ‘ Having much
offspring, he entered the earth.’
Nouns ending in ^ do not always add =* to form an epithet ;
as, *nrf1Tij ‘ one whose mother or father has been slain
not
Before ‘ who delights,’ and tst * what stays or is,’ Tt?
may become ; as, *rwr?: ‘ a friend ‘ Bring together.’
It occurs before other nouns ; as, xfTmnw *r*rejf(T ‘ May you
magnify that which is (your) united praise.’
The instances of Syntax which are given by Panin i are but
few, and consist chiefly of the substitutions of one case or of
one tense for another ; irregularities for which the general rule
Bahulam chhandasi will account. They are neither of sufficient
extent or importance to be cited. And it may be observed of
the Vedas, as of other writings, that, as the far greater portion
has a metrical construction, syntax is but of subordinate consi-
deration, and offers little that is peculiar or embarrassing.
3 Q 2
-
'
’
INDEX I.
Abstract nouns, p. 329.
Accents, grave, acute, circumflex, 6.
Adjectives, 75. degrees of com-
parison of, 76. syntax of, 403.
Adverbs, 93. alphabetical list of,
ib. syntax of, 407.
Affixes, (1) inflectional; of declen-
sion, 29. of conjugation, 116,
1 1 7. (2) comparative, 76. (3)
derivative ; of verbal derivatives,
309. of nominal derivatives, 3 29.
of miscellaneous nouns, 330. of
possessives, of degrees of com-
parison, pronominals, and nu-
merals, 347. of indeclinables,
349-
Aggregative nouns, 329.
Akriti, a kind of metre, 444.
Akshara-chhandas, a class of me-
tres, 435,
Alphabet, 1. order of, 2.
Alphabetical list of adjectives,
77, 78. of adverbs, 93. of affixes
(verbal), 309. of affixes (nomi-
nal), 329. of conjunctions, 103.
of Gati prefixes, 99. of inde-
clinables, 92. of indicatory let-
ters, 107. of particles, 104. of
past participles, 293. of pro-
nouns, 80. of verbs not inserting
136. of verbs of each conju-
gation (see Conjugations).
Anga, or inflective base ; of nouns,
28. of verbs, 109.
Anubandhas, or indicatory letters,
106. general and special, 106,
107.
Anusht'ubh, a kind of metre, 436.
Anusw&ra, 2. changes of, 20.
Appellatives, 329.
Arddha-visarga, 25.
Arya, a kind of metre, 444.
Aryagiti, a kind of metre, 446.
Asht'i, a kind of metre, 441.
Atidhriti, a kind of metre, 443.
Atijagati, a kind of metre, 440.
Atikriti, a kind of metre, 444.
Atisakkari, a kind of metre, 441.
Atmane-pada, or reflective voice,
1 15. terminations of,i 16. substi-
tuted for the Parasmai-pada,2 7 7 .
Attributives, 329.
Atyasht'i, a kind of metre, 441.
Augment, temporal, 124, 132, 141.
the letter ?(, 135.
Avvayi-bhava compounds, 371.
Bahuvrihi compounds, 365.
Base, inflective; of nouns, 28. of
verbs, 109.
Benedictive mood, 114. termina-
tions of, 1 1 7. formation of,
139. syntax of, 422.
Cases of nouns, 29. syntax of, 3 79.
Causal verb ; formation of, 146.
inflexions of, 155. voices of,
284. governing double accusa-
tive, 382. syntax of, 425.
Classification of letters, 2, 6, 7.
48R
INDEX I.
Combination or conjunction of let-
ters, 8. of vowels, ib. of conso-
nants, 1 6. of hard and soft con-
sonants, ib. of dentals, 18. of
nasals, ib. of Anuswara, 20. of
semivowels, ib. of sibilants, 21.
of F, 22. of Visarga, 24.
Comparison, degrees of, 76.
Comparative degree, 76, 77.
Compound consonants, 3.
Compound metre, 434.
Compound praeterite tense, 129.
Compound verbs, 277.
Compound words ; classes of, 333.
Dwandwa, 3 33-Tatpurusha, 336.
Bahuvribi, 363. Avyayi-bhava,
371. general rules, 373.
Conditional mood, 114. termina-
tions of, 1 17. formation of, 141.
syntax of, 422.
Conjugation, principles of, 1 1 7.
Conjugational inflexion, 109. ter-
minations, 1 1 6. tenses, 112.
Conjugations, how named and dis-
tinguished, 109. first, 163. se-
cond, 204. third, 221. fourth,
227. fifth, 240. sixth, 243. se-
venth, 232. eighth, 237. ninth,
260. tenth, 267.
Conjunction of vowels, 8. of con-
sonants, 16.
Conjunctions, 103. syntax of, 409.
Consonants, order of, 2. com-
pound, 3. hard and soft, 7.
combination of, 16.
Dand'aka, a kind of metre, 444.
Declension, general rules of, 28.
Declension of »fr, 30.
of nouns, ending in
and ’FT, 30. in F and 34- in
^ and 38. in and
44. in F, 46. in F, 47. in
,sfr and 48. in consonants,
49. in gutturals, 30. in palatals,
ib. in dentals, 33. in labials, 60.
in nasals, ib. in semivowels, 66.
in sibilants, ib. in F, 72.
of participles in ’FrT
and FrT, 56.
of possessives in FIT
and F7T, 36.
Derivation, 283.
Derivatives ; verbal, 283, 308.
nominal, 328.
Derivative verbs, use of, 424.
Desiderative verb ; formation of,
149. inflexions of, 136. syntax
of, 423.
Devanagari alphabet, 1.
Dhatu, or root, 103.
Dhriti, a kind of metre, 442.
Dwandwa compounds, 333.
Dwigu compounds, 362,
Expletives, 104.
Feet, in prosody, 433.
Frequentative verb, 151. inserting
F, 132. omitting F, 133. form
of, 157. syntax of, 423.
Future, first or definite, 1x3. ter-
minations of, 1 1 6. formation of,
137. syntax of, 416.
second or indefinite, 113.
terminations of, 117. formation
of, 138. syntax of, 416.
Gana-vritta, a class of metres,
444-
Gati prefixes, 98, 101.
Gayatri, a kind of metre, 433.
Genders of the noun, 28.
Giti, a kind of metre, 446.
Gityarya, a kind of metre, 448.
Guna letters or substitutes, 7.
F, augment, 133. when not in-
serted, ib.
INDEX I.
487
Imperative mood, 1 14. termina-
tions of, 1 1 7. formation of, 139.
syntax of, 418.
Imperfect tense, or first praeterite,
1 12. terminations of, 116. for-
mation of, 124. syntax of, 413.
Impersonal verbs, 16 1, 410.
Indeclinables, 92, 349. syntax of,
407.
Indeclinable nouns, 92.
Indicative mood, 112.
Infinitive, formation of, 286. syn-
tax of, 423.
Inflectional terminations of nouns,
29. of verbs, 1 16.
Inflexion, principles of, 28.
Interjections, 103. syntax of, 410.
Jagati, a kind of metre, 439.
Karmmadharaya compounds, 360.
Kridanta (verbal) derivatives, 285.
Kriti, a kind of metre, 443.
Letters, 1. classification of, 6.
combination of, 8.
Matrachhandas, a class of metres,
446.
Matrasamaka, a kind of metre, 448.
Metre, principles of, 433. kinds
of, 435-
Moods, 1 12. indicative, ib. impe-
rative, 1 14. potential, ib. bene-
dictive, ib. conditional, ib.
Nagari letters, 1.
Nominal derivatives, 328. classes
of, 329.
Nominal verbs ; formation of, 161.
syntax of, 426.
Nouns; inflexions of. 28. declen-
sions of, 30 (see Declension) ;
indeclinable, 92. verbal, 308.
syntax of, 377.
Numbers of the noun, 28. of the
verb, 1 1 6.
Numerals, 86, 347.
Optative or benedictive mood, 1 14.
Ordinals, 90, 348.
Padas or voices of the active verb,
115. changes of, 276.
Pankti, a kind of metre, 437.
Parasmai-pada, 115. changes of,
276.
Participles; kinds of, 287. of the
present tense, ib. of the second
praeterite, 289. indefinite past,
290. list of irregular past, 293.
future active, 296. future pas-
sive or neuter, 297. indeclin-
able, 303. of repetition or ad-
verbial, 307. syntax of, 426.
Particles, 92. words used as, 102,
prefixes or affixes, 104.
Passive voice, formation of, 143.
Patronymic derivatives, 329.
Persons of the tenses, 116.
Possessives ; declension of, 57.
derivation of, 343.
Potential mood, 1 14. terminations
of, 1 1 7. formation of, 139. syn-
tax of, 420.
Prakriti, a kind of metre, 443.
Praeterite, 1st or imperfect, 112.
terminations of, 116. formation
of, 124. syntax of, 413.
2d or perfect, 1 13. ter-
minations of, 1 1 6. formation of,
123. compound, 129. syntax
of, 414.
3d or indefinite past,
1 13. terminations of, 116. form-
ation of, 129. syntax of, 414.
Prepositions, 98. in combination,
ib. singly, 1 01. alphabetical list
of, 99. effect upon voices of
verbs, 277.
Present tense, 1 1 2 . terminations
488
INDEX I.
of, 1 1 6. formation of, 124.
syntax of, 41 1.
Pronominal nouns, 79, 85, 347.
Pronouns, 79. personal, 80, 81.
demonstrative, 80, 82. relative,
80,83. interrogative, ib. id. ho-
norific, 80, 85. syntax of, 405.
Pronunciation, 4.
Prosody, principles of, 432.
Quantities of vowels, 6.
Quantity in prosody, 433.
Reduplicate prseterite, 123.
Reduplication, rules of, 125.
Root or Dhatu, 105.
Sakkari, a kind of metre, 441.
Sandhi, rules of, 8.
Sankriti, a kind of metre, 444.
Scheme of terminations for the
noun, 29. for the verb, 1 16.
Sonant consonants, 7.
Superlative degree, 76, 77.
Surd consonants, 7.
Syntax, 377. of substantives, 378.
of cases, 379. of the nomina-
tive, ib. of the accusative, 381.
of the instrumental, 386. of the
dative, 387. of the ablative,
391. of the genitive, 394. of
the locative, 399. of the voca-
tive, 402.
of adjectives, 403. of pro-
nouns, 405. of indeclinables,
407.
• of verbs, 410. of tenses,
ib. of the present, 411. of the
first prteterite, 413. of the se-
cond prseterite, 414. of the in-
definite past, ib. of the definite
future, 416. of the indefinite
future, ib. of the imperative,
418. of the potential. 420. of
the benedictive, 422. of the
conditional, ib. of the infinitive,
423. of derivative verbs, 424.
Syntax of participles, 426. of the
present part., 427. of the past
part., ib. of the indeclinable past
part., 430. of the future part.,
431. of participial nouns, 432.
Taddhita (nominal) derivatives,
328.
Tatpurusha compounds, 356. kinds
of, ib. examples of, 357. Karm-
madharaya, class of, 360. nu-
merals, or Dwigu class of, 362.
with particles and prepositions,
363.
Temporal augment, 124. rejected
after a negative, 4x5.
Tenses, conjugational, 111. pre-
sent, 1 12. prseterites, 1 13. fu-
tures, ib. inflectional termina-
tions of, 1 1 6.
Terminations, inflectional ; of de-
clension, 29. substitutes for,
after nouns, 3 1 . after pro-
nouns, 79.
of conjugation, 109,
1 1 6. modifications of, after the
second praeterite, 129. after the
third, 132.
Trishfubh, a kind of metre, 437.
Udgiti, a kind of metre, 446.
Upagiti, a kind of metre, 446.
Upasargas or prepositions, 98.
Ushnih, a kind of metre, 436.
Utkriti, a kind of metre, 444.
Vaitaliya, a kind of metre, 446.
Varna-vritta.a class of metres,435.
Vedas ; on the grammar of, 449.
Sandhi, 452. declension, 4 56.
conjugation, 461. verbal de-
rivatives, 474. nominal deriva-
tives, 479. compounds, 482.
INDEX I.
489
Verb, principles of inflexion of,
109. conjugations of, no.
moods and tenses of, 112.
voices of, 1 ijj. numbers and
persons of, 1 1 6, not taking
136. formation of, 141. conju-
gations of, 163 (see Conjuga-
tion) ; syntax of, 410.
Verbs, derivative, 145. causals,
146. desideratives, 149. fre-
quentatives, 151.
Verbs compounded with preposi-
tions, 27 6.
Verbal derivatives, 308.
Vikriti, a kind of metre, 444.
Visarga, two changes of, 23.
Voices; active, 113. passive, ib.
changes of, 276.
Vowels, 2. initial, ib. medial and
final, 3. quantities of, ib. substi-
tutes for, 7. conjunction of, 8.
Vriddhi substitutes for vowels, 7.
Vrihati, a kind of metre, 437.
INDEX II.
VERBS IN THE DIFFERENT CONJUGATIONS.
to mark, page 165.
to pervade, 166.
to go, 166.
to become manifest, 254.
to go, 166.
to disrespect, 270.
^ to eat, 205.
to breathe, 206.
to pain, 270.
to be fit, 167.
to pervade, 241.
^T5l to eat, 261.
to be, 207.
to throw, 229, 233.
to obtain, 241.
to sit, 208.
W? to speak, 215.
to go, 167, 209.
^ to remember, 208.
^ to study, 208.
to shine, 254.
to send, 270.
to wish, 246.
^ to go, 229.
^ to see, 1 67.
to praise, 209.
to go, 210.
to envy, 167.
^51 to rule, 210.
7 to sound, 168.
^ to go, 168.
to assemble, 233.
to wet, 254.
■grit to cover, 210.
■gr^ to reason, 168.
to go, to gain, 168, 223
to go, 258.
to be straight, 169.
3 *
490
INDEX OF VERBS.
apt to increase, 229, 233, 242.
■^r to go, 262.
33 to increase, 164.
’3173 to be dry, 169.
aw to wink, 271.
ara to speak, 271.
to call, 1 78.
33? to desire, 169.
cR75 to count, 271,
fara to cure, 169.
is to sound, to coo, 168, 216,246.
^3 to contract, 247.
•37 to be crooked, 246.
cS£ to contract, 271.
33 to be childish, 247.
to speak falsely, 275.
to suffer pain, 262.
aa to be angry, 233.
aaTT. to play as a child, 272.
art to embrace, 233.
af to astonish, 271.
a to sound, 248.
a to injure, 242.
^ to do, 259.
a? to be thick, 247.
33 to cut, 250.
to be able, 169, 182, 272.
aa to be feeble, 272.
aa to injure, 242.
a^T to become thin, 233.
aa to plough, draw furrows,
247.
a to throw, to scatter, 247.
«| to injure, 264.
aa to utter, to celebrate, 272.
% to sound, 172.
to sound, 265.
33 to call, 178.
aa to go, to walk, 170.
•3ft to buy, 261.
^a to be angry, 233.
a?T to ciy, 170.
aa to be sad, 238.
faEf to be moist, 178, 233.
fa^r t° be distressed, 262.
«^TT to speak, 211.
3RI to kill, to hurt, 258.
•gpr to be patient, 171, 238.
foy to waste, 17 1.
fgjar to kill, to hurt, 258.
to let loose, 233.
foya to throw, 229, 248.
T5T to sneeze, 216.
■eh* to send, 255.
■S3 to be hungry, 233.
ara to agitate, 182.
tga to be agitated, 233, 262.
to waste, to decay, 171.
to whet, to sharpen, 216.
733 to dig, 172.
to hurt, 250.
WT to speak, 213.
at? to count, 271.
33 to speak, 271.
aa to go, 172.
3T? to agitate, 173.
a*T to sound, 247.
a? to preserve, 247.
anr to advise, 271.
T* to protect, 173.
INDEX OF VERBS.
491
qq to blame, 174.
■3^ to play, to shine, 254.
qq to disturb, 233.
qfl to cut, 239.
JTjr to hide, 214.
sTET to eat, 2i r.
^ to sing, 172.
sTT to produce, 223.
qq to be greedy, 233.
qq to be born, 229.
Tjq to revile, 174.
qq to yawn, 176.
qq to take, 271.
qq to let loose, 233.
q to swallow, 248.
qpj to wake, 212.
to sound, 264.
fq to conquer, 164.
qq to serve, 198.
qtq to live, 17 6, 274.
to arrange, 262.
ijq to bind, 247.
Jjq to take, 263.
qq to yawn, 176.
to be weary, 172.
•jj to grow old, 230.
qq to eat, 174.
q to decay, 264.
qq to exchange, 182.
qq to know, 273.
Tjq to make effort, 247.
$TT to know7, 263.
qq to proclaim, 273.
qu to become old, 263.
to shine, 258.
T3T to have fever, 177.
TIT to smell, 174.
fqq to throw, 233, 247.
'qqrrq to shine, 2 1 1 .
ft to fly, 230.
qqj to speak, an.
qr* to go, 177.
qq to pound, 273.
Trrq to hurt, 182, 233.
'em to eat, 175.
Tim to bow7, 177.
'sn: to go, 175.
nr^T to perish, 230, 233.
to pound, 273.
Hrq to bind, 231.
fq to collect, 242, 273.
fiirq to cleanse, 212, 224.
fqq to think, 273.
to blame, 178.
q£ to cut, 247.
qft to lead, 177.
■qn to steal, 269.
te to praise, 216, 248.
qq to hurt, 248.
to praise, 248.
qg to make effort, 275.
q^T ‘ to support’ a family, 275.
vqq to drop, 176.
qq to stretch, 257.
to cut, 255.
qq to heat, 231.
to cut, 247.
qq to be distressed, 238.
to cut, 247.
qq to toss, 233.
492
INDEX OF VERBS.
fa»T to endure, 178.
■gT to make a riot, 247.
to inflict pain, 247.
ip to inflict pain, 245.
a*T to hurt, 182, 233.
ip to be pleased, 233.
ipr to eat grass, 258.
ip to be satisfied, 231, 233.
HR to satisfy, 249.
an to thirst, 233.
Tp to injure, 255.
W to cross, 178.
a?n to abandon, 179.
^7 to cut, 247.
to hasten, 177, 274.
to bite, 179.
^ to give, 179.
to have, to hold, 179.
to tame, 238.
to deceive, 242.
<*frnr to be poor, 212.
to toss, 233.
to burn, 180.
^ to give, 180, 224.
to cut, 213.
to play, 228.
f^ir to anoint, 214.
to decay, 232.
^hft to shine, 213.
to shine, 232, 274-
a to run, 168, 181.
to become bad, 233.
pr to milk, 214.
£xr to be proud, 231.
to see, 181.
^ to tear, 264, 274.
^ to protect, 181.
to cleanse, 172.
to cut, 239.
^ to assail, 216.
to shine, 182.
to fly, 213.
n to run, 182.
O
<*15 to injure, to oppress, 232,
234-
to hate, 214.
VT to have, to hold, 224.
to uphold, 234.
v to shake, 243, 263, 264.
v to shake, 243, 275.
v to hold, 186.
^ to drink, 183.
to gallop, 183.
urr to blow, 183.
h! to meditate, 172.
■JJ to be firm, 183.
ip to be firm, 247, 249.
inn to fall down, 182, 202.
inn to sound, 271.
«P to be happy, 178.
to dance, 232.
nn to cook, 183.
na to tie, 271.
qa to fall, 184.
Tp to go, 233, 271.
•q^r to tie, 271.
nT to drink, 184.
xfT to preserve, 213.
nTT to cross over, 274.
fan to be organized, 250.
INDEX OF VERBS.
493
fat? to grind, 236.
to drink, 234.
tfte to pain, 274.
tjt to contract, 271.
•g? to abandon, 247.
Tp to nourish, 233, 264.
q^to purify, 264.
q to delight, 243.
q to extend, 249.
qq to throw, 274.
q to fill, 264.
qq to serve, 198.
Tqrq to grow, 184.
TT3 to ask, 249.
qq to declare, 274.
qT to fill, 213.
tft to be pleased, 234.
qt to desire, 261.
Tft to please, 265, 275.
q to jump, 168.
qq to burn, 234.
qrr to eat, 213.
qR!I to approach, 185.
q^ to bear fruit, 185.
qq to despise, 185.
qsq to bind, 2 65.
q<q to live, 273.
qq to know, to understand,
185, 234.
■^to speak, 215.
to break, 255.
qq to shine, 224.
qT to shine, 213.
qrq to speak, 274.
qrq to shine, 274.
fq^ to break, 255.
Wt to fear, 225.
qq to eat, 2 36.
q to nourish, 186, 225.
qq to fall, 234.
q to threaten, 264.
qq to fall, 234, 235.
qq to fall, 182, 202.
qq to whirl, 186, 238.
q*q to fry, 249.
qrq to shine, 274.
to support, 264.
qt to cook, 263.
qq to advise, 275.
q»» to be mad, 235, 238.
qq to respect, 235.
qq to understand, 238.
q;q to churn, 187, 262.
qq to bind, 187.
qq to weigh, 234.
qrq to be immersed, 230.
qT to measure, 213, 223*
qTq to investigate, 187.
fq to throw, 243.
fq^ to be unctuous, 182, 233.
to injure, to kill, 232, 261,
263.
qtc5 to close, 274.
qq to liberate, 250.
qq to break, 234.
gq to be perplexed, to be silly,
234. 235.
^ to die, 251.
qq to seek, 272.
jjq to clean, 213.
494
INDEX OF VERBS.
^ to injure, 264.
5 to barter, 187.
to serve, 198.
XH to remember, x88.
^ to trample, 274.
xr*T to worship, x 88.
HIT to make effort, 188.
xiW to contract, 275.
xpr to restrain, 188.
XW to feed, 273.
TITT to take pains, 234.
*TT to go, 213.
XT to join, 216, 266.
xpr to engage in devotion, 236.
xpT to join, 255.
XTV to fight, 236.
wij to disturb, 234.
to make, 272.
X5T to colour, 189, 236.
X*I to hurt, 234, 236.
TXT to commence, 189.
XTT to sport, 190.
Xf to leave, 272.
XT to give, to take, 213.
XPJ to propitiate, 236.
XTV to accomplish, 244.
to purge, 255.
^ to injure, 234.
xl to roar, 265.
to sound, 216.
^ to shine, 182.
^7 to resist, 182.
^ to weep, 2x6.
^>1 to obstruct, 253.
to disturb, 234.
Xjxt to be angry, 234.
to grow, 190.
^ to sound, 172.
<5>T to gain, 190.
HX5T to be ashamed, 250.
<5T to give, to take, 213.
f&TT to smear, 250.
f?nr to lick, 217.
to embrace, 232, 2 65.
<5! to melt, 275.
<57 to resist, 182.
<57 to roll on the ground, 234.
<57 to resist, 182.
Vi
<5H to be lost, 234.
<5tr to cut, 250.
<5* to covet, 234, 237.
<£ to cut, 265.
<5fsR to see, 190.
<5fa to see, 190.
to speak, 217.
^7 to surround, 272.
^ to speak, 191.
xr to ask, 258.
xr to weave, 191.
^X to choose, 272.
^5T to subdue, 217.
to dwell, 191.
to fix, 234.
XT? to bear, 191.
TT to blow, 213.
to separate, 255.
fVrT to discriminate, 226.
fxr5T to fear, 256.
to know, 218.
to be, to exist, 237.
I
INDEX OF VERBS.
495
fag to find, 250.
fag to surround, 226.
■fair to convey, 234.
^ to go, 218.
gg to cast off, 234.
Y to choose, 244, 2 66.
to accept, 192.
gg to be, 182, 192.
gg to grow, 182.
^ to choose, 2 65.
g to weave, 192.
g^t to go, 219.
gg to surround, 275.
to deceive, 251.
gjg to pierce, 237.
fa to cover, 193.
to cut, 251.
to choose, 234, 265.
fa to support, 265.
^fa to praise, 194.
gig to be able, 237, 244.
517 to speak ill, 272.
gig to wither, to decay, 193.
gpi to be tranquil, 238.
gni to desire, to bless, 193.
giro to instruct, 219.
fgjg to distinguish, 256.
5ft to sleep, 219.
gftg to sprinkle, 194.
3Tg to sorrow, 194.
STg to be clean, 234.
to be beautiful, to shine,
182, 194.
3Tg to become dry, 234.
3TV to break wind, 182.
spi to laugh at, 275.
5T to injure, 265, 266.
gff to pare, 239.
gtpr to drop, 17 6.
gig to be weak, 272.
^Fg to loosen, 263.
"Vm to be weary, 238.
•vn to cook, 213.
far to serve, 194.
fat to cook, 265.
^ to hear, 195.
§ to melt, 172.
ffag to embrace, 234, 238.
gjg to breathe, 219.
ffa to increase, 193.
falTT to be white, 182.
W to embrace, 196.
ggr to give, 258.
gg to decay, to be sad, 196.
grg to go, 196.
gg to bear, 197, 238.
gpi to be accomplished, 237.
fa to bind, 26 6.
fag to sprinkle, 250.
fag to accomplish, 197.
fag to become perfect, 234, 238.
fag to sew, 239.
to bear children, 198, 216.
■g to extract juice, 240.
g to bring forth, 220, 239.
gg to hurt, 198.
gg to serve, 198.
to decay, 172.
fa to destroy, 239.
gg to stop, to hinder, 198.
496
INDEX OF VERBS.
F to praise, 220.
FT to stand, 198.
to spit, 199, 239.
HITT to bathe, 213.
fw? to be kind, 232, 234.
■®tt to distil, 216.
■got? to vomit, 232.
fm to smile, 199.
•e^T to sleep, 220.
to sweat, 182, 200, 234.
?rtv to be accomplished, 237.
to tranquillize, 276.
^ to go, 200, 226.
K3T to abandon, let go, 239, 25 1 .
to creep, 200.
^F^ to go, 201.
to stop, 267.
^ to leap, 266.
to stop, 267.
5-FT to sound, 272.
to stop, 267.
to stop, 267.
^ to cover, 244.
^ to spread, 275.
^ to cover, to spread, 265.
to envy, to emulate, 20T.
to touch, 274.
to touch, 252.
to envy, 272.
Ffinr to increase, 201.
to bud, to expand, 247.
FF: to throb, 247.
to remember, 201, 275.
to ooze, to drop, 182, 201.
FH to fall, 182, 202.
to trust in, 182.
H to drop, 202.
to sound, 272.
spT to kill, 221.
fiET to laugh, 202.
■^T to abandon, 227.
s[T to go, 226.
to injure, 256.
ir to sacrifice, 222.
^ to take, 186, 203.
<|TT to rejoice, 234.
fpff to sound, 203.
$ft to be ashamed, 227.
to sound, to be small,
203.
^ to be glad, 203.
to call, 203.
[ 497 J
CORRECTIONS.
Page Line
io 34 for fw? read fq*g
*3
21
*5
28
24
29
37
!7
37
21
52
5
34
2
.54
12
54
*3
55
8
60
16
60
26
6 1
31
64
2>3
64
24
71
1
74
1
%
*3
96
5
102
26
106
9
119
3°
*25
9
128
3°
15°
20
J5°
20
*56
4
160
34
167
15
171
J3
3TW4
qfcrnj
$r#
^qqnr
Class II.
\
wqr
Us?
^r^rtnfr &c.
36
103
^*TT
^ rtlC
unliteral
qf^ qf?
*3
O
<rfrf?r'irfw
^r<.^rafiT
tfTqfqqffl
19 3
3 s
qrtf
SP*
qr^:
qqrfq
qqrqq
\ X
qfurcq
^r^Tmfr
^TquiH
Class III.
qq
^ \
qm
Us?:
^Rfwr
rfi y I ^1 4t
35
104
^TTt
flr^iRt
uniliteral
q^t
q
v>
f^»fr.f?qf(T
f?<?fu*Tqfw
mqqw
fqmqfqqfw
194
498
CORRECTIONS.
Page
173
Line
II
/or 190./. read
191. fc. in.
182
9
first class, 1
first class, 2
185
23
frequentative
desiderative
186
J5
■35
*9 3
3
194
27 insert imp.
199
12
for wnffa? read
199
34
‘■HWHTW
^TOUTrT
209
33
212
*3
srrsnmr:
THn^TK
212
14
214
*3
/rfi?
214
214
17
216
3°
^tc(h
217
29
WN
222
24
W'
225
3
•arspreri
227
14
ftTFH
23°
10
srfeziw
231
11
235
1
HTW7T
WWff
237
33
fwrfw
fsrwfrr
243
9
Cv
244
22
Cs
^nflfe
Cv
248
21
^r#fiT
250
12
35
34
25 1
8
■3i
254
12
^TFT^
255
12
H7rft^f»T
fFTTft^ffT
293
294
24
29 5
7
*TC&
C\
3l7
3°
« \
TIZ
t\
318
26
nfbnsr
xrfcnrsr
CORRECTIONS.
499
Page
Line
•
325
20
ybr ^ read
*TH
t \
37°
29
■5T7^TfuT^T
V*
375
8
T?jT
v v>
388
25
■qr*rrc
426
18
■^ojfr
460
1
W-
5TT
Cv
St
> ‘ •
f •
• * .
i
• •
♦ • •
. •
• *
i *
• •
* *.• #'
tt
* •• *
•*%
•• i
.
. ■ *
* % «
\
*1
V^.‘
• 4
$
DATE DUE
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11